 |
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
| Datasheet File OCR Text: |
| To our customers, Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents On April 1st, 2010, NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology Corporation, and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both companies. Therefore, although the old company name remains in this document, it is a valid Renesas Electronics document. We appreciate your understanding. Renesas Electronics website: http://www.renesas.com April 1st, 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation Issued by: Renesas Electronics Corporation (http://www.renesas.com) Send any inquiries to http://www.renesas.com/inquiry. Notice 1. All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein, please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office. Also, please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website. Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document. No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted hereby under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others. You should not alter, modify, copy, or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product, whether in whole or in part. Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples. You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits, software, and information in the design of your equipment. Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software, or information. When exporting the products or technology described in this document, you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations. You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military, including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction. Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture, use, or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations. Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document, but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein. Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades: "Standard", "High Quality", and "Specific". The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product's quality grade, as indicated below. You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application. You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as "Specific" without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. Further, you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as "Specific" or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is "Standard" unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books, etc. Computers; office equipment; communications equipment; test and measurement equipment; audio and visual equipment; home electronic appliances; machine tools; personal electronic equipment; and industrial robots. "High Quality": Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.); traffic control systems; anti-disaster systems; anticrime systems; safety equipment; and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support. "Specific": Aircraft; aerospace equipment; submersible repeaters; nuclear reactor control systems; medical equipment or systems for life support (e.g. artificial life support devices or systems), surgical implantations, or healthcare intervention (e.g. excision, etc.), and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life. You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics, especially with respect to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges. Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Further, Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design. Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire control and malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures. Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product. Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances, including without limitation, the EU RoHS Directive. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electronics products, or if you have any other inquiries. "Standard": 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. (Note 1) "Renesas Electronics" as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majorityowned subsidiaries. (Note 2) "Renesas Electronics product(s)" means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics. H8S/2368 Group 16 Hardware Manual Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer H8S Family/H8S/2300 Series H8S/2368F H8S/2367F H8S/2365 H8S/2364F H8S/2363 H8S/2362F H8S/2361F H8S/2360F HD64F2368 HD64F2367 HD6432365 HD64F2364 HD6412363 HD64F2362 HD64F2361 HD64F2360 User's Manual The revision list can be viewed directly by clicking the title page. The revision list summarizes the locations of revisions and additions. Details should always be checked by referring to the relevant text. Rev.6.00 2009.03 Notes regarding these materials 1. This document is provided for reference purposes only so that Renesas customers may select the appropriate Renesas products for their use. Renesas neither makes warranties or representations with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the information contained in this document nor grants any license to any intellectual property rights or any other rights of Renesas or any third party with respect to the information in this document. 2. Renesas shall have no liability for damages or infringement of any intellectual property or other rights arising out of the use of any information in this document, including, but not limited to, product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples. 3. You should not use the products or the technology described in this document for the purpose of military applications such as the development of weapons of mass destruction or for the purpose of any other military use. When exporting the products or technology described herein, you should follow the applicable export control laws and regulations, and procedures required by such laws and regulations. 4. All information included in this document such as product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples, is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas products listed in this document, please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas sales office. Also, please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas such as that disclosed through our website. (http://www.renesas.com ) 5. Renesas has used reasonable care in compiling the information included in this document, but Renesas assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred as a result of errors or omissions in the information included in this document. 6. When using or otherwise relying on the information in this document, you should evaluate the information in light of the total system before deciding about the applicability of such information to the intended application. Renesas makes no representations, warranties or guaranties regarding the suitability of its products for any particular application and specifically disclaims any liability arising out of the application and use of the information in this document or Renesas products. 7. With the exception of products specified by Renesas as suitable for automobile applications, Renesas products are not designed, manufactured or tested for applications or otherwise in systems the failure or malfunction of which may cause a direct threat to human life or create a risk of human injury or which require especially high quality and reliability such as safety systems, or equipment or systems for transportation and traffic, healthcare, combustion control, aerospace and aeronautics, nuclear power, or undersea communication transmission. If you are considering the use of our products for such purposes, please contact a Renesas sales office beforehand. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth above. 8. Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, you should not use Renesas products for the purposes listed below: (1) artificial life support devices or systems (2) surgical implantations (3) healthcare intervention (e.g., excision, administration of medication, etc.) (4) any other purposes that pose a direct threat to human life Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth in the above and purchasers who elect to use Renesas products in any of the foregoing applications shall indemnify and hold harmless Renesas Technology Corp., its affiliated companies and their officers, directors, and employees against any and all damages arising out of such applications. 9. You should use the products described herein within the range specified by Renesas, especially with respect to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas products beyond such specified ranges. 10. Although Renesas endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, IC products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire control and malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other applicable measures. Among others, since the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you. 11. In case Renesas products listed in this document are detached from the products to which the Renesas products are attached or affixed, the risk of accident such as swallowing by infants and small children is very high. You should implement safety measures so that Renesas products may not be easily detached from your products. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of such detachment. 12. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written approval from Renesas. 13. Please contact a Renesas sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document, Renesas semiconductor products, or if you have any other inquiries. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page ii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 General Precautions in the Handling of MPU/MCU Products The following usage notes are applicable to all MPU/MCU products from Renesas. For detailed usage notes on the products covered by this manual, refer to the relevant sections of the manual. If the descriptions under General Precautions in the Handling of MPU/MCU Products and in the body of the manual differ from each other, the description in the body of the manual takes precedence. 1. Handling of Unused Pins Handle unused pins in accord with the directions given under Handling of Unused Pins in the manual. The input pins of CMOS products are generally in the high-impedance state. In operation with an unused pin in the open-circuit state, extra electromagnetic noise is induced in the vicinity of LSI, an associated shoot-through current flows internally, and malfunctions may occur due to the false recognition of the pin state as an input signal. Unused pins should be handled as described under Handling of Unused Pins in the manual. 2. Processing at Power-on The state of the product is undefined at the moment when power is supplied. The states of internal circuits in the LSI are indeterminate and the states of register settings and pins are undefined at the moment when power is supplied. In a finished product where the reset signal is applied to the external reset pin, the states of pins are not guaranteed from the moment when power is supplied until the reset process is completed. In a similar way, the states of pins in a product that is reset by an on-chip power-on reset function are not guaranteed from the moment when power is supplied until the power reaches the level at which resetting has been specified. 3. Prohibition of Access to Reserved Addresses Access to reserved addresses is prohibited. The reserved addresses are provided for the possible future expansion of functions. Do not access these addresses; the correct operation of LSI is not guaranteed if they are accessed. 4. Clock Signals After applying a reset, only release the reset line after the operating clock signal has become stable. When switching the clock signal during program execution, wait until the target clock signal has stabilized. When the clock signal is generated with an external resonator (or from an external oscillator) during a reset, ensure that the reset line is only released after full stabilization of the clock signal. Moreover, when switching to a clock signal produced with an external resonator (or by an external oscillator) while program execution is in progress, wait until the target clock signal is stable. 5. Differences between Products Before changing from one product to another, i.e. to one with a different type number, confirm that the change will not lead to problems. The characteristics of MPU/MCU in the same group but having different type numbers may differ because of the differences in internal memory capacity and layout pattern. When changing to products of different type numbers, implement a system-evaluation test for each of the products. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page iii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Configuration of This Manual This manual comprises the following items: General Precautions in the Handling of MPU/MCU Products Configuration of This Manual Preface Main Revisions for This Edition The list of revisions is a summary of points that have been revised or added to earlier versions. This does not include all of the revised contents. For details, see the actual locations in this manual. 5. Contents 6. Overview 7. Description of Functional Modules * CPU and System-Control Modules * On-Chip Peripheral Modules The configuration of the functional description of each module differs according to the module. However, the generic style includes the following items: i) Feature ii) Input/Output Pin iii) Register Description iv) Operation v) Usage Note When designing an application system that includes this LSI, take notes into account. Each section includes notes in relation to the descriptions given, and usage notes are given, as required, as the final part of each section. 8. List of Registers 9. Electrical Characteristics 10. Appendix 11. Index 1. 2. 3. 4. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page iv of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Preface The H8S/2368 Group are microcomputers (MCU) made up of the H8S/2600 CPU employing Renesas Technology's original architecture as their cores, and the peripheral functions required to configure a system. The H8S/2600 CPU has an internal 32-bit configuration, sixteen 16-bit general registers, and a simple and optimized instruction set for high-speed operation. The H8S/2600 CPU can handle a 16-Mbyte linear address space. This LSI is equipped with direct memory access controller (DMAC) and data transfer controller (DTC) bus masters, ROM and RAM, a 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU), a programmable pulse generator (PPG), 8-bit timers (TMR), a watchdog timer (WDT), serial communication interfaces (SCI and IrDA), a 10-bit A/D converter, an 8-bit D/A converter, and I/O ports as on-chip peripheral modules required for system configuration. I2C bus interface 2 (IIC2) can also be included as an optional interface. A high-functionality bus controller is also provided, enabling fast and easy connection of DRAM and other kinds of memory. A single-power flash memory (F-ZTATTM) version is available for this LSI's ROM. This provides flexibility as it can be reprogrammed in no time to cope with all situations from the early stages of mass production to full-scale mass production. This is particularly applicable to application devices with specifications that will most probably change. Note: F-ZTAT is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp. Target Users: This manual was written for users who will be using the H8S/2368 Group in the design of application systems. Target users are expected to understand the fundamentals of electrical circuits, logical circuits, and microcomputers. Objective: This manual was written to explain the hardware functions and electrical characteristics of the H8S/2368 Group to the target users. Refer to the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual for a detailed description of the instruction set. Notes on reading this manual: * In order to understand the overall functions of the chip Read the manual according to the contents. This manual can be roughly categorized into parts on the CPU, system control functions, peripheral functions and electrical characteristics. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page v of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 * In order to understand the details of the CPU's functions Read the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual. For the execution state of each instruction in this LSI, see appendix D, Bus State during Execution of Instructions. * In order to understand the details of a register when its name is known Read the index that is the final part of the manual to find the page number of the entry on the register. The addresses, bits, and initial values of the registers are summarized in section 24, List of Registers. Examples: Register name: The following notation is used for cases when the same or a similar function, e.g. 16-bit timer pulse unit or serial communication, is implemented on more than one channel: XXX_N (XXX is the register name and N is the channel number) Bit order: The MSB is on the left and the LSB is on the right. Number notation: Binary is B'xxxx, hexadecimal is H'xxxx, decimal is xxxx Signal notation: An overbar is added to a low-active signal: xxxx Related Manuals: The latest versions of all related manuals are available from our web site. Please ensure you have the latest versions of all documents you require. http://www.renesas.com/ H8S/2368 Group Manuals: Document Title H8S/2368 Group Hardware Manual H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual Document No. This manual REJ09B0139 User's Manuals for Development Tools: Document Title H8S, H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler, Assembler, Optimizing Linkage Editor Compiler Package Ver.6.01 User's Manual H8S, H8/300 Series Simulator/Debugger User's Manual H8S, H8/300 Series High-performance Embedded Workshop, V.3 Tutorial High-performance Embedded Workshop V.4.04 User's Manual Document No. REJ10B0161 REJ10B0211 REJ10B0024 REJ10J1737 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page vi of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Main Revisions for This Edition Item 1.3.3 Pin Functions Table 1.2 Pin Functions Type Symbol 2, Power Supply Vcc Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 14 Table amended Pin No. TFP-120 2 QFP-128*1 I/O Input Function Power supply pins. VCC pins should be connected to the system power supply. Ground pins. VSS pins should be connected to the system power supply (0 V). Power supply pin for the on-chip PLL oscillator. Ground pin for the on-chip PLL oscillator. Connect to VSS via a 0.1 F (recommended value) capacitor (placed close to the pin). 33* , 60, 6,39,66, 83, 84 91,92 8, 17, 22, 58, 80, 87 3,4,12,21, 26,35,36, 64,68,88, 95,99,100 84 86 3 Vss Input PLLVCC PLLVSS VCL 76 78 33* Input Input Input 20 Note 1 amended and Notes 2 and 3 added Notes: 1. Not supported by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. 2. VCL on the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. Do not connect to VCL. 3. H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group only. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page vii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) Figure amended ROM: 512 kbytes RAM: 32 kbytes Mode 4 (Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 H'000000 ROM: 512 kbytes RAM: 32 kbytes Mode 5 (User boot mode) ROM: 512 kbytes RAM: 32 kbytes Mode 7 (Single-chip activation expanded mode, with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 3.4 Memory Map in Each 64 Operating Mode Figure 3.2 H8S/2368F Memory Map (2) On-chip ROM On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'080000 H'080000 H'080000 External address space External address space/ reserved area*2*4 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FF4000 On-chip RAM/ external address space*1 H'FFC000 Reserved area*4 H'FFD000 External address space H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers External address space H'FF4000 On-chip RAM *5 H'FFC000 Reserved area*4 H'FFD000 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FF4000 On-chip RAM/ external address space *3 H'FFC000 Reserved area*4 H'FFD000 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FFFC00 Internal I/O registers reserved area*2*4 H'FFFC00 Internal I/O registers reserved area*2*4 H'FFFF00 External address space/ H'FFFF20 Internal I/O registers H'FFFFFF H'FFFF00 External address space/ H'FFFF20 Internal I/O registers H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers Notes: 1. This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. When EXPE = 1, external address space; when EXPE = 0, reserved area. 3. When EXPE = 1, external address space with RAME = 0, on-chip RAM with RAME = 1. When EXPE = 0, on-chip RAM. 4. A reserved area should not be accessed. 5. The on-chip RAM is used to program the flash memory. The RAME bit in SYSCR should not be cleared to 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page viii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) Figure amended RAM: 32 kbytes Modes 1 and 2 (Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) H'000000 H'000000 ROM: 384 kbytes RAM: 32 kbytes Mode 3 (Boot mode) 3.4 Memory Map in Each 67 Operating Mode Figure 3.5 H8S/2364F Memory Map (1) On-chip ROM H'060000 Reserved area*4 External address space H'080000 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FF4000 On-chip RAM/ external address space*1 H'FFC000 H'FFD000 H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Reserved area*4 External address space H'FF4000 On-chip RAM*3 H'FFC000 H'FFD000 H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Reserved area*4 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 Internal I/O registers External address space Internal I/O registers External address space/ reserved area*2*4 Internal I/O registers Internal I/O registers Notes: 1. This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. When EXPE = 1, external address space; when EXPE = 0, reserved area. 3. On-chip RAM is used for flash memory programming. The RAME bit in SYSCR should not be cleared to 0. 4. A reserved area should not be accessed. 7.3.7 DMA Terminal Control Register (DMATCR) 8.8.5 Chain Transfer 240 Description amended In short address mode, the TEND pin is only available for channel B. 321 Description amended When chain transfer is used, clearing of the activation source or DTCER is performed when the last of the chain of data transfers is executed. SCI and A/D converter interrupt/activation sources, on the other hand, are cleared when the DTC reads or writes to the prescribed register. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page ix of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Item 9.8.8 Pin Functions Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 370 Table amended * PA7/A23/CS7/IRQ7 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 PA7 PA7 PA7 CS7 PA7 Address PA7 PA7 PA7 PA7 PA7 CS7 PA7 Address input output input output output output input output input output input output input output IRQ7 interrupt input* PA7DDR Pin function 371 * PA6/A22/IRQ6, PA5/A21/IRQ5 0 PAn input 1 PAn output 0 PAn input 1 Address output 0 PAn input 1 PAn output 0 PAn input 1 PAn output 0 PAn input 1 Address output PAnDDR Pin function IRQn interrupt input* 372 * PA3/A19, PA2/A18, PA1/A17, PA0/A16 PAn input PAn output PAn input Address output PAn input PAn output PAn input PAn output PAn input Address output Pin function Address output 9.9.5 Pin Functions 375 Table amended * PB7/A15, PB6/A14, PB5/A13, PB4/A12, PB3/A11, PB2/A10, PB1/A9, PB0/A8 -- Address output 0 PBn input 1 Address output 0 1 0 1 Address output PBn input PBn output PBn input PBnDDR Pin function 9.10.5 Pin Functions 379 Table amended * PC7/A7, PC6/A6, PC5/A5, PC4/A4, PC3/A3, PC2/A2, PC1/A1, PC0/A0 -- Address output 0 PCn input 1 Address output 0 1 0 1 Address output PCn input PCn output PCn input PCnDDR Pin function 9.11.5 Pin Functions 383 Table amended * PD7/D15, PD6/D14, PD5/D13, PD4/D12, PD3/D11, PD2/D10, PD1/D9, PD0/D8 -- Data I/O 0 PDn input 1 PDn output -- Data I/O PDnDDR Pin function 9.12.5 Pin Functions 387 Table amended * PE7/D7, PE6/D6, PE5/D5, PE4/D4, PE3/D3, PE2/D2, PE1/D1, PE0/D0 0 1 PEn output -- 0 1 PEn output 0 PEn input 1 PEn output -- Data I/O Data I/O PEn input PEnDDR Pin function PEn input Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page x of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Item 9.13.4 Pin Functions Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 391 Table amended * 393 PF7/ (Before) PFDDR (After) PF7DDR Table amended * PF1/CS5/UCAS -- UCAS output 0 1 0 1 0 1 -- UCAS output 0 PF1 input 1 CS5 output 0 PF1 input 1 PF1 output PF1 CS5 PF1 input output input PF1 PF1 PF1 output input output PF1DDR Pin function 14.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 0) Smart Card Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 1) 558 Note amended Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Alternately, use the bit clear instruction to clear the flag. 562 Note amended Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Alternately, use the bit clear instruction to clear the flag. 2. etu: Elementary Time Unit: (time for transfer of 1 bit) Table amended Operating Frequency (MHz) 8 Bit Rate (bit/s) 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 0 0 0 -- N 25 12 7 -- Error (%) 0.16 0.16 0.00 -- n 0 0 0 0 9.8304 N 31 15 9 7 Error (%) 0.00 0.00 -1.70 0.00 n 0 0 0 0 N 32 15 9 7 10 Error (%) -1.36 -1.73 0.00 -1.73 n 0 0 0 0 N 38 19 11 9 12 Error (%) 0.16 -2.34 0.00 -2.34 14.3.9 Bit Rate Register 565 (BRR) Table 14.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) Operating Frequency (MHz) 12.288 Bit Rate (bit/s) 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 0 0 0 0 N 39 19 11 9 Error (%) 0.00 0.00 2.40 0.00 n 0 0 0 -- N 45 22 13 -- 14 Error (%) -0.93 -0.93 0.00 -- n 0 0 0 0 14.7456 N 47 23 14 11 Error (%) 0.00 0.00 -1.70 0.00 n 0 0 0 0 N 51 25 15 12 16 Error (%) 0.16 0.16 0.00 0.16 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xi of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) Table amended Operating Frequency (MHz) 17.2032 Bit Rate (bit/s) 19200 31250 38400 n 0 0 0 N 27 16 13 Error (%) 0.00 1.20 0.00 18 n 0 0 0 N 28 17 14 Error (%) 1.02 0.00 -2.34 n 0 0 0 19.6608 N 31 19 15 Error (%) 0.00 -1.70 0.00 n 0 0 0 N 32 19 15 20 Error (%) -1.36 0.00 1.73 14.3.9 Bit Rate Register 566 (BRR) Table 14.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) Operating Frequency (MHz) 25 Bit Rate (bit/s) 19200 31250 38400 n 0 0 0 N 40 24 19 30 Error (%) -0.76 0.00 1.73 n 0 0 0 N 48 29 23 Error (%) -0.35 0 1.73 n 0 0 0 N 53 32 26 33 Error (%) -0.54 0 -0.54 n 0 0 0 34* N 54 33 27 Error (%) 0.62 0.00 -1.18 14.4.4 SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode) 580 Description amended ... Do not write to SMR, SCMR, IrCR, or SEMR while the SCI is operating. This also applies to writing the same data as the current register contents. ... 14.6.2 SCI Initialization (Clocked Synchronous Mode) 596 Description amended ... Do not write to SMR, SCMR, IrCR, or SEMR while the SCI is operating. This also applies to writing the same data as the current register contents. ... Description amended The I C bus interface conforms to and provides a subset of the NXP Semiconductors I2C bus (inter-IC bus) interface (Rev.03) standard and fast mode functions. The register configuration that controls the I2C bus differs partly from the NXP Semiconductors configuration, however. 2 Section 15 I2C Bus 629 Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Item 15.3.1 I C Bus Control Register A (ICCRA) Table 15.2 Transfer Rate 15.3.5 I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR) 2 Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 634 Note amended Notes: 2. Does not conform to the I2C bus interface specification (standard mode: max. 100 kHz, fast mode: max. 400 kHz). 639 Table amended Bit 7 Bit Name TDRE Initial Value R/W 0 R/W Description Transmit Data Register Empty [Setting conditions] * * When data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS and ICDRT becomes empty When TRS is set * When a transition from receive mode to transmit mode is made in slave mode When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 When data is written to ICDRT [Clearing conditions] * * 15.4.5 Slave Receive Operation Figure 15.12 Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing 2 652 Figure amended SCL (master output) SDA (master output) SCL (slave output) SDA (slave output) 9 1 Bit 7 2 Bit 6 3 Bit 5 4 Bit 4 5 Bit 3 6 Bit 2 7 Bit 1 8 Bit 0 9 A A RDRF ICDRS Data 1 Data 2 ICDRR User processing Data 1 [7] Set ACKBT [8] Read ICDRR, and clear RDRF. [10] Read ICDRR, and clear RDRF. 15.4.7 Example of Use Figure 15.14 Sample Flowchart for Master Transmit Mode 654 Figure amended Start Initialize Read BBSY in ICCRB No [1] BBSY=0 ? Yes Set MST = 1 and TRS = 1 in ICCRA. Write BBSY = 1 and SCP = 0. [2] [3] [4] [3] Select master transmit mode.* Start condition issuance.* Select transmit data for the first byte (slave address + R/W), and clear TDRE to 0. [1] Test the status of the SCL and SDA lines.* [2] Note: * Ensure that no interrupts occur between when BBSY is cleared to 0 and start condition [3]. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xiii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Item 15.4.7 Example of Use Figure 15.15 Sample Flowchart for Master Receive Mode Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 655 Figure amended Read ICDRR Read RDRF in ICSR No RDRF=1 ? Yes Clear STOP of ICSR Write BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 Read STOP of ICSR No [12] [9] [8] [15] Clear ACKBT. [16] Set slave receive mode. [10] [11] STOP=1 ? Yes Read ICDRR [13] [14] Set RCVD = 0 (ICCRA) Clear ACKBT of ICIER [15] Set MST = 0 (ICCRA) End [16] Note: * Prevent any interrupts while steps [1] to [3] are executed. Additional information: When receiving one-byte data, execute step [1], and then step [7] omitting steps [2] to [6]. In step [8], dummy read ICDRR. Figure 15.17 Sample Flowchart for Slave Receive Mode 657 Figure amended Slave receive mode Clear AAS in ICSR Set ACKBT=0 in ICIER [1] [2] TDRE=0 ? Yes No RDRF= 1? No Slave transmit mode Yes Dummy read ICDRR [3] Read RDRF in ICSR No [4] RDRF=1 ? Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xiv of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Item 15.7 Usage Notes 3. I2C bus interface 2 (IIC2) master receive mode 4. Limitations on transfer rate setting values when using I2C bus interface 2 (IIC2) in multi-master mode 5. Limitations on use of bit manipulation instructions to set MST and TRS when using I2C bus interface 2 (IIC2) in multi-master mode 16.1 Features Figure 16.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 660 Description added 662 Figure amended AVCC Vref AVSS 10-bit D/A 20.3.2 Programming/ Erasing Interface Parameter 735 Description amended ... The return value of the processing result is written in ER0, ER1. Since the stack area is used for storing the registers except for ER0, ER1, the stack area must be saved at the processing start. Description amended ... Normally the vector table data is read from the address spaces from H'00001C to H'00001F. Description amended The notes on download are as follows. In the download processing, the values of CPU general registers other than ER0 and ER1 are retained. 20.3.3 Flash Vector 747 Address Control Register (FVACR) 20.4.2 User Program Mode (2) Programming Procedure in User Program Mode 757 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xv of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) Description amended (b) Device Selection ... * 801 Size (one byte): Amount of device-code data This is fixed at 4 788 20.8 Serial Communication Interface Specification for Boot Mode (4) Inquiry and Selection States Figure 20.21 Programming Sequence Description deleted (Before) Programming selection (H'42, H'43, H'44) (After) Programming selection (H'42, H'43) (9) Programming/Erasing 802 State * Programming (b) 128-byte programming 24.2 Register Bits 855 Description amended * Programming Address (four bytes): Start address for programming Multiple of the size specified in response to the programming unit inquiry (i.e. H'00, H'01, H'00, H'00 : H'00010000) Table amended Register Name DRACCR Bit 7 DRMI Bit 6 -- Bit 5 TPC1 Bit 4 TPC0 Bit 3 -- 25.1.2 DC Characteristics Table 25.2 DC Characteristics (1) 874 Table amended Item 2 Symbol - Min Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC +0.3 VCC +0.3 VCC +0.3 VCC +0.3 Test Unit Conditions V V V V V V V Schmitt Ports 1, 2, and 4* , VT VCC x 0.2 + trigger input P50 to P53*2, VT -- 2 PA4 to PA7* voltage VT+ - VT- VCC x 0.07 Input high voltage STBY, MD2 to MD0 RES, NMI, EMLE EXTAL Port 3, P50 to P53*3, port 8, ports A to G*3 Ports 4 and 9 Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD2 to MD0, EMLE NMI, EXTAL Ports 3 to 5*3, 8, 9, A to G*3 Output high All output pins voltage Output low voltage All output pins 4 P32 to P35* VOH VOL VIL VIH VCC x 0.9 VCC x 0.9 VCC x 0.7 2.2V 2.2V -0.3 -- -- VCC +0.3 VCC x 0.1 V V -0.3 -0.3 VCC -0.5 VCC -1.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- VCC x 0.2 VCC x 0.2 -- -- 0.4 0.5 V V V V V V IOH = -200 A IOH = -1 mA IOL = 1.6 mA IOL = 8.0 mA Note added Notes: Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xvi of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 4. When used as SCL0 to SCL1, SDA0 to SDA1. Item 25.1.2 DC Characteristics Table 25.4 Permissible Output Currents 25.2.2 DC Characteristics Table 25.14 DC Characteristics (1) Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 876 Table amended Item Permissible output low current (per pin) SCL0, 1, SDA0, 1 Output pins other than the above Symbol IOL Min Typ Max 8.0 2.0 Unit mA 912 Table amended Item Symbol Min Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC +0.3 VCC +0.3 VCC +0.3 VCC +0.3 Unit V V V V V V V Test Conditions Schmitt Ports 1, 2, and 4*2, VT- VCC x 0.2 trigger input P50 to P53*2, + VT -- 2 PA4 to PA7* voltage VT+ - VT- VCC x 0.07 Input high voltage STBY, MD2 to MD0 RES, NMI, EMLE EXTAL Port 3, P50 to P53*3, port 8, ports A to G*3 Ports 4 and 9 Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD2 to MD0, EMLE NMI, EXTAL Ports 3 to 5*3, 8, 9, A to G*3 Output high All output pins voltage VOH VIL VIH VCC x 0.9 VCC x 0.9 VCC x 0.7 VCC x 0.7 AVCC x 0.7 -- -0.3 -- AVCC +0.3 VCC x 0.1 V V -0.3 -0.3 VCC -0.5 VCC -1.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- VCC x 0.2 VCC x 0.2 -- -- 0.4 0.5 V V V V V V IOH = -200 A IOH = -1 mA IOL = 1.6 mA IOL = 8.0 mA Output low voltage All output pins P32 to P35* 4 VOL -- -- Note added Notes: Table 25.16 Permissible 914 Output Currents Item Permissible output low current (per pin) SCL0 to SCL1, SDA0 to SDA1 Output pins other than the above 4. When used as SCL0 to SCL1, SDA0 to SDA1. Symbol IOL Min -- -- Typ -- -- Max 8.0 2.0 Unit mA Table amended Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xvii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Item 25.3.2 DC Characteristics Table 25.27 DC Characteristics Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 927 Table amended Item Schmitt Port 1, 2, 4*2, P50 trigger input to P53*2, PA4 to 2 voltage PA7* Symbol VT- VT+ VT+ - VT- VIH Input high voltage STBY, MD2 to MD0 RES, NMI, FWE EXTAL Port 3, 3 P50 to P53* , port 3 3 8* , ports A to G* Port 4, Port 9 Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD2 to MD0, EMLE NMI, EXTAL 3 Ports 3 to 5* , port 8, port 9, *3 ports A to G VIL Output high All output pins voltage Output low voltage All output pins 4 P32 to P35* VOH VOL Note amended Notes: Table 25.28 DC Characteristics 928 2. When used as IRQ0 to IRQ7. 3. When used as other than IRQ0 to IRQ7 Table amended Item Input leakage current RES STBY, NMI, MD2 to MD0 Port 4, Port 9 Three-state leakage current (off state) Ports 1 to 3, P50 to P53, port 8, ports A to G Table 25.29 Permissible 929 Output Currents Table amended Item Permissible output low current (per pin) SCL0 to SCL1, SDA0 to SDA1 Output pins other than the above Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xviii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Item 25.3.3 AC Characteristics Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 930 Description deleted (Before) The clock, control signal, bus, DMAC, (After) The clock, control signal, bus, DMAC, and ... 935 Table amended Item WAIT hold time Symbol tWTH Min. 5 and ... 25.3.3 AC Characteristics Table 25.33 Bus Timing (2) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xix of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xx of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Contents Section 1 Overview............................................................................................................. 1.1 1.2 1.3 Features ............................................................................................................................. Block Diagram .................................................................................................................. Pin Description.................................................................................................................. 1.3.1 Pin Arrangement .................................................................................................. 1.3.2 Pin Arrangement in Each Operating Mode .......................................................... 1.3.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 1 1 3 5 5 8 14 Section 2 CPU ...................................................................................................................... 21 2.1 Features ............................................................................................................................. 2.1.1 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU .................................. 2.1.2 Differences from H8/300 CPU............................................................................. 2.1.3 Differences from H8/300H CPU.......................................................................... CPU Operating Modes ...................................................................................................... 2.2.1 Normal Mode ....................................................................................................... 2.2.2 Advanced Mode ................................................................................................... Address Space ................................................................................................................... Register Configuration ...................................................................................................... 2.4.1 General Registers ................................................................................................. 2.4.2 Program Counter (PC) ......................................................................................... 2.4.3 Extended Control Register (EXR) ....................................................................... 2.4.4 Condition-Code Register (CCR) .......................................................................... 2.4.5 Initial Register Values.......................................................................................... Data Formats ..................................................................................................................... 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats ............................................................................ 2.5.2 Memory Data Formats ......................................................................................... Instruction Set ................................................................................................................... 2.6.1 Table of Instructions Classified by Function ....................................................... 2.6.2 Basic Instruction Formats .................................................................................... Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation ..................................................... 2.7.1 Register Direct--Rn............................................................................................. 2.7.2 Register Indirect--@ERn .................................................................................... 2.7.3 Register Indirect with Displacement--@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn).............. 2.7.4 Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement--@ERn+ or @-ERn .. 2.7.5 Absolute Address--@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32.................................... 2.7.6 Immediate--#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32 ................................................................. 2.7.7 Program-Counter Relative--@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC).................................... 21 22 23 23 24 24 26 28 29 30 31 31 32 34 34 34 36 37 38 47 49 49 49 50 50 50 51 51 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxi of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 2.8 2.9 2.7.8 Memory Indirect--@@aa:8 ................................................................................ 2.7.9 Effective Address Calculation ............................................................................. Processing States............................................................................................................... Usage Note........................................................................................................................ 2.9.1 Note on Bit Manipulation Instructions................................................................. 51 52 55 56 56 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes .................................................................................. 57 3.1 3.2 Operating Mode Selection ................................................................................................ Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) ......................................................................... 3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) ...................................................................... Operating Mode Descriptions ........................................................................................... 3.3.1 Mode 1 ................................................................................................................. 3.3.2 Mode 2 ................................................................................................................. 3.3.3 Mode 3 ................................................................................................................. 3.3.4 Mode 4 ................................................................................................................. 3.3.5 Mode 5 ................................................................................................................. 3.3.6 Mode 7 ................................................................................................................. 3.3.7 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... Memory Map in Each Operating Mode ............................................................................ 57 58 58 58 60 60 60 60 60 61 61 62 63 3.3 3.4 Section 4 Exception Handling ......................................................................................... 79 4.1 4.2 4.3 Exception Handling Types and Priority ............................................................................ Exception Sources and Exception Vector Table ............................................................... Reset.................................................................................................................................. 4.3.1 Reset Exception Handling.................................................................................... 4.3.2 Interrupts after Reset............................................................................................ 4.3.3 On-Chip Peripheral Functions after Reset Release .............................................. Traces................................................................................................................................ Interrupts........................................................................................................................... Trap Instruction................................................................................................................. Stack Status after Exception Handling.............................................................................. Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 79 79 81 81 83 83 84 84 85 86 87 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 Section 5 Interrupt Controller .......................................................................................... 89 5.1 5.2 5.3 Features............................................................................................................................. Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 5.3.1 Interrupt Control Register (INTCR) .................................................................... 5.3.2 Interrupt Priority Registers A to K (IPRA to IPRK)............................................ 89 91 91 92 93 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.3.3 IRQ Enable Register (IER) .................................................................................. 5.3.4 IRQ Sense Control Register L (ISCRL)............................................................... 5.3.5 IRQ Status Register (ISR).................................................................................... 5.3.6 IRQ Pin Select Register (ITSR) ........................................................................... 5.3.7 Software Standby Release IRQ Enable Register (SSIER) ................................... Interrupt Sources ............................................................................................................... 5.4.1 External Interrupts ............................................................................................... 5.4.2 Internal Interrupts................................................................................................. Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table...................................................................... Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation ............................................................. 5.6.1 Interrupt Control Mode 0 ..................................................................................... 5.6.2 Interrupt Control Mode 2 ..................................................................................... 5.6.3 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence .............................................................. 5.6.4 Interrupt Response Times .................................................................................... 5.6.5 DTC and DMAC Activation by Interrupt ............................................................ Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 5.7.1 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling..................................... 5.7.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts ...................................................................... 5.7.3 Times when Interrupts Are Disabled ................................................................... 5.7.4 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction.......................................... 5.7.5 Change of IRQ Pin Select Register (ITSR) Setting ............................................. 5.7.6 Note on IRQ Status Register (ISR) ...................................................................... 95 96 99 100 101 101 101 102 103 108 108 110 112 114 115 116 116 117 117 117 117 118 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) ...................................................................................... 119 6.1 6.2 6.3 Features ............................................................................................................................. Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 6.3.1 Bus Width Control Register (ABWCR)............................................................... 6.3.2 Access State Control Register (ASTCR) ............................................................. 6.3.3 Wait Control Registers AH, AL, BH, and BL (WTCRAH, WTCRAL, WTCRBH, and WTCRBL).................................................................................. 6.3.4 Read Strobe Timing Control Register (RDNCR)................................................. 6.3.5 CS Assertion Period Control Registers H, L (CSACRH, CSACRL)................... 6.3.6 Area 0 Burst ROM Interface Control Register (BROMCRH) Area 1 Burst ROM Interface Control Register (BROMCRL) ......................................... 6.3.7 Bus Control Register (BCR) ................................................................................ 6.3.8 DRAM Control Register (DRAMCR) ................................................................. 6.3.9 DRAM Access Control Register (DRACCR)...................................................... 6.3.10 Refresh Control Register (REFCR) ..................................................................... 6.3.11 Refresh Timer Counter (RTCNT)........................................................................ 119 121 122 123 123 124 129 130 132 133 135 140 141 144 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxiii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 6.3.12 Refresh Time Constant Register (RTCOR) ......................................................... Operation .......................................................................................................................... 6.4.1 Area Division....................................................................................................... 6.4.2 Bus Specifications................................................................................................ 6.4.3 Memory Interfaces ............................................................................................... 6.4.4 Chip Select Signals .............................................................................................. 6.5 Basic Bus Interface ........................................................................................................... 6.5.1 Data Size and Data Alignment............................................................................. 6.5.2 Valid Strobes........................................................................................................ 6.5.3 Basic Timing........................................................................................................ 6.5.4 Wait Control ........................................................................................................ 6.5.5 Read Strobe (RD) Timing.................................................................................... 6.5.6 Extension of Chip Select (CS) Assertion Period.................................................. 6.6 DRAM Interface ............................................................................................................... 6.6.1 Setting DRAM Space........................................................................................... 6.6.2 Address Multiplexing........................................................................................... 6.6.3 Data Bus............................................................................................................... 6.6.4 Pins Used for DRAM Interface............................................................................ 6.6.5 Basic Timing........................................................................................................ 6.6.6 Column Address Output Cycle Control ............................................................... 6.6.7 Row Address Output State Control...................................................................... 6.6.8 Precharge State Control ....................................................................................... 6.6.9 Wait Control ........................................................................................................ 6.6.10 Byte Access Control ............................................................................................ 6.6.11 Burst Operation.................................................................................................... 6.6.12 Refresh Control.................................................................................................... 6.6.13 DMAC Single Address Transfer Mode and DRAM Interface............................. 6.7 Burst ROM Interface......................................................................................................... 6.7.1 Basic Timing........................................................................................................ 6.7.2 Wait Control ........................................................................................................ 6.7.3 Write Access ........................................................................................................ 6.8 Idle Cycle.......................................................................................................................... 6.8.1 Operation ............................................................................................................. 6.8.2 Pin States in Idle Cycle ........................................................................................ 6.9 Write Data Buffer Function .............................................................................................. 6.10 Bus Release....................................................................................................................... 6.10.1 Operation ............................................................................................................. 6.10.2 Pin States in External Bus Released State............................................................ 6.10.3 Transition Timing ................................................................................................ 6.11 Bus Arbitration.................................................................................................................. 6.4 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxiv of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 144 144 144 146 148 149 150 150 152 153 161 162 163 165 165 165 166 167 168 169 170 172 173 176 177 182 187 190 190 192 192 193 193 204 204 206 206 207 208 209 6.11.1 Operation ............................................................................................................. 6.11.2 Bus Transfer Timing ............................................................................................ 6.12 Bus Controller Operation in Reset .................................................................................... 6.13 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 6.13.1 External Bus Release Function and All-Module-Clocks-Stopped Mode............. 6.13.2 External Bus Release Function and Software Standby ........................................ 6.13.3 External Bus Release Function and CBR Refreshing .......................................... 6.13.4 BREQO Output Timing ....................................................................................... 209 210 211 211 211 211 211 212 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) ............................................................................. 213 7.1 7.2 7.3 Features ............................................................................................................................. Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 7.3.1 Memory Address Registers (MARA and MARB) ............................................... 7.3.2 I/O Address Registers (IOARA and IOARB) ...................................................... 7.3.3 Execute Transfer Count Registers (ETCRA and ETCRB)................................... 7.3.4 DMA Control Registers (DMACRA and DMACRB) ......................................... 7.3.5 DMA Band Control Registers H and L (DMABCRH and DMABCRL)............. 7.3.6 DMA Write Enable Register (DMAWER) .......................................................... 7.3.7 DMA Terminal Control Register (DMATCR)..................................................... Activation Sources ............................................................................................................ 7.4.1 Activation by Internal Interrupt Request.............................................................. 7.4.2 Activation by External Request ........................................................................... 7.4.3 Activation by Auto-Request................................................................................. Operation........................................................................................................................... 7.5.1 Transfer Modes .................................................................................................... 7.5.2 Sequential Mode .................................................................................................. 7.5.3 Idle Mode............................................................................................................. 7.5.4 Repeat Mode ........................................................................................................ 7.5.5 Single Address Mode ........................................................................................... 7.5.6 Normal Mode ....................................................................................................... 7.5.7 Block Transfer Mode ........................................................................................... 7.5.8 Basic Bus Cycles.................................................................................................. 7.5.9 DMA Transfer (Dual Address Mode) Bus Cycles ............................................... 7.5.10 DMA Transfer (Single Address Mode) Bus Cycles............................................. 7.5.11 Write Data Buffer Function ................................................................................. 7.5.12 Multi-Channel Operation ..................................................................................... 7.5.13 Relation between DMAC and External Bus Requests and Refresh Cycles ......... 7.5.14 DMAC and NMI Interrupts.................................................................................. 7.5.15 Forced Termination of DMAC Operation............................................................ 213 215 215 217 217 218 219 226 238 240 241 242 242 243 244 244 246 249 252 256 259 262 267 267 275 281 282 283 284 285 7.4 7.5 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxv of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 7.6 7.7 7.5.16 Clearing Full Address Mode................................................................................ Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 7.7.1 DMAC Register Access during Operation........................................................... 7.7.2 Module Stop......................................................................................................... 7.7.3 Write Data Buffer Function ................................................................................. 7.7.4 TEND Output....................................................................................................... 7.7.5 Activation by Falling Edge on DREQ Pin ........................................................... 7.7.6 Activation Source Acceptance ............................................................................. 7.7.7 Internal Interrupt after End of Transfer................................................................ 7.7.8 Channel Re-Setting .............................................................................................. 286 287 288 288 289 289 290 291 291 292 292 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)................................................................... 293 8.1 8.2 Features............................................................................................................................. Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 8.2.1 DTC Mode Register A (MRA) ............................................................................ 8.2.2 DTC Mode Register B (MRB)............................................................................. 8.2.3 DTC Source Address Register (SAR).................................................................. 8.2.4 DTC Destination Address Register (DAR).......................................................... 8.2.5 DTC Transfer Count Register A (CRA) .............................................................. 8.2.6 DTC Transfer Count Register B (CRB)............................................................... 8.2.7 DTC Enable Registers A to G (DTCERA to DTCERG) ..................................... 8.2.8 DTC Vector Register (DTVECR)........................................................................ Activation Sources ............................................................................................................ Location of Register Information and DTC Vector Table ................................................ Operation .......................................................................................................................... 8.5.1 Normal Mode....................................................................................................... 8.5.2 Repeat Mode ........................................................................................................ 8.5.3 Block Transfer Mode ........................................................................................... 8.5.4 Chain Transfer ..................................................................................................... 8.5.5 Interrupts.............................................................................................................. 8.5.6 Operation Timing................................................................................................. 8.5.7 Number of DTC Execution States ....................................................................... Procedures for Using DTC................................................................................................ 8.6.1 Activation by Interrupt......................................................................................... 8.6.2 Activation by Software ........................................................................................ Examples of Use of the DTC ............................................................................................ 8.7.1 Normal Mode....................................................................................................... 8.7.2 Chain Transfer ..................................................................................................... 8.7.3 Chain Transfer when Counter = 0........................................................................ 293 295 295 297 297 297 298 298 299 300 301 302 306 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 316 316 316 317 317 317 318 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxvi of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 8.8 8.7.4 Software Activation ............................................................................................. Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 8.8.1 Module Stop Mode Setting .................................................................................. 8.8.2 On-Chip RAM ..................................................................................................... 8.8.3 DTCE Bit Setting................................................................................................. 8.8.4 DMAC Transfer End Interrupt............................................................................. 8.8.5 Chain Transfer ..................................................................................................... 320 321 321 321 321 321 321 Section 9 I/O Ports .............................................................................................................. 323 9.1 Port 1................................................................................................................................. 9.1.1 Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR)............................................................. 9.1.2 Port 1 Data Register (P1DR)................................................................................ 9.1.3 Port 1 Register (PORT1)...................................................................................... 9.1.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... Port 2................................................................................................................................. 9.2.1 Port 2 Data Direction Register (P2DDR)............................................................. 9.2.2 Port 2 Data Register (P2DR)................................................................................ 9.2.3 Port 2 Register (PORT2)...................................................................................... 9.2.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... Port 3................................................................................................................................. 9.3.1 Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR)............................................................. 9.3.2 Port 3 Data Register (P3DR)................................................................................ 9.3.3 Port 3 Register (PORT3)...................................................................................... 9.3.4 Port 3 Open Drain Control Register (P3ODR)..................................................... 9.3.5 Port Function Control Register 2 (PFCR2) .......................................................... 9.3.6 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... Port 4................................................................................................................................. 9.4.1 Port 4 Register (PORT4)...................................................................................... 9.4.2 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... Port 5................................................................................................................................. 9.5.1 Port 5 Data Direction Register (P5DDR)............................................................. 9.5.2 Port 5 Data Register (P5DR)................................................................................ 9.5.3 Port 5 Register (PORT5)...................................................................................... 9.5.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... Port 8................................................................................................................................. 9.6.1 Port 8 Data Direction Register (P8DDR)............................................................. 9.6.2 Port 8 Data Register (P8DR)................................................................................ 9.6.3 Port 8 Register (PORT8)...................................................................................... 9.6.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... Port 9................................................................................................................................. 327 327 328 328 329 337 337 338 338 339 347 347 348 348 349 350 351 354 354 355 357 357 357 358 358 360 360 361 361 362 363 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxvii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 9.7.1 Port 9 Register (PORT9)...................................................................................... 9.7.2 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 9.8 Port A................................................................................................................................ 9.8.1 Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR) ........................................................... 9.8.2 Port A Data Register (PADR).............................................................................. 9.8.3 Port A Register (PORTA).................................................................................... 9.8.4 Port A MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PAPCR) ................................................ 9.8.5 Port A Open Drain Control Register (PAODR)................................................... 9.8.6 Port Function Control Register 0 (PFCR0).......................................................... 9.8.7 Port Function Control Register 1 (PFCR1).......................................................... 9.8.8 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 9.8.9 Port A MOS Input Pull-Up States........................................................................ 9.9 Port B ................................................................................................................................ 9.9.1 Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR) ........................................................... 9.9.2 Port B Data Register (PBDR) .............................................................................. 9.9.3 Port B Register (PORTB) .................................................................................... 9.9.4 Port B MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PBPCR) ................................................ 9.9.5 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 9.9.6 Port B MOS Input Pull-Up States ........................................................................ 9.10 Port C ................................................................................................................................ 9.10.1 Port C Data Direction Register (PCDDR) ........................................................... 9.10.2 Port C Data Register (PCDR) .............................................................................. 9.10.3 Port C Register (PORTC) .................................................................................... 9.10.4 Port C MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PCPCR) ................................................ 9.10.5 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 9.10.6 Port C MOS Input Pull-Up States ........................................................................ 9.11 Port D................................................................................................................................ 9.11.1 Port D Data Direction Register (PDDDR) ........................................................... 9.11.2 Port D Data Register (PDDR).............................................................................. 9.11.3 Port D Register (PORTD).................................................................................... 9.11.4 Port D Pull-up Control Register (PDPCR)........................................................... 9.11.5 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 9.11.6 Port D MOS Input Pull-Up States........................................................................ 9.12 Port E ................................................................................................................................ 9.12.1 Port E Data Direction Register (PEDDR)............................................................ 9.12.2 Port E Data Register (PEDR)............................................................................... 9.12.3 Port E Register (PORTE)..................................................................................... 9.12.4 Port E Pull-up Control Register (PEPCR) ........................................................... 9.12.5 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 9.12.6 Port E MOS Input Pull-Up States ........................................................................ Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxviii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 363 363 364 365 366 366 367 367 368 369 370 372 373 373 374 374 375 375 376 377 377 378 378 379 379 380 381 381 382 382 383 383 384 385 385 386 386 387 387 388 9.13 Port F................................................................................................................................. 9.13.1 Port F Data Direction Register (PFDDR) ............................................................ 9.13.2 Port F Data Register (PFDR) ............................................................................... 9.13.3 Port F Register (PORTF) ..................................................................................... 9.13.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 9.14 Port G ................................................................................................................................ 9.14.1 Port G Data Direction Register (PGDDR) ........................................................... 9.14.2 Port G Data Register (PGDR) .............................................................................. 9.14.3 Port G Register (PORTG) .................................................................................... 9.14.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 388 389 390 390 391 395 395 396 396 397 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU).................................................................. 401 10.1 Features ............................................................................................................................. 10.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 10.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 10.3.1 Timer Control Register (TCR) ............................................................................. 10.3.2 Timer Mode Register (TMDR) ............................................................................ 10.3.3 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR) ..................................................................... 10.3.4 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER) .............................................................. 10.3.5 Timer Status Register (TSR)................................................................................ 10.3.6 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................ 10.3.7 Timer General Register (TGR) ............................................................................ 10.3.8 Timer Start Register (TSTR)................................................................................ 10.3.9 Timer Synchronous Register (TSYR) .................................................................. 10.4 Operation........................................................................................................................... 10.4.1 Basic Functions.................................................................................................... 10.4.2 Synchronous Operation........................................................................................ 10.4.3 Buffer Operation .................................................................................................. 10.4.4 Cascaded Operation ............................................................................................. 10.4.5 PWM Modes ........................................................................................................ 10.4.6 Phase Counting Mode .......................................................................................... 10.5 Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... 10.6 DTC Activation................................................................................................................. 10.7 DMAC Activation............................................................................................................. 10.8 A/D Converter Activation ................................................................................................. 10.9 Operation Timing.............................................................................................................. 10.9.1 Input/Output Timing ............................................................................................ 10.9.2 Interrupt Signal Timing........................................................................................ 10.10 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 10.10.1 Module Stop Mode Setting .................................................................................. 401 405 406 408 413 414 432 434 437 437 437 438 439 439 445 447 452 454 459 466 468 468 468 469 469 473 477 477 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxix of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 10.10.2 Input Clock Restrictions ...................................................................................... 10.10.3 Caution on Cycle Setting ..................................................................................... 10.10.4 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations ..................................... 10.10.5 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations.............................. 10.10.6 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match ......................................... 10.10.7 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match ........................ 10.10.8 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture.............................................. 10.10.9 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture............................................. 10.10.10 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture .......................... 10.10.11 Contention between Overflow/Underflow and Counter Clearing...................... 10.10.12 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow/Underflow............................. 10.10.13 Multiplexing of I/O Pins .................................................................................... 10.10.14 Interrupts and Module Stop Mode ..................................................................... 477 478 478 479 479 480 481 482 482 483 484 484 484 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) .................................................... 485 11.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 485 11.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 487 11.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 487 11.3.1 Next Data Enable Registers H, L (NDERH, NDERL) ........................................ 488 11.3.2 Output Data Registers H, L (PODRH, PODRL).................................................. 489 11.3.3 Next Data Registers H, L (NDRH, NDRL) ......................................................... 490 11.3.4 PPG Output Control Register (PCR) ................................................................... 492 11.3.5 PPG Output Mode Register (PMR) ..................................................................... 493 11.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 495 11.4.1 Output Timing...................................................................................................... 496 11.4.2 Sample Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output.............................................. 497 11.4.3 Example of Normal Pulse Output (Example of Five-Phase Pulse Output).......... 498 11.4.4 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output............................................................................ 499 11.4.5 Sample Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output .............................. 501 11.4.6 Example of Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example of Four-Phase Complementary Non-Overlapping Output) ......................................................... 502 11.4.7 Inverted Pulse Output .......................................................................................... 504 11.4.8 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture ............................................................ 505 11.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 505 11.5.1 Module Stop Mode Setting .................................................................................. 505 11.5.2 Operation of Pulse Output Pins............................................................................ 505 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) ...................................................................................... 507 12.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 507 12.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 509 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxx of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 12.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 12.3.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................ 12.3.2 Time Constant Register A (TCORA)................................................................... 12.3.3 Time Constant Register B (TCORB) ................................................................... 12.3.4 Timer Control Register (TCR) ............................................................................ 12.3.5 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)................................................................ 12.4 Operation........................................................................................................................... 12.4.1 Pulse Output......................................................................................................... 12.5 Operation Timing.............................................................................................................. 12.5.1 TCNT Incrementation Timing ............................................................................. 12.5.2 Timing of CMFA and CMFB Setting when Compare-Match Occurs ................. 12.5.3 Timing of Timer Output when Compare-Match Occurs...................................... 12.5.4 Timing of Compare Match Clear ......................................................................... 12.5.5 Timing of TCNT External Reset.......................................................................... 12.5.6 Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting ............................................................. 12.6 Operation with Cascaded Connection ............................................................................... 12.6.1 16-Bit Counter Mode ........................................................................................... 12.6.2 Compare Match Count Mode............................................................................... 12.7 Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... 12.7.1 Interrupt Sources and DTC Activation ................................................................ 12.7.2 A/D Converter Activation.................................................................................... 12.8 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 12.8.1 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear........................................................ 12.8.2 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment ................................................ 12.8.3 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare Match ...................................... 12.8.4 Contention between Compare Matches A and B ................................................. 12.8.5 Switching of Internal Clocks and TCNT Operation............................................. 12.8.6 Mode Setting with Cascaded Connection ............................................................ 12.8.7 Interrupts in Module Stop Mode .......................................................................... 509 509 510 510 510 512 515 515 516 516 517 518 518 519 519 520 520 520 521 521 521 522 522 523 524 525 525 527 527 Section 13 Watchdog Timer............................................................................................. 529 13.1 Features ............................................................................................................................. 13.2 Input/Output Pin................................................................................................................ 13.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 13.3.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................ 13.3.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)................................................................ 13.3.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR) ............................................................ 13.4 Operation........................................................................................................................... 13.4.1 Watchdog Timer Mode ........................................................................................ 13.4.2 Interval Timer Mode ............................................................................................ 529 530 531 531 531 533 534 534 535 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxxi of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 13.5 Interrupts........................................................................................................................... 536 13.6 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 536 13.6.1 Notes on Register Access..................................................................................... 536 13.6.2 Contention between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment ..................... 538 13.6.3 Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0...................................................................... 538 13.6.4 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode................ 538 13.6.5 Internal Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode............................................................. 539 13.6.6 System Reset by WDTOVF Signal...................................................................... 539 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA)........................................ 541 14.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 541 14.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 544 14.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 545 14.3.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) .............................................................................. 546 14.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) .............................................................................. 546 14.3.3 Transmit Data Register (TDR)............................................................................. 546 14.3.4 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) ............................................................................. 547 14.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) ............................................................................... 547 14.3.6 Serial Control Register (SCR).............................................................................. 551 14.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................ 556 14.3.8 Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR).................................................................... 563 14.3.9 Bit Rate Register (BRR) ...................................................................................... 564 14.3.10 IrDA Control Register (IrCR) .............................................................................. 573 14.3.11 Serial Extension Mode Register (SEMR) ............................................................ 574 14.4 Operation in Asynchronous Mode .................................................................................... 576 14.4.1 Data Transfer Format........................................................................................... 576 14.4.2 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode ............................................................................................ 578 14.4.3 Clock.................................................................................................................... 579 14.4.4 SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode) ............................................................. 580 14.4.5 Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode)........................................................... 581 14.4.6 Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode)...................................................... 584 14.5 Multiprocessor Communication Function......................................................................... 588 14.5.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission ............................................................ 589 14.5.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception ................................................................. 591 14.6 Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode ........................................................................ 595 14.6.1 Clock.................................................................................................................... 595 14.6.2 SCI Initialization (Clocked Synchronous Mode) ................................................. 596 14.6.3 Serial Data Transmission (Clocked Synchronous Mode) .................................... 597 14.6.4 Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode).......................................... 600 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxxii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 14.7 14.8 14.9 14.10 14.6.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode) ............................................................................. Operation in Smart Card Interface Mode .......................................................................... 14.7.1 Pin Connection Example...................................................................................... 14.7.2 Data Format (Except for Block Transfer Mode) .................................................. 14.7.3 Block Transfer Mode ........................................................................................... 14.7.4 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin....................................... 14.7.5 Initialization ......................................................................................................... 14.7.6 Data Transmission (Except for Block Transfer Mode) ........................................ 14.7.7 Serial Data Reception (Except for Block Transfer Mode) ................................... 14.7.8 Clock Output Control........................................................................................... IrDA Operation ................................................................................................................. SCI Interrupts.................................................................................................................... 14.9.1 Interrupts in Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode............................... 14.9.2 Interrupts in Smart Card Interface Mode ............................................................. Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 14.10.1 Module Stop Mode Setting .................................................................................. 14.10.2 Break Detection and Processing........................................................................... 14.10.3 Mark State and Break Sending............................................................................. 14.10.4 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode Only)..................................................................... 14.10.5 Relation between Writes to TDR and the TDRE Flag ......................................... 14.10.6 Restrictions on Use of DMAC or DTC................................................................ 14.10.7 Operation in Case of Mode Transition................................................................. 602 604 604 605 606 606 608 608 612 613 616 619 619 621 622 622 622 622 623 623 623 624 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option)............................................................ 629 15.1 Features ............................................................................................................................. 15.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 15.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 15.3.1 I2C Bus Control Register A (ICCRA) .................................................................. 15.3.2 I2C Bus Control Register B (ICCRB)................................................................... 15.3.3 I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR) ........................................................................... 15.3.4 I2C Bus Interrupt Enable Register (ICIER) .......................................................... 15.3.5 I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR)............................................................................ 15.3.6 Slave Address Register (SAR) ............................................................................. 15.3.7 I2C Bus Transmit Data Register (ICDRT)............................................................ 15.3.8 I2C Bus Receive Data Register (ICDRR) ............................................................. 15.3.9 I2C Bus Shift Register (ICDRS) ........................................................................... 15.4 Operation........................................................................................................................... 15.4.1 I2C Bus Format..................................................................................................... 629 631 632 633 635 636 637 639 641 642 642 642 643 643 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxxiii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 15.4.2 Master Transmit Operation .................................................................................. 15.4.3 Master Receive Operation.................................................................................... 15.4.4 Slave Transmit Operation .................................................................................... 15.4.5 Slave Receive Operation...................................................................................... 15.4.6 Noise Canceler..................................................................................................... 15.4.7 Example of Use.................................................................................................... 15.5 Interrupt Request............................................................................................................... 15.6 Bit Synchronous Circuit.................................................................................................... 15.7 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 644 646 648 650 653 653 658 658 659 Section 16 A/D Converter................................................................................................. 661 16.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 661 16.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 663 16.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 664 16.3.1 A/D Data Registers A to H (ADDRA to ADDRH) ............................................. 664 16.3.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ............................................................... 666 16.3.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) ............................................................................ 668 16.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 669 16.4.1 Single Mode......................................................................................................... 669 16.4.2 Scan Mode ........................................................................................................... 669 16.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time ......................................................... 670 16.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing............................................................................. 673 16.5 Interrupts........................................................................................................................... 673 16.6 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions.............................................................................. 674 16.7 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 676 16.7.1 Module Stop Mode Setting .................................................................................. 676 16.7.2 Permissible Signal Source Impedance ................................................................. 676 16.7.3 Influences on Absolute Precision......................................................................... 677 16.7.4 Setting Range of Analog Power Supply and Other Pins ...................................... 677 16.7.5 Notes on Board Design ........................................................................................ 677 16.7.6 Notes on Noise Countermeasures ........................................................................ 678 Section 17 D/A Converter................................................................................................. 681 17.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 681 17.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 683 17.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 683 17.3.1 D/A Data Registers 2 and 3 (DADR2 and DADR3)............................................ 683 17.3.2 D/A Control Register 23 (DACR23) ................................................................... 684 17.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 685 17.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 686 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxxiv of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 17.5.1 Setting for Module Stop Mode............................................................................. 686 17.5.2 D/A Output Hold Function in Software Standby Mode....................................... 686 Section 18 RAM .................................................................................................................. 687 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version)........................................... 689 19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 Features ............................................................................................................................. Mode Transitions .............................................................................................................. Block Configuration.......................................................................................................... Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 19.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)..................................................... 19.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)..................................................... 19.5.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) ........................................................................... 19.5.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) ........................................................................... On-Board Programming Modes ........................................................................................ 19.6.1 Boot Mode ........................................................................................................... 19.6.2 User Program Mode............................................................................................. Flash Memory Programming/Erasing ............................................................................... 19.7.1 Program/Program-Verify ..................................................................................... 19.7.2 Erase/Erase-Verify............................................................................................... 19.7.3 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory.......................... Program/Erase Protection.................................................................................................. 19.8.1 Hardware Protection ............................................................................................ 19.8.2 Software Protection.............................................................................................. 19.8.3 Error Protection.................................................................................................... Programmer Mode ............................................................................................................ Power-Down States for Flash Memory............................................................................. Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 689 691 695 697 697 698 699 700 700 702 702 705 706 706 708 708 710 710 710 710 711 711 712 19.6 19.7 19.8 19.9 19.10 19.11 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version)........................................... 717 20.1 Features ............................................................................................................................. 20.1.1 Operating Mode ................................................................................................... 20.1.2 Mode Comparison................................................................................................ 20.1.3 Flash MAT Configuration.................................................................................... 20.1.4 Block Division ..................................................................................................... 20.1.5 Programming/Erasing Interface ........................................................................... 20.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 20.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 20.3.1 Programming/Erasing Interface Register ............................................................. 717 720 721 722 723 724 726 726 728 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxxv of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 20.4 20.5 20.6 20.7 20.8 20.9 20.3.2 Programming/Erasing Interface Parameter .......................................................... 20.3.3 Flash Vector Address Control Register (FVACR)............................................... On-Board Programming Mode ......................................................................................... 20.4.1 Boot Mode ........................................................................................................... 20.4.2 User Program Mode............................................................................................. 20.4.3 User Boot Mode................................................................................................... 20.4.4 Procedure Program and Storable Area for Programming Data ............................ Protection .......................................................................................................................... 20.5.1 Hardware Protection ............................................................................................ 20.5.2 Software Protection.............................................................................................. 20.5.3 Error Protection.................................................................................................... Switching between User MAT and User Boot MAT ........................................................ Programmer Mode ............................................................................................................ Serial Communication Interface Specification for Boot Mode......................................... Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 735 747 748 748 753 764 768 778 778 779 779 781 782 782 810 Section 21 Mask ROM....................................................................................................... 811 Section 22 Clock Pulse Generator .................................................................................. 813 22.1 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 22.1.1 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR) ........................................................... 22.1.2 PLL Control Register (PLLCR)........................................................................... 22.2 Oscillator........................................................................................................................... 22.2.1 Connecting a Crystal Oscillator ........................................................................... 22.2.2 External Clock Input ............................................................................................ 22.3 PLL Circuit ....................................................................................................................... 22.4 Frequency Divider ............................................................................................................ 22.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 22.5.1 Notes on Clock Pulse Generator .......................................................................... 22.5.2 Notes on Oscillator .............................................................................................. 22.5.3 Notes on Board Design ........................................................................................ 813 814 815 816 816 817 818 819 819 819 820 820 Section 23 Power-Down Modes...................................................................................... 823 23.1 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 23.1.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) .................................................................... 23.1.2 Module Stop Control Registers H and L (MSTPCRH, MSTPCRL).................... 23.1.3 Extension Module Stop Control Registers H and L (EXMSTPCRH, EXMSTPCRL) ......................................................................... 23.2 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 23.2.1 Clock Division Mode........................................................................................... Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxxvi of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 826 826 828 829 830 830 23.2.2 Sleep Mode .......................................................................................................... 23.2.3 Software Standby Mode....................................................................................... 23.2.4 Hardware Standby Mode ..................................................................................... 23.2.5 Module Stop Mode .............................................................................................. 23.2.6 All-Module-Clocks-Stop Mode ........................................................................... 23.3 Clock Output Control..................................................................................................... 23.4 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 23.4.1 I/O Port Status...................................................................................................... 23.4.2 Current Dissipation during Oscillation Stabilization Standby Period .................. 23.4.3 DMAC/DTC Module Stop................................................................................... 23.4.4 On-Chip Peripheral Module Interrupts ................................................................ 23.4.5 Writing to MSTPCR, EXMSTPCR ..................................................................... 23.4.6 Notes on Clock Division Mode............................................................................ 830 831 834 835 836 836 837 837 837 837 837 837 838 Section 24 List of Registers.............................................................................................. 839 24.1 Register Addresses (Address Order) ................................................................................. 840 24.2 Register Bits...................................................................................................................... 850 24.3 Register States in Each Operating Mode........................................................................... 863 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics.............................................................................. 873 25.1 Electrical Characteristics of Masked ROM and ROMless Versions ................................. 25.1.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................ 25.1.2 DC Characteristics ............................................................................................... 25.1.3 AC Characteristics ............................................................................................... 25.1.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics........................................................................... 25.1.5 D/A Conversion Characteristics........................................................................... 25.2 Electrical Characteristics of 0.35 m F-ZTAT Version.................................................... 25.2.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................ 25.2.2 DC Characteristics ............................................................................................... 25.2.3 A/D Conversion Characteristics........................................................................... 25.2.4 D/A Conversion Characteristics........................................................................... 25.2.5 Flash Memory Characteristics.............................................................................. 25.3 Electrical Characteristics for 0.18 m F-ZTAT Version................................................... 25.3.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................ 25.3.2 DC Characteristics ............................................................................................... 25.3.3 AC Characteristics ............................................................................................... 25.3.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics........................................................................... 25.3.5 D/A Conversion Characteristics........................................................................... 25.3.6 Flash Memory Characteristics.............................................................................. 25.4 Usage Note........................................................................................................................ 873 873 874 877 910 910 911 911 912 923 923 924 926 926 927 930 938 938 939 940 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxxvii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix A. B. C. D. ............................................................................................................................. I/O Port States in Each Pin State....................................................................................... Product Lineup.................................................................................................................. Package Dimensions ......................................................................................................... Bus State during Execution of Instructions....................................................................... 941 941 949 950 952 Index ............................................................................................................................. 975 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxxviii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Figures Section 1 Overview Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram of H8S/2367F, H8S/2365, and H8S/2363........................ Figure 1.2 Internal Block Diagram of H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group............................. Figure 1.3 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2367F, H8S/2365, and H8S/2363 .................................. Figure 1.4 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group ....................................... Figure 1.5 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2367F, H8S/2365, and H8S/2363 .................................. Section 2 CPU Figure 2.1 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode)................................................................ Figure 2.2 Stack Structure in Normal Mode............................................................................ Figure 2.3 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode)............................................................ Figure 2.4 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode ........................................................................ Figure 2.5 Memory Map.......................................................................................................... Figure 2.6 CPU Internal Registers........................................................................................... Figure 2.7 Usage of General Registers .................................................................................... Figure 2.8 Stack....................................................................................................................... Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (1)......................................................................... Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (2)......................................................................... Figure 2.10 Memory Data Formats............................................................................................ Figure 2.11 Instruction Formats (Examples) ............................................................................. Figure 2.12 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Addressing Mode ................... Figure 2.13 State Transitions..................................................................................................... Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Figure 3.1 H8S/2368F Memory Map (1)................................................................................. Figure 3.2 H8S/2368F Memory Map (2)................................................................................. Figure 3.3 H8S/2367F Memory Map (1)................................................................................. Figure 3.4 H8S/2367F Memory Map (2)................................................................................. Figure 3.5 H8S/2364F Memory Map (1)................................................................................. Figure 3.6 H8S/2364F Memory Map (2)................................................................................. Figure 3.7 H8S/2362F Memory Map (1)................................................................................. Figure 3.8 H8S/2362F Memory Map (2)................................................................................. Figure 3.9 H8S/2361F Memory Map (1)................................................................................. Figure 3.10 H8S/2361F Memory Map (2)................................................................................. Figure 3.11 H8S/2360F Memory Map (1)................................................................................. Figure 3.12 H8S/2360F Memory Map (2)................................................................................. Figure 3.13 H8S/2365 Memory Map (1) ................................................................................... 3 4 5 6 7 25 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 34 35 36 48 52 56 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xxxix of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Figure 3.14 H8S/2365 Memory Map (2) ................................................................................... 76 Figure 3.15 H8S/2363 Memory Map......................................................................................... 77 Section 4 Exception Handling Figure 4.1 Reset Sequence (Advanced Mode with On-Chip ROM Enabled).......................... Figure 4.2 Reset Sequence (Advanced Mode with On-Chip ROM Disabled)......................... Figure 4.3 Stack Status after Exception Handling ................................................................... Figure 4.4 Operation when SP Value Is Odd........................................................................... Section 5 Interrupt Controller Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller................................................................... Figure 5.2 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ15 to IRQ0......................................................... Figure 5.3 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 0 ................................................................................... Figure 5.4 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 2 ................................................................................... Figure 5.5 Interrupt Exception Handling................................................................................. Figure 5.6 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling ....................................... Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of Bus Controller .......................................................................... Figure 6.2 Read Strobe Negation Timing (Example of 3-State Access Space) ....................... Figure 6.3 CS and Address Assertion Period Extension (Example of 3-State Access Space and RDNn = 0) ....................................................................................................... Figure 6.4 RAS Signal Assertion Timing (2-State Column Address Output Cycle, Full Access)............................................................................................................ Figure 6.5 Area Divisions........................................................................................................ Figure 6.6 CSn Signal Output Timing (n = 0 to 7) .................................................................. Figure 6.7 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (8-Bit Access Space) .......................... Figure 6.8 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (16-bit Access Space) ......................... Figure 6.9 Bus Timing for 8-Bit, 2-State Access Space .......................................................... Figure 6.10 Bus Timing for 8-Bit, 3-State Access Space .......................................................... Figure 6.11 Bus Timing for 16-Bit, 2-State Access Space (Even Address Byte Access).......... Figure 6.12 Bus Timing for 16-Bit, 2-State Access Space (Odd Address Byte Access)........... Figure 6.13 Bus Timing for 16-Bit, 2-State Access Space (Word Access) ............................... Figure 6.14 Bus Timing for 16-Bit, 3-State Access Space (Even Address Byte Access).......... Figure 6.15 Bus Timing for 16-Bit, 3-State Access Space (Odd Address Byte Access)........... Figure 6.16 Bus Timing for 16-Bit, 3-State Access Space (Word Access) ............................... Figure 6.17 Example of Wait State Insertion Timing................................................................ Figure 6.18 Example of Read Strobe Timing ............................................................................ Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xl of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 82 83 86 87 90 102 109 111 113 116 120 129 131 139 145 150 151 151 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 162 163 Figure 6.19 Example of Timing when Chip Select Assertion Period is Extended .................... Figure 6.20 DRAM Basic Access Timing (RAST = 0, CAST = 0)........................................... Figure 6.21 Example of Access Timing with 3-State Column Address Output Cycle (RAST = 0)............................................................................................................. Figure 6.22 Example of Access Timing when RAS Signal Goes Low from Beginning of Tr State (CAST = 0) ........................................................................................... Figure 6.23 Example of Timing with One Row Address Output Maintenance State (RAST = 0, CAST = 0) .......................................................................................... Figure 6.24 Example of Timing with Two-State Precharge Cycle (RAST = 0, CAST = 0)...... Figure 6.25 Example of Wait State Insertion Timing (2-State Column Address Output) ........ Figure 6.26 Example of Wait State Insertion Timing (3-State Column Address Output) ......... Figure 6.27 2-CAS Control Timing (Upper Byte Write Access: RAST = 0, CAST = 0)......... Figure 6.28 Example of 2-CAS DRAM Connection ................................................................. Figure 6.29 Operation Timing in Fast Page Mode (RAST = 0, CAST = 0) .............................. Figure 6.30 Operation Timing in Fast Page Mode (RAST = 0, CAST = 1) .............................. Figure 6.31 Example of Operation Timing in RAS Down Mode (RAST = 0, CAST = 0)........ Figure 6.32 Example of Operation Timing in RAS Up Mode (RAST = 0, CAST = 0)............. Figure 6.33 RTCNT Operation.................................................................................................. Figure 6.34 Compare Match Timing ......................................................................................... Figure 6.35 CBR Refresh Timing.............................................................................................. Figure 6.36 CBR Refresh Timing (RCW1 = 0, RCW0 = 1, RLW1 = 0, RLW0 = 0)................ Figure 6.37 Example of CBR Refresh Timing (CBRM = 1) ..................................................... Figure 6.38 Self-Refresh Timing ............................................................................................... Figure 6.39 Example of Timing when Precharge Time after Self-Refreshing Is Extended by 2 States .............................................................................................................. Figure 6.40 Example of DACK Output Timing when DDS = 1 (RAST = 0, CAST = 0) ......... Figure 6.41 Example of DACK Output Timing when DDS = 0 (RAST = 0, CAST = 1) ......... Figure 6.42 Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (ASTn = 1, 2-State Burst Cycle) ............ Figure 6.43 Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (ASTn = 0, 1-State Burst Cycle) ............ Figure 6.44 xample of Idle Cycle Operation (Consecutive Reads in Different Areas).............. Figure 6.45 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (Write after Read) ............................................. Figure 6.46 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (Read after Write) ............................................. Figure 6.47 Relationship between Chip Select (CS) and Read (RD)......................................... Figure 6.48 Example of DRAM Full Access after External Read (CAST = 0) ......................... Figure 6.49 Example of Idle Cycle Operation in RAS Down Mode (Consecutive Reads in Different Areas) (IDLC = 0, RAST = 0, CAST = 0).......................................... Figure 6.50 Example of Idle Cycle Operation in RAS Down Mode (Write after Read) (IDLC = 0, RAST = 0, CAST = 0) ......................................................................... Figure 6.51 Example of Idle Cycle Operation after DRAM Access (Consecutive Reads in Different Areas) (IDLC = 0, RAST = 0, CAST = 0).............................................. 164 168 169 170 171 172 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 191 192 193 194 195 196 196 197 198 199 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xli of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Figure 6.52 Example of Idle Cycle Operation after DRAM Access (Write after Read) (IDLC = 0, RAST = 0, CAST = 0)......................................................................... Figure 6.53 Example of Idle Cycle Operation after DRAM Write Access (IDLC = 0, ICIS1 = 0, RAST = 0, CAST = 0) ....................................................... Figure 6.54 Example of Timing for Idle Cycle Insertion in Case of Consecutive Read and Write Accesses to DRAM Space in RAS Down Mode ................................... Figure 6.55 Example of Timing when Write Data Buffer Function is Used ............................. Figure 6.56 Bus Released State Transition Timing ................................................................... Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Figure 7.1 Block Diagram of DMAC ...................................................................................... Figure 7.2 Areas for Register Re-Setting by DTC (Channel 0A) ............................................ Figure 7.3 Operation in Sequential Mode................................................................................ Figure 7.4 Example of Sequential Mode Setting Procedure.................................................... Figure 7.5 Operation in Idle Mode .......................................................................................... Figure 7.6 Example of Idle Mode Setting Procedure .............................................................. Figure 7.7 Operation in Repeat mode...................................................................................... Figure 7.8 Example of Repeat Mode Setting Procedure.......................................................... Figure 7.9 Operation in Single Address Mode (When Sequential Mode is Specified)............ Figure 7.10 Example of Single Address Mode Setting Procedure (When Sequential Mode is Specified).................................................................... Figure 7.11 Operation in Normal Mode .................................................................................... Figure 7.12 Example of Normal Mode Setting Procedure......................................................... Figure 7.13 Operation in Block Transfer Mode (BLKDIR = 0)................................................ Figure 7.14 Operation in Block Transfer Mode (BLKDIR = 1)................................................ Figure 7.15 Operation Flow in Block Transfer Mode ............................................................... Figure 7.16 Example of Block Transfer Mode Setting Procedure............................................. Figure 7.17 Example of DMA Transfer Bus Timing................................................................. Figure 7.18 Example of Short Address Mode Transfer............................................................. Figure 7.19 Example of Full Address Mode Transfer (Cycle Steal) ......................................... Figure 7.20 Example of Full Address Mode Transfer (Burst Mode)......................................... Figure 7.21 Example of Full Address Mode Transfer (Block Transfer Mode) ......................... Figure 7.22 Example of DREQ Pin Falling Edge Activated Normal Mode Transfer................ Figure 7.23 Example of DREQ Pin Falling Edge Activated Block Transfer Mode Transfer.... Figure 7.24 Example of DREQ Pin Low Level Activated Normal Mode Transfer................... Figure 7.25 Example of DREQ Pin Low Level Activated Block Transfer Mode Transfer....... Figure 7.26 Example of Single Address Mode Transfer (Byte Read) ....................................... Figure 7.27 Example of Single Address Mode (Word Read) Transfer...................................... Figure 7.28 Example of Single Address Mode Transfer (Byte Write) ...................................... Figure 7.29 Example of Single Address Mode Transfer (Word Write)..................................... Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xlii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 199 200 203 205 208 214 239 247 248 249 251 254 255 257 258 260 261 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 276 277 278 Figure 7.30 Figure 7.31 Figure 7.32 Figure 7.33 Figure 7.34 Figure 7.35 Figure 7.36 Figure 7.37 Figure 7.38 Figure 7.39 Figure 7.40 Figure 7.41 Example of DREQ Pin Falling Edge Activated Single Address Mode Transfer.... Example of DREQ Pin Low Level Activated Single Address Mode Transfer....... Example of Dual Address Transfer Using Write Data Buffer Function................. Example of Single Address Transfer Using Write Data Buffer Function .............. Example of Multi-Channel Transfer ...................................................................... Example of Procedure for Continuing Transfer on Channel Interrupted by NMI Interrupt .................................................................................................... Example of Procedure for Forcibly Terminating DMAC Operation...................... Example of Procedure for Clearing Full Address Mode ........................................ Block Diagram of Transfer End/Transfer Break Interrupt ..................................... DMAC Register Update Timing ............................................................................ Contention between DMAC Register Update and CPU Read................................ Example in which Low Level is Not Output at TEND Pin .................................... 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 291 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Figure 8.1 Block Diagram of DTC .......................................................................................... Figure 8.2 Block Diagram of DTC Activation Source Control ............................................... Figure 8.3 Correspondence between DTC Vector Address and Register Information ............ Figure 8.4 Correspondence between DTC Vector Address and Register Information ............ Figure 8.5 Flowchart of DTC Operation.................................................................................. Figure 8.6 Memory Mapping in Normal Mode ....................................................................... Figure 8.7 Memory Mapping in Repeat Mode ........................................................................ Figure 8.8 Memory Mapping in Block Transfer Mode ........................................................... Figure 8.9 Operation of Chain Transfer................................................................................... Figure 8.10 DTC Operation Timing (Example in Normal Mode or Repeat Mode)................... Figure 8.11 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Block Transfer Mode, with Block Size of 2).............................................................................................. Figure 8.12 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Chain Transfer) ........................................... Figure 8.13 Chain Transfer when Counter = 0 .......................................................................... Section 10 Figure 10.1 Figure 10.2 Figure 10.3 Figure 10.4 Figure 10.5 Figure 10.6 Figure 10.7 Figure 10.8 Figure 10.9 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Block Diagram of TPU........................................................................................... Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure ................................................. Free-Running Counter Operation ........................................................................... Periodic Counter Operation.................................................................................... Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match............. Example of 0 Output/1 Output Operation .............................................................. Example of Toggle Output Operation .................................................................... Example of Setting Procedure for Input Capture Operation................................... Example of Input Capture Operation...................................................................... 294 302 303 303 307 309 310 311 312 313 313 314 319 404 439 440 441 442 443 443 444 445 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xliii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Figure 10.10 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure ......................................... Figure 10.11 Example of Synchronous Operation....................................................................... Figure 10.12 Compare Match Buffer Operation.......................................................................... Figure 10.13 Input Capture Buffer Operation ............................................................................. Figure 10.14 Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure.................................................... Figure 10.15 Example of Buffer Operation (1) ........................................................................... Figure 10.16 Example of Buffer Operation (2) ........................................................................... Figure 10.17 Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure .................................................................. Figure 10.18 Example of Cascaded Operation (1)....................................................................... Figure 10.19 Example of Cascaded Operation (2)....................................................................... Figure 10.20 Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure ........................................................... Figure 10.21 Example of PWM Mode Operation (1) .................................................................. Figure 10.22 Example of PWM Mode Operation (2) .................................................................. Figure 10.23 Example of PWM Mode Operation (3) .................................................................. Figure 10.24 Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure............................................ Figure 10.25 Example of Phase Counting Mode 1 Operation ..................................................... Figure 10.26 Example of Phase Counting Mode 2 Operation ..................................................... Figure 10.27 Example of Phase Counting Mode 3 Operation ..................................................... Figure 10.28 Example of Phase Counting Mode 4 Operation ..................................................... Figure 10.29 Phase Counting Mode Application Example.......................................................... Figure 10.30 Count Timing in Internal Clock Operation ............................................................ Figure 10.31 Count Timing in External Clock Operation ........................................................... Figure 10.32 Output Compare Output Timing ............................................................................ Figure 10.33 Input Capture Input Signal Timing ........................................................................ Figure 10.34 Counter Clear Timing (Compare Match) ............................................................... Figure 10.35 Counter Clear Timing (Input Capture) ................................................................... Figure 10.36 Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match) .......................................................... Figure 10.37 Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture) .............................................................. Figure 10.38 TGI Interrupt Timing (Compare Match) ................................................................ Figure 10.39 TGI Interrupt Timing (Input Capture).................................................................... Figure 10.40 TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing............................................................................... Figure 10.41 TCIU Interrupt Setting Timing............................................................................... Figure 10.42 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by CPU ............................................................... Figure 10.43 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by DTC/DMAC* Activation .............................. Figure 10.44 Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Counting Mode ................. Figure 10.45 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations........................................ Figure 10.46 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations ................................ Figure 10.47 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match ........................................... Figure 10.48 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match........................... Figure 10.49 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture ................................................ Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xliv of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 446 447 448 448 449 450 451 452 453 453 456 457 457 458 460 461 462 463 464 465 469 469 470 470 471 471 472 472 473 474 475 475 476 476 477 478 479 480 480 481 Figure 10.50 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture ............................................... Figure 10.51 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture............................... Figure 10.52 Contention between Overflow and Counter Clearing ............................................ Figure 10.53 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow.................................................... Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of PPG........................................................................................... Figure 11.2 Overview Diagram of PPG..................................................................................... Figure 11.3 Timing of Transfer and Output of NDR Contents (Example) ................................ Figure 11.4 Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output (Example)............................................ Figure 11.5 Normal Pulse Output Example (Five-Phase Pulse Output) .................................... Figure 11.6 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output .............................................................................. Figure 11.7 Non-Overlapping Operation and NDR Write Timing ............................................ Figure 11.8 Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example)............................ Figure 11.9 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output Example (Four-Phase Complementary)............... Figure 11.10 Inverted Pulse Output (Example) ........................................................................... Figure 11.11 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture (Example)............................................. Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer Module.................................................................. Figure 12.2 Example of Pulse Output........................................................................................ Figure 12.3 Count Timing for Internal Clock Input................................................................... Figure 12.4 Count Timing for External Clock Input ................................................................. Figure 12.5 Timing of CMF Setting .......................................................................................... Figure 12.6 Timing of Timer Output ......................................................................................... Figure 12.7 Timing of Compare Match Clear ........................................................................... Figure 12.8 Timing of Clearance by External Reset.................................................................. Figure 12.9 Timing of OVF Setting........................................................................................... Figure 12.10 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear .......................................................... Figure 12.11 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment................................................... Figure 12.12 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare Match......................................... Section 13 Figure 13.1 Figure 13.2 Figure 13.3 Figure 13.4 Figure 13.5 Figure 13.6 Watchdog Timer Block Diagram of WDT ......................................................................................... Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode...................................................................... Operation in Interval Timer Mode ......................................................................... Writing to TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR................................................................. Contention between TCNT Write and Increment................................................... Circuit for System Reset by WDTOVF Signal (Example)..................................... 482 483 483 484 486 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 504 505 508 516 516 517 517 518 518 519 519 522 523 524 530 535 536 537 538 539 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xlv of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of SCI............................................................................................ Figure 14.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits)............................................................................................ Figure 14.3 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode ....................................... Figure 14.4 Relation between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase (Asynchronous Mode)............................................................................................ Figure 14.5 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart ...................................................................... Figure 14.6 Example of Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) ................................................... Figure 14.7 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart .................................................................. Figure 14.8 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit).......................................................................................................... Figure 14.9 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (1) ......................................................... Figure 14.9 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (2) ......................................................... Figure 14.10 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format (Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A) ........................................... Figure 14.11 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart ......................................... Figure 14.12 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit).......................................................................... Figure 14.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1)......................................... Figure 14.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2)......................................... Figure 14.14 Data Format in Clocked Synchronous Communication (For LSB-First) ............... Figure 14.15 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart ...................................................................... Figure 14.16 Sample SCI Transmission Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode ................... Figure 14.17 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart .................................................................. Figure 14.18 Example of SCI Operation in Reception ................................................................ Figure 14.19 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart ....................................................................... Figure 14.20 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations ....... Figure 14.21 Schematic Diagram of Smart Card Interface Pin Connections............................... Figure 14.22 Normal Smart Card Interface Data Format ............................................................ Figure 14.23 Direct Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 0) ....................................................... Figure 14.24 Inverse Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 1) ..................................................... Figure 14.25 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Smart Card Mode (Using Clock of 372 Times the Bit Rate) ............................................................... Figure 14.26 Retransfer Operation in SCI Transmit Mode ......................................................... Figure 14.27 TEND Flag Generation Timing in Transmission Operation .................................. Figure 14.28 Example of Transmission Processing Flow ........................................................... Figure 14.29 Retransfer Operation in SCI Receive Mode ........................................................... Figure 14.30 Example of Reception Processing Flow................................................................. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xlvi of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 543 576 578 579 580 582 583 584 586 587 589 590 592 593 594 595 596 598 599 600 601 603 604 605 605 606 607 609 610 611 612 613 Figure 14.31 Timing for Fixing Clock Output Level................................................................... Figure 14.32 Clock Halt and Restart Procedure .......................................................................... Figure 14.33 Block Diagram of IrDA.......................................................................................... Figure 14.34 IrDA Transmit/Receive Operations........................................................................ Figure 14.35 Example of Synchronous Transmission Using DTC.............................................. Figure 14.36 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Transmission................................ Figure 14.37 Port Pin States during Mode Transition (Internal Clock, Asynchronous Transmission) ........................................................................................................ Figure 14.38 Port Pin States during Mode Transition (Internal Clock, Synchronous Transmission) ................................................................................... Figure 14.39 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Reception ..................................... Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of I2C Bus Interface2..................................................................... Figure 15.2 External Circuit Connections of I/O Pins ............................................................... Figure 15.3 I2C Bus Formats...................................................................................................... Figure 15.4 I2C Bus Timing....................................................................................................... Figure 15.5 Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing 1........................................................... Figure 15.6 Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing 2........................................................... Figure 15.7 Master Receive Mode Operation Timing 1 ............................................................ Figure 15.8 Master Receive Mode Operation Timing 2 ............................................................ Figure 15.9 Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing 1............................................................. Figure 15.10 Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing 2............................................................. Figure 15.11 Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing 1 .............................................................. Figure 15.12 Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing 2 .............................................................. Figure 15.13 Block Diagram of Noise Canceler.......................................................................... Figure 15.14 Sample Flowchart for Master Transmit Mode........................................................ Figure 15.15 Sample Flowchart for Master Receive Mode ......................................................... Figure 15.16 Sample Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode.......................................................... Figure 15.17 Sample Flowchart for Slave Receive Mode ........................................................... Figure 15.18 Timing of the Bit Synchronous Circuit .................................................................. 614 615 616 617 623 625 626 626 627 630 631 643 643 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 659 Section 16 A/D Converter................................................................................. 661 Figure 16.1 Figure 16.2 Figure 16.3 Figure 16.4 Figure 16.5 Figure 16.6 Figure 16.7 Block Diagram of A/D Converter ..........................................................................662 A/D Conversion Timing.........................................................................................671 External Trigger Input Timing ...............................................................................673 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions ...................................................................675 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions ...................................................................675 Example of Analog Input Circuit ...........................................................................676 Example of Analog Input Protection Circuit ..........................................................678 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xlvii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Section 17 D/A Converter Figure 17.1 Block Diagram of D/A Converter .......................................................................... 682 Figure 17.2 Example of D/A Converter Operation.................................................................... 686 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) Figure 19.1 Block Diagram of Flash Memory........................................................................... Figure 19.2 Flash Memory State Transitions............................................................................. Figure 19.3 Boot Mode.............................................................................................................. Figure 19.4 User Program Mode ............................................................................................... Figure 19.5 384-kbyte Flash Memory Block Configuration (Modes 3, 4, and 7)...................... Figure 19.6 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode....................... Figure 19.7 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart ...................................................................... Figure 19.8 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart ................................................................................ Figure 19.9 Power-On/Off Timing ............................................................................................ Figure 19.10 Mode Transition Timing (Example: Boot Mode User Mode User Program Mode).............................................................................................. Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Figure 20.1 Block Diagram of Flash Memory........................................................................... Figure 20.2 Mode Transition of Flash Memory ........................................................................ Figure 20.3 Flash Memory Configuration ................................................................................. Figure 20.4 Block Division of User MAT................................................................................. Figure 20.5 Overview of User Procedure Program ................................................................... Figure 20.6 System Configuration in Boot Mode...................................................................... Figure 20.7 Automatic-Bit-Rate Adjustment Operation of SCI ................................................ Figure 20.8 Overview of Boot Mode State Transition Diagram................................................ Figure 20.9 Programming/Erasing Overview Flow................................................................... Figure 20.10 RAM Map when Programming/Erasing Is Executed ............................................. Figure 20.11 Programming Procedure......................................................................................... Figure 20.12 Erasing Procedure .................................................................................................. Figure 20.13 Procedure for Programming User MAT in User Boot Mode ................................. Figure 20.14 Procedure for Erasing User MAT in User Boot Mode ........................................... Figure 20.15 Transitions to Error-Protection State...................................................................... Figure 20.16 Switching between the User MAT and User Boot MAT ....................................... Figure 20.17 Boot Program States............................................................................................... Figure 20.18 Bit-Rate-Adjustment Sequence .............................................................................. Figure 20.19 Communication Protocol Format ........................................................................... Figure 20.20 New Bit-Rate Selection Sequence.......................................................................... Figure 20.21 Programming Sequence.......................................................................................... Figure 20.22 Erasure Sequence ................................................................................................... Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xlviii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 690 691 693 694 696 705 707 709 714 715 719 720 722 723 724 749 749 752 753 754 755 762 765 767 780 781 783 784 785 796 801 804 Section 21 Mask ROM Figure 21.1 Block Diagram of 256-kbyte Mask ROM (HD6432365)....................................... 811 Section 22 Figure 22.1 Figure 22.2 Figure 22.3 Figure 22.4 Figure 22.5 Figure 22.6 Figure 22.7 Section 23 Figure 23.1 Figure 23.2 Figure 23.3 Figure 23.4 Clock Pulse Generator Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator .............................................................. Connection of Crystal Oscillator (Example) .......................................................... Crystal Oscillator Equivalent Circuit ..................................................................... External Clock Input (Examples) ........................................................................... External Clock Input Timing.................................................................................. Note on Oscillator Board Design ........................................................................... Recommended External Circuitry for PLL Circuit ................................................ Power-Down Modes Mode Transitions.................................................................................................... Software Standby Mode Application Example ...................................................... Hardware Standby Mode Timing ........................................................................... Hardware Standby Mode Timing when Power Is Supplied ................................... 813 816 816 817 818 820 821 825 833 834 835 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Figure 25.1 Output Load Circuit................................................................................................ Figure 25.2 System Clock Timing............................................................................................. Figure 25.3 Oscillation Stabilization Timing (1) ....................................................................... Figure 25.3 Oscillation Stabilization Timing (2) ....................................................................... Figure 25.4 Reset Input Timing................................................................................................. Figure 25.5 Interrupt Input Timing............................................................................................ Figure 25.6 Basic Bus Timing: Two-State Access .................................................................... Figure 25.7 Basic Bus Timing: Three-State Access .................................................................. Figure 25.8 Basic Bus Timing: Three-State Access, One Wait................................................. Figure 25.9 Basic Bus Timing: Two-State Access (CS Assertion Period Extended) ................ Figure 25.10 Basic Bus Timing: Three-State Access (CS Assertion Period Extended) .............. Figure 25.11 Burst ROM Access Timing: One-State Burst Access ............................................ Figure 25.12 Burst ROM Access Timing: Two-State Burst Access............................................ Figure 25.13 DRAM Access Timing: Two-State Access ............................................................ Figure 25.14 DRAM Access Timing: Two-State Access, One Wait........................................... Figure 25.15 DRAM Access Timing: Two-State Burst Access .................................................. Figure 25.16 DRAM Access Timing: Three-State Access (RAST = 1) ...................................... Figure 25.17 DRAM Access Timing: Three-State Burst Access ................................................ Figure 25.18 CAS-Before-RAS Refresh Timing......................................................................... Figure 25.19 CAS-Before-RAS Refresh Timing (with Wait Cycle Insertion) ............................ Figure 25.20 Self-Refresh Timing (Return from Software Standby Mode: RAST = 0).............. 877 878 879 879 880 881 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 898 899 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page xlix of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Figure 25.21 Self-Refresh Timing (Return from Software Standby Mode: RAST = 1).............. Figure 25.22 External Bus Release Timing ................................................................................. Figure 25.23 External Bus Request Output Timing..................................................................... Figure 25.24 DMAC Single Address Transfer Timing: Two-State Access................................. Figure 25.25 DMAC Single Address Transfer Timing: Three-State Access............................... Figure 25.26 DMAC TEND Output Timing ............................................................................... Figure 25.27 DMAC DREQ Input Timing.................................................................................. Figure 25.28 I/O Port Input/Output Timing................................................................................. Figure 25.29 PPG Output Timing................................................................................................ Figure 25.30 TPU Input/Output Timing ...................................................................................... Figure 25.31 TPU Clock Input Timing........................................................................................ Figure 25.32 8-Bit Timer Output Timing .................................................................................... Figure 25.33 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing ............................................................................ Figure 25.34 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing............................................................................. Figure 25.35 WDT Output Timing.............................................................................................. Figure 25.36 SCK Clock Input Timing ....................................................................................... Figure 25.37 SCI Input/Output Timing: Synchronous Mode ...................................................... Figure 25.38 A/D Converter External Trigger Input Timing....................................................... Figure 25.39 I2C Bus Interface Input/Output Timing (Option).................................................... Appendix Figure C.1 Figure C.2 Figure D.1 899 900 900 902 903 903 904 906 906 906 907 907 907 907 908 908 908 908 909 Package Dimensions (TFP-120)............................................................................. 950 Package Dimensions (FP-128B) ............................................................................ 951 Timing of Address Bus, RD, HWR, and LWR (8-bit bus, 3-state access, no wait).......................................................................... 953 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page l of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Tables Section 1 Overview Table 1.1 Pin Arrangement in Each Operating Mode ............................................................ 8 Table 1.2 Pin Functions.......................................................................................................... 14 Section 2 CPU Table 2.1 Instruction Classification........................................................................................ Table 2.2 Operation Notation ................................................................................................. Table 2.3 Data Transfer Instructions ...................................................................................... Table 2.4 Arithmetic Operations Instructions ........................................................................ Table 2.5 Logic Operations Instructions ................................................................................ Table 2.6 Shift Instructions .................................................................................................... Table 2.7 Bit Manipulation Instructions................................................................................. Table 2.8 Branch Instructions................................................................................................. Table 2.9 System Control Instructions ................................................................................... Table 2.10 Block Data Transfer Instructions............................................................................ Table 2.11 Addressing Modes.................................................................................................. Table 2.12 Absolute Address Access Ranges .......................................................................... Table 2.13 Effective Address Calculation................................................................................ 37 38 39 40 42 42 43 45 46 47 49 51 53 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Table 3.1 MCU Operating Mode Selection............................................................................ 57 Table 3.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode.................................................................. 62 Section 4 Exception Handling Table 4.1 Exception Types and Priority ................................................................................. Table 4.2 Exception Handling Vector Table .......................................................................... Table 4.3 Status of CCR and EXR after Trace Exception Handling ...................................... Table 4.4 Status of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling ..................... 79 80 84 85 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Table 5.1 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................... 91 Table 5.2 Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities ................................ 103 Table 5.3 Interrupt Control Modes......................................................................................... 108 Table 5.4 Interrupt Response Times....................................................................................... 114 Table 5.5 Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution Statuses..................... 115 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page li of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Table 6.1 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................... 121 Table 6.2 Bus Specifications for Each Area (Basic Bus Interface) ........................................ 147 Table 6.3 Data Buses Used and Valid Strobes ....................................................................... 152 Table 6.4 Relation between Settings of Bits RMTS2 to RMTS0 and DRAM Space............. 165 Table 6.5 Relation between Settings of Bits MXC2 to MXC0 and Address Multiplexing .... 166 Table 6.6 DRAM Interface Pins............................................................................................. 167 Table 6.7 Idle Cycles in Mixed Accesses to Normal Space and DRAM ............................... 201 Table 6.8 Pin States in Idle Cycle .......................................................................................... 204 Table 6.9 Pin States in Bus Released State ............................................................................ 207 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Table 7.1 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................... Table 7.3 DMAC Activation Sources .................................................................................... Table 7.4 DMAC Transfer Modes ......................................................................................... Table 7.5 Register Functions in Sequential Mode.................................................................. Table 7.6 Register Functions in Idle Mode ............................................................................ Table 7.7 Register Functions in Repeat Mode ....................................................................... Table 7.8 Register Functions in Single Address Mode .......................................................... Table 7.9 Register Functions in Normal Mode ...................................................................... Table 7.10 Register Functions in Block Transfer Mode........................................................... Table 7.11 DMAC Channel Priority Order .............................................................................. Table 7.12 Interrupt Sources and Priority Order ...................................................................... Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Table 8.1 Relationship between Activation Sources and DTCER Clearing........................... Table 8.2 Interrupt Sources, DTC Vector Addresses, and Corresponding DTCEs ................ Table 8.3 Chain Transfer Conditions ..................................................................................... Table 8.4 Register Function in Normal Mode........................................................................ Table 8.5 Register Function in Repeat Mode ......................................................................... Table 8.6 Register Function in Block Transfer Mode ............................................................ Table 8.7 DTC Execution Status............................................................................................ Table 8.8 Number of States Required for Each Execution Status .......................................... Section 9 I/O Ports Table 9.1 Port Functions ........................................................................................................ Table 9.2 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port A)........................................................................ Table 9.3 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port B)........................................................................ Table 9.4 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port C)........................................................................ Table 9.5 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port D)........................................................................ Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page lii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 215 241 244 246 249 252 256 259 262 282 287 301 304 308 308 309 310 314 315 324 372 376 380 384 Table 9.6 Section 10 Table 10.1 Table 10.2 Table 10.3 Table 10.4 Table 10.5 Table 10.6 Table 10.7 Table 10.8 Table 10.9 Table 10.10 Table 10.11 Table 10.12 Table 10.13 Table 10.14 Table 10.15 Table 10.16 Table 10.17 Table 10.18 Table 10.19 Table 10.20 Table 10.21 Table 10.22 Table 10.23 Table 10.24 Table 10.25 Table 10.26 Table 10.27 Table 10.28 Table 10.29 Table 10.30 Table 10.31 Table 10.32 Table 10.33 Table 10.34 Table 10.35 Table 10.36 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port E) ........................................................................ 388 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) TPU Functions........................................................................................................ Pin Configuration ................................................................................................... CCLR2 to CCLR0 (Channels 0 and 3)................................................................... CCLR2 to CCLR0 (Channels 1, 2, 4, and 5).......................................................... TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 0)................................................................................ TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 1)................................................................................ TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 2)................................................................................ TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 3)................................................................................ TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 4)................................................................................ TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 5)................................................................................ MD3 to MD0.......................................................................................................... TIORH_0................................................................................................................ TIORL_0 ................................................................................................................ TIOR_1 .................................................................................................................. TIOR_2 .................................................................................................................. TIORH_3................................................................................................................ TIORL_3 ................................................................................................................ TIOR_4 .................................................................................................................. TIOR_5 .................................................................................................................. TIORH_0................................................................................................................ TIORL_0 ................................................................................................................ TIOR_1 .................................................................................................................. TIOR_2 .................................................................................................................. TIORH_3................................................................................................................ TIORL_3 ................................................................................................................ TIOR_4 .................................................................................................................. TIOR_5 .................................................................................................................. Register Combinations in Buffer Operation........................................................... Cascaded Combinations ......................................................................................... PWM Output Registers and Output Pins................................................................ Clock Input Pins in Phase Counting Mode............................................................. Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 1 ....................................... Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 2 ....................................... Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 3 ...................................... Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 4 ....................................... TPU Interrupts........................................................................................................ 402 405 409 409 410 410 411 411 412 412 414 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 448 452 455 459 461 462 463 464 467 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page liii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) Table 11.1 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................... 487 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) Table 12.1 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................... Table 12.2 Clock Input to TCNT and Count Condition ........................................................... Table 12.3 8-Bit Timer Interrupt Sources ................................................................................ Table 12.4 Timer Output Priorities .......................................................................................... Table 12.5 Switching of Internal Clock and TCNT Operation ................................................ 509 512 521 525 526 Section 13 Watchdog Timer Table 13.1 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................... 530 Table 13.2 WDT Interrupt Source............................................................................................ 536 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 14.1 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................... Table 14.2 Relationships between N Setting in BRR and Bit Rate B ...................................... Table 14.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) .................................. Table 14.4 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode)............................ Table 14.5 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode).................. Table 14.6 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode) ...................... Table 14.7 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Clocked Synchronous Mode)...... Table 14.8 Examples of Bit Rate for Various BRR Settings (Smart Card Interface Mode) (when n = 0 and S = 372) ....................................................................................... Table 14.9 Maximum Bit Rate at Various Frequencies (Smart Card Interface Mode) (when S = 372) ....................................................................................................... Table 14.10 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode) ..................................................... Table 14.11 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling........................................................ Table 14.12 Settings of Bits IrCKS2 to IrCKS0 ........................................................................ Table 14.13 SCI Interrupt Sources ............................................................................................. Table 14.14 Interrupt Sources .................................................................................................... Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Table 15.1 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................... Table 15.2 Transfer Rate.......................................................................................................... Table 15.3 Interrupt Requests .................................................................................................. Table 15.4 Time for monitoring SCL....................................................................................... 544 564 565 567 568 569 570 571 572 577 585 618 620 621 631 634 658 659 Section 16 A/D Converter Table 16.1 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................... 663 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page liv of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Table 16.2 Table 16.3 Table 16.4 Table 16.5 Table 16.6 Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers................................ A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode) .................................................................... A/D Conversion Time (Scan Mode)....................................................................... A/D Converter Interrupt Source ............................................................................. Analog Pin Specifications ...................................................................................... 665 672 672 673 679 Section 17 D/A Converter Table 17.1 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................... 683 Table 17.2 Control of D/A Conversion .................................................................................... 685 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) Table 19.1 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode.................................... 692 Table 19.2 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................... 697 Table 19.3 Erase Blocks........................................................................................................... 701 Table 19.4 Setting On-Board Programming Mode................................................................... 702 Table 19.5 Boot Mode Operation............................................................................................. 704 Table 19.6 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate is Possible............................................................................................................... 705 Table 19.7 Flash Memory Operating States ............................................................................. 711 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Table 20.1 Comparison of Programming Modes ..................................................................... Table 20.2 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................... Table 20.3 Register/Parameter and Target Mode ..................................................................... Table 20.4 Parameters and Target Modes ................................................................................ Table 20.5 Setting On-Board Programming Mode................................................................... Table 20.6 System Clock Frequency for Automatic-Bit-Rate Adjustment by This LSI .......... Table 20.7 Executable MAT .................................................................................................... Table 20.8 (1) Useable Area for Programming in User Program Mode ...................................... Table 20.8 (2) Useable Area for Erasure in User Program Mode................................................ Table 20.8 (3) Useable Area for Programming in User Boot Mode ............................................ Table 20.8 (4) Useable Area for Erasure in User Boot Mode...................................................... Table 20.9 Hardware Protection............................................................................................... Table 20.10 Software Protection ................................................................................................ Table 20.11 Inquiry and Selection Commands .......................................................................... Table 20.12 Programming/Erasing Command ........................................................................... Table 20.13 Status Code............................................................................................................. Table 20.14 Error Code .............................................................................................................. Table 20.15 User Branch Processing Start Intervals .................................................................. 721 726 727 736 748 750 769 770 772 774 776 778 779 786 799 808 809 810 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page lv of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Section 22 Clock Pulse Generator Table 22.1 Damping Resistance Value .................................................................................... 816 Table 22.2 Crystal Oscillator Characteristics ........................................................................... 817 Table 22.3 External Clock Input Conditions............................................................................ 818 Section 23 Power-Down Modes Table 23.1 Operating Modes and Internal States of the LSI .................................................... 824 Table 23.2 Oscillation Stabilization Time Settings .................................................................. 832 Table 23.3 Pin State in Each Processing State ...................................................................... 836 Section 25 Table 25.1 Table 25.2 Table 25.3 Table 25.4 Table 25.5 Table 25.6 Table 25.7 Table 25.8 Table 25.9 Table 25.10 Table 25.11 Table 25.12 Table 25.13 Table 25.14 Table 25.15 Table 25.16 Table 25.17 Table 25.18 Table 25.19 Table 25.20 Table 25.21 Table 25.22 Table 25.23 Table 25.24 Table 25.25 Table 25.26 Table 25.27 Table 25.28 Table 25.29 Electrical Characteristics Absolute Maximum Ratings................................................................................... DC Characteristics (1)............................................................................................ DC Characteristics (2)............................................................................................ Permissible Output Currents .................................................................................. Clock Timing ......................................................................................................... Control Signal Timing............................................................................................ Bus Timing (1) ....................................................................................................... Bus Timing (2) ....................................................................................................... DMAC Timing ....................................................................................................... Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules................................................................. A/D Conversion Characteristics............................................................................. D/A Conversion Characteristics............................................................................. Absolute Maximum Ratings................................................................................... DC Characteristics (1)............................................................................................ DC Characteristics (2)............................................................................................ Permissible Output Currents .................................................................................. Clock Timing ......................................................................................................... Control Signal Timing............................................................................................ Bus Timing (1) ....................................................................................................... Bus Timing (2) ....................................................................................................... DMAC Timing ....................................................................................................... Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules................................................................. A/D Conversion Characteristics............................................................................. D/A Conversion Characteristics............................................................................. Flash Memory Characteristics................................................................................ Absolute Maximum Ratings................................................................................... DC Characteristics.................................................................................................. DC Characteristics.................................................................................................. Permissible Output Currents .................................................................................. 873 874 875 876 878 880 882 884 901 904 910 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 919 920 921 923 923 924 926 927 928 929 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page lvi of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Table 25.30 Table 25.31 Table 25.32 Table 25.33 Table 25.34 Table 25.35 Table 25.36 Table 25.37 Table 25.38 Appendix Table D.1 Clock Timing.......................................................................................................... Control Signal Timing............................................................................................ Bus Timing (1) ....................................................................................................... Bus Timing (2) ....................................................................................................... DMAC Timing ....................................................................................................... Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules................................................................. A/D Conversion Characteristics ............................................................................. D/A Conversion Characteristics ............................................................................. Flash Memory Characteristics (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) .................................. 930 931 932 934 935 936 938 938 939 Execution State of Instructions............................................................................... 954 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page lvii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page lviii of lviii REJ09B0050-0600 Section 1 Overview Section 1 Overview 1.1 Features * High-speed H8S/2000 central processing unit with an internal 16-bit architecture Upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs on an object level Sixteen 16-bit general registers 65 basic instructions * Various peripheral functions DMA controller (DMAC) Data transfer controller (DTC) 16-bit timer-pulse unit (TPU) Programmable pulse generator (PPG) 8-bit timer (TMR) Watchdog timer (WDT) Asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication interface (SCI) I2C bus interface 2 (IIC2) 10-bit A/D converter 8-bit D/A converter Clock pulse generator Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 1 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 1 Overview * On-chip memory ROM Type Model ROM 512 kbytes 384 kbytes 384 kbytes 256 kbytes 256 kbytes 256 kbytes 256 kbytes RAM 32 kbytes 24 kbytes 32 kbytes 32 kbytes 24 kbytes 16 kbytes 16 kbytes 16 kbytes H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group Remarks H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group Flash memory version HD64F2368F HD64F2367F HD64F2364 HD64F2362F HD64F2361 HD64F2360 Masked ROM version HD6432365 ROMless version HD6412363 * General I/O ports I/O pins: 83 Input-only pins: 11 * Supports various power-down states * Compact package Package TFP-120 QFP-128 *2 Code TFP-120 (TFP-120V ) FP-128B (FP-128BV*1) *1 Body Size 14.0 x 14.0 mm 14.0 x 20.0 mm Pin Pitch 0.4 mm 0.5 mm Notes: 1. Pb free version 2. Not supported by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 2 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 1 Overview 1.2 Block Diagram Figures 1.1 and 1.2 show the internal block diagrams of this LSI. VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC PLLVCC PLLVSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS PD7/D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PD0/D8 Port D MD2 MD1 MD0 EXTAL XTAL EMLE STBY RES WDTOVF NMI PE7/D7 PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 Port E H8S/2000 CPU Bus controller Clock pulse generator PF7/ PF6/AS PF5/RD PF4/HWR PF3/LWR PF2/CS6/LCAS PF1/CS5/UCAS PF0/WAIT/OE PG6/BREQ PG5/BACK PG4/CS4/BREQO PG3/CS3/RAS3 PG2/CS2/RAS2 PG1/CS1 PG0/CS0 Internal address bus PLL Internal data bus PA7/A23/CS7/IRQ7 PA6/A22/IRQ6 PA5/A21/IRQ5 PA4/A20/IRQ4 PA3/A19 PA2/A18 PA1/A17 PA0/A16 Port A Peripheral data bus Peripheral address bus Interrupt controller Port F DTC PB7/A15 PB6/A14 PB5/A13 PB4/A12 PB3/A11 PB2/A10 PB1/A9 PB0/A8 PC7/A7 PC6/A6 PC5/A5 PC4/A4 PC3/A3 PC2/A2 PC1/A1 PC0/A0 P35/SCK1/SCL0/(OE) P34/SCK0/SCK4/SDA0 P33/RxD1/SCL1 P32/RxD0/IrRxD/SDA1 P31/TxD1 P30/TxD0/IrTxD DMAC Port G WDT RAM SCI x 5 channels I2C bus interface 2 (option) Port 3 P85/SCK3 P83/RxD3 P81/TxD3 Port 8 TPU x 6 channels 8-bit D/A converter 10-bit A/D converter PPG Port 5 Port C ROM * (Flash memory Mask ROM) Port B P53/ADTRG//IRQ3 P52/SCK2/IRQ2 P51/RxD2/IRQ1 P50/TxD2/IRQ0 TMR x 2 channels Port 1 Port 2 Port 4 P47/AN7/(IRQ7) P46/AN6/(IRQ6) P45/AN5/(IRQ5) P44/AN4/(IRQ4) P43/AN3/(IRQ3) P42/AN2/(IRQ2) P41/AN1/(IRQ1) P40/AN0/(IRQ0) Port 9 P95/AN13/DA3 P94/AN12/DA2 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DREQ0 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DREQ1 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/TEND0 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/TEND1 P14/PO12/TIOCA1/DACK0 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC/DACK1 P16/PO14/TIOCA2 P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD P20/PO0/TIOCA3/TMRI0 P21/PO1/TIOCB3/TMRI1 P22/PO2/TIOCC3/TMCI0 P23/PO3/TIOCD3/TxD4/TMCI1 P24/PO4/TIOCA4/RxD4/TMO0 P25/PO5/TIOCB4/TMO1 P26/PO6/TIOCA5 P27/PO7/TIOCB5 Note: * The ROMless version has no on-chip ROM. Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram of H8S/2367F, H8S/2365, and H8S/2363 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 3 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Vref AVCC AVSS Section 1 Overview VCC VCC VCC VCC PLLVCC PLLVSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VCL PD7/D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PD0/D8 Port D MD2 MD1 MD0 EXTAL XTAL EMLE STBY RES WDTOVF NMI PE7/D7 PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 Port E H8S/2000 CPU Bus controller Clock pulse generator PF7/ PF6/AS PF5/RD PF4/HWR PF3/LWR PF2/CS6/LCAS PF1/CS5/UCAS PF0/WAIT/OE PG6/BREQ PG5/BACK PG4/CS4/BREQO PG3/CS3/RAS3 PG2/CS2/RAS2 PG1/CS1 PG0/CS0 Internal address bus PLL Internal data bus PA7/A23/CS7/IRQ7 PA6/A22/IRQ6 PA5/A21/IRQ5 PA4/A20/IRQ4 PA3/A19 PA2/A18 PA1/A17 PA0/A16 Port A Peripheral data bus Peripheral address bus Interrupt controller Port F DTC PB7/A15 PB6/A14 PB5/A13 PB4/A12 PB3/A11 PB2/A10 PB1/A9 PB0/A8 PC7/A7 PC6/A6 PC5/A5 PC4/A4 PC3/A3 PC2/A2 PC1/A1 PC0/A0 P35/SCK1/SCL0/(OE) P34/SCK0/SCK4/SDA0 P33/RxD1/SCL1 P32/RxD0/IrRxD/SDA1 P31/TxD1 P30/TxD0/IrTxD DMAC ROM (Flash memory) Port G WDT RAM SCI x 5 channels I2C bus interface 2 (option) Port 3 P85/SCK3 P83/RxD3 P81/TxD3 Port 8 TPU x 6 channels 8-bit D/A converter 10-bit A/D converter PPG Port 5 Port C Port B P53/ADTRG//IRQ3 P52/SCK2/IRQ2 P51/RxD2/IRQ1 P50/TxD2/IRQ0 TMR x 2 channels Port 1 Port 2 Port 4 P47/AN7/(IRQ7) P46/AN6/(IRQ6) P45/AN5/(IRQ5) P44/AN4/(IRQ4) P43/AN3/(IRQ3) P42/AN2/(IRQ2) P41/AN1/(IRQ1) P40/AN0/(IRQ0) Port 9 P95/AN13/DA3 P94/AN12/DA2 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DREQ0 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DREQ1 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/TEND0 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/TEND1 P14/PO12/TIOCA1/DACK0 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC/DACK1 P16/PO14/TIOCA2 P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD P20/PO0/TIOCA3/TMRI0 P21/PO1/TIOCB3/TMRI1 P22/PO2/TIOCC3/TMCI0 P23/PO3/TIOCD3/TxD4/TMCI1 P24/PO4/TIOCA4/RxD4/TMO0 P25/PO5/TIOCB4/TMO1 P26/PO6/TIOCA5 P27/PO7/TIOCB5 Figure 1.2 Internal Block Diagram of H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 4 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Vref AVCC AVSS Section 1 Overview 1.3 1.3.1 Pin Description Pin Arrangement Figures 1.3 to 1.5 show the pin arrangements of this LSI. PG1/CS1 PG0/CS0 STBY VSS P81/TxD3 P83/RxD3 VCC VCC EXTAL XTAL VSS PF7/ PLLVSS RES PLLVCC PF6/AS PF5/RD PF4/HWR PF3/LWR PF2/CS6/LCAS PF1/CS5/UCAS PF0/WAIT/OE PD7/D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PD0/D8 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 PG2/CS2/RAS2 PG3/CS3/RAS3 AVCC Vref P40/AN0/(IRQ0) P41/AN1/(IRQ1) P42/AN2/(IRQ2) P43/AN3/(IRQ3) P44/AN4/(IRQ4) P45/AN5/(IRQ5) P46/AN6/(IRQ6) P47/AN7/(IRQ7) P94/AN12/DA2 P95/AN13/DA3 AVSS PG4/CS4/BREQO PG5/BACK PG6/BREQ P50/TxD2/IRQ0 P51/RxD2/IRQ1 P52/SCK2/IRQ2 P53/ADTRG/IRQ3 P35/SCK1/SCL0/(OE) P34/SCK0/SCK4/SDA0 P33/RxD1/SCL1 P32/RxD0/IrRxD/SDA1 P31/TxD1 P30/TxD0/IrTxD MD0 MD1 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 TFP-120 (Top view) 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 VCC PE7/D7 VSS PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 P85/SCK3 P27/PO7/TIOCB5 P26/PO6/TIOCA5 P25/PO5/TIOCB4/TMO1 P24/PO4/TIOCA4/TMO0/RxD4 P23/PO3/TIOCD3/TMCI1/TxD4 P22/PO2/TIOCC3/TMCI0 P21/PO1/TIOCB3/TMRI1 P20/PO0/TIOCA3/TMRI0 P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD P16/PO14/TIOCA2 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC/DACK1 P14/PO12/TIOCA1/DACK0 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/TEND1 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/TEND0 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DREQ1 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DREQ0 VCC NMI WDTOVF Note: * This is an emulator enable pin. Normally, this pin should be set to low. If this pin goes high in the flash memory version, the on-chip emulator function is enabled. At this time, pins P53, PG4, PG5, PG6, and WDTOVF function only for the on-chip emulator. Figure 1.3 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2367F, H8S/2365, and H8S/2363 MD2 VCC PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 PC4/A4 VSS PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PB0/A8 PB1/A9 PB2/A10 PB3/A11 PB4/A12 VSS PB5/A13 PB6/A14 PB7/A15 PA0/A16 VSS PA1/A17 PA2/A18 PA3/A19 PA4/A20/IRQ4 PA5/A21/IRQ5 PA6/A22/IRQ6 PA7/A23/CS7/IRQ7 EMLE* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 5 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 1 Overview PG1/CS1 PG0/CS0 STBY VSS P81/TxD3 P83/RxD3 VCC VCC EXTAL XTAL VSS PF7/ PLLVSS RES PLLVCC PF6/AS PF5/RD PF4/HWR PF3/LWR PF2/CS6/LCAS PF1/CS5/UCAS PF0/WAIT/OE PD7/D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PD0/D8 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 PG2/CS2/RAS2 PG3/CS3/RAS3 AVCC Vref P40/AN0/(IRQ0) P41/AN1/(IRQ1) P42/AN2/(IRQ2) P43/AN3/(IRQ3) P44/AN4/(IRQ4) P45/AN5/(IRQ5) P46/AN6/(IRQ6) P47/AN7/(IRQ7) P94/AN12/DA2 P95/AN13/DA3 AVSS PG4/CS4/BREQO PG5/BACK PG6/BREQ P50/TxD2/IRQ0 P51/RxD2/IRQ1 P52/SCK2/IRQ2 P53/ADTRG/IRQ3 P35/SCK1/SCL0/(OE) P34/SCK0/SCK4/SDA0 P33/RxD1/SCL1 P32/RxD0/IrRxD/SDA1 P31/TxD1 P30/TxD0/IrTxD MD0 MD1 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 TFP-120 (Top view) 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 VCC PE7/D7 VSS PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 P85/SCK3 P27/PO7/TIOCB5 P26/PO6/TIOCA5 P25/PO5/TIOCB4/TMO1 P24/PO4/TIOCA4/TMO0/RxD4 P23/PO3/TIOCD3/TMCI1/TxD4 P22/PO2/TIOCC3/TMCI0 P21/PO1/TIOCB3/TMRI1 P20/PO0/TIOCA3/TMRI0 P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD P16/PO14/TIOCA2 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC/DACK1 P14/PO12/TIOCA1/DACK0 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/TEND1 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/TEND0 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DREQ1 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DREQ0 VCL*2 NMI WDTOVF Notes: 1. This is an emulator enable pin. Normally, this pin should be set to low. If this pin goes high in the flash memory version, the on-chip emulator function is enabled. At this time, pins P53, PG4, PG5, PG6, and WDTOVF function only for the on-chip emulator. 2. A capacitor should be externally connected to the VCL pin. 33 0.1 F (Recommended value) Figure 1.4 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 6 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 MD2 VCC PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 PC4/A4 VSS PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PB0/A8 PB1/A9 PB2/A10 PB3/A11 PB4/A12 VSS PB5/A13 PB6/A14 PB7/A15 PA0/A16 VSS PA1/A17 PA2/A18 PA3/A19 PA4/A20/IRQ4 PA5/A21/IRQ5 PA6/A22/IRQ6 PA7/A23/CS7/IRQ7 EMLE*1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Section 1 Overview PG3/CS3/RAS3 PG2/CS2/RAS2 VSS VSS PG1/CS1 PG0/CS0 STBY VSS P81/TxD3 P83/RxD3 VCC VCC EXTAL XTAL VSS PF7/ PLLVSS RES PLLVCC PF6/AS PF5/RD PF4/HWR PF3/LWR PF2/CS6/LCAS PF1/CS5/UCAS PF0/WAIT/OE PD7/D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PD0/D8 VSS NC*1 VCC PE7/D7 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 Notes: FP-128B is not supported by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. 1. The NC pin should be fixed to Vss or should be open. 2. This is an emulator enable pin. Normally, this pin should be set to low. If this pin goes high in the flash memory version, the on-chip emulator function is enabled. At this time, pins P53, PG4, PG5, PG6, and WDTOVF function only for the on-chip emulator. Figure 1.5 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2367F, H8S/2365, and H8S/2363 MD0 MD1 VSS VSS MD2 VCC PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 PC4/A4 VSS PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PB0/A8 PB1/A9 PB2/A10 PB3/A11 PB4/A12 VSS PB5/A13 PB6/A14 PB7/A15 PA0/A16 VSS PA1/A17 PA2/A18 PA3/A19 PA4/A20/IRQ4 PA5/A21/IRQ5 PA6/A22/IRQ6 PA7/A23/CS7/IRQ7 EMLE*2 VSS VSS WDTOVF NMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 AVCC Vref P40/AN0/(IRQ0) P41/AN1/(IRQ1) P42/AN2/(IRQ2) P43/AN3/(IRQ3) P44/AN4/(IRQ4) P45/AN5/(IRQ5) P46/AN6/(IRQ6) P47/AN7/(IRQ7) P94/AN12/DA2 P95/AN13/DA3 AVSS PG4/CS4/BREQO PG5/BACK PG6/BREQ P50/TxD2/IRQ0 P51/RxD2/IRQ1 P52/SCK2/IRQ2 P53/ADTRG/IRQ3 P35/SCK1/SCL0/(OE) P34/SCK0/SCK4/SDA0 P33/RxD1/SCL1 P32/RxD0/IrRxD/SDA1 P31/TxD1 P30/TxD0/IrTxD 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 FP-128B (Top view) 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 VSS PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 P85/SCK3 P27/PO7/TIOCB5 P26/PO6/TIOCA5 P25/PO5/TIOCB4/TMO1 P24/PO4/TIOCA4/TMO0/RxD4 P23/PO3/TIOCD3/TMCI1/TxD4 P22/PO2/TIOCC3/TMCI0 P21/PO1/TIOCB3/TMRI1 P20/PO0/TIOCA3/TMRI0 P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD P16/PO14/TIOCA2 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC/DACK1 P14/PO12/TIOCA1/DACK0 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/TEND1 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/TEND0 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DREQ1 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DREQ0 VCC Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 7 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 1 Overview 1.3.2 Table 1.1 Pin Arrangement in Each Operating Mode Pin Arrangement in Each Operating Mode Pin Name Mode 7 Flash Memory Programmer Mode Vss Vcc A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 Vss A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 Vss A13 A14 A15 A16 Vss A17 A18 NC NC NC NC Pin No. TFP-120 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 QFP-128*1 Mode 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 MD2 Vcc A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 Vss A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 Vss A13 A14 A15 A16 Vss A17 A18 A19 A20/IRQ4 PA5/A21/IRQ5 PA6/A22/IRQ6 Mode 2 MD2 Vcc A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 Vss A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 Vss A13 A14 A15 A16 Vss A17 A18 A19 A20/IRQ4 PA5/A21/IRQ5 PA6/A22/IRQ6 Mode 4 MD2 Vcc PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 PC4/A4 Vss PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PB0/A8 PB1/A9 PB2/A10 PB3/A11 PB4/A12 Vss PB5/A13 PB6/A14 PB7/A15 PA0/A16 Vss PA1/A17 PA2/A18 PA3/A19 PA4/A20/IRQ4 PA5/A21/IRQ5 PA6/A22/IRQ6 EXPE = 1 MD2 Vcc PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 PC4/A4 Vss PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PB0/A8 PB1/A9 PB2/A10 PB3/A11 PB4/A12 Vss PB5/A13 PB6/A14 PB7/A15 PA0/A16 Vss PA1/A17 PA2/A18 PA3/A19 PA4/A20/IRQ4 PA5/IRQ5 PA6/IRQ6 EXPE = 0 MD2 Vcc PC0 PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4 Vss PC5 PC6 PC7 PB0 PB1 PB2 PB3 PB4 Vss PB5 PB6 PB7 PA0 Vss PA1 PA2 PA3 PA4/IRQ4 PA5/IRQ5 PA6/IRQ6 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 8 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Pin Name Mode 7 TFP-120 29 QFP-128*1 Mode 1 33 PA7/A23/CS7/ IRQ7 30 31 32 33 34 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 EMLE Vss Vss WDTOVF NMI VCC (VCL* ) 2 Mode 2 PA7/A23/CS7/ IRQ7 EMLE Vss Vss WDTOVF NMI VCC (VCL* ) 2 Mode 4 PA7/A23/CS7/ IRQ7 EMLE Vss Vss WDTOVF NMI VCC (VCL* ) 2 EXPE = 1 PA7/CS7/ IRQ7 EMLE Vss Vss WDTOVF NMI VCC (VCL* ) 2 EXPE = 0 PA7/IRQ7 Flash Memory Programmer Mode NC EMLE Vss Vss WDTOVF NMI VCC (VCL* ) 2 EMLE Vss Vss NC Vcc VCC (VCL*2) NC P10/PO8/ TIOCA0/ DREQ0 P10/PO8/ TIOCA0/ DREQ0 P11/PO9/ TIOCB0/ DREQ1 P12/PO10/ TEND0 P13/PO11/ TEND1 P14/PO12/ TIOCA1/ DACK0 P15/PO13/ DACK1 P16/PO14/ TIOCA2 P17/PO15/ P10/PO8/ TIOCA0/ DREQ0 P11/PO9/ TIOCB0/ DREQ1 P12/PO10/ TEND0 P13/PO11/ TEND1 P14/PO12/ TIOCA1/ DACK0 P15/PO13/ DACK1 P16/PO14/ TIOCA2 P17/PO15/ P10/PO8/ TIOCA0/ DREQ0 P11/PO9/ TIOCB0/ DREQ1 P12/PO10/ TEND0 P13/PO11/ TEND1 P14/PO12/ TIOCA1/ DACK0 P15/PO13/ DACK1 P16/PO14/ TIOCA2 P17/PO15/ P10/PO8/ TIOCA0/ DREQ0 P11/PO9/ TIOCB0/ DREQ1 P12/PO10/ TEND0 P13/PO11/ TEND1 P14/PO12/ TIOCA1/ DACK0 P15/PO13/ DACK1 P16/PO14/ TIOCA2 P17/PO15/ 35 41 P11/PO9/ TIOCB0/ DREQ1 NC 36 42 P12/PO10/ TEND0 NC TIOCC0/TCLKA/ TIOCC0/TCLKA/ TIOCC0/TCLKA/ TIOCC0/TCLKA/ TIOCC0/TCLKA/ 37 43 P13/PO11/ TEND1 NC TIOCD0/TCLKB/ TIOCD0/TCLKB/ TIOCD0/TCLKB/ TIOCD0/TCLKB/ TIOCD0/TCLKB/ 38 44 P14/PO12/ TIOCA1/ DACK0 NC 39 45 P15/PO13/ DACK1 NC TIOCB1/TCLKC/ TIOCB1/TCLKC/ TIOCB1/TCLKC/ TIOCB1/TCLKC/ TIOCB1/TCLKC/ 40 46 P16/PO14/ TIOCA2 NC 41 47 P17/PO15/ NC TIOCB2/TCLKD TIOCB2/TCLKD TIOCB2/TCLKD TIOCB2/TCLKD TIOCB2/TCLKD 42 48 P20/PO0/ P20/PO0/ P20/PO0/ P20/PO0/ P20/PO0/ NC TIOCA3/TMRI0 TIOCA3/(TMRI0) TIOCA3/(TMRI0) TIOCA3/(TMRI0) TIOCA3/(TMRI0) 43 49 P21/PO1/ P21/PO1/ P21/PO1/ P21/PO1/ P21/PO1/ NC OE TIOCB3/TMRI1 TIOCB3/TMRI1 TIOCB3/TMRI1 TIOCB3/TMRI1 TIOCB3/TMRI1 44 50 P22/PO2/ P22/PO2/ P22/PO2/ P22/PO2/ P22/PO2/ TIOCC3/TMCI0 TIOCC3/TMCI0 TIOCC3/TMCI0 TIOCC3/TMCI0 TIOCC3/TMCI0 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 9 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Pin Name Mode 7 TFP-120 45 QFP-128*1 Mode 1 51 P23/PO3/ TxD4 46 52 P24/PO4/ RxD4 47 53 P25/PO5/ TIOCB4/TMO1 48 54 P26/PO6/ TIOCA5 49 55 P27/PO7/ TIOCB5 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 P85/SCK3 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 Vss D7 Vcc NC Vss D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 Mode 2 P23/PO3/ TxD4 P24/PO4/ RxD4 P25/PO5/ TIOCB4/TMO1 P26/PO6/ TIOCA5 P27/PO7/ TIOCB5 P85/SCK3 PE0/D0 PE1/D1 PE2/D2 PE3/D3 PE4/D4 PE5/D5 PE6/D6 Vss PE7/D7 Vcc NC Vss D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 Mode 4 P23/PO3/ TxD4 P24/PO4/ RxD4 P25/PO5/ TIOCB4/TMO1 P26/PO6/ TIOCA5 P27/PO7/ TIOCB5 P85/SCK3 PE0/D0 PE1/D1 PE2/D2 PE3/D3 PE4/D4 PE5/D5 PE6/D6 Vss PE7/D7 Vcc NC Vss D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 EXPE = 1 P23/PO3/ TxD4 P24/PO4/ RxD4 P25/PO5/ TIOCB4/TMO1 P26/PO6/ TIOCA5 P27/PO7/ TIOCB5 P85/SCK3 PE0/D0 PE1/D1 PE2/D2 PE3/D3 PE4/D4 PE5/D5 PE6/D6 Vss PE7/D7 Vcc NC Vss D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 EXPE = 0 P23/PO3/ TxD4 P24/PO4/ RxD4 P25/PO5/ TIOCB4/TMO1 P26/PO6/ TIOCA5 P27/PO7/ TIOCB5 P85/SCK3 PE0 PE1 PE2 PE3 PE4 PE5 PE6 Vss PE7 Vcc NC Vss PD0 PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC Vss NC Vcc NC Vss I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 NC NC Vss WE Flash Memory Programmer Mode CE TIOCD3/TMCI1/ TIOCD3/TMCI1/ TIOCD3/TMCI1/ TIOCD3/TMCI1/ TIOCD3/TMCI1/ TIOCA4/TMO0/ TIOCA4/TMO0/ TIOCA4/TMO0/ TIOCA4/TMO0/ TIOCA4/TMO0/ Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 10 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Pin Name Mode 7 TFP-120 68 69 70 QFP-128*1 Mode 1 76 77 78 D15 PF0/WAIT/OE PF1/CS5/ UCAS 71 79 PF2/CS6/ LCAS 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 PF3/LWR HWR RD PF6/AS PLLVcc RES PLLVss PF7/ Vss XTAL EXTAL Vcc Vcc P83/RxD3 P81/TxD3 Vss STBY PG0/CS0 PG1/CS1 Vss Vss PG2/CS2/ RAS2 92 102 PG3/CS3/ RAS3 93 103 AVcc Mode 2 D15 PF0/WAIT/OE PF1/CS5/ UCAS PF2/CS6/ LCAS PF3/LWR HWR RD PF6/AS PLLVcc RES PLLVss PF7/ Vss XTAL EXTAL Vcc Vcc P83/RxD3 P81/TxD3 Vss STBY PG0/CS0 PG1/CS1 Vss Vss PG2/CS2/ RAS2 PG3/CS3/ RAS3 AVcc Mode 4 D15 PF0/WAIT/OE PF1/CS5/ UCAS PF2/CS6/ LCAS PF3/LWR HWR RD PF6/AS PLLVcc RES PLLVss PF7/ Vss XTAL EXTAL Vcc Vcc P83/RxD3 P81/TxD3 Vss STBY PG0/CS0 PG1/CS1 Vss Vss PG2/CS2/ RAS2 PG3/CS3/ RAS3 AVcc EXPE = 1 D15 PF0/WAIT/OE PF1/CS5/ UCAS PF2/CS6/ LCAS PF3/LWR HWR RD PF6/AS PLLVcc RES PLLVss PF7/ Vss XTAL EXTAL Vcc Vcc P83/RxD3 P81/TxD3 Vss STBY PG0/CS0 PG1/CS1 Vss Vss PG2/CS2/ RAS2 PG3/CS3/ RAS3 AVcc AVcc Vcc PG3 NC PF3 PF4 PF5 PF6 PLLVcc RES PLLVss PF7/ Vss XTAL EXTAL Vcc Vcc P83/RxD3 P81/TxD3 Vss STBY PG0 PG1 Vss Vss PG2 NC NC NC NC Vcc RES Vss NC Vss XTAL EXTAL Vcc Vcc NC NC Vss Vcc NC NC Vss Vss NC PF2 NC EXPE = 0 PD7 PF0 PF1 Flash Memory Programmer Mode I/O7 NC NC Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 11 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Pin Name Mode 7 TFP-120 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 QFP-128*1 Mode 1 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 Vref Mode 2 Vref Mode 4 Vref EXPE = 1 Vref EXPE = 0 Vref Flash Memory Programmer Mode NC P40/AN0/(IRQ0) P40/AN0/(IRQ0) P40/AN0/(IRQ0) P40/AN0/(IRQ0) P40/AN0/(IRQ0) NC P41/AN1/(IRQ1) P41/AN1/(IRQ1) P41/AN1/(IRQ1) P41/AN1/(IRQ1) P41/AN1/(IRQ1) NC P42/AN2/(IRQ2) P42/AN2/(IRQ2) P42/AN2/(IRQ2) P42/AN2/(IRQ2) P42/AN2/(IRQ2) NC P43/AN3/(IRQ3) P43/AN3/(IRQ3) P43/AN3/(IRQ3) P43/AN3/(IRQ3) P43/AN3/(IRQ3) NC P44/AN4/(IRQ4) P44/AN4/(IRQ4) P44/AN4/(IRQ4) P44/AN4/(IRQ4) P44/AN4/(IRQ4) NC P45/AN5/(IRQ5) P45/AN5/(IRQ5) P45/AN5/(IRQ5) P45/AN5/(IRQ5) P45/AN5/(IRQ5) NC P46/AN6/(IRQ6) P46/AN6/(IRQ6) P46/AN6/(IRQ6) P46/AN6/(IRQ6) P46/AN6/(IRQ6) NC P47/AN7/(IRQ7) P47/AN7/(IRQ7) P47/AN7/(IRQ7) P47/AN7/(IRQ7) P47/AN7/(IRQ7) NC P94/AN12/DA2 P95/AN13/DA3 AVss PG4/CS4/ BREQO PG5/BACK PG6/BREQ P94/AN12/DA2 P95/AN13/DA3 AVss PG4/CS4/ BREQO PG5/BACK PG6/BREQ P94/AN12/DA2 P95/AN13/DA3 AVss PG4/CS4/ BREQO PG5/BACK PG6/BREQ P94/AN12/DA2 P95/AN13/DA3 AVss PG4/CS4/ BREQO PG5/BACK PG6/BREQ P94/AN12/DA2 P95/AN13/DA3 AVss PG4 NC NC Vss NC 107 108 109 110 111 112 117 118 119 120 121 122 PG5 PG6 P50/TxD2/IRQ0 P51/RxD2/IRQ1 P52/SCK2/IRQ2 NC NC Vss Vss Vcc NC P50/TxD2/IRQ0 P50/TxD2/IRQ0 P50/TxD2/IRQ0 P50/TxD2/IRQ0 P51/RxD2/IRQ1 P51/RxD2/IRQ1 P51/RxD2/IRQ1 P51/RxD2/IRQ1 P52/SCK2/IRQ2 P52/SCK2/IRQ2 P52/SCK2/IRQ2 P52/SCK2/IRQ2 P53/ADTRG/ IRQ3 P53/ADTRG/ IRQ3 P35/SCK1/ SCL0/(OE) P34/SCK0/ SCK4/SDA0 P53/ADTRG/ IRQ3 P35/SCK1/ SCL0/(OE) P34/SCK0/ SCK4/SDA0 P53/ADTRG/ IRQ3 P35/SCK1/ SCL0/(OE) P34/SCK0/ SCK4/SDA0 P53/ADTRG/ IRQ3 113 123 P35/SCK1/ SCL0/(OE) P35/SCK1/SCL0 NC 114 124 P34/SCK0/ SCK4/SDA0 P34/SCK0/ SCK4/SDA0 NC 115 116 125 126 P33/RxD1/SCL1 P33/RxD1/SCL1 P33/RxD1/SCL1 P33/RxD1/SCL1 P33/RxD1/SCL1 NC P32/RxD0/ IrRxD/SDA1 P32/RxD0/ IrRxD/SDA1 P31/TxD1 P32/RxD0/ IrRxD/SDA1 P31/TxD1 P32/RxD0/ IrRxD/SDA1 P31/TxD1 P32/RxD0/ IrRxD/SDA1 P31/TxD1 NC Vcc 117 118 119 120 127 128 1 2 P31/TxD1 P30/TxD0/IrTxD P30/TxD0/IrTxD P30/TxD0/IrTxD P30/TxD0/IrTxD P30/TxD0/IrTxD NC MD0 MD1 MD0 MD1 MD0 MD1 MD0 MD1 MD0 MD1 Vss Vss Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 12 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Pin Name Mode 7 TFP-120 QFP-128*1 Mode 1 3 4 Vss Vss Mode 2 Vss Vss Mode 4 Vss Vss EXPE = 1 Vss Vss EXPE = 0 Vss Vss Flash Memory Programmer Mode Vss Vss Notes: 1. Not supported by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. 2. Used as the VCL pin in the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 13 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 1 Overview 1.3.3 Table 1.2 Pin Functions Pin Functions Pin No. Type Symbol TFP-120 2 QFP-128*1 I/O Input Function Power supply pins. VCC pins should be connected to the system power supply. Ground pins. VSS pins should be connected to the system power supply (0 V). Power supply pin for the on-chip PLL oscillator. Ground pin for the on-chip PLL oscillator. Connect to VSS via a 0.1 F (recommended value) capacitor (placed close to the pin). For connection to a crystal oscillator. See section 22, Clock Pulse Generator for typical connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator and external clock input. For connection to a crystal oscillator. The EXTAL pin can also input an external clock. See section 22, Clock Pulse Generator for typical connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator and external clock input. Power Supply Vcc 2, 33* , 60, 6,39,66, 83, 84 91,92 8, 17, 22, 58, 80, 87 3,4,12,21, 26,35,36, 64,68,88, 95,99,100 84 86 Vss Input PLLVCC PLLVSS VCL 76 78 33*3 Input Input Input Clock XTAL 81 89 Input EXTAL 82 90 Input 0 Operating mode control MD2 MD1 MD0 79 1, 120, 119 87 5, 2, 1 Output Supplies the system clock to external devices. Input These pins set the operating mode. These pins should not be changed while the MCU is operating. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 14 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Type Symbol TFP-120 77 88 QFP-128* 85 96 1 I/O Input Input Function Reset pin. When this pin is driven low, the chip is reset. When this pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. Enables emulator. This pin should be connected to the power supply (0 V). System control RES STBY EMLE 30 34 Input Address bus A23 to A0 29 to 23, 21 to 18, 16 to 9, 7 to 3 68 to 61, 59, 57 to 51 29,71,70, 106, 92 to 89 75 33 to 27, 25 to 22, 20 to 13, 11 to 7 76 to 69, 65, 63 to 57 33,79,78, 116,102, 101,98,97 83 Output Address output pins. Data bus D15 to D0 CS7 to CS0 AS Input/ output These pins constitute a bidirectional data bus. Bus control Output Signals that select division areas 7 to 0 in the external address space. Output When this pin is low, it indicates that address output on the address bus is valid. Output When this pin is low, it indicates that the external address space is being read. Output Strobe signal indicating that external address space is to be written, and the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is enabled. Write enable signal for accessing the DRAM space. RD 74 82 HWR 73 81 LWR 72 80 Output Strobe signal indicating that external address space is to be written, and the lower half (D7 to D0) of the data bus is enabled. Input Input The external bus master requests the bus to this LSI. External bus request signal when the internal bus master accesses the external space in external bus release state. BREQ BREQO 108 106 118 116 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 15 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Type Bus control Symbol BACK UCAS TFP-120 107 70 QFP-128* 117 78 1 I/O Function Output Indicates the bus is released to the external bus master. Output Upper column address strobe signal for accessing the 16-bit DRAM space. Column address strobe signal for accessing the 8-bit DRAM space. LCAS 71 79 Output Lower column address strobe signal for accessing the 16-bit DRAM space. Output Row address strobe signal for the DRAM interface. Input Requests insertion of a wait state in the bus cycle when accessing external 3-state address space. RAS2 RAS3 WAIT 91 92 69 101 102 77 OE (OE) 69, 113 77, 123 Output Output enable signal for accessing the DRAM space. The output pins of OE and (OE) are selected by the port function control register 2 (PFCR2) of port 3. Interrupt signals NMI 32 38 Input Input Nonmaskable interrupt request pin. Fix high when not used. These pins request a maskable interrupt. The input pins of IRQn and (IRQn) are selected by the IRQ pin select register (ITSR) of the interrupt controller. (n = 0 to 7) IRQ7 to 29 to 26, 33 to 30, IRQ0 112 to 109, 122 to 119, (IRQ7) to 102 to 95 112 to 105 (IRQ0) DMA controller DREQ1 (DMAC) DREQ0 TEND1, TEND0 DACK1, DACK0 35, 34 37, 36 39, 38 41, 40 43, 42 45, 44 Input These signals request DMAC activation. Output These signals indicate the end of DMAC data transfer. Output DMAC single address transfer acknowledge signals. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 16 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Type Symbol TFP-120 41, 39, 37, 36 34, 35, 36, 37 38, 39 40, 41 42, 43, 44, 45 46, 47 48, 49 41 to 34, 49 to42 46, 47 44, 45 42, 43 QFP-128* 47, 45, 43, 42 40, 41, 42, 43 44, 45 46, 47 48, 49, 50, 51 52, 53 54, 55 47 to 40, 55 to 48 52, 53 50, 51 48, 49 37 1 I/O Input Function External clock input pins for the timer. 16-bit timer TCLKD pulse unit (TPU) TCLKC TCLKB TCLKA TIOCA0 TIOCB0 TIOCC0 TIOCD0 TIOCA1 TIOCB1 TIOCA2 TIOCB2 TIOCA3 TIOCB3 TIOCC3 TIOCD3 TIOCA4 TIOCB4 TIOCA5 TIOCB5 Programmable PO15 to pulse generator PO0 (PPG) 8-bit timer (TMR) TMO0 TMO1 TMCI0 TMCI1 TMRI0 TMRI1 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Input/ output TGRA_0 to TGRD_0 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pins. TGRA_1 and TGRB_1 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pins. TGRA_2 and TGRB_2 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pins. TGRA_3 to TGRD_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pins. TGRA_4 and TGRB_4 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pins. TGRA_5 and TGRB_5 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pins. Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Output Pulse output pins. Output Waveform output pins with output compare function. Input Input External event input pins. Counter reset input pins. WDTOVF 31 Output Counter overflow signal output pin in watchdog timer mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 17 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Type Symbol TFP-120 45, 86, 109, 117, 118 46, 85, 110, 115, 116 114, 50, 111, 113, 114 115, 113 116, 114 104 to 95 QFP-128* 51, 94, 119, 127, 128 52, 93, 120 125, 126 124, 56, 121, 123, 124 125, 123 126, 124 114 to 105 1 I/O Function Serial TxD4 communication TxD3 interface(SCI)/ TxD2 smart card TxD1 interface (SCI_0 TxD0/ with IrDA IrTxD function) RxD4 RxD3 RxD2 RxD1 RxD0/ IrRxD SCK4 SCK3 SCK2 SCK1 SCK0 IIC bus SCL1 interface2 (IIC2) SCL0 SDA1 SDA0 A/D converter AN13, AN12, AN7 to AN0 ADTRG D/A converter A/D converter, D/A converter DA3, DA2 AVcc Output Data output pins. Input Data input pins. Input/ output Clock input/output pins. Input/ output Input/ output Input IIC clock input/output pins. IIC data input/output pins. Analog input pins. 112 104, 103 93 122 114, 113 103 Input Pin for input of an external trigger to start A/D conversion. Output Analog output pins. Input The analog power-supply pin for the A/D converter and D/A converter. When the A/D converter and D/A converter are not used, this pin should be connected to the system power supply (+3 V). AVss 105 115 Input The ground pin for the A/D converter and D/A converter. This pin should be connected to the system power supply (0 V). Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 18 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Type A/D converter, D/A converter Symbol Vref TFP-120 94 QFP-128* 104 1 I/O Input Function The reference voltage input pin for the A/D converter and D/A converter. When the A/D converter and D/A converter are not used, this pin should be connected to the system power supply (+3 V). I/O ports P17 to P1041 to 34 P27 to P2049 to 42 P35 to P30113 to 118 P47 to P40102 to 95 P53 to P50112 to 109 P85, P83, P81 P95, P94 PA7 to PA0 PB7 to PB0 PC7 to PC0 PD7 to PD0 PE7 to PE0 PF7 to PF0 50, 85, 86 104, 103 29 to 23, 21 20 to 18, 16 to 12 11 to 9, 7 to 3 68 to 61 59, 57 to 51 79, 75 to 69 47 to 40 55 to 48 123 to 128 112 to 105 122 to 119 56, 93, 94 114, 113 33 to 27, 25 24 to 22, 20 to 16 15 to 13, 11 to 7 76 to 69 65, 63 to 57 87, 83 to 77 Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input Input/ output Input/ output Input Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Eight-bit input/output pins. Eight-bit input/output pins. Six-bit input/output pins. Eight-bit input pins. Four-bit input/output pins. Three-bit input/output pins. Two-bit input pins. Eight-bit input/output pins. Eight-bit input/output pins. Eight-bit input/output pins. Eight-bit input/output pins. Eight-bit input/output pins. Eight-bit input/output pins. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 19 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Type I/O ports Symbol PG6 to PG0 TFP-120 QFP-128* 1 I/O Input/ output Function Seven-bit input/output pins. 108 to 106, 118 to 116, 92 to 89 102,101, 98,97 Notes: 1. Not supported by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. 2. VCL on the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. Do not connect to VCL. 3. H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group only. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 20 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU Section 2 CPU The H8S/2000 CPU is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture that is upward-compatible with the H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs. The H8S/2000 CPU has sixteen 16-bit general registers, can address a 16-Mbyte linear address space, and is ideal for realtime control. This section describes the H8S/2000 CPU. The usable modes and address spaces differ depending on the product. For details on each product, refer to section 3, MCU Operating Modes. 2.1 Features * Upward-compatibility with H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs Can execute H8/300 and H8/300H CPU object programs * General-register architecture Sixteen 16-bit general registers also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers * Sixty-five basic instructions 8/16/32-bit arithmetic and logic instructions Multiply and divide instructions Powerful bit-manipulation instructions * Eight addressing modes Register direct [Rn] Register indirect [@ERn] Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:32,ERn)] Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @-ERn] Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32] Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32] Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC) or @(d:16,PC)] Memory indirect [@@aa:8] * 16-Mbyte address space Program: 16 Mbytes Data: 16 Mbytes * High-speed operation All frequently-used instructions are executed in one or two states 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 1 state 8 x 8-bit register-register multiply: 12 states (MULXU.B), 13 states (MULXS.B) 16 / 8-bit register-register divide: 12 states (DIVXU.B) CPUS211A_000020020100 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 21 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU 16 x 16-bit register-register multiply: 20 states (MULXU.W), 21 states (MULXS.W) 32 / 16-bit register-register divide: 20 states (DIVXU.W) * Two CPU operating modes Normal mode* Advanced mode Note: * For this LSI, normal mode is not available. * Power-down state Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction Selectable CPU clock speed 2.1.1 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU The differences between the H8S/2600 CPU and the H8S/2000 CPU are as shown below. * Register configuration The MAC register is supported only by the H8S/2600 CPU. * Basic instructions The four instructions MAC, CLRMAC, LDMAC, and STMAC are supported only by the H8S/2600 CPU. * The number of execution states of the MULXU and MULXS instructions Execution States Instruction MULXU MULXS Mnemonic MULXU.B Rs, Rd MULXU.W Rs, ERd MULXS.B Rs, Rd MULXS.W Rs, ERd H8S/2600 3 4 4 5 H8S/2000 12 20 13 21 In addition, there are differences in address space, CCR and EXR register functions, power-down modes, etc., depending on the model. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 22 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU 2.1.2 Differences from H8/300 CPU In comparison to the H8/300 CPU, the H8S/2000 CPU has the following enhancements. * More general registers and control registers Eight 16-bit extended registers, and one 8-bit and two 32-bit control registers, have been added. * Expanded address space Normal mode supports the same 64-kbyte address space as the H8/300 CPU. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte address space. * Enhanced addressing The addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 16-Mbyte address space. * Enhanced instructions Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced. Signed multiply and divide instructions have been added. Two-bit shift and two-bit rotate instructions have been added. Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added. A test and set instruction has been added. * Higher speed Basic instructions are executed twice as fast. 2.1.3 Differences from H8/300H CPU In comparison to the H8/300H CPU, the H8S/2000 CPU has the following enhancements. * Additional control register One 8-bit control register has been added. * Enhanced instructions Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced. Two-bit shift and two-bit rotate instructions have been added. Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added. A test and set instruction has been added. * Higher speed Basic instructions are executed twice as fast. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 23 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU 2.2 CPU Operating Modes The H8S/2000 CPU has two operating modes: normal and advanced. Normal mode supports a maximum 64-kbyte address space. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte address space. The mode is selected by the LSI's mode pins. 2.2.1 Normal Mode The exception vector table and stack have the same structure as in the H8/300 CPU in normal mode. * Address space Linear access to a maximum address space of 64 kbytes is possible. * Extended registers (En) The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers. When extended register En is used as a 16-bit register it can contain any value, even when the corresponding general register (Rn) is used as an address register. (If general register Rn is referenced in the register indirect addressing mode with pre-decrement (@-Rn) or postincrement (@Rn+) and a carry or borrow occurs, the value in the corresponding extended register (En) will be affected.) * Instruction set All instructions and addressing modes can be used. Only the lower 16 bits of effective addresses (EA) are valid. * Exception vector table and memory indirect branch addresses In normal mode, the top area starting at H'0000 is allocated to the exception vector table. One branch address is stored per 16 bits. The exception vector table in normal mode is shown in figure 2.1. For details of the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception Handling. The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that contains a branch address. In normal mode, the operand is a 16-bit (word) operand, providing a 16-bit branch address. Branch addresses can be stored in the top area from H'0000 to H'00FF. Note that this area is also used for the exception vector table. * Stack structure When the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the PC, condition-code register (CCR), and extended control register (EXR) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.2. EXR is not pushed onto the stack in interrupt control mode 0. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 24 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU Note: For this LSI, normal mode is not available. H'0000 H'0001 H'0002 H'0003 H'0004 H'0005 H'0006 H'0007 H'0008 H'0009 H'000A H'000B Reset exception vector (Reserved for system use) (Reserved for system use) Exception vector table Exception vector 1 Exception vector 2 Figure 2.1 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode) SP PC (16 bits) SP (SP EXR*1 Reserved*1*3 ) CCR CCR*3 PC (16 bits) *2 (a) Subroutine Branch Notes: 1. When EXR is not used, it is not stored on the stack. 2. SP when EXR is not used. 3. lgnored when returning. (b) Exception Handling Figure 2.2 Stack Structure in Normal Mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 25 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU 2.2.2 Advanced Mode * Address space Linear access to a maximum address space of 16 Mbytes is possible. * Extended registers (En) The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers. They can also be used as the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers or address registers. * Instruction set All instructions and addressing modes can be used. * Exception vector table and memory indirect branch addresses In advanced mode, the top area starting at H'00000000 is allocated to the exception vector table in 32-bit units. In each 32 bits, the upper 8 bits are ignored and a branch address is stored in the lower 24 bits (see figure 2.3). For details of the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception Handling. H'00000000 Reserved Reset exception vector H'00000003 H'00000004 Reserved (Reserved for system use) H'00000007 H'00000008 Exception vector table H'0000000B H'0000000C (Reserved for system use) H'00000010 Reserved Exception vector 1 Figure 2.3 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 26 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that contains a branch address. In advanced mode, the operand is a 32-bit longword operand, providing a 32-bit branch address. The upper 8 bits of these 32 bits are a reserved area that is regarded as H'00. Branch addresses can be stored in the area from H'00000000 to H'000000FF. Note that the top area of this range is also used for the exception vector table. * Stack structure In advanced mode, when the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the PC, condition-code register (CCR), and extended control register (EXR) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.4. EXR is not pushed onto the stack in interrupt control mode 0. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling. SP SP Reserved PC (24 bits) (SP *2 ) EXR*1 Reserved*1*3 CCR PC (24 bits) (a) Subroutine Branch Notes: 1. When EXR is not used, it is not stored on the stack. 2. SP when EXR is not used. 3. Ignored when returning. (b) Exception Handling Figure 2.4 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 27 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU 2.3 Address Space Figure 2.5 shows a memory map of the H8S/2000 CPU. The H8S/2000 CPU provides linear access to a maximum 64-kbyte address space in normal mode, and a maximum 16-Mbyte (architecturally 4-Gbyte) address space in advanced mode. The usable modes and address spaces differ depending on the product. For details on each product, refer to section 3, MCU Operating Modes. H'0000 64 kbyte H'FFFF H'00000000 16 Mbyte Program area H'00FFFFFF Not available in this LSI Data area H'FFFFFFFF (a) Normal Mode* Note: * For this LSI, normal mode is not available. (b) Advanced Mode Figure 2.5 Memory Map Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 28 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU 2.4 Register Configuration The H8S/2000 CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2.6. There are two types of registers: general registers and control registers. Control registers are a 24-bit program counter (PC), an 8bit extended control register (EXR), and an 8-bit condition code register (CCR). General Registers (Rn) and Extended Registers (En) 15 ER0 ER1 ER2 ER3 ER4 ER5 ER6 ER7 (SP) E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 07 R0H R1H R2H R3H R4H R5H R6H R7H 07 R0L R1L R2L R3L R4L R5L R6L R7L 0 Control Registers 23 PC 0 EXR T 76543210 - - - - I2 I1 I0 76543210 CCR I UI H U N Z V C Legend: SP: PC: EXR: T: I2 to I0: CCR: I: UI: Stack pointer Program counter Extended control register Trace bit Interrupt mask bits Condition-code register Interrupt mask bit User bit or interrupt mask bit* H: U: N: Z: V: C: Half-carry flag User bit Negative flag Zero flag Overflow flag Carry flag Note: * For this LSI, the interrupt mask bit is not available. Figure 2.6 CPU Internal Registers Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 29 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU 2.4.1 General Registers The H8S/2000 CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally alike and can be used as both address registers and data registers. When a general register is used as a data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. Figure 2.7 illustrates the usage of the general registers. When the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or address registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER0 to ER7). When the general registers are used as 16-bit registers, the ER registers are divided into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R (R0 to R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 16-bit registers. The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers. When the general registers are used as 8-bit registers, the R registers are divided into 8-bit general registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and RL (R0L to R7L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 8-bit registers. The usage of each register can be selected independently. General register ER7 has the function of the stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2.8 shows the stack. * Address registers * 32-bit registers * 16-bit registers * 8-bit registers E registers (extended registers) (E0 to E7) ER registers (ER0 to ER7) R registers (R0 to R7) RL registers (R0L to R7L) RH registers (R0H to R7H) Figure 2.7 Usage of General Registers Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 30 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU Free area SP (ER7) Stack area Figure 2.8 Stack 2.4.2 Program Counter (PC) This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The length of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant PC bit is ignored. (When an instruction is fetched for read, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0.) 2.4.3 Extended Control Register (EXR) EXR is an 8-bit register that can be operated by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. When an instruction other than STC is executed, all interrupts including NMI are masked in three states after the instruction is completed. Bit 7 Bit Name T Initial Value R/W 0 R/W Description Trace Bit When this bit is set to 1, trace exception processing starts every when an instruction is executed. When this bit is cleared to 0, instructions are consecutively executed. 6 to 3 2 to 0 I2 I1 I0 1 R/W - All 1 - Reserved These bits are always read as 1. Interrupt Mask Bits 2 to 0 Specify interrupt request mask levels (0 to 7). For details, see section 5, Interrupt Controller. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 31 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU 2.4.4 Condition-Code Register (CCR) This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask bit (I) and half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags. Operations can be performed on the CCR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branching conditions for conditional branch (Bcc) instructions. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 32 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU Bit 7 Bit Name I Initial Value 1 R/W Description R/W Interrupt Mask Bit Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1. NMI is accepted regardless of the I bit setting. The I bit is set to 1 at the start of an exception-handling sequence. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller. 6 UI Undefined R/W User Bit or Interrupt Mask Bit Can be written to and read from by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. For this LSI, Interrupt Mask Bit is not available. 5 H Undefined R/W Half-Carry Flag When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B, or NEG.B instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or NEG.W instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.L, SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise. 4 U Undefined R/W User Bit Can be written to and read from by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. 3 N Undefined R/W Negative Flag Stores the value of the most significant bit of data as a sign bit. 2 Z Undefined R/W Zero Flag Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate non-zero data. 1 V Undefined R/W Overflow Flag Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. 0 C Undefined R/W Carry Flag Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Used by: * * * Add instructions, to indicate a carry Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow Shift and rotate instructions, to indicate a carry The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit manipulation instructions. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 33 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU 2.4.5 Initial Register Values Reset exception handling loads the CPU's program counter (PC) from the vector table, clears the trace (T) bit in EXR to 0, and sets the interrupt mask (I) bits in CCR and EXR to 1. The other CCR bits and the general registers are not initialized. Note that the stack pointer (ER7) is undefined. The stack pointer should therefore be initialized by an MOV.L instruction executed immediately after a reset. 2.5 Data Formats The H8S/2000 CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit BCD, 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit (longword) data. Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, ..., 7) of byte operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-bit BCD data. 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats Figure 2.9 shows the data formats of general registers. Data Type 1-bit data Register Number RnH Data Format 7 0 Don't care 76 54 32 10 7 1-bit data RnL Don't care 0 76 54 32 10 7 4-bit BCD data RnH Upper 43 Lower 0 Don't care 7 4-bit BCD data RnL Don't care Upper 43 Lower 0 7 Byte data RnH MSB 0 Don't care LSB 7 0 LSB Byte data RnL Don't care MSB Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (1) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 34 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU Data Type Word data Register Number Rn 15 0 Data Format MSB LSB Word data 15 En 0 MSB LSB Longword data 31 ERn 16 15 0 MSB En Rn LSB Legend: ERn: En: Rn: RnH: RnL: MSB: LSB: General register ER General register E General register R General register RH General register RL Most significant bit Least significant bit Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (2) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 35 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU 2.5.2 Memory Data Formats Figure 2.10 shows the data formats in memory. The H8S/2000 CPU can access word data and longword data in memory, but word or longword data must begin at an even address. If an attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, no address error occurs but the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so the access starts at the preceding address. This also applies to instruction fetches. When SP (ER7) is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word size or longword size. Data Type Address 7 1-bit data Address L 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Data Format 0 0 Byte data Address L MSB LSB Word data Address 2M Address 2M+1 MSB LSB Longword data Address 2N Address 2N+1 Address 2N+2 Address 2N+3 MSB LSB Figure 2.10 Memory Data Formats Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 36 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU 2.6 Instruction Set The H8S/2000 CPU has 65 types of instructions. The instructions are classified by function as shown in table 2.1. Table 2.1 Function Data transfer Instruction Classification Instructions MOV POP*1, PUSH*1 LDM, STM MOVFPE*3, MOVTPE*3 Size B/W/L W/L L B B/W/L B B/W/L L B/W W/L B B/W/L B/W/L 4 8 14 5 9 1 Total: 65 19 Types 5 Arithmetic operations ADD, SUB, CMP, NEG ADDX, SUBX, DAA, DAS INC, DEC ADDS, SUBS MULXU, DIVXU, MULXS, DIVXS EXTU, EXTS 4 TAS* Logic operations Shift Bit manipulation Branch System control AND, OR, XOR, NOT SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, ROTXR BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BLD, BILD, BST, BIST, BAND, B BIAND, BOR, BIOR, BXOR, BIXOR BCC*2, JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS - TRAPA, RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC, NOP - - Block data transfer EEPMOV Notes: B: Byte size; W: Word size; L: Longword size. 1. POP.W Rn and PUSH.W Rn are identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn and MOV.W Rn, @SP. POP.L ERn and PUSH.L ERn are identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn and MOV.L ERn, @-SP. 2. BCC is the general name for conditional branch instructions. 3. Cannot be used in this LSI. 4. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 37 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU 2.6.1 Table of Instructions Classified by Function Tables 2.3 to 2.10 summarize the instructions in each functional category. The notation used in tables 2.3 to 2.10 is defined below. Table 2.2 Symbol Rd Rs Rn ERn (EAd) (EAs) EXR CCR N Z V C PC SP #IMM disp + - x / :8/:16/:24/:32 Note: * Operation Notation Description General register (destination)* General register (source)* General register* General register (32-bit register) Destination operand Source operand Extended control register Condition-code register N (negative) flag in CCR Z (zero) flag in CCR V (overflow) flag in CCR C (carry) flag in CCR Program counter Stack pointer Immediate data Displacement Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Logical AND Logical OR Logical exclusive OR Move NOT (logical complement) 8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit length General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0 to R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers (ER0 to ER7). Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 38 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU Table 2.3 Instruction MOV Data Transfer Instructions Size* B/W/L Function (EAs) Rd, Rs (EAd) Moves data between two general registers or between a general register and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register. MOVFPE MOVTPE POP B B W/L Cannot be used in this LSI. Cannot be used in this LSI. @SP+ Rn Pops a general register from the stack. POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn. POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn PUSH W/L Rn @-SP Pushes a general register onto the stack. PUSH.W Rn is identical to MOV.W Rn, @-SP. PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L ERn, @-SP. LDM STM Note: * B: W: L: L L @SP+ Rn (register list) Pops two or more general registers from the stack. Rn (register list) @-SP Pushes two or more general registers onto the stack. Size refers to the operand size. Byte Word Longword Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 39 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU Table 2.4 Instruction ADD SUB Arithmetic Operations Instructions Size*1 B/W/L Function Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. (Subtraction on immediate data and data in a general register cannot be performed in bytes. Use the SUBX or ADD instruction.) B Rd Rs C Rd, Rd #IMM C Rd Performs addition or subtraction with carry on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. B/W/L Rd 1 Rd, Rd 2 Rd Adds or subtracts the value 1 or 2 to or from data in a general register. (Only the value 1 can be added to or subtracted from byte operands.) L B Rd 1 Rd, Rd 2 Rd, Rd 4 Rd Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register. Rd (decimal adjust) Rd Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by referring to CCR to produce 4-bit BCD data. B/W Rd x Rs Rd Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits x 8 bits 16 bits or 16 bits x 16 bits 32 bits. ADDX SUBX INC DEC ADDS SUBS DAA DAS MULXU MULXS B/W Rd x Rs Rd Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits x 8 bits 16 bits or 16 bits x 16 bits 32 bits. DIVXU B/W Rd / Rs Rd Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits / 8 bits 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits / 16 bits 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 40 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU Instruction DIVXS Size*1 B/W Function Rd / Rs Rd Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits / 8 bits 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits / 16 bits 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder. CMP B/W/L Rd - Rs, Rd - #IMM Compares data in a general register with data in another general register or with immediate data, and sets the CCR bits according to the result. NEG B/W/L 0 - Rd Rd Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a general register. EXTU W/L Rd (zero extension) Rd Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by padding with zeros on the left. EXTS W/L Rd (sign extension) Rd Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by extending the sign bit. TAS*2 B @ERd - 0, 1 ( Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 41 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU Table 2.5 Instruction AND Logic Operations Instructions Size* B/W/L Function Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. OR B/W/L Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. XOR B/W/L Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. NOT B/W/L Rd Rd Takes the one's complement (logical complement) of data in a general register. Note: * B: W: L: Size refers to the operand size. Byte Word Longword Table 2.6 Instruction SHAL SHAR SHLL SHLR ROTL ROTR ROTXL ROTXR Note: * B: W: L: Shift Instructions Size* B/W/L Function Rd (shift) Rd Performs an arithmetic shift on data in a general register. 1-bit or 2 bit shift is possible. B/W/L Rd (shift) Rd Performs a logical shift on data in a general register. 1-bit or 2 bit shift is possible. B/W/L B/W/L Rd (rotate) Rd Rotates data in a general register. 1-bit or 2 bit rotation is possible. Rd (rotate) Rd Rotates data including the carry flag in a general register. 1-bit or 2 bit rotation is possible. Size refers to the operand size. Byte Word Longword Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 42 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU Table 2.7 Instruction BSET Bit Manipulation Instructions Size* B Function 1 ( BCLR B 0 ( BNOT B ( BTST B ( BAND B C ( BIAND B C ( BOR B C ( BIOR B C ( Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 43 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU Instruction BXOR Size* B Function C ( Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 44 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU Table 2.8 Instruction Bcc Branch Instructions Size - Function Branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true. The branching conditions are listed below. Mnemonic BRA (BT) BRN (BF) BHI BLS BCC (BHS) BCS (BLO) BNE BEQ BVC BVS BPL BMI BGE BLT BGT BLE Description Always (true) Never (false) High Low or same Carry clear (high or same) Carry set (low) Not equal Equal Overflow clear Overflow set Plus Minus Greater or equal Less than Greater than Less or equal C=1 Z=0 Z=1 V=0 V=1 N=0 N=1 NV=0 NV=1 Z (N V) = 0 Z (N V) = 1 Condition Always Never CZ=0 CZ=1 C=0 JMP BSR JSR RTS - - - - Branches unconditionally to a specified address. Branches to a subroutine at a specified address. Branches to a subroutine at a specified address. Returns from a subroutine. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 45 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU Table 2.9 Instruction TRAPA RTE SLEEP LDC System Control Instructions Size* - - - B/W Function Starts trap-instruction exception handling. Returns from an exception-handling routine. Causes a transition to a power-down state. (EAs) CCR, (EAs) EXR Moves the memory operand contents or immediate data to CCR or EXR. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid. STC B/W CCR (EAd), EXR (EAd) Transfers CCR or EXR contents to a general register or memory operand. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid. ANDC ORC XORC B B B CCR #IMM CCR, EXR #IMM EXR Logically ANDs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data. CCR #IMM CCR, EXR #IMM EXR Logically ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data. CCR #IMM CCR, EXR #IMM EXR Logically exclusive-ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data. NOP Note: - PC + 2 PC Only increments the program counter. * Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 46 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU Table 2.10 Block Data Transfer Instructions Instruction EEPMOV.B Size - Function if R4L 0 then Repeat @ER5+ @ER6+ R4L-1 R4L Until R4L = 0 else next: if R4 0 then Repeat @ER5+ @ER6+ R4-1 R4 Until R4 = 0 else next: Transfers a data block. Starting from the address set in ER5, transfers data for the number of bytes set in R4L or R4 to the address location set in ER6. Execution of the next instruction begins as soon as the transfer is completed. EEPMOV.W - 2.6.2 Basic Instruction Formats The H8S/2000 CPU instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an operation field (op), a register field (r), an effective address extension (EA), and a condition field (cc). Figure 2.11 shows examples of instruction formats. * Operation field Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first four bits of the instruction. Some instructions have two operation fields. * Register field Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, and data registers by 3 bits or 4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields, and some have no register field. * Effective address extension 8, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement. * Condition field Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 47 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU (1) Operation field only op NOP, RTS, etc. (2) Operation field and register fields op rn rm ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc. (3) Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension op EA (disp) rn rm MOV.B @(d:16, Rn), Rm, etc. (4) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field op cc EA (disp) BRA d:16, etc. Figure 2.11 Instruction Formats (Examples) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 48 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU 2.7 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation The H8S/2000 CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.11. Each instruction uses a subset of these addressing modes. Arithmetic and logic operations instructions can use the register direct and immediate addressing modes. Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except program-counter relative and memory indirect. Bit manipulation instructions can use register direct, register indirect, or absolute addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and BTST instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand. Table 2.11 Addressing Modes No. Addressing Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Register direct Register indirect Register indirect with displacement Register indirect with post-increment Register indirect with pre-decrement Absolute address Immediate Program-counter relative Memory indirect Symbol Rn @ERn @(d:16,ERn)/@(d:32,ERn) @ERn+ @-ERn @aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24/@aa:32 #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 @(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC) @@aa:8 2.7.1 Register Direct--Rn The register field of the instruction code specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit general register which contains the operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers. R0 to R7 and E0 to E7 can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-bit registers. 2.7.2 Register Indirect--@ERn The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the address of a memory operand. If the address is a program instruction address, the lower 24 bits are valid and the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 49 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU 2.7.3 Register Indirect with Displacement--@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn) A 16-bit or 32-bit displacement contained in the instruction code is added to an address register (ERn) specified by the register field of the instruction, and the sum gives the address of a memory operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added. 2.7.4 Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement--@ERn+ or @-ERn Register Indirect with Post-Increment--@ERn+: The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the address of a memory operand. After the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address register contents and the sum is stored in the address register. The value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, and 4 for longword access. For word or longword transfer instructions, the register value should be even. Register Indirect with Pre-Decrement--@-ERn: The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ERn) specified by the register field in the instruction code, and the result becomes the address of a memory operand. The result is also stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, and 4 for longword access. For word or longword transfer instructions, the register value should be even. 2.7.5 Absolute Address--@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32 The instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute address may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), 24 bits long (@aa:24), or 32 bits long (@aa:32). Table 2.12 indicates the accessible absolute address ranges. To access data, the absolute address should be 8 bits (@aa:8), 16 bits (@aa:16), or 32 bits (@aa:32) long. For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 24 bits are all assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF). For a 16-bit absolute address, the upper 16 bits are a sign extension. For a 32-bit absolute address, the entire address space is accessed. A 24-bit absolute address (@aa:24) indicates the address of a program instruction. The upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 50 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU Table 2.12 Absolute Address Access Ranges Absolute Address Data address 8 bits (@aa:8) 16 bits (@aa:16) 32 bits (@aa:32) Program instruction address 24 bits (@aa:24) Normal Mode H'FF00 to H'FFFF H'0000 to H'FFFF Advanced Mode H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF H'000000 to H'007FFF, H'FF8000 to H'FFFFFF H'000000 to H'FFFFFF 2.7.6 Immediate--#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32 The 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data contained in a instruction code can be used directly as an operand. The ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions implicitly contain immediate data in their instruction codes. Some bit manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, specifying a bit number. The TRAPA instruction contains 2-bit immediate data in its instruction code, specifying a vector address. 2.7.7 Program-Counter Relative--@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC) This mode can be used by the Bcc and BSR instructions. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in the instruction code is sign-extended to 24 bits and added to the 24-bit address indicated by the PC value to generate a 24-bit branch address. Only the lower 24 bits of this branch address are valid; the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). The PC value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next instruction, so the possible branching range is -126 to +128 bytes (-63 to +64 words) or -32766 to +32768 bytes (-16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should be an even number. 2.7.8 Memory Indirect--@@aa:8 This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The instruction code contains an 8-bit absolute address specifying a memory operand which contains a branch address. The upper bits of the 8-bit absolute address are all assumed to be 0, so the address range is 0 to 255 (H'0000 to H'00FF in normal mode, H'000000 to H'0000FF in advanced mode). In normal mode, the memory operand is a word operand and the branch address is 16 bits long. In advanced mode, the memory operand is a longword operand, the first byte of which is assumed to be 0 (H'00). Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 51 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU Note that the top area of the address range in which the branch address is stored is also used for the exception vector area. For further details, refer to section 4, Exception Handling. If an odd address is specified in word or longword memory access, or as a branch address, the least significant bit is regarded as 0, causing data to be accessed or the instruction code to be fetched at the address preceding the specified address. (For further information, see section 2.5.2, Memory Data Formats.) Specified by @aa:8 Branch address Specified by @aa:8 Reserved Branch address (a) Normal Mode* Note: * For this LSI, normal mode is not available. (b) Advanced Mode Figure 2.12 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Addressing Mode 2.7.9 Effective Address Calculation Table 2.13 indicates how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode. In normal mode, the upper 8 bits of the effective address are ignored in order to generate a 16-bit address. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 52 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU Table 2.13 Effective Address Calculation No 1 Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Register direct (Rn) Effective Address Calculation Effective Address (EA) Operand is general register contents. op 2 rm rn 31 General register contents Register indirect (@ERn) 0 31 24 23 0 Don't care op 3 r Register indirect with displacement @(d:16,ERn) or @(d:32,ERn) 31 General register contents 0 31 24 23 0 op r disp 31 Sign extension Don't care 0 disp 4 Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement *Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+ 31 General register contents 0 31 24 23 0 Don't care op r 31 1, 2, or 4 *Register indirect with pre-decrement @-ERn 0 General register contents 31 24 23 0 Don't care op r Operand Size Byte Word Longword 1, 2, or 4 Offset 1 2 4 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 53 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU No 5 Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Absolute address Effective Address Calculation Effective Address (EA) @aa:8 op abs 31 24 23 H'FFFF 87 0 Don't care @aa:16 op abs 31 24 23 16 15 0 Don't care Sign extension @aa:24 op abs 31 24 23 0 Don't care @aa:32 op abs 31 24 23 0 Don't care 6 Immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 op IMM Operand is immediate data. 7 Program-counter relative @(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC) 23 PC contents 0 op disp 23 Sign extension 0 disp 31 24 23 0 Don't care 8 Memory indirect @@aa:8 ** 31 op abs H'000000 15 87 abs 0 0 Memory contents 31 24 23 16 15 H'00 0 Don't care * 31 op abs 31 Memory contents 87 H'000000 abs 0 31 24 23 Don't care 0 0 Note: * For this LSI, normal mode is not available. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 54 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU 2.8 Processing States The H8S/2000 CPU has five main processing states: the reset state, exception handling state, program execution state, bus-released state, and program stop state. Figure 2.13 indicates the state transitions. * Reset state In this state the CPU and internal peripheral modules are all initialized and stopped. When the RES input goes low, all current processing stops and the CPU enters the reset state. All interrupts are masked in the reset state. Reset exception handling starts when the RES signal changes from low to high. For details, refer to section 4, Exception Handling. The reset state can also be entered by a watchdog timer overflow. * Exception-handling state The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU alters the normal processing flow due to an exception source, such as, a reset, trace, interrupt, or trap instruction. The CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and branches to that address. For further details, refer to section 4, Exception Handling. * Program execution state In this state the CPU executes program instructions in sequence. * Bus-released state In a product which has a DMA controller and a data transfer controller (DTC), the bus-released state occurs when the bus has been released in response to a bus request from a bus master other than the CPU. While the bus is released, the CPU halts operations. * Program stop state This is a power-down state in which the CPU stops operating. The program stop state occurs when a SLEEP instruction is executed or the CPU enters hardware standby mode. For details, refer to section 23, Power-Down Modes. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 55 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 2 CPU End of bus request Bus request Program execution state of bu s re qu sr es eq t ue st =0 BY SS EEP tion SL truc ins io = 1 ruct BY nst SS EP i E SL ex c Bus-released state ex c ep tio n ha nd ep lin tio g n ha nd lin g En d Bu Sleep mode n st fo r of En Re q Inte rrup t re ue st que d Exception handling state External interrupt request Software standby mode RES = High STBY = High, RES = Low Reset state*1 Reset state Hardware standby mode*2 Power down state*3 Notes: 1. From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs whenever RES goes low. A transition can also be made to the reset state when the watchdog timer overflows. 2. In every state, when the STBY pin becomes low, the hardware standby mode is entered. 3. For details, refer to section 23, Power-Down Modes. Figure 2.13 State Transitions 2.9 2.9.1 Usage Note Note on Bit Manipulation Instructions Bit manipulation instructions such as BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST read data in byte units, perform bit manipulation, and write data in byte units. Thus, care must be taken when these bit manipulation instructions are executed for a register or port including write-only bits. In addition, the BCLR instruction can be used to clear the flag of an internal I/O register. In this case, if the flag to be cleared has been set by an interrupt processing routine, the flag need not be read before executing the BCLR instruction. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 56 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.1 Operating Mode Selection This LSI has six operating modes (modes 1 to 5 and 7). Modes 1 to 5 and 7 are available in the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group flash memory version. Modes 1 to 4 and 7 are available in the H8S/2367F. Modes 1, 2, 4, and 7 are available in the masked ROM version. Modes 1 and 2 are available in the ROMless version. The operating mode is selected by the setting of mode pins (MD2 to MD0). Modes 1, 2, and 4 are externally expanded modes in which the CPU can access an external memory and peripheral devices. In the externally expanded mode, each area can be switched to 8bit or 16-bit address space by the bus controller. If any one of the areas is set to 16-bit address space, the bus mode is 16 bits. If all areas are set to 8-bit address space, the bus mode is 8 bits. Mode 7 is a single-chip activation externally expanded mode in which the CPU can switch to access an external memory and peripheral devices at the beginning of a program execution. Modes 3 and 5 are a boot mode/user boot mode in which the flash memory can be programmed or erased. For details on the boot mode/user boot mode, refer to section 19, Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version), or section 20, Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version). Do not change the MD2 to MD0 pin settings during operation. Table 3.1 MCU Operating Mode Selection CPU Operating Mode Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced External Data Bus Description Initial On-Chip ROM Width 16 bits 8 bits -- 8 bits -- -- Max. Value 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits MCU Operating Mode MD2 1 2 3 4 5* 7 0 0 0 1 1 1 MD1 0 1 1 0 0 1 MD0 1 0 1 0 1 1 Expanded mode with on- Disabled chip ROM disabled Expanded mode with on- Disabled chip ROM disabled Boot mode Enabled Expanded mode with on- Enabled chip ROM enabled User boot mode Single-chip mode Enabled Enabled Note: * Supported only by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 57 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.2 Register Descriptions The following registers are related to the operating mode. * Mode control register (MDCR) * System control register (SYSCR) 3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) MDCR monitors the current operating mode of this LSI. Bit 7 to 3 2 1 0 Bit Name Initial Value All 0 R/W Descriptions Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Mode Select 2 to 0 These bits indicate the input levels at pins MD2 to MD0 (the current operating mode). Bits MDS2 to MDS0 correspond to MD2 to MD0. MDS2 to MDS0 are read-only bits and they cannot be written to. The mode pin (MD2 to MD0) input levels are latched into these bits when MDCR is read. These latches are canceled by a reset. - MDS2 MDS1 MDS0 - R R R -* -* -* Note: * Determined by pins MD2 to MD0. 3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) SYSCR controls CPU access to the flash memory control registers, sets external bus mode, and enables or disables on-chip RAM. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 58 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Bit 7, 6 5, 4 3 Bit Name Initial Value All 1 All 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Descriptions Reserved The initial value should not be modified. Reserved The initial value should not be modified. Flash Memory Control Register Enable Controls CPU access to the flash memory control registers (FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2). If this bit is set to 1, the flash memory control registers can be read/written to. If this bit is cleared to 0, the flash memory control registers are not selected. At this time, the contents of the flash memory control registers are maintained. This bit should be written to 0 in other than flash memory version. 0: Flash memory control registers are not selected for area H'FFFFC8 to H'FFFFCB 1: Flash memory control registers are selected for area H'FFFFC8 to H'FFFFCB 2 1 - - FLSHE - EXPE 0 - R/W Reserved This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. External Bus Mode Enable Sets external bus mode. In modes 1, 2, and 4, this bit is fixed at 1 and cannot be modified. In mode 3 and 7, this bit has an initial value of 0, and can be read and written. Writing of 0 to EXPE when its value is 1 should only be carried out when an external bus cycle is not being executed. 0: External bus disabled 1: External bus enabled RAM Enable Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is initialized when the reset status is released. 0: On-chip RAM is disabled 1: On-chip RAM is enabled - 0 RAME 1 R/W Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 59 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.3 3.3.1 Operating Mode Descriptions Mode 1 The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is disabled. Ports A, B, and C function as an address bus, ports D and E function as a data bus, and parts of ports F, and G, carry bus control signals. The initial bus mode after a reset is 16 bits, with 16-bit access to all areas. However, if 8-bit access is designated for all areas by the bus controller, the bus mode switches to 8 bits. 3.3.2 Mode 2 The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is disabled. Ports A, B, and C function as an address bus, ports D and E function as a data bus, and parts of ports F, and G carry bus control signals. The initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. However, if 16-bit access is designated for any one of the areas by the bus controller, the bus mode switches to 16 bits and port E functions as a data bus. 3.3.3 Mode 3 This mode is a boot mode of the flash memory. This mode is the same as mode 7, except for the programming and erasure on the flash memory. Mode 3 is only available in the H8S/2368 Group flash memory version. 3.3.4 Mode 4 The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is enabled. The program in the on-chip ROM connected to the first half of area 0 is executed. Ports A, B, and C function as input ports immediately after a reset, but can be set to function as an address bus. Ports D and E function as a data bus, and parts of ports F, and G, carry bus control signals. For details, see section 9, I/O Ports. The initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. However, if 16-bit access is designated for any area by the bus controller, the bus mode switches to 16 bits and port E functions as a data bus. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 60 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes In the flash memory version, user program mode is entered by setting the SWE bit of FLMCR1 to 1. 3.3.5 Mode 5 This mode is a user boot mode of the flash memory. This mode is the same as mode 7, except for the programming and erasure on the flash memory. Mode 5 is only available in the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. 3.3.6 Mode 7 The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is enabled, and the chip starts up in single-chip mode. External address space cannot be used in single-chip mode. The initial mode after a reset is single-chip mode, with all I/O ports available for use as input/output ports. However, the mode can be switched to externally expanded mode by setting 1 to the EXPE bit of SYSCR and then the external address space is enabled. When externally expanded mode is selected, all areas are initially designated as 16-bit access space. The functions of pins in ports A to G are the same as in externally expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled. In the flash memory version, user program mode is entered by setting the SWE bit of FLMCR1 to 1. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 61 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.3.7 Pin Functions Table 3.2 shows the pin functions in each operating mode. Table 3.2 Port Port A PA7 to PA5 PA4 to PA0 Port B Port C Port D Port E Port F PF7, PF6 PF5, PF4 PF3 PF2 to PF0 Port G PG6 to PG1 PG0 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode Mode 1 P* /A 1 Mode 2 P* /A 1 Mode 3* P* /A 1 2 Mode 4* P* /A 1 2 Mode 5* * P* /A 1 23 Mode 7* P* /A 1 2 A A A D 1 P/D* A A A D P* /D 1 P* /A 1 P* /A 1 P* /A 1 P* /A 1 P* /A 1 P* /A 1 P* /A 1 P* /A 1 P* /D 1 D P* /D 1 P* /D 1 P* /D 1 P* /D 1 P* /D 1 P* /D 1 P/C* C 1 P* /C 1 P* /C 1 P/C* C 1 P* /C 1 P* /C 1 C 1 P/C* 1 P/C* 1 P/C* P* /C 1 P* /C 1 P* /C 1 P* /C 1 1 P/C* P* /C 1 1 P/C* P* /C 1 P* /C 1 P* /C 1 P* /C 1 P* /C 1 Legend: P: I/O port A: Address bus output D: Data bus input/output C: Control signals, clock input/output Notes: 1. After reset 2. Setting not allowed on ROMless versions. 3. Mode 5 is available only in the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 62 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.4 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode Figures 3.1 to 3.15 show memory maps for each product. RAM: 32 kbytes Modes 1 and 2 (Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) H'000000 H'000000 ROM: 512 kbytes RAM: 32 kbytes Mode 3 (Boot mode) On-chip ROM External address space H'080000 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FF4000 On-chip RAM/ external address space*1 H'FFC000 H'FFD000 H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Reserved area*4 External address space H'FF4000 On-chip RAM*3 H'FFC000 H'FFD000 H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Reserved area*4 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 Internal I/O registers External address space Internal I/O registers External address space/ reserved area*2*4 Internal I/O registers Internal I/O registers Notes: 1. This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. When EXPE = 1, external address space; when EXPE = 0, reserved area. 3. On-chip RAM is used for flash memory programming. The RAME bit in SYSCR should not be cleared to 0. 4. A reserved area should not be accessed. Figure 3.1 H8S/2368F Memory Map (1) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 63 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes ROM: 512 kbytes RAM: 32 kbytes Mode 4 (Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 H'000000 ROM: 512 kbytes RAM: 32 kbytes Mode 5 (User boot mode) ROM: 512 kbytes RAM: 32 kbytes Mode 7 (Single-chip activation expanded mode, with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 On-chip ROM On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'080000 H'080000 H'080000 External address space External address space/ reserved area*2*4 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FF4000 On-chip RAM/ external address space*1 H'FFC000 Reserved area*4 H'FF4000 On-chip RAM *5 H'FFC000 Reserved area*4 reserved area*2*4 H'FF4000 On-chip RAM/ external address space *3 H'FFC000 Reserved area*4 H'FFD000 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FFD000 External address space H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers External address space H'FFD000 External address space/ H'FFFC00 Internal I/O registers reserved area*2*4 H'FFFC00 Internal I/O registers reserved area*2*4 H'FFFF00 External address space/ H'FFFF20 Internal I/O registers H'FFFFFF H'FFFF00 External address space/ H'FFFF20 Internal I/O registers H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers Notes: 1. This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. When EXPE = 1, external address space; when EXPE = 0, reserved area. 3. When EXPE = 1, external address space with RAME = 0, on-chip RAM with RAME = 1. When EXPE = 0, on-chip RAM. 4. A reserved area should not be accessed. 5. The on-chip RAM is used to program the flash memory. The RAME bit in SYSCR should not be cleared to 0. Figure 3.2 H8S/2368F Memory Map (2) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 64 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes RAM: 24 kbytes Modes 1 and 2 (Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) H'000000 H'000000 ROM: 384 kbytes RAM: 24 kbytes Mode 3 (Boot mode) On-chip ROM External address space H'060000 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FF4000 H'FF6000 H'FFC000 H'FFC800 H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. Reserved area*4 On-chip RAM/ external address space*1 Reserved area*4 External address space H'FF4000 H'FF6000 Reserved area*4 On-chip RAM*3 H'FFC000 H'FFC800 H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Reserved area*4 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 Internal I/O registers External address space Internal I/O registers External address space/ reserved area*2*4 Internal I/O registers Internal I/O registers This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. When EXPE = 1, external address space; when EXPE = 0, reserved area. On-chip RAM is used for flash memory programming. Do not clear the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. Do not access a reserved area. Figure 3.3 H8S/2367F Memory Map (1) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 65 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes ROM: 384 kbytes RAM: 24 kbytes Mode 7 (Single-chip activation expanded mode, with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 ROM: 384 kbytes RAM: 24 kbytes Mode 4 (Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'060000 H'060000 External address space External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FF4000 H'FF6000 H'FFC000 Reserved area On-chip RAM/ external address space*1 Reserved area H'FF4000 H'FF6000 H'FFC000 Reserved area*4 On-chip RAM/ external address space *3 Reserved area*4 reserved area*2*4 H'FFC800 External address space H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers External address space H'FFC800 External address space/ H'FFFC00 Internal I/O registers reserved area*2*4 H'FFFF00 External address space/ H'FFFF20 Internal I/O registers H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers Notes: 1. This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. When EXPE = 1, external address space; when EXPE = 0, reserved area. 3. When EXPE = 1, external address space with RAME = 0, on-chip RAM with RAME = 1. When EXPE = 0, on-chip RAM. 4. Do not access a reserved area. Figure 3.4 H8S/2367F Memory Map (2) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 66 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes RAM: 32 kbytes Modes 1 and 2 (Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) H'000000 H'000000 ROM: 384 kbytes RAM: 32 kbytes Mode 3 (Boot mode) On-chip ROM H'060000 Reserved area*4 External address space H'080000 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FF4000 On-chip RAM/ external address space*1 H'FFC000 H'FFD000 H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Reserved area*4 External address space H'FF4000 On-chip RAM*3 H'FFC000 H'FFD000 H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Reserved area*4 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 Internal I/O registers External address space Internal I/O registers External address space/ reserved area*2*4 Internal I/O registers Internal I/O registers Notes: 1. This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. When EXPE = 1, external address space; when EXPE = 0, reserved area. 3. On-chip RAM is used for flash memory programming. The RAME bit in SYSCR should not be cleared to 0. 4. A reserved area should not be accessed. Figure 3.5 H8S/2364F Memory Map (1) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 67 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes ROM: 384 kbytes RAM: 32 kbytes Mode 4 (Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 H'000000 ROM: 384 kbytes RAM: 32 kbytes Mode 5 (User boot mode) ROM: 384 kbytes RAM: 32 kbytes Mode 7 (Single-chip activation expanded mode, with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 On-chip ROM On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'060000 H'060000 H'060000 Reserved area*4 Reserved area*4 Reserved area*4 H'080000 H'080000 H'080000 External address space External address space/ reserved area*2*4 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FF4000 On-chip RAM/ external address space*1 H'FFC000 Reserved area*4 H'FF4000 On-chip RAM *5 H'FFC000 Reserved area *4 H'FF4000 On-chip RAM/ external address space*3 Reserved area*4 H'FFD000 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FFFC00 Internal I/O registers H'FFFF00 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FFFF20 Internal I/O registers H'FFFFFF H'FFC000 H'FFD000 External address space H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers External address space H'FFD000 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FFFC00 Internal I/O registers H'FFFF00 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FFFF20 Internal I/O registers H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers Notes: 1. This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. When EXPE = 1, external address space; when EXPE = 0, reserved area. 3. When EXPE = 1, external address space with RAME = 0, on-chip RAM with RAME = 1. When EXPE = 0, on-chip RAM. 4. A reserved area should not be accessed. 5. The on-chip RAM is used to program the flash memory. The RAME bit in SYSCR should not be cleared to 0. Figure 3.6 H8S/2364F Memory Map (2) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 68 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes RAM: 32 kbytes Modes 1 and 2 (Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) H'000000 H'000000 ROM: 256 kbytes RAM: 32 kbytes Mode 3 (Boot mode) On-chip ROM H'040000 Reserved area*4 External address space H'080000 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FF4000 On-chip RAM/ external address space*1 H'FFC000 H'FFD000 H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Reserved area*4 External address space H'FF4000 On-chip RAM*3 H'FFC000 H'FFD000 H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Reserved area*4 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 Internal I/O registers External address space Internal I/O registers External address space/ reserved area*2*4 Internal I/O registers Internal I/O registers Notes: 1. This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. When EXPE = 1, external address space; when EXPE = 0, reserved area. 3. On-chip RAM is used for flash memory programming. The RAME bit in SYSCR should not be cleared to 0. 4. A reserved area should not be accessed. Figure 3.7 H8S/2362F Memory Map (1) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 69 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes ROM: 256 kbytes RAM: 32 kbytes Mode 4 (Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 H'000000 ROM: 256 kbytes RAM: 32 kbytes Mode 5 (User boot mode) ROM: 256 kbytes RAM: 32 kbytes Mode 7 (Single-chip activation expanded mode, with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 On-chip ROM On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'040000 H'040000 H'040000 Reserved area*4 Reserved area*4 Reserved area*4 H'060000 H'060000 H'060000 External address space External address space/ reserved area*2*4 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FF4000 On-chip RAM/ external address space*1 H'FFC000 Reserved area H'FFD000 External address space H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers External address space H'FF4000 On-chip RAM *5 H'FFC000 Reserved area*4 H'FF4000 On-chip RAM/ external address space *3 Reserved area*4 H'FFD000 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FFFC00 Internal I/O registers H'FFFF00 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FFFF20 Internal I/O registers H'FFFFFF H'FFC000 H'FFD000 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FFFC00 Internal I/O registers H'FFFF00 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FFFF20 Internal I/O registers H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers Notes: 1. This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. When EXPE = 1, external address space; when EXPE = 0, reserved area. 3. When EXPE = 1, external address space with RAME = 0, on-chip RAM with RAME = 1. When EXPE = 0, on-chip RAM. 4. A reserved area should not be accessed. 5. The on-chip RAM is used to program the flash memory. The RAME bit in SYSCR should not be cleared to 0. Figure 3.8 H8S/2362F Memory Map (2) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 70 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes RAM: 24 kbytes Modes 1 and 2 (Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) H'000000 H'000000 ROM: 256 kbytes RAM: 24 kbytes Mode 3 (Boot mode) On-chip ROM H'040000 Reserved area*4 External address space H'080000 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FF4000 H'FF6000 Reserved area*4 On-chip RAM/ external address space*1 H'FF4000 H'FF6000 Reserved area*4 On-chip RAM*3 H'FFC000 H'FFD000 H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Reserved area*4 External address space H'FFC000 H'FFD000 H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Reserved area*4 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 Internal I/O registers External address space Internal I/O registers External address space/ reserved area*2*4 Internal I/O registers Internal I/O registers Notes: 1. This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. When EXPE = 1, external address space; when EXPE = 0, reserved area. 3. On-chip RAM is used for flash memory programming. The RAME bit in SYSCR should not be cleared to 0. 4. A reserved area should not be accessed. Figure 3.9 H8S/2361F Memory Map (1) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 71 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes ROM: 256 kbytes RAM: 24 kbytes Mode 4 (Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 H'000000 ROM: 256 kbytes RAM: 24 kbytes Mode 5 (User boot mode) ROM: 256 kbytes RAM: 24 kbytes Mode 7 (Single-chip activation expanded mode, with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 On-chip ROM On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'040000 H'040000 H'040000 Reserved area*4 Reserved area*4 Reserved area*4 H'080000 H'080000 H'080000 External address space External address space/ reserved area*2*4 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FF4000 H'FF6000 Reserved area*4 On-chip RAM/ external address space*1 H'FF4000 H'FF6000 Reserved area*4 H'FF4000 H'FF6000 Reserved area*4 On-chip RAM/ external address space*3 On-chip RAM *5 H'FFC000 Reserved area*4 H'FFC000 H'FFC000 Reserved area*4 H'FFD000 External address space H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers External address space H'FFD000 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FFFC00 Internal I/O registers H'FFFF00 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FFFF20 Internal I/O registers H'FFFFFF Reserved area*4 H'FFD000 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FFFC00 Internal I/O registers H'FFFF00 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FFFF20 Internal I/O registers H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers Notes: 1. This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. When EXPE = 1, external address space; when EXPE = 0, reserved area. 3. When EXPE = 1, external address space with RAME = 0, on-chip RAM with RAME = 1. When EXPE = 0, on-chip RAM. 4. A reserved area should not be accessed. 5. The on-chip RAM is used to program the flash memory. The RAME bit in SYSCR should not be cleared to 0. Figure 3.10 H8S/2361F Memory Map (2) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 72 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes RAM: 16 kbytes Modes 1 and 2 (Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) H'000000 H'000000 ROM: 256 kbytes RAM: 16 kbytes Mode 3 (Boot mode) On-chip ROM H'040000 Reserved area*4 External address space H'080000 External address space H'FF4000 H'FF8000 Reserved area*4 On-chip RAM/ external address space*1 H'FF4000 H'FF8000 Reserved area*4 On-chip RAM*3 H'FFC000 H'FFD000 H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Reserved area*4 External address space H'FFC000 H'FFD000 H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Reserved area*4 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 Internal I/O registers External address space Internal I/O registers External address space/ reserved area*2*4 Internal I/O registers Internal I/O registers Notes: 1. This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. When EXPE = 1, external address space; when EXPE = 0, reserved area. 3. On-chip RAM is used for flash memory programming. The RAME bit in SYSCR should not be cleared to 0. 4. A reserved area should not be accessed. Figure 3.11 H8S/2360F Memory Map (1) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 73 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes ROM: 256 kbytes RAM: 16 kbytes Mode 4 (Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 H'000000 ROM: 256 kbytes RAM: 16 kbytes Mode 5 (User boot mode) ROM: 256 kbytes RAM: 16 kbytes Mode 7 (Single-chip activation expanded mode, with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 On-chip ROM On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'040000 H'040000 H'040000 Reserved area*4 Reserved area*4 Reserved area*4 H'080000 H'080000 H'080000 External address space External address space/ reserved area*2*4 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FF4000 H'FF8000 Reserved area*4 On-chip RAM/ external address space*1 H'FF4000 H'FF8000 Reserved area*4 H'FF4000 H'FF8000 Reserved area*4 On-chip RAM/ external address space*3 On-chip RAM *5 H'FFC000 Reserved area*4 H'FFC000 H'FFC000 Reserved area*4 H'FFD000 External address space H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers External address space H'FFD000 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FFFC00 Internal I/O registers H'FFFF00 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FFFF20 Internal I/O registers H'FFFFFF Reserved area*4 H'FFD000 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FFFC00 Internal I/O registers H'FFFF00 External address space/ reserved area*2*4 H'FFFF20 Internal I/O registers H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers Notes: 1. This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. When EXPE = 1, external address space; when EXPE = 0, reserved area. 3. When EXPE = 1, external address space with RAME = 0, on-chip RAM with RAME = 1. When EXPE = 0, on-chip RAM. 4. A reserved area should not be accessed. 5. The on-chip RAM is used to program the flash memory. The RAME bit in SYSCR should not be cleared to 0. Figure 3.12 H8S/2360F Memory Map (2) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 74 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes ROM: 256 kbytes RAM: 16 kbytes Mode 4 (Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 RAM: 16 kbytes Modes 1 and 2 (Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) H'000000 On-chip ROM H'040000 External address space H'060000 Reserved area*2 External address space H'FF4000 H'FF8000 H'FFC000 H'FFC800 H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Reserved area*2 On-chip RAM/ external address space*1 Reserved area*2 External address space H'FF4000 H'FF8000 H'FFC000 Reserved area*2 On-chip RAM/ external address space*1 Reserved area*2 H'FFC800 External address space H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers External address space Internal I/O registers External address space Internal I/O registers Internal I/O registers Notes: 1. This area is specified as external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. Do not access a reserved area. Figure 3.13 H8S/2365 Memory Map (1) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 75 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes ROM: 258 kbytes RAM: 16 kbytes Mode 7 (Single-chip activation expanded mode, with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 On-chip ROM H'040000 H'060000 Reserved area*3 External address space/ reserved area*1*3 H'FF4000 H'FF8000 Reserved area*3 On-chip RAM/ external address space*2 H'FFC000 H'FFC800 Reserved area*3 External address space/ reserved area*1*3 H'FFFC00 Internal I/O registers H'FFFF00 External address space/ reserved area*1*3 H'FFFF20 Internal I/O registers H'FFFFFF Notes: 1. When EXPE = 1, external address space; when EXPE = 0, reserved area. 2. When EXPE = 1, external address space with RAME = 0, on-chip RAM with RAME = 1. When EXPE = 0, on-chip RAM. 3. Do not access a reserved area. Figure 3.14 H8S/2365 Memory Map (2) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 76 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes RAM: 16 kbytes Modes 1 and 2 (Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) H'000000 External address space H'FF8000 H'FFC000 H'FFC800 H'FFFC00 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF20 H'FFFFFF On-chip RAM/ external address space*1 Reserved area*2 External address space Internal I/O registers External address space Internal I/O registers Notes: 1. This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. Do not access a reserved area. Figure 3.15 H8S/2363 Memory Map Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 77 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 78 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 4 Exception Handling Section 4 Exception Handling 4.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority As table 4.1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a reset, trace, interrupt, or trap instruction. Exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 4.1. If two or more exceptions occur simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in order of priority. Exception sources, the stack structure, and operation of the CPU vary depending on the interrupt control mode. For details on the interrupt control mode, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller. Table 4.1 Priority High Exception Types and Priority Exception Type Reset Start of Exception Handling Starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the RES pin, or when the watchdog timer overflows. The CPU enters the reset state when the RES pin is low. Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception handling ends, if the trace (T) bit in the EXR is set to 1. Starts when the direct transition occurs by execution of the SLEEP instruction. Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued.*3 Started by execution of a trap instruction (TRAPA) Trace*1 Direct transition*2 Interrupt Low Trap instruction*4 Notes: 1. Traces are enabled only in interrupt control mode 2. Trace exception handling is not executed after execution of an RTE instruction. 2. Not available in this LSI. 3. Interrupt detection is not performed on completion of ANDC, ORC, XORC, or LDC instruction execution, or on completion of reset exception handling. 4. Trap instruction exception handling requests are accepted at all times in program execution state. 4.2 Exception Sources and Exception Vector Table Different vector addresses are assigned to different exception sources. Table 4.2 lists the exception sources and their vector addresses. Since the usable modes differ depending on the product, for details on each product, refer to section 3, MCU Operating Modes. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 79 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 4 Exception Handling Table 4.2 Exception Handling Vector Table Vector Address*1 Exception Source Power-on reset Manual reset*3 Reserved for system use Vector Number 0 1 2 3 4 Normal Mode*2 H'0000 to H'0001 H'0002 to H'0003 H'0004 to H'0005 H'0006 to H'0007 H'0008 to H'0019 H'000A to H'000B H'000C to H'000D H'000E to H'000F H'0010 to H'0011 H'0012 to H'0013 H'0014 to H'0015 H'0016 to H'0017 H'0018 to H'0019 H'001A to H'001B H'001C to H'001D H'001E to H'001F H'0020 to H'0021 H'0022 to H'0023 H'0024 to H'0025 H'0026 to H'0027 H'0028 to H'0029 H'002A to H'002B H'002C to H'002D H'002E to H'002F H'0030 to H'0031 H'0032 to H'0033 H'0034 to H'0035 H'0036 to H'0037 H'0038 to H'0039 H'003A to H'003B Advanced Mode H'0000 to H'0003 H'0004 to H'0007 H'0008 to H'000B H'000C to H'000F H'0010 to H'0013 H'0014 to H'0017 H'0018 to H'001B H'001C to H'001F H'0020 to H'0023 H'0024 to H'0027 H'0028 to H'002B H'002C to H'002F H'0030 to H'0033 H'0034 to H'0037 H'0038 to H'003B H'003C to H'003F H'0040 to H'0043 H'0044 to H'0047 H'0048 to H'004B H'004C to H'004F H'0050 to H'0053 H'0054 to H'0057 H'0058 to H'005B H'005C to H'005F H'0060 to H'0063 H'0064 to H'0067 H'0068 to H'006B H'006C to H'006F H'0070 to H'0073 H'0074 to H'0077 Trace Interrupt (direct transition)*3 Interrupt (NMI) Trap instruction (#0) (#1) (#2) (#3) Reserved for system use 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 External interrupt IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6 IRQ7 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Reserved for system use Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 80 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 4 Exception Handling Vector Address*1 Exception Source Reserved for system use Internal interrupt* 4 Vector Number 30 31 32 118 Normal Mode*2 H'003C to H'003D H'003E to H'003F H'0040 to H'0041 H'00EC to H'00ED Advanced Mode H'0078 to H'007B H'007C to H'007F H'0080 to H'0083 H'01D8 to H'01DB Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. Lower 16 bits of the address. Not available in this LSI. Not available in this LSI. It is reserved for system use. For details of internal interrupt vectors, see section 5.5, Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table. 4.3 Reset A reset has the highest exception priority. When the RES pin goes low, all processing halts and this LSI enters the reset. To ensure that this LSI is reset, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 ms at power-up. To reset the chip during operation, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 states. A reset initializes the internal state of the CPU and the registers of on-chip peripheral modules. The chip can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. For details see section 13, Watchdog Timer. The interrupt control mode is 0 immediately after reset. 4.3.1 Reset Exception Handling When the RES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, this LSI starts reset exception handling as follows: 1. The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip peripheral modules are initialized, the T bit is cleared to 0 in EXR, and the I bit is set to 1 in EXR and CCR. 2. The reset exception handling vector address is read and transferred to the PC, and program execution starts from the address indicated by the PC. Figures 4.1 and 4.2 show examples of the reset sequence. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 81 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 4 Exception Handling Prefetch of first Internal processing program instruction Vector fetch Internal address bus (1) (3) (5) Internal read signal Internal write signal Internal data bus High (2) (4) (6) (1)(3) Reset exception handling vector address (when reset, (1)=H'000000, (3)=H'000002) (2)(4) Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address) (5) Start address ((5)=(2)(4)) (6) First program instruction Figure 4.1 Reset Sequence (Advanced Mode with On-Chip ROM Enabled) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 82 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 4 Exception Handling Internal processing Prefetch of first program instruction Vector fetch * * * Address bus (1) (3) (5) , High D15 to D0 (2) (4) (6) (1)(3) Reset exception handling vector address (when reset, (1)=H'000000, (3)=H'000002) (2)(4) Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address) (5) Start address ((5)=(2)(4)) (6) First program instruction Note: * Seven program wait states are inserted. Figure 4.2 Reset Sequence (Advanced Mode with On-Chip ROM Disabled) 4.3.2 Interrupts after Reset If an interrupt is accepted after a reset but before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the PC and CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests, including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. Since the first instruction of a program is always executed immediately after the reset state ends, make sure that this instruction initializes the stack pointer (example: MOV.L #xx: 32, SP). 4.3.3 On-Chip Peripheral Functions after Reset Release After reset release, MSTPCR is initialized to H'0FFF and EXMSTPCR is to H'FFFD, all modules except the DMAC and the DTC enter module stop mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 83 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 4 Exception Handling Consequently, on-chip peripheral module registers cannot be read from or written to. Register reading and writing is enabled when module stop mode is exited. 4.4 Traces Traces are enabled in interrupt control mode 2. Trace mode is not activated in interrupt control mode 0, irrespective of the state of the T bit. For details on interrupt control modes, see section 5, Interrupt Controller. If the T bit in EXR is set to 1, trace mode is activated. In trace mode, a trace exception occurs on completion of each instruction. Trace mode is not affected by interrupt masking. Table 4.3 shows the state of CCR and EXR after execution of trace exception handling. Trace mode is canceled by clearing the T bit in EXR to 0. The T bit saved on the stack retains its value of 1, and when control is returned from the trace exception handling routine by the RTE instruction, trace mode resumes. Trace exception handling is not carried out after execution of the RTE instruction. Interrupts are accepted even within the trace exception handling routine. Table 4.3 Status of CCR and EXR after Trace Exception Handling CCR Interrupt Control Mode 0 2 I UI EXR I2 to I0 T Trace exception handling cannot be used. 1 -- -- 0 Legend: 1: Set to 1 0: Cleared to 0 --: Retains value prior to execution. 4.5 Interrupts Interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. The interrupt controller has two interrupt control modes and can assign interrupts other than NMI to eight priority/mask levels to enable multiplexed interrupt control. The source to start interrupt exception handling and the vector address differ depending on the product. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller. The interrupt exception handling is as follows: 1. The values in the program counter (PC), condition code register (CCR), and extended register (EXR) are saved in the stack. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 84 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 4 Exception Handling 2. The interrupt mask bit is updated and the T bit is cleared to 0. 3. A vector address corresponding to the interrupt source is generated, the start address is loaded from the vector table to the PC, and program execution starts from that address. 4.6 Trap Instruction Trap instruction exception handling starts when a TRAPA instruction is executed. Trap instruction exception handling can be executed at all times in the program execution state. The trap instruction exception handling is as follows: 1. The values in the program counter (PC), condition code register (CCR), and extended register (EXR) are saved in the stack. 2. The interrupt mask bit is updated and the T bit is cleared to 0. 3. A vector address corresponding to the interrupt source is generated, the start address is loaded from the vector table to the PC, and program execution starts from that address. The TRAPA instruction fetches a start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a vector number from 0 to 3, as specified in the instruction code. Table 4.4 shows the status of CCR and EXR after execution of trap instruction exception handling. Table 4.4 Status of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling CCR Interrupt Control Mode 0 2 I 1 1 UI -- -- EXR I2 to I0 -- -- T -- 0 Legend: 1: Set to 1 0: Cleared to 0 --: Retains value prior to execution. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 85 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.7 Stack Status after Exception Handling Figure 4.3 shows the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling and interrupt exception handling. (a) Normal Modes*2 SP EXR Reserved*1 SP CCR CCR*1 PC (16 bits) CCR CCR*1 PC (16 bits) Interrupt control mode 0 Interrupt control mode 2 (b) Advanced Modes SP EXR Reserved*1 SP CCR PC (24 bits) CCR PC (24 bits) Interrupt control mode 0 Notes: 1. Ignored on return. 2. Normal modes are not available in this LSI. Interrupt control mode 2 Figure 4.3 Stack Status after Exception Handling Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 86 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.8 Usage Notes When accessing word data or longword data, this LSI assumes that the lowest address bit is 0. The stack should always be accessed by word transfer instruction or longword transfer instruction, and the value of the stack pointer (SP, ER7) should always be kept even. Use the following instructions to save registers: PUSH.W PUSH.L Rn ERn (or MOV.W Rn, @-SP) (or MOV.L ERn, @-SP) Use the following instructions to restore registers: POP.W POP.L Rn ERn (or MOV.W @SP+, Rn) (or MOV.L @SP+, ERn) Setting SP to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. Figure 4.4 shows an example of operation when the SP value is odd. Address CCR SP PC SP R1L H'FFFEFA H'FFFEFB PC H'FFFEFC H'FFFEFD H'FFFEFE SP H'FFFEFF TRAP instruction executed SP set to H'FFFEFF [Legend] CCR : PC : R1L : SP : Condition code register Program counter General register R1L Stack pointer MOV.B R1L, @-ER7 Contents of CCR lost Data saved above SP Note: This diagram illustrates an example in which the interrupt control mode is 0, in advanced mode. Figure 4.4 Operation when SP Value Is Odd Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 87 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 4 Exception Handling Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 88 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.1 Features * Two interrupt control modes Any of two interrupt control modes can be set by means of the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in the interrupt control register (INTCR). * Priorities settable with IPR An interrupt priority register (IPR) is provided for setting interrupt priorities. Eight priority levels can be set for each module for all interrupts except NMI. NMI is assigned the highest priority level of 8, and can be accepted at all times. * Independent vector addresses All interrupt sources are assigned independent vector addresses, making it unnecessary for the source to be identified in the interrupt handling routine. * Nine external interrupts NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is accepted at all times. Rising edge or falling edge can be selected for NMI. Falling-edge, rising-edge, or both-edge detection, or level sensing, can be selected for IRQ7 to IRQ0. * DTC and DMAC control DTC and DMAC activations are performed by means of interrupts. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 89 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller A block diagram of the interrupt controller is shown in figure 5.1. INTM1 INTM0 INTCR NMIEG NMI input IRQ input NMI input unit IRQ input unit ISR SSIER ITSR ISCRL Internal interrupt sources SWDTEND to IICI1 IPR Interrupt controller Legend: ISCRL: IRQ sense control register IER: IRQ enable register ISR: IRQ status register IPR: Interrupt priority register INTCR: Interrupt control register ITSR: IRQ pin select register SSIER: Software standby release IRQ enable register IER Priority determination I I2 to I0 Interrupt request Vector number CPU CCR EXR Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 90 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.2 Input/Output Pins Table 5.1 summarizes the pins of the interrupt controller. Table 5.1 Name NMI IRQ7 to IRQ0 Pin Configuration I/O Input Input Function Nonmaskable external interrupt Rising or falling edge can be selected. Maskable external interrupts Rising edge, falling edge, both edges, or level sensing, can be selected. 5.3 Register Descriptions The interrupt controller has the following registers. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Interrupt control register (INTCR) IRQ sense control register L (ISCRL) IRQ enable register (IER) IRQ status register (ISR) IRQ pin select register (ITSR) Software standby release IRQ enable register (SSIER) Interrupt priority register A (IPRA) Interrupt priority register B (IPRB) Interrupt priority register C (IPRC) Interrupt priority register D (IPRD) Interrupt priority register E (IPRE) Interrupt priority register F (IPRF) Interrupt priority register G (IPRG) Interrupt priority register H (IPRH) Interrupt priority register I (IPRI) Interrupt priority register J (IPRJ) Interrupt priority register K (IPRK) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 91 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.3.1 Interrupt Control Register (INTCR) INTCR selects the interrupt control mode, and the detected edge for NMI. Bit 7, 6 Bit Name Initial Value All 0 R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 5 4 INTM1 INTM0 0 0 R/W R/W Interrupt Control Select Mode 1 and 0 These bits select either of two interrupt control modes for the interrupt controller. 00: Interrupt control mode 0 Interrupts are controlled by I bit. 01: Setting prohibited. 10: Interrupt control mode 2 Interrupts are controlled by bits I2 to I0, and IPR. 11: Setting prohibited. 3 NMIEG 0 R/W NMI Edge Select Selects the input edge for the NMI pin. 0: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of NMI input 1: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of NMI input 2 to 0 - - - 0 - Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 92 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.3.2 Interrupt Priority Registers A to K (IPRA to IPRK) IPR are eleven 16-bit readable/writable registers that set priorities (levels 7 to 0) for interrupts other than NMI. The correspondence between interrupt sources and IPR settings is shown in table 5.2. Setting a value in the range from H'0 to H'7 in the 3-bit groups of bits 14 to 12, 10 to 8, 6 to 4, and 2 to 0 sets the priority of the corresponding interrupt. IPR should be read in word size. Bit 15 Bit Name Initial Value 0 R/W Description Reserved This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 14 13 12 IPR14 IPR13 IPR12 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W Sets the priority of the corresponding interrupt source. 000: Priority level 0 (Lowest) 001: Priority level 1 010: Priority level 2 011: Priority level 3 100: Priority level 4 101: Priority level 5 110: Priority level 6 111: Priority level 7 (Highest) 11 - - - 0 - Reserved This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 10 9 8 IPR10 IPR9 IPR8 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W Sets the priority of the corresponding interrupt source. 000: Priority level 0 (Lowest) 001: Priority level 1 010: Priority level 2 011: Priority level 3 100: Priority level 4 101: Priority level 5 110: Priority level 6 111: Priority level 7 (Highest) 7 - 0 - Reserved This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 93 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Bit 6 5 4 Bit Name IPR6 IPR5 IPR4 Initial Value 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Sets the priority of the corresponding interrupt source. 000: Priority level 0 (Lowest) 001: Priority level 1 010: Priority level 2 011: Priority level 3 100: Priority level 4 101: Priority level 5 110: Priority level 6 111: Priority level 7 (Highest) 3 - IPR2 IPR1 IPR0 0 - R/W R/W R/W Reserved This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Sets the priority of the corresponding interrupt source. 000: Priority level 0 (Lowest) 001: Priority level 1 010: Priority level 2 011: Priority level 3 100: Priority level 4 101: Priority level 5 110: Priority level 6 111: Priority level 7 (Highest) 2 1 0 1 1 1 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 94 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.3.3 IRQ Enable Register (IER) IER controls enabling and disabling of interrupt requests IRQ7 to IRQ0. Bit 15 to 8 7 Bit Name - IRQ7E Initial Value All 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved The write value should always be 0. IRQ7 Enable The IRQ7 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1. 6 IRQ6E 0 R/W IRQ6 Enable The IRQ6 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1. 5 IRQ5E 0 R/W IRQ5 Enable The IRQ5 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1. 4 IRQ4E 0 R/W IRQ4 Enable The IRQ4 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1. 3 IRQ3E 0 R/W IRQ3 Enable The IRQ3 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1. 2 IRQ2E 0 R/W IRQ2 Enable The IRQ2 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1. 1 IRQ1E 0 R/W IRQ1 Enable The IRQ1 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1. 0 IRQ0E 0 R/W IRQ0 Enable The IRQ0 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 95 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.3.4 IRQ Sense Control Register L (ISCRL) ISCRL select the source that generates an interrupt request at pins IRQ7 to IRQ0. Bit 15 14 Bit Name IRQ7SCB IRQ7SCA Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description IRQ7 Sense Control B IRQ7 Sense Control A 00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ7 input low level 01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ7 input 10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ7 input 11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ7 input 13 12 IRQ6SCB IRQ6SCA 0 0 R/W R/W IRQ6 Sense Control B IRQ6 Sense Control A 00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ6 input low level 01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ6 input 10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ6 input 11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ6 input 11 10 IRQ5SCB IRQ5SCA 0 0 R/W R/W IRQ5 Sense Control B IRQ5 Sense Control A 00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ5 input low level 01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ5 input 10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ5 input 11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ5 input Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 96 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Bit 9 8 Bit Name IRQ4SCB IRQ4SCA Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description IRQ4 Sense Control B IRQ4 Sense Control A 00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ4 input low level 01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ4 input 10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ4 input 11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ4 input 7 6 IRQ3SCB IRQ3SCA 0 0 R/W R/W IRQ3 Sense Control B IRQ3 Sense Control A 00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ3 input low level 01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ3 input 10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ3 input 11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ3 input 5 4 IRQ2SCB IRQ2SCA 0 0 R/W R/W IRQ2 Sense Control B IRQ2 Sense Control A 00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ2 input low level 01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ2 input 10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ2 input 11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ2 input Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 97 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Bit 3 2 Bit Name IRQ1SCB IRQ1SCA Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description IRQ1 Sense Control B IRQ1 Sense Control A 00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ1 input low level 01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ1 input 10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ1 input 11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ1 input 1 0 IRQ0SCB IRQ0SCA 0 0 R/W R/W IRQ0 Sense Control B IRQ0 Sense Control A 00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ0 input low level 01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ0 input 10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ0 input 11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ0 input Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 98 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.3.5 IRQ Status Register (ISR) ISR is an IRQ7 to IRQ0 interrupt request flag register. Bit 15 to 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name - IRQ7F IRQ6F IRQ5F IRQ4F IRQ3F IRQ2F IRQ1F IRQ0F Initial Value All 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* Description Reserved The write value should always be 0. [Setting condition] When the interrupt source selected by ISCR occurs [Clearing conditions] * * Cleared by reading IRQnF flag when IRQnF = 1, then writing 0 to IRQnF flag When interrupt exception handling is executed when low-level detection is set and IRQn input is high When IRQn interrupt exception handling is executed when falling, rising, or both-edge detection is set When the DTC is activated by an IRQn interrupt, and the DISEL bit in MRB of the DTC is cleared to 0 * * Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 99 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.3.6 IRQ Pin Select Register (ITSR) ITSR selects input pins IRQ7 to IRQ0. Bit 15 to 8 7 Bit Name - ITS7 Initial Value All 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved The write value should always be 0. Selects IRQ7 input pin. 0: PA7 1: P47 6 ITS6 0 R/W Selects IRQ6 input pin. 0: PA6 1: P46 5 ITS5 0 R/W Selects IRQ5 input pin. 0: PA5 1: P45 4 ITS4 0 R/W Selects IRQ4 input pin. 0: PA4 1: P44 3 ITS3 0 R/W Selects IRQ3 input pin. 0: P53 1: P43 2 ITS2 0 R/W Selects IRQ2 input pin. 0: P52 1: P42 1 ITS1 0 R/W Selects IRQ1 input pin. 0: P51 1: P41 0 ITS0 0 R/W Selects IRQ0 input pin. 0: P50 1: P40 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 100 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.3.7 Software Standby Release IRQ Enable Register (SSIER) SSIER selects the IRQ pins used to recover from the software standby state. Bit 15 to 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name -- SSI7 SSI6 SSI5 SSI4 SSI3 SSI2 SSI1 SSI0 Initial Value All 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved The write value should always be 0. Software Standby Release IRQ Setting These bits select the IRQn pins used to recover from the software standby state. 0: IRQn requests are not sampled in the software standby state (Initial value when n = 7 to 3) 1: When an IRQn request occurs in the software standby state, the chip recovers from the software standby state after the elapse of the oscillation settling time (Initial value when n = 2 to 0) 5.4 5.4.1 Interrupt Sources External Interrupts There are nine external interrupts: NMI and IRQ7 to IRQ0. These interrupts can be used to restore the chip from software standby mode. NMI Interrupt: Nonmaskable interrupt request (NMI) is the highest-priority interrupt, and is always accepted by the CPU regardless of the interrupt control mode or the status of the CPU interrupt mask bits. The NMIEG bit in INTCR can be used to select whether an interrupt is requested at a rising edge or a falling edge on the NMI pin. IRQ7 to IRQ0 Interrupts: Interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 are requested by an input signal at pins IRQ7 to IRQ0. Interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 have the following features: * Using ISCRL, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is generated by a low level, falling edge, rising edge, or both edges, at pins IRQ7 to IRQ0. * Enabling or disabling of interrupt requests IRQ7 to IRQ0 can be selected with IER. * The interrupt priority level can be set with IPR. * The status of interrupt requests IRQ7 to IRQ0 is indicated in ISR. ISR flags can be cleared to 0 by software. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 101 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller When IRQ7 to IRQ0 interrupt requests occur at low level of IRQn, the corresponding IRQ should be held low until an interrupt handling starts. Then the corresponding IRQ should be set to high in the interrupt handling routine and clear the IRQnF bit (n = 0 to 7) in ISR to 0. Interrupts may not be executed when the corresponding IRQ is set to high before the interrupt handling starts. Detection of IRQ7 to IRQ0 interrupts does not depend on whether the relevant pin has been set for input or output. However, when a pin is used as an external interrupt input pin, do not clear the corresponding DDR to 0 and use the pin as an I/O pin for another function. A block diagram of interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 is shown in figure 5.2. IRQnE IRQnSCB, IRQnSCA IRQnF Edge/ level detection circuit input Clear signal Note: n = 7 to 0 S R Q IRQn interrupt request Figure 5.2 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ15 to IRQ0 5.4.2 Internal Interrupts The sources for internal interrupts from on-chip peripheral modules have the following features: * For each on-chip peripheral module there are flags that indicate the interrupt request status, and enable bits that select enabling or disabling of these interrupts. They can be controlled independently. When the enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is issued to the interrupt controller. * The interrupt priority level can be set by means of IPR. * The DMAC and DTC can be activated by a TPU, SCI, or other interrupt request. * When the DMAC or DTC is activated by an interrupt request, it is not affected by the interrupt control mode or CPU interrupt mask bit. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 102 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.5 Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table Table 5.2 shows interrupt exception handling sources, vector addresses, and interrupt priorities. For default priorities, the lower the vector number, the higher the priority. When interrupt control mode 2 is set, priorities among modules can be set by means of the IPR. Modules set at the same priority will conform to their default priorities. Priorities within a module are fixed. Table 5.2 Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities Vector Address* Vector Number 7 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 DTC WDT -- SWDTEND WOVI Reserved for system use 32 33 34 Advanced Mode H'001C H'0040 H'0044 H'0048 H'004C H'0050 H'0054 H'0058 H'005C H'0060 H'0064 H'0068 H'006C H'0070 H'0074 H'0078 H'007C H'0080 H'0084 H'0088 IPR -- IPRA14 to IPRA12 IPRA10 to IPRA8 IPRA6 to IPRA4 IPRA2 to IPRA0 IPRB14 to IPRB12 IPRB10 to IPRB8 IPRB6 to IPRB4 IPRB2 to IPRB0 IPRC14 to IPRC12 IPRC10 to IPRC8 IPRC6 to IPRC4 IPRC2 to IPRC0 IPRD14 to IPRD12 IPRD10 to IPRD8 IPRD6 to IPRD4 IPRD2 to IPRD0 IPRE14 to IPRE12 IPRE10 to IPRE8 IPRE6 to IPRE4 Low Priority High DTC DMAC Activation Activation -- O O O O O O O O -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- O -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Interrupt Source External pin Origin of Interrupt Source NMI IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6 IRQ7 -- Reserved for system use Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 103 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Vector Address* Vector Number 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 TPU_1 TGI1A TGI1B TCI1V TCI1U TPU_2 TGI2A TGI2B TCI2V TCI2U TPU_3 TGI3A TGI3B TGI3C TGI3D TCI3V -- Reserved for system use 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 Advanced Mode H'008C H'0090 H'0094 H'0098 H'009C H'00A0 H'00A4 H'00A8 H'00AC H'00B0 H'00B4 H'00B8 H'00BC H'00C0 H'00C4 H'00C8 H'00CC H'00D0 H'00D4 H'00D8 H'00DC H'00E0 H'00E4 H'00E8 H'00EC H'00F0 H'00F4 H'00F8 H'00FC Low IPRG10 to IPRG8 IPRG14 to IPRG12 IPRF2 to IPRF0 IPRF6 to IPRF4 IPRF6 to IPRF4 IPRF10 to IPRF8 IPR IPRE2 to IPRE0 IPRF14 to IPRF12 Priority High DTC DMAC Activation Activation -- -- -- O -- O O O O -- -- -- -- O O -- -- O O -- -- O O O O -- -- -- -- -- -- -- O -- O -- -- -- -- -- -- -- O -- -- -- O -- -- -- O -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Interrupt Source Refresh controller -- Origin of Interrupt Source CMI Reserved for system use ADI Reserved for system use TGI0A TGI0B TGI0C TGI0D TCI0V A/D -- TPU_0 -- Reserved for system use Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 104 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Vector Address* Vector Number 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 SCI_0 ERI0 RXI0 TXI0 TEI0 88 89 90 91 Advanced Mode H'0100 H'0104 H'0108 H'010C H'0110 H'0114 H'0118 H'011C H'0120 H'0124 H'0128 H'012C H'0130 H'0134 H'0138 H'013C H'0140 H'0144 H'0148 H'014C H'0150 H'0154 H'0158 H'015C H'0160 H'0164 H'0168 H'016C Low IPRH0 to IPRH0 IPRI14 to IPRI12 IPRI10 to IPRI8 IPRI6 to IPRI4 IPRI2 to IPRI0 IPRH6 to IPRH4 IPRH14 to IPRH12 IPRH14 to IPRH12 IPRG2 to IPRG0 IPR IPRG6 to IPRG4 Priority High DTC DMAC Activation Activation O O -- -- O O -- -- O O -- -- O -- -- -- O -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Interrupt Source TPU_4 Origin of Interrupt Source TGI4A TGI4B TCI4V TCI4U TPU_5 TGI5A TGI5B TCI5V TCI5U TMR_0 CMIA0 CMIB0 OVI0 -- TMR_1 Reserved for system use CMIA1 CMIB1 OVI1 IPRH10 to IPRH8 O O -- -- O O O O -- -- -- -- -- O O -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- O O -- -- DMAC Reserved for system use DMTEND0A DMTEND0B DMTEND1A DMTEND1B Reserved for system use Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 105 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Vector Address* Vector Number 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 -- Reserved for system use 112 113 114 115 IIC2 IICI0 Reserved for system use IICI1 Reserved for system use 116 117 118 119 Advanced Mode H'0170 H'0174 H'0178 H'017C H'0180 H'0184 H'0188 H'018C H'0190 H'0194 H'0198 H'019C H'01A0 H'01A4 H'01A8 H'01AC H'01B0 H'01B4 H'01B8 H'01BC H'01C0 H'01C4 H'01C8 H'01CC H'01D0 H'01D4 H'01D8 H'01DC Low IPRK6 to IPRK4 IPRK10 to IPRK8 IPRK14 to IPRK12 IPRJ2 to IPRJ0 IPRJ6 to IPRJ4 IPRJ10 to IPRJ8 IPR IPRJ14 to IPRJ12 Priority High DTC DMAC Activation Activation -- O O -- -- O O -- -- -- -- -- -- O O -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- O O -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Interrupt Source SCI_1 Origin of Interrupt Source ERI1 RXI1 TXI1 TEI1 SCI_2 ERI2 RXI2 TXI2 TEI2 SCI_3 ERI3 RXI3 TXI3 TEI3 SCI_4 ERI4 RXI4 TXI4 TEI4 -- Reserved for system use Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 106 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Vector Address* Vector Number 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 Advanced Mode H'01E0 H'01E4 H'01E8 H'01EC H'01F0 H'01F4 H'01F8 H'01EC Low IPR IPRK2 to IPRK0 Priority High DTC DMAC Activation Activation -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Interrupt Source -- Origin of Interrupt Source Reserved for system use Note: * Lower 16 bits of the start address. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 107 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.6 Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation The interrupt controller has two modes: interrupt control mode 0 and interrupt control mode 2. Interrupt operations differ depending on the interrupt control mode. The interrupt control mode is selected by INTCR. Table 5.3 shows the differences between interrupt control mode 0 and interrupt control mode 2. Table 5.3 Interrupt Interrupt Control Modes Priority Setting Interrupt Mask Bits Description I The priorities of interrupt sources are fixed at the default settings. Interrupt sources except for NMI is masked by the I bit. 8 priority levels except for NMI can be set with IPR. 8-level interrupt mask control is performed by bits I2 to I0. Control Mode Registers 0 Default 2 IPR I2 to I0 5.6.1 Interrupt Control Mode 0 In interrupt control mode 0, interrupt requests except for NMI is masked by the I bit of CCR in the CPU. Figure 5.3 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case. 1. If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. 2. If the I bit is set to 1, only an NMI interrupt is accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending. If the I bit is cleared, an interrupt request is accepted. 3. Interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, the highest-ranked interrupt according to the priority system is accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending. 4. When the CPU accepts an interrupt request, it starts interrupt exception handling after execution of the current instruction has been completed. 5. The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the interrupt handling routine. 6. Next, the I bit in CCR is set to 1. This masks all interrupts except NMI. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 108 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 7. The CPU generates a vector address for the accepted interrupt and starts execution of the interrupt handling routine at the address indicated by the contents of the vector address in the vector table. Program execution status Interrupt generated? Yes Yes No NMI No I=0 Yes No Hold pending No IRQ0 Yes No IRQ1 Yes IICI1 Yes Save PC and CCR I1 Read vector address Branch to interrupt handling routine Figure 5.3 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 0 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 109 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.6.2 Interrupt Control Mode 2 In interrupt control mode 2, mask control is done in eight levels for interrupt requests except for NMI by comparing the EXR interrupt mask level (I2 to I0 bits) in the CPU and the IPR setting. Figure 5.4 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case. 1. If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. 2. When interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, the interrupt with the highest priority according to the interrupt priority levels set in IPR is selected, and lower-priority interrupt requests are held pending. If a number of interrupt requests with the same priority are generated at the same time, the interrupt request with the highest priority according to the priority system shown in table 5.2 is selected. 3. Next, the priority of the selected interrupt request is compared with the interrupt mask level set in EXR. An interrupt request with a priority no higher than the mask level set at that time is held pending, and only an interrupt request with a priority higher than the interrupt mask level is accepted. 4. When the CPU accepts an interrupt request, it starts interrupt exception handling after execution of the current instruction has been completed. 5. The PC, CCR, and EXR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the interrupt handling routine. 6. The T bit in EXR is cleared to 0. The interrupt mask level is rewritten with the priority level of the accepted interrupt. If the accepted interrupt is NMI, the interrupt mask level is set to H'7. 7. The CPU generates a vector address for the accepted interrupt and starts execution of the interrupt handling routine at the address indicated by the contents of the vector address in the vector table. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 110 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Program execution status Interrupt generated? Yes Yes NMI No No No Level 7 interrupt? Yes Mask level 6 or below? Yes Level 6 interrupt? No Yes No Level 1 interrupt? Mask level 5 or below? Yes Mask level 0? Yes No Yes No No Save PC, CCR, and EXR Hold pending Clear T bit to 0 Update mask level Read vector address Branch to interrupt handling routine Figure 5.4 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 2 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 111 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.6.3 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence Figure 5.5 shows the interrupt exception handling sequence. The example shown is for the case where interrupt control mode 0 is set in advanced mode, and the program area and stack area are in on-chip memory. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 112 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Interrupt acceptance Internal operation stack Vector fetch Internal operation Interrupt level determination Instruction Wait for end of instruction prefetch Interrupt handling routine instruction prefetch Interrupt request signal Internal address bus (1) (3) (5) (7) (9) (11) (13) Internal read signal Internal write signal (2) (4) (6) (8) (10) (12) (14) Figure 5.5 Interrupt Exception Handling (6) (8) (9) (11) (10) (12) (13) (14) Internal data bus Section 5 Interrupt Controller Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 113 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 (1) Instruction prefetch address (Not executed. This is the contents of the saved PC, the return address) (2) (4) Instruction code (Not executed) (3) Instruction prefetch address (Not executed) (5) SP-2 (7) SP-4 Saved PC and saved CCR Vector address Interrupt handling routine start address (Vector address contents) Interrupt handling routine start address ((13) = (10)(12)) First instruction of interrupt handling routine Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.6.4 Interrupt Response Times Table 5.4 shows interrupt response times - the interval between generation of an interrupt request and execution of the first instruction in the interrupt handling routine. The execution status symbols used in table 5.4 are explained in table 5.5. This LSI is capable of fast word transfer to on-chip memory, and have the program area in on-chip ROM and the stack area in on-chip RAM, enabling high-speed processing. Table 5.4 Interrupt Response Times Normal Mode*5 Interrupt control mode 0 3 Interrupt control mode 2 3 Advanced Mode Interrupt control mode 0 3 Interrupt control mode 2 3 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Execution Status Interrupt priority determination*1 Number of wait states until executing 1 to 19 +2*SI 1 to 19+2*SI instruction ends*2 PC, CCR, EXR stack save Vector fetch Instruction fetch*3 Internal processing*4 2*SK SI 2*SI 2 11 to 31 3*SK SI 2*SI 2 12 to 32 1 to 19+2*SI 1 to 19+2*SI 2*SK 2*SI 2*SI 2 12 to 32 3*SK 2*SI 2*SI 2 13 to 33 Total (using on-chip memory) Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Two states in case of internal interrupt. Refers to MULXS and DIVXS instructions. Prefetch after interrupt acceptance and interrupt handling routine prefetch. Internal processing after interrupt acceptance and internal processing after vector fetch. Not available in this LSI. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 114 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Table 5.5 Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution Statuses Object of Access External Device 8-Bit Bus 16-Bit Bus 3-State Access 6+2m 2-State Access 2 3-State Access 3+m Symbol Instruction fetch SI Branch address read SJ Stack manipulation SK Internal Memory 1 2-State Access 4 Legend: m: Number of wait states in an external device access. 5.6.5 DTC and DMAC Activation by Interrupt The DTC and DMAC can be activated by an interrupt. In this case, the following options are available: * * * * Interrupt request to CPU Activation request to DTC Activation request to DMAC Selection of a number of the above For details of interrupt requests that can be used to activate the DTC and DMAC, see table 5.2 and section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC) and section 7, DMA Controller (DMAC). Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 115 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.7 5.7.1 Usage Notes Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 to mask interrupts, the masking becomes effective after execution of the instruction. When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 by an instruction such as BCLR or MOV, if an interrupt is generated during execution of the instruction, the interrupt concerned will still be enabled on completion of the instruction, and so interrupt exception handling for that interrupt will be executed on completion of the instruction. However, if there is an interrupt request of higher priority than that interrupt, interrupt exception handling will be executed for the higher-priority interrupt, and the lower-priority interrupt will be ignored. The same also applies when an interrupt source flag is cleared to 0. Figure 5.6 shows an example in which the TCIEV bit in the TPU's TIER_0 register is cleared to 0. The above contention will not occur if an enable bit or interrupt source flag is cleared to 0 while the interrupt is masked. TIER_0 write cycle by CPU TCIV exception handling Internal address bus TIER_0 address Internal write signal TCIEV TCFV TCIV interrupt signal Figure 5.6 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 116 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.7.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts Instructions that disable interrupts are LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC. After any of these instructions is executed, all interrupts including NMI are disabled and the next instruction is always executed. When the I bit is set by one of these instructions, the new value becomes valid two states after execution of the instruction ends. 5.7.3 Times when Interrupts Are Disabled There are times when interrupt acceptance is disabled by the interrupt controller. The interrupt controller disables interrupt acceptance for a 3-state period after the CPU has updated the mask level with an LDC, ANDC, ORC, or XORC instruction. 5.7.4 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction Interrupt operation differs between the EEPMOV.B instruction and the EEPMOV.W instruction. With the EEPMOV.B instruction, an interrupt request (including NMI) issued during the transfer is not accepted until the transfer is completed. With the EEPMOV.W instruction, if an interrupt request is issued during the transfer, interrupt exception handling starts at a break in the transfer cycle. The PC value saved on the stack in this case is the address of the next instruction. Therefore, if an interrupt is generated during execution of an EEPMOV.W instruction, the following coding should be used. L1: EEPMOV.W MOV.W BNE R4,R4 L1 5.7.5 Change of IRQ Pin Select Register (ITSR) Setting When the ITSR setting is changed, an edge occurs internally and the IRQnF bit (n = 0 to 7) of ISR may be set to 1 at the unintended timing if the selected pin level before the change is different from the selected pin level after the change. If the IRQn interrupt request (n = 0 to 7) is enabled, the interrupt exception handling is executed. To prevent the unintended interrupt, ITSR setting should be changed while the IRQn interrupt request is disabled, then the IRQnF bit should be cleared to 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 117 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.7.6 Note on IRQ Status Register (ISR) Since IRQnF flags may be set to 1 depending on the pin states after a reset, be sure to read from ISR after a reset and then write 0 to clear the IRQnF flags. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 118 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) This LSI has an on-chip bus controller (BSC) that manages the external space divided into eight areas. The bus controller also has a bus arbitration function, and controls the operation of the bus masters--the CPU, DMA controller (DMAC) and data transfer controller (DTC). 6.1 Features * Manages external space in area units Manages the external space divided into eight areas of 2 Mbytes Bus specifications can be set independently for each area Burst ROM, or DRAM, interface can be set * Basic bus interface Chip select signals (CS0 to CS7) can be output for areas 0 to 7 8-bit access or 16-bit access can be selected for each area 2-state access or 3-state access can be selected for each area Program wait states can be inserted for each area * Burst ROM interface Burst ROM interface can be set independently for areas 0 and 1 * DRAM interface DRAM interface can be set for areas 2 to 5 * Bus arbitration function Includes a bus arbiter that arbitrates bus right between the CPU, DMAC, and DTC BSCS201A_000020020100 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 119 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) A block diagram of the bus controller is shown in figure 6.1. Internal address bus Area decoder CS7 to CS0 External bus controller WAIT BREQ BACK BREQO Internal bus master bus request signal Internal bus master bus acknowledge signal External bus arbiter External bus control signals Internal bus control signals Internal bus controller CPU bus request signal DTC bus request signal DMAC bus request signal CPU bus acknowledge signal DTC bus acknowledge signal DMAC bus acknowledge signal Internal bus arbiter Control registers Internal data bus ABWCR ASTCR DRAMCR DRACCR REFCR RTCNT CSACRL RTCOR WTCRAH WTCRAL WTCRBH WTCRBL RDNCR CSACRH BROMCRH BROMCRL BCR Legend: ABWCR: ASTCR: WTCRAH, WTCRAL, WTCRBH, and WTCRBL: RDNCR: CSACRH and CSACRL: BROMCRH: BROMCRL: BCR: DRAMCR: Wait control registers AH, AL, BH, and BL DRACCR: Read strobe timing control register REFCR: CS assertion period control registers H and L RTCNT: Area 0 burst ROM interface control register RTCOR: Bus width control register Access state control register Area 1 burst ROM interface control register Bus control register DRAM control register DRAM access control register Refresh control register Refresh timer counter Refresh time constant register Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of Bus Controller Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 120 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.2 Input/Output Pins Table 6.1 summarizes the pin configuration of the bus controller. Table 6.1 Name Address strobe Pin Configuration Symbol AS I/O Output Function Strobe signal indicating that normal space is accessed and address output on address bus is enabled. Strobe signal indicating that normal space is being read. Strobe signal indicating that normal space is written to, and upper half (D15 to D8) of data bus is enabled or DRAM space write enable signal. Strobe signal indicating that normal space is written to, and lower half (D7 to D0) of data bus is enabled. Strobe signal indicating that area 0 is selected. Strobe signal indicating that area 1 is selected Strobe signal indicating that area 2 is selected, DRAM row address strobe signal when area 2 is DRAM space or areas 2 to 5 are set as continuous DRAM space. Strobe signal indicating that area 3 is selected, DRAM row address strobe signal when area 3 is DRAM space. Strobe signal indicating that area 4 is selected. Strobe signal indicating that area 5 is selected. Strobe signal indicating that area 6 is selected. Strobe signal indicating that area 7 is selected. 16-bit DRAM space upper column address strobe signal, 8-bit DRAM space column address strobe signal. Read High write RD HWR Output Output Low write LWR Output Chip select 0 Chip select 1 Chip select 2/row address strobe 2 CS0 CS1 CS2/ RAS2 Output Output Output Chip select 3/row address strobe 3 Chip select 4 Chip select 5 Chip select 6 Chip select 7 Upper column address strobe CS3/ RAS3 CS4 CS5 CS6 CS7 UCAS Output Output Output Output Output Output Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 121 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Name Lower column address strobe Output enable Wait Bus request Bus request acknowledge Bus request output Symbol LCAS OE WAIT BREQ BACK BREQO I/O Output Output Input Input Output Output Function 16-bit DRAM space lower column address strobe signal. Output enable signal for the DRAM space. Wait request signal when accessing external address space. Request signal for release of bus to external bus master. Acknowledge signal indicating that bus has been released to external bus master. External bus request signal used when internal bus master accesses external address space when external bus is released. Data transfer acknowledge signal for single address transfer by DMAC channel 1. Data transfer acknowledge signal for single address transfer by DMAC channel 0. Data transfer acknowledge 1 (DMAC) Data transfer acknowledge 0 (DMAC) DACK1 DACK0 Output Output 6.3 Register Descriptions The bus controller has the following registers. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Bus width control register (ABWCR) Access state control register (ASTCR) Wait control register AH (WTCRAH) Wait control register AL (WTCRAL) Wait control register BH (WTCRBH) Wait control register BL (WTCRBL) Read strobe timing control register (RDNCR) CS assertion period control register H (CSACRH) CS assertion period control register L (CSACRL) Area 0 burst ROM interface control register (BROMCRH) Area 1 burst ROM interface control register (BROMCRL) Bus control register (BCR) DRAM control register (DRAMCR) DRAM access control register (DRACCR) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 122 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) * Refresh control register (REFCR) * Refresh timer counter (RTCNT) * Refresh time constant register (RTCOR) 6.3.1 Bus Width Control Register (ABWCR) ABWCR designates each area in the external address space as either 8-bit access space or 16-bit access space. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name ABW7 ABW6 ABW5 ABW4 ABW3 ABW2 ABW1 ABW0 * Initial Value* 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Area 7 to 0 Bus Width Control These bits select whether the corresponding area is to be designated as 8-bit access space or 16-bit access space. 0: Area n is designated as 16-bit access space 1: Area n is designated as 8-bit access space (n = 7 to 0) In modes 2 and 4, ABWCR is initialized to 1. In modes 1 and 7, ABWCR is initialized to 0. 6.3.2 Access State Control Register (ASTCR) ASTCR designates each area in the external address space as either 2-state access space or 3-state access space. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name AST7 AST6 AST5 AST4 AST3 AST2 AST1 AST0 Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Area 7 to 0 Access State Control These bits select whether the corresponding area is to be designated as 2-state access space or 3-state access space. Wait state insertion is enabled or disabled at the same time. 0: Area n is designated as 2-state access space Wait state insertion in area n access is disabled 1: Area n is designated as 3-state access space Wait state insertion in area n access is enabled (n = 7 to 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 123 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.3.3 Wait Control Registers AH, AL, BH, and BL (WTCRAH, WTCRAL, WTCRBH, and WTCRBL) WTCRA and WTCRB select the number of program wait states for each area in the external address space. * WTCRAH Bit 15 Bit Name Initial Value 0 R/W R Description Reserved This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 14 13 12 W72 W71 W70 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W Area 7 Wait Control 2 to 0 These bits select the number of program wait states when accessing area 7 while AST7 bit in ASTCR = 1. 000: Program wait not inserted 001: 1 program wait state inserted 010: 2 program wait states inserted 011: 3 program wait states inserted 100: 4 program wait states inserted 101: 5 program wait states inserted 110: 6 program wait states inserted 111: 7 program wait states inserted 11 - - 0 R Reserved This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 124 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bit 10 9 8 Bit Name W62 W61 W60 Initial Value 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Area 6 Wait Control 2 to 0 These bits select the number of program wait states when accessing area 6 while AST6 bit in ASTCR = 1. 000: Program wait not inserted 001: 1 program wait state inserted 010: 2 program wait states inserted 011: 3 program wait states inserted 100: 4 program wait states inserted 101: 5 program wait states inserted 110: 6 program wait states inserted 111: 7 program wait states inserted * WTARAL Bit 7 Bit Name Initial Value 0 R/W R Description Reserved This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 6 5 4 W52 W51 W50 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W Area 5 Wait Control 2 to 0 These bits select the number of program wait states when accessing area 5 while AST5 bit in ASTCR = 1. 000: Program wait not inserted 001: 1 program wait state inserted 010: 2 program wait states inserted 011: 3 program wait states inserted 100: 4 program wait states inserted 101: 5 program wait states inserted 110: 6 program wait states inserted 111: 7 program wait states inserted - Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 125 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bit 3 Bit Name Initial Value 0 R/W R Description Reserved This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 2 1 0 W42 W41 W40 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W Area 4 Wait Control 2 to 0 These bits select the number of program wait states when accessing area 4 while AST4 bit in ASTCR = 1. 000: Program wait not inserted 001: 1 program wait state inserted 010: 2 program wait states inserted 011: 3 program wait states inserted 100: 4 program wait states inserted 101: 5 program wait states inserted 110: 6 program wait states inserted 111: 7 program wait states inserted - Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 126 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) * WTCRBH Bit 15 Bit Name Initial Value 0 R/W R Description Reserved This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 14 13 12 W32 W31 W30 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W Area 3 Wait Control 2 to 0 These bits select the number of program wait states when accessing area 3 while AST3 bit in ASTCR = 1. 000: Program wait not inserted 001: 1 program wait state inserted 010: 2 program wait states inserted 011: 3 program wait states inserted 100: 4 program wait states inserted 101: 5 program wait states inserted 110: 6 program wait states inserted 111: 7 program wait states inserted 11 - - 0 R Reserved This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 10 9 8 W22 W21 W20 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W Area 2 Wait Control 2 to 0 These bits select the number of program wait states when accessing area 2 while AST2 bit in ASTCR = 1. 000: Program wait not inserted 001: 1 program wait state inserted 010: 2 program wait states inserted 011: 3 program wait states inserted 100: 4 program wait states inserted 101: 5 program wait states inserted 110: 6 program wait states inserted 111: 7 program wait states inserted Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 127 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) * WTCRBL Bit 7 Bit Name Initial Value 0 R/W R Description Reserved This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 6 5 4 W12 W11 W10 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W Area 1 Wait Control 2 to 0 These bits select the number of program wait states when accessing area 1 while AST1 bit in ASTCR = 1. 000: Program wait not inserted 001: 1 program wait state inserted 010: 2 program wait states inserted 011: 3 program wait states inserted 100: 4 program wait states inserted 101: 5 program wait states inserted 110: 6 program wait states inserted 111: 7 program wait states inserted 3 - - 0 R Reserved This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 2 1 0 W02 W01 W00 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W Area 0 Wait Control 2 to 0 These bits select the number of program wait states when accessing area 0 while AST0 bit in ASTCR = 1. 000: Program wait not inserted 001: 1 program wait state inserted 010: 2 program wait states inserted 011: 3 program wait states inserted 100: 4 program wait states inserted 101: 5 program wait states inserted 110: 6 program wait states inserted 111: 7 program wait states inserted Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 128 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.3.4 Read Strobe Timing Control Register (RDNCR) RDNCR selects the read strobe signal (RD) negation timing in a basic bus interface read access. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name RDN7 RDN6 RDN5 RDN4 RDN3 RDN2 RDN1 RDN0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Read Strobe Timing Control 7 to 0 These bits set the negation timing of the read strobe in a corresponding area read access. As shown in figure 6.2, the read strobe for an area for which the RDNn bit is set to 1 is negated one half-state earlier than that for an area for which the RDNn bit is cleared to 0. The read data setup and hold time specifications are also one half-state earlier. 0: In an area n read access, the RD is negated at the end of the read cycle 1: In an area n read access, the RD is negated one half-state before the end of the read cycle (n = 7 to 0) Bus cycle T1 T2 T3 RD RDNn = 0 Data RD RDNn = 1 Data Figure 6.2 Read Strobe Negation Timing (Example of 3-State Access Space) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 129 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.3.5 CS Assertion Period Control Registers H, L (CSACRH, CSACRL) CSACRH and CSACRL select whether or not the assertion period of the basic bus interface chip select signals (CSn) and address signals is to be extended. Extending the assertion period of the CSn and address signals allows flexible interfacing to external I/O devices. * CSACRH Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name CSXH7 CSXH6 CSXH5 CSXH4 CSXH3 CSXH2 CSXH1 CSXH0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description CS and Address Signal Assertion Period Control 1 These bits specify whether or not the Th cycle is to be inserted (see figure 6.3). When an area for which the CSXHn bit is set to 1 is accessed, a one-state Th cycle, in which only the CSn and address signals are asserted, is inserted before the normal access cycle. 0: In area n basic bus interface access, the CSn and address assertion period (Th) is not extended 1: In area n basic bus interface access, the CSn and address assertion period (Th) is extended (n = 7 to 0) * CSACRL Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name CSXT7 CSXT6 CSXT5 CSXT4 CSXT3 CSXT2 CSXT1 CSXT0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description CS and Address Signal Assertion Period Control 2 These bits specify whether or not the Tt cycle shown in figure 6.3 is to be inserted. When an area for which the CSXTn bit is set to 1 is accessed, a one-state Tt cycle, in which only the CSn and address signals are asserted, is inserted after the normal access cycle. 0: In area n basic bus interface access, the CSn and address assertion period (Tt) is not extended 1: In area n basic bus interface access, the CSn and address assertion period (Tt) is extended (n = 7 to 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 130 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bus cycle Th Address CS RD Read Data HWR, LWR Write Data T1 T2 T3 Tt Figure 6.3 CS and Address Assertion Period Extension (Example of 3-State Access Space and RDNn = 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 131 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.3.6 Area 0 Burst ROM Interface Control Register (BROMCRH) Area 1 Burst ROM Interface Control Register (BROMCRL) BROMCRH and BROMCRL are used to make burst ROM interface settings. Area 0 and area 1 burst ROM interface settings can be made independently in BROMCRH and BROMCRL, respectively. Bit 7 Bit Name BSRMn Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Burst ROM Interface Select Selects the basic bus interface or burst ROM interface. 0: Basic bus interface space 1: Burst ROM interface space 6 5 4 BSTSn2 BSTSn1 BSTSn0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Burst Cycle Select These bits select the number of burst cycle states. 000: 1 state 001: 2 states 010: 3 states 011: 4 states 100: 5 states 101: 6 states 110: 7 states 111: 8 states 3 and 2 1 0 - All 0 R/W Reserved Though these bits can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. BSWDn1 BSWDn0 0 0 R/W R/W Burst Word Number Select These bits select the number of words that can be burst-accessed on the burst ROM interface. 00: Maximum 4 words 01: Maximum 8 words 10: Maximum 16 words 11: Maximum 32 words (n = 1 or 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 132 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.3.7 Bus Control Register (BCR) BCR is used for idle cycle settings, selection of the external bus released state protocol, enabling or disabling of the write data buffer function, and enabling or disabling of WAIT pin input. Bit 15 Bit Name BRLE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description External Bus Release Enable Enables or disables external bus release. 0: External bus release disabled BREQ, BACK, and BREQO pins can be used as I/O ports 1: External bus release enabled 14 BREQOE 0 R/W BREQO Pin Enable Controls outputting the bus request signal (BREQO) to the external bus master in the external bus released state, when an internal bus master performs an external address space access, or when a refresh request is generated. 0: BREQO output disabled BREQO pin can be used as I/O port 1: BREQO output enabled 13 - 0 R/W Reserved Though this bit can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. 12 IDLC 1 R/W Idle Cycle State Number Select Specifies the number of states in the idle cycle set by ICIS2, ICIS1, and ICIS0. 0: Idle cycle comprises 1 state 1: Idle cycle comprises 2 states 11 ICIS1 1 R/W Idle Cycle Insert 1 When consecutive external read cycles are performed in different areas, an idle cycle can be inserted between the bus cycles. 0: Idle cycle not inserted 1: Idle cycle inserted Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 133 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bit 10 Bit Name ICIS0 Initial Value 1 R/W R/W Description Idle Cycle Insert 0 When an external read cycle and external write cycle are performed consecutively, an idle cycle can be inserted between the bus cycles. 0: Idle cycle not inserted 1: Idle cycle inserted 9 WDBE 0 R/W Write Data Buffer Enable The write data buffer function can be used for an external write cycle or DMAC single address transfer cycle. 0: Write data buffer function not used 1: Write data buffer function used 8 WAITE 0 R/W WAIT Pin Enable Selects enabling or disabling of wait input by the WAIT pin. 0: Wait input by WAIT pin disabled WAIT pin can be used as I/O port 1: Wait input by WAIT pin enabled 7 to 3 - All 0 R/W Reserved Though these bits can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. 2 ICIS2 0 R/W Idle Cycle Insert 2 When an external write cycle and external read cycle are performed consecutively, an idle cycle can be inserted between the bus cycles. 0: Idle cycle not inserted 1: Idle cycle inserted 1 and 0 - 0 R/W Reserved Though these bits can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 134 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.3.8 DRAM Control Register (DRAMCR) DRAMCR is used to make DRAM/synchronous DRAM interface settings. Bit 15 Bit Name OEE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description OE Output Enable The OE signal used when EDO page mode DRAM is connected can be output from the (OE) pin. The OE signal is common to all areas designated as DRAM space. 0: OE signal output disabled (OE) pin can be used as I/O port 1: OE signal output enabled 14 RAST 0 R/W RAS Assertion Timing Select Selects whether, in DRAM access, the RAS signal is asserted from the start of the Tr cycle (rising edge of ) or from the falling edge of . Figure 6.4 shows the relationship between the RAST bit setting and the RAS assertion timing. The setting of this bit applies to all areas designated as DRAM space. 0: RAS is asserted from falling edge in Tr cycle 1: RAS is asserted from start of Tr cycle 13 - 0 R/W Reserved Though this bit can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. 12 CAST 0 R/W Column Address Output Cycle Number Select Selects whether the column address output cycle in DRAM access comprises 3 states or 2 states. The setting of this bit applies to all areas designated as DRAM space. 0: 2-state column address output cycle 1: 3-state column address output cycle 11 - 0 R/W Reserved Though this bit can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 135 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bit 10 9 8 Bit Name RMTS2 RMTS1 RMTS0 Initial Value 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description DRAM Space Select These bits designate DRAM space for areas 2 to 5. When continuous DRAM space is set, it is possible to connect large-capacity DRAM exceeding 2 Mbytes per area. In this case, the RAS signal is output from the CS2 pin. 000: Normal space 001: Normal space in areas 3 to 5 DRAM space in area 2 010: Normal space in areas 4 and 5 DRAM space in areas 2 and 3 011: Reserved (setting prohibited) 100: Reserved (setting prohibited) 101: Reserved (setting prohibited) 110: Reserved (setting prohibited) 111: Continuous DRAM space in areas 2 to 5 7 BE 0 R/W Burst Access Enable Selects enabling or disabling of burst access to areas designated as DRAM space. DRAM space burst access is performed in fast page mode. When using EDO page mode DRAM, the OE signal must be connected. 0: Full access 1: Access in fast page mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 136 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bit 6 Bit Name RCDM Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description RAS Down Mode When access to DRAM space is interrupted by an access to normal space, an access to an internal I/O register, etc., this bit selects whether the RAS signal is held low while waiting for the next DRAM access (RAS down mode), or is driven high again (RAS up mode). The setting of this bit is valid only when the BE bit is set to 1. If this bit is cleared to 0 when set to 1 in the RAS down state, the RAS down state is cleared at that point, and RAS goes high. 0: RAS up mode selected for DRAM space access 1: RAS down mode selected for DRAM space access 5 DDS 0 R/W DMAC Single Address Transfer Option Selects whether full access is always performed or burst access is enabled when DMAC single address transfer is performed on the DRAM When the BE bit is cleared to 0 in DRAMCR, disabling DRAM burst access, DMAC single address transfer is performed in full access mode regardless of the setting of this bit. This bit has no effect on other bus master external accesses or DMAC dual address transfers. 0: Full access is always executed 1: Burst access is enabled 4 and 3 - All 0 R/W Reserved Though these bits can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 137 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bit 2 1 0 Bit Name MXC2 MXC1 MXC0 Initial Value 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Address Multiplex Select These bits select the size of the shift toward the lower half of the row address in row address/column address multiplexing. In burst operation on the DRAM interface, these bits also select the row address bits to be used for comparison. For details, refer to section 6.6.2, Address Multiplexing. 000: 8-bit shift * When 8-bit access space is designated: Row address bits A23 to A8 used for comparison * When 16-bit access space is designated: Row address bits A23 to A9 used for comparison 001: 9-bit shift * When 8-bit access space is designated: Row address bits A23 to A9 used for comparison * When 16-bit access space is designated: Row address bits A23 to A10 used for comparison 010: 10-bit shift * When 8-bit access space is designated: Row address bits A23 to A10 used for comparison * When 16-bit access space is designated: Row address bits A23 to A11 used for comparison 011: 11-bit shift * When 8-bit access space is designated: Row address bits A23 to A11 used for comparison * When 16-bit access space is designated: Row address bits A23 to A12 used for comparison 1xx: Setting prohibited Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 138 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bus cycle Tp Address RAST = 0 RAS RAST = 1 RAS Row address Column address Tr Tc1 Tc2 UCAS, LCAS Figure 6.4 RAS Signal Assertion Timing (2-State Column Address Output Cycle, Full Access) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 139 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.3.9 DRAM Access Control Register (DRACCR) DRACCR is used to set the DRAM interface bus specifications. Bit 7 Bit Name DRMI Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Idle Cycle Insertion An idle cycle can be inserted after a DRAM access cycle when a continuous normal space access cycle follows a DRAM access cycle. Idle cycle insertion conditions, setting of number of states, etc., comply with settings of bits ICIS2, ICIS1, ICIS0, and IDLC in BCR register 0: Idle cycle not inserted 1: Idle cycle inserted 6 - 0 R/W Reserved Though this bit can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. 5 4 TPC1 TPC0 0 0 R/W R/W Precharge State Control These bits select the number of states in the RAS precharge cycle in normal access and refreshing. 00: 1-state RAS precharge cycle 01: 2-state RAS precharge cycle 10: 3-state RAS precharge cycle 11: 4-state RAS precharge cycle 3, 2 -- All 0 R/W Reserved Though these bits can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. 1 0 RCD1 RCD0 0 0 R/W R/W RAS-CAS Wait Control These bits select a wait cycle to be inserted between the RAS assert cycle and CAS assert cycle. A 1- to 4-state wait cycle can be inserted. 00: Wait cycle not inserted 01: 1-state wait cycle inserted 10: 2-state wait cycle inserted 11: 3-state wait cycle inserted Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 140 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.3.10 Refresh Control Register (REFCR) REFCR specifies DRAM interface refresh control. Bit 15 Bit Name CMF Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Compare Match Flag Status flag that indicates a match between the values of RTCNT and RTCOR. [Clearing conditions] * * When 0 is written to CMF after reading CMF = 1 while the RFSHE bit is cleared to 0 When CBR refreshing is executed while the RFSHE bit is set to 1 [Setting condition] When RTCOR = RTCNT 14 CMIE 0 R/W Compare Match Interrupt Enable Enables or disables interrupt requests (CMI) by the CMF flag when the CMF flag is set to 1. This bit is valid when refresh control is not performed. When the refresh control is performed, this bit is always cleared to 0 and cannot be modified. 0: Interrupt request by CMF flag disabled 1: Interrupt request by CMF flag enabled 13 12 RCW1 RCW0 0 0 R/W R/W CAS-RAS Wait Control These bits select the number of wait cycles to be inserted between the CAS assert cycle and RAS assert cycle in a DRAM refresh cycle. 00: Wait state not inserted 01: 1 wait state inserted 10: 2 wait states inserted 11: 3 wait states inserted 11 - 0 R/W Reserved Though this bit can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 141 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bit 10 9 8 Bit Name RTCK2 RTCK1 RTCK0 Initial Value 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Refresh Counter Clock Select These bits select the clock to be used to increment the refresh counter. When the input clock is selected with bits RTCK2 to RTCK0, the refresh counter begins counting up. 000: Count operation halted 001: Count on /2 010: Count on /8 011: Count on /32 100: Count on /128 101: Count on /512 110: Count on /2048 111: Count on /4096 7 RFSHE 0 R/W Refresh Control Refresh control can be performed. When refresh control is not performed, the refresh timer can be used as an interval timer. 0: Refresh control is not performed 1: Refresh control is performed 6 CBRM 0 R/W CBR Refresh Control Mode Selects CBR refreshing performed in parallel with other external accesses, or execution of CBR refreshing alone. 0: External access during CAS-before-RAS refreshing is enabled 1: External access during CAS-before-RAS refreshing is disabled 5 4 RLW1 RLW0 0 0 R/W R/W Refresh Cycle Wait Control These bits select the number of wait states to be inserted in a DRAM interface CAS-beforeRAS refresh cycle. This setting applies to all areas designated as DRAM space. 00: No wait state inserted 01: 1 wait state inserted 10: 2 wait states inserted 11: 3 wait states inserted Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 142 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bit 3 Bit Name SLFRF Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Self-Refresh Enable If this bit is set to 1, DRAM self-refresh mode is selected when a transition is made to the software standby state. This bit is valid when the RFSHE bit is set to 1, enabling refresh operations. It is cleared after recovery from software standby mode. 0: Self-refreshing is disabled 1: Self-refreshing is enabled 2 1 0 TPCS2 TPCS1 TPCS0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Self-Refresh Precharge Cycle Control These bits select the number of states in the precharge cycle immediately after selfrefreshing. The number of states in the precharge cycle immediately after self-refreshing are added to the number of states set by bits TPC1 and TPC0 in DRACCR. 000: [TPC set value] states 001: [TPC set value + 1] states 010: [TPC set value + 2] states 011: [TPC set value + 3] states 100: [TPC set value + 4] states 101: [TPC set value + 5] states 110: [TPC set value + 6] states 111: [TPC set value + 7] states Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 143 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.3.11 Refresh Timer Counter (RTCNT) RTCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. RTCNT counts up using the internal clock selected by bits RTCK2 to RTCK0 in REFCR. When RTCNT matches RTCOR (compare match), the CMF flag in REFCR is set to 1 and RTCNT is cleared to H'00. If the RFSHE bit in REFCR is set to 1 at this time, a refresh cycle is started. If the RFSHE bit is cleared to 0 and the CMIE bit in REFCR is set to 1, a compare match interrupt (CMI) is generated. RTCNT is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. 6.3.12 Refresh Time Constant Register (RTCOR) RTCOR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that sets the period for compare match operations with RTCNT. The values of RTCOR and RTCNT are constantly compared, and if they match, the CMF flag in REFCR is set to 1 and RTCNT is cleared to H'00. RTCOR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. 6.4 6.4.1 Operation Area Division The bus controller divides the 16-Mbyte address space into eight areas, 0 to 7, in 2-Mbyte units, and performs bus control for external address space in area units. Chip select signals (CS0 to CS7) can be output for each area. Figure 6.5 shows an outline of the memory map. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 144 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) H'000000 Area 0 (2 Mbytes) H'1FFFFF H'200000 Area 1 (2 Mbytes) H'3FFFFF H'400000 Area 2 (2 Mbytes) H'5FFFFF H'600000 Area 3 (2 Mbytes) H'7FFFFF H'800000 Area 4 (2 Mbytes) H'9FFFFF H'A00000 Area 5 (2 Mbytes) H'BFFFFF H'C00000 Area 6 (2 Mbytes) H'DFFFFF H'E00000 Area 7 (2 Mbytes) H'FFFFFF Figure 6.5 Area Divisions Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 145 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.4.2 Bus Specifications The external space bus specifications consist of five elements: bus width, number of access states, number of program wait states, read strobe timing, and chip select (CS) assertion period extension states. The bus width and number of access states for on-chip memory and internal I/O registers are fixed, and are not affected by the bus controller. Bus Width: A bus width of 8 or 16 bits can be selected with ABWCR. An area for which an 8-bit bus is selected functions as an 8-bit access space, and an area for which a 16-bit bus is selected functions as a 16-bit access space. If all areas are designated as 8-bit access space, 8-bit bus mode is set; if any area is designated as 16-bit access space, 16-bit bus mode is set. Number of Access States: Two or three access states can be selected with ASTCR. An area for which 2-state access is selected functions as a 2-state access space, and an area for which 3-state access is selected functions as a 3-state access space. With the DRAM interface and burst ROM interface, the number of access states may be determined without regard to the setting of ASTCR. When 2-state access space is designated, wait insertion is disabled. When 3-state access space is designated, it is possible to insert program waits by means of the WTCRA and WTCRB, and external waits by means of the WAIT pin. Number of Program Wait States: When 3-state access space is designated by ASTCR, the number of program wait states to be inserted automatically is selected with WTCRA and WTCRB. From 0 to 7 program wait states can be selected. Table 6.2 shows the bus specifications (bus width, and number of access states and program wait states) for each basic bus interface area. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 146 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Table 6.2 ABWCR ABWn 0 Bus Specifications for Each Area (Basic Bus Interface) ASTCR ASTn 0 1 WTCRA, WTCRB Wn2 -- 0 Wn1 -- 0 Wn0 -- 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Bus Specifications (Basic Bus Interface) Bus Width 16 Access States 2 3 Program Wait States 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (n = 0 to 7) 1 0 1 -- 0 -- 0 -- 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Read Strobe Timing: RDNCR can be used to select either of two negation timings (at the end of the read cycle or one half-state before the end of the read cycle) for the read strobe (RD) used in the basic bus interface space. Chip Select (CS) Assertion Period Extension States: Some external I/O devices require a setup time and hold time between address and CS signals and strobe signals such as RD, HWR, and LWR. CSACR can be used to insert states in which only the CS, AS, and address signals are asserted before and after a basic bus space access cycle. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 147 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.4.3 Memory Interfaces The memory interfaces in this LSI comprise a basic bus interface that allows direct connection of ROM, SRAM, and so on a synchronous DRAM interface that allows direct connection of synchronous DRAM; and a burst ROM interface that allows direct connection of burst ROM. The interface can be selected independently for each area. An area for which the basic bus interface is designated functions as normal space, an area for which the DRAM interface is designated functions as DRAM space, and an area for which the burst ROM interface is designated functions as burst ROM space. The initial state of each area is basic bus interface, 3-state access space. The initial bus width is selected according to the operating mode. Area 0: Area 0 includes on-chip ROM in expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled and the space excluding on-chip ROM is external space, and in expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled, all of area 0 is external space. When area 0 external space is accessed, the CS0 signal can be output. Either basic bus interface or burst ROM interface can be selected for area 0. Area 1: In externally expanded mode, all of area 1 is external space. When area 1 external space is accessed, the CS1 signal can be output. Either basic bus interface or burst ROM interface can be selected for area 1. Areas 2 to 5: In externally expanded mode, areas 2 to 5 are all external space. When area 2 to 5 external space is accessed, signals CS2 to CS5 can be output. Basic bus interface, or DRAM interface can be selected for areas 2 to 5. With the DRAM interface, signals CS2 and CS3 are used as RAS signals. If areas 2 to 5 are designated as continuous DRAM space, large-capacity (e.g. 64-Mbit) DRAM can be connected. In this case, the CS2 signal is used as the RAS signal for the continuous DRAM space. Area 6: In externally expanded mode, all of area 6 is external space. When area 6 external space is accessed, the CS6 signal can be output. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 148 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Only the basic bus interface can be used for area 6. Area 7: Area 7 includes the on-chip RAM and internal I/O registers. In externally expanded mode, the space excluding the on-chip RAM and internal I/O registers is external space. The onchip RAM is enabled when the RAME bit is set to 1 in the system control register (SYSCR); when the RAME bit is cleared to 0, the on-chip RAM is disabled and the corresponding addresses are in external space. When area 7 external space is accessed, the CS7 signal can be output. Only the basic bus interface can be used for the area 7 memory interface. 6.4.4 Chip Select Signals This LSI can output chip select signals (CS0 to CS7) for areas 0 to 7. The signal outputs low when the corresponding external space area is accessed. Figure 6.6 shows an example of CS0 to CS7 signals output timing. Enabling or disabling of CS0 to CS7 signals output is set by the data direction register (DDR) bit for the port corresponding to the CS0 to CS7 pins. In expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled, the CS0 pin is placed in the output state after a reset. Pins CS1 to CS7 are placed in the input state after a reset and so the corresponding DDR bits should be set to 1 when outputting signals CS1 to CS7. In expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled, pins CS0 to CS7 are all placed in the input state after a reset and so the corresponding DDR bits should be set to 1 when outputting signals CS0 to CS7. When areas 2 to 5 are designated as DRAM space, outputs CS2 is used as RAS signals. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 149 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bus cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus Area n external address Figure 6.6 CSn Signal Output Timing (n = 0 to 7) 6.5 Basic Bus Interface The basic bus interface enables direct connection of ROM, SRAM, and so on. 6.5.1 Data Size and Data Alignment Data sizes for the CPU and other internal bus masters are byte, word, and longword. The bus controller has a data alignment function, and when accessing external space, controls whether the upper data bus (D15 to D8) or lower data bus (D7 to D0) is used according to the bus specifications for the area being accessed (8-bit access space or 16-bit access space) and the data size. 8-Bit Access Space: Figure 6.7 illustrates data alignment control for the 8-bit access space. With the 8-bit access space, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) is always used for accesses. The amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte: a word access is performed as two byte accesses, and a longword access, as four byte accesses. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 150 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Upper data bus D15 Lower data bus D0 D8 D7 Byte size 1st bus cycle 2nd bus cycle 1st bus cycle Longword size 2nd bus cycle 3rd bus cycle 4th bus cycle Word size Figure 6.7 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (8-Bit Access Space) 16-Bit Access Space: Figure 6.8 illustrates data alignment control for the 16-bit access space. With the 16-bit access space, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) and lower data bus (D7 to D0) are used for accesses. The amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte or one word, and a longword access is executed as two word accesses. In byte access, whether the upper or lower data bus is used is determined by whether the address is even or odd. The upper data bus is used for an even address, and the lower data bus for an odd address. Upper data bus D15 Lower data bus D0 D8 D7 Byte size Byte size Word size Longword size * Even address * Odd address 1st bus cycle 2nd bus cycle Figure 6.8 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (16-bit Access Space) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 151 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.5.2 Valid Strobes Table 6.3 shows the data buses used and valid strobes for the access spaces. In a read, the RD signal is valid for both the upper and the lower half of the data bus. In a write, the HWR signal is valid for the upper half of the data bus, and the LWR signal for the lower half. Table 6.3 Area 8-bit access space 16-bit access space Data Buses Used and Valid Strobes Access Size Byte Read/ Write Read Write Byte Read Address -- -- Even Odd Write Even Odd Word Read Write -- -- HWR LWR RD HWR, LWR Valid Strobe RD HWR RD Valid Invalid Valid Hi-Z Valid Valid Upper Data Bus Lower Data Bus (D15 to D8) (D7 to D0) Valid Invalid Hi-Z Invalid Valid Hi-Z Valid Valid Valid Notes: Hi-Z: High-impedance state Invalid: Input state; input value is ignored. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 152 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.5.3 Basic Timing 8-Bit, 2-State Access Space: Figure 6.9 shows the bus timing for an 8-bit, 2-state access space. When an 8-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used. The LWR pin is always fixed high. Wait states can be inserted. Bus cycle T1 T2 Address bus CSn AS RD Read D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Invalid HWR LWR Write D15 to D8 High Valid D7 to D0 High impedance Notes: 1. n = 0 to 7 2. When RDNn = 0 Figure 6.9 Bus Timing for 8-Bit, 2-State Access Space Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 153 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 8-Bit, 3-State Access Space: Figure 6.10 shows the bus timing for an 8-bit, 3-state access space. When an 8-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used. The LWR pin is always fixed high. Wait states can be inserted. Bus cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus CSn AS RD Read D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Invalid HWR High LWR Write D15 to D8 Valid High impedance D7 to D0 Notes: 1. n = 0 to 7 2. When RDNn = 0 Figure 6.10 Bus Timing for 8-Bit, 3-State Access Space Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 154 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 16-Bit, 2-State Access Space: Figures 6.11 to 6.13 show bus timings for a 16-bit, 2-state access space. When a 16-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used for odd addresses, and the lower half (D7 to D0) for even addresses. Wait states cannot be inserted. Bus cycle T1 T2 Address bus CSn AS RD Read D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Invalid HWR LWR Write D15 to D8 High Valid D7 to D0 High impedance Notes: 1. n = 0 to 7 2. When RDNn = 0 Figure 6.11 Bus Timing for 16-Bit, 2-State Access Space (Even Address Byte Access) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 155 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bus cycle T1 T2 Address bus CSn AS RD Read D15 to D8 Invalid D7 to D0 Valid HWR High LWR Write High impedance D15 to D8 D7 to D0 Valid Notes: 1. n = 0 to 7 2. When RDNn = 0 Figure 6.12 Bus Timing for 16-Bit, 2-State Access Space (Odd Address Byte Access) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 156 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bus cycle T1 T2 Address bus CSn AS RD Read D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Valid HWR LWR Write D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Valid Notes: 1. n = 0 to 7 2. When RDNn = 0 Figure 6.13 Bus Timing for 16-Bit, 2-State Access Space (Word Access) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 157 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 16-Bit, 3-State Access Space: Figures 6.14 to 6.16 show bus timings for a 16-bit, 3-state access space. When a 16-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used for the even address, and the lower half (D7 to D0) for the odd address. Wait states can be inserted. Bus cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus CSn AS RD Read D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Invalid HWR High LWR Write D15 to D8 Valid High impedance D7 to D0 Notes: 1. n = 0 to 7 2. When RDNn = 0 Figure 6.14 Bus Timing for 16-Bit, 3-State Access Space (Even Address Byte Access) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 158 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bus cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus CSn AS RD Read D15 to D8 Invalid D7 to D0 Valid HWR High LWR Write D15 to D8 High impedance D7 to D0 Valid Notes: 1. n = 0 to 7 2. When RDNn = 0 Figure 6.15 Bus Timing for 16-Bit, 3-State Access Space (Odd Address Byte Access) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 159 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bus cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus CSn AS RD Read D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Valid HWR LWR Write D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Valid Notes: 1. n = 0 to 7 2. When RDNn = 0 Figure 6.16 Bus Timing for 16-Bit, 3-State Access Space (Word Access) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 160 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.5.4 Wait Control When accessing external space, this LSI can extend the bus cycle by inserting one or more wait states (Tw). There are two ways of inserting wait states: program wait insertion and pin wait insertion using the WAIT pin. Program Wait Insertion: From 0 to 7 wait states can be inserted automatically between the T2 state and T3 state on an individual area basis in 3-state access space, according to the settings in WTCRA and WTCRB. Pin Wait Insertion: Setting the WAITE bit to 1 in BCR enables wait input by means of the WAIT pin. When external space is accessed in this state, a program wait is first inserted in accordance with the settings in WTCRA and WTCRB. If the WAIT pin is low at the falling edge of in the last T2 or Tw state, another Tw state is inserted. If the WAIT pin is held low, Tw states are inserted until it goes high. This is useful when inserting seven or more Tw states, or when changing the number of Tw states to be inserted for different external devices. The WAITE bit setting applies to all areas. Figure 6.17 shows an example of wait state insertion timing. The settings after a reset are: 3-state access, insertion of 7 program wait states, and WAIT input disabled. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 161 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) By program wait T1 T2 Tw By WAIT pin Tw Tw T3 WAIT Address bus AS RD Read Data bus Read data HWR, LWR Write Data bus Write data Notes: 1. Downward arrows indicate the timing of WAIT pin sampling. 2. When RDN = 0 Figure 6.17 Example of Wait State Insertion Timing 6.5.5 Read Strobe (RD) Timing The read strobe (RD) timing can be changed for individual areas by setting bits RDN7 to RDN0 to 1 in RDNCR. Figure 6.18 shows an example of the timing when the read strobe timing is changed in basic bus 3-state access space. When the DMAC is used in single address mode, note that if the RD timing is changed by setting RDNn to 1, the RD timing will change relative to the rise of DACK. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 162 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bus cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus CSn AS RD RDNn = 0 Data bus RD RDNn = 1 Data bus DACK Figure 6.18 Example of Read Strobe Timing 6.5.6 Extension of Chip Select (CS) Assertion Period Some external I/O devices require a setup time and hold time between address and CS signals and strobe signals such as RD, HWR, and LWR. Settings can be made in the CSACR register to insert states in which only the CS, AS, and address signals are asserted before and after a basic bus space access cycle. Extension of the CS assertion period can be set for individual areas. With the CS assertion extension period in write access, the data setup and hold times are less stringent since the write data is output to the data bus. Figure 6.19 shows an example of the timing when the CS assertion period is extended in basic bus 3-state access space. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 163 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bus cycle Th Address bus CSn AS Read (when RDNn = 0) RD Data bus Read data T1 T2 T3 Tt HWR, LWR Write Data bus Write data Figure 6.19 Example of Timing when Chip Select Assertion Period is Extended Both extension state Th inserted before the basic bus cycle and extension state Tt inserted after the basic bus cycle, or only one of these, can be specified for individual areas. Insertion or noninsertion can be specified for the Th state with the upper 8 bits (CSXH7 to CSXH0) in the CSACR register, and for the Tt state with the lower 8 bits (CSXT7 to CSXT0). Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 164 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.6 DRAM Interface In this LSI, external space areas 2 to 5 can be designated as DRAM space, and DRAM interfacing performed. The DRAM interface allows DRAM to be directly connected to this LSI. A DRAM space of 2, 4, or 8 Mbytes can be set by means of bits RMTS2 to RMTS0 in DRAMCR. Burst operation is also possible, using fast page mode. 6.6.1 Setting DRAM Space Areas 2 to 5 are designated as DRAM space by setting bits RMTS2 to RMTS0 in DRAMCR. The relation between the settings of bits RMTS2 to RMTS0 and DRAM space is shown in table 6.4. Possible DRAM space settings are: one area (area 2), two areas (areas 2 and 3), and continuous area (areas 2 to 5). Table 6.4 RMTS2 0 Relation between Settings of Bits RMTS2 to RMTS0 and DRAM Space RMTS1 0 1 RMTS0 1 0 1 Area 5 Normal space Normal space Area 4 Normal space Normal space Area 3 Normal space DRAM space Area 2 DRAM space DRAM space Reserved (setting prohibited) Reserved (setting prohibited) Reserved (setting prohibited) Reserved (setting prohibited) Continuous DRAM space Continuous DRAM space Continuous DRAM space Continuous DRAM space 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 With continuous DRAM space, RAS2 is valid. The bus specifications (bus width, number of wait states, etc.) for continuous DRAM space conform to the settings for area 2. 6.6.2 Address Multiplexing With DRAM space, the row address and column address are multiplexed. In address multiplexing, the size of the shift of the row address is selected with bits MXC2 to MXC0 in DRAMCR. Table 6.5 shows the relation between the settings of MXC2 to MXC0 and the shift size. The MXC2 bit should be cleared to 0 when the DRAM interface is used. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 165 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Table 6.5 Relation between Settings of Bits MXC2 to MXC0 and Address Multiplexing DRAMCR A23 to Address Pins MXC2 MXC1 MXC0 Shift Size A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 Row address 0 0 0 8 bits A23 A23 A22 A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 to A16 1 9 bits A23 A15 A23 A22 A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 to A16 1 0 10 bits A23 A15 A14 A23 A22 A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 to A16 1 11 bits A23 A15 A14 A13 A23 A22 A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 to A16 1 Column 0 address x x x x -- to A16 Reserved (setting prohibited) A23 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 1 x x Reserved (setting prohibited) Legend: x: Don't care. 6.6.3 Data Bus If a bit in ABWCR corresponding to an area designated as DRAM space is set to 1, that area is designated as 8-bit DRAM space; if the bit is cleared to 0, the area is designated as 16-bit DRAM space. In 16-bit DRAM space, x16-bit configuration DRAM can be connected directly. In 8-bit DRAM space the upper half of the data bus, D15 to D8, is enabled, while in 16-bit DRAM space both the upper and lower halves of the data bus, D15 to D0, are enabled. Access sizes and data alignment are the same as for the basic bus interface: see section 6.5.1, Data Size and Data Alignment. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 166 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.6.4 Pins Used for DRAM Interface Table 6.6 shows the pins used for DRAM interfacing and their functions. Since the CS2, CS5 pins are in the input state after a reset, set the corresponding DDR to 1 when RAS2, RAS5 signals are output. Table 6.6 Pin HWR CS2 DRAM Interface Pins With DRAM Setting WE RAS2 Name Write enable Row address strobe 2/ row address strobe I/O Output Output Function Write enable for DRAM space access Row address strobe when area 2 is designated as DRAM space or row address strobe when areas 2 to 5 are designated as continuous DRAM space Row address strobe when area 3 is designated as DRAM space Upper column address strobe for 16-bit DRAM space access or column address strobe for 8-bit DRAM space access Lower column address strobe signal for 16-bit DRAM space access Output enable signal for DRAM space access Wait request signal Row address/column address multiplexed output Data input/output pins CS3 UCAS RAS3 UCAS Row address strobe 3 Upper column address strobe Output Output LCAS LCAS Lower column address strobe Output enable Wait Address pins Data pins Output RD, OE WAIT A15 to A0 D15 to D0 OE WAIT A15 to A0 D15 to D0 Output Input Output I/O Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 167 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.6.5 Basic Timing Figure 6.20 shows the basic access timing for DRAM space. The four states of the basic timing consist of one Tp (precharge cycle) state, one Tr (row address output cycle) state, and the Tc1 and two Tc2 (column address output cycle) states. Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 Address bus Row address Column address RASn (CSn) UCAS, LCAS WE (HWR) Read OE (RD) Data bus High WE (HWR) Write OE (RD) Data bus High Note: n = 2, 3 Figure 6.20 DRAM Basic Access Timing (RAST = 0, CAST = 0) When DRAM space is accessed, the RD signal is output as the OE signal for DRAM. When connecting DRAM provided with an EDO page mode, the OE signal should be connected to the (OE ) pin of the DRAM. Setting the OEE bit to 1 in DRAMCR enables the OE signal for DRAM space to be output from a dedicated OE pin. In this case, the OE signal for DRAM space is output Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 168 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) from both the RD pin and the (OE) pin, but in external read cycles for other than DRAM space, the signal is output only from the RD pin. 6.6.6 Column Address Output Cycle Control The column address output cycle can be changed from 2 states to 3 states by setting the CAST bit to 1 in DRAMCR. Use the setting that gives the optimum specification values (CAS pulse width, etc.) according to the DRAM connected and the operating frequency of this LSI. Figure 6.21 shows an example of the timing when a 3-state column address output cycle is selected. Tp Address bus Row address Column address Tr Tc1 Tc2 Tc3 RASn (CSn) UCAS, LCAS WE (HWR) Read OE (RD) Data bus High WE (HWR) Write OE (RD) Data bus High Note: n = 2, 3 Figure 6.21 Example of Access Timing with 3-State Column Address Output Cycle (RAST = 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 169 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.6.7 Row Address Output State Control If the RAST bit is set to 1 in DRAMCR, the RAS signal goes low from the beginning of the Tr state, and the row address hold time and DRAM read access time are changed relative to the fall of the RAS signal. Use the optimum setting according to the DRAM connected and the operating frequency of this LSI. Figure 6.22 shows an example of the timing when the RAS signal goes low from the beginning of the Tr state. Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 Address bus Row address Column address RASn (CSn) UCAS, LCAS WE (HWR) Read OE (RD) Data bus High WE (HWR) Write OE (RD) Data bus High Note: n = 2, 3 Figure 6.22 Example of Access Timing when RAS Signal Goes Low from Beginning of Tr State (CAST = 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 170 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) If a row address hold time or read access time is necessary, making a setting in bits RCD1 and RCD0 in DRACCR allows from one to three Trw states, in which row address output is maintained, to be inserted between the Tr cycle, in which the RAS signal goes low, and the Tc1 cycle, in which the column address is output. Use the setting that gives the optimum row address signal hold time relative to the falling edge of the RAS signal according to the DRAM connected and the operating frequency of this LSI. Figure 6.23 shows an example of the timing when one Trw state is set. Tp Address bus Row address Column address Tr Trw Tc1 Tc2 RASn (CSn) UCAS, LCAS WE (HWR) Read OE (RD) Data bus High WE (HWR) Write OE (RD) Data bus High Note: n = 2, 3 Figure 6.23 Example of Timing with One Row Address Output Maintenance State (RAST = 0, CAST = 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 171 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.6.8 Precharge State Control When DRAM is accessed, a RAS precharge time must be secured. With this LSI, one Tp state is always inserted when DRAM space is accessed. From one to four Tp states can be selected by setting bits TPC1 and TPC0 in DRACCR. Set the optimum number of Tp cycles according to the DRAM connected and the operating frequency of this LSI. Figure 6.24 shows the timing when two Tp states are inserted. The setting of bits TPC1 and TPC0 is also valid for Tp states in refresh cycles. Tp1 Address bus Row address Column address Tp2 Tr Tc1 Tc2 RASn (CSn) UCAS, LCAS WE (HWR) Read OE (RD) Data bus High WE (HWR) Write OE (RD) Data bus High Note: n = 2, 3 Figure 6.24 Example of Timing with Two-State Precharge Cycle (RAST = 0, CAST = 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 172 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.6.9 Wait Control There are two ways of inserting wait states in a DRAM access cycle: program wait insertion and pin wait insertion using the WAIT pin. Wait states are inserted to extend the CAS assertion period in a read access to DRAM space, and to extend the write data setup time relative to the falling edge of CAS in a write access. Program Wait Insertion: When the bit in ASTCR corresponding to an area designated as DRAM space is set to 1, from 0 to 7 wait states can be inserted automatically between the Tc1 state and Tc2 state, according to the WTCR setting. Pin Wait Insertion: When the WAITE bit in BCR is set to 1 and the ASTCR bit is set to 1, wait input by means of the WAIT pin is enabled. When DRAM space is accessed in this state, a program wait (Tw) is first inserted. If the WAIT pin is low at the falling edge of in the last Tc1 or Tw state, another Tw state is inserted. If the WAIT pin is held low, Tw states are inserted until it goes high. Figures 6.25 and 6.26 show examples of wait cycle insertion timing in the case of 2-state and 3state column address output cycles. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 173 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) By program wait Tp By WAIT pin Tw Tc2 Tr Tc1 Tw WAIT Address bus RASn (CSn) UCAS, LCAS WE (HWR) Row address Column address Read High OE (RD) Data bus UCAS, LCAS WE (HWR) Write OE (RD) Data bus High Notes: Downward arrows indicate the timing of WAIT pin sampling. n = 2, 3 Figure 6.25 Example of Wait State Insertion Timing (2-State Column Address Output) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 174 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) By program wait Tp By WAIT pin Tw Tc2 Tc3 Tr Tc1 Tw WAIT Address bus RASn (CSn) UCAS, LCAS WE (HWR) Row address Column address Read High OE (RD) Data bus UCAS, LCAS WE (HWR) Write OE (RD) Data bus High Notes: Downward arrows indicate the timing of WAIT pin sampling. n = 2, 3 Figure 6.26 Example of Wait State Insertion Timing (3-State Column Address Output) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 175 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.6.10 Byte Access Control When DRAM with a x16-bit configuration is connected, the 2-CAS access method is used for the control signals needed for byte access. Figure 6.27 shows the control timing for 2-CAS access, and figure 6.28 shows an example of 2-CAS DRAM connection. Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 Address bus Row address Column address RASn (CSn) UCAS LCAS WE (HWR) OE (RD) Upper data bus High High Write data High impedance Lower data bus Note: n = 2, 3 Figure 6.27 2-CAS Control Timing (Upper Byte Write Access: RAST = 0, CAST = 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 176 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) This LSI (Address shift size set to 10 bits) RASn (CSn) UCAS LCAS HWR (WE) RD (OE) A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 D15 to D0 2-CAS type 16-Mbit DRAM 1-Mbyte x 16-bit configuration 10-bit column address RAS UCAS LCAS WE OE A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 D15 to D0 Row address input: A9 to A0 Column address input: A9 to A0 Figure 6.28 Example of 2-CAS DRAM Connection 6.6.11 Burst Operation With DRAM, in addition to full access (normal access) in which data is accessed by outputting a row address for each access, a fast page mode is also provided which can be used when making consecutive accesses to the same row address. This mode enables fast (burst) access of data by simply changing the column address after the row address has been output. Burst access can be selected by setting the BE bit to 1 in DRAMCR. Burst Access (Fast Page Mode): Figures 6.29 and 6.30 show the operation timing for burst access. When there are consecutive access cycles for DRAM space, the CAS signal and column address output cycles (two states) continue as long as the row address is the same for consecutive access cycles. The row address used for the comparison is set with bits MXC2 to MXC0 in DRAMCR. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 177 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 Tc1 Tc2 Address bus RASn (CSn) UCAS, LCAS WE (HWR) Read OE (RD) Data bus WE (HWR) Write OE (RD) Data bus Row address Column address 1 Column address 2 High High Note: n = 2, 3 Figure 6.29 Operation Timing in Fast Page Mode (RAST = 0, CAST = 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 178 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 Tc3 Tc1 Tc2 Tc3 Address bus RASn (CSn) UCAS, LCAS WE (HWR) Row address Column address 1 Column address 2 High Read OE (RD) Data bus WE (HWR) Write OE (RD) Data bus High Note: n = 2, 3 Figure 6.30 Operation Timing in Fast Page Mode (RAST = 0, CAST = 1) The bus cycle can also be extended in burst access by inserting wait states. The wait state insertion method and timing are the same as for full access. For details see section 6.6.9, Wait Control. RAS Down Mode and RAS Up Mode: Even when burst operation is selected, it may happen that access to DRAM space is not continuous, but is interrupted by access to another space. In this case, if the RAS signal is held low during the access to the other space, burst operation can be resumed when the same row address in DRAM space is accessed again. * RAS Down Mode To select RAS down mode, set both the RCDM bit and the BE bit to 1 in DRAMCR. If access to DRAM space is interrupted and another space is accessed, the RAS signal is held low during the access to the other space, and burst access is performed when the row address of the next DRAM space access is the same as the row address of the previous DRAM space access. Figure 6.31 shows an example of the timing in RAS down mode. Note, however, that the RAS signal will go high if: a refresh operation is initiated in the RAS down state self-refreshing is performed Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 179 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) the chip enters software standby mode the external bus is released the RCDM bit or BE bit is cleared to 0 If a transition is made to the all-module-clocks-stopped mode in the RAS down state, the clock will stop with RAS low. To enter the all-module-clocks-stopped mode with RAS high, the RCDM bit must be cleared to 0 before executing the SLEEP instruction. Normal space read Tc2 T1 T2 DRAM space read Tc1 Tc2 DRAM space read Tp Tr Tc1 Address bus Row address Column address 1 External address Column address 2 RASn (CSn) UCAS, LCAS RD OE Data bus Note: n = 2, 3 Figure 6.31 Example of Operation Timing in RAS Down Mode (RAST = 0, CAST = 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 180 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) * RAS Up Mode To select RAS up mode, clear the RCDM bit to 0 in DRAMCR. Each time access to DRAM space is interrupted and another space is accessed, the RAS signal goes high again. Burst operation is only performed if DRAM space is continuous. Figure 6.32 shows an example of the timing in RAS up mode. DRAM space read Tc2 Tc1 Tc2 Normal space read T1 T2 DRAM space read Tp Tr Tc1 Address bus Row address Column address 1 Column address 2 External address RASn (CSn) UCAS, LCAS RD OE Data bus Note: n = 2, 3 Figure 6.32 Example of Operation Timing in RAS Up Mode (RAST = 0, CAST = 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 181 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.6.12 Refresh Control This LSI is provided with a DRAM refresh control function. CAS-before-RAS (CBR) refreshing is used. In addition, self-refreshing can be executed when the chip enters the software standby state. Refresh control is enabled when any area is designated as DRAM space in accordance with the setting of bits RMTS2 to RMTS0 in DRAMCR. CAS-before-RAS (CBR) Refreshing: To select CBR refreshing, set the RFSHE bit to 1 in REFCR. With CBR refreshing, RTCNT counts up using the input clock selected by bits RTCK2 to RTCK0 in REFCR, and when the count matches the value set in RTCOR (compare match), refresh control is performed. At the same time, RTCNT is reset and starts counting up again from H'00. Refreshing is thus repeated at fixed intervals determined by RTCOR and bits RTCK2 to RTCK0. Set a value in RTCOR and bits RTCK2 to RTCK0 that will meet the refreshing interval specification for the DRAM used. When bits RTCK2 to RTCK0 in REFCR are set, RTCNT starts counting up. RTCNT and RTCOR settings should therefore be completed before setting bits RTCK2 to RTCK0. RTCNT operation is shown in figure 6.33, compare match timing in figure 6.34, and CBR refresh timing in figure 6.35. When the CBRM bit in REFCR is cleared to 0, access to external space other than DRAM space is performed in parallel during the CBR refresh period. RTCNT RTCOR H'00 Refresh request Figure 6.33 RTCNT Operation Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 182 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) RTCNT N H'00 RTCOR N Refresh request signal and CMF bit setting signal Figure 6.34 Compare Match Timing TRp TRr TRc1 TRc2 CSn (RASn) UCAS, LCAS Note: n = 2, 3 Figure 6.35 CBR Refresh Timing A setting can be made in bits RCW1 and RCW0 in REFCR to delay RAS signal output by one to three cycles. Use bits RLW1 and RLW0 in REFCR to adjust the width of the RAS signal. The settings of bits RCW1, RCW0, RLW1, and RLW0 are valid only in refresh operations. Figure 6.36 shows the timing when bits RCW1 and RCW0 are set. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 183 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) TRp TRrw TRr TRc1 TRc2 CSn (RASn) UCAS, LCAS Note: n = 2, 3 Figure 6.36 CBR Refresh Timing (RCW1 = 0, RCW0 = 1, RLW1 = 0, RLW0 = 0) Depending on the DRAM used, modification of the WE signal may not be permitted during the refresh period. In this case, the CBRM bit in REFCR should be set to 1. The bus controller will then insert refresh cycles in appropriate breaks between bus cycles. Figure 6.37 shows an example of the timing when the CBRM bit is set to 1. In this case the CS signal is not controlled, and retains its value prior to the start of the refresh period. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 184 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Normal space access request A23 to A0 CS AS RD HWR (WE) Refresh period RAS CAS Figure 6.37 Example of CBR Refresh Timing (CBRM = 1) Self-Refreshing: A self-refresh mode (battery backup mode) is provided for DRAM as a kind of standby mode. In this mode, refresh timing and refresh addresses are generated within the DRAM. To select self-refreshing, set the RFSHE bit and SLFRF bit to 1 in REFCR. When a SLEEP instruction is executed to enter software standby mode, the CAS and RAS signals are output and DRAM enters self-refresh mode, as shown in figure 6.38. When software standby mode is exited, the SLFRF bit is cleared to 0 and self-refresh mode is exited automatically. If a CBR refresh request occurs when making a transition to software standby mode, CBR refreshing is executed, and then self-refresh mode is entered. When using self-refresh mode, the OPE bit must not be cleared to 0 in the SBYCR register. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 185 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Software standby TRp TRr TRc3 CSn (RASn) UCAS, LCAS HWR (WE) Note: n = 2, 3 High Figure 6.38 Self-Refresh Timing In some DRAMs provided with a self-refresh mode, the RAS signal precharge time immediately after self-refreshing is longer than the normal precharge time. A setting can be made in bits TPCS2 to TPCS0 in REFCR to make the precharge time immediately after self-refreshing from 1 to 7 states longer than the normal precharge time. In this case, too, normal precharging is performed according to the setting of bits TPC1 and TPC0 in DRACCR, and therefore a setting should be made to give the optimum post-self-refresh precharge time, including this time. Figure 6.39 shows an example of the timing when the precharge time immediately after self-refreshing is extended by 2 states. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 186 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Software standby DRAM space write Trc3 Trp1 Trp2 Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 Address bus RASn (CSn) UCAS, LCAS OE (RD) HWR (WE) Data bus Note: n = 2, 3 Figure 6.39 Example of Timing when Precharge Time after Self-Refreshing Is Extended by 2 States Refreshing and All-Module-Clocks-Stopped Mode: In this LSI, if the ACSE bit is set to 1 in MSTPCRH, and then a SLEEP instruction is executed with the setting for all peripheral module clocks to be stopped (MSTPCR = H'FFFF, EXMSTPCR = H'FFFF) or for operation of the 8-bit timer module alone (MSTPCR = H'FFFE, EXMSTPCR = H'FFFF), and a transition is made to the sleep state, the all-module-clocks-stopped mode is entered, in which the bus controller and I/O port clocks are also stopped. As the bus controller clock is also stopped in this mode, CBR refreshing is not executed. If DRAM is connected externally and DRAM data is to be retained in sleep mode, the ACSE bit must be cleared to 0 in MSTPCRH. 6.6.13 DMAC Single Address Transfer Mode and DRAM Interface When burst mode is selected on the DRAM interface, the DACK output timing can be selected with the DDS bit in DRAMCR. When DRAM space is accessed in DMAC single address mode at the same time, these bits select whether or not burst access is to be performed. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 187 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) When DDS = 1 : Burst access is performed by determining the address only, irrespective of the bus master. With the DRAM interface, the DACK output goes low from the Tc1 state. Figure 6.40 shows the DACK output timing for the DRAM interface when DDS = 1. Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 Address bus Row address Column address RASn (CSn) UCAS, LCAS WE (HWR) High Read OE (RD) Data bus WE (HWR) Write OE (RD) Data bus High DACK Note: n = 2, 3 Figure 6.40 Example of DACK Output Timing when DDS = 1 (RAST = 0, CAST = 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 188 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) When DDS = 0 : When DRAM space is accessed in DMAC single address transfer mode, full access (normal access) is always performed. With the DRAM interface, the DACK output goes low from the Tr state. In modes other than DMAC single address transfer mode, burst access can be used when accessing DRAM space. Figure 6.41 shows the DACK output timing for the DRAM interface when DDS = 0. Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 Tc3 Address bus Row address Column address RASn (CSn) UCAS, LCAS WE (HWR) High Read OE (RD) Data bus WE (HWR) Write OE (RD) Data bus High DACK Note: n = 2, 3 Figure 6.41 Example of DACK Output Timing when DDS = 0 (RAST = 0, CAST = 1) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 189 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.7 Burst ROM Interface In this LSI, external address space areas 0 and 1 can be designated as burst ROM space, and burst ROM interfacing performed. The burst ROM space enables ROM with burst access capability to be accessed at high speed. Areas 1 and 0 can be designated as burst ROM space by means of bits BSRM1 and BSRM0 in BROMCR. Continuous burst accesses of 4, 8, 16, or 32 words can be performed, according to the setting of the BSWD11 and BSWD10 bits in BROMCR. From 1 to 8 states can be selected for burst access. Settings can be made independently for area 0 and area 1. In burst ROM space, burst access covers only CPU read accesses. 6.7.1 Basic Timing The number of access states in the initial cycle (full access) on the burst ROM interface is determined by the basic bus interface settings in ASTCR, ABWCR, WTCRA, WTCRB, and CSACRH. When area 0 or area 1 is designated as burst ROM space, the settings in RDNCR and CSACRL are ignored. From 1 to 8 states can be selected for the burst cycle, according to the settings of bits BSTS02 to BSTS00 and BSTS12 to BSTS10 in BROMCR. Wait states cannot be inserted. Burst access of up to 32 words is performed, according to the settings of bits BSTS01, BSTS00, BSTS11, and BSTS10 in BROMCR. The basic access timing for burst ROM space is shown in figures 6.42 and 6.43. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 190 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Full access T1 T2 T3 T1 Burst access T2 T1 T2 Upper address bus Lower address bus CSn AS RD Data bus Note: n = 1, 0 Figure 6.42 Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (ASTn = 1, 2-State Burst Cycle) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 191 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Full access T1 T2 Burst access T1 T1 Upper address bus Lower address bus CSn AS RD Data bus Note: n = 1, 0 Figure 6.43 Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (ASTn = 0, 1-State Burst Cycle) 6.7.2 Wait Control As with the basic bus interface, either program wait insertion or pin wait insertion using the WAIT pin can be used in the initial cycle (full access) on the burst ROM interface. See section 6.5.4, Wait Control. Wait states cannot be inserted in a burst cycle. 6.7.3 Write Access When a write access to burst ROM space is executed, burst access is interrupted at that point and the write access is executed in line with the basic bus interface settings. Write accesses are not performed in burst mode even though burst ROM space is designated. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 192 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.8 6.8.1 Idle Cycle Operation When this LSI accesses external address space, it can insert an idle cycle (Ti) between bus cycles in the following three cases: (1) when read accesses in different areas occur consecutively, (2) when a write cycle occurs immediately after a read cycle, and (3) when a read cycle occurs immediately after a write cycle. Insertion of a 1-state or 2-state idle cycle can be selected with the IDLC bit in BCR. By inserting an idle cycle it is possible, for example, to avoid data collisions between ROM, etc., with a long output floating time, and high-speed memory, I/O interfaces, and so on. Consecutive Reads in Different Areas: If consecutive reads in different areas occur while the ICIS1 bit is set to 1 in BCR, an idle cycle is inserted at the start of the second read cycle. Figure 6.44 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a read cycle for ROM with a long output floating time, and bus cycle B is a read cycle for SRAM, each being located in a different area. In (a), an idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in bus cycle B between the read data from ROM and that from SRAM. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data collision is prevented. Bus cycle A T1 T2 T3 Bus cycle B T1 T2 Bus cycle A T1 T2 T3 Bus cycle B Ti T1 T2 Address bus CS (area A) CS (area B) RD Data bus Address bus CS (area A) CS (area B) RD Data bus Data collision Long output floating time (a) No idle cycle insertion (ICIS1 = 0) Idle cycle (b) Idle cycle insertion (ICIS1 = 1, initial value) Figure 6.44 xample of Idle Cycle Operation (Consecutive Reads in Different Areas) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 193 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Write after Read: If an external write occurs after an external read while the ICIS0 bit is set to 1 in BCR, an idle cycle is inserted at the start of the write cycle. Figure 6.45 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a read cycle for ROM with a long output floating time, and bus cycle B is a CPU write cycle. In (a), an idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in bus cycle B between the read data from ROM and the CPU write data. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data collision is prevented. Bus cycle A T1 T2 T3 Bus cycle B T1 T2 Bus cycle A T1 T2 T3 Bus cycle B Ti T1 T2 Address bus CS (area A) CS (area B) RD HWR Data bus Address bus CS (area A) CS (area B) RD HWR Data bus Data collision Long output floating time (a) No idle cycle insertion (ICIS0 = 0) Idle cycle (b) Idle cycle insertion (ICIS0 = 1, initial value) Figure 6.45 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (Write after Read) Read after Write: If an external read occurs after an external write while the ICIS2 bit is set to 1 in BCR, an idle cycle is inserted at the start of the read cycle. Figure 6.46 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a CPU write cycle and bus cycle B is a read cycle from an external device. In (a), an idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in bus cycle B between the CPU write data and read data from an external device. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data collision is prevented. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 194 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bus cycle A T1 T2 T3 Bus cycle B T1 T2 Bus cycle A T1 T2 T3 Bus cycle B Ti T1 T2 Address bus CS (area A) CS (area B) RD HWR, LWR Data bus Address bus CS (area A) CS (area B) RD HWR Data bus Data collision Long output floating time (a) No idle cycle insertion (ICIS2 = 0) Idle cycle (b) Idle cycle insertion (ICIS2 = 1, initial value) Figure 6.46 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (Read after Write) Relationship between Chip Select (CS) Signal and Read (RD) Signal: Depending on the system's load conditions, the RD signal may lag behind the CS signal. An example is shown in figure 6.47. In this case, with the setting for no idle cycle insertion (a), there may be a period of overlap between the bus cycle A RD signal and the bus cycle B CS signal. Setting idle cycle insertion, as in (b), however, will prevent any overlap between the RD and CS signals. In the initial state after reset release, idle cycle insertion (b) is set. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 195 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Bus cycle A T1 T2 T3 Bus cycle B T1 T2 Bus cycle A T1 T2 T3 Bus cycle B Ti T1 T2 Address bus CS (area A) CS (area B) RD Address bus CS (area A) CS (area B) RD Overlap period between CS (area B) and RD may occur (a) No idle cycle insertion (ICIS1 = 0) Idle cycle (b) Idle cycle insertion (ICIS1 = 1, initial value) Figure 6.47 Relationship between Chip Select (CS) and Read (RD) Idle Cycle in Case of DRAM Space Access after Normal Space Access: In a DRAM space access following a normal space access, the settings of bits ICIS2, ICIS1, ICIS0, and IDLC in BCR are valid. However, in the case of consecutive reads in different areas, for example, if the second read is a full access to DRAM space, only a Tp cycle is inserted, and a Ti cycle is not. The timing in this case is shown in figure 6.48. External read DRAM space read T1 Address bus T2 T3 Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 RD Data bus Figure 6.48 Example of DRAM Full Access after External Read (CAST = 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 196 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) In burst access in RAS down mode, the settings of bits ICIS2, ICIS1, ICIS0, and IDLC are valid and an idle cycle is inserted. The timing in this case is illustrated in figures 6.49 and 6.50. DRAM space read External read DRAM space read Tp Address bus RD RAS UCAS, LCAS Tr Tc1 Tc2 T1 T2 T3 Ti Tc1 Tc2 Data bus Idle cycle Figure 6.49 Example of Idle Cycle Operation in RAS Down Mode (Consecutive Reads in Different Areas) (IDLC = 0, RAST = 0, CAST = 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 197 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) DRAM space read External read DRAM space write Tp Address bus RD HWR RAS Tr Tc1 Tc2 T1 T2 T3 Ti Tc1 Tc2 UCAS, LCAS Data bus Idle cycle Figure 6.50 Example of Idle Cycle Operation in RAS Down Mode (Write after Read) (IDLC = 0, RAST = 0, CAST = 0) Idle Cycle in Case of Normal Space Access after DRAM Space Access: * Normal space access after DRAM space read access While the DRMI bit is cleared to 0 in DRACCR, idle cycle insertion after DRAM space access is disabled. Idle cycle insertion after DRAM space access can be enabled by setting the DRMI bit to 1. The conditions and number of states of the idle cycle to be inserted are in accordance with the settings of bits ICIS1, ICIS0, and IDLC in BCR are valid. Figures 6.51 and 6.52 show examples of idle cycle operation when the DRMI bit is set to 1. When the DRMI bit is cleared to 0, an idle cycle is not inserted after DRAM space access even if bits ICIS1 and ICIS0 are set to 1. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 198 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) DRAM space read External address space read DRAM space read Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 Ti T1 T2 T3 Ti Tc1 Tc2 Address bus RD RAS UCAS, LCAS Data bus Idle cycle Figure 6.51 Example of Idle Cycle Operation after DRAM Access (Consecutive Reads in Different Areas) (IDLC = 0, RAST = 0, CAST = 0) DRAM space read External address space write DRAM space read Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 Ti T1 T2 T3 Tc1 Tc2 Address bus RD HWR, LWR RAS UCAS, LCAS Data bus Idle cycle Figure 6.52 Example of Idle Cycle Operation after DRAM Access (Write after Read) (IDLC = 0, RAST = 0, CAST = 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 199 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) * Normal space access after DRAM space write access While the ICIS2 bit is set to 1 in BCR and a normal space read access occurs after DRAM space write access, idle cycle is inserted in the first read cycle. The number of states of the idle cycle to be inserted is in accordance with the setting of the IDLC bit. It does not depend on the DRMI bit in DRACCR. Figure 6.53 shows an example of idle cycle operation when the ICIS2 bit is set to 1. DRAM space read External space read DRAM space read Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 Ti T1 T2 T3 Tc1 Tc2 Address bus RD HWR, LWR RAS UCAS, LCAS Data bus Idle cycle Figure 6.53 Example of Idle Cycle Operation after DRAM Write Access (IDLC = 0, ICIS1 = 0, RAST = 0, CAST = 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 200 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Table 6.7 shows whether an idle cycle is inserted or not in mixed access to normal space and DRAM. Table 6.7 Idle Cycles in Mixed Accesses to Normal Space and DRAM Next Access Normal space read (different area) ICIS2 -- -- ICIS1 0 1 ICIS0 -- -- DRMI -- -- IDLC -- 0 1 DRAM/ space read -- -- 0 1 -- -- -- -- -- 0 1 Normal space write -- -- -- -- 0 1 -- -- -- 0 1 DRAM/ space write -- -- -- -- 0 1 -- -- -- 0 1 DRAM/ space read Normal space read -- -- 0 1 -- -- -- 0 1 -- -- 0 1 DRAM/ space read -- -- 0 1 -- -- -- 0 1 -- -- 0 1 Normal space write -- -- -- -- 0 1 -- 0 1 -- -- 0 1 DRAM/ space write -- -- -- -- 0 1 -- 0 1 -- -- 0 1 Idle cycle Disabled 1 state inserted 2 states inserted Disabled 1 state inserted 2 states inserted Disabled 1 state inserted 2 states inserted Disabled 1 state inserted 2 states inserted Disabled Disabled 1 state inserted 2 states inserted Disabled Disabled 1 state inserted 2 states inserted Disabled Disabled 1 state inserted 2 states inserted Disabled Disabled 1 state inserted 2 states inserted Previous Access Normal space read Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 201 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Previous Access Normal space write Next Access Normal space read ICIS2 0 1 ICIS1 -- -- ICIS0 -- -- DRMI -- -- IDLC -- 0 1 DRAM/ space read 0 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 1 DRAM/ space write Normal space read 0 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 1 DRAM/ space read 0 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 1 Idle cycle Disabled 1 state inserted 2 states inserted Disabled 1 state inserted 2 states inserted Disabled 1 state inserted 2 states inserted Disabled 1 state inserted 2 states inserted Setting the DRMI bit in DRACCR to 1 enables an idle cycle to be inserted in the case of consecutive read and write operations in DRAM/ space burst access. Figures 6.54 shows an example of the timing for idle cycle insertion in the case of consecutive read and write accesses to DRAM/continuous synchronous DRAM space. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 202 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) DRAM space read DRAM space write Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 Ti Tc1 Tc2 Address bus RASn (CSn) UCAS, LCAS HWR OE (RD) Data bus Note: n = 2, 3 Idle cycle Figure 6.54 Example of Timing for Idle Cycle Insertion in Case of Consecutive Read and Write Accesses to DRAM Space in RAS Down Mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 203 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.8.2 Pin States in Idle Cycle Table 6.8 shows the pin states in an idle cycle. Table 6.8 Pins A23 to A0 D15 to D0 CSn (n = 7 to 0) UCAS, LCAS AS RD OE HWR, LWR DACKn (n = 1, 0) Pin States in Idle Cycle Pin State Contents of following bus cycle High impedance High*1*2 High*2 High High High High High Notes: 1. Remains low in DRAM space RAS down mode. 2. Remains low in a DRAM space refresh cycle. 6.9 Write Data Buffer Function This LSI has a write data buffer function for the external data bus. Using the write data buffer function enables external writes and DMA single address mode transfers to be executed in parallel with internal accesses. The write data buffer function is made available by setting the WDBE bit to 1 in BCR. Figure 6.55 shows an example of the timing when the write data buffer function is used. When this function is used, if an external address space write or DMA single address mode transfer continues for two states or longer, and there is an internal access next, an external write only is executed in the first state, but from the next state onward an internal access (on-chip memory or internal I/O register read/write) is executed in parallel with the external address space write rather than waiting until it ends. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 204 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) On-chip memory read Internal I/O register read External write cycle T1 T2 TW TW T3 Internal address bus Internal memory Internal read signal Internal I/O register address A23 to A0 External address CSn External space write HWR, LWR D15 to D0 Figure 6.55 Example of Timing when Write Data Buffer Function is Used Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 205 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.10 Bus Release This LSI can release the external bus in response to a bus request from an external device. In the external bus released state, internal bus masters continue to operate as long as there is no external access. If any of the following requests are issued in the external bus released state, the BREQO signal can be driven low to output a bus request externally. * When an internal bus master wants to perform an external access * When a refresh request is generated * When a SLEEP instruction is executed to place the chip in software standby mode or allmodule-clocks-stopped mode 6.10.1 Operation In externally expanded mode, the bus can be released to an external device by setting the BRLE bit to 1 in BCR. Driving the BREQ pin low issues an external bus request to this LSI. When the BREQ pin is sampled, at the prescribed timing the BACK pin is driven low, and the address bus, data bus, and bus control signals are placed in the high-impedance state, establishing the external bus released state. In the external bus released state, internal bus masters can perform accesses using the internal bus. When an internal bus master wants to make an external access, it temporarily defers initiation of the bus cycle, and waits for the bus request from the external bus master to be canceled. If a refresh request is generated in the external bus released state, or if a SLEEP instruction is executed to place the chip in software standby mode or all-module-clocks-stopped mode, refresh control and software standby or all-module-clocks-stopped control is deferred until the bus request from the external bus master is canceled. If the BREQOE bit is set to 1 in BCR, the BREQO pin can be driven low when any of the following requests are issued, to request cancellation of the bus request externally. * When an internal bus master wants to perform an external access * When a refresh request is generated * When a SLEEP instruction is executed to place the chip in software standby mode or allmodule-clocks-stopped mode When the BREQ pin is driven high, the BACK pin is driven high at the prescribed timing and the external bus released state is terminated. If an external bus release request and external access occur simultaneously, the order of priority is as follows: Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 206 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) (High) External bus release > External access by internal bus master (Low) If a refresh request and external bus release request occur simultaneously, the order of priority is as follows: (High) Refresh > External bus release (Low) 6.10.2 Pin States in External Bus Released State Table 6.9 shows pin states in the external bus released state. Table 6.9 Pins A23 to A0 D15 to D0 CSn (n = 7 to 0) UCAS, LCAS AS RD OE HWR, LWR DACKn (n = 1, 0) Pin States in Bus Released State Pin State High impedance High impedance High impedance High impedance High impedance High impedance High impedance High impedance High Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 207 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.10.3 Transition Timing Figure 6.56 shows the timing for transition to the bus released state. External space access cycle External bus released state T1 T2 CPU cycle High impedance Address bus High impedance Data bus High impedance AS High impedance RD High impedance HWR, LWR BREQ BACK BREQO [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [1] Low level of BREQ signal is sampled at rise of . [2] Bus control signal returns to be high at end of external space access cycle. At least one state from sampling of BREQ signal. [3] BACK signal is driven low, releasing bus to external bus master. [4] BREQ signal state is also sampled in external bus released state. [5] High level of BREQ signal is sampled. [6] BACK signal is driven high, ending external bus release cycle. [7] When there is external access or refresh request of internal bus master during external bus release while BREQOE bit is set to 1, BREQO signal goes low. [8] Normally BREQO signal goes high 1.5 states after rising edge of BACK signal. Note: However that if BREQO is asserted by a CBR refresh request, BREQO signal is kept low until a CBR refresh cycle starts. Figure 6.56 Bus Released State Transition Timing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 208 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.11 Bus Arbitration This LSI has a bus arbiter that arbitrates bus master operations (bus arbitration). There are three bus masters--the CPU, DTC, and DMAC--which perform read/write operations when they have possession of the bus. Each bus master requests the bus by means of a bus request signal. The bus arbiter determines priorities at the prescribed timing, and permits use of the bus by means of a bus request acknowledge signal. The selected bus master then takes possession of the bus and begins its operation. 6.11.1 Operation The bus arbiter detects the bus masters' bus request signals, and if the bus is requested, sends a bus request acknowledge signal to the bus master. If there are bus requests from more than one bus master, the bus request acknowledge signal is sent to the one with the highest priority. When a bus master receives the bus request acknowledge signal, it takes possession of the bus until that signal is canceled. The order of priority of the bus masters is as follows: (High) DMAC > DTC > CPU (Low) An internal bus access by internal bus masters and external bus release, a refresh when the CBRM bit is 0 can be executed in parallel. If an external bus release request, a refresh request, and an external access by an internal bus master occur simultaneously, the order of priority is as follows: (High) Refresh > External bus release (Low) (High) External bus release > External access by internal bus master (Low) As a refresh when the CBRM bit in REFCR is cleared to 0 and an external access other than to DRAM space by an internal bus master can be executed simultaneously, there is no relative order of priority for these two operations. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 209 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.11.2 Bus Transfer Timing Even if a bus request is received from a bus master with a higher priority than that of the bus master that has acquired the bus and is currently operating, the bus is not necessarily transferred immediately. There are specific timings at which each bus master can relinquish the bus. CPU: The CPU is the lowest-priority bus master, and if a bus request is received from the DTC, or DMAC, the bus arbiter transfers the bus to the bus master that issued the request. The timing for transfer of the bus is as follows: * The bus is transferred at a break between bus cycles. However, if a bus cycle is executed in discrete operations, as in the case of a longword-size access, the bus is not transferred between the component operations. * With bit manipulation instructions such as BSET and BCLR, the sequence of operations is: data read (read), relevant bit manipulation operation (modify), write-back (write). The bus is not transferred during this read-modify-write cycle, which is executed as a series of bus cycles. * If the CPU is in sleep mode, the bus is transferred immediately. DTC: The DTC sends the bus arbiter a request for the bus when an activation request is generated. The DTC can release the bus after a vector read, a register information read (3 states), a single data transfer, or a register information write (3 states). It does not release the bus during a register information read (3 states), a single data transfer, or a register information write (3 states). DMAC: The DMAC sends the bus arbiter a request for the bus when an activation request is generated. In the case of an external request in short address mode or normal mode, and in cycle steal mode, the DMAC releases the bus after a single transfer. In block transfer mode, it releases the bus after transfer of one block, and in burst mode, after completion of the transfer. However, in the event of external bus release request, which have a higher priority than the DMAC, the bus may be transferred to the bus master even if block or burst transfer is in progress. External Bus Release: When the BREQ pin goes low and an external bus release request is issued while the BRLE bit is set to 1 in BCR, a bus request is sent to the bus arbiter. External bus release can be performed on completion of an external bus cycle. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 210 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.12 Bus Controller Operation in Reset In a reset, this LSI, including the bus controller, enters the reset state immediately, and any executing bus cycle is aborted. 6.13 6.13.1 Usage Notes External Bus Release Function and All-Module-Clocks-Stopped Mode In this LSI, if the ACSE bit is set to 1 in MSTPCR, and then a SLEEP instruction is executed with the setting for all peripheral module clocks to be stopped (MSTPCR = H'FFFF, EXMSTPCR = H'FFFF) or for operation of the 8-bit timer module alone (MSTPCR = H'FFFE, EXMSTPCR = H'FFFF), and a transition is made to the sleep state, the all-module-clocks-stopped mode is entered in which the clock is also stopped for the bus controller and I/O ports. In this state, the external bus release function is halted. To use the external bus release function in sleep mode, the ACSE bit in MSTPCR must be cleared to 0. Conversely, if a SLEEP instruction to place the chip in allmodule-clocks-stopped mode is executed in the external bus released state, the transition to allmodule-clocks-stopped mode is deferred and performed until after the bus is recovered. 6.13.2 External Bus Release Function and Software Standby In this LSI, internal bus master operation does not stop even while the bus is released, as long as the program is running in on-chip ROM, etc., and no external access occurs. If a SLEEP instruction to place the chip in software standby mode is executed while the external bus is released, the transition to software standby mode is deferred and performed after the bus is recovered. Also, since clock oscillation halts in software standby mode, if BREQ goes low in this mode, indicating an external bus release request, the request cannot be answered until the chip has recovered from the software standby state. 6.13.3 External Bus Release Function and CBR Refreshing CBR refreshing cannot be executed while the external bus is released. Setting the BREQOE bit to 1 in BCR beforehand enables the BREQO signal to be output when a CBR refresh request is issued. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 211 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) 6.13.4 BREQO Output Timing When the BREQOE bit is set to 1 and the BREQO signal is output, BREQO may go low before the BACK signal. This will occur if the next external access request or CBR refresh request occurs while internal bus arbitration is in progress after the chip samples a low level of BREQ. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 212 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) This LSI has a built-in DMA controller (DMAC) which can carry out data transfer on up to 4 channels. 7.1 Features * Choice of short address mode or full address mode Short address mode Maximum of 4 channels can be used Dual address mode or single address mode can be selected In dual address mode, one of the two addresses, transfer source and transfer destination, is specified as 24 bits and the other as 16 bits In single address mode, transfer source or transfer destination address only is specified as 24 bits In single address mode, transfer can be performed in one bus cycle Choice of sequential mode, idle mode, or repeat mode for dual address mode and single address mode Full address mode Maximum of 2 channels can be used Transfer source and transfer destination addresses as specified as 24 bits Choice of normal mode or block transfer mode * 16-Mbyte address space can be specified directly * Byte or word can be set as the transfer unit * Activation sources: internal interrupt, external request, auto-request (depending on transfer mode) Six 16-bit timer-pulse unit (TPU) compare match/input capture interrupts Serial communication interface (SCI_0, SCI_1) transmission complete interrupt, reception complete interrupt A/D converter conversion end interrupt External request Auto-request * Module stop mode can be set DMAS260A_010020020100 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 213 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) A block diagram of the DMAC is shown in figure 7.1. Internal address bus Internal interrupts TGI0A TGI1A TGI2A TGI3A TGI4A TGI5A TXI0 RXI0 TXI1 RXI1 ADI External pins DREQ0 DREQ1 TEND0 TEND1 DACK0 DACK1 Interrupt signals DMTEND0A DMTEND0B DMTEND1A DMTEND1B Address buffer Processor Channel 1B Channel 1A Channel 0B Channel 0A MAR_0AH MAR_0AL ETCR_0A Module data bus Control logic Channel 0 IOAR_0A MAR_0BH MAR_0BL IOAR_0B ETCR_0B MAR_1AH MAR_1AL IOAR_1A ETCR_1A MAR_1BH MAR_1BL IOAR_1B ETCR_1B DMAWER DMATCR DMACR0A DMACR0B DMACR1A DMACR1B DMABCR Data buffer Channel 1 Internal data bus Legend: DMAWER: DMATCR: DMABCR: DMACR: MAR: IOAR: ETCR: DMA write enable register DMA terminal control register DMA band control register (for all channels) DMA control register Memory address register I/O address register Execute transfer count register Figure 7.1 Block Diagram of DMAC Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 214 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.2 Input/Output Pins Table 7.1 summarizes the pins of the interrupt controller. Table 7.1 Channel 0 Pin Configuration Pin Name DMA request 0 DMA transfer acknowledge 0 DMA transfer end 0 Symbol DREQ0 DACK0 TEND0 DREQ1 DACK1 TEND1 I/O Input Output Output Input Output Output Function Channel 0 external request Channel 0 single address transfer acknowledge Channel 0 transfer end Channel 1 external request Channel 1 single address transfer acknowledge Channel 1 transfer end 1 DMA request 1 DMA transfer acknowledge 1 DMA transfer end 1 7.3 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Register Descriptions Memory address register_0AH (MAR_0AH) Memory address register_0AL (MAR_0AL) I/O address register_0A (IOAR_0A) Transfer count register_0A (ECTR_0A) Memory address register_0BH (MAR_0BH) Memory address register_0BL (MAR_0BL) I/O address register_0B (IOAR_0B) Transfer count register_0B (ECTR_0B) Memory address register_1AH (MAR_1AH) Memory address register_1AL (MAR_1AL) I/O address register_1A (IOAR_1A) Transfer count register_1A (ETCR_1B) Memory address register_1BH (MAR_1BH) Memory address register_1BL (MAR_1BL) I/O address register_1B (IOAR_1B) Transfer count register_1B (ETCR_1B) DMA control register_0A (DMACR_0A) DMA control register_0B (DMACR_0B) DMA control register_1A (DMACR_1A) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 215 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) * * * * * DMA control register_1B (DMACR_1B) DMA band control register H (DMABCRH) DMA band control register L (DMABCRL) DMA write enable register (DMAWER) DMA terminal control register (DMATCR) The functions of MAR, IOAR, ETCR, DMACR, and DMABCR differ according to the transfer mode (short address mode or full address mode). The transfer mode can be selected by means of the FAE1 and FAE0 bits in DMABCRH. The register configurations for short address mode and full address mode of channel 0 are shown in table 7.2. Table 7.2 FAE0 0 Short Address Mode and Full Address Mode (Channel 0) Description Short address mode specified (channels 0A and 0B operate independently) Channel 0A MAR_0AH MAR_0AL IOAR_0A ETCR_0A DMACR_0A MAR_0BH MAR_0BL IOAR_0B ETCR_0B DMACR_0B Specifies transfer source/transfer destination address Specifies transfer destination/transfer source address Specifies number of transfers Specifies transfer size, mode, activation source Channel 0B Specifies transfer source/transfer destination address Specifies transfer destination/transfer source address Specifies number of transfers Specifies transfer size, mode, activation source 1 Full address mode specified (channels 0A and 0B operate in combination as channel 0) MAR_0AH MAR_0BH MAR_0AL MAR_0BL IOAR_0A IOAR_0B ETCR_0A ETCR_0B DMACR_0A DMACR_0B Specifies transfer source address Specifies transfer destination address Not used Not used Specifies number of transfers Specifies number of transfers (used in block transfer mode only) Specifies transfer size, mode, activation source, etc. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 216 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Channel 0 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.3.1 Memory Address Registers (MARA and MARB) MAR is a 32-bit readable/writable register that specifies the source address (transfer source address) or destination address (transfer destination address). MAR consists of two 16-bit registers MARH and MARL. The upper 8 bits of MARH are reserved: they are always read as 0, and cannot be modified. The DMA has four MAR registers: MAR_0A in channel 0 (channel 0A), MAR_0B in channel 0 (channel 0B), MAR_1A in channel 1 (channel 1A), and MAR_1B in channel 1 (channel 1B). MAR is not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. Short Address Mode: In short address mode, MARA and MARB operate independently. Whether MAR functions as the source address register or as the destination address register can be selected by means of the DTDIR bit in DMACR. MAR is incremented or decremented each time a byte or word transfer is executed, so that the address specified by MAR is constantly updated. Full Address Mode: In full address mode, MARA functions as the source address register, and MARB as the destination address register. MAR is incremented or decremented each time a byte or word transfer is executed, so that the source or destination address is constantly updated. 7.3.2 I/O Address Registers (IOARA and IOARB) IOAR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the lower 16 bits of the source address (transfer source address) or destination address (transfer destination address). The upper 8 bits of the transfer address are automatically set to H'FF. The DMA has four IOAR registers: IOAR_0A in channel 0 (channel 0A), IOAR_0B in channel 0 (channel 0B), IOAR_1A in channel 1 (channel 1A), and IOAR_1B in channel 1 (channel 1B). Whether IOAR functions as the source address register or as the destination address register can be selected by means of the DTDIR bit in DMACR. IOAR is not incremented or decremented each time a data transfer is executed, so the address specified by IOAR is fixed. IOAR is not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. IOAR can be used in short address mode but not in full address mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 217 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.3.3 Execute Transfer Count Registers (ETCRA and ETCRB) ETCR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the number of transfers. The DMA has four ETCR registers: ETCR_0A in channel 0 (channel 0A), ETCR_0B in channel 0 (channel 0B), ETCR_1A in channel 1 (channel 1A), and ETCR_1B in channel 1 (channel 1B). ETCR is not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. Short Address Mode: The function of ETCR in sequential mode and idle mode differs from that in repeat mode. In sequential mode and idle mode, ETCR functions as a 16-bit transfer counter. ETCR is decremented by 1 each time a transfer is performed, and when the count reaches H'00, the DTE bit in DMABCRL is cleared, and transfer ends. In repeat mode, ETCRL functions as an 8-bit transfer counter and ETCRH functions as a transfer count holding register. ETCRL is decremented by 1 each time a transfer is performed, and when the count reaches H'00, ETCRL is loaded with the value in ETCRH. At this point, MAR is automatically restored to the value it had when the count was started. The DTE bit in DMABCRL is not cleared, and so transfers can be performed repeatedly until the DTE bit is cleared by the user. Full Address Mode: The function of ETCR in normal mode differs from that in block transfer mode. In normal mode, ETCRA functions as a 16-bit transfer counter. ETCRA is decremented by 1 each time a data transfer is performed, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000. ETCRB is not used in normal mode. In block transfer mode, ETCRAL functions as an 8-bit block size counter and ETCRAH functions as a block size holding register. ETCRAL is decremented by 1 each time a 1-byte or 1-word transfer is performed, and when the count reaches H'00, ETCRAL is loaded with the value in ETCRAH. So by setting the block size in ETCRAH and ETCRAL, it is possible to repeatedly transfer blocks consisting of any desired number of bytes or words. In block transfer mode, ETCRB functions as a 16-bit block transfer counter. ETCRB is decremented by 1 each time a block is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 218 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.3.4 DMA Control Registers (DMACRA and DMACRB) DMACR controls the operation of each DMAC channel. The DMA has four DMACR registers: DMACR_0A in channel 0 (channel 0A), DMACR_0B in channel 0 (channel 0B), DMACR_1A in channel 1 (channel 1A), and DMACR_1B in channel 1 (channel 1B). In short address mode, channels A and B operate independently, and in full address mode, channels A and B operate together. The bit functions in the DMACR registers differ according to the transfer mode. Short Address Mode: * DMACR_0A, DMACR_0B, DMACR_1A, and DMARC_1B Bit 7 Bit Name DTSZ Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Data Transfer Size Selects the size of data to be transferred at one time. 0: Byte-size transfer 1: Word-size transfer Data Transfer Increment/Decrement Selects incrementing or decrementing of MAR after every data transfer in sequential mode or repeat mode. In idle mode, MAR is neither incremented nor decremented. 0: MAR is incremented after a data transfer * When DTSZ = 0, MAR is incremented by 1 * When DTSZ = 1, MAR is incremented by 2 1: MAR is decremented after a data transfer * When DTSZ = 0, MAR is decremented by 1 * When DTSZ = 1, MAR is decremented by 2 Repeat Enable Used in combination with the DTIE bit in DMABCR to select the mode (sequential, idle, or repeat) in which transfer is to be performed. * When DTIE = 0 (no transfer end interrupt) 0: Transfer in sequential mode 1: Transfer in repeat mode * When DTIE = 1 (with transfer end interrupt) 0: Transfer in sequential mode 1: Transfer in idle mode 6 DTID 0 R/W 5 RPE 0 R/W Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 219 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Bit 4 Bit Name DTDIR Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Data Transfer Direction Used in combination with the SAE bit in DMABCR to specify the data transfer direction (source or destination). The function of this bit is therefore different in dual address mode and single address mode. * When SAE = 0 0: Transfer with MAR as source address and IOAR as destination address 1: Transfer with IOAR as source address and MAR as destination address * When SAE = 1 0: Transfer with MAR as source address and DACK pin as write strobe 1: Transfer with DACK pin as read strobe and MAR as destination address Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 220 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Bit 3 2 1 0 Bit Name DTF3 DTF2 DTF1 DTF0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Data Transfer Factor 3 to 0 These bits select the data transfer factor (activation source). There are some differences in activation sources for channel A and channel B. * Channel A 0000: Setting prohibited 0001: Activated by A/D converter conversion end interrupt 0010: Setting prohibited 0011: Setting prohibited 0100: Activated by SCI channel 0 transmission complete interrupt 0101: Activated by SCI channel 0 reception complete interrupt 0110: Activated by SCI channel 1 transmission complete interrupt 0111: Activated by SCI channel 1 reception complete interrupt 1000: Activated by TPU channel 0 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1001: Activated by TPU channel 1 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1010: Activated by TPU channel 2 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1011: Activated by TPU channel 3 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1100: Activated by TPU channel 4 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1101: Activated by TPU channel 5 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1110: Setting prohibited 1111: Setting prohibited Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 221 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Bit 3 2 1 0 Bit Name DTF3 DTF2 DTF1 DTF0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description * Channel B 0000: Setting prohibited 0001: Activated by A/D converter conversion end interrupt 0010: Activated by DREQ pin falling edge input (detected as a low level in the first transfer after transfer is enabled) 0011: Activated by DREQ pin low-level input 0100: Activated by SCI channel 0 transmission complete interrupt 0101: Activated by SCI channel 0 reception complete interrupt 0110: Activated by SCI channel 1 transmission complete interrupt 0111: Activated by SCI channel 1 reception complete interrupt 1000: Activated by TPU channel 0 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1001: Activated by TPU channel 1 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1010: Activated by TPU channel 2 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1011: Activated by TPU channel 3 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1100: Activated by TPU channel 4 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1101: Activated by TPU channel 5 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1110: Setting prohibited 1111: Setting prohibited The same factor can be selected for more than one channel. In this case, activation starts with the highest-priority channel according to the relative channel priorities. For relative channel priorities, see section 7.5.12, Multi-Channel Operation. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 222 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Full Address Mode: * DMACR_0A and DMACR_1A Bit 15 Bit Name DTSZ Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Data Transfer Size Selects the size of data to be transferred at one time. 0: Byte-size transfer 1: Word-size transfer 14 13 SAID SAIDE 0 0 R/W R/W Source Address Increment/Decrement Source Address Increment/Decrement Enable These bits specify whether source address register MARA is to be incremented, decremented, or left unchanged, when data transfer is performed. 00: MARA is fixed 01: MARA is incremented after a data transfer * When DTSZ = 0, MARA is incremented by 1 * When DTSZ = 1, MARA is incremented by 2 10: MARA is fixed 11: MARA is decremented after a data transfer * * 12 11 BLKDIR BLKE 0 0 R/W R/W When DTSZ = 0, MARA is decremented by 1 When DTSZ = 1, MARA is decremented by 2 Block Direction Block Enable These bits specify whether normal mode or block transfer mode is to be used for data transfer. If block transfer mode is specified, the BLKDIR bit specifies whether the source side or the destination side is to be the block area. x0: Transfer in normal mode 01: Transfer in block transfer mode (destination side is block area) 11: Transfer in block transfer mode (source side is block area) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 223 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Bit 10 to 8 Bit Name Initial Value All 0 R/W R/W Description Reserved Though these bits can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. Legend: x: Don't care * DMACR_0B and DMACR_1B Bit 7 Bit Name Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Reserved Though this bit can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. 6 5 DAID DAIDE 0 0 R/W R/W Destination Address Increment/Decrement Destination Address Increment/Decrement Enable These bits specify whether destination address register MARB is to be incremented, decremented, or left unchanged, when data transfer is performed. 00: MARB is fixed 01: MARB is incremented after a data transfer * When DTSZ = 0, MARB is incremented by 1 * When DTSZ = 1, MARB is incremented by 2 10: MARB is fixed 11: MARB is decremented after a data transfer * * 4 -- 0 R/W When DTSZ = 0, MARB is decremented by 1 When DTSZ = 1, MARB is decremented by 2 Reserved Though this bit can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. 3 2 1 0 DTF3 DTF2 DTF1 DTF0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Data Transfer Factor 3 to 0 These bits select the data transfer factor (activation source). The factors that can be specified differ between normal mode and block transfer mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 224 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Bit 3 2 1 0 Bit Name DTF3 DTF2 DTF1 DTF0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description * Normal Mode 0000: Setting prohibited 0001: Setting prohibited 0010: Activated by DREQ pin falling edge input (for the first transfer after data transfer is enabled, activated by DREQ pin low-level input) 0011: Activated by DREQ pin low-level input 010x: Setting prohibited 0110: Auto-request (cycle steal) 0111: Auto-request (burst) 1xxx: Setting prohibited * Block Transfer Mode 0000: Setting prohibited 0001: Activated by A/D converter conversion end interrupt 0010: Activated by DREQ pin falling edge input (for the first transfer after data transfer is enabled, activated by DREQ pin low-level input) 0011: Activated by DREQ pin low-level input 0100: Activated by SCI channel 0 transmission complete interrupt 0101: Activated by SCI channel 0 reception complete interrupt 0110: Activated by SCI channel 1 transmission complete interrupt 0111: Activated by SCI channel 1 reception complete interrupt 1000: Activated by TPU channel 0 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1001: Activated by TPU channel 1 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1010: Activated by TPU channel 2 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1011: Activated by TPU channel 3 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1100: Activated by TPU channel 4 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1101: Activated by TPU channel 5 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1110: Setting prohibited 1111: Setting prohibited Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 225 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Bit 3 2 1 0 Bit Name DTF3 DTF2 DTF1 DTF0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description The same factor can be selected for more than one channel. In this case, activation starts with the highest-priority channel according to the relative channel priorities. For relative channel priorities, see section 7.5.12, Multi-Channel Operation. Legend: x: Don't care 7.3.5 DMA Band Control Registers H and L (DMABCRH and DMABCRL) DMABCR controls the operation of each DMAC channel. The bit functions in the DMACR registers differ according to the transfer mode. Short Address Mode: * DMABCRH Bit 15 Bit Name FAE1 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Full Address Enable 1 Specifies whether channel 1 is to be used in short address mode or full address mode. In short address mode, channels 1A and 1B can be used as independent channels. 0: Short address mode 1: Full address mode 14 FAE0 0 R/W Full Address Enable 0 Specifies whether channel 0 is to be used in short address mode or full address mode. In short address mode, channels 0A and 0B can be used as independent channels. 0: Short address mode 1: Full address mode 13 SAE1 0 R/W Single Address Enable 1 Specifies whether channel 1B is to be used for transfer in dual address mode or single address mode. This bit is invalid in full address mode. 0: Dual address mode 1: Single address mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 226 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Bit 12 Bit Name SAE0 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Single Address Enable 0 Specifies whether channel 0B is to be used for transfer in dual address mode or single address mode. This bit is invalid in full address mode. 0: Dual address mode 1: Single address mode 11 10 9 8 DTA1B DTA1A DTA0B DTA0A 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Data Transfer Acknowledge 1B Data Transfer Acknowledge 1A Data Transfer Acknowledge 0B Data Transfer Acknowledge 0A These bits enable or disable clearing when DMA transfer is performed for the internal interrupt source selected by the DTF3 to DTF0 bits in DMACR. It the DTA bit is set to 1 when DTE = 1, the internal interrupt source is cleared automatically by DMA transfer. When DTE = 1 and DTA = 1, the internal interrupt source does not issue an interrupt request to the CPU or DTC. If the DTA bit is cleared to 0 when DTE = 1, the internal interrupt source is not cleared when a transfer is performed, and can issue an interrupt request to the CPU or DTC in parallel. In this case, the interrupt source should be cleared by the CPU or DTC transfer. When DTE = 0, the internal interrupt source issues an interrupt request to the CPU or DTC regardless of the DTA bit setting. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 227 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) * DMABCRL Bit 7 6 5 4 Bit Name DTE1B DTE1A DTE0B DTE0A Initial Value 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Data Transfer Enable 1B Data Transfer Enable 1A Data Transfer Enable 0B Data Transfer Enable 0A If the DTIE bit is set to 1 when DTE = 0, the DMAC regards this as indicating the end of a transfer, and issues a transfer end interrupt request to the CPU or DTC. When DTE = 0, data transfer is enabled and the DMAC ignores the activation source selected by the DTF3 to DTF0 bits in DMACR. When DTE = 1, data transfer is enabled and the DMAC waits for a request by the activation source selected by the DTF3 to DTF0 bits in DMACR. When a request is issued by the activation source, DMA transfer is executed. [Clearing conditions] * * When initialization is performed When the specified number of transfers have been completed in a transfer mode other than repeat mode * When 0 is written to the DTE bit to forcibly suspend the transfer, or for a similar reason [Setting condition] When 1 is written to the DTE bit after reading DTE = 0 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 228 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Bit 3 2 1 0 Bit Name DTIE1B DTIE1A DTIE0B DTIE0A Initial Value 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable 1B Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable 1A Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable 0B Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable 0A These bits enable or disable an interrupt to the CPU or DTC when transfer ends. If the DTIE bit is set to 1 when DTE = 0, the DMAC regards this as indicating the end of a transfer, and issues a transfer end interrupt request to the CPU or DTC. A transfer end interrupt can be canceled either by clearing the DTIE bit to 0 in the interrupt handling routine, or by performing processing to continue transfer by setting the transfer counter and address register again, and then setting the DTE bit to 1. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 229 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Full Address Mode: * DMABCRH Bit 15 Bit Name FAE1 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Full Address Enable 1 Specifies whether channel 1 is to be used in short address mode or full address mode. In full address mode, channels 1A and 1B are used together as channel 1. 0: Short address mode 1: Full address mode 14 FAE0 0 R/W Full Address Enable 0 Specifies whether channel 0 is to be used in short address mode or full address mode. In full address mode, channels 0A and 0B are used together as channel 0. 0: Short address mode 1: Full address mode 13, 12 -- All 0 R/W R/W Reserved Though these bits can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 230 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Bit 11 Bit Name DTA1 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Data Transfer Acknowledge 1 These bits enable or disable clearing when DMA transfer is performed for the internal interrupt source selected by the DTF3 to DTF0 bits in DMACR of channel 1. It the DTA1 bit is set to 1 when DTE1 = 1, the internal interrupt source is cleared automatically by DMA transfer. When DTE1 = 1 and DTA1 = 1, the internal interrupt source does not issue an interrupt request to the CPU or DTC. It the DTA1 bit is cleared to 0 when DTE1 = 1, the internal interrupt source is not cleared when a transfer is performed, and can issue an interrupt request to the CPU or DTC in parallel. In this case, the interrupt source should be cleared by the CPU or DTC transfer. When DTE1 = 0, the internal interrupt source issues an interrupt request to the CPU or DTC regardless of the DTA1 bit setting. The state of the DTME1 bit does not affect the above operations. 10 -- 0 R/W Reserved Though this bit can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 231 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Bit 9 Bit Name DTA0 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Data Transfer Acknowledge 0 These bits enable or disable clearing when DMA transfer is performed for the internal interrupt source selected by the DTF3 to DTF0 bits in DMACR of channel 0. It the DTA0 bit is set to 1 when DTE0 = 1, the internal interrupt source is cleared automatically by DMA transfer. When DTE0 = 1 and DTA0 = 1, the internal interrupt source does not issue an interrupt request to the CPU or DTC. It the DTA0 bit is cleared to 0 when DTE0 = 1, the internal interrupt source is not cleared when a transfer is performed, and can issue an interrupt request to the CPU or DTC in parallel. In this case, the interrupt source should be cleared by the CPU or DTC transfer. When DTE0 = 0, the internal interrupt source issues an interrupt request to the CPU or DTC regardless of the DTA0 bit setting. The state of the DTME0 bit does not affect the above operations. 8 -- 0 R/W Reserved Though this bit can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 232 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) * DMABCRL Bit 7 Bit Name DTME1 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Data Transfer Master Enable 1 Together with the DTE1 bit, this bit controls enabling or disabling of data transfer on channel 1. When both the DTME1 bit and DTE1 bit are set to 1, transfer is enabled for channel 1. If channel 1 is in the middle of a burst mode transfer when an NMI interrupt is generated, the DTME1 bit is cleared, the transfer is interrupted, and bus mastership passes to the CPU. When the DTME1 bit is subsequently set to 1 again, the interrupted transfer is resumed. In block transfer mode, however, the DTME1 bit is not cleared by an NMI interrupt, and transfer is not interrupted. [Clearing conditions] * * When initialization is performed When NMI is input in burst mode * When 0 is written to the DTME1 bit [Setting condition] When 1 is written to DTME1 after reading DTME1 = 0 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 233 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Bit 6 Bit Name DTE1 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Data Transfer Enable 1 Enables or disables DMA transfer for the activation source selected by the DTF3 to DTF0 bits in DMACR of channel 1. When DTE1 = 0, data transfer is disabled and the activation source is ignored. If the activation source is an internal interrupt, an interrupt request is issued to the CPU or DTC. If the DTIE1 bit is set to 1 when DTE1 = 0, the DMAC regards this as indicating the end of a transfer, and issues a transfer end interrupt request to the CPU. When DTE1 = 1 and DTME1 = 1, data transfer is enabled and the DMAC waits for a request by the activation source. When a request is issued by the activation source, DMA transfer is executed. [Clearing conditions] * * * When initialization is performed When the specified number of transfers have been completed When 0 is written to the DTE1 bit to forcibly suspend the transfer, or for a similar reason [Setting condition] When 1 is written to the DTE1 bit after reading DTE1 = 0 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 234 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Bit 5 Bit Name DTME0 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Data Transfer Master Enable 0 Together with the DTE0 bit, this bit controls enabling or disabling of data transfer on channel 0. When both the DTME0 bit and DTE0 bit are set to 1, transfer is enabled for channel 0. If channel 0 is in the middle of a burst mode transfer when an NMI interrupt is generated, the DTME0 bit is cleared, the transfer is interrupted, and bus mastership passes to the CPU. When the DTME0 bit is subsequently set to 1 again, the interrupted transfer is resumed. In block transfer mode, however, the DTME0 bit is not cleared by an NMI interrupt, and transfer is not interrupted. [Clearing conditions] * * When initialization is performed When NMI is input in burst mode * When 0 is written to the DTME0 bit [Setting condition] When 1 is written to DTME0 after reading DTME0 = 0 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 235 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Bit 4 Bit Name DTE0 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Data Transfer Enable 0 Enables or disables DMA transfer for the activation source selected by the DTF3 to DTF0 bits in DMACR of channel 0. When DTE0 = 0, data transfer is disabled and the activation source is ignored. If the activation source is an internal interrupt, an interrupt request is issued to the CPU or DTC. If the DTIE0 bit is set to 1 when DTE0 = 0, the DMAC regards this as indicating the end of a transfer, and issues a transfer end interrupt request to the CPU. When DTE0 = 1 and DTME0 = 1, data transfer is enabled and the DMAC waits for a request by the activation source. When a request is issued by the activation source, DMA transfer is executed. [Clearing conditions] * * * When initialization is performed When the specified number of transfers have been completed When 0 is written to the DTE0 bit to forcibly suspend the transfer, or for a similar reason [Setting condition] When 1 is written to the DTE0 bit after reading DTE0 = 0 3 DTIE1B 0 R/W Data Transfer Interrupt Enable 1B Enables or disables an interrupt to the CPU or DTC when transfer on channel 1 is interrupted. When DTME1 is cleared to 0 while this bit is set to 1, the DMAC regards this as indicating a break in the transfer, and issues a transfer break interrupt request to the CPU or DTC. A transfer break interrupt can be canceled either by clearing the DTIE1B bit to 0 in the interrupt handling routine, or by performing processing to continue transfer by setting the DTME1 bit to 1. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 236 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Bit 2 Bit Name DTIE1A Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable 1A Enables or disables an interrupt to the CPU or DTC when transfer ends. When DTE1 is cleared to 0 while this bit is set to 1, the DMAC regards this as indicating the end of a transfer, and issues a transfer end interrupt request to the CPU or DTC. A transfer end interrupt can be canceled either by clearing the DTIE1A bit to 0 in the interrupt handling routine, or by performing processing to continue transfer by setting the transfer counter and address register again, and then setting the DTE1 bit to 1. 1 DTIE0B 0 R/W Data Transfer Interrupt Enable 0B Enables or disables an interrupt to the CPU or DTC when transfer on channel 1 is interrupted. When DTME0 is cleared to 0 while this bit is set to 1, the DMAC regards this as indicating a break in the transfer, and issues a transfer break interrupt request to the CPU or DTC. A transfer break interrupt can be canceled either by clearing the DTIE0B bit to 0 in the interrupt handling routine, or by performing processing to continue transfer by setting the DTME0 bit to 1. 0 DTIE0A 0 R/W Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable 0A Enables or disables an interrupt to the CPU or DTC when transfer ends. When DTE0 is cleared to 0 while this bit is set to 1, the DMAC regards this as indicating the end of a transfer, and issues a transfer end interrupt request to the CPU or DTC. A transfer end interrupt can be canceled either by clearing the DTIE0A bit to 0 in the interrupt handling routine, or by performing processing to continue transfer by setting the transfer counter and address register again, and then setting the DTE0 bit to 1. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 237 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.3.6 DMA Write Enable Register (DMAWER) The DMAC can activate the DTC with a transfer end interrupt, rewrite the channel on which the transfer ended using a DTC chain transfer, and then reactivate the DTC. DMAWER applies restrictions for changing all bits of DMACR, and specific bits for DMATCR and DMABCR for the specific channel, to prevent inadvertent rewriting of registers other than those for the channel concerned. The restrictions applied by DMAWER are valid for the DTC. Bit 7 to 4 3 Bit Name Initial Value All 0 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. WE1B 0 R/W Write Enable 1B Enables or disables writes to all bits in DMACR1B, bits 11, 7, and 3 in DMABCR, and bit 5 in DMATCR. 0: Writes are disabled 1: Writes are enabled 2 WE1A 0 R/W Write Enable 1A Enables or disables writes to all bits in DMACR1A, and bits 10, 6, and 2 in DMABCR. 0: Writes are disabled 1: Writes are enabled 1 WE0B 0 R/W Write Enable 0B Enables or disables writes to all bits in DMACR0B, bits 9, 5, and 1 in DMABCR, and bit 4 in DMATCR. 0: Writes are disabled 1: Writes are enabled 0 WE0A 0 R/W Write Enable 0A Enables or disables writes to all bits in DMACR0A, and bits 8, 4, and 0 in DMABCR. 0: Writes are disabled 1: Writes are enabled Figure 7.2 shows the transfer areas for activating the DTC with a channel 0A transfer end interrupt request, and reactivating channel 0A. The address register and count register areas are set again during the first DTC transfer, then the control register area is set again during the second DTC Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 238 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) chain transfer. When re-setting the control register area, perform masking by setting bits in DMAWER to prevent modification of the contents of other channels. First transfer area MAR_0A IOAR_0A ETCR_0A MAR_0B IOAR_0B ETCR_0B MAR_1A DTC IOAR_1A ETCR_1A MAR_1B IOAR_1B ETCR_1B DMAWER DMACR_0A DMACR_1A Second transfer area using chain transfer DMATCR DMACR_0B DMACR_1B DMABCR Figure 7.2 Areas for Register Re-Setting by DTC (Channel 0A) Writes by the DTC to bits 15 to 12 (FAE and SAE) in DMABCR are invalid regardless of the DMAWER settings. These bits should be changed, if necessary, by CPU processing. In writes by the DTC to bits 7 to 4 (DTE) in DMABCR, 1 can be written without first reading 0. To reactivate a channel set to full address mode, write 1 to both Write Enable A and Write Enable B for the channel to be reactivated. MAR, IOAR, and ETCR can always be written to regardless of the DMAWER settings. When modifying these registers, the channel to be modified should be halted. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 239 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.3.7 DMA Terminal Control Register (DMATCR) DMATCR controls enabling or disabling of output from the DMAC transfer end pin. A port can be set for output automatically, and a transfer end signal output, by setting the appropriate bit. In short address mode, the TEND pin is only available for channel B. The transfer end signal indicates the transfer cycle in which the transfer counter has become 0 regardless of the transfer source. Note however that the transfer end signal exceptionally indicates the transfer cycle in which the block counter has become 0 in block transfer mode. Bit 7, 6 Bit Name Initial Value All 0 R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 5 TEE1 0 R/W Transfer End Enable 1 Enables or disables transfer end pin 1 (TEND1) output. 0: TEND1 pin output disabled 1: TEND1 pin output enabled 4 TEE0 0 R/W Transfer End Enable 0 Enables or disables transfer end pin 0 (TEND0) output. 0: TEND0 pin output disabled 1: TEND0 pin output enabled 3 to 0 0 Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 240 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.4 Activation Sources DMAC activation sources consist of internal interrupt requests, external requests, and autorequests. The DMAC activation sources that can be specified depend on the transfer mode and channel, as shown in table 7.3. Table 7.3 DMAC Activation Sources Short Address Mode Channels 0A and 1A X X X Channels 0B and 1B X Full Address Mode Normal Mode X X X X X X X X X X X Block Transfer Mode X Activation Source Internal interrupts ADI TXI0 RXI0 TXI1 RXI1 TGI0A TGI1A TGI2A TGI3A TGI4A TGI5A External requests DREQ pin falling edge input DREQ pin low-level input Auto-request Legend: : Can be specified X: Cannot be specified Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 241 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.4.1 Activation by Internal Interrupt Request An interrupt request selected as a DMAC activation source can also simultaneously generate an interrupt request for the CPU or DTC. For details, see section 5, Interrupt Controller. With activation by an internal interrupt request, the DMAC accepts the interrupt request independently of the interrupt controller. Consequently, interrupt controller priority settings are irrelevant. If the DMAC is activated by a CPU interrupt source or an interrupt request that is not used as a DTC activation source (DTA = 1), the interrupt request flag is cleared automatically by the DMA transfer. With ADI, TXI and RXI interrupts, however, the interrupt source flag is not cleared unless the relevant register is accessed in a DMA transfer. If the same interrupt is used as an activation source for more than one channel, the interrupt request flag is cleared when the highestpriority channel is activated. Transfer requests for other channels are held pending in the DMAC, and activation is carried out in order of priority. When DTE = 0 after completion of a transfer, an interrupt request from the selected activation source is not sent to the DMAC, regardless of the DTA bit setting. In this case, the relevant interrupt request is sent to the CPU or DTC. In case of overlap with a CPU interrupt source or DTC activation source (DTA = 0), the interrupt request flag is not cleared by the DMAC. 7.4.2 Activation by External Request If an external request (DREQ pin) is specified as a DMAC activation source, the relevant port should be set to input mode in advance*. Level sensing or edge sensing can be used for external requests. External request operation in normal mode of short address mode or full address mode is described below. When edge sensing is selected, a byte or word is transferred each time a high-to-low transition is detected on the DREQ pin. The next data transfer may not be performed if the next edge is input before data transfer is completed. When level sensing is selected, the DMAC stands by for a transfer request while the DREQ pin is held high. While the DREQ pin is held low, transfers continue in succession, with the bus being released each time a byte or word is transferred. If the DREQ pin goes high in the middle of a transfer, the transfer is interrupted and the DMAC stands by for a transfer request. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 242 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Note: * If the relevant port is set as an output pin for another function, DMA transfers using the channel in question cannot be guaranteed. 7.4.3 Activation by Auto-Request Auto-request is activated by register setting only, and transfer continues to the end. With autorequest activation, cycle steal mode or burst mode can be selected. In cycle steal mode, the DMAC releases the bus to another bus master each time a byte or word is transferred. DMA and CPU cycles are usually repeated alternately. In burst mode, the DMAC keeps possession of the bus until the end of the transfer so that transfer is performed continuously. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 243 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.5 7.5.1 Operation Transfer Modes Table 7.4 lists the DMAC transfer modes. Table 7.4 DMAC Transfer Modes Transfer Source * TPU channel 0 to 5 compare match/input capture A interrupt SCI transmission complete interrupt SCI reception complete interrupt A/D converter conversion end interrupt External request * Remarks * * Up to 4 channels can operate independently External request applies to channel B only Single address mode applies to channel B only Transfer Mode Short address mode Dual address mode * 1-byte or 1-word transfer for a single transfer request Specifies the transfer destination/source address and performs transfer in 2 bus cycles Memory address incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 Number of transfers: 1 to 65,536 Memory address fixed Number of transfers: 1 to 65,536 1-byte or 1-word transfer for a single transfer request Memory address incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 Continues transfer after sending number of transfers (1 to 256) and restoring the initial value * * * * (1) Sequential mode * * * (2) Idle mode * * (3) Repeat mode * * * Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 244 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Transfer Mode Short address mode Single address mode * 1-byte or 1-word transfer for a single transfer request * 1-bus cycle transfer by means of DACK pin instead of using address for specifying I/O * Sequential mode, idle mode, or repeat mode can be specified Transfer Source * TPU channel 0 to 5 compare match/input capture A interrupt SCI transmission complete interrupt SCI reception complete interrupt A/D converter conversion end interrupt External request Auto-request Remarks * * Up to 4 channels can operate independently External request applies to channel B only Single address mode applies to channel B only * * * * * Full address mode Normal mode * (1) Auto-request * Transfer request is internally held * Number of transfers (1 to 65,536) is continuously sent * Burst/cycle steal transfer can be selected (2) External request * 1-byte or 1-word transfer for a single transfer request * Number of transfers: 1 to 65,536 Block transfer mode * Transfer of 1-block, size selected for a single transfer request * Number of transfers: 1 to 65,536 * Source or destination can be selected as block area * Block size: 1 to 256 bytes or word * * Max. 2-channel operation, combining channels A and B External request * * * * * * TPU channel 0 to 5 compare match/input capture A interrupt SCI transmission complete interrupt SCI reception complete interrupt A/D converter conversion end interrupt External request * Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 245 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.5.2 Sequential Mode Sequential mode can be specified by clearing the RPE bit in DMACR to 0. In sequential mode, MAR is updated after each byte or word transfer in response to a single transfer request, and this is executed the number of times specified in ETCR. One address is specified by MAR, and the other by IOAR. The transfer direction can be specified by the DTDIR bit in DMACR. Table 7.5 summarizes register functions in sequential mode. Table 7.5 Register Functions in Sequential Mode Function Register 23 MAR 0 DTDIR = 0 DTDIR = 1 Initial Setting Source address register Operation Destination Start address of Incremented/ address transfer destination decremented every register or transfer source transfer Start address of Fixed transfer source or transfer destination Number of transfers Decremented every transfer; transfer ends when count reaches H'0000 23 H'FF 15 IOAR 0 Destination Source address address register register Transfer counter 15 ETCR 0 MAR specifies the start address of the transfer source or transfer destination as 24 bits. MAR is incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 each time a byte or word is transferred. IOAR specifies the lower 16 bits of the other address. The 8 bits above IOAR have a value of H'FF. Figure 7.3 illustrates operation in sequential mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 246 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Address T Transfer IOAR 1 byte or word transfer performed in response to 1 transfer request Address B Legend: Address T = L Address B = L + (-1)DTID * (2DTSZ * (N - 1)) Where : L = Value set in MAR N = Value set in ETCR Figure 7.3 Operation in Sequential Mode The number of transfers is specified as 16 bits in ETCR. ETCR is decremented by 1 each time a data transfer is executed, and when its value reaches H'0000, the DTE bit is cleared and data transfer ends. If the DTIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU or DTC. The maximum number of transfers, when H'0000 is set in ETCR, is 65,536. Transfer requests (activation sources) consist of A/D converter conversion end interrupts, external requests, SCI transmission complete and reception complete interrupts, and TPU channel 0 to 5 compare match/input capture A interrupts. External requests can only be specified for channel B. Figure 7.4 shows an example of the setting procedure for sequential mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 247 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Sequential mode setting [1] Set each bit in DMABCRH. * Clear the FAE bit to 0 to select short address mode. * Specify enabling or disabling of internal interrupt clearing with the DTA bit. [1] [2] Set the transfer source address and transfer destination address in MAR and IOAR. [3] Set the number of transfers in ETCR. Set DMABCRH Set transfer source and transfer destination addresses [2] Set number of transfers [3] Set DMACR [4] [4] Set each bit in DMACR. * Set the transfer data size with the DTSZ bit. * Specify whether MAR is to be incremented or decremented with the DTID bit. * Clear the RPE bit to 0 to select sequential mode. * Specify the transfer direction with the DTDIR bit. * Select the activation source with bits DTF3 to DTF0. [5] Read the DTE bit in DMABCRL as 0. [6] Set each bit in DMABCRL. * Specify enabling or disabling of transfer end interrupts with the DTIE bit. * Set the DTE bit to 1 to enable transfer. Read DMABCRL [5] Set DMABCRL [6] Sequential mode Figure 7.4 Example of Sequential Mode Setting Procedure Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 248 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.5.3 Idle Mode Idle mode can be specified by setting the RPE bit in DMACR and DTIE bit in DMABCRL to 1. In idle mode, one byte or word is transferred in response to a single transfer request, and this is executed the number of times specified in ETCR. One address is specified by MAR, and the other by IOAR. The transfer direction can be specified by the DTDIR bit in DMACR. Table 7.6 summarizes register functions in idle mode. Table 7.6 Register Functions in Idle Mode Function Register 23 MAR 0 DTDIR = 0 DTDIR = 1 Initial Setting Source address register Operation Destination Start address of Fixed address transfer destination register or transfer source Start address of Fixed transfer source or transfer destination Number of transfers Decremented every transfer; transfer ends when count reaches H'0000 23 H'FF 15 IOAR 0 Destination Source address address register register Transfer counter 15 ETCR 0 MAR specifies the start address of the transfer source or transfer destination as 24 bits. MAR is neither incremented nor decremented by a data transfer. IOAR specifies the lower 16 bits of the other address. The upper 8 bits of IOAR have a value of H'FF. Figure 7.5 illustrates operation in idle mode. MAR Transfer IOAR 1 byte or word transfer performed in response to 1 transfer request Figure 7.5 Operation in Idle Mode The number of transfers is specified as 16 bits in ETCR. ETCR is decremented by 1 each time a transfer is executed, and when its value reaches H'0000, the DTE bit is cleared and data transfer Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 249 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) ends. If the DTIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU or DTC. The maximum number of transfers, when H'0000 is set in ETCR, is 65,536. Transfer requests (activation sources) consist of A/D converter conversion end interrupts, external requests, SCI transmission complete and reception complete interrupts, and TPU channel 0 to 5 compare match/input capture A interrupts. External requests can only be specified for channel B. Figure 7.6 shows an example of the setting procedure for idle mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 250 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Idle mode setting [1] Set each bit in DMABCRH. * Clear the FAE bit to 0 to select short address mode. * Specify enabling or disabling of internal interrupt clearing with the DTA bit. [1] [2] Set the transfer source address and transfer destination address in MAR and IOAR. [3] Set the number of transfers in ETCR. Set DMABCRH Set transfer source and transfer destination addresses [2] Set number of transfers [3] [4] Set each bit in DMACR. * Set the transfer data size with the DTSZ bit. * Specify whether MAR is to be incremented or decremented with the DTID bit. * Set the RPE bit to 1. * Specify the transfer direction with the DTDIR bit. * Select the activation source with bits DTF3 to DTF0. [5] Read the DTE bit in DMABCRL as 0. [6] Set each bit in DMABCRL. * Set the DTIE bit to 1. * Set the DTE bit to 1 to enable transfer. Set DMACR [4] Read DMABCRL [5] Set DMABCRL [6] Idle mode Figure 7.6 Example of Idle Mode Setting Procedure Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 251 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.5.4 Repeat Mode Repeat mode can be specified by setting the RPE bit in DMACR to 1, and clearing the DTIE bit in DMABCRL to 0. In repeat mode, MAR is updated after each byte or word transfer in response to a single transfer request, and this is executed the number of times specified in ETCRL. On completion of the specified number of transfers, MAR and ETCRL are automatically restored to their original settings and operation continues. One address is specified by MAR, and the other by IOAR. The transfer direction can be specified by the DTDIR bit in DMACR. Table 7.7 summarizes register functions in repeat mode. Table 7.7 Register Functions in Repeat Mode Function Register 23 MAR 0 DTDIR = 0 DTDIR = 1 Initial Setting Source address register Operation Destination Start address of Incremented/ address transfer destination decremented every register or transfer source transfer. Initial setting is restored when value reaches H'0000 Start address of Fixed transfer source or transfer destination Number of transfers Fixed 23 H'FF 15 IOAR 0 Destination Source address address register register Holds number of transfers 7 ETCRH 0 7 ETCRL 0 Transfer counter Number of transfers Decremented every transfer. Loaded with ETCRH value when count reaches H'00 MAR specifies the start address of the transfer source or transfer destination as 24 bits. MAR is incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 each time a byte or word is transferred. IOAR specifies the lower 16 bits of the other address. The upper 8 bits of IOAR have a value of H'FF. The number of transfers is specified as 8 bits by ETCRH and ETCRL. The maximum number of transfers, when H'00 is set in both ETCRH and ETCRL, is 256. In repeat mode, ETCRL functions as the transfer counter, and ETCRH is used to hold the number of transfers. ETCRL is decremented by 1 each time a data transfer is executed, and when its value reaches H'00, it is loaded with the value in ETCRH. At the same time, the value set in MAR is Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 252 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) restored in accordance with the values of the DTSZ and DTID bits in DMACR. The MAR restoration operation is as shown below. MAR = MAR - (-1)DTID * 2DTSZ * ETCRH The same value should be set in ETCRH and ETCRL. In repeat mode, operation continues until the DTE bit in DMABCRL is cleared. To end the transfer operation, therefore, the DTE bit should be cleared to 0. A transfer end interrupt request is not sent to the CPU or DTC. By setting the DTE bit to 1 again after it has been cleared, the operation can be restarted from the transfer after that terminated when the DTE bit was cleared. Figure 7.7 illustrates operation in repeat mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 253 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Address T Transfer IOAR 1 byte or word transfer performed in response to 1 transfer request Address B Legend: Address T = L Address B = L + (-1)DTID * (2DTSZ * (N - 1)) Where : L = Value set in MAR N = Value set in ETCR Figure 7.7 Operation in Repeat mode Transfer requests (activation sources) consist of A/D converter conversion end interrupts, external requests, SCI transmission complete and reception complete interrupts, and TPU channel 0 to 5 compare match/input capture A interrupts. External requests can only be specified for channel B. Figure 7.8 shows an example of the setting procedure for repeat mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 254 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Repeat mode setting [1] Set each bit in DMABCRH. * Clear the FAE bit to 0 to select short address mode. * Specify enabling or disabling of internal interrupt clearing with the DTA bit. [1] [2] Set the transfer source address and transfer destination address in MAR and IOAR. [3] Set the number of transfers in both ETCRH and ETCRL. [2] [4] Set each bit in DMACR. * Set the transfer data size with the DTSZ bit. * Specify whether MAR is to be incremented or decremented with the DTID bit. * Set the RPE bit to 1. * Specify the transfer direction with the DTDIR bit. * Select the activation source with bits DTF3 to DTF0. [5] Read the DTE bit in DMABCRL as 0. [6] Set each bit in DMABCRL. * Clear the DTIE bit to 0. * Set the DTE bit to 1 to enable transfer. Set DMABCRH Set transfer source and transfer destination addresses Set number of transfers [3] Set DMACR [4] Read DMABCRL [5] Set DMABCRL [6] Repeat mode Figure 7.8 Example of Repeat Mode Setting Procedure Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 255 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.5.5 Single Address Mode Single address mode can only be specified for channel B. This mode can be specified by setting the SAE bit in DMABCRH to 1 in short address mode. One address is specified by MAR, and the other is set automatically to the data transfer acknowledge pin (DACK). The transfer direction can be specified by the DTDIR bit in DMACR. Table 7.8 summarizes register functions in single address mode. Table 7.8 Register Functions in Single Address Mode Function Register 23 MAR 0 DTDIR = 0 DTDIR = 1 Initial Setting Source address register Write strobe 0 ETCR Operation Destination Start address of See sections 7.5.2, address transfer destination Sequential Mode, register or transfer source 7.5.3, Idle Mode, and 7.5.4, Repeat Mode. Read strobe (Set automatically Strobe for external by SAE bit; IOAR is device invalid) Number of transfers See sections 7.5.2, Sequential Mode, 7.5.3, Idle Mode, and 7.5.4, Repeat Mode. DACK pin 15 Transfer counter MAR specifies the start address of the transfer source or transfer destination as 24 bits. IOAR is invalid; in its place the strobe for external devices (DACK) is output. Figure 7.9 illustrates operation in single address mode (when sequential mode is specified). Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 256 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Address T Transfer DACK 1 byte or word transfer performed in response to 1 transfer request Address B Legend: Address T = L Address B = L + (-1)DTID * (2DTSZ * (N - 1)) Where : L = Value set in MAR N = Value set in ETCR Figure 7.9 Operation in Single Address Mode (When Sequential Mode is Specified) Figure 7.10 shows an example of the setting procedure for single address mode (when sequential mode is specified). Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 257 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Single address mode setting Set DMABCRH [1] [1] Set each bit in DMABCRH. * Clear the FAE bit to 0 to select short address mode. * Set the SAE bit to 1 to select single address mode. * Specify enabling or disabling of internal interrupt clearing with the DTA bit. [2] Set the transfer source address/transfer destination address in MAR. Set transfer source and transfer destination addresses [2] [3] Set the number of transfers in ETCR. [4] Set each bit in DMACR. * Set the transfer data size with the DTSZ bit. * Specify whether MAR is to be incremented or decremented with the DTID bit. * Clear the RPE bit to 0 to select sequential mode. * Specify the transfer direction with the DTDIR bit. * Select the activation source with bits DTF3 to DTF0. [5] Read the DTE bit in DMABCRL as 0. Set number of transfers [3] Set DMACR [4] Read DMABCRL [5] [6] Set each bit in DMABCRL. * Specify enabling or disabling of transfer end interrupts with the DTIE bit. * Set the DTE bit to 1 to enable transfer. Set DMABCRL [6] Single address mode Figure 7.10 Example of Single Address Mode Setting Procedure (When Sequential Mode is Specified) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 258 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.5.6 Normal Mode In normal mode, transfer is performed with channels A and B used in combination. Normal mode can be specified by setting the FAE bit in DMABCRH to 1 and clearing the BLKE bit in DMACRA to 0. In normal mode, MAR is updated after data transfer of a byte or word in response to a single transfer request, and this is executed the number of times specified in ETCRA. The transfer source is specified by MARA, and the transfer destination by MARB. Table 7.9 summarizes register functions in normal mode. Table 7.9 Register 23 MARA 23 MARB 0 0 Register Functions in Normal Mode Function Source address register Destination address register Initial Setting Start address of transfer source Operation Incremented/decremented every transfer, or fixed Start address of Incremented/decremented transfer destination every transfer, or fixed 15 ETCRA 0 Transfer counter Number of transfers Decremented every transfer; transfer ends when count reaches H'0000 MARA and MARB specify the start addresses of the transfer source and transfer destination, respectively, as 24 bits. MAR can be incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 each time a byte or word is transferred, or can be fixed. Incrementing, decrementing, or holding a fixed value can be set separately for MARA and MARB. The number of transfers is specified by ETCRA as 16 bits. ETCRA is decremented by 1 each time a transfer is performed, and when its value reaches H'0000 the DTE bit in DMABCRL is cleared and transfer ends. If the DTIE bit in DMABCRL is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU or DTC. The maximum number of transfers, when H'0000 is set in ETCRA, is 65,536. Figure 7.11 illustrates operation in normal mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 259 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Address TA Transfer Address TB Address BA Address BB Legend: Address TA = LA Address TB = LB Address BA = LA + SAIDE * (-1)SAID * (2DTSZ * (N - 1)) Address BB = LB + DAIDE * (-1)DAID * (2DTSZ * (N - 1)) Where : LA = Value set in MARA LB = Value set in MARB N = Value set in ETCRA Figure 7.11 Operation in Normal Mode Transfer requests (activation sources) are external requests and auto-requests. With auto-request, the DMAC is only activated by register setting, and the specified number of transfers are performed automatically. With auto-request, cycle steal mode or burst mode can be selected. In cycle steal mode, the bus is released to another bus master each time a transfer is performed. In burst mode, the bus is held continuously until transfer ends. Figure 7.12 shows an example of the setting procedure for normal mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 260 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Normal mode setting [1] Set each bit in DMABCRH. * Set the FAE bit to 1 to select full address mode. * Specify enabling or disabling of internal interrupt clearing with the DTA bit. [1] [2] Set the transfer source address in MARA, and the transfer destination address in MARB. [3] Set the number of transfers in ETCRA. Set DMABCRH Set transfer source and transfer destination addresses [2] Set number of transfers [3] Set DMACR [4] [4] Set each bit in DMACRA and DMACRB. * Set the transfer data size with the DTSZ bit. * Specify whether MARA is to be incremented, decremented, or fixed, with the SAID and SAIDE bits. * Clear the BLKE bit to 0 to select normal mode. * Specify whether MARB is to be incremented, decremented, or fixed, with the DAID and DAIDE bits. * Select the activation source with bits DTF3 to DTF0. [5] Read DTE = 0 and DTME = 0 in DMABCRL. Read DMABCRL [5] Set DMABCRL [6] [6] Set each bit in DMABCRL. * Specify enabling or disabling of transfer end interrupts with the DTIE bit. * Set both the DTME bit and the DTE bit to 1 to enable transfer. Normal mode Figure 7.12 Example of Normal Mode Setting Procedure Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 261 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.5.7 Block Transfer Mode In block transfer mode, data transfer is performed with channels A and B used in combination. Block transfer mode can be specified by setting the FAE bit in DMABCRH and the BLKE bit in DMACRA to 1. In block transfer mode, a data transfer of the specified block size is carried out in response to a single transfer request, and this is executed for the number of times specified in ETCRB. The transfer source is specified by MARA, and the transfer destination by MARB. Either the transfer source or the transfer destination can be selected as a block area (an area composed of a number of bytes or words). Table 7.10 summarizes register functions in block transfer mode. Table 7.10 Register Functions in Block Transfer Mode Register 23 MARA 0 Function Source address register Destination address register Holds block size Block size counter Initial Setting Start address of transfer source Operation Incremented/decremented every transfer, or fixed 23 MARB 7 0 ETCRAH 0 Start address of Incremented/decremented transfer destination every transfer, or fixed Block size Fixed Block size 7 ETCRAL 0 Decremented every transfer; ETCRH value copied when count reaches H'00 Decremented every block transfer; transfer ends when count reaches H'0000 15 ETCRB 0 Block transfer counter Number of block transfers MARA and MARB specify the start addresses of the transfer source and transfer destination, respectively, as 24 bits. MAR can be incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 each time a byte or word is transferred, or can be fixed. Incrementing, decrementing, or holding a fixed value can be set separately for MARA and MARB. Whether a block is to be designated for MARA or for MARB is specified by the BLKDIR bit in DMACRA. To specify the number of transfers, if M is the size of one block (where M = 1 to 256) and N transfers are to be performed (where N = 1 to 65,536), M is set in both ETCRAH and ETCRAL, and N in ETCRB. Figure 7.13 illustrates operation in block transfer mode when MARB is designated as a block area. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 262 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Address TA 1st block Transfer Block area Address TB 2nd block Consecutive transfer of M bytes or words is performed in response to one request Address BB Nth block Address BA Legend: Address Address Address Address Where : TA TB BA BB LA LB N M = LA = LB = LA + SAIDE * (-1)SAID * (2DTSZ * (M*N - 1)) = LB + DAIDE * (-1)DAID * (2DTSZ * (N - 1)) = Value set in MARA = Value set in MARB = Value set in ETCRB = Value set in ETCRAH and ETCRAL Figure 7.13 Operation in Block Transfer Mode (BLKDIR = 0) Figure 7.14 illustrates operation in block transfer mode when MARA is designated as a block area. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 263 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Address TA Block area Address BA Address TB Transfer Consecutive transfer of M bytes or words is performed in response to one request 2nd block 1st block Nth block Address BB Legend: Address Address Address Address Where : TA TB BA BB LA LB N M = LA = LB = LA + SAIDE * (-1)SAID * (2DTSZ * (N - 1)) = LB + DAIDE * (-1)DAID * (2DTSZ * (M*N - 1)) = Value set in MARA = Value set in MARB = Value set in ETCRB = Value set in ETCRAH and ETCRAL Figure 7.14 Operation in Block Transfer Mode (BLKDIR = 1) ETCRAL is decremented by 1 each time a byte or word transfer is performed. In response to a single transfer request, burst transfer is performed until the value in ETCRAL reaches H'00. ETCRAL is then loaded with the value in ETCRAH. At this time, the value in the MAR register for which a block designation has been given by the BLKDIR bit in DMACRA is restored in accordance with the DTSZ, SAID/DAID, and SAIDE/DAIDE bits in DMACR. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 264 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) ETCRB is decremented by 1 after every block transfer, and when the count reaches H'0000 the DTE bit in DMABCRL is cleared and transfer ends. If the DTIE bit in DMABCRL is set to 1 at this point, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU or DTC. Figure 7.15 shows the operation flow in block transfer mode. Start (DTE = DTME = 1) No Transfer request? Yes Acquire bus Read address specified by MARA MARA = MARA + SAIDE*(-1)SAID*2DTSZ Write to address specified by MARB MARB = MARB + DAIDE*(-1)DAID *2DTSZ ETCRAL = ETCRAL - 1 No ETCRAL = H'00 Yes Release bus ETCRAL = ETCRAH BLKDIR = 0 Yes No MARB = MARB - DAIDE*(-1)DAID*2DTSZ*ETCRAH MARA = MARA - SAIDE*(-1)SAID*2DTSZ*ETCRAH ETCRB = ETCRB - 1 No ETCRB = H'0000 Yes Clear DTE bit to 0 to end transfer Figure 7.15 Operation Flow in Block Transfer Mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 265 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Transfer requests (activation sources) consist of A/D converter conversion end interrupts, external requests, SCI transmission complete and reception complete interrupts, and TPU channel 0 to 5 compare match/input capture A interrupts. Figure 7.16 shows an example of the setting procedure for block transfer mode. Block transfer mode setting [1] Set each bit in DMABCRH. * Set the FAE bit to 1 to select full address mode. * Specify enabling or disabling of internal interrupt clearing with the DTA bit. [1] [2] Set the transfer source address in MARA, and the transfer destination address in MARB. [3] Set the block size in both ETCRAH and ETCRAL. Set the number of transfers in ETCRB. [4] Set each bit in DMACRA and DMACRB. * Set the transfer data size with the DTSZ bit. * Specify whether MARA is to be incremented, decremented, or fixed, with the SAID and SAIDE bits. * Set the BLKE bit to 1 to select block transfer mode. * Specify whether the transfer source or the transfer destination is a block area with the BLKDIR bit. * Specify whether MARB is to be incremented, decremented, or fixed, with the DAID and DAIDE bits. * Select the activation source with bits DTF3 to DTF0. [5] Read DTE = 0 and DTME = 0 in DMABCRL. Set DMABCRH Set transfer source and transfer destination addresses [2] Set number of transfers [3] Set DMACR [4] Read DMABCRL [5] Set DMABCRL [6] Block transfer mode [6] Set each bit in DMABCRL. * Specify enabling or disabling of transfer end interrupts to the CPU with the DTIE bit. * Set both the DTME bit and the DTE bit to 1 to enable transfer. Figure 7.16 Example of Block Transfer Mode Setting Procedure Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 266 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.5.8 Basic Bus Cycles An example of the basic DMAC bus cycle timing is shown in figure 7.17. In this example, wordsize transfer is performed from 16-bit, 2-state access space to 8-bit, 3-state access space. When the bus is transferred from the CPU to the DMAC, a source address read and destination address write are performed. The bus is not released in response to another bus request, etc., between these read and write operations. As like CPU cycles, DMA cycles conform to the bus controller settings. The address is not output to the external address bus in an access to on-chip memory or an internal I/O register. CPU cycle T1 DMAC cycle (1-word transfer) T2 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 CPU cycle Source address Address bus Destination address Figure 7.17 Example of DMA Transfer Bus Timing 7.5.9 DMA Transfer (Dual Address Mode) Bus Cycles Short Address Mode: Figure 7.18 shows a transfer example in which TEND output is enabled and byte-size short address mode transfer (sequential/idle/repeat mode) is performed from external 8-bit, 2-state access space to internal I/O space. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 267 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA dead Address bus RD HWR LWR TEND Bus release Bus release Bus release Last transfer cycle Bus release Figure 7.18 Example of Short Address Mode Transfer A byte or word transfer is performed for a single transfer request, and after the transfer, the bus is released. While the bus is released, one or more bus cycles are executed by the CPU or DTC. In the transfer end cycle (the cycle in which the transfer counter reaches 0), a one-state DMA dead cycle is inserted after the DMA write cycle. In repeat mode, when TEND output is enabled, TEND output goes low in the transfer end cycle. Full Address Mode (Cycle Steal Mode): Figure 7.19 shows a transfer example in which TEND output is enabled and word-size full address mode transfer (cycle steal mode) is performed from external 16-bit, 2-state access space to external 16-bit, 2-state access space. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 268 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA dead Address bus RD HWR LWR TEND Bus release Bus release Bus release Last transfer cycle Bus release Figure 7.19 Example of Full Address Mode Transfer (Cycle Steal) A byte or word transfer is performed for a single transfer request, and after the transfer, the bus is released. While the bus is released, one bus cycle is executed by the CPU or DTC. In the transfer end cycle (the cycle in which the transfer counter reaches 0), a one-state DMA dead cycle is inserted after the DMA write cycle. Full Address Mode (Burst Mode): Figure 7.20 shows a transfer example in which TEND output is enabled and word-size full address mode transfer (burst mode) is performed from external 16bit, 2-state access space to external 16-bit, 2-state access space. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 269 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) DMA read Address bus RD HWR LWR TEND Bus release Burst transfer Last transfer cycle Bus release DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA dead Figure 7.20 Example of Full Address Mode Transfer (Burst Mode) In burst mode, one-byte or one-word transfers are executed consecutively until transfer ends. In the transfer end cycle (the cycle in which the transfer counter reaches 0), a one-state DMA dead cycle is inserted after the DMA write cycle. If a request from another higher-priority channel is generated after burst transfer starts, that channel has to wait until the burst transfer ends. If an NMI interrupt is generated while a channel designated for burst transfer is in the transfer enabled state, the DTME bit in DMABCRL is cleared and the channel is placed in the transfer disabled state. If burst transfer has already been activated inside the DMAC, the bus is released on completion of a one-byte or one-word transfer within the burst transfer, and burst transfer is suspended. If the last transfer cycle of the burst transfer has already been activated inside the DMAC, execution continues to the end of the transfer even if the DTME bit is cleared. Full Address Mode (Block Transfer Mode): Figure 7.21 shows a transfer example in which TEND output is enabled and word-size full address mode transfer (block transfer mode) is performed from internal 16-bit, 1-state access space to external 16-bit, 2-state access space. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 270 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA dead DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA dead Address bus RD HWR LWR TEND Bus release Block transfer Bus release Last block transfer Bus release Figure 7.21 Example of Full Address Mode Transfer (Block Transfer Mode) A one-block transfer is performed for a single transfer request, and after the transfer the bus is released. While the bus is released, one or more bus cycles are executed by the CPU or DTC. In the transfer end cycle of each block (the cycle in which the transfer counter reaches 0), a onestate DMA dead cycle is inserted after the DMA write cycle. Even if an NMI interrupt is generated during data transfer, block transfer operation is not affected until data transfer for one block has ended. DREQ Pin Falling Edge Activation Timing: Set the DTA bit in DMABCRH to 1 for the channel for which the DREQ pin is selected. Figure 7.22 shows an example of normal mode transfer activated by the DREQ pin falling edge. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 271 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) DMA read DMA write Bus release DMA read DMA write Bus release Bus release DREQ Address bus DMA control Channel Transfer source Transfer destination Transfer source Transfer destination Idle Read Write Idle Read Write Idle Request Minimum of 2 cycles [1] [2] [3] Request clear period Request Minimum of 2 cycles [4] [5] [6] Request clear period [7] Acceptance resumes Acceptance resumes Acceptance after transfer enabling; the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of , and the request is held. [2] [5] The request is cleared at the next bus break, and activation is started in the DMAC. [3] [6] Start of DMA cycle; DREQ pin high level sampling on the rising edge of starts. [4] [7] When the DREQ pin high level has been sampled, acceptance is resumed after the write cycle is completed. (As in [1], the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of , and the request is held.) [1] Note: In write data buffer mode, bus breaks from [2] to [7] may be hidden, and not visible. Figure 7.22 Example of DREQ Pin Falling Edge Activated Normal Mode Transfer DREQ pin sampling is performed every cycle, with the rising edge of the next cycle after the end of the DMABCR write cycle for setting the transfer enabled state as the starting point. When the DREQ pin low level is sampled while acceptance by means of the DREQ pin is possible, the request is held in the DMAC. Then, when activation is initiated in the DMAC, the request is cleared, and DREQ pin high level sampling for edge detection is started. If DREQ pin high level sampling has been completed by the time the DMA write cycle ends, acceptance resumes after the end of the write cycle, DREQ pin low level sampling is performed again, and this operation is repeated until the transfer ends. Figure 7.23 shows an example of block transfer mode transfer activated by the DREQ pin falling edge. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 272 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 1 block transfer Bus release DMA read DMA write DMA Bus dead release DMA read 1 block transfer DMA write DMA dead Bus release DREQ Address bus DMA control Channel Transfer source Transfer destination Transfer source Transfer destination Idle Read Write Dead Idle Read Write Dead Idle Request Request clear period Request Minimum of 2 cycles Request clear period Minimum of 2 cycles [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Acceptance resumes Acceptance resumes Acceptance after transfer enabling; the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of , and the request is held. [2] [5] The request is cleared at the next bus break, and activation is started in the DMAC. [3] [6] Start of DMA cycle; DREQ pin high level sampling on the rising edge of starts. [4] [7] When the DREQ pin high level has been sampled, acceptance is resumed after the dead cycle is completed. (As in [1], the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of , and the request is held.) [1] Note: In write data buffer mode, bus breaks from [2] to [7] may be hidden, and not visible. Figure 7.23 Example of DREQ Pin Falling Edge Activated Block Transfer Mode Transfer DREQ pin sampling is performed every cycle, with the rising edge of the next cycle after the end of the DMABCR write cycle for setting the transfer enabled state as the starting point. When the DREQ pin low level is sampled while acceptance by means of the DREQ pin is possible, the request is held in the DMAC. Then, when activation is initiated in the DMAC, the request is cleared, and DREQ pin high level sampling for edge detection is started. If DREQ pin high level sampling has been completed by the time the DMA dead cycle ends, acceptance resumes after the end of the dead cycle, DREQ pin low level sampling is performed again, and this operation is repeated until the transfer ends. DREQ Pin Low Level Activation Timing (Normal Mode): Set the DTA bit in DMABCRH to 1 for the channel for which the DREQ pin is selected. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 273 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Figure 7.24 shows an example of normal mode transfer activated by the DREQ pin low level. Bus release DMA read DMA write Bus release DMA read DMA write Bus release DREQ Address bus DMA control Channel Idle Transfer source Transfer destination Transfer source Transfer destination Read Write Idle Read Write Idle Request Minimum of 2 cycles [1] [2] Request clear period Request Minimum of 2 cycles Request clear period [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Acceptance resumes Acceptance resumes [1] Acceptance after transfer enabling; the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of , and the request is held. [2] [5] The request is cleared at the next bus break, and activation is started in the DMAC. [3] [6] The DMA cycle is started. [4] [7] Acceptance is resumed after the write cycle is completed. (As in [1], the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of , and the request is held.) Note: In write data buffer mode, bus breaks from [2] to [7] may be hidden, and not visible. Figure 7.24 Example of DREQ Pin Low Level Activated Normal Mode Transfer DREQ pin sampling is performed every cycle, with the rising edge of the next cycle after the end of the DMABCR write cycle for setting the transfer enabled state as the starting point. When the DREQ pin low level is sampled while acceptance by means of the DREQ pin is possible, the request is held in the DMAC. Then, when activation is initiated in the DMAC, the request is cleared. After the end of the write cycle, acceptance resumes, DREQ pin low level sampling is performed again, and this operation is repeated until the transfer ends. Figure 7.25 shows an example of block transfer mode transfer activated by DREQ pin low level. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 274 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 1 block transfer Bus release DMA read DMA write DMA Bus dead release DMA read 1 block transfer DMA write DMA dead Bus release DREQ Address bus DMA control Channel Transfer source Transfer destination Transfer source Transfer destination Idle Read Write Dead Idle Read Write Dead Idle Request Minimum of 2 cycles [1] [2] [3] Request clear period Request Minimum of 2 cycles [4] [5] [6] Request clear period [7] Acceptance resumes Acceptance resumes Acceptance after transfer enabling; the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of , and the request is held. [2] [5] The request is cleared at the next bus break, and activation is started in the DMAC. [3] [6] The DMA cycle is started. [4] [7] Acceptance is resumed after the dead cycle is completed. (As in [1], the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of , and the request is held.) [1] Note: In write data buffer mode, bus breaks from [2] to [7] may be hidden, and not visible. Figure 7.25 Example of DREQ Pin Low Level Activated Block Transfer Mode Transfer DREQ pin sampling is performed every cycle, with the rising edge of the next cycle after the end of the DMABCR write cycle for setting the transfer enabled state as the starting point. When the DREQ pin low level is sampled while acceptance by means of the DREQ pin is possible, the request is held in the DMAC. Then, when activation is initiated in the DMAC, the request is cleared. After the end of the dead cycle, acceptance resumes, DREQ pin low level sampling is performed again, and this operation is repeated until the transfer ends. 7.5.10 DMA Transfer (Single Address Mode) Bus Cycles Single Address Mode (Read): Figure 7.26 shows a transfer example in which TEND output is enabled and byte-size single address mode transfer (read) is performed from external 8-bit, 2-state access space to an external device. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 275 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) DMA DMA read dead DMA read Address bus RD DACK TEND DMA read DMA read Bus release Bus release Bus release Bus Last transfer release cycle Bus release Figure 7.26 Example of Single Address Mode Transfer (Byte Read) Figure 7.27 shows a transfer example in which TEND output is enabled and word-size single address mode transfer (read) is performed from external 8-bit, 2-state access space to an external device. DMA dead DMA read DMA read DMA read Address bus RD DACK TEND Bus release Bus release Bus release Last transfer cycle Bus release Figure 7.27 Example of Single Address Mode (Word Read) Transfer A byte or word transfer is performed for a single transfer request, and after the transfer, the bus is released. While the bus is released, one or more bus cycles are executed by the CPU or DTC. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 276 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) In the transfer end cycle (the cycle in which the transfer counter reaches 0), a one-state DMA dead cycle is inserted after the DMA write cycle. Single Address Mode (Write): Figure 7.28 shows a transfer example in which TEND output is enabled and byte-size single address mode transfer (write) is performed from an external device to external 8-bit, 2-state access space. DMA DMA write dead DMA write Address bus HWR LWR DACK TEND DMA write DMA write Bus release Bus release Bus release Bus Last transfer release cycle Bus release Figure 7.28 Example of Single Address Mode Transfer (Byte Write) Figure 7.29 shows a transfer example in which TEND output is enabled and word-size single address mode transfer (write) is performed from an external device to external 8-bit, 2-state access space. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 277 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) DMA dead DMA write DMA write DMA write Address bus HWR LWR DACK TEND Bus release Bus release Bus release Last transfer cycle Bus release Figure 7.29 Example of Single Address Mode Transfer (Word Write) A byte or word transfer is performed for a single transfer request, and after the transfer, the bus is released. While the bus is released, one or more bus cycles are executed by the CPU or DTC. In the transfer end cycle (the cycle in which the transfer counter reaches 0), a one-state DMA dead cycle is inserted after the DMA write cycle. DREQ Pin Falling Edge Activation Timing: Set the DTA bit in DMABCRH to 1 for the channel for which the DREQ pin is selected. Figure 7.30 shows an example of single address mode transfer activated by the DREQ pin falling edge. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 278 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Bus release DREQ Address bus DACK Transfer source/ destination Transfer source/ destination DMA single Bus release DMA single Bus release DMA control Idle Single Idle Single Idle Channel Request Minimum of 2 cycles Request clear period Request Minimum of 2 cycles Request clear period [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Acceptance resumes Acceptance resumes [1] Acceptance after transfer enabling; the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of , and the request is held. [2] [5] The request is cleared at the next bus break, and activation is started in the DMAC. [3] [6] Start of DMA cycle; DREQ pin high level sampling on the rising edge of starts. [4] [7] When the DREQ pin high level has been sampled, acceptance is resumed after the single cycle is completed. (As in [1], the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of , and the request is held.) Note: In write data buffer mode, bus breaks from [2] to [7] may be hidden, and not visible. Figure 7.30 Example of DREQ Pin Falling Edge Activated Single Address Mode Transfer DREQ pin sampling is performed every cycle, with the rising edge of the next cycle after the end of the DMABCR write cycle for setting the transfer enabled state as the starting point. When the DREQ pin low level is sampled while acceptance by means of the DREQ pin is possible, the request is held in the DMAC. Then, when activation is initiated in the DMAC, the request is cleared, and DREQ pin high level sampling for edge detection is started. If DREQ pin high level sampling has been completed by the time the DMA single cycle ends, acceptance resumes after the end of the single cycle, DREQ pin low level sampling is performed again, and this operation is repeated until the transfer ends. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 279 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) DREQ Pin Low Level Activation Timing: Set the DTA bit in DMABCRH to 1 for the channel for which the DREQ pin is selected. Figure 7.31 shows an example of single address mode transfer activated by the DREQ pin low level. Bus release Bus release DREQ DMA single Bus release DMA single Address bus DACK Transfer source/ destination Transfer source/ destination DMA control Idle Single Idle Single Idle Channel Request Minimum of 2 cycles Request clear period Request Minimum of 2 cycles Request clear period [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Acceptance resumes [1] Acceptance resumes Acceptance after transfer enabling; the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of , and the request is held. [2] [5] The request is cleared at the next bus break, and activation is started in the DMAC. [3] [6] The DMAC cycle is started. [4] [7] Acceptance is resumed after the single cycle is completed. (As in [1], the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of , and the request is held.) Note: In write data buffer mode, bus breaks from [2] to [7] may be hidden, and not visible. Figure 7.31 Example of DREQ Pin Low Level Activated Single Address Mode Transfer DREQ pin sampling is performed every cycle, with the rising edge of the next cycle after the end of the DMABCR write cycle for setting the transfer enabled state as the starting point. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 280 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) When the DREQ pin low level is sampled while acceptance by means of the DREQ pin is possible, the request is held in the DMAC. Then, when activation is initiated in the DMAC, the request is cleared. After the end of the single cycle, acceptance resumes, DREQ pin low level sampling is performed again, and this operation is repeated until the transfer ends. 7.5.11 Write Data Buffer Function DMAC internal-to-external dual address transfers and single address transfers can be executed at high speed using the write data buffer function, enabling system throughput to be improved. When the WDBE bit of BCR in the bus controller is set to 1, enabling the write data buffer function, external write cycles in dual address transfers or single address transfers are executed in parallel with internal accesses (on-chip memory or internal I/O registers). Internal accesses are independent of the bus master, and DMAC dead cycles are regarded as internal accesses. A low level can always be output from the TEND pin if the bus cycle in which a low level is to be output from the TEND pin is an external bus cycle. However, a low level is not output from the TEND pin if the bus cycle in which a low level is to be output from the TEND pin is an internal bus cycle, and an external write cycle is executed in parallel with this cycle. Figure 7.32 shows an example of dual address transfer using the write data buffer function. In this example, burst mode transfer from on-chip RAM to external memory is performed. DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA dead Internal address Internal read signal External address HWR, LWR TEND Figure 7.32 Example of Dual Address Transfer Using Write Data Buffer Function Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 281 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) Figure 7.33 shows an example of single address transfer using the write data buffer function. In this example, the CPU program area is in on-chip memory. DMA read DMA single CPU read DMA single CPU read Internal address Internal read signal External address RD DACK Figure 7.33 Example of Single Address Transfer Using Write Data Buffer Function When the write data buffer function is activated, the DMAC recognizes that the bus cycle concerned has ended, and starts the next operation. Therefore, DREQ pin sampling is started one state after the start of the DMA write cycle or single address transfer. 7.5.12 Multi-Channel Operation The DMAC channel priority order is: channel 0 > channel 1, and channel A > channel B. Table 7.11 summarizes the priority order for DMAC channels. Table 7.11 DMAC Channel Priority Order Short Address Mode Channel 0A Channel 0B Channel 1A Channel 1B Channel 1 Low Full Address Mode Channel 0 Priority High Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 282 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) If transfer requests are issued simultaneously for more than one channel, or if a transfer request for another channel is issued during a transfer, when the bus is released, the DMAC selects the highest-priority channel from among those issuing a request according to the priority order shown in table 7.11. During burst transfer, or when one block is being transferred in block transfer, the channel will not be changed until the end of the transfer. Figure 7.34 shows a transfer example in which transfer requests are issued simultaneously for channels 0A, 0B, and 1. DMA DMA write read DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA read Address bus RD HWR LWR DMA control Idle Read Channel 0A Channel 0B Channel 1 Bus release Write Idle Read Write Idle Read Write Read Request clear Request hold Request hold Selection Nonselection Request clear Request hold Bus release Selection Request clear Bus release Channel 1 transfer Channel 0A transfer Channel 0B transfer Figure 7.34 Example of Multi-Channel Transfer 7.5.13 Relation between DMAC and External Bus Requests and Refresh Cycles When the DMAC accesses external space, conflict with a refresh cycle or external bus release cycle may arise. In this case, the bus controller will suspend the transfer and insert a refresh cycle or external bus release cycle, in accordance with the external bus priority order, even if the DMAC is executing a burst transfer or block transfer. (An external access by the DTC or CPU, which has a lower priority than the DMAC, is not executed until the DMAC releases the external bus.) When the DMAC transfer mode is dual address mode, the DMAC releases the external bus after an external write cycle. The external read cycle and external write cycle are inseparable, and so the bus cannot be released between these two cycles. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 283 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) When the DMAC accesses internal space (on-chip memory or an internal I/O register), the DMAC cycle may be executed at the same time as a refresh cycle or external bus release cycle. 7.5.14 DMAC and NMI Interrupts When an NMI interrupt is requested, burst mode transfer in full address mode is interrupted. An NMI interrupt does not affect the operation of the DMAC in other modes. In full address mode, transfer is enabled for a channel when both the DTE bit and DTME bit are set to 1. With burst mode setting, the DTME bit is cleared when an NMI interrupt is requested. If the DTME bit is cleared during burst mode transfer, the DMAC discontinues transfer on completion of the 1-byte or 1-word transfer in progress, then releases the bus, which passes to the CPU. The channel on which transfer was interrupted can be restarted by setting the DTME bit to 1 again. Figure 7.35 shows the procedure for continuing transfer when it has been interrupted by an NMI interrupt on a channel designated for burst mode transfer. [1] [2] [1] No Check that DTE = 1 and DTME = 0 in DMABCRL. Write 1 to the DTME bit. Resumption of transfer on interrupted channel DTE = 1 DTME = 0 Yes Set DTME bit to 1 [2] Transfer continues Transfer ends Figure 7.35 Example of Procedure for Continuing Transfer on Channel Interrupted by NMI Interrupt Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 284 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.5.15 Forced Termination of DMAC Operation If the DTE bit in DMABCRL is cleared to 0 for the channel currently operating, the DMAC stops on completion of the 1-byte or 1-word transfer in progress. DMAC operation resumes when the DTE bit is set to 1 again. In full address mode, the same applies to the DTME bit in DMABCRL. Figure 7.36 shows the procedure for forcibly terminating DMAC operation by software. [1] Clear the DTE bit in DMABCRL to 0. To prevent interrupt generation after forced termination of DMAC operation, clear the DTIE bit to 0 at the same time. Forced termination of DMAC Clear DTE bit to 0 [1] Forced termination Figure 7.36 Example of Procedure for Forcibly Terminating DMAC Operation Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 285 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.5.16 Clearing Full Address Mode Figure 7.37 shows the procedure for releasing and initializing a channel designated for full address mode. After full address mode has been cleared, the channel can be set to another transfer mode using the appropriate setting procedure. [1] Clear both the DTE bit and DTME bit in DMABCRL to 0, or wait until the transfer ends and the DTE bit is cleared to 0, then clear the DTME bit to 0. Also clear the corresponding DTIE bit to 0 at the same time. [1] [2] Clear all bits in DMACRA and DMACRB to 0. [3] Clear the FAE bit in DMABCRH to 0. Clearing full address mode Stop the channel Initialize DMACR [2] Clear FAE bit to 0 [3] Initialization; operation halted Figure 7.37 Example of Procedure for Clearing Full Address Mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 286 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.6 Interrupt Sources The sources of interrupts generated by the DMAC are transfer end and transfer break. Table 7.12 shows the interrupt sources and their priority order. Table 7.12 Interrupt Sources and Priority Order Interrupt Name DMTEND0A DMTEND0B DMTEND1A DMTEND1B Interrupt Source Short Address Mode Interrupt due to end of transfer on channel 0A Interrupt due to end of transfer on channel 0B Interrupt due to end of transfer on channel 1A Interrupt due to end of transfer on channel 1B Full Address Mode Interrupt due to end of transfer on channel 0 Interrupt due to break in transfer on channel 0 Interrupt due to end of transfer on channel 1 Interrupt due to break in transfer on channel 1 Low Interrupt Priority Order High Enabling or disabling of each interrupt source is set by means of the DTIE bit in DMABCRL for the corresponding channel in DMABCRL, and interrupts from each source are sent to the interrupt controller independently. The priority of transfer end interrupts on each channel is decided by the interrupt controller, as shown in table 7.12. Figure 7.38 shows a block diagram of a transfer end/transfer break interrupt. An interrupt is always generated when the DTIE bit is set to 1 while the DTE bit in DMABCRL is cleared to 0. DTE/ DTME Transfer end/transfer break interrupt DTIE Figure 7.38 Block Diagram of Transfer End/Transfer Break Interrupt In full address mode, a transfer break interrupt is generated when the DTME bit is cleared to 0 while the DTIEB bit is set to 1. In both short address mode and full address mode, DMABCR should be set so as to prevent the occurrence of a combination that constitutes a condition for interrupt generation during setting. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 287 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) 7.7 7.7.1 Usage Notes DMAC Register Access during Operation Except for forced termination of the DMAC, the operating (including transfer waiting state) channel setting should not be changed. The operating channel setting should only be changed when transfer is disabled. Also, DMAC registers should not be written to in a DMA transfer. DMAC register reads during operation (including the transfer waiting state) are described below. * DMAC control starts one cycle before the bus cycle, with output of the internal address. Consequently, MAR is updated in the bus cycle before DMA transfer. Figure 7.39 shows an example of the update timing for DMAC registers in dual address transfer mode. DMA transfer cycle DMA last transfer cycle DMA dead DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA Internal address DMA control DMA register operation Idle Transfer source Read Transfer destination Write Idle Transfer source Read Transfer destination Write Dead Idle [1] [2] [1] [2'] [3] [1] Transfer source address register MAR operation (incremented/decremented/fixed) Transfer counter ETCR operation (decremented) Block size counter ETCR operation (decremented in block transfer mode) [2] Transfer destination address register MAR operation (incremented/decremented/fixed) [2']Transfer destination address register MAR operation (incremented/decremented/fixed) Block transfer counter ETCR operation (decremented, in last transfer cycle of a block in block transfer mode) [3] Transfer address register MAR restore operation (in block or repeat transfer mode) Transfer counter ETCR restore (in repeat transfer mode) Block size counter ETCR restore (in block transfer mode) Note: In single address transfer mode, the update timing is the same as [1]. The MAR operation is post-incrementing/decrementing of the DMA internal address value. Figure 7.39 DMAC Register Update Timing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 288 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) * If a DMAC transfer cycle occurs immediately after a DMAC register read cycle, the DMAC register is read as shown in figure 7.40. CPU longword read MAR upper word read MAR lower word read DMA transfer cycle DMA read DMA write DMA internal address DMA control DMA register operation Idle Transfe source Read Transfer destination Write Idle [1] [2] Note: The lower word of MAR is the updated value after the operation in [1]. Figure 7.40 Contention between DMAC Register Update and CPU Read 7.7.2 Module Stop When the MSTP13 bit in MSTPCRH is set to 1, the DMAC clock stops, and the module stop state is entered. However, 1 cannot be written to the MSTP13 bit if any of the DMAC channels is enabled. This setting should therefore be made when DMAC operation is stopped. When the DMAC clock stops, DMAC register accesses can no longer be made. Since the following DMAC register settings are valid even in the module stop state, they should be invalidated, if necessary, before a module stop. * Transfer end/break interrupt (DTE = 0 and DTIE = 1) * TEND pin enable (TEE = 1) * DACK pin enable (FAE = 0 and SAE = 1) 7.7.3 Write Data Buffer Function When the WDBE bit of BCR in the bus controller is set to 1, enabling the write data buffer function, external write cycles in dual address transfers or single address transfers are executed in parallel with internal accesses (on-chip memory or internal I/O registers). Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 289 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) * Write data buffer function and DMAC register setting If the setting of a register that controls external accesses is changed during execution of an external access by means of the write data buffer function, the external access may not be performed normally. Registers that control external accesses should only be manipulated when external reads, etc., are used with DMAC operation disabled, and the operation is not performed in parallel with external access. * Write data buffer function and DMAC operation timing The DMAC can start its next operation during external access using the write data buffer function. Consequently, the DREQ pin sampling timing, TEND output timing, etc., are different from the case in which the write data buffer function is disabled. Also, internal bus cycles maybe hidden, and not visible. 7.7.4 TEND Output If the last transfer cycle is for an internal address, note that even if low-level output at the TEND pin has been set, a low level may not be output at the TEND pin under the following external bus conditions since the last transfer cycle (internal bus cycle) and the external bus cycle are executed in parallel. 1. 2. 3. 4. Write cycle with write buffer mode enabled DMAC single address cycle for a different channel with write buffer mode enabled Bus release cycle CBR refresh cycle Figure 7.41 shows an example in which a low level is not output from the TEND pin in case 2 above. If the last transfer cycle is an external address cycle, a low level is output at the TEND pin in synchronization with the bus cycle. However, if the last transfer cycle and a CBR refresh occur simultaneously, note that although the CBR refresh and the last transfer cycle may be executed consecutively, TEND may also go low in this case for the refresh cycle. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 290 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) DMA read Internal address Internal read signal Internal write signal External address HWR, LWR TEND Not output External write by CPU, etc. DMA write Figure 7.41 Example in which Low Level is Not Output at TEND Pin 7.7.5 Activation by Falling Edge on DREQ Pin DREQ pin falling edge detection is performed in synchronization with DMAC internal operations. The operation is as follows: [1] Activation request wait state: Waits for detection of a low level on the DREQ pin, and switches to [2]. [2] Transfer wait state: Waits for DMAC data transfer to become possible, and switches to [3]. [3] Activation request disabled state: Waits for detection of a high level on the DREQ pin, and switches to [1]. After DMAC transfer is enabled, a transition is made to [1]. Thus, initial activation after transfer is enabled is performed on detection of a low level. 7.7.6 Activation Source Acceptance At the start of activation source acceptance, a low level is detected in both DREQ pin falling edge sensing and low level sensing. Similarly, in the case of an internal interrupt, the interrupt request is detected. Therefore, a request is accepted from an internal interrupt or DREQ pin low level that occurs before write to DMABCRL to enable transfer. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 291 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC) When the DMAC is activated, take any necessary steps to prevent an internal interrupt or DREQ pin low level remaining from the end of the previous transfer, etc. 7.7.7 Internal Interrupt after End of Transfer When the DTE bit in DMABCRL is cleared to 0 at the end of a transfer or by a forcible termination, the selected internal interrupt request will be sent to the CPU or DTC even if the DTA bit in DMABCRH is set to 1. Also, if internal DMAC activation has already been initiated when operation is forcibly terminated, the transfer is executed but flag clearing is not performed for the selected internal interrupt even if the DTA bit is set to 1. An internal interrupt request following the end of transfer or a forcible termination should be handled by the CPU as necessary. 7.7.8 Channel Re-Setting To reactivate a number of channels when multiple channels are enabled, use exclusive handling of transfer end interrupts, and perform DMABCR control bit operations exclusively. Note, in particular, that in cases where multiple interrupts are generated between reading and writing of DMABCR, and a DMABCR operation is performed during new interrupt handling, the DMABCR write data in the original interrupt handling routine will be incorrect, and the write may invalidate the results of the operations by the multiple interrupts. Ensure that overlapping DMABCR operations are not performed by multiple interrupts, and that there is no separation between read and write operations by the use of a bit-manipulation instruction. Also, when the DTE and DTME bits are cleared by the DMAC or are written with 0, they must first be read while cleared to 0 before the CPU can write 1 to them. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 292 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) This LSI includes a data transfer controller (DTC). The DTC can be activated by an interrupt or software, to transfer data. Figure 8.1 shows a block diagram of the DTC. 8.1 Features * Transfer possible over any number of channels * Three transfer modes Normal mode One operation transfers one byte or one word of data. Memory address is incremented or decremented by 1 or 2. From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Repeat mode One operation transfers one byte or one word of data. Memory address is incremented or decremented by 1 or 2. Once the specified number of transfers (1 to 256) has ended, the initial state is restored, and transfer is repeated. Block transfer mode One operation transfers one block of data. The block size is 1 to 256 bytes or words. From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Either the transfer source or the transfer destination is designated as a block area. * One activation source can trigger a number of data transfers (chain transfer) * Direct specification of 16-Mbyte address space possible * Activation by software is possible * Transfer can be set in byte or word units * A CPU interrupt can be requested for the interrupt that activated the DTC * Module stop mode can be set The DTC's register information is stored in the on-chip RAM. When the DTC is used, the RAME bit in SYSCR must be set to 1. A 32-bit bus connects the DTC to the on-chip RAM (1 kbyte), enabling 32-bit/1-state reading and writing of the DTC register information. DTCH803A_000020020100 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 293 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Internal address bus Interrupt controller DTC On-chip RAM CPU interrupt request Legend: DTC activation request MRA, MRB: CRA, CRB: SAR: DAR: DTCERA to DTCERG: DTVECR: DTC mode registers A and B DTC transfer count registers A and B DTC source address register DTC destination address register DTC enable registers A to G DTC vector register Figure 8.1 Block Diagram of DTC Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 294 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 MRA MRB CRA CRB DAR SAR Interrupt request Internal data bus Register information Control logic DTCERA to DTCERG DTVECR Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.2 Register Descriptions DTC has the following registers. * * * * * * DTC mode register A (MRA) DTC mode register B (MRB) DTC source address register (SAR) DTC destination address register (DAR) DTC transfer count register A (CRA) DTC transfer count register B (CRB) These six registers cannot be directly accessed from the CPU. When activated, the DTC reads a set of register information that is stored in an on-chip RAM to the corresponding DTC registers and transfers data. After the data transfer, it writes a set of updated register information back to the RAM. * DTC enable registers A to G (DTCERA to DTCERG) * DTC vector register (DTVECR) 8.2.1 DTC Mode Register A (MRA) MRA selects the DTC operating mode. Bit 7 6 Bit Name SM1 SM0 Initial Value Undefined Undefined R/W Description Source Address Mode 1 and 0 These bits specify an SAR operation after a data transfer. 0x: SAR is fixed 10: SAR is incremented after a transfer (by +1 when Sz = 0; by +2 when Sz = 1) 11: SAR is decremented after a transfer (by -1 when Sz = 0; by -2 when Sz = 1) 5 4 DM1 DM0 Undefined Undefined - - - - Destination Address Mode 1 and 0 These bits specify a DAR operation after a data transfer. 0x: DAR is fixed 10: DAR is incremented after a transfer (by +1 when Sz = 0; by +2 when Sz = 1) 11: DAR is decremented after a transfer (by -1 when Sz = 0; by -2 when Sz = 1) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 295 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Bit 3 2 Bit Name MD1 MD0 Initial Value Undefined Undefined R/W Description DTC Mode These bits specify the DTC transfer mode. 00: Normal mode 01: Repeat mode 10: Block transfer mode 11: Setting prohibited 1 DTS Undefined - - - DTC Transfer Mode Select Specifies whether the source side or the destination side is set to be a repeat area or block area, in repeat mode or block transfer mode. 0: Destination side is repeat area or block area 1: Source side is repeat area or block area 0 Sz Undefined - DTC Data Transfer Size Specifies the size of data to be transferred. 0: Byte-size transfer 1: Word-size transfer Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 296 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.2.2 DTC Mode Register B (MRB) MRB selects the DTC operating mode. Bit 7 Bit Name CHNE Initial Value Undefined R/W Description DTC Chain Transfer Enable When this bit is set to 1, a chain transfer will be performed. For details, refer to section 8.5.4, Chain Transfer. In data transfer with CHNE set to 1, determination of the end of the specified number of transfers, clearing of the activation source flag, and clearing of DTCER is not performed. 6 DISEL Undefined - - DTC Interrupt Select When this bit is set to 1, a CPU interrupt request is generated every time after a data transfer ends. When this bit is set to 0, a CPU interrupt request is generated at the time when the specified number of data transfer ends. 5 CHNS Undefined - DTC Chain Transfer Select Specifies the chain transfer condition. 0: Chain transfer every time 1: Chain transfer only when transfer counter = 0 4 to 0 - Undefined - Reserved These bits have no effect on DTC operation, and should always be written with 0. 8.2.3 DTC Source Address Register (SAR) SAR is a 24-bit register that designates the source address of data to be transferred by the DTC. For word-size transfer, specify an even source address. 8.2.4 DTC Destination Address Register (DAR) DAR is a 24-bit register that designates the destination address of data to be transferred by the DTC. For word-size transfer, specify an even destination address. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 297 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.2.5 DTC Transfer Count Register A (CRA) CRA is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC. In normal mode, the entire CRA functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65,536). It is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000. In repeat mode or block transfer mode, the CRA is divided into two parts: the upper 8 bits (CRAH) and the lower 8 bits (CRAL). CRAH holds the number of transfers while CRAL functions as an 8-bit transfer counter (1 to 256). CRAL is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and the contents of CRAH are sent when the count reaches H'00. 8.2.6 DTC Transfer Count Register B (CRB) CRB is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC in block transfer mode. It functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65,536) that is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000. This register is not used in normal mode or repeat mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 298 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.2.7 DTC Enable Registers A to G (DTCERA to DTCERG) DTCER which is comprised of seven registers, DTCERA to DTCERG, is a register that specifies DTC activation interrupt sources. The correspondence between interrupt sources and DTCE bits is shown in table 8.2. For DTCE bit setting, use bit manipulation instructions such as BSET and BCLR for reading and writing. If all interrupts are masked, multiple activation sources can be set at one time (only at the initial setting) by writing data after executing a dummy read on the relevant register. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name DTCE7 DTCE6 DTCE5 DTCE4 DTCE3 DTCE2 DTCE1 DTCE0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description DTC Activation Enable Setting this bit to 1 specifies a relevant interrupt source to a DTC activation source. [Clearing conditions] * * When the DISEL bit is 1 and the data transfer has ended When the specified number of transfers have ended These bits are not automatically cleared when the DISEL bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended * When 0 is written to the DTCE bit after reading DTCE = 1 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 299 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.2.8 DTC Vector Register (DTVECR) DTVECR enables or disables DTC activation by software, and sets a vector number for the software activation interrupt. Bit 7 Bit Name SWDTE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description DTC Software Activation Enable Setting this bit to 1 activates DTC. Only 1 can be written to this bit. [Clearing conditions] * * When the DISEL bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended When 0 is written to the DISEL bit after a software-activated data transfer end interrupt (SWDTEND) request has been sent to the CPU. When the DISEL bit is 1 and data transfer has ended or when the specified number of transfers have ended, this bit will not be cleared. 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DTVEC6 DTVEC5 DTVEC4 DTVEC3 DTVEC2 DTVEC1 DTVEC0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W DTC Software Activation Vectors 6 to 0 These bits specify a vector number for DTC software activation. The vector address is expressed as H'0400 + (vector number x 2). For example, when DTVEC6 to DTVEC0 = H'10, the vector address is H'0420. When the bit SWDTE is 0, these bits can be written. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 300 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.3 Activation Sources The DTC operates when activated by an interrupt or by a write to DTVECR by software. An interrupt request can be directed to the CPU or DTC, as designated by the corresponding DTCER bit. At the end of a data transfer (or the last consecutive transfer in the case of chain transfer), the activation source or corresponding DTCER bit is cleared. The activation source flag, in the case of RXI0, for example, is the RDRF flag of SCI_0. When an interrupt has been designated a DTC activation source, existing CPU mask level and interrupt controller priorities have no effect. If there is more than one activation source at the same time, the DTC operates in accordance with the default priorities. Table 8.1 shows the relationship between the activation sources and DTCER clearing, and figure 8.2 shows a block diagram of activation source control. For details see section 5, Interrupt Controller. Table 8.1 Relationship between Activation Sources and DTCER Clearing DISEL = 0 and Specified Number of Transfers Has Not Ended SWDTE bit is cleared to 0 * * DISEL = 1 or Specified Number of Transfers Has Ended * * Activation by an interrupt Corresponding DTCER bit remains set to 1. Activation source flag is cleared to 0. * * * SWDTE bit remains set to 1 Interrupt request to CPU Corresponding DTCER bit is cleared to 0. Activation source flag remains set to 1. Interrupt that became the activation source is requested to the CPU. Activation Source Activation by software Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 301 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Source flag cleared Clear controller Clear DTCER Select Clear request IRQ interrupt Interrupt request Selection circuit On-chip supporting module DTC DTVECR Interrupt controller Interrupt mask CPU Figure 8.2 Block Diagram of DTC Activation Source Control 8.4 Location of Register Information and DTC Vector Table Locate the register information in the on-chip RAM (addresses: H'FFBC00 to H'FFBFFF). Register information should be located at the address that is multiple of four within the range. Locating the register information in address space is shown in figure 8.3. Locate the MRA, SAR, MRB, DAR, CRA, and CRB registers, in that order, from the start address of the register information. In the case of chain transfer, register information should be located in consecutive areas as shown in figure 8.3 and the register information start address should be located at the corresponding vector address to the activation source. Figure 8.4 shows the correspondence between the DTC vector address and register information. The DTC reads the start address of the register information from the vector address set for each activation source, and then reads the register information from that start address. When the DTC is activated by software, the vector address is obtained from: H'0400 + (DTVECR[6:0] x 2). For example, if DTVECR is H'10, the vector address is H'0420. The configuration of the vector address is the same in both normal* and advanced modes, a 2-byte unit being used in both cases. These two bytes specify the lower bits of the register information start address. Note: * Not available in this LSI. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 302 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Lower addresses 0 Start address of register information MRA MRB CRA Chain transfer MRA MRB CRA Four bytes SAR DAR CRB Register information for second transfer in case of chain transfer 1 2 SAR DAR CRB Register information 3 Figure 8.3 Correspondence between DTC Vector Address and Register Information DTC vector address Register information start address Register information Chain transfer Figure 8.4 Correspondence between DTC Vector Address and Register Information Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 303 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Table 8.2 Origin of Activation Source Software External pin Interrupt Sources, DTC Vector Addresses, and Corresponding DTCEs Activation Source Write to DTVECR IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6 IRQ7 DTC Vector Number Vector Address DTVECR 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 38 40 41 42 43 48 49 52 53 56 57 58 59 64 65 68 69 DTCE* Priority High H'0400 + (DTVECR -- [6:0] x 2) H'0420 H'0422 H'0424 H'0426 H'0428 H'042A H'042C H'042E H'044C H'0450 H'0452 H'0454 H'0456 H'0460 H'0462 H'0468 H'046A H'0470 H'0472 H'0474 H'0476 H'0480 H'0482 H'0488 H'048A DTCEA7 DTCEA6 DTCEA5 DTCEA4 DTCEA3 DTCEA2 DTCEA1 DTCEA0 DTCEC6 DTCEC5 DTCEC4 DTCEC3 DTCEC2 DTCEC1 DTCEC0 DTCED7 DTCED6 DTCED5 DTCED4 DTCED3 DTCED2 DTCED1 DTCED0 DTCEE7 DTCEE6 A/D TPU_0 ADI TGI0A TGI0B TGI0C TGI0D TPU_1 TGI1A TGI1B TPU_2 TGI2A TGI2B TPU_3 TGI3A TGI3B TGI3C TGI3D TPU_4 TGI4A TGI4B TPU_5 TGI5A TGI5B Low Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 304 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Origin of Activation Source TMR_0 Activation Source CMIA0 CMIB0 DTC Vector Number Vector Address 72 73 76 77 80 81 82 83 89 90 93 94 97 98 101 102 105 106 H'0490 H'0492 H'0498 H'049A H'04A0 H'04A2 H'04A4 H'04A6 H'04B2 H'04B4 H'04BA H'04BC H'04C2 H'04C4 H'04CA H'04CC H'04D2 H'04D4 DTCE* DTCEE3 DTCEE2 DTCEE1 DTCEE0 DTCEF7 DTCEF6 DTCEF5 DTCEF4 DTCEF3 DTCEF2 DTCEF1 DTCEF0 DTCEG7 DTCEG6 DTCEF5 DTCEF4 DTCEG3 DTCEG2 Priority High TMR_1 CMIA1 CMIB1 DMAC DMTEND0A DMTEND0B DMTEND1A DMTEND1B SCI_0 RXI0 TXI0 SCI_1 RXI1 TXI1 SCI_2 RXI2 TXI2 SCI_3 RXI3 TXI3 SCI_4 Note: * RXI4 TXI4 Low DTCE bits with no corresponding interrupt are reserved, and should be written with 0. When clearing the software standby state or all-module-clocks-stop mode with an interrupt, write 0 to the corresponding DTCE bit. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 305 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.5 Operation The DTC stores register information in the on-chip RAM. When activated, the DTC reads register information that is already stored in the on-chip RAM and transfers data on the basis of that register information. After the data transfer, it writes updated register information back to the onchip RAM. Pre-storage of register information in the on-chip RAM makes it possible to transfer data over any required number of channels. There are three transfer modes: normal mode, repeat mode, and block transfer mode. Setting the CHNE bit to 1 makes it possible to perform a number of transfers with a single activation (chain transfer). A setting can also be made to have chain transfer performed only when the transfer counter value is 0. This enables DTC re-setting to be performed by the DTC itself. The 24-bit SAR designates the DTC transfer source address and the 24-bit DAR designates the transfer destination address. After each transfer, SAR and DAR are independently incremented, decremented, or left fixed. Figure 8.5 shows a flowchart of DTC operation, and table 8.3 summarizes the chain transfer conditions (combinations for performing the second and third transfers are omitted). Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 306 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Start Read DTC vector Next transfer Read register information Data transfer Write register information CHNE = 1? No Yes CHNS = 0? Yes Transfer counter = 0 or DISEL = 1? No No Yes Transfer counter = 0? No DISEL = 1? Yes No Yes Clear activation flag Clear DTCER End Interrupt exception handling Figure 8.5 Flowchart of DTC Operation Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 307 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Table 8.3 Chain Transfer Conditions 1st Transfer 2nd Transfer CR Not 0 0 -- -- CHNE -- -- -- 0 0 0 CHNS -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- DISEL -- -- -- 0 0 1 -- 0 0 1 -- CR -- -- -- Not 0 0 -- -- Not 0 0 -- -- DTC Transfer Ends at 1st transfer Ends at 1st transfer Interrupt request to CPU Ends at 2nd transfer Ends at 2nd transfer Interrupt request to CPU Ends at 1st transfer Ends at 2nd transfer Ends at 2nd transfer Interrupt request to CPU Ends at 1st transfer Interrupt request to CPU CHNE 0 0 0 1 CHNS -- -- -- 0 DISEL 0 0 1 -- 1 1 1 1 0 -- Not 0 0 -- 0 0 0 1 1 1 Not 0 -- 8.5.1 Normal Mode In normal mode, one operation transfers one byte or one word of data. Table 8.4 lists the register function in normal mode. From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers has ended, a CPU interrupt can be requested. Table 8.4 Name DTC source address register DTC destination address register DTC transfer count register A DTC transfer count register B Register Function in Normal Mode Abbreviation SAR DAR CRA CRB Function Designates source address Designates destination address Designates transfer count Not used Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 308 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) SAR Transfer DAR Figure 8.6 Memory Mapping in Normal Mode 8.5.2 Repeat Mode In repeat mode, one operation transfers one byte or one word of data. Table 8.5 lists the register function in repeat mode. From 1 to 256 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers has ended, the initial state of the transfer counter and the address register specified as the repeat area is restored, and transfer is repeated. In repeat mode the transfer counter value does not reach H'00, and therefore CPU interrupts cannot be requested when DISEL = 0. Table 8.5 Name DTC source address register DTC destination address register DTC transfer count register AH DTC transfer count register AL DTC transfer count register B Register Function in Repeat Mode Abbreviation SAR DAR CRAH CRAL CRB Function Designates source address Designates destination address Holds number of transfers Designates transfer count Not used Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 309 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) SAR or DAR Repeat area Transfer DAR or SAR Figure 8.7 Memory Mapping in Repeat Mode 8.5.3 Block Transfer Mode In block transfer mode, one operation transfers one block of data. Either the transfer source or the transfer destination is designated as a block area. Table 8.6 lists the register function in block transfer mode. The block size is 1 to 256. When the transfer of one block ends, the initial state of the block size counter and the address register specified as the block area is restored. The other address register is then incremented, decremented, or left fixed. From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers has ended, a CPU interrupt is requested. Table 8.6 Name DTC source address register DTC destination address register DTC transfer count register AH DTC transfer count register AL DTC transfer count register B Register Function in Block Transfer Mode Abbreviation SAR DAR CRAH CRAL CRB Function Designates source address Designates destination address Holds block size Designates block size count Designates transfer count Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 310 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) First block SAR or DAR Block area Transfer DAR or SAR Nth block Figure 8.8 Memory Mapping in Block Transfer Mode 8.5.4 Chain Transfer Setting the CHNE bit to 1 enables a number of data transfers to be performed consecutively in response to a single transfer request. SAR, DAR, CRA, CRB, MRA, and MRB, which define data transfers, can be set independently. Figure 8.9 shows the operation of chain transfer. When activated, the DTC reads the register information start address stored at the vector address, and then reads the first register information at that start address. The CHNE bit in MRB is checked after the end of data transfer, if the value is 1, the next register information, which is located consecutively, is read and transfer is performed. This operation is repeated until the end of data transfer of register information with CHNE = 0. It is also possible, by setting both the CHNE bit and CHNS bit to 1, to specify execution of chain transfer only when the transfer counter value is 0. In the case of transfer with CHNE set to 1, an interrupt request to the CPU is not generated at the end of the specified number of transfers or by setting of the DISEL bit to 1, and the interrupt source flag for the activation source is not affected. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 311 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Source Destination Register information CHNE=1 DTC vector address Register information start address Register information CHNE=0 Source Destination Figure 8.9 Operation of Chain Transfer 8.5.5 Interrupts An interrupt request is issued to the CPU when the DTC finishes the specified number of data transfers, or a data transfer for which the DISEL bit was set to 1. In the case of interrupt activation, the interrupt set as the activation source is generated. These interrupts to the CPU are subject to CPU mask level and interrupt controller priority level control. In the case of activation by software, a software activated data transfer end interrupt (SWDTEND) is generated. When the DISEL bit is 1 and one data transfer has ended, or the specified number of transfers has ended, after data transfer ends, the SWDTE bit is held at 1 and an SWDTEND interrupt is generated. The interrupt handling routine should clear the SWDTE bit to 0. When the DTC is activated by software, an SWDTEND interrupt is not generated during a data transfer wait or during data transfer even if the SWDTE bit is set to 1. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 312 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.5.6 Operation Timing DTC activation request DTC request Data transfer Read Write Vector read Address Transfer information read Transfer information write Figure 8.10 DTC Operation Timing (Example in Normal Mode or Repeat Mode) DTC activation request DTC request Vector read Address Data transfer Read Write Read Write Transfer information read Transfer information write Figure 8.11 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Block Transfer Mode, with Block Size of 2) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 313 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) DTC activation request DTC request Vector read Address Read Write Read Write Data transfer Data transfer Transfer information read Transfer information write Transfer information read Transfer information write Figure 8.12 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Chain Transfer) 8.5.7 Number of DTC Execution States Table 8.7 lists execution status for a single DTC data transfer, and table 8.7 shows the number of states required for each execution status. Table 8.7 DTC Execution Status Vector Read I 1 1 1 Register Information Read/Write Data Read J K 6 6 6 1 1 N Data Write L 1 1 N Internal Operations M 3 3 3 Mode Normal Repeat Block transfer Legend: N: Block size (initial setting of CRAH and CRAL) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 314 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Table 8.8 Number of States Required for Each Execution Status OnChip RAM 32 1 -- 1 1 1 1 1 1 OnChip On-Chip I/O ROM Registers 16 1 1 -- 1 1 1 1 8 2 -- -- 2 4 2 4 16 2 -- -- 2 2 2 2 Object to be Accessed Bus width Access states Execution status Vector read SI Register information read/write SJ Byte data read SK Word data read SK Byte data write SL Word data write SL Internal operation SM External Devices 8 2 4 -- 2 4 2 4 3 16 2 3 3+m -- 3+m 3+m 3+m 3+m 6+2m 2 -- 3+m -- 2 6+2m 2 3+m 2 6+2m 2 The number of execution states is calculated from the formula below. Note that means the sum of all transfers activated by one activation event (the number in which the CHNE bit is set to 1, plus 1). Number of execution states = I * SI + (J * SJ + K * SK + L * SL) + M * SM For example, when the DTC vector address table is located in on-chip ROM, normal mode is set, and data is transferred from the on-chip ROM to an internal I/O register, the time required for the DTC operation is 13 states. The time from activation to the end of the data write is 10 states. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 315 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.6 8.6.1 Procedures for Using DTC Activation by Interrupt The procedure for using the DTC with interrupt activation is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Set the MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB register information in the on-chip RAM. Set the start address of the register information in the DTC vector address. Set the corresponding bit in DTCER to 1. Set the enable bits for the interrupt sources to be used as the activation sources to 1. The DTC is activated when an interrupt used as an activation source is generated. 5. After the end of one data transfer, or after the specified number of data transfers have ended, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0 and a CPU interrupt is requested. If the DTC is to continue transferring data, set the DTCE bit to 1. Activation by Software 8.6.2 The procedure for using the DTC with software activation is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Set the MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB register information in the on-chip RAM. Set the start address of the register information in the DTC vector address. Check that the SWDTE bit is 0. Write 1 to SWDTE bit and the vector number to DTVECR. Check the vector number written to DTVECR. After the end of one data transfer, if the DISEL bit is 0 and a CPU interrupt is not requested, the SWDTE bit is cleared to 0. If the DTC is to continue transferring data, set the SWDTE bit to 1. When the DISEL bit is 1, or after the specified number of data transfers have ended, the SWDTE bit is held at 1 and a CPU interrupt is requested. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 316 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.7 8.7.1 Examples of Use of the DTC Normal Mode An example is shown in which the DTC is used to receive 128 bytes of data via the SCI. 1. Set MRA to fixed source address (SM1 = SM0 = 0), incrementing destination address (DM1 = 1, DM0 = 0), normal mode (MD1 = MD0 = 0), and byte size (Sz = 0). The DTS bit can have any value. Set MRB for one data transfer by one interrupt (CHNE = 0, DISEL = 0). Set the SCI RDR address in SAR, the start address of the RAM area where the data will be received in DAR, and 128 (H'0080) in CRA. CRB can be set to any value. 2. Set the start address of the register information at the DTC vector address. 3. Set the corresponding bit in DTCER to 1. 4. Set the SCI to the appropriate receive mode. Set the RIE bit in SCR to 1 to enable the reception complete (RXI) interrupt. Since the generation of a receive error during the SCI reception operation will disable subsequent reception, the CPU should be enabled to accept receive error interrupts. 5. Each time reception of one byte of data ends on the SCI, the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt is generated, and the DTC is activated. The receive data is transferred from RDR to RAM by the DTC. DAR is incremented and CRA is decremented. The RDRF flag is automatically cleared to 0. 6. When CRA becomes 0 after the 128 data transfers have ended, the RDRF flag is held at 1, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0, and an RXI interrupt request is sent to the CPU. The interrupt handling routine should perform wrap-up processing. 8.7.2 Chain Transfer An example of DTC chain transfer is shown in which pulse output is performed using the PPG. Chain transfer can be used to perform pulse output data transfer and PPG output trigger cycle updating. Repeat mode transfer to the PPG's NDR is performed in the first half of the chain transfer, and normal mode transfer to the TPU's TGR in the second half. This is because clearing of the activation source and interrupt generation at the end of the specified number of transfers are restricted to the second half of the chain transfer (transfer when CHNE = 0). 1. Perform settings for transfer to the PPG's NDR. Set MRA to source address incrementing (SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), fixed destination address (DM1 = DM0 = 0), repeat mode (MD1 = 0, MD0 = 1), and word size (Sz = 1). Set the source side as a repeat area (DTS = 1). Set MRB to chain mode (CHNE = 1, DISEL = 0). Set the data table start address in SAR, the NDRH address in DAR, and the data table size in CRAH and CRAL. CRB can be set to any value. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 317 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 2. Perform settings for transfer to the TPU's TGR. Set MRA to source address incrementing (SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), fixed destination address (DM1 = DM0 = 0), normal mode (MD1 = MD0 = 0), and word size (Sz = 1). Set the data table start address in SAR, the TGRA address in DAR, and the data table size in CRA. CRB can be set to any value. 3. Locate the TPU transfer register information consecutively after the NDR transfer register information. 4. Set the start address of the NDR transfer register information to the DTC vector address. 5. Set the bit corresponding to TGIA in DTCER to 1. 6. Set TGRA as an output compare register (output disabled) with TIOR, and enable the TGIA interrupt with TIER. 7. Set the initial output value in PODR, and the next output value in NDR. Set bits in DDR and NDER for which output is to be performed to 1. Using PCR, select the TPU compare match to be used as the output trigger. 8. Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1, and start the TCNT count operation. 9. Each time a TGRA compare match occurs, the next output value is transferred to NDR and the set value of the next output trigger period is transferred to TGRA. The activation source TGFA flag is cleared. 10. When the specified number of transfers are completed (the TPU transfer CRA value is 0), the TGFA flag is held at 1, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0, and a TGIA interrupt request is sent to the CPU. Termination processing should be performed in the interrupt handling routine. 8.7.3 Chain Transfer when Counter = 0 By executing a second data transfer, and performing re-setting of the first data transfer, only when the counter value is 0, it is possible to perform 256 or more repeat transfers. An example is shown in which a 128-kbyte input buffer is configured. The input buffer is assumed to have been set to start at lower address H'0000. Figure 8.13 shows the chain transfer when the counter value is 0. 1. For the first transfer, set the normal mode for input data. Set fixed transfer source address (G/A, etc.), CRA = H'0000 (65,536 times), and CHNE = 1, CHNS = 1, and DISEL = 0. 2. Prepare the upper 8-bit addresses of the start addresses for each of the 65,536 transfer start addresses for the first data transfer in a separate area (in ROM, etc.). For example, if the input buffer comprises H'200000 to H'21FFFF, prepare H'21 and H'20. 3. For the second transfer, set repeat mode (with the source side as the repeat area) for re-setting the transfer destination address for the first data transfer. Use the upper 8 bits of DAR in the first register information area as the transfer destination. Set CHNE = DISEL = 0. If the above input buffer is specified as H'200000 to H'21FFFF, set the transfer counter to 2. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 318 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 4. Execute the first data transfer 65,536 times by means of interrupts. When the transfer counter for the first data transfer reaches 0, the second data transfer is started. Set the upper 8 bits of the transfer source address for the first data transfer to H'21. The lower 16 bits of the transfer destination address of the first data transfer and the transfer counter are H'0000. 5. Next, execute the first data transfer the 65,536 times specified for the first data transfer by means of interrupts. When the transfer counter for the first data transfer reaches 0, the second data transfer is started. Set the upper 8 bits of the transfer source address for the first data transfer to H'20. The lower 16 bits of the transfer destination address of the first data transfer and the transfer counter are H'0000. 6. Steps 4 and 5 are repeated endlessly. As repeat mode is specified for the second data transfer, an interrupt request is not sent to the CPU. Input circuit Input buffer First data transfer register information Chain transfer (counter = 0) Second data transfer register information Upper 8 bits of DAR Figure 8.13 Chain Transfer when Counter = 0 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 319 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.7.4 Software Activation An example is shown in which the DTC is used to transfer a block of 128 bytes of data by means of software activation. The transfer source address is H'1000 and the destination address is H'2000. The vector number is H'60, so the vector address is H'04C0. 1. Set MRA to incrementing source address (SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), incrementing destination address (DM1 = 1, DM0 = 0), block transfer mode (MD1 = 1, MD0 = 0), and byte size (Sz = 0). The DTS bit can have any value. Set MRB for one block transfer by one interrupt (CHNE = 0). Set the transfer source address (H'1000) in SAR, the destination address (H'2000) in DAR, and 128 (H'8080) in CRA. Set 1 (H'0001) in CRB. 2. Set the start address of the register information at the DTC vector address (H'04C0). 3. Check that the SWDTE bit in DTVECR is 0. Check that there is currently no transfer activated by software. 4. Write 1 to the SWDTE bit and the vector number (H'60) to DTVECR. The write data is H'E0. 5. Read DTVECR again and check that it is set to the vector number (H'60). If it is not, this indicates that the write failed. This is presumably because an interrupt occurred between steps 3 and 4 and led to a different software activation. To activate this transfer, go back to step 3. 6. If the write was successful, the DTC is activated and a block of 128 bytes of data is transferred. 7. After the transfer, an SWDTEND interrupt occurs. The interrupt handling routine should clear the SWDTE bit to 0 and perform other wrap-up processing. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 320 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) 8.8 8.8.1 Usage Notes Module Stop Mode Setting DTC operation can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting is for DTC operation to be enabled. Register access is disabled by setting module stop mode. Module stop mode cannot be set while the DTC is activated. For details, refer to section 23, Power-Down Modes. 8.8.2 On-Chip RAM The MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB registers are all located in on-chip RAM. When the DTC is used, the RAME bit in SYSCR must not be cleared to 0. 8.8.3 DTCE Bit Setting For DTCE bit setting, use bit manipulation instructions such as BSET and BCLR. If all interrupts are disabled, multiple activation sources can be set at one time (only at the initial setting) by writing data after executing a dummy read on the relevant register. 8.8.4 DMAC Transfer End Interrupt When DTC transfer is activated by a DMAC transfer end interrupt, regardless of the transfer counter and DISEL bit, the DMAC's DTE bit is not subject to DTC control, and the write data has priority. Consequently, an interrupt request may not be sent to the CPU when the DTC transfer counter reaches 0. 8.8.5 Chain Transfer When chain transfer is used, clearing of the activation source or DTCER is performed when the last of the chain of data transfers is executed. SCI and A/D converter interrupt/activation sources, on the other hand, are cleared when the DTC reads or writes to the prescribed register. Therefore, when the DTC is activated by an interrupt or activation source, if a read/write of the relevant register is not included in the last chained data transfer, the interrupt or activation source will be retained. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 321 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 322 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports Section 9 I/O Ports Table 9.1 summarizes the port functions. The pins of each port also have other functions such as input/output or external interrupt input pins of on-chip peripheral modules. Each I/O port includes a data direction register (DDR) that controls input/output, a data register (DR) that stores output data, and a port register (PORT) used to read the pin states. The input-only ports do not have a DR or DDR register. Ports A to E have a built-in pull-up MOS function and a pull-up MOS control register (PCR) to control the on/off state of MOS input pull-up. Ports 3 and A include an open-drain control register (ODR) that controls the on/off state of the output buffer PMOS. Ports 1 to 3, 5 (P50 to P53), and 8 (P81, P83, P85)can drive a single TTL load and 30 pF capacitive load. Ports A to G can drive a single TTL load and 50 pF capacitive load. All of the I/O ports can drive a Darlington transistor when outputting data. Ports 1 and 2 are Schmitt-triggered inputs. Ports 4, 5, and A (PA4, PA5, PA6, PA7) are Schmitttriggered inputs when used as IRQ inputs. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 323 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports Table 9.1 Port Functions Mode 7 Input/ Output Type Schmitttriggered input Port Description Mode 1* Mode 2* Mode 4 EXPE = 1 EXPE = 0 Port 1 General I/O port also functioning as PPG outputs, TPU I/Os, and DMAC I/Os P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD P16/PO14/TIOCA2 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC/DACK1 P14/PO12/TIOCA1/DACK0 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/TEND1 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/TEND0 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DREQ1 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DREQ0 Port 2 General I/O port also functioning as PPG outputs, TPU I/Os, and TMR I/Os P27/PO7/TIOCB5 P26/PO6/TIOCA5 P25/PO5/TIOCB4/TMO1 P24/PO4/TIOCA4/RxD4/TMO0 P23/PO3/TIOCD3/TxD4/TMCI1 P22/PO2/TIOCC3/TMCI0 P21/PO1/TIOCB3/TMRI1 P20/PO0/TIOCA3/TMIR0 Schmitttriggered input Port 3 General I/O port also functioning 2 as SCI I/Os, I C I/Os, and bus control I/Os P35/SCK1/SCL0/(OE) P34/SCK0/SCK4/SDA0 P33/RxD1/SCL1 P32/RxD0/IrRxD/SDA1 P31/TxD1 P30/TxD0/IrTxD P35/SCK1/ SCL0(OE) P35/SCK1/ SCL0 Opendrain output capability Port 4 General I/O port also functioning as A/D converter analog inputs and D/A converter analog outputs P47/AN7/(IRQ7) P46/AN6/(IRQ6) P45/AN5/(IRQ5) P44/AN4/(IRQ4) P43/AN3/(IRQ3) P42/AN2/(IRQ2) P41/AN1/(IRQ1) P40/AN0/(IRQ0) Schmitttriggered input when used as IRQ input Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 324 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports Mode 7 Port Description Mode 1* Mode 2* Mode 4 EXPE = 1 EXPE = 0 Input/ Output Type Schmitttriggered input when used as IRQ input Port 5 General I/O port also functioning as interrupt inputs, A/D converter inputs, and SCI I/Os Port 8 General I/O port also functioning as SCI I/Os P53/ADTRG/IRQ3 P52/SCK2/IRQ2 P51/RxD2/IRQ1 P50/TxD2/IRQ0 P85/SCK3 P83/RxD3 P81/TxD3 P95/AN13/DA3 Port 9 Dedicated input port also P94/AN12/DA2 functioning as A/D converter analog inputs and D/A converter analog outputs Port A General I/O port also functioning as address outputs interrupt inputs, and bus control I/Os PA7/A23/CS7/IRQ7 PA6/A22/IRQ6 PA5/A21/IRQ5 A20/IRQ4 A19 A18 A17 A16 Port B General I/O port also functioning as address outputs A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 PA7/A23/ CS7/ IRQ7 PA6/A22/ IRQ6 PA5/A21/ IRQ5 PA4/A20/ IRQ4 PA3/A19 PA2/A18 PA1/A17 PA0/A16 PB7/A15 PB6/A14 PB5/A13 PB4/A12 PB3/A11 PB2/A10 PB1/A9 PB0/A8 PA7/A23/ CS7/ IRQ7 PA6/A22/ IRQ6 PA5/A21/ IRQ5 PA4/A20/ IRQ4 PA3/A19 PA2/A18 PA1/A17 PA0/A16 PB7/A15 PB6/A14 PB5/A13 PB4/A12 PB3/A11 PB2/A10 PB1/A9 PB0/A8 PB7 PB6 PB5 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1 PB0 Built-in MOS input pull-up PA7/IRQ7 PA6/IRQ6 PA5/IRQ5 PA4/IRQ4 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0 Only PA4 to PA7 are Schmitttriggered input when used as IRQ input. Built-in MOS input pull-up Opendrain output capability Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 325 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports Mode 7 Port Description Mode 1* A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 Port D General I/O port also functioning as data I/Os D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 Port E General I/O port also functioning as data I/Os PE7/D7 PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 Port F General I/O port also functioning as interrupt inputs and bus control I/Os PF7/ PF6/AS RD HWR PF3/LWR PF2/CS6/LCAS PF1/CS5/UCAS PF0/WAIT/OE Mode 2* Mode 4 PC7/A7 PC6/A6 PC5/A5 PC4/A4 PC3/A3 PC2/A2 PC1/A1 PC0/A0 EXPE = 1 PC7/A7 PC6/A6 PC5/A5 PC4/A4 PC3/A3 PC2/A2 PC1/A1 PC0/A0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 PE7/D7 PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 PF7/ PF6/AS RD HWR PF3/LWR PF2/CS6/ LCAS PF1/CS5/ UCAS PF0/WAIT/OE EXPE = 0 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0 PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0 PE7 PE6 PE5 PE4 PE3 PE2 PE1 PE0 PF7/ PF6 PF5 PF4 PF3 PF2 PF1 PF0 Built-in MOS input pull-up Built-in MOS input pull-up Input/ Output Type Built-in MOS input pull-up Port C General I/O port also functioning as address outputs Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 326 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports Mode 7 Port Description Mode 1* PG6/BREQ PG5/BACK PG4/CS4/BREQO PG3/CS3/RAS3 PG2/CS2/RAS2 PG1/CS1 PG0/CS0 Mode 2* Mode 4 EXPE = 1 PG6/BREQ PG5/BACK PG4/CS4/ BREQO PG3/CS3/ RAS3 PG2/CS2/ RAS2 PG1/CS1 PG0/CS0 EXPE = 0 PG6 PG5 PG4 PG3 PG2 PG1 PG0 Input/ Output Type Port G General I/O port also functioning as bus control I/Os Note: * Only modes 1 and 2 are available in the ROMless version. 9.1 Port 1 Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port that also has other functions. The port 1 has the following registers. * Port 1 data direction register (P1DDR) * Port 1 data register (P1DR) * Port 1 register (PORT1) 9.1.1 Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR) The individual bits of P1DDR specify input or output for the pins of port 1. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description When a pin function is specified to a general purpose I/O, setting this bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 1 pin an output pin, while clearing this bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 327 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.1.2 Port 1 Data Register (P1DR) P1DR stores output data for the port 1 pins. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P17DR P16DR P15DR P14DR P13DR P12DR P11DR P10DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Output data for a pin is stored when the pin function is specified to a general purpose I/O. 9.1.3 Port 1 Register (PORT1) PORT1 shows the pin states. PORT1 cannot be modified. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name P17 P16 P15 P14 P13 P12 P11 P10 * Initial Value --* --* --* --* --* --* --* --* R/W R R R R R R R R Description If a port 1 read is performed while P1DDR bits are set to 1, the P1DR values are read. If a port 1 read is performed while P1DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Determined by the states of pins P17 to P10. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 328 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.1.4 Pin Functions Port 1 pins also function as the pins for PPG outputs, TPU I/Os, and DMAC outputs. The correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below. * P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 2 settings (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR_2, bits IOB3 to IOB0 in TIOR_2, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR_2), bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR_0 and TCR_5, bit NDER15 in NDERH, and bit P17DDR. TPU channel 2 settings P17DDR NDER15 Pin function (1) in table below -- -- TIOCB2 output 0 -- P17 input TCLKD input*2 Notes: 1. TIOCB2 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx and IOB3 = 1. 2. TCLKD input when the setting for either TCR_0 or TCR_5 is TPSC2 to TPSC0 = B'111. TCLKD input when channels 2 and 4 are set to phase counting mode. TPU channel 2 settings MD3 to MD0 IOB3 to IOB0 (2) (1) (2) B'0010 -- B'xx00 (2) (1) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 (2) (2) in table below 1 0 P17 output TIOCB2 input*1 1 1 PO15 output B'0000, B'01xx B'0000 B'0100 B'1xxx -- -- B'0001 to B'0011 B'0101 to B'0111 -- Output compare output CCLR1, CCLR0 Output function -- -- -- -- Other than B'10 PWM mode 2 output B'10 -- Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 329 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * P16/PO14/TIOCA2 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 2 settings (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR_2, bits IOA3 to IOA0 in TIOR_2, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR_2), bit NDER14 in NDERH, and bit P16DDR. TPU channel 2 settings P16DDR NDER14 Pin function Note: (1) in table below -- -- TIOCA2 output 0 -- P16 input (2) in table below 1 0 P16 output 1 TIOCA2 input* 1 1 PO14 output 1. TIOCA2 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx and IOA3 = 1. (2) (1) (2) B'001x B'xx00 (2) B'0010 (1) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 (2) TPU channel 1 settings MD3 to MD0 IOA3 to IOA0 B'0000, B'01xx B'0000 B'0100 B'1xxx -- -- B'0001 to B'0011 B'0101 to B'0111 -- Output compare output CCLR1, CCLR0 Output function -- -- -- PWM*2 mode 1 output Other than B'10 PWM mode 2 output B'10 -- Legend: x: Don't care Note: 2. TIOCB2 output disabled. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 330 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC/DACK1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 1 settings (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR_1, bits IOB3 to IOB0 in TIOR_1, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR_1), bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR_0, TCR_2, TCR_4, and TCR_5, bit NDER13 in NDERH, bit SAE1 in DMA BCRH and bit P15DDR. SAE1 TPU channel 2 settings P15DDR NDER13 Pin function (1) in table below -- -- TIOCB1 output 0 -- P15 input 0 (2) in table below 1 0 P15 output TIOCB1 input* 2 TCLKC input* 1 1 PO13 output 1 1 1 -- -- -- DACK1 output Notes: 1. TIOCB1 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx and IOB3 to IOB0 = B'10xx. 2. TCLKC input when the setting for either TCR_0 or TCR_2 is TPSC2 to TPSC0 = B'111, or when the setting for either TCR_4 or TCR_5 is TPSC2 to TPSC0 = B'101. TCLKC input when phase counting mode is set for channels 2 and 4. TPU channel 1 settings MD3 to MD0 IOB3 to IOB0 (2) (1) (2) B'0010 -- B'xx00 (2) (1) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 (2) B'0000, B'01xx B'0000 B'0100 B'1xxx -- -- B'0001 to B'0011 B'0101 to B'0111 -- Output compare output CCLR1, CCLR0 Output function -- -- -- -- Other than B'10 PWM mode 2 output B'10 -- Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 331 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * P14/PO12/TIOCA1/DACK0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 1 settings (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR_1, bits IOA3 to IOA0 in TIOR_1, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR_1), bit NDER12 in NDERH, bit SAE0 in DMABCRH and bit P14DDR. SAE0 TPU channel 1 settings P14DDR NDER12 Pin function Note: (1) in table below -- -- TIOCB1 output 0 -- P14 input 0 (2) in table below 1 0 P14 output 1 1 1 1 -- -- -- DACK0 output PO12 output *1 TIOCA1 input 1. TIOCA1 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and B'01xx and IOA3 to IOA0 = B'10xx. (2) (1) (2) B'001x B'xx00 (1) B'0010 Other than B'xx00 (1) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 (2) TPU channel 1 settings MD3 to MD0 IOA3 to IOA0 B'0000, B'01xx B'0000 B'0100 B'1xxx -- -- B'0001 to B'0011 B'0101 to B'0111 -- Output compare output CCLR1, CCLR0 Output function -- -- -- PWM*2 mode 1 output Other than B'01 PWM mode 2 output B'01 -- Legend: x: Don't care Note: 2. TIOCB1 output disabled. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 332 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/TEND1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 0 settings (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR_0, bits IOD3 to IOD0 in TIOR0L, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR_0), bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR_0 to TCR_2, bit NDER11 in NDERH, bit TEE1 in DMATCR of DMAC and bit P13DDR. TEE1 TPU channel 0 (1) in table below settings P13DDR NDER11 Pin function -- -- TIOCD0 output 0 (2) in table below 0 -- P13 input 1 0 P13 output 1 1 -- 1 1 PO11 output -- -- -- TEND1 output TIOCD0 input* 2 TCLKB input* Notes: 1. TIOCD0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 and IOD3 to IOD0 = B'10xx. 2. TCLKB input when the setting for any of TCR_0 to TCR_2 is TPSC2 to TPSC0 = B'101. TCLKB input when phase counting mode is set for channels 1 and 5. TPU channel 0 settings MD3 to MD0 IOD3 to IOD0 (2) B'0000 B'0000 B'0100 B'1xxx -- -- B'0001 to B'0011 B'0101 to B'0111 -- Output compare output (1) (2) B'0010 -- B'xx00 (2) (1) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 (2) CCLR2, CCLR0 Output function -- -- -- -- Other than B'110 PWM mode 2 output B'110 -- Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 333 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/TEND0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 0 settings (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR_0, bits IOC3 to IOC0 in TIORL_0, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR_0), bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR_0 to TCR_5, bit NDER10 in NDERH, bit TEE0 in DMATCR of DMAC and bit P12DDR. TEE0 TPU channel 2 settings P12DDR NDER10 Pin function (1) in table below -- -- TIOCO0 output 0 -- P12 input 0 (2) in table below 1 0 P12 output TIOCC0 input* 2 TCLKA input* 1 1 -- 1 1 PO10 output -- -- TEND0 output Notes: 1. TIOCC0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 and IOC3 to IOC0 = B'10xx. 2. TCLKA input when the setting for any of TCR_0 to TCR_5 is TPSC2 to TPSC0 = B'100. TCLKA input when phase counting mode is set for channels 1 and 5. TPU channel 0 settings MD3 to MD0 IOC3 to IOC0 (2) B'0000 B'0000 B'0100 B'1xxx -- -- B'0001 to B'0011 B'0101 to B'0111 -- Output compare output (1) (2) B'001x B'xx00 (1) B'0010 Other than B'xx00 (1) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 (2) CCLR2, CCLR0 Output function -- -- -- PWM*3 mode 1 output Other than B'101 PWM mode 2 output B'101 -- Legend: x: Don't care Note: 3. TIOCD0 output disabled. Output disabled and settings (2) effective when BFA = 1 or BFB = 1 in TMDR_0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 334 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DREQ1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 0 settings (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR_0, bits IOB3 to IOB0 in TIORH_0, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR_0), bit NDER9 in NDERH, and bit P11DDR. TPU channel 0 settings P11DDR NDER9 Pin function (1) in table below -- -- TIOCB0 output 0 -- P11 input DREQ1 input Note: * TIOCB0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 and IOB3 to IOB0 = B'10xx. (2) B'0000 B'0000 B'0100 B'1xxx -- -- B'0001 to B'0011 B'0101 to B'0111 -- Output compare output (1) (2) B'0010 -- B'xx00 (2) (1) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 (2) (2) in table below 1 0 P11 output TIOCB0 input* 1 1 PO9 output TPU channel 0 settings MD3 to MD0 IOB3 to IOB0 CCLR2, CCLR0 Output function -- -- -- -- Other than B'010 PWM mode 2 output B'010 -- Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 335 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DREQ0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 0 settings (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR_0, bits IOA3 to IOA0 in TIORH_0, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR_0), bit NDER8 in NDERH, and bit P10DDR. TPU channel 0 settings P10DDR NDER8 Pin function (1) in table below -- -- TIOCA0 output 0 -- P10 input DREQ0 input Note: 1. TIOCA0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 and IOA3 to IOA0 = B'10xx. (2) B'0000 B'0000 B'0100 B'1xxx -- -- B'0001 to B'0011 B'0101 to B'0111 -- Output compare output (1) (2) B'001x B'xx00 (1) B'0010 Other than B'xx00 (1) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 (2) (2) in table below 1 0 P10 output 1 TIOCA0 input* 1 1 PO8 output TPU channel 0 settings MD3 to MD0 IOA3 to IOA0 CCLR2, CCLR0 Output function -- -- -- PWM*2 mode 1 output Other than B'001 PWM mode 2 output B'001 -- Legend: x: Don't care Note: 2. TIOCB0 output disabled. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 336 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.2 Port 2 Port 2 is an 8-bit I/O port that also has other functions. The port 2 has the following registers. * Port 2 data direction register (P2DDR) * Port 2 data register (P2DR) * Port 2 register (PORT2) 9.2.1 Port 2 Data Direction Register (P2DDR) The individual bits of P2DDR specify input or output for the pins of port 2. P2DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description When a pin function is specified to a general purpose I/O, setting this bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 1 pin an output pin, while clearing this bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 337 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.2.2 Port 2 Data Register (P2DR) P2DR stores output data for the port 2 pins. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P27DR P26DR P25DR P24DR P23DR P22DR P21DR P20DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Output data for a pin is stored when the pin function is specified to a general purpose I/O. 9.2.3 Port 2 Register (PORT2) PORT2 shows the pin states. PORT2 cannot be modified. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name P27 P26 P25 P24 P23 P22 P21 P20 * Initial Value --* --* --* --* --* --* --* --* R/W R R R R R R R R Description If a port 2 read is performed while P2DDR bits are set to 1, the P2DR values are read. If a port 2 read is performed while P2DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Determined by the states of pins P27 to P20. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 338 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.2.4 Pin Functions Port 2 pins also function as PPG outputs, TPU I/Os, and TMR I/Os. The correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below. * P27/PO7/TIOCB5 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 5 settings (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR_5, bits IOB3 to IOB0 in TIOR_5, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR_5), bit NDER7 in NDERL, and bit P27DDR. TPU channel 5 settings P27DDR NDER7 Pin function Note: * (1) in table below -- -- TIOCB5 output 0 -- P27 input (2) in table below 1 0 P27 output TIOCB5 input* TIOCB5 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx and IOB3 = 1. (2) (1) (2) B'0010 -- B'xx00 (2) (1) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 (2) 1 1 PO7 output TPU channel 5 settings MD3 to MD0 IOB3 to IOB0 B'0000 to B'01xx B'0000 B'0100 B'1xxx -- -- B'0001 to B'0011 B'0101 to B'0111 -- Output compare output CCLR1, CCLR0 Output function -- -- -- -- Other than B'10 PWM mode 2 output B'10 -- Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 339 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * P26/PO6/TIOCA5 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 5 settings (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR_5, bits IOA3 to IOA0 in TIOR_5, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR_5), bit NDER6 in NDERL, and bit P26DDR. TPU channel 5 settings P26DDR NDER6 Pin function Note: (1) in table below -- -- TIOCA5 output 0 -- P26 input (2) in table below 1 0 P26 output 1 TIOCA5 input* 1 1 PO6 output 1. TIOCA5 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx and IOA3 = 1. (2) (1) (2) B'001x B'xx00 (2) B'0010 Other than B'xx00 (1) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 (2) TPU channel 5 settings MD3 to MD0 IOA3 to IOA0 B'0000 to B'00xx B'0000 B'0100 B'1xxx -- -- B'0001 to B'0011 B'0101 to B'0111 -- Output compare output CCLR1, CCLR0 Output function -- -- -- PWM*2 mode 1 output Other than B'01 PWM mode 2 output B'01 -- Legend: x: Don't care Note: 2. TIOCB5 output disabled. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 340 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * P25/PO5/TIOCB4/TMO1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 4 settings (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR_4, bits IOB3 to IOB0 in TIOR_4, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR_4), bit NDER5 in NDERL, bit P25DDR, and bits OS3 to USO in TCSRI of TMR. TPU channel 4 settings OS3 to OS0 P25DDR NDER5 Pin function Note: * (1) in table below -- -- -- TIOCB4 output All 0 0 -- P25 input 1 0 P25 output (2) in table below All 1 1 1 PO5 output TIOCB4 input* TIOCB4 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx and IOB3 to IOB0 = B'10xx. (2) (1) (2) B'0010 -- B'xx00 (2) (1) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 (2) One value is 1 -- -- TMO1 output TPU channel 4 settings MD3 to MD0 IOB3 to IOB0 B'0000 to B'01xx B'0000 B'0100 B'1xxx -- -- B'0001 to B'0011 B'0101 to B'0111 -- Output compare output CCLR1, CCLR0 Output function -- -- -- -- Other than B'10 PWM mode 2 output B'10 -- Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 341 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * P24/PO4/TIOCA4/RxD4/TMO0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 4 settings (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR_4, bits IOA3 to IOA0 in TIOR_4, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR4), bit NDER4 in NDERL, bit RE in SCI_4, bit P24DDR, and bit OS3 to OS0 in TCSRO of TMR. RE TPU channel 4 settings OS3 to OS0 P24DDR NDER4 Pin function -- -- TIOCA4 output (1) in table below All 0 0 -- P24 input 1 0 P24 output 1 1 0 (2) in table below Not all 0 -- -- TMO0 output 1 -- -- -- -- RXD4 input PO4 output TIOCA4 input*1 Note: 1. TIOCA4 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx and IOA3 to IOA0 = B'10xx. (2) (1) (2) B'001x B'xx00 (1) B'0010 Other than B'xx00 (1) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 (2) TPU channel 4 settings MD3 to MD0 IOA3 to IOA0 B'0000 to B'01xx B'0000 B'0100 B'1xxx -- -- B'0001 to B'0011 B'0101 to B'0111 -- Output compare output CCLR1, CCLR0 Output function -- -- -- PWM*2 mode 1 output Other than B'01 PWM mode 2 output B'01 -- Legend: x: Don't care Note: 2. TIOCB4 output disabled. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 342 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * P23/PO3/TIOCD3/TXD4/TMCI1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 3 settings (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR_3, bits IOD3 to IOD0 in TIORL_3, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR_3), bit NDER3 in NDERL, bit TE in SCR of SCI_4, and bit P23DDR. TPU channel 3 settings TE P23DDR NDER3 Pin function -- -- TIOCD3 output 0 -- P23 input (1) in table below 0 1 0 P23 output 1 (2) in table below 1 1 1 PO3 output -- -- TxD4 output TIOCD3 input* 2 TMCI1 input* Notes: 1. TIOCD3 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 and IOD3 to IOD0 = B'10xx. 2. When used as the TMR external clock input pin, the external clock is selected by the CKS2 to CKS0 bits in TCR1. TPU channel 3 settings MD3 to MD0 IOD3 to IOD0 (2) (1) (2) B'0010 -- B'xx00 (2) (1) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 (2) B'0001 to B'0011 B'0000 B'0100 B'1xxx -- -- B'0001 to B'0011 B'0101 to B'0111 -- Output compare output CCLR2 to CCLR0 Output function -- -- -- -- Other than B'110 PWM mode 2 output B'110 -- Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 343 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * P22/PO2/TIOCC3/TMCI0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 3 settings (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR_3, bits IOC3 to IOC0 in TIORL_3, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR_3), bit NDER2 in NDERL, and bit P22DDR. TPU channel 3 settings P22DDR NDER2 Pin function (1) in table below -- -- TIOCC3 output 0 -- P22 input TMCI0 input* 2 (2) in table below 1 0 P22 output 1 TIOCC3 input* 1 1 PO2 output Notes: 1. TIOCC3 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 and IOC3 to IOC0 = B'10xx. 2. When used as the TMR external clock input pin, the external clock is selected by the CKS2 to CKS0 bits in TCR_1. TPU channel 3 settings MD3 to MD0 IOC3 to IOC0 (2) B'0000 B'0000 B'0100 B'1xxx -- -- B'0001 to B'0011 B'0101 to B'0111 -- Output compare output (1) (2) B'001x B'xx00 (1) B'0010 Other than B'xx00 (1) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 (2) CCLR2 to CCLR0 Output function -- -- -- PWM*3 mode 1 output Other than B'101 PWM mode 2 output B'101 -- Legend: x: Don't care Note: 3. TIOCD3 output disabled. Output disabled and settings (2) effective when BFA = 1 or BFB = 1 in TMDR_3. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 344 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * P21/PO1/TIOCB3/TMRI1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 3 settings (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR_3, bits IOB3 to IOB0 in TIORH_3, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR_3), bit NDER1 in NDERL, and bit P21DDR. TPU channel 3 settings P21DDR NDER1 Pin function (1) in table below -- -- TIOCB3 output 0 -- P21 input TMRI1 input* 2 (2) in table below 1 0 P21 output 1 TIOCB3 input* 1 1 PO1 output Notes: 1. TIOCB3 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 and IOB3 to IOB0 = B'10xx. 2. When used as the TMR counter reset pin, set both the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR_1 to 1. TPU channel 3 settings MD3 to MD0 IOB3 to IOB0 (2) B'0000 B'0000 B'0100 B'1xxx -- -- B'0001 to B'0011 B'0101 to B'0111 -- Output compare output (1) (2) B'0010 -- (2) B'0011 B'xx00 Other than B'xx00 (1) (2) CCLR2 to CCLR0 Output function -- -- -- -- Other than B'010 PWM mode 2 output B'010 -- Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 345 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * P20/PO0/TIOCA3/TMRI0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 3 settings (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR_3, bits IOA3 to IOA0 in TIORH_3, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR_3), bit NDER0 in NDERL, and bit P20DDR. TPU channel 3 settings P20DDR NDER0 Pin function (1) in table below -- -- TIOCA3 output 0 -- P20 input TMRI0 input* 2 (2) in table below 1 0 P20 output 1 TIOCA0 input* 1 1 PO0 output Notes: 1. TIOCA3 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 and IOA3 to IOA0 = B'10xx. 2. When used as the TMR counter reset pin, set both the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR_1 to 1. TPU channel 3 settings MD3 to MD0 IOA3 to IOA0 (2) B'0000 B'0000 B'0100 B'1xxx -- -- B'0001 to B'0011 B'0101 to B'0111 -- Output compare output (1) (2) B'001x B'xx00 (1) B'0010 Other than B'xx00 (1) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 (2) CCLR2 to CCLR0 Output function -- -- -- PWM*3 mode 1 output Other than B'001 PWM mode 2 output B'001 -- Legend: x: Don't care Note: 3. TIOCB3 output disabled. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 346 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.3 Port 3 Port 3 is a 6-bit I/O port that also has other functions. The port 3 has the following registers. * * * * * Port 3 data direction register (P3DDR) Port 3 data register (P3DR) Port 3 register (PORT3) Port 3 open drain control register (P3ODR) Port function control register 2(PFCR2) Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR) 9.3.1 The individual bits of P3DDR specify input or output for the pins of port 3. P3DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. Bit 7, 6 Bit Name -- Initial Value All 0 R/W -- Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 5 4 3 2 1 0 P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 W W W W W W When a pin function is specified to a general purpose I/O, setting this bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 1 pin an output pin, while clearing this bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 347 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.3.2 Port 3 Data Register (P3DR) P3DR stores output data for the port 3 pins. Bit 7, 6 Bit Name -- Initial Value All 0 R/W -- Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 5 4 3 2 1 0 P35DR P34DR P33DR P32DR P31DR P30DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Output data for a pin is stored when the pin function is specified to a general purpose I/O. 9.3.3 Port 3 Register (PORT3) PORT3 shows the pin states. PORT3 cannot be modified. Bit 7, 6 Bit Name -- Initial Value All 0 R/W -- Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: P35 P34 P33 P32 P31 P30 * --* --* --* --* --* --* R R R R R R If a port 3 read is performed while P3DDR bits are set to 1, the P3DR values are read. If a port 1 read is performed while P3DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Determined by the states of pins P35 to P30. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 348 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.3.4 Port 3 Open Drain Control Register (P3ODR) P3ODR controls the output status for each port 3 pin. Bit 7, 6 Bit Name -- Initial Value All 0 R/W -- Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 5 4 3 2 1 0 P35ODR P34ODR P33ODR P32ODR P31ODR P30ODR 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Setting a P3ODR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 3 pin an NMOS open-drain output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin a CMOS output pin. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 349 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.3.5 Port Function Control Register 2 (PFCR2) PFCR2 controls the I/O port. Bit 7 to 4 3 Bit Name -- Initial Value All 0 R/W -- Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. ASOE 1 R/W AS Output Enable Selects to enable or disable the AS output pin. 0: PF6 is designated as I/O port 1: PF6 is designated as AS output pin 2 LWROE 1 R/W LWR Output Enable Selects to enable or disable the LWR output pin. 0: PF3 is designated as I/O port 1: PF3 is designated as LWR output pin 1 OES 1 R/W OE Output Select Selects the OE output pin port when the OEE bit is set to 1 in DRAMCR (enabling OE output). 0: P35 is designated as OE output pin 1: PH3 is designated as OE output pin 0 -- 0 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 350 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.3.6 Pin Functions Port 3 pins also function as the pins for SCI I/Os, I2C output, and a bus control signal output. The correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below. * P35/SCK1/SCL0/(OE) The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the ICE bit in ICCRA of I2C_0, C/A bit in SMR of SCI_1, bits CKE0 and CKE1 in SCR, bits OEE in DRAMCR, bit OES in PFCR2, and bit P35DDR. Modes 1, 2, 4, 7 (EXPE = 1) OEE OES ICE CKE1 C/A CKE0 P35DDR Pin function 0 0 1 0 1 -- 0 1 -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- 0 -- 1 -- -- -- -- 0 0 1 0 1 -- 0 1 -- -- 0 1 -- -- -- 1 1 -- -- -- -- 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- OE output P35 P35 SCK1 SCK1 SCK1 SCL0 P35 P35 SCK1 SCK1 SCK1 SCL0 input output*1 output*1 output*1 input I/O*2 input output*1 output*1 output*1 input I/O*2 Mode 7 (EXPE = 0) OEE OES ICE CKE1 C/A CKE0 P35DDR Pin function 0 P35 input 0 1 P35 output*1 0 1 -- SCK1 output*1 0 1 -- -- SCK1 output*1 0 1 -- -- -- SCK1 input -- -- 1 -- -- -- -- SCL0 I/O*2 Notes: 1. NMOS open-drain output when P35ODR = 1. 2. NMOS open-drain output regardless of P35ODR Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 351 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * P34/SCK0/SCK4/SDA0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit ICE in ICCRA of I2C_0, bit C/A in SMR, bits CKE0 and CKE1 in SCR, and bit P34DDR. ICE CKE1 C/A CKE0 P34DDR Pin function 0 P34 input 0 1 P34 output*1 0 1 -- 0 1 -- -- 0 1 -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- -- SDA0 I/O*2 SCK0/SCK4 SCK0/SCK4 SCK0/SCK4 output*1*3 output*1*3 input Notes: 1. NMOS open-drain output when P34ODR = 1. 2. NMOS open-drain output regardless of P34ODR 3. Simultaneous output of SCK0 and SCK4 cannot be set. * P33/RxD1/SCL1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit ICE in ICCRA of I2C_0, bit RE in SCR of SCI_1 and bit P33DDR. ICE RE P33DDR Pin function 0 P33 input 0 1 P33 output*1 0 1 -- RxD1 input 1 -- -- SCL1 I/O*2 Notes: 1. NMOS open-drain output when P33ODR = 1. 2. NMOS open-drain output regardless of P33ODR * P32/RxD0/IrRxD/SDA1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit ICE in ICCRA of I2C_0, bit RE in SCR of SCI_0 and bit P32DDR. ICE RE P32DDR Pin function 0 P32 input 0 1 P32 output* 1 0 1 -- RxD0/IrRxD input 1 -- -- SDA1 I/O*2 Notes: 1. NMOS open-drain output when P32ODR = 1. 2. NMOS open-drain output regardless of P32ODR Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 352 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * P31/TxD1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit TE in SCR of SCI_1 and bit P31DDR. TE P31DDR Pin function Note: * 0 P31 input NMOS open-drain output when P31ODR = 1. 0 1 P31 output* 1 -- TxD1 output* * P30/TxD0/IrTxD The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit TE in SCR of SCI_0 and bit P30DDR. TE P30DDR Pin function Note: * 0 P30 input 0 1 P30 output* 1 -- TxD0/IrTxD output* NMOS open-drain output when P30ODR = 1. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 353 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.4 Port 4 Port 4 is an 8-bit input-only port. Port 4 has the following register. * Port 4 register (PORT4) 9.4.1 Port 4 Register (PORT4) PORT4 is an 8-bit read-only register that shows port 4 pin states. PORT4 cannot be modified. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name P47 P46 P45 P44 P43 P42 P41 P40 * Initial Value --* --* --* --* --* --* --* --* R/W R R R R R R R R Description The pin states are always read from this register. Determined by the states of pins P47 to P40. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 354 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.4.2 Pin Functions Port 4 also functions as the pins for A/D converter analog input and D/A converter analog output. The correspondence between pins are as follows. P47/AN7/(IRQ7) Pin function Note: * IRQ7 input when bit ITS7 in ITSR is 1. AN7 input IRQ7 interrupt input* P46/AN6/DA0/(IRQ6) Pin function Note: * IRQ6 input when bit ITS6 in ITSR is 1. AN6 input IRQ6 interrupt input* P45/AN5/(IRQ5) Pin function Note: * IRQ5 input when bit ITS5 in ITSR is 1. AN5 input IRQ5 interrupt input* P44/AN4/(IRQ4) Pin function Note: * IRQ4 input when bit ITS4 in ITSR is 1. AN4 input IRQ4 interrupt input* P43/AN3/(IRQ3) Pin function Note: * IRQ3 input when bit ITS3 in ITSR is 1. AN3 input IRQ3 interrupt input* Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 355 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports P42/AN2/(IRQ2) Pin function Note: * IRQ2 input when bit ITS2 in ITSR is 1. AN2 input IRQ2 interrupt input* P41/AN1/(IRQ1) Pin function Note: * IRQ1 input when bit ITS1 in ITSR is 1. AN1 input IRQ1 interrupt input* P40/AN0/(IRQ0) Pin function Note: * IRQ0 input when bit ITS0 in ITSR is 1. AN0 input IRQ0 interrupt input* Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 356 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.5 Port 5 Port 5 is a 4-bit I/O port. The port 5 has the following registers. * Port 5 data direction register (P5DDR) * Port 5 data register (P5DR) * Port 5 register (PORT5) 9.5.1 Port 5 Data Direction Register (P5DDR) The individual bits of P5DDR specify input or output for the pins of port 5. P5DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. Bit 7 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name -- Initial Value All 0 R/W -- Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. P53DDR P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR 0 0 0 0 W W W W When a pin function is specified to a general purpose I/O, setting this bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 1 pin an output pin, while clearing this bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. 9.5.2 Port 5 Data Register (P5DR) P5DR stores output data for the port 5 pins. Bit 7 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name -- Initial Value All 0 R/W -- Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. P53DR P52DR P51DR P50DR 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Output data for a pin is stored when the pin function is specified to a general purpose I/O. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 357 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.5.3 Port 5 Register (PORT5) PORT5 shows the pin states. PORT5 cannot be modified. Bit 7 to 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name -- Initial Value Undefined R/W R Description Reserved Undefined values are read from these bits. P53 P52 P51 P50 * --* --* --* --* R R R R If bits P53 to P50 are read while P5DDR bits are set to 1, the P5DR values are read. If a port 5 read is performed while P5DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Determined by the states of pins P53 to P50. 9.5.4 Pin Functions Port 5 pins also function as the pins for SCI I/Os, A/D converter inputs, and interrupt inputs. The correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below. * P53/ADTRG/IRQ3 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bits TRGS1 and TRGS0 in the A/D control register (ADCR), bit ITS3 in ITSR, and bit P53DDR. P53DDR Pin function 0 P53 input ADTRG input*1 IRQ3 interrupt input*2 Notes: 1. ADTRG input when TRGS1 = TRGS0 = 1. 2. IRQ3 input when ITS3 = 0. 1 P53 output Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 358 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * P52/SCK2/IRQ2 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit C/A in SMR of SCI_2, bits CKE0 and CKE1 in SCR, bit ITS2 in ITSR, and bit P52DDR. CKE1 C/A CKE0 P52DDR Pin function Note: * 0 P52 input 0 1 P52 output 0 1 -- SCK2 output 0 1 -- -- 1 -- -- -- SCK2 input SCK2 output * IRQ2 interrupt input IRQ2 input when ITS2 = 0. * P51/RxD2/IRQ1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit RE in SCR of SCI_2, bit ITS1 in ITSR, and bit P51DDR. RE P51DDR Pin function Note: * 0 P51 input 0 1 P51 output IRQ1 interrupt input* IRQ1 input when ITS1 = 0. 1 -- RxD2 input * P50/TxD2/IRQ0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit TE in SCR of SCI_2, bit ITS0 in ITSR, and bit P50DDR. TE P50DDR Pin function Note: * 0 P50 input 0 1 P50 output IRQ0 interrupt input* IRQ0 input when ITS0 = 0. 1 -- TxD2 input Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 359 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.6 Port 8 Port 8 is a 6-bit I/O port that also has other functions. The port 8 has the following registers. * Port 8 data direction register (P8DDR) * Port 8 data register (P8DR) * Port 8 register (PORT8) 9.6.1 Port 8 Data Direction Register (P8DDR) The individual bits of P8DDR specify input or output for the pins of port 8. P8DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. Bit 7, 6 Bit Name -- Initial Value All 0 R/W -- Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 5 4 3 2 1 0 P85DDR -- P83DDR -- P81DDR -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 W -- W -- W -- When a pin function is specified to a general purpose I/O, setting bit 5, 3, or 1 makes the corresponding port 1 pin an output pin, while clearing this bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. Bits 4, 2, and 0 are reserved. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 360 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.6.2 Port 8 Data Register (P8DR) P8DR stores output data for the port 8 pins. Bit 7, 6 Bit Name -- Initial Value All 0 R/W -- Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 5 4 3 2 1 0 P85DR -- P83DR -- P81DR -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W -- R/W -- R/W -- Bits 5, 3, and 1 store output data when the pin function is specified to a general purpose I/O. Bits 4, 2, and 0 are reserved. 9.6.3 Port 8 Register (PORT8) PORT8 shows the pin states. PORT8 cannot be modified. Bit 7, 6 Bit Name -- Initial Value Undefined R/W -- Description Reserved These bits are reserved, if read they will return an undefined value. 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: P85 -- P83 -- P81 -- * --* Undefined --* Undefined --* Undefined R R R R R R If a port 8 read is performed while P8DDR bits are set to 1, the P8DR values are read. If a port 8 read is performed while P8DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Bits 4, 2, and 0 are reserved. Determined by the states of pins P85, P83 and P81. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 361 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.6.4 Pin Functions Port 8 pins also function as interrupt inputs and SCI_3 I/Os. The correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below. * P85/SCK3 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit C/A in SMR in SCI_3, bits CKE0 and CKE1 in SCR, and bit P85DDR. CKE1 C/A CKE0 P85DDR Pin function 0 P85 input 0 1 P85 output 0 1 SCK3 output 0 1 SCK3 output 1 SCK3 input * P83/RxD3 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit RE in SCR of SCI_3, and bit P83DDR. RE P83DDR Pin function 0 P83 input 0 1 P83 output 1 RxD3 input * P81/TxD3 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit TE in SCR of SCI_3, and bit P81DDR. TE P81DDR Pin function 0 P81 input 0 1 P81 output 1 -- TxD3 output Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 362 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.7 Port 9 Port 9 is a 2-bit input-only port. Port 9 has the following register. * Port 9 register (PORT9) 9.7.1 Port 9 Register (PORT9) PORT9 is an 8-bit read-only register that shows port 4 pin states. PORT9 cannot be modified. Bit 7, 6 Bit Name -- Initial Value Undefined --* --* Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined R/W R Description Reserved If read they will return an undefined value. 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: P95 P94 -- -- -- -- * R R R R R R The pin states are always read when a port 9 read is performed. Reserved If read they will return an undefined value. Determined by the states of pins P95 and P94. 9.7.2 Pin Functions Port 9 also functions as the pins for A/D converter analog input and D/A converter analog output. The correspondence between pins are as follows. P95/AN13/DA3 Pin function AN13 input DA3 output P94/AN12/DA2 Pin function AN12 input DA2 output Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 363 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.8 Port A Port A is an 8-bit I/O port that also has other functions. The port A has the following registers. * * * * * * * Port A data direction register (PADDR) Port A data register (PADR) Port A register (PORTA) Port A MOS zcontrol register (PAPCR) Port A open-drain control register (PAODR) Port function control register 0 (PFCR0) Port function control register 1 (PFCR1) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 364 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.8.1 Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR) The individual bits of PADDR specify input or output for the pins of port A. PADDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PA7DDR PA6DDR PA5DDR PA4DDR PA3DDR PA2DDR PA1DDR PA0DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description * Modes 1 and 2 Pins PA4 to PA0 are address outputs. For pins PA6 and PA5, when the corresponding A22E and A21E bits are set to 1, setting a PADDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port A pin an address output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Clearing A22E and A21E bits to 0 makes the corresponding port A pin an I/O port, and its function can be switched with PADDR. For pin PA7, when the A23E bit is set to 1, setting the PA7DDR bit to 1 makes the pin an address output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. When the CS7E bit is set to 1 while the A23E bit is cleared to 0, pin PA7 functions as the CS7 output pin when PA7DDR is set to 1, and as an input port when the bit is cleared to 0. When the CS7E bit is cleared to 0, pin PA7 is an I/O port, and its function can be switched with PA7DDR. * Modes 4 and 7 (when EXPE = 1) For pins PA6 to PA0, when the corresponding A22E to A16E bits are set to 1, setting a PADDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port A pin an address output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Clearing A22E to A21E bits to 0 makes the corresponding port A pin an I/O port, and its function can be switched with PADDR. For pin PA7, when the A23E bit is set to 1, setting the PA7DDR bit to 1 makes the pin an address output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. When the CS7E bit is set to 1 while the A23E bit is cleared to 0, pin PA7 functions as the CS7 output pin when PA7DDR is set to 1, and as an input port when the bit is cleared to 0. When the CS7E bit is cleared to 0, pin PA7 is an I/O port, and its function can be switched with PA7DDR. * Mode 7 (when EXPE = 0) Port A is an I/O port, and its pin functions can be switched with PADDR. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 365 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.8.2 Port A Data Register (PADR) PADR stores output data for the port A pins. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PA7DR PA6DR PA5DR PA4DR PA3DR PA2DR PA1DR PA0DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Output data for a pin is stored when the pin function is specified to a general purpose I/O. 9.8.3 Port A Register (PORTA) PORTA shows port A pin states. PORTA cannot be modified. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name PA7 PA6 PA5 PA4 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0 * Initial Value --* --* --* --* --* --* --* --* R/W R R R R R R R R Description If a port A read is performed while PADDR bits are set to 1, the PADR values are read. If a port A read is performed while PADDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Determined by the states of pins PA7 to PA0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 366 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.8.4 Port A MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PAPCR) PAPCR controls the MOS input pull-up function. Bits 7 to 5 are valid in modes 1 and 2 and all the bits are valid in modes 4 and 7. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PA7PCR PA6PCR PA5PCR PA4PCR PA3PCR PA2PCR PA1PCR PA0PCR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description When PADDR = 0 (input port), setting the corresponding bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pullup for that pin. 9.8.5 Port A Open Drain Control Register (PAODR) PAODR specifies an output type of port A. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PA7ODR PA6ODR PA5ODR PA4ODR PA3ODR PA2ODR PA1ODR PA0ODR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description When not specified for address output, setting the corresponding bit to 1 specifies a pin output type to NMOS open-drain output, while clearing this bit to 0 specifies that to CMOS output. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 367 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.8.6 Port Function Control Register 0 (PFCR0) PFCR0 controls the I/O port. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name CS7E CS6E CS5E CS4E CS3E CS2E CS1E CS0E Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description CS7 to CS0 enable Enable/disable corresponding CSn output. 0: Set as I/O port. 1: Set as CSn output pin. (n = 7 to 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 368 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.8.7 Port Function Control Register 1 (PFCR1) PFCR1 performs I/O port control. Bits 7 to 5 are valid in modes 1 and 2 and all the bits are valid in modes 4 and 7. Bit 7 Bit Name A23E Initial Value 1 R/W R/W Description Address 23 Enable Enables or disables output for address output 23 (A23). 0: DR output when PA7DDR = 1 1: A23 output when PA7DDR = 1 6 A22E 1 R/W Address 22 Enable Enables or disables output for address output 22 (A22). 0: DR output when PA6DDR = 1 1: A22 output when PA6DDR = 1 5 A21E 1 R/W Address 21 Enable Enables or disables output for address output 21 (A21). 0: DR output when PA5DDR = 1 1: A21 output when PA5DDR = 1 4 A20E 1 R/W Address 20 Enable Enables or disables output for address output 20 (A20). 0: DR output when PA4DDR = 1 1: A20 output when PA4DDR = 1 3 A19E 1 R/W Address 19 Enable Enables or disables output for address output 19 (A19). 0: DR output when PA3DDR = 1 1: A19 output when PA3DDR = 1 2 A18E 1 R/W Address 18 Enable Enables or disables output for address output 18 (A18). 0: DR output when PA2DDR = 1 1: A18 output when PA2DDR = 1 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 369 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports Bit 1 Bit Name A17E Initial Value 1 R/W R/W Description Address 17 Enable Enables or disables output for address output 17 (A17). 0: DR output when PA1DDR = 1 1: A17 output when PA1DDR = 1 0 A16E 1 R/W Address 16 Enable Enables or disables output for address output 16 (A16). 0: DR output when PA0DDR = 1 1: A16 output when PA0DDR = 1 9.8.8 Pin Functions Port A pins also function as the pins for address outputs and interrupt inputs. The correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below. * PA7/A23/CS7/IRQ7 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bit EXPE, bits A23E and CS7E, bits ITS7 to ITS5 in ITSR, and bit PA7DDR. Operating mode EXPE A23E CS7E PA7DDR Pin function 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1, 2, 4 -- 1 -- 1 0 0 -- -- 1 0 0 7 1 0 1 1 0 1 -- 1 PA7 PA7 PA7 CS7 PA7 Address PA7 PA7 PA7 PA7 PA7 CS7 PA7 Address input output input output output output input output input output input output input output IRQ7 interrupt input* Note: * IRQ7 input when ITS7 = 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 370 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * PA6/A22/IRQ6, PA5/A21/IRQ5 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bit EXPE, bits A22E and A21E, bits IS6 and ITS5 in ITSR, and bit PAnDDR. Operating mode EXPE AxxE PAnDDR Pin function 0 PAn input 0 1 PAn output 0 PAn input 1, 2, 4 -- 1 1 Address output 0 PAn input 0 -- 1 PAn output 0 PAn input 7 1 0 1 PAn output 0 PAn input 1 1 Address output IRQn interrupt input* n = 6 or 5 xx = 22 or 21 Note: * IRQn input when ITSn = 0. * PA4/A20/IRQ4 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bit EXPE, bit A20E and bit PA4DDR. Operating mode EXPE A20E PA4DDR 1, 2 -- -- -- 0 PA4 input 0 1 PA4 output 4 -- 1 0 PA4 input 1 Address output 0 PA4 input 0 -- 1 PA4 output 0 PA4 input 7 1 0 1 PA4 output 0 PA4 input 1 1 Address output Pin function Address output IRQ4 interrupt input* Note: * IRQ4 input when ITS4 = 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 371 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * PA3/A19, PA2/A18, PA1/A17, PA0/A16 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bit EXPE, bits A19E to A16E, and bit PADDR. Operating mode EXPE AxxE PAnDDR 1, 2 -- -- -- 0 PAn input 0 1 PAn output 0 PAn input 4 -- 1 1 Address output 0 PAn input 0 -- 1 PAn output 0 PAn input 0 1 PAn output 0 PAn input 7 1 1 1 Address output Pin function Address output xx = 19 to 16 n = 3 to 0 9.8.9 Port A MOS Input Pull-Up States Port A has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS input pull-up function can be used by pins PA7 to PA5 in modes 1 and 2 and by all pins in modes 4 and 7. MOS input pull-up can be specified as on or off on a bit-by-bit basis. Table 9.2 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 9.2 Mode 4, 7 1, 2 PA7 to PA0 PA7 to PA5 PA4 to PA0 Legend: Off: MOS input pull-up is always off. On/Off: On when PADDR = 0 and PAPCR = 1; otherwise off. MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port A) Reset Off Hardware Standby Mode Off Software Standby Mode On/Off On/Off Off In Other Operations On/Off On/Off Off Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 372 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.9 Port B Port B is an 8-bit I/O port that also has other functions. The port B has the following registers. * * * * Port B data direction register (PBDDR) Port B data register (PBDR) Port B register (PORTB) Port B MOS pull-up control register (PBPCR) Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR) 9.9.1 The individual bits of PBDDR specify input or output for the pins of port B. PBDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PB7DDR PB6DDR PB5DDR PB4DDR PB3DDR PB2DDR PB1DDR PB0DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description * Modes 1 and 2 Port B pins are address outputs regardless of the PBDDR settings. * Modes 4 and 7 (when EXPE = 1) Setting a PBDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port B pin an address output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. * Mode 7 (when EXPE = 0) Port B is an I/O port, and its pin functions can be switched with PBDDR. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 373 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.9.2 Port B Data Register (PBDR) PBDR is stores output data for the port B pins. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PB7DR PB6DR PB5DR PB4DR PB3DR PB2DR PB1DR PB0DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description An output data for a pin is stored when the pin function is specified to a general purpose I/O. 9.9.3 Port B Register (PORTB) PORTB shows port B pin states. PORTB cannot be modified. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name PB7 PB6 PB5 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1 PB0 * Initial Value --* --* --* --* --* --* --* --* R/W R R R R R R R R Description If this register is read is while PBDDR bits are set to 1, the PBDR values are read. If a port B read is performed while PBDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Determined by the states of pins PB7 to PB0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 374 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.9.4 Port B MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PBPCR) PBPCR controls the on/off state of MOS input pull-up of port B. PBPCR is valid in modes 4 and 7. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PB7PCR PB6PCR PB5PCR PB4PCR PB3PCR PB2PCR PB1PCR PB0PCR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description When PBDDR = 0 (input port), setting the corresponding bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pullup for that pin. 9.9.5 Pin Functions Port B pins also function as the pins for address outputs. The correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below. * PB7/A15, PB6/A14, PB5/A13, PB4/A12, PB3/A11, PB2/A10, PB1/A9, PB0/A8 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bit EXPE, and bit PBDDR. Operating mode EXPE PBnDDR Pin function 1, 2 -- -- Address output 0 PBn input 4 -- 1 Address output 0 0 1 0 7 1 1 Address output PBn input PBn output PBn input Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 375 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.9.6 Port B MOS Input Pull-Up States Port B has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS input pull-up function can be used in modes 4 and 7. MOS input pull-up can be specified as on or off on a bit-by-bit basis. In modes 4 and 7, when a PBDDR bit is cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PBPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. Table 9.3 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 9.3 Mode 1, 2 4, 7 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port B) Reset Off Hardware Standby Mode Off Software Standby Mode Off On/Off In Other Operations Off On/Off Legend: Off: MOS input pull-up is always off. On/Off: On when PBDDR = 0 and PBPCR = 1; otherwise off. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 376 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.10 Port C Port C is an 8-bit I/O port that also has other functions. The port C has the following registers. * * * * Port C data direction register (PCDDR) Port C data register (PCDR) Port C register (PORTC) Port C MOS pull-up control register (PCPCR) Port C Data Direction Register (PCDDR) 9.10.1 The individual bits of PCDDR specify input or output for the pins of port C. PCDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PC7DDR PC6DDR PC5DDR PC4DDR PC3DDR PC2DDR PC1DDR PC0DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description * Modes 1 and 2 Port C pins are address outputs regardless of the PCDDR settings. * Modes 4 and 7 (when EXPE = 1) Setting a PCDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port C pin an address output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. * Mode 7 (when EXPE = 0) Port C is an I/O port, and its pin functions can be switched with PCDDR. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 377 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.10.2 Port C Data Register (PCDR) PCDR stores output data for the port C pins. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PC7DR PC6DR PC5DR PC4DR PC3DR PC2DR PC1DR PC0DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Output data for a pin is stored when the pin function is specified to a general purpose I/O. 9.10.3 Port C Register (PORTC) PORTC is shows port C pin states. PORTC cannot be modified. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0 * Initial Value --* --* --* --* --* --* --* --* R/W R R R R R R R R Description If a port C read is performed while PCDDR bits are set to 1, the PCDR values are read. If a port C read is performed while PCDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Determined by the states of pins PC7 to PC0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 378 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.10.4 Port C MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PCPCR) PCPCR controls the on/off state of MOS input pull-up of port C. PCPCR is valid in modes 4 and 7. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PC7PCR PC6PCR PC5PCR PC4PCR PC3PCR PC2PCR PC1PCR PC0PCR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description When PCDDR = 0 (input port), setting the corresponding bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pullup for that pin. 9.10.5 Pin Functions Port C pins also function as the pins for address outputs. The correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below. * PC7/A7, PC6/A6, PC5/A5, PC4/A4, PC3/A3, PC2/A2, PC1/A1, PC0/A0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bit EXPE, and bit PCDDR. Operating mode EXPE PCnDDR Pin function 1, 2 -- -- Address output 0 PCn input 4 -- 1 Address output 0 0 1 0 7 1 1 Address output PCn input PCn output PCn input Legend: n = 7 to 0 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 379 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.10.6 Port C MOS Input Pull-Up States Port C has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS input pull-up function can be used in modes 4 and 7. MOS input pull-up can be specified as on or off on a bit-by-bit basis. In modes 4 and 7, when a PCDDR bit is cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PCPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. Table 9.4 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 9.4 Mode 1, 2 4, 7 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port C) Reset Off Hardware Standby Mode Off Software Standby Mode Off On/Off In Other Operations Off On/Off Legend: Off: MOS input pull-up is always off. On/Off: On when PCDDR = 0 and PCPCR = 1; otherwise off. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 380 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.11 Port D Port D is an 8-bit I/O port that also has other functions. The port D has the following registers. * * * * Port D data direction register (PDDDR) Port D data register (PDDR) Port D register (PORTD) Port D MOS pull-up control register (PDPCR) Port D Data Direction Register (PDDDR) 9.11.1 The individual bits of PDDDR specify input or output for the pins of port D. PDDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PD7DDR PD6DDR PD5DDR PD4DDR PD3DDR PD2DDR PD1DDR PD0DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description * Modes 1, 2, 4, and 7 (when EXPE = 1) Port D is automatically designated for data input/output. * Mode 7 (when EXPE = 0) Port D is an I/O port, and its pin functions can be switched with PDDDR. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 381 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.11.2 Port D Data Register (PDDR) PDDR stores output data for the port D pins. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PD7DR PD6DR PD5DR PD4DR PD3DR PD2DR PD1DR PD0DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Output data for a pin is stored when the pin function is specified to a general purpose I/O. 9.11.3 Port D Register (PORTD) PORTD shows port D pin states. PORTD cannot be modified. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0 * Initial Value --* --* --* --* --* --* --* --* R/W R R R R R R R R Description If a port D read is performed while PDDDR bits are set to 1, the PDDR values are read. If a port D read is performed while PDDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Determined by the states of pins PD7 to PD0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 382 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.11.4 Port D Pull-up Control Register (PDPCR) PDPCR controls on/off states of the input pull-up MOS of port D. PDPCR is valid in mode 7. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PD7PCR PD6PCR PD5PCR PD4PCR PD3PCR PD2PCR PD1PCR PD0PCR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description When PDDDR = 0 (input port), the input pull-up MOS of the input pin is on when the corresponding bit is set to 1. 9.11.5 Pin Functions Port D pins also function as the pins for data I/Os. The correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below. * PD7/D15, PD6/D14, PD5/D13, PD4/D12, PD3/D11, PD2/D10, PD1/D9, PD0/D8 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bit EXPE, and bit PDDDR. Operating mode EXPE PDnDDR Pin function Legend: n = 7 to 0 1, 2, 4 -- -- Data I/O 0 PDn input 0 1 PDn output 7 1 -- Data I/O Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 383 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.11.6 Port D MOS Input Pull-Up States Port D has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS input pull-up function can be used in mode 7. MOS input pull-up can be specified as on or off on a bit-by-bit basis. In mode 7, when a PDDDR bit is cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PDPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. Table 9.5 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 9.5 Mode 1, 2, 4 7 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port D) Reset Off Hardware Standby Mode Off Software Standby Mode Off On/Off In Other Operations Off On/Off Legend: OFF: MOS input pull-up is always off. On/Off: On when PDDDR = 0 and PDPCR = 1; otherwise off. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 384 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.12 Port E Port E is an 8-bit I/O port that also has other functions. The port E has the following registers. * * * * Port E data direction register (PEDDR) Port E data register (PEDR) Port E register (PORTE) Port E MOS pull-up control register (PEPCR) Port E Data Direction Register (PEDDR) 9.12.1 The individual bits of PEDDR specify input or output for the pins of port E. PEDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PE7DDR PE6DDR PE5DDR PE4DDR PE3DDR PE2DDR PE1DDR PE0DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description * Modes 1, 2, and 4 When 8-bit bus mode is selected, port E functions as an I/O port. The pin states can be changed with PEDDR. When 16-bit bus mode is selected, port E is designated for data input/output. For details on 8-bit and 16-bit bus modes, see section 6, Bus Controller. * Mode 7 (when EXPE = 1) When 8-bit bus mode is selected, port E functions as an I/O port. Setting a PEDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port E pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. When 16-bit bus mode is selected, port E is designated for data input/output. * Mode 7 (when EXPE = 0) Port E is an I/O port, and its pin functions can be switched with PEDDR. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 385 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.12.2 Port E Data Register (PEDR) PEDR stores output data for the port E pins. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PE7DR PE6DR PE5DR PE4DR PE3DR PE2DR PE1DR PE0DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Output data for a pin is stored when the pin function is specified to a general purpose I/O. 9.12.3 Port E Register (PORTE) PORTE shows port E pin states. PORTE cannot be modified. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name PE7 PE6 PE5 PE4 PE3 PE2 PE1 PE0 * Initial Value --* --* --* --* --* --* --* --* R/W R R R R R R R R Description If a port E read is performed while PEDDR bits are set to 1, the PEDR values are read. If a port E read is performed while PEDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Determined by the states of pins PE7 to PE0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 386 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.12.4 Port E Pull-up Control Register (PEPCR) PEPCR controls on/off states of the input pull-up MOS of port E. PEPCR is valid in 8-bit bus mode. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PE7PCR PE6PCR PE5PCR PE4PCR PE3PCR PE2PCR PE1PCR PE0PCR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description When PEDDR = 0 (input port), the input pull-up MOS of the input pin is on when the corresponding bit is set to 1. 9.12.5 Pin Functions Port E pins also function as the pins for data I/Os. The correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below. * PE7/D7, PE6/D6, PE5/D5, PE4/D4, PE3/D3, PE2/D2, PE1/D1, PE0/D0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bus mode, bit EXPE, and bit PEDDR. Operating mode Bus mode 1, 2, 4 All areas 8-bit space At least one area 16-bit space -- 1 PEn output -- 0 -- 7 All areas 8-bit space At least one area 16-bit space 1 1 PEn output -- Data I/O EXPE PEnDDR 0 -- 0 1 PEn output 0 1 Pin function PEn input Legend: n = 7 to 0 Data I/O PEn input PEn input Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 387 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.12.6 Port E MOS Input Pull-Up States Port E has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS input pull-up function can be used in 8-bit bus mode. MOS input pull-up can be specified as on or off on a bit-by-bit basis. In 8-bit bus mode, when a PEDDR bit is cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PEPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. Table 9.6 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 9.6 Mode 1, 2, and 4 8-bit bus 16-bit bus Legend: Off: MOS input pull-up is always off. On/Off: On when PEDDR = 0 and PEPCR = 1; otherwise off. MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port E) Reset Off Hardware Standby Mode Off Software Standby Mode On/Off Off In Other Operations On/Off Off 9.13 Port F Port F is an 8-bit I/O port that also has other functions. The port F has the following registers. For details on the port function control register 0, refer to section 9.8.6, Port Function Control Register 0 (PFCR0), and for details on the port function control register 2, refer to section 9.3.5, Port Function Control Register 2 (PFCR2). * * * * * Port F data direction register (PFDDR) Port F data register (PFDR) Port F register (PORTF) Port Function Control Register 0 (PFCR0) Port Function Control Register 2 (PFCR2) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 388 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.13.1 Port F Data Direction Register (PFDDR) The individual bits of PFDDR specify input or output for the pins of port F. PFDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PF7DDR PF6DDR PF5DDR PF4DDR PF3DDR PF2DDR PF1DDR PF0DDR Initial Value 1/0* 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description * Modes 1, 2, 4, and 7 (when EXPE = 1) Pin PF7 functions as the output pin when the corresponding PFDDR bit is set to 1, and as an input port when the bit is cleared to 0. Pin PF6 functions as the AS output pin when ASOE is set to 1. When ASOE is cleared to 0, pin PF6 is an I/O port and its function can be switched with PF6DDR. Pins PF5 and PF4 are automatically designated as bus control outputs (RD and HWR). Pin PF3 functions as the LWR output pin when LWROE is set to 1. When LWROE is cleared to 0, pin PF3 is an I/O port and its function can be switched with PF3DDR. Pins PF2 and PF1 function as bus control output pins (LCAS and UCAS) when the appropriate bus controller settings are made. When the CS output enable bits (CS6E and CS5E) are set to 1, they function as CS outputs. When the CS output enable bits (CS6E and CS5E) are cleared to 0, pins PF2 and PF1 are I/O ports and their functions can be switched with the corresponding PFDDR bits. Pin PF0 functions as a bus control input pin (WAIT) when the appropriate bus controller settings are made. Otherwise, this pin is an output port when the corresponding PFDDR bit is set to 1, and an input port when the bit is cleared to 0. * Mode 7 (when EXPE = 0) Pin PF7 functions as the output pin when the corresponding PFDDR bit is set to 1, and as an input port when the bit is cleared to 0. Pins PF6 to PF0 are I/O ports, and their functions can be switched with PFDDR. Note: * PF7DDR is initialized to 1 in modes 1, 2, and 4, and to 0 in mode 7. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 389 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.13.2 Port F Data Register (PFDR) PFDR stores output data for the port F pins. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PF7DR PF6DR PF5DR PF4DR PF3DR PF2DR PF1DR PF0DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Output data for a pin is stored when the pin function is specified to a general purpose I/O. 9.13.3 Port F Register (PORTF) PORTF shows port F pin states. PORTF cannot be modified. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name PF7 PF6 PF5 PF4 PF3 PF2 PF1 PF0 * Initial Value --* --* --* --* --* --* --* --* R/W R R R R R R R R Description If a port F read is performed while PFDDR bits are set to 1, the PFDR values are read. If a port F read is performed while PFDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Determined by the states of pins PF7 to PF0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 390 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.13.4 Pin Functions Port F pins also function as the pins for external interrupt inputs, bus control signal I/Os, and system clock outputs (). The correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below. * PF7/ The pin function is switched as shown below according to bit PF7DDR. Operating mode PF7DDR Pin function 0 PF7 input 1, 2, 4, 7 1 output * PF6/AS The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bit EXPE, bit ASOE, and bit PF6DDR. Operating mode EXPE ASOE PF6DDR 1 -- 0 1, 2, 4 -- 0 1 PF6 output 0 PF6 input 0 -- 1 PF6 output 1 -- 0 7 1 0 1 PF6 output Pin function AS output PF6 input AS output PF6 input * PF5/RD The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bit EXPE, and bit PF5DDR. Operating mode EXPE PF5DDR Pin function 1, 2, 4 -- -- RD output 0 PF5 input 0 1 PF5 output 7 1 -- RD output Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 391 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * PF4/HWR The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bit EXPE, and bit PF4DDR. Operating mode EXPE PF4DDR Pin function 1, 2, 4 -- -- HWR output 0 PF4 input 0 1 PF4 output 7 1 -- HWR output * PF3/LWR The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bit EXPE, bit LWROE, and bit PF3DDR. Operating mode EXPE LWROD PF3DDR Pin function 1 -- LWR output 0 PF3 input 1, 2, 4 -- 0 1 PF3 output 0 PF3 input 0 -- 1 PF3 output 1 -- LWR output 0 PF3 input 7 1 0 1 PF3 output Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 392 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * PF2/CS6/LCAS The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode, bit EXPE, bits RMTS2 to RMTS0 in DRAMCR, bits ABW5 to ABW2 in ABWCR, and bit PF2DDR. Operating mode EXPE Areas 2 to 5 Any DRAM space area is 16-bit bus space -- -- LCAS output 0 1, 2, 4 -- All DRAM space areas are 8bit bus space, or areas 2 to 5 are all normal space 0 -- Any DRAM space area is 16-bit bus space -- 1 -- LCAS output 3, 7 1 All DRAM space areas are 8bit bus space, or areas 2 to 5 are all normal space CS6E PF2DDR Pin function 1 1 0 0 1 0 -- 1 0 PF2 input 1 CS6 output 0 PF2 input 0 1 PF2 output PF2 CS6 PF2 input output input PF2 PF2 PF2 output input output * PF1/CS5/UCAS The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode, bit EXPE, bits RMTS2 to RMTS0 in DRAMCR, and bit PF1DDR. Operating mode EXPE Areas 2 to 5 Any DRAM space area is 16-bit bus space -- -- UCAS output 0 1, 2, 4 -- All DRAM space areas are 8bit bus space, or areas 2 to 5 are all normal space 0 -- Any DRAM space area is 16-bit bus space -- 1 -- UCAS output 3, 7 1 All DRAM space areas are 8bit bus space, or areas 2 to 5 are all normal space CS6E PF1DDR Pin function 1 1 0 0 1 0 -- 1 0 PF1 input 1 CS5 output 0 PF1 input 0 1 PF1 output PF1 CS5 PF1 input output input PF1 PF1 PF1 output input output Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 393 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * PF0/WAIT/OE The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bit EXPE, bit WAITE, bit OEE in DRAMCR, bit OES in PFCR2, and bit PF0DDR. Operating mode EXPE OEE OES WAITE PF0DDR Pin function 0 0 -- -- 1 0 0 1 0 1 -- 1, 2, 4 -- 1 1 -- -- 0 0 -- -- -- 1 0 0 -- -- 1 0 0 1 0 1 -- 7 1 1 1 -- -- PF0 PF0 PF0 PF0 WAIT OE PF0 PF0 PF0 PF0 PF0 PF0 WAIT OE input output input output input output input output input output input output input output Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 394 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.14 Port G Port G is a 7-bit I/O port that also has other functions. The port G has the following registers. * * * * Port G data direction register (PGDDR) Port G data register (PGDR) Port G register (PORTG) Port Function Control Register 0 (PFCR0) Port G Data Direction Register (PGDDR) 9.14.1 The individual bits of PGDDR specify input or output for the pins of port G. PGDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name -- PG6DDR PG5DDR PG4DDR PG3DDR PG2DDR PG1DDR PG0DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1/0* R/W -- W W W W W W W Description Reserved * Modes 1, 2, 4, and 7 (when EXPE = 1) Pins PG6 and PG5 function as bus control input/output pins (BREQ and BACK) when the appropriate bus controller settings are made. Otherwise, these pins are I/O ports, and their functions can be switched with PGDDR. Pin PG4 functions as the bus control input/output pin (BREQO) when the appropriate bus controller settings are made. Otherwise, when the CS7E bit is set to 1, pin PG4 functions as the CS7 output pin when PG4DDR is set to 1, and as an input port when the bit is cleared to 0. When the CS7E bit is cleared to 0, pin PG4 is an I/O port, and its function can be switched with PG4DDR. When the CS output enable bits (CS3E to CS0E) are set to 1, pins PG3 to PG0 function as CS output pins when the corresponding PGDDR bit is set to 1, and as input ports when the bit is cleared to 0. When CS3E to CS0E are cleared to 0, pins PG3 to PG0 are I/O ports, and their functions can be switched with PGDDR. * Mode 7 (when EXPE = 0) Pins PG6 to PG0 are I/O ports, and their functions can be switched with PGDDR. Note: * PG0DDR is initialized to 1 in modes 1 and 2, and to 0 in modes 4 and 7. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 395 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.14.2 Port G Data Register (PGDR) PGDR stores output data for the port G pins. Bit 7 Bit Name -- Initial Value 0 R/W -- Description Reserved This bit is always read as 0, and cannot be modified. 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PG6DR PG5DR PG4DR PG3DR PG2DR PG1DR PG0DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W An output data for a pin is stored when the pin function is specified to a general purpose I/O. 9.14.3 Port G Register (PORTG) PORTG shows port G pin states. PORTG cannot be modified. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name -- PG6 PG5 PG4 PG3 PG2 PG1 PG0 * Initial Value Undefined --* --* --* --* --* --* --* R/W -- R R R R R R R Description Reserved If this bit is read, it will return an undefined value. If a port G read is performed while PGDDR bits are set to 1, the PGDR values are read. If a port G read is performed while PGDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Determined by the states of pins PG6 to PG0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 396 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.14.4 Pin Functions Port G pins also function as the pins for bus control signal I/Os. The correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below. * PG6/BREQ The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bit EXPE, bit BRLE, and bit PG6DDR. Operating mode EXPE BRLE PG6DDR Pin function 0 PG6 input 0 1 PG6 output 1, 2, 4 -- 1 -- BREQ input 0 PG6 input 0 -- 1 PG6 output 0 PG6 input 0 1 PG6 output 7 1 1 -- BREQ input * PG5/BACK The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bit EXPE, bit BRLE, and bit PG5DDR. Operating mode EXPE BRLE PG5DDR Pin function 0 PG5 input 0 1 PG5 output 1, 2, 4 -- 1 -- BACK output 0 PG5 input 0 -- 1 PG5 output 0 PG5 input 0 1 PG5 output 7 1 1 -- BACK output Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 397 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * PG4/CS4/BREQO The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bit EXPE, bit BRLE, bit BREQO, bit CS4E and bit PG4DDR. Operating mode EXPE BRLE BREQ0E CS4E PG4DDR Pin function 0 0 1 0 0 - 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1, 2, 4 - 1 1 - - 0 0 - - - 1 0 0 1 0 0 - 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 7 1 1 1 1 - PG4 PG4 PG4 CS4 PG4 PG4 PG4 CS4 BREQO PG4 PG4 PG4 PG4 PG4 CS4 PG4 PG4 PG4 CS4 BREQO input output input output input output input output output input output input output input output input output input output output * PG3/CS3/RAS3, PG2/CS2/RAS2 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bit EXPE, bit PGnDDR, bit CSnE, and bits RMTS2 to RMTS0. Operating mode EXPE CSnE RMTS2 to RMTS0 PGnDDR Pin function 0 PGn input 0 -- Area n is in normal space 1 PGn output 0 PGn input 1 CSn output -- 1 Area n is in DRAM space -- RASn output 0 PGn input 0 -- -- 0 -- Area n is in normal space 1 PGn output 0 PGn input 1 CSn output 1 1 Area n is in DRAM space -- RASn output 1, 2, 4 7 1 PGn output 0 PGn input Legend: n = 2 or 3 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 398 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports * PG1/CS1, PG0/CS0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, bit EXPE, bit PGnDDR, and bit CsnE. Operating mode EXPE CSnE PGnDDR Pin function 0 PGn input 0 1 PGn output 0 PGn input 1, 2, 4 -- 1 1 CSn output 0 PGn input 0 -- 1 PGn output 0 PGn input 7 1 0 1 PGn output 0 PGn input 1 1 CSn output Legend: n = 1 or 0 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 399 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 9 I/O Ports Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 400 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) This LSI has an on-chip 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU) that comprises six 16-bit timer channels. The function list of the 16-bit timer unit and its block diagram are shown in table 10.1 and figure 10.1, respectively. 10.1 Features * Maximum 16-pulse input/output * Selection of 8 counter input clocks for each channel * The following operations can be set for each channel: Waveform output at compare match Input capture function Counter clear operation Synchronous operations: Multiple timer counters (TCNT) can be written to simultaneously Simultaneous clearing by compare match and input capture possible Register simultaneous input/output possible by counter synchronous operation Maximum of 15-phase PWM output possible by combination with synchronous operation * Buffer operation settable for channels 0 and 3 * Phase counting mode settable independently for each of channels 1, 2, 4, and 5 * Cascaded operation * Fast access via internal 16-bit bus * 26 interrupt sources * Automatic transfer of register data * Programmable pulse generator (PPG) output trigger can be generated * A/D converter conversion start trigger can be generated * Module stop mode can be set Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 401 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.1 TPU Functions Item Count clock Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 /1 /4 /16 /64 TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TCLKD TGRA_0 TGRB_0 TGRC_0 TGRD_0 TIOCA0 TIOCB0 TIOCC0 TIOCD0 TGR compare match or input capture O O O O O O -- O /1 /4 /16 /64 /256 TCLKA TCLKB TGRA_1 TGRB_1 -- TIOCA1 TIOCB1 /1 /4 /16 /64 /1024 TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TGRA_2 TGRB_2 -- TIOCA2 TIOCB2 /1 /4 /16 /64 /256 /1024 /4096 TCLKA TGRA_3 TGRB_3 TGRC_3 TGRD_3 TIOCA3 TIOCB3 TIOCC3 TIOCD3 TGR compare match or input capture O O O O O O -- O /1 /4 /16 /64 /1024 TCLKA TCLKC TGRA_4 TGRB_4 -- TIOCA4 TIOCB4 /1 /4 /16 /64 /256 TCLKA TCLKC TCLKD TGRA_5 TGRB_5 -- TIOCA5 TIOCB5 General registers (TGR) General registers/ buffer registers I/O pins Counter clear function TGR compare match or input capture O O O O O O O -- TGR compare match or input capture O O O O O O O -- TGR compare match or input capture O O O O O O O -- TGR compare match or input capture O O O O O O O -- Compare 0 output match 1 output output Toggle output Input capture function Synchronous operation PWM mode Phase counting mode Buffer operation Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 402 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Item Channel 0 Channel 1 TGR compare match or input capture TGRA compare match or input capture TGRA compare match or input capture TGRA/ TGRB compare match or input capture 4 sources Channel 2 TGR compare match or input capture TGRA compare match or input capture TGRA compare match or input capture TGRA/ TGRB compare match or input capture 4 sources Channel 3 TGR compare match or input capture TGRA compare match or input capture TGRA compare match or input capture Channel 4 TGR compare match or input capture TGRA compare match or input capture TGRA compare match or input capture Channel 5 TGR compare match or input capture TGRA compare match or input capture TGRA compare match or input capture -- DTC TGR activation compare match or input capture DMAC TGRA activation compare match or input capture A/D TGRA converter compare trigger match or input capture PPG trigger TGRA/ TGRB compare match or input capture 5 sources * TGRA/ -- TGRB compare match or input capture 5 sources 4 sources Compare * match or input capture 3A Compare * match or input capture 3B Compare * match or * input capture 3C Compare match or input capture 3D Overflow Interrupt sources 4 sources Compare match or input capture 5A Compare match or input capture 5B Overflow Underflow * * * * Compare * match or input capture 0A Compare * match or input capture 0B Compare * match or * input capture 0C Compare match or input capture 0D Overflow Compare * match or input capture 1A Compare * match or input capture 1B Overflow * Underflow * Compare * match or input capture 2A Compare * match or input capture 2B Overflow * Underflow * Compare * match or input capture 4A Compare * match or input capture 4B Overflow * Underflow * * Legend: O: Possible : Not possible Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 403 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) TIORH TIORL TMDR Channel 3 TSR TGRC TGRD TGRA TGRB TCNT Control logic for channels 3 to 5 Input/output pins TIOCA3 Channel 3: TIOCB3 TIOCC3 TIOCD3 TIOCA4 Channel 4: TIOCB4 TIOCA5 Channel 5: TIOCB5 Channel 5 TGRA TIOR TMDR Channel 2 TSR Clock input Internal clock: /1 /4 /16 /64 /256 /1024 /4096 External clock: TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TCLKD TIER TCR Module data bus TSTR TSYR Bus interface TGRB TCNT Interrupt request signals Channel 3: TGI3A TGI3B TGI3C TGI3D TCI3V Channel 4: TGI4A TGI4B TCI4V TCI4U Channel 5: TGI5A TGI5B TCI5V TCI5U TMDR Channel 4 TSR TIER TCR TGRA TIOR TMDR TSR TIER TCR TGRB TCNT Common Control logic Internal data bus A/D conversion start request signal PPG output trigger signal TGRA TIOR TIER TCR TGRB TCNT Control logic for channels 0 to 2 TIORH TIORL TMDR Input/output pins TIOCA0 Channel 0: TIOCB0 TIOCC0 TIOCD0 TIOCA1 Channel 1: TIOCB1 Channel 2: TIOCA2 TIOCB2 Interrupt request signals Channel 0: TGI0A TGI0B TGI0C TGI0D TCI0V Channel 1: TGI1A TGI1B TCI1V TCI1U Channel 2: TGI2A TGI2B TCI2V TCI2U TMDR Channel 1 TSR TGRA TIOR Channel 0 TSR TIER TCR TGRB TGRC TGRD TGRB TCNT TCNT Legend: TSTR: TSYR: TCR: TMDR: TIOR (H, L): Timer start register Timer synchronous register Timer control register Timer mode register Timer I/O control registers (H, L) TIER: TSR: TGR (A, B, C, D): TCNT: TIER TCR Timer interrupt enable register Timer status register Timer general registers (A, B, C, D) Timer counter Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of TPU Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 404 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 TGRA Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.2 Input/Output Pins Table 10.2 Pin Configuration Channel All Symbol TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TCLKD 0 TIOCA0 TIOCB0 TIOCC0 TIOCD0 1 TIOCA1 TIOCB1 2 TIOCA2 TIOCB2 3 TIOCA3 TIOCB3 TIOCC3 TIOCD3 4 TIOCA4 TIOCB4 5 TIOCA5 TIOCB5 I/O Input Input Input Input I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Function External clock A input pin (Channels 1 and 5 phase counting mode A phase input) External clock B input pin (Channels 1 and 5 phase counting mode B phase input) External clock C input pin (Channels 2 and 4 phase counting mode A phase input) External clock D input pin (Channels 2 and 4 phase counting mode B phase input) TGRA_0 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRB_0 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRC_0 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRD_0 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRA_1 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRB_1 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRA_2 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRB_2 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRA_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRB_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRC_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRD_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRA_4 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRB_4 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRA_5 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin TGRB_5 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 405 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.3 Register Descriptions The TPU has the following registers in each channel. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Timer control register_0 (TCR_0) Timer mode register_0 (TMDR_0) Timer I/O control register H_0 (TIORH_0) Timer I/O control register L_0 (TIORL_0) Timer interrupt enable register_0 (TIER_0) Timer status register_0 (TSR_0) Timer counter_0 (TCNT_0) Timer general register A_0 (TGRA_0) Timer general register B_0 (TGRB_0) Timer general register C_0 (TGRC_0) Timer general register D_0 (TGRD_0) Timer control register_1 (TCR_1) Timer mode register_1 (TMDR_1) Timer I/O control register _1 (TIOR_1) Timer interrupt enable register_1 (TIER_1) Timer status register_1 (TSR_1) Timer counter_1 (TCNT_1) Timer general register A_1 (TGRA_1) Timer general register B_1 (TGRB_1) Timer control register_2 (TCR_2) Timer mode register_2 (TMDR_2) Timer I/O control register_2 (TIOR_2) Timer interrupt enable register_2 (TIER_2) Timer status register_2 (TSR_2) Timer counter_2 (TCNT_2) Timer general register A_2 (TGRA_2) Timer general register B_2 (TGRB_2) Timer control register_3 (TCR_3) Timer mode register_3 (TMDR_3) Timer I/O control register H_3 (TIORH_3) Timer I/O control register L_3 (TIORL_3) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 406 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Timer interrupt enable register_3 (TIER_3) Timer status register_3 (TSR_3) Timer counter_3 (TCNT_3) Timer general register A_3 (TGRA_3) Timer general register B_3 (TGRB_3) Timer general register C_3 (TGRC_3) Timer general register D_3 (TGRD_3) Timer control register_4 (TCR_4) Timer mode register_4 (TMDR_4) Timer I/O control register _4 (TIOR_4) Timer interrupt enable register_4 (TIER_4) Timer status register_4 (TSR_4) Timer counter_4 (TCNT_4) Timer general register A_4 (TGRA_4) Timer general register B_4 (TGRB_4) Timer control register_5 (TCR_5) Timer mode register_5 (TMDR_5) Timer I/O control register_5 (TIOR_5) Timer interrupt enable register_5 (TIER_5) Timer status register_5 (TSR_5) Timer counter_5 (TCNT_5) Timer general register A_5 (TGRA_5) Timer general register B_5 (TGRB_5) Common Registers * Timer start register (TSTR) * Timer synchronous register (TSYR) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 407 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.3.1 Timer Control Register (TCR) The TCR registers control the TCNT operation for each channel. The TPU has a total of six TCR registers, one for each channel. TCR register settings should be made only when TCNT operation is stopped. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Bit Name CCLR2 CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Counter Clear 2 to 0 These bits select the TCNT counter clearing source. See tables 10.3 and 10.4 for details. Clock Edge 1 and 0 These bits select the input clock edge. When the input clock is counted using both edges, the input clock period is halved (e.g. /4 both edges = /2 rising edge). If phase counting mode is used on channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, this setting is ignored and the phase counting mode setting has priority. Internal clock edge selection is valid when the input clock is /4 or slower. This setting is ignored if the input clock is /1, or when overflow/underflow of another channel is selected. 00: Count at rising edge 01: Count at falling edge 1x: Count at both edges Legend: x: Don't care 2 1 0 TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Time Prescaler 2 to 0 These bits select the TCNT counter clock. The clock source can be selected independently for each channel. See tables 10.5 to 10.10 for details. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 408 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.3 CCLR2 to CCLR0 (Channels 0 and 3) Channel 0, 3 Bit 7 CCLR2 0 Bit 6 CCLR1 0 Bit 5 CCLR0 0 1 1 0 1 Description TCNT clearing disabled TCNT cleared by TGRA compare match/input capture TCNT cleared by TGRB compare match/input capture TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/ synchronous operation*1 TCNT clearing disabled TCNT cleared by TGRC compare match/input capture*2 TCNT cleared by TGRD compare match/input capture*2 TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/ synchronous operation*1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Notes: 1. Synchronous operation setting is performed by setting the SYNC bit in TSYR to 1. 2. When TGRC or TGRD is used as a buffer register, TCNT is not cleared because the buffer register setting has priority, and compare match/input capture does not occur. Table 10.4 CCLR2 to CCLR0 (Channels 1, 2, 4, and 5) Channel 1, 2, 4, 5 Bit 7 Bit 6 Reserved*2 CCLR1 0 0 Bit 5 CCLR0 0 1 1 0 1 Description TCNT clearing disabled TCNT cleared by TGRA compare match/input capture TCNT cleared by TGRB compare match/input capture TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/ synchronous operation*1 Notes: 1. Synchronous operation setting is performed by setting the SYNC bit in TSYR to 1. 2. Bit 7 is reserved in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 409 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.5 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 0) Channel 0 Bit 2 TPSC2 0 Bit 1 TPSC1 0 Bit 0 TPSC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Internal clock: counts on /1 Internal clock: counts on /4 Internal clock: counts on /16 Internal clock: counts on /64 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input External clock: counts on TCLKD pin input Table 10.6 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 1) Channel 1 Bit 2 TPSC2 0 Bit 1 TPSC1 0 Bit 0 TPSC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Internal clock: counts on /1 Internal clock: counts on /4 Internal clock: counts on /16 Internal clock: counts on /64 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input Internal clock: counts on /256 Counts on TCNT2 overflow/underflow Note: This setting is ignored when channel 1 is in phase counting mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 410 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.7 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 2) Channel 2 Bit 2 TPSC2 0 Bit 1 TPSC1 0 Bit 0 TPSC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Internal clock: counts on /1 Internal clock: counts on /4 Internal clock: counts on /16 Internal clock: counts on /64 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input Internal clock: counts on /1024 Note: This setting is ignored when channel 2 is in phase counting mode. Table 10.8 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 3) Channel 3 Bit 2 TPSC2 0 Bit 1 TPSC1 0 Bit 0 TPSC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Internal clock: counts on /1 Internal clock: counts on /4 Internal clock: counts on /16 Internal clock: counts on /64 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input Internal clock: counts on /1024 Internal clock: counts on /256 Internal clock: counts on /4096 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 411 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.9 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 4) Channel 4 Bit 2 TPSC2 0 Bit 1 TPSC1 0 Bit 0 TPSC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Internal clock: counts on /1 Internal clock: counts on /4 Internal clock: counts on /16 Internal clock: counts on /64 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input Internal clock: counts on /1024 Counts on TCNT5 overflow/underflow Note: This setting is ignored when channel 4 is in phase counting mode. Table 10.10 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 5) Channel 5 Bit 2 TPSC2 0 Bit 1 TPSC1 0 Bit 0 TPSC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Internal clock: counts on /1 Internal clock: counts on /4 Internal clock: counts on /16 Internal clock: counts on /64 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input Internal clock: counts on /256 External clock: counts on TCLKD pin input Note: This setting is ignored when channel 5 is in phase counting mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 412 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.3.2 Timer Mode Register (TMDR) TMDR registers are used to set the operating mode for each channel. The TPU has six TMDR registers, one for each channel. TMDR register settings should be made only when TCNT operation is stopped. Bit 7, 6 Bit Name Initial Value All 1 R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified. 5 BFB 0 R/W Buffer Operation B Specifies whether TGRB is to operate in the normal way, or TGRB and TGRD are to be used together for buffer operation. When TGRD is used as a buffer register, TGRD input capture/output compare is not generated. In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, which have no TGRD, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 0: TGRB operates normally 1: TGRB and TGRD used together for buffer operation 4 BFA 0 R/W Buffer Operation A Specifies whether TGRA is to operate in the normal way, or TGRA and TGRC are to be used together for buffer operation. When TGRC is used as a buffer register, TGRC input capture/output compare is not generated. In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, which have no TGRC, bit 4 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 0: TGRA operates normally 1: TGRA and TGRC used together for buffer operation 3 2 1 0 MD3 MD2 MD1 MD0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Modes 3 to 0 These bits are used to set the timer operating mode. MD3 is a reserved bit. The write value should always be 0. See table 10.11 for details. - - Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 413 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.11 MD3 to MD0 Bit 3 MD3*1 0 Bit 2 MD2*2 0 Bit 1 MD1 0 Bit 0 MD0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 x x 0 1 1 x Description Normal operation Reserved PWM mode 1 PWM mode 2 Phase counting mode 1 Phase counting mode 2 Phase counting mode 3 Phase counting mode 4 -- Legend: x: Don't care Notes: 1. MD3 is a reserved bit. The write value should always be 0. 2. Phase counting mode cannot be set for channels 0 and 3. In this case, 0 should always be written to MD2. 10.3.3 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR) TIOR registers control the TGR registers. The TPU has eight TIOR registers, two each for channels 0 and 3, and one each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. Care is required since TIOR is affected by the TMDR setting. The initial output specified by TIOR is valid when the counter is stopped (the CST bit in TSTR is cleared to 0). Note also that, in PWM mode 2, the output at the point at which the counter is cleared to 0 is specified. When TGRC or TGRD is designated for buffer operation, this setting is invalid and the register operates as a buffer register. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 414 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) TIORH_0, TIOR_1, TIOR_2, TIORH_3, TIOR_4, TIOR_5 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description I/O Control B3 to B0 Specify the function of TGRB. For details, see tables 10.12, 10.14, 10.15, 10.16, 10.18, and 10.19. I/O Control A3 to A0 Specify the function of TGRA. For details, see tables 10.20, 10.22, 10.23, 10.24, 10.26, and 10.27. TIORL_0, TIORL_3 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name IOD3 IOD2 IOD1 IOD0 IOC3 IOC2 IOC1 IOC0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description I/O Control D3 to D0 Specify the function of TGRD. For details, see tables 10.13, and 10.17. I/O Control C3 to C0 Specify the function of TGRC. For details, see tables 10.21, and 10.25 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 415 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.12 TIORH_0 Description Bit 7 IOB3 0 Bit 6 IOB2 0 Bit 5 IOB1 0 Bit 4 IOB0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 x x x Input capture register TGRB_0 Function Output compare register TIOCB0 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output Toggle output at compare match Capture input source is TIOCB0 pin Input capture at rising edge Capture input source is TIOCB0 pin Input capture at falling edge Capture input source is TIOCB0 pin Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 1/count clock Input capture at TCNT_1 count- up/count-down* Legend: x: Don't care Note: * When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR_1 are set to B'000 and /1 is used as the TCNT_1 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 416 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.13 TIORL_0 Description Bit 7 IOD3 0 Bit 6 IOD2 0 Bit 5 IOD1 0 Bit 4 IOD0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 x x x Input capture 2 register* TGRD_0 Function Output compare 2 register* TIOCD0 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output Toggle output at compare match Capture input source is TIOCD0 pin Input capture at rising edge Capture input source is TIOCD0 pin Input capture at falling edge Capture input source is TIOCD0 pin Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 1/count clock 1 Input capture at TCNT_1 count-up/count-down* Legend: x: Don't care Notes: 1. When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR_1 are set to B'000 and /1 is used as the TCNT_1 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated. 2. When the BFB bit in TMDR_0 is set to 1 and TGRD_0 is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 417 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.14 TIOR_1 Description Bit 7 IOB3 0 Bit 6 IOB2 0 Bit 5 IOB1 0 Bit 4 IOB0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 x x x Input capture register TGRB_1 Function Output compare register TIOCB1 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output Toggle output at compare match Capture input source is TIOCB1 pin Input capture at rising edge Capture input source is TIOCB1 pin Input capture at falling edge Capture input source is TIOCB1 pin Input capture at both edges TGRC_0 compare match/input capture Input capture at generation of TGRC_0 compare match/input capture Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 418 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.15 TIOR_2 Description Bit 7 IOB3 0 Bit 6 IOB2 0 Bit 5 IOB1 0 Bit 4 IOB0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 x 0 0 1 1 Legend: x: Don't care x Input capture register TGRB_2 Function Output compare register TIOCB2 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output Toggle output at compare match Capture input source is TIOCB2 pin Input capture at rising edge Capture input source is TIOCB2 pin Input capture at falling edge Capture input source is TIOCB2 pin Input capture at both edges Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 419 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.16 TIORH_3 Description Bit 7 IOB3 0 Bit 6 IOB2 0 Bit 5 IOB1 0 Bit 4 IOB0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 x x x Input capture register TGRB_3 Function Output compare register TIOCB3 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output Toggle output at compare match Capture input source is TIOCB3 pin Input capture at rising edge Capture input source is TIOCB3 pin Input capture at falling edge Capture input source is TIOCB3 pin Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 4/count clock Input capture at TCNT_4 count-up/count-down* Legend: x: Don't care Note: * When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR_4 are set to B'000 and /1 is used as the TCNT_4 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 420 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.17 TIORL_3 Description Bit 7 IOD3 0 Bit 6 IOD2 0 Bit 5 IOD1 0 Bit 4 IOD0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 x x x Input capture 2 register* TGRD_3 Function Output compare 2 register* TIOCD3 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output Toggle output at compare match Capture input source is TIOCD3 pin Input capture at rising edge Capture input source is TIOCD3 pin Input capture at falling edge Capture input source is TIOCD3 pin Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 4/count clock 1 Input capture at TCNT_4 count-up/count-down* Legend: x: Don't care Notes: 1. When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR_4 are set to B'000 and /1 is used as the TCNT_4 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated. 2. When the BFB bit in TMDR_3 is set to 1 and TGRD_3 is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 421 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.18 TIOR_4 Description Bit 7 IOB3 0 Bit 6 IOB2 0 Bit 5 IOB1 0 Bit 4 IOB0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 x x x Input capture register TGRB_4 Function Output compare register TIOCB4 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output Toggle output at compare match Capture input source is TIOCB4 pin Input capture at rising edge Capture input source is TIOCB4 pin Input capture at falling edge Capture input source is TIOCB4 pin Input capture at both edges Capture input source is TGRC_3 compare match/input capture Input capture at generation of TGRC_3 compare match/input capture Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 422 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.19 TIOR_5 Description Bit 7 IOB3 0 Bit 6 IOB2 0 Bit 5 IOB1 0 Bit 4 IOB0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 x 0 0 1 1 Legend: x: Don't care x Input capture register TGRB_5 Function Output compare register TIOCB5 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output Toggle output at compare match Capture input source is TIOCB5 pin Input capture at rising edge Capture input source is TIOCB5 pin Input capture at falling edge Capture input source is TIOCB5 pin Input capture at both edges Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 423 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.20 TIORH_0 Description Bit 3 IOA3 0 Bit 2 IOA2 0 Bit 1 IOA1 0 Bit 0 IOA0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 x x x Input capture register TGRA_0 Function Output compare register TIOCA0 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output Toggle output at compare match Capture input source is TIOCA0 pin Input capture at rising edge Capture input source is TIOCA0 pin Input capture at falling edge Capture input source is TIOCA0 pin Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 1/count clock Input capture at TCNT_1 count-up/count-down Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 424 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.21 TIORL_0 Description Bit 3 IOC3 0 Bit 2 IOC2 0 Bit 1 IOC1 0 Bit 0 IOC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 x x x Input capture register* TGRC_0 Function Output compare register* TIOCC0 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output Toggle output at compare match Capture input source is TIOCC0 pin Input capture at rising edge Capture input source is TIOCC0 pin Input capture at falling edge Capture input source is TIOCC0 pin Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 1/count clock Input capture at TCNT_1 count-up/count-down Legend: x: Don't care Note: * When the BFA bit in TMDR_0 is set to 1 and TGRC_0 is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 425 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.22 TIOR_1 Description Bit 3 IOA3 0 Bit 2 IOA2 0 Bit 1 IOA1 0 Bit 0 IOA0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 x x x Input capture register TGRA_1 Function Output compare register TIOCA1 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output Toggle output at compare match Capture input source is TIOCA1 pin Input capture at rising edge Capture input source is TIOCA1 pin Input capture at falling edge Capture input source is TIOCA1 pin Input capture at both edges Capture input source is TGRA_0 compare match/input capture Input capture at generation of channel 0/TGRA_0 compare match/input capture Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 426 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.23 TIOR_2 Description Bit 3 IOA3 0 Bit 2 IOA2 0 Bit 1 IOA1 0 Bit 0 IOA0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 x 0 0 1 1 Legend: x: Don't care x Input capture register TGRA_2 Function Output compare register TIOCA2 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output Toggle output at compare match Capture input source is TIOCA2 pin Input capture at rising edge Capture input source is TIOCA2 pin Input capture at falling edge Capture input source is TIOCA2 pin Input capture at both edges Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 427 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.24 TIORH_3 Description Bit 3 IOA3 0 Bit 2 IOA2 0 Bit 1 IOA1 0 Bit 0 IOA0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 x x x Input capture register TGRA_3 Function Output compare register TIOCA3 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output Toggle output at compare match Capture input source is TIOCA3 pin Input capture at rising edge Capture input source is TIOCA3 pin Input capture at falling edge Capture input source is TIOCA3 pin Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 4/count clock Input capture at TCNT_4 count-up/count-down Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 428 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.25 TIORL_3 Description Bit 3 IOC3 0 Bit 2 IOC2 0 Bit 1 IOC1 0 Bit 0 IOC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 x x x Input capture register* TGRC_3 Function Output compare register* TIOCC3 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output Toggle output at compare match Capture input source is TIOCC3 pin Input capture at rising edge Capture input source is TIOCC3 pin Input capture at falling edge Capture input source is TIOCC3 pin Input capture at both edges Capture input source is channel 4/count clock Input capture at TCNT_4 count-up/count-down Legend: x: Don't care Note: * When the BFA bit in TMDR_3 is set to 1 and TGRC_3 is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 429 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.26 TIOR_4 Description Bit 3 IOA3 0 Bit 2 IOA2 0 Bit 1 IOA1 0 Bit 0 IOA0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 x x x Input capture register TGRA_4 Function Output compare register TIOCA4 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output Toggle output at compare match Capture input source is TIOCA4 pin Input capture at rising edge Capture input source is TIOCA4 pin Input capture at falling edge Capture input source is TIOCA4 pin Input capture at both edges Capture input source is TGRA_3 compare match/input capture Input capture at generation of TGRA_3 compare match/input capture Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 430 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.27 TIOR_5 Description Bit 3 IOA3 0 Bit 2 IOA2 0 Bit 1 IOA1 0 Bit 0 IOA0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 x 0 0 1 1 Legend: x: Don't care x Input capture register TGRA_5 Function Output compare register TIOCA5 Pin Function Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 0 output Toggle output at compare match Output disabled Initial output is 1 output 0 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output 1 output at compare match Initial output is 1 output Toggle output at compare match Input capture source is TIOCA5 pin Input capture at rising edge Input capture source is TIOCA5 pin Input capture at falling edge Input capture source is TIOCA5 pin Input capture at both edges Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 431 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.3.4 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER) TIER registers control enabling or disabling of interrupt requests for each channel. The TPU has six TIER registers, one for each channel. Bit 7 Bit Name TTGE Initial value 0 R/W R/W Description A/D Conversion Start Request Enable Enables or disables generation of A/D conversion start requests by TGRA input capture/compare match. 0: A/D conversion start request generation disabled 1: A/D conversion start request generation enabled 6 5 - TCIEU 1 0 - R/W Reserved This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Underflow Interrupt Enable Enables or disables interrupt requests (TCIU) by the TCFU flag when the TCFU flag in TSR is set to 1 in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. In channels 0 and 3, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 0: Interrupt requests (TCIU) by TCFU disabled 1: Interrupt requests (TCIU) by TCFU enabled 4 TCIEV 0 R/W Overflow Interrupt Enable Enables or disables interrupt requests (TCIV) by the TCFV flag when the TCFV flag in TSR is set to 1. 0: Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV disabled 1: Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV enabled 3 TGIED 0 R/W TGR Interrupt Enable D Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGID) by the TGFD bit when the TGFD bit in TSR is set to 1 in channels 0 and 3. In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 3 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 0: Interrupt requests (TGID) by TGFD bit disabled 1: Interrupt requests (TGID) by TGFD bit enabled Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 432 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 2 Bit Name TGIEC Initial value 0 R/W R/W Description TGR Interrupt Enable C Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIC) by the TGFC bit when the TGFC bit in TSR is set to 1 in channels 0 and 3. In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 2 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 0: Interrupt requests (TGIC) by TGFC bit disabled 1: Interrupt requests (TGIC) by TGFC bit enabled 1 TGIEB 0 R/W TGR Interrupt Enable B Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIB) by the TGFB bit when the TGFB bit in TSR is set to 1. 0: Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB bit disabled 1: Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB bit enabled 0 TGIEA 0 R/W TGR Interrupt Enable A Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIA) by the TGFA bit when the TGFA bit in TSR is set to 1. 0: Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA bit disabled 1: Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA bit enabled Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 433 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.3.5 Timer Status Register (TSR) TSR registers indicate the status of each channel. The TPU has six TSR registers, one for each channel. Bit 7 Bit Name TCFD Initial value 1 R/W R Description Count Direction Flag Status flag that shows the direction in which TCNT counts in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. In channels 0 and 3, bit 7 is reserved. It is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. 0: TCNT counts down 1: TCNT counts up 6 - 1 - Reserved This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. 5 TCFU 0 R/(W)* Underflow Flag Status flag that indicates that TCNT underflow has occurred when channels 1, 2, 4, and 5 are set to phase counting mode. In channels 0 and 3, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. [Setting condition] When the TCNT value underflows (changes from H'0000 to H'FFFF) [Clearing condition] When 0 is written to TCFU after reading TCFU = 1 4 TCFV 0 R/(W)* Overflow Flag Status flag that indicates that TCNT overflow has occurred. [Setting condition] When the TCNT value overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000) [Clearing condition] When 0 is written to TCFV after reading TCFV = 1 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 434 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit Name TGFD Bit 3 Initial value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Input Capture/Output Compare Flag D Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRD input capture or compare match in channels 0 and 3. In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 3 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. [Setting conditions] * * When TCNT = TGRD while TGRD is functioning as output compare register When TCNT value is transferred to TGRD by input capture signal while TGRD is functioning as input capture register When DTC is activated by TGID interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0 When 0 is written to TGFD after reading TGFD =1 [Clearing conditions] * * 2 TGFC 0 R/(W)* Input Capture/Output Compare Flag C Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRC input capture or compare match in channels 0 and 3. In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 2 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. [Setting conditions] * * When TCNT = TGRC while TGRC is functioning as output compare register When TCNT value is transferred to TGRC by input capture signal while TGRC is functioning as input capture register When DTC is activated by TGIC interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0 When 0 is written to TGFC after reading TGFC =1 [Clearing conditions] * * Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 435 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit Name TGFB Bit 1 Initial value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Input Capture/Output Compare Flag B Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRB input capture or compare match. [Setting conditions] * * When TCNT = TGRB while TGRB is functioning as output compare register When TCNT value is transferred to TGRB by input capture signal while TGRB is functioning as input capture register When DTC is activated by TGIB interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0 When 0 is written to TGFB after reading TGFB =1 [Clearing conditions] * * 0 TGFA 0 R/(W)* Input Capture/Output Compare Flag A Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRA input capture or compare match. [Setting conditions] * * When TCNT = TGRA while TGRA is functioning as output compare register When TCNT value is transferred to TGRA by input capture signal while TGRA is functioning as input capture register When DTC is activated by TGIA interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0 When 0 is written to TGFA after reading TGFA =1 When DMAC is activated by TGIA interrupt while DTE bit of DMABCR in DMAC is set to 1 [Clearing conditions] * * * Note: * Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 436 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.3.6 Timer Counter (TCNT) The TCNT registers are 16-bit readable/writable counters. The TPU has six TCNT counters, one for each channel. The TCNT counters are initialized to H'0000 by a reset, or in hardware standby mode. The TCNT counters cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit unit. 10.3.7 Timer General Register (TGR) The TGR registers are 16-bit readable/writable registers with a dual function as output compare and input capture registers. The TPU has 16 TGR registers, four each for channels 0 and 3 and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. TGRC and TGRD for channels 0 and 3 can also be designated for operation as buffer registers. The TGR registers cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit unit. TGR buffer register combinations are TGRA-TGRC and TGRB-TGRD. 10.3.8 Timer Start Register (TSTR) TSTR selects operation/stoppage for channels 0 to 5. When setting the operating mode in TMDR or setting the count clock in TCR, first stop the TCNT counter. Bit 7, 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name Initial value All 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W Description Reserved The write value should always be 0. CST5 CST4 CST3 CST2 CST1 CST0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Counter Start 5 to 0 These bits select operation or stoppage for TCNT. If 0 is written to the CST bit during operation with the TIOC pin designated for output, the counter stops but the TIOC pin output compare output level is retained. If TIOR is written to when the CST bit is cleared to 0, the pin output level will be changed to the set initial output value. 0: TCNT_5 to TCNT_0 count operation is stopped 1: TCNT_5 to TCNT_0 performs count operation - - Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 437 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.3.9 Timer Synchronous Register (TSYR) TSYR selects independent operation or synchronous operation for the TCNT counters of channels 0 to 5. A channel performs synchronous operation when the corresponding bit in TSYR is set to 1. Bit 7, 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name Initial value R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved The write value should always be 0. Timer Synchronization 5 to 0 These bits select whether operation is independent of or synchronized with other channels. When synchronous operation is selected, synchronous presetting of multiple channels, and synchronous clearing through counter clearing on another channel are possible. To set synchronous operation, the SYNC bits for at least two channels must be set to 1. To set synchronous clearing, in addition to the SYNC bit, the TCNT clearing source must also be set by means of bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR. 0: TCNT_5 to TCNT_0 operates independently (TCNT presetting /clearing is unrelated to other channels) 1: TCNT_5 to TCNT_0 performs synchronous operation (TCNT synchronous presetting/ synchronous clearing is possible) - SYNC5 SYNC4 SYNC3 SYNC2 SYNC1 SYNC0 - 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 438 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.4 10.4.1 Operation Basic Functions Each channel has a TCNT and TGR register. TCNT performs up-counting, and is also capable of free-running operation, periodic counting, and external event counting. Each TGR can be used as an input capture register or output compare register. Counter Operation: When one of bits CST0 to CST5 is set to 1 in TSTR, the TCNT counter for the corresponding channel starts counting. TCNT can operate as a free-running counter, periodic counter, and so on. 1. Example of count operation setting procedure Figure 10.2 shows an example of the count operation setting procedure. Operation selection Select counter clock [1] [1] Select the counter clock with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. At the same time, select the input clock edge with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. Free-running counter [2] For periodic counter operation, select the TGR to be used as the TCNT clearing source with bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR. [3] Designate the TGR selected in [2] as an output compare register by means of TIOR. [4] Set the periodic counter cycle in the TGR selected in [2]. Start count Periodic counter Select counter clearing source [2] Select output compare register [3] Set period [4] Start count [5] Figure 10.2 Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 439 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 2. Free-running count operation and periodic count operation Immediately after a reset, the TPU's TCNT counters are all designated as free-running counters. When the relevant bit in TSTR is set to 1 the corresponding TCNT counter starts upcount operation as a free-running counter. When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000), the TCFV bit in TSR is set to 1. If the value of the corresponding TCIEV bit in TIER is 1 at this point, the TPU requests an interrupt. After overflow, TCNT starts counting up again from H'0000. Figure 10.3 illustrates free-running counter operation. TCNT value H'FFFF H'0000 Time CST bit TCFV Figure 10.3 Free-Running Counter Operation When compare match is selected as the TCNT clearing source, the TCNT counter for the relevant channel performs periodic count operation. The TGR register for setting the period is designated as an output compare register, and counter clearing by compare match is selected by means of bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR. After the settings have been made, TCNT starts count-up operation as a periodic counter when the corresponding bit in TSTR is set to 1. When the count value matches the value in TGR, the TGF bit in TSR is set to 1 and TCNT is cleared to H'0000. If the value of the corresponding TGIE bit in TIER is 1 at this point, the TPU requests an interrupt. After a compare match, TCNT starts counting up again from H'0000. Figure 10.4 illustrates periodic counter operation. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 440 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) TCNT value TGR Counter cleared by TGR compare match H'0000 Time CST bit Flag cleared by software or DTC activation TGF Figure 10.4 Periodic Counter Operation Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 441 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Waveform Output by Compare Match: The TPU can perform 0, 1, or toggle output from the corresponding output pin using a compare match. 1. Example of setting procedure for waveform output by compare match Figure 10.5 shows an example of the setting procedure for waveform output by a compare match. [1] Select initial value 0 output or 1 output, and compare match output value 0 output, 1 output, or toggle output, by means of TIOR. The set initial value is output at the TIOC pin until the first compare match occurs. [2] Set the timing for compare match generation in TGR. Set output timing [2] Output selection Select waveform output mode [1] [3] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. Start count [3] Figure 10.5 Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 442 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 2. Examples of waveform output operation Figure 10.6 shows an example of 0 output/1 output. In this example, TCNT has been designated as a free-running counter, and settings have been made so that 1 is output by compare match A, and 0 is output by compare match B. When the set level and the pin level match, the pin level does not change. TCNT value H'FFFF TGRA TGRB H'0000 No change TIOCA TIOCB No change No change No change 1 output 0 output Time Figure 10.6 Example of 0 Output/1 Output Operation Figure 10.7 shows an example of toggle output. In this example TCNT has been designated as a periodic counter (with counter clearing performed by compare match B), and settings have been made so that output is toggled by both compare match A and compare match B. TCNT value Counter cleared by TGRB compare match H'FFFF TGRB TGRA H'0000 Time Toggle output Toggle output TIOCB TIOCA Figure 10.7 Example of Toggle Output Operation Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 443 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Input Capture Function: The TCNT value can be transferred to TGR on detection of the TIOC pin input edge. Rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected as the detection edge. For channels 0, 1, 3, and 4, it is also possible to specify another channel's counter input clock or compare match signal as the input capture source. Note: When another channel's counter input clock is used as the input capture input for channels 0 and 3, /1 should not be selected as the counter input clock used for input capture input. Input capture will not be generated if /1 is selected. 1. Example of setting procedure for input capture operation Figure 10.8 shows an example of the setting procedure for input capture operation. Input selection [1] Designate TGR as an input capture register by means of TIOR, and select the input capture source and input signal edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both edges). [1] Select input capture input [2] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. Start count [2] Figure 10.8 Example of Setting Procedure for Input Capture Operation Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 444 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 2. Example of input capture operation Figure 10.9 shows an example of input capture operation. In this example both rising and falling edges have been selected as the TIOCA pin input capture input edge, falling edge has been selected as the TIOCB pin input capture input edge, and counter clearing by TGRB input capture has been designated for TCNT. Counter cleared by TIOCB input (falling edge) TCNT value H'0180 H'0160 H'0010 H'0005 H'0000 Time TIOCA TGRA H'0005 H'0160 H'0010 TIOCB TGRB H'0180 Figure 10.9 Example of Input Capture Operation 10.4.2 Synchronous Operation In synchronous operation, the values in multiple TCNT counters can be rewritten simultaneously (synchronous presetting). Also, multiple of TCNT counters can be cleared simultaneously (synchronous clearing) by making the appropriate setting in TCR. Synchronous operation enables TGR to be incremented with respect to a single time base. Channels 0 to 5 can all be designated for synchronous operation. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 445 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 10.10 shows an example of the synchronous operation setting procedure. Synchronous operation selection Set synchronous operation [1] Synchronous presetting Synchronous clearing Set TCNT [2] Clearing source generation channel? Yes Select counter clearing source No [3] Set synchronous counter clearing [4] Start count [5] Start count [5] [1] Set to 1 the SYNC bits in TSYR corresponding to the channels to be designated for synchronous operation. [2] When the TCNT counter of any of the channels designated for synchronous operation is written to, the same value is simultaneously written to the other TCNT counters. [3] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to specify TCNT clearing by input capture/output compare, etc. [4] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to designate synchronous clearing for the counter clearing source. [5] Set to 1 the CST bits in TSTR for the relevant channels, to start the count operation. Figure 10.10 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure Example of Synchronous Operation: Figure 10.11 shows an example of synchronous operation. In this example, synchronous operation and PWM mode 1 have been designated for channels 0 to 2, TGRB_0 compare match has been set as the channel 0 counter clearing source, and synchronous clearing has been set for the channel 1 and 2 counter clearing source. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 446 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Three-phase PWM waveforms are output from pins TIOCA0, TIOCA1, and TIOCA2. At this time, synchronous presetting, and synchronous clearing by TGRB_0 compare match, is performed for channel 0 to 2 TCNT counters, and the data set in TGRB_0 is used as the PWM cycle. For details on PWM modes, see section 10.4.5, PWM Modes. Synchronous clearing by TGRB_0 compare match TCNT0 to TCNT2 values TGRB_0 TGRB_1 TGRA_0 TGRB_2 TGRA_1 TGRA_2 H'0000 Time TIOCA_0 TIOCA_1 TIOCA_2 Figure 10.11 Example of Synchronous Operation 10.4.3 Buffer Operation Buffer operation, provided for channels 0 and 3, enables TGRC and TGRD to be used as buffer registers. Buffer operation differs depending on whether TGR has been designated as an input capture register or a compare match register. Table 10.28 shows the register combinations used in buffer operation. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 447 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.28 Register Combinations in Buffer Operation Channel 0 Timer General Register TGRA_0 TGRB_0 3 TGRA_3 TGRB_3 Buffer Register TGRC_0 TGRD_0 TGRC_3 TGRD_3 * When TGR is an output compare register When a compare match occurs, the value in the buffer register for the corresponding channel is transferred to the timer general register. This operation is illustrated in figure 10.12. Compare match signal Buffer register Timer general register Comparator TCNT Figure 10.12 Compare Match Buffer Operation * When TGR is an input capture register When input capture occurs, the value in TCNT is transferred to TGR and the value previously held in the timer general register is transferred to the buffer register. This operation is illustrated in figure 10.13. Input capture signal Timer general register Buffer register TCNT Figure 10.13 Input Capture Buffer Operation Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 448 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 10.14 shows an example of the buffer operation setting procedure. Buffer operation [1] Designate TGR as an input capture register or output compare register by means of TIOR. [1] Select TGR function [2] Designate TGR for buffer operation with bits BFA and BFB in TMDR. [3] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. Set buffer operation [2] Start count [3] Figure 10.14 Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 449 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Examples of Buffer Operation: 1. When TGR is an output compare register Figure 10.15 shows an operation example in which PWM mode 1 has been designated for channel 0, and buffer operation has been designated for TGRA and TGRC. The settings used in this example are TCNT clearing by compare match B, 1 output at compare match A, and 0 output at compare match B. As buffer operation has been set, when compare match A occurs the output changes and the value in buffer register TGRC is simultaneously transferred to timer general register TGRA. This operation is repeated each time compare match A occurs. For details on PWM modes, see section 10.4.5, PWM Modes. TCNT value TGRB_0 H'0200 TGRA_0 H'0000 TGRC_0 H'0200 Transfer TGRA_0 H'0200 H'0450 H'0450 H'0520 Time H'0520 H'0450 TIOCA Figure 10.15 Example of Buffer Operation (1) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 450 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 2. When TGR is an input capture register Figure 10.16 shows an operation example in which TGRA has been designated as an input capture register, and buffer operation has been designated for TGRA and TGRC. Counter clearing by TGRA input capture has been set for TCNT, and both rising and falling edges have been selected as the TIOCA pin input capture input edge. As buffer operation has been set, when the TCNT value is stored in TGRA upon occurrence of input capture A, the value previously stored in TGRA is simultaneously transferred to TGRC. TCNT value H'0F07 H'09FB H'0532 H'0000 Time TIOCA TGRA H'0532 H'0F07 H'09FB TGRC H'0532 H'0F07 Figure 10.16 Example of Buffer Operation (2) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 451 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.4.4 Cascaded Operation In cascaded operation, two 16-bit counters for different channels are used together as a 32-bit counter. This function works by counting the channel 1 (channel 4) counter clock at overflow/underflow of TCNT_2 (TCNT_5) as set in bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. Underflow occurs only when the lower 16-bit TCNT is in phase counting mode. Table 10.29 shows the register combinations used in cascaded operation. Note: When phase counting mode is set for channel 1 or 4, the counter clock setting is invalid and the counter operates independently in phase counting mode. Table 10.29 Cascaded Combinations Combination Channels 1 and 2 Channels 4 and 5 Upper 16 Bits TCNT_1 TCNT_4 Lower 16 Bits TCNT_2 TCNT_5 Example of Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 10.17 shows an example of the setting procedure for cascaded operation. [1] Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in the channel 1 (channel 4) TCR to B'1111 to select TCNT_2 (TCNT_5) overflow/underflow counting. [2] Set the CST bit in TSTR for the upper and lower channel to 1 to start the count operation. Cascaded operation Set cascading [1] Start count [2] Figure 10.17 Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 452 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Examples of Cascaded Operation: Figure 10.18 illustrates the operation when counting upon TCNT_2 overflow/underflow has been set for TCNT_1, TGRA_1 and TGRA_2 have been designated as input capture registers, and the TIOC pin rising edge has been selected. When a rising edge is input to the TIOCA1 and TIOCA2 pins simultaneously, the upper 16 bits of the 32-bit data are transferred to TGRA_1, and the lower 16 bits to TGRA_2. TCNT_1 clock TCNT_1 TCNT_2 clock TCNT_2 TIOCA1, TIOCA2 TGRA_1 H'03A2 H'FFFF H'0000 H'0001 H'03A1 H'03A2 TGRA_2 H'0000 Figure 10.18 Example of Cascaded Operation (1) Figure 10.19 illustrates the operation when counting upon TCNT_2 overflow/underflow has been set for TCNT_1, and phase counting mode has been designated for channel 2. TCNT_1 is incremented by TCNT_2 overflow and decremented by TCNT_2 underflow. TCLKC TCLKD TCNT_2 FFFD FFFE FFFF 0000 0001 0002 0001 0000 FFFF TCNT_1 0000 0001 0000 Figure 10.19 Example of Cascaded Operation (2) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 453 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.4.5 PWM Modes In PWM mode, PWM waveforms are output from the output pins. 0, 1, or toggle output can be selected as the output level in response to compare match of each TGR. Settings of TGR registers can output a PWM waveform in the range of 0-% to 100-% duty. Designating TGR compare match as the counter clearing source enables the cycle to be set in that register. All channels can be designated for PWM mode independently. Synchronous operation is also possible. There are two PWM modes, as described below. * PWM mode 1 PWM output is generated from the TIOCA and TIOCC pins by pairing TGRA with TGRB and TGRC with TGRD. The outputs specified by bits IOA3 to IOA0 and IOC3 to IOC0 in TIOR are output from the TIOCA and TIOCC pins at compare matches A and C, respectively. The outputs specified by bits IOB3 to IOB0 and IOD3 to IOD0 in TIOR are output at compare matches B and D, respectively. The initial output value is the value set in TGRA or TGRC. If the set values of paired TGRs are identical, the output value does not change when a compare match occurs. In PWM mode 1, a maximum 8-phase PWM output is possible. * PWM mode 2 PWM output is generated using one TGR as the cycle register and the others as duty registers. The output specified in TIOR is performed by means of compare matches. Upon counter clearing by a synchronization register compare match, the output value of each pin is the initial value set in TIOR. If the set values of the cycle and duty registers are identical, the output value does not change when a compare match occurs. In PWM mode 2, a maximum 15-phase PWM output is possible by combined use with synchronous operation. The correspondence between PWM output pins and registers is shown in table 10.30. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 454 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.30 PWM Output Registers and Output Pins Output Pins Channel 0 Registers TGRA_0 TGRB_0 TGRC_0 TGRD_0 1 TGRA_1 TGRB_1 2 TGRA_2 TGRB_2 3 TGRA_3 TGRB_3 TGRC_3 TGRD_3 4 TGRA_4 TGRB_4 5 TGRA_5 TGRB_5 TIOCA5 TIOCA4 TIOCC3 TIOCA3 TIOCA2 TIOCA1 TIOCC0 PWM Mode 1 TIOCA0 PWM Mode 2 TIOCA0 TIOCB0 TIOCC0 TIOCD0 TIOCA1 TIOCB1 TIOCA2 TIOCB2 TIOCA3 TIOCB3 TIOCC3 TIOCD3 TIOCA4 TIOCB4 TIOCA5 TIOCB5 Note: In PWM mode 2, PWM output is not possible for the TGR register in which the cycle is set. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 455 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure: Figure 10.20 shows an example of the PWM mode setting procedure. PWM mode Select counter clock [1] [1] Select the counter clock with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. At the same time, select the input clock edge with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. [2] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to select the TGR to be used as the TCNT clearing source. Select counter clearing source [2] Select waveform output level [3] [3] Use TIOR to designate the TGR as an output compare register, and select the initial value and output value. [4] Set the cycle in the TGR selected in [2], and set the duty in the other TGRs. [5] Select the PWM mode with bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR. Set TGR [4] Set PWM mode [5] [6] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. Start count [6] Figure 10.20 Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure Examples of PWM Mode Operation: Figure 10.21 shows an example of PWM mode 1 operation. In this example, TGRA compare match is set as the TCNT clearing source, 0 is set for the TGRA initial output value and output value, and 1 is set as the TGRB output value. In this case, the value set in TGRA is used as the cycle, and the values set in TGRB registers as the duty. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 456 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) TCNT value TGRA Counter cleared by TGRA compare match TGRB H'0000 Time TIOCA Figure 10.21 Example of PWM Mode Operation (1) Figure 10.22 shows an example of PWM mode 2 operation. In this example, synchronous operation is designated for channels 0 and 1, TGRB_1 compare match is set as the TCNT clearing source, and 0 is set for the initial output value and 1 for the output value of the other TGR registers (TGRA_0 to TGRD_0, TGRA_1), to output a 5-phase PWM waveform. In this case, the value set in TGRB_1 is used as the cycle, and the values set in the other TGRs as the duty. Counter cleared by TGRB_1 compare match TCNT value TGRB_1 TGRA_1 TGRD_0 TGRC_0 TGRB_0 TGRA_0 H'0000 Time TIOCA0 TIOCB0 TIOCC0 TIOCD0 TIOCA1 Figure 10.22 Example of PWM Mode Operation (2) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 457 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Figure 10.23 shows examples of PWM waveform output with 0% duty and 100% duty in PWM mode. TCNT value TGRB rewritten TGRA TGRB H'0000 TGRB rewritten TGRB rewritten Time TIOCA 0% duty Output does not change when cycle register and duty register compare matches occur simultaneously TCNT value TGRB rewritten TGRA TGRB rewritten TGRB H'0000 100% duty TGRB rewritten Time TIOCA Output does not change when cycle register and duty register compare matches occur simultaneously TCNT value TGRB rewritten TGRA TGRB rewritten TGRB H'0000 100% duty 0% duty TGRB rewritten Time TIOCA Figure 10.23 Example of PWM Mode Operation (3) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 458 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.4.6 Phase Counting Mode In phase counting mode, the phase difference between two external clock inputs is detected and TCNT is incremented/decremented accordingly. This mode can be set for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. When phase counting mode is set, an external clock is selected as the counter input clock and TCNT operates as an up/down-counter regardless of the setting of bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 and bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. However, the functions of bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR, and of TIOR, TIER, and TGR are valid, and input capture/compare match and interrupt functions can be used. This can be used for two-phase encoder pulse input. When overflow occurs while TCNT is counting up, the TCFV flag in TSR is set; when underflow occurs while TCNT is counting down, the TCFU flag is set. The TCFD bit in TSR is the count direction flag. Reading the TCFD flag provides an indication of whether TCNT is counting up or down. Table 10.31 shows the correspondence between external clock pins and channels. Table 10.31 Clock Input Pins in Phase Counting Mode External Clock Pins Channels When channel 1 or 5 is set to phase counting mode When channel 2 or 4 is set to phase counting mode A-Phase TCLKA TCLKC B-Phase TCLKB TCLKD Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 459 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure: Figure 10.24 shows an example of the phase counting mode setting procedure. Phase counting mode [1] Select phase counting mode with bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR. [2] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. [1] Select phase counting mode Start count [2] Figure 10.24 Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 460 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Examples of Phase Counting Mode Operation: In phase counting mode, TCNT counts up or down according to the phase difference between two external clocks. There are four modes, according to the count conditions. 1. Phase counting mode 1 Figure 10.25 shows an example of phase counting mode 1 operation, and table 10.32 summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions. TCLKA (channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (channels 2 and 4) TCLKB (channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (channels 2 and 4) TCNT value Up-count Down-count Time Figure 10.25 Example of Phase Counting Mode 1 Operation Table 10.32 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 1 TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4) High level Low level Low level High level High level Low level High level Low level Legend: : Rising edge : Falling edge Down-count TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4) Operation Up-count Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 461 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 2. Phase counting mode 2 Figure 10.26 shows an example of phase counting mode 2 operation, and table 10.33 summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions. TCLKA (channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (channels 2 and 4) TCLKB (channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (channels 2 and 4) TCNT value Up-count Down-count Time Figure 10.26 Example of Phase Counting Mode 2 Operation Table 10.33 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 2 TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4) High level Low level Low level High level High level Low level High level Low level Legend: : Rising edge : Falling edge TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4) Operation Don't care Don't care Don't care Up-count Don't care Don't care Don't care Down-count Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 462 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 3. Phase counting mode 3 Figure 10.27 shows an example of phase counting mode 3 operation, and table 10.34 summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions. TCLKA (channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (channels 2 and 4) TCLKB (channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (channels 2 and 4) TCNT value Up-count Down-count Time Figure 10.27 Example of Phase Counting Mode 3 Operation Table 10.34 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 3 TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4) High level Low level Low level High level High level Low level High level Low level Legend: : Rising edge : Falling edge TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4) Operation Don't care Don't care Don't care Up-count Down-count Don't care Don't care Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 463 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 4. Phase counting mode 4 Figure 10.28 shows an example of phase counting mode 4 operation, and table 10.35 summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions. TCLKA (channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (channels 2 and 4) TCLKB (channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (channels 2 and 4) TCNT value Up-count Down-count Time Figure 10.28 Example of Phase Counting Mode 4 Operation Table 10.35 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 4 TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4) High level Low level Low level High level High level Low level High level Low level Legend: : Rising edge : Falling edge Don't care Down-count Don't care TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4) Operation Up-count Phase Counting Mode Application Example: Figure 10.29 shows an example in which phase counting mode is designated for channel 1, and channel 1 is coupled with channel 0 to input servo motor 2-phase encoder pulses in order to detect the position or speed. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 464 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Channel 1 is set to phase counting mode 1, and the encoder pulse A-phase and B-phase are input to TCLKA and TCLKB. Channel 0 operates with TCNT counter clearing by TGRC_0 compare match; TGRA_0 and TGRC_0 are used for the compare match function, and are set with the speed control cycle and position control cycle. TGRB_0 is used for input capture, with TGRB_0 and TGRD_0 operating in buffer mode. The channel 1 counter input clock is designated as the TGRB_0 input capture source, and detection of the pulse width of 2-phase encoder 4-multiplication pulses is performed. TGRA_1 and TGRB_1 for channel 1 are designated for input capture, channel 0 TGRA_0 and TGRC_0 compare matches are selected as the input capture source, and the up/down-counter values for the control cycles are stored. This procedure enables accurate position/speed detection to be achieved. Channel 1 TCLKA TCLKB Edge detection circuit TCNT_1 TGRA_1 (speed cycle capture) TGRB_1 (position cycle capture) TCNT_0 + + - TGRA_0 (speed control cycle) TGRC_0 (position control cycle) TGRB_0 (pulse width capture) TGRD_0 (buffer operation) Channel 0 Figure 10.29 Phase Counting Mode Application Example Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 465 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.5 Interrupts There are three kinds of TPU interrupt source: TGR input capture/compare match, TCNT overflow, and TCNT underflow. Each interrupt source has its own status flag and enable/disable bit, allowing generation of interrupt request signals to be enabled or disabled individually. When an interrupt request is generated, the corresponding status flag in TSR is set to 1. If the corresponding enable/disable bit in TIER is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt is requested. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the status flag to 0. Relative channel priorities can be changed by the interrupt controller, but the priority order within a channel is fixed. For details, see section 5, Interrupt Controller. Table 10.36 lists the TPU interrupt sources. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 466 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 10.36 TPU Interrupts Channel Name 0 TGI0A TGI0B TGI0C TGI0D TGI0E 1 TGI1A TGI1B TCI1V TCI1U 2 TGI2A TGI2B TCI2V TCI2U 3 TGI3A TGI3B TGI3C TGI3D TCI3V 4 TGI4A TGI4B TCI4V TCI4U 5 TGI5A TGI5B TCI5V TCI5U Interrupt Source Interrupt Flag DTC Activation Possible Possible Possible Possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible DMAC Activation Possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Possible Not possible Not possible Not possible TGRA_0 input capture/compare match TGFA_0 TGRB_0 input capture/compare match TGFB_0 TGRC_0 input capture/compare match TGFC_0 TGRD_0 input capture/compare match TGFD_0 TCNT_0 overflow TCFV_0 TGRA_1 input capture/compare match TGFA_1 TGRB_1 input capture/compare match TGFB_1 TCNT_1 overflow TCNT_1 underflow TCFV_1 TCFU_1 TGRA_2 input capture/compare match TGFA_2 TGRB_2 input capture/compare match TGFB_2 TCNT_2 overflow TCNT_2 underflow TCFV_2 TCFU_2 TGRA_3 input capture/compare match TGFA_3 TGRB_3 input capture/compare match TGFB_3 TGRC_3 input capture/compare match TGFC_3 TGRD_3 input capture/compare match TGFD_3 TCNT_3 overflow TCFV_3 TGRA_4 input capture/compare match TGFA_4 TGRB_4 input capture/compare match TGFB_4 TCNT_4 overflow TCNT_4 underflow TCFV_4 TCFU_4 TGRA_5 input capture/compare match TGFA_5 TGRB_5 input capture/compare match TGFB_5 TCNT_5 overflow TCNT_5 underflow TCFV_5 TCFU_5 Note: This table shows the initial state immediately after a reset. The relative channel priorities can be changed by the interrupt controller. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 467 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TGIE bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TGF flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of a TGR input capture/compare match on a particular channel. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the TGF flag to 0. The TPU has 16 input capture/compare match interrupts, four each for channels 0 and 3, and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. Overflow Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TCIEV bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TCFV flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of TCNT overflow on a channel. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the TCFV flag to 0. The TPU has six overflow interrupts, one for each channel. Underflow Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TCIEU bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TCFU flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of TCNT underflow on a channel. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the TCFU flag to 0. The TPU has four underflow interrupts, one each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. 10.6 DTC Activation The DTC can be activated by the TGR input capture/compare match interrupt for a channel. For details, see section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC). A total of 16 TPU input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as DTC activation sources, four each for channels 0 and 3, and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. 10.7 DMAC Activation The DMAC can be activated by the TGRA input capture/compare match interrupt for a channel. For details, see section 7, DMA Controller (DMAC). In the TPU, a total of six TGRA input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as DMAC activation sources, one for each channel. 10.8 A/D Converter Activation The A/D converter can be activated by the TGRA input capture/compare match for a channel. If the TTGE bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TGFA flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of a TGRA input capture/compare match on a particular channel, a request to start A/D conversion is sent to the A/D converter. If the TPU conversion start trigger has been selected on the A/D converter side at this time, A/D conversion is started. In the TPU, a total of six TGRA input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as A/D converter conversion start sources, one for each channel. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 468 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.9 10.9.1 Operation Timing Input/Output Timing TCNT Count Timing: Figure 10.30 shows TCNT count timing in internal clock operation, and figure 10.31 shows TCNT count timing in external clock operation. Internal clock Falling edge Rising edge TCNT input clock TCNT N-1 N N+1 N+2 Figure 10.30 Count Timing in Internal Clock Operation External clock Falling edge Rising edge Falling edge TCNT input clock TCNT N-1 N N+1 N+2 Figure 10.31 Count Timing in External Clock Operation Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 469 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Output Compare Output Timing: A compare match signal is generated in the final state in which TCNT and TGR match (the point at which the count value matched by TCNT is updated). When a compare match signal is generated, the output value set in TIOR is output at the output compare output pin. After a match between TCNT and TGR, the compare match signal is not generated until the (TIOC pin) TCNT input clock is generated. Figure 10.32 shows output compare output timing. TCNT input clock N N+1 TCNT TGR N Compare match signal TIOC pin Figure 10.32 Output Compare Output Timing Input Capture Signal Timing: Figure 10.33 shows input capture signal timing. Input capture input Input capture signal TCNT N N+1 N+2 TGR N N+2 Figure 10.33 Input Capture Input Signal Timing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 470 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Timing for Counter Clearing by Compare Match/Input Capture: Figure 10.34 shows the timing when counter clearing by compare match occurrence is specified, and figure 10.35 shows the timing when counter clearing by input capture occurrence is specified. Compare match signal Counter clear signal TCNT N H'0000 TGR N Figure 10.34 Counter Clear Timing (Compare Match) Input capture signal Counter clear signal TCNT N H'0000 TGR N Figure 10.35 Counter Clear Timing (Input Capture) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 471 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Buffer Operation Timing: Figures 10.36 and 10.37 show the timings in buffer operation. TCNT n n+1 Compare match signal TGRA, TGRB TGRC, TGRD n N N Figure 10.36 Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match) Input capture signal TCNT N N+1 TGRA, TGRB TGRC, TGRD n N N+1 n N Figure 10.37 Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 472 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.9.2 Interrupt Signal Timing TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Compare Match: Figure 10.38 shows the timing for setting of the TGF flag in TSR by compare match occurrence, and the TGI interrupt request signal timing. TCNT input clock TCNT N N+1 TGR N Compare match signal TGF flag TGI interrupt Figure 10.38 TGI Interrupt Timing (Compare Match) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 473 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Input Capture: Figure 10.39 shows the timing for setting of the TGF flag in TSR by input capture occurrence, and the TGI interrupt request signal timing. Input capture signal TCNT N TGR N TGF flag TGI interrupt Figure 10.39 TGI Interrupt Timing (Input Capture) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 474 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) TCFV Flag/TCFU Flag Setting Timing: Figure 10.40 shows the timing for setting of the TCFV flag in TSR by overflow occurrence, and the TCIV interrupt request signal timing. Figure 10.41 shows the timing for setting of the TCFU flag in TSR by underflow occurrence, and the TCIU interrupt request signal timing. TCNT input clock TCNT (overflow) Overflow signal H'FFFF H'0000 TCFV flag TCIV interrupt Figure 10.40 TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing TCNT input clock TCNT (underflow) Underflow signal H'0000 H'FFFF TCFU flag TCIU interrupt Figure 10.41 TCIU Interrupt Setting Timing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 475 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Status Flag Clearing Timing: After a status flag is read as 1 by the CPU, it is cleared by writing 0 to it. When the DTC or DMAC is activated, the flag is cleared automatically. Figure 10.42 shows the timing for status flag clearing by the CPU, and figure 10.43 shows the timing for status flag clearing by the DTC or DMAC. TSR write cycle T2 T1 Address TSR address Write signal Status flag Interrupt request signal Figure 10.42 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by CPU DTC/DMAC read cycle T1 T2 DTC/DMAC write cycle T1 T2 Address Source address Destination address Status flag Interrupt request signal Figure 10.43 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by DTC/DMAC* Activation Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 476 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.10 10.10.1 Usage Notes Module Stop Mode Setting TPU operation can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting is for TPU operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop mode. For details, refer to section 23, Power-Down Modes. 10.10.2 Input Clock Restrictions The input clock pulse width must be at least 1.5 states in the case of single-edge detection, and at least 2.5 states in the case of both-edge detection. The TPU will not operate properly with a narrower pulse width. In phase counting mode, the phase difference and overlap between the two input clocks must be at least 1.5 states, and the pulse width must be at least 2.5 states. Figure 10.44 shows the input clock conditions in phase counting mode. Phase Phase diffedifference Overlap rence Overlap TCLKA (TCLKC) TCLKB (TCLKD) Pulse width Pulse width Pulse width Pulse width Notes: Phase difference and overlap : 1.5 states or more Pulse width : 2.5 states or more Figure 10.44 Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Counting Mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 477 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.10.3 Caution on Cycle Setting When counter clearing by compare match is set, TCNT is cleared in the final state in which it matches the TGR value (the point at which the count value matched by TCNT is updated). Consequently, the actual counter frequency is given by the following formula: f= (N + 1) Where f: Counter frequency : Operating frequency N: TGR set value 10.10.4 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations If the counter clearing signal is generated in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, TCNT clearing takes precedence and the TCNT write is not performed. Figure 10.45 shows the timing in this case. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 Address TCNT address Write signal Counter clearing signal TCNT N H'0000 Figure 10.45 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 478 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.10.5 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations If incrementing occurs in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the TCNT write takes precedence and TCNT is not incremented. Figure 10.46 shows the timing in this case. TCNT write cycle T2 T1 Address TCNT address Write signal TCNT input clock N TCNT write data M TCNT Figure 10.46 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations 10.10.6 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match If a compare match occurs in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the TGR write takes precedence and the compare match signal is disabled. A compare match also does not occur when the same value as before is written. Figure 10.47 shows the timing in this case. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 479 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) TGR write cycle T2 T1 Address TGR address Write signal Compare match signal TCNT N N+1 Disabled TGR N TGR write data M Figure 10.47 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match 10.10.7 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match If a compare match occurs in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the data transferred to TGR by the buffer operation will be the data prior to the write. Figure 10.48 shows the timing in this case. TGR write cycle T1 T2 Address Buffer register address Write signal Compare match signal Buffer register write data Buffer register TGR N M N Figure 10.48 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 480 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.10.8 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture If the input capture signal is generated in the T1 state of a TGR read cycle, the data that is read will be the data after input capture transfer. Figure 10.49 shows the timing in this case. TGR read cycle T1 T2 Address TGR address Read signal Input capture signal TGR X M Internal data bus M Figure 10.49 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 481 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.10.9 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture If the input capture signal is generated in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the input capture operation takes precedence and the write to TGR is not performed. Figure 10.50 shows the timing in this case. TGR write cycle T1 T2 Address TGR address Write signal Input capture signal TCNT M TGR M Figure 10.50 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture 10.10.10 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture If the input capture signal is generated in the T2 state of a buffer register write cycle, the buffer operation takes precedence and the write to the buffer register is not performed. Figure 10.51 shows the timing in this case. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 482 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Buffer register write cycle T1 T2 Address Buffer register address Write signal Input capture signal TCNT N TGR Buffer register M N M Figure 10.51 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture 10.10.11 Contention between Overflow/Underflow and Counter Clearing If overflow/underflow and counter clearing occur simultaneously, the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is not set and TCNT clearing takes precedence. Figure 10.52 shows the operation timing when a TGR compare match is specified as the clearing source, and H'FFFF is set in TGR. TCNT input clock TCNT Counter clearing signal TGF Disabled TCFV H'FFFF H'0000 Figure 10.52 Contention between Overflow and Counter Clearing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 483 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 10.10.12 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow/Underflow If there is an up-count or down-count in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, when overflow/underflow occurs, the TCNT write takes precedence and the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is not set. Figure 10.53 shows the operation timing when there is contention between TCNT write and overflow. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 Address TCNT address Write signal TCNT write data H'FFFF M TCNT TCFV flag Figure 10.53 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow 10.10.13 Multiplexing of I/O Pins In this LSI, the TCLKA input pin is multiplexed with the TIOCC0 I/O pin, the TCLKB input pin with the TIOCD0 I/O pin, the TCLKC input pin with the TIOCB1 I/O pin, and the TCLKD input pin with the TIOCB2 I/O pin. When an external clock is input, compare match output should not be performed from a multiplexed pin. 10.10.14 Interrupts and Module Stop Mode If module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to clear the CPU interrupt source or the DMAC or DTC activation source. Interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module stop mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 484 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) The programmable pulse generator (PPG) provides pulse outputs by using the 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU) as a time base. The PPG pulse outputs are divided into 4-bit groups (groups 3 to 0) that can operate both simultaneously and independently. The block diagram of PPG is shown in figure 11.1 11.1 * * * * * * * Features 16-bit output data Four output groups Selectable output trigger signals Non-overlap mode Can operate together with the data transfer controller (DTC) and the DMA controller (DMAC) Settable inverted output Module stop mode can be set PPG0001A_000020020100 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 485 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) Compare match signals NDERH Control logic PMR NDERL PCR PO15 PO14 PO13 PO12 PO11 PO10 PO9 PO8 PO7 PO6 PO5 PO4 PO3 PO2 PO1 PO0 Pulse output pins, group 3 PODRH Pulse output pins, group 2 Pulse output pins, group 1 PODRL Pulse output pins, group 0 NDRL NDRH Internal data bus Legend: PMR: PCR: NDERH: NDERL: NDRH: NDRL: PODRH: PODRL: PPG output mode register PPG output control register Next data enable register H Next data enable register L Next data register H Next data register L Output data register H Output data register L Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of PPG Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 486 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) 11.2 Input/Output Pins Table 11.1 summarizes the I/O pins of the PPG. Table 11.1 Pin Configuration Pin Name PO15 PO14 PO13 PO12 PO11 PO10 PO9 PO8 PO7 PO6 PO5 PO4 PO3 PO2 PO1 PO0 I/O Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Group 0 pulse output Group 1 pulse output Group 2 pulse output Function Group 3 pulse output 11.3 Register Descriptions The PPG has the following registers. * * * * * * * * Next data enable register H (NDERH) Next data enable register L (NDERL) Output data register H (PODRH) Output data register L (PODRL) Next data register H (NDRH) Next data register L (NDRL) PPG output control register (PCR) PPG output mode register (PMR) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 487 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) 11.3.1 Next Data Enable Registers H, L (NDERH, NDERL) NDERH, NDERL enable or disable pulse output on a bit-by-bit basis. For outputting pulse by the PPG, set the corresponding DDR to 1. * NDREH Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name NDER15 NDER14 NDER13 NDER12 NDER11 NDER10 NDER9 NDER8 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Next Data Enable 15 to 8 When a bit is set to 1, the value in the corresponding NDRH bit is transferred to the PODRH bit by the selected output trigger. Values are not transferred from NDRH to PODRH for cleared bits. * NDERL Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name NDER7 NDER6 NDER5 NDER4 NDER3 NDER2 NDER1 NDER0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Next Data Enable 7 to 0 When a bit is set to 1, the value in the corresponding NDRL bit is transferred to the PODRL bit by the selected output trigger. Values are not transferred from NDRL to PODRL for cleared bits. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 488 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) 11.3.2 Output Data Registers H, L (PODRH, PODRL) PODRH and PODRL store output data for use in pulse output. A bit that has been set for pulse output by NDER is read-only and cannot be modified. * PODRH Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name POD15 POD14 POD13 POD12 POD11 POD10 POD9 POD8 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Output Data Register 15 to 8 For bits which have been set to pulse output by NDERH, the output trigger transfers NDRH values to this register during PPG operation. While NDERH is set to 1, the CPU cannot write to this register. While NDERH is cleared, the initial output value of the pulse can be set. * PODRL Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name POD7 POD6 POD5 POD4 POD3 POD2 POD1 POD0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Output Data Register 7 to 0 For bits which have been set to pulse output by NDERL, the output trigger transfers NDRL values to this register during PPG operation. While NDERL is set to 1, the CPU cannot write to this register. While NDERL is cleared, the initial output value of the pulse can be set. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 489 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) 11.3.3 Next Data Registers H, L (NDRH, NDRL) NDRH, NDRL store the next data for pulse output. The NDR addresses differ depending on whether pulse output groups have the same output trigger or different output triggers. * NDRH If pulse output groups 2 and 3 have the same output trigger, all eight bits are mapped to the same address and can be accessed at one time, as shown below. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name NDR15 NDR14 NDR13 NDR12 NDR11 NDR10 NDR9 NDR8 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Next Data Register 15 to 8 The register contents are transferred to the corresponding PODRH bits by the output trigger specified with PCR. If pulse output groups 2 and 3 have different output triggers, upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits are mapped to the different addresses as shown below. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 to 0 Bit Name NDR15 NDR14 NDR13 NDR12 -- Initial Value 0 0 0 0 All 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W -- Description Next Data Register 15 to 12 The register contents are transferred to the corresponding PODRH bits by the output trigger specified with PCR. Reserved These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 490 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) Bit 7 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name -- Initial Value All 1 R/W -- Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified. NDR11 NDR10 NDR9 NDR8 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Next Data Register 11 to 8 The register contents are transferred to the corresponding PODRH bits by the output trigger specified with PCR. * NDRL If pulse output groups 0 and 1 have the same output trigger, all eight bits are mapped to the same address and can be accessed at one time, as shown below. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name NDR7 NDR6 NDR5 NDR4 NDR3 NDR2 NDR1 NDR0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Next Data Register 7 to 0 The register contents are transferred to the corresponding PODRL bits by the output trigger specified with PCR. If pulse output groups 0 and 1 have different output triggers, upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits are mapped to the different addresses as shown below. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 to 0 Bit Name NDR7 NDR6 NDR5 NDR4 -- Initial Value 0 0 0 0 All 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W -- Description Next Data Register 7 to 4 The register contents are transferred to the corresponding PODRL bits by the output trigger specified with PCR. Reserved These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 491 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) Bit 7 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name -- Initial Value All 1 R/W -- Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified. NDR3 NDR2 NDR1 NDR0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Next Data Register 3 to 0 The register contents are transferred to the corresponding PODRL bits by the output trigger specified with PCR. 11.3.4 PPG Output Control Register (PCR) PCR selects output trigger signals on a group-by-group basis. For details on output trigger selection, refer to section 11.3.5, PPG Output Mode Register (PMR). Bit 7 6 Bit Name G3CMS1 G3CMS0 Initial Value 1 1 R/W R/W R/W Description Group 3 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 Select output trigger of pulse output group 3. 00: Compare match in TPU channel 0 01: Compare match in TPU channel 1 10: Compare match in TPU channel 2 11: Compare match in TPU channel 3 5 4 G2CMS1 G2CMS0 1 1 R/W R/W Group 2 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 Select output trigger of pulse output group 2. 00: Compare match in TPU channel 0 01: Compare match in TPU channel 1 10: Compare match in TPU channel 2 11: Compare match in TPU channel 3 3 2 G1CMS1 G1CMS0 1 1 R/W R/W Group 1 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 Select output trigger of pulse output group 1. 00: Compare match in TPU channel 0 01: Compare match in TPU channel 1 10: Compare match in TPU channel 2 11: Compare match in TPU channel 3 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 492 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) Bit 1 0 Bit Name G0CMS1 G0CMS0 Initial Value 1 1 R/W R/W R/W Description Group 0 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 Select output trigger of pulse output group 0. 00: Compare match in TPU channel 0 01: Compare match in TPU channel 1 10: Compare match in TPU channel 2 11: Compare match in TPU channel 3 11.3.5 PPG Output Mode Register (PMR) PMR selects the pulse output mode of the PPG for each group. If inverted output is selected, a low-level pulse is output when PODRH is 1 and a high-level pulse is output when PODRH is 0. If non-overlapping operation is selected, PPG updates its output values at compare match A or B of the TPU that becomes the output trigger. For details, refer to section 11.4.4, Non-Overlapping Pulse Output. Bit 7 Bit Name G3INV Initial Value 1 R/W R/W Description Group 3 Inversion Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output group 3. 0: Inverted output 1: Direct output 6 G2INV 1 R/W Group 2 Inversion Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output group 2. 0: Inverted output 1: Direct output 5 G1INV 1 R/W Group 1 Inversion Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output group 1. 0: Inverted output 1: Direct output 4 G0INV 1 R/W Group 0 Inversion Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output group 0. 0: Inverted output 1: Direct output Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 493 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) Bit 3 Bit Name G3NOV Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Group 3 Non-Overlap Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse output group 3. 0: Normal operation (output values updated at compare match A in the selected TPU channel) 1: Non-overlapping operation (output values updated at compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel) 2 G2NOV 0 R/W Group 2 Non-Overlap Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse output group 2. 0: Normal operation (output values updated at compare match A in the selected TPU channel) 1: Non-overlapping operation (output values updated at compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel) 1 G1NOV 0 R/W Group 1 Non-Overlap Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse output group 1. 0: Normal operation (output values updated at compare match A in the selected TPU channel) 1: Non-overlapping operation (output values updated at compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel) 0 G0NOV 0 R/W Group 0 Non-Overlap Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse output group 0. 0: Normal operation (output values updated at compare match A in the selected TPU channel) 1: Non-overlapping operation (output values updated at compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 494 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) 11.4 Operation Figure 11.2 shows an overview diagram of the PPG. PPG pulse output is enabled when the corresponding bits in P1DDR, P2DDR, and NDER are set to 1. An initial output value is determined by its corresponding PODR initial setting. When the compare match event specified by PCR occurs, the corresponding NDR bit contents are transferred to PODR to update the output values. Sequential output of data of up to 16 bits is possible by writing new output data to NDR before the next compare match. DDR NDER Q Output trigger signal C Q PODR D Pulse output pin Normal output/inverted output Q NDR D Internal data bus Figure 11.2 Overview Diagram of PPG Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 495 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) 11.4.1 Output Timing If pulse output is enabled, NDR contents are transferred to PODR and output when the specified compare match event occurs. Figure 11.3 shows the timing of these operations for the case of normal output in groups 2 and 3, triggered by compare match A. TCNT N N+1 TGRA N Compare match A signal NDRH n PODRH m n PO8 to PO15 m n Figure 11.3 Timing of Transfer and Output of NDR Contents (Example) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 496 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) 11.4.2 Sample Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output Figure 11.4 shows a sample procedure for setting up normal pulse output. [1] Set TIOR to make TGRA an output compare register (with output disabled) [2] Set the PPG output trigger period Set TGRA value TPU setup Set counting operation Select interrupt request Set initial output data Enable pulse output Port and PPG setup Select output trigger Set next pulse output data TPU setup Start counter Compare match? Yes Set next pulse output data [10] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [2] Normal PPG output Select TGR functions [1] [3] Select the counter clock source with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. Select the counter clear source with bits CCLR2 to CCLR0. [4] Enable the TGIA interrupt in TIER. The DTC or DMAC can also be set up to transfer data to NDR. [5] Set the initial output values in PODR. [6] Set the DDR and NDER bits for the pins to be used for pulse output to 1. [7] Select the TPU compare match event to be used as the output trigger in PCR. [8] Set the next pulse output values in NDR. [9] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the TCNT counter. [10] At each TGIA interrupt, set the next output values in NDR. [8] [9] No Figure 11.4 Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output (Example) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 497 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) 11.4.3 Example of Normal Pulse Output (Example of Five-Phase Pulse Output) Figure 11.5 shows an example in which pulse output is used for cyclic five-phase pulse output. TCNT value TGRA Compare match TCNT H'0000 NDRH 80 C0 40 60 20 30 10 18 08 88 80 C0 40 Time PODRH 00 80 C0 40 60 20 30 10 18 08 88 80 C0 PO15 PO14 PO13 PO12 PO11 Figure 11.5 Normal Pulse Output Example (Five-Phase Pulse Output) 1. Set up TGRA in TPU which is used as the output trigger to be an output compare register. Set a cycle in TGRA so the counter will be cleared by compare match A. Set the TGIEA bit in TIER to 1 to enable the compare match/input capture A (TGIA) interrupt. 2. Write H'F8 in P1DDR and NDERH, and set the G3CMS1, G3CMS0, G2CMS1, and G2CMS0 bits in PCR to select compare match in the TPU channel set up in the previous step to be the output trigger. Write output data H'80 in NDRH. 3. The timer counter in the TPU channel starts. When compare match A occurs, the NDRH contents are transferred to PODRH and output. The TGIA interrupt handling routine writes the next output data (H'C0) in NDRH. 4. Five-phase pulse output (one or two phases active at a time) can be obtained subsequently by writing H'40, H'60, H'20, H'30, H'10, H'18, H'08, H'88... at successive TGIA interrupts. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 498 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) If the DTC or DMAC is set for activation by the TGIA interrupt, pulse output can be obtained without imposing a load on the CPU. 11.4.4 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output During non-overlapping operation, transfer from NDR to PODR is performed as follows: * NDR bits are always transferred to PODR bits at compare match A. * At compare match B, NDR bits are transferred only if their value is 0. Bits are not transferred if their value is 1. Figure 11.6 illustrates the non-overlapping pulse output operation. DDR NDER Q Compare match A Compare match B Pulse output pin C Q PODR D Q NDR D Internal data bus Normal output/inverted output Figure 11.6 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output Therefore, 0 data can be transferred ahead of 1 data by making compare match B occur before compare match A. The NDR contents should not be altered during the interval from compare match B to compare match A (the non-overlap margin). This can be accomplished by having the TGIA interrupt handling routine write the next data in NDR, or by having the TGIA interrupt activate the DTC or DMAC. Note, however, that the next data must be written before the next compare match B occurs. Figure 11.7 shows the timing of this operation. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 499 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) Compare match A Compare match B Write to NDR NDR Write to NDR PODR 0 output 0/1 output 0 output 0/1 output Write to NDR here Write to NDR Do not write here to NDR here Do not write to NDR here Figure 11.7 Non-Overlapping Operation and NDR Write Timing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 500 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) 11.4.5 Sample Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output Figure 11.8 shows a sample procedure for setting up non-overlapping pulse output. Non-overlapping pulse output Select TGR functions Set TGR values TPU setup Set counting operation Select interrupt request Set initial output data Enable pulse output Select output trigger Set non-overlapping groups Set next pulse output data TPU setup Start counter Compare match A? Yes Set next pulse output data [11] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [1] [2] [1] Set TIOR to make TGRA and TGRB an output compare registers (with output disabled) [2] Set the pulse output trigger period in TGRB and the non-overlap period in TGRA. [3] Select the counter clock source with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. Select the counter clear source with bits CCLR2 to CCLR0. [4] Enable the TGIA interrupt in TIER. The DTC or DMAC can also be set up to transfer data to NDR. [5] Set the initial output values in PODR. [6] Set the DDR and NDER bits for the pins to be used for pulse output to 1. [7] Select the TPU compare match event to be used as the pulse output trigger in PCR. [8] In PMR, select the groups that will operate in non-overlap mode. [9] Set the next pulse output values in NDR. [10] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the TCNT counter. [11] At each TGIA interrupt, set the next output values in NDR. PPG setup [9] [10] No Figure 11.8 Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 501 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) 11.4.6 Example of Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example of Four-Phase Complementary Non-Overlapping Output) Figure 11.9 shows an example in which pulse output is used for four-phase complementary nonoverlapping pulse output. TCNT value TGRB TCNT TGRA H'0000 NDRH 95 65 59 56 95 65 Time PODRH 00 95 05 65 41 59 50 56 14 95 05 65 Non-overlap margin PO15 PO14 PO13 PO12 PO11 PO10 PO9 PO8 Figure 11.9 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output Example (Four-Phase Complementary) 1. Set up the TPU channel to be used as the output trigger channel so that TGRA and TGRB are output compare registers. Set the trigger period in TGRB and the non-overlap margin in TGRA, and set the counter to be cleared by compare match B. Set the TGIEA bit in TIER to 1 to enable the TGIA interrupt. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 502 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) 2. Write H'FF in P1DDR and NDERH, and set the G3CMS1, G3CMS0, G2CMS1, and G2CMS0 bits in PCR to select compare match in the TPU channel set up in the previous step to be the output trigger. Set the G3NOV and G2NOV bits in PMR to 1 to select non-overlapping output. Write output data H'95 in NDRH. 3. The timer counter in the TPU channel starts. When a compare match with TGRB occurs, outputs change from 1 to 0. When a compare match with TGRA occurs, outputs change from 0 to 1 (the change from 0 to 1 is delayed by the value set in TGRA). The TGIA interrupt handling routine writes the next output data (H'65) in NDRH. 4. Four-phase complementary non-overlapping pulse output can be obtained subsequently by writing H'59, H'56, H'95... at successive TGIA interrupts. If the DTC or DMAC is set for activation by the TGIA interrupt, pulse output can be obtained without imposing a load on the CPU. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 503 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) 11.4.7 Inverted Pulse Output If the G3INV, G2INV, G1INV, and G0INV bits in PMR are cleared to 0, values that are the inverse of the PODR contents can be output. Figure 11.10 shows the outputs when G3INV and G2INV are cleared to 0, in addition to the settings of figure 11.9. TCNT value TGRB TCNT TGRA H'0000 NDRH 95 65 59 56 95 65 Time PODRL 00 95 05 65 41 59 50 56 14 95 05 65 PO15 PO14 PO13 PO12 PO11 PO10 PO9 PO8 Figure 11.10 Inverted Pulse Output (Example) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 504 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) 11.4.8 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture Pulse output can be triggered by TPU input capture as well as by compare match. If TGRA functions as an input capture register in the TPU channel selected by PCR, pulse output will be triggered by the input capture signal. Figure 11.11 shows the timing of this output. TIOC pin Input capture signal NDR N PODR M N PO M N Figure 11.11 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture (Example) 11.5 11.5.1 Usage Notes Module Stop Mode Setting PPG operation can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial value is for PPG operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop mode. For details, refer to section 22, Power-Down Modes. 11.5.2 Operation of Pulse Output Pins Pins PO0 to PO15 are also used for other peripheral functions such as the TPU. When output by another peripheral function is enabled, the corresponding pins cannot be used for pulse output. Note, however, that data transfer from NDR bits to PODR bits takes place, regardless of the usage of the pins. Pin functions should be changed only under conditions in which the output trigger event will not occur. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 505 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 506 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) This LSI has an on-chip 8-bit timer module with two channels operating on the basis of an 8-bit counter. The 8-bit timer module can be used to count external events and be used as a multifunction timer in a variety of applications, such as generation of counter reset, interrupt requests, and pulse output with an arbitrary duty cycle using a compare-match signal with two registers. 12.1 Features * Selection of four clock sources The counters can be driven by one of three internal clock signals (/8, /64, or /8192) or an external clock input * Selection of three ways to clear the counters The counters can be cleared on compare match A or B, or by an external reset signal * Timer output control by a combination of two compare match signals The timer output signal in each channel is controlled by a combination of two independent compare match signals, enabling the timer to generate output waveforms with an arbitrary duty cycle or PWM output * Provision for cascading of two channels (TMR_0 and TMR_1) Operation as a 16-bit timer is possible, using TMR_0 for the upper 8 bits and TMR_1 for the lower 8 bits (16-bit count mode) TMR_1 can be used to count TMR_0 compare matches (compare match count mode) * Three independent interrupts Compare match A and B and overflow interrupts can be requested independently * A/D converter conversion start trigger can be generated TIMH260A_000020020100 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 507 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) Figure 12.1 shows a block diagram of the 8-bit timer module (TMR_0 and TMR_1). External clock source TMCI0 TMCI1 Internal clock sources TMR_0 TMR_1 /8 /8 /64 /64 /8192 /8192 Clock select Clock 1 Clock 0 TCORA_0 Compare match A1 Compare match A0 Comparator A_0 TCORA_1 Comparator A_1 TMO0 TMRI0 Overflow 1 Overflow 0 Clear 0 TCNT_0 Clear 1 TCNT_1 Internal bus TMO1 TMRI1 Control logic Compare match B1 Compare match B0 Comparator B_0 Comparator B_1 TCORB_0 A/D conversion start request signal TCORB_1 TCSR_0 TCSR_1 TCR_0 CMIA0 CMIB0 OVI0 CMIA1 CMIB1 OVI1 Interrupt signals Legend: TCORA_0: TCORB_0: TCNT_0: TCSR_0: TCR_0: Time constant register A_0 Time constant register B_0 Timer counter_0 Timer control/status register_0 Timer control register_0 TCORA_1: TCORB_1: TCNT_1: TCSR_1: TCR_1: TCR_1 Time constant register A_1 Time constant register B_1 Timer counter_1 Timer control/status register_1 Timer control register_1 Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer Module Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 508 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) 12.2 Input/Output Pins Table 12.1 summarizes the pins of the 8-bit timer module. Table 12.1 Pin Configuration Channel 0 Name Timer output pin Timer clock input pin Timer reset input pin 1 Timer output pin Timer clock input pin Timer reset input pin Symbol TMO0 TMCI0 TMRI0 TMO1 TMCI1 TMRI1 I/O Output Input Input Output Input Input Function Outputs at compare match Inputs external clock for counter Inputs external reset to counter Outputs at compare match Inputs external clock for counter Inputs external reset to counter 12.3 Register Descriptions The 8-bit timer module has the following registers. For details on the module stop control register, refer to section 23.1.2, Module Stop Control Registers H, L (MSTPCRH, MSTPCRL). * * * * * * * * * * Timer counter_0 (TCNT_0) Time constant register A_0 (TCORA_0) Time constant register B_0 (TCORB_0) Timer control register_0 (TCR_0) Timer control/status register_0 (TCSR_0) Timer counter_1 (TCNT_1) Time constant register A_1 (TCORA_1) Time constant register B_1 (TCORB_1) Timer control register_1 (TCR_1) Timer control/status register_1 (TCSR_1) Timer Counter (TCNT) 12.3.1 TCNT is 8-bit up-counter. TCNT_0 and TCNT_1 comprise a single 16-bit register so they can be accessed together by a word transfer instruction. Bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR are used to select a clock. TCNT can be cleared by an external reset input or by a compare match signal A or B. Which signal is to be used for clearing is selected by bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR. When TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00, OVF in TCSR is set to 1. TCNT is initialized to H'00. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 509 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) 12.3.2 Time Constant Register A (TCORA) TCORA is 8-bit readable/writable register. TCORA_0 and TCORA_1 comprise a single 16-bit register so they can be accessed together by a word transfer instruction. The value in TCORA is continually compared with the value in TCNT. When a match is detected, the corresponding CMFA flag in TCSR is set to 1. Note, however, that comparison is disabled during the T2 state of a TCORA write cycle. The timer output from the TMO pin can be freely controlled by this compare match signal (compare match A) and the settings of bits OS1 and OS0 in TCSR. TCORA is initialized to H'FF. 12.3.3 Time Constant Register B (TCORB) TCORB is 8-bit readable/writable register. TCORB_0 and TCORB_1 comprise a single 16-bit register so they can be accessed together by a word transfer instruction. TCORB is continually compared with the value in TCNT. When a match is detected, the corresponding CMFB flag in TCSR is set to 1. Note, however, that comparison is disabled during the T2 state of a TCOBR write cycle. The timer output from the TMO pin can be freely controlled by this compare match signal (compare match B) and the settings of bits OS3 and OS2 in TCSR. TCORB is initialized to H'FF. 12.3.4 Timer Control Register (TCR) TCR selects the clock source and the time at which TCNT is cleared, and controls interrupts. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 510 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) Bit 7 Bit Name CMIEB Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Compare Match Interrupt Enable B Selects whether CMFB interrupt requests (CMIB) are enabled or disabled when the CMFB flag in TCSR is set to 1. 0: CMFB interrupt requests (CMIB) are disabled 1: CMFB interrupt requests (CMIB) are enabled 6 CMIEA 0 R/W Compare Match Interrupt Enable A Selects whether CMFA interrupt requests (CMIA) are enabled or disabled when the CMFA flag in TCSR is set to 1. 0: CMFA interrupt requests (CMIA) are disabled 1: CMFA interrupt requests (CMIA) are enabled 5 OVIE 0 R/W Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable Selects whether OVF interrupt requests (OVI) are enabled or disabled when the OVF flag in TCSR is set to 1. 0: OVF interrupt requests (OVI) are disabled 1: OVF interrupt requests (OVI) are enabled 4 3 CCLR1 CCLR0 0 0 R/W R/W Counter Clear 1 and 0 These bits select the method by which TCNT is cleared 00: Clearing is disabled 01: Clear by compare match A 10: Clear by compare match B 11: Clear by rising edge of external reset input 2 1 0 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Clock Select 2 to 0 These bits select the clock input to TCNT and count condition. See table 12.2. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 511 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) Table 12.2 Clock Input to TCNT and Count Condition TCR Channel TMR_0 Bit 2 CKS2 0 Bit 1 CKS1 0 Bit 0 CKS0 0 1 1 0 1 1 TMR_1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 All 1 0 0 1 1 Note: * 0 1 0 1 Description Clock input disabled Internal clock, counted at falling edge of /8 Internal clock, counted at falling edge of /64 Internal clock, counted at falling edge of /8192 Count at TCNT_1 overflow signal* Clock input disabled Internal clock, counted at falling edge of /8 Internal clock, counted at falling edge of /64 Internal clock, counted at falling edge of /8192 Count at TCNT_0 compare match A* External clock, counted at rising edge External clock, counted at falling edge External clock, counted at both rising and falling edges If the count input of TMR_0 is the TCNT_1 overflow signal and that of TMR_1 is the TCNT_0 compare match signal, no incrementing clock is generated. Do not use this setting. 12.3.5 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) TCSR displays status flags, and controls compare match output. TCSR_0 Bit 7 Bit Name CMFB Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Compare Match Flag B [Setting condition] Set when TCNT matches TCORB [Clearing conditions] * * Cleared by reading CMFB when CMFB = 1, then writing 0 to CMFB When DTC is activated by CMIB interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 512 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) Bit 6 Bit Name CMFA Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Compare Match Flag A [Setting condition] Set when TCNT matches TCORA [Clearing conditions] * * 5 OVF 0 R/(W)* Cleared by reading CMFA when CMFA = 1, then writing 0 to CMFA When DTC is activated by CMIA interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0 Timer Overflow Flag [Setting condition] Set when TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00 [Clearing condition] Cleared by reading OVF when OVF = 1, then writing 0 to OVF 4 ADTE 0 R/W A/D Trigger Enable Selects enabling or disabling of A/D converter start requests by compare match A. 0: A/D converter start requests by compare match A are disabled 1: A/D converter start requests by compare match A are enabled 3 2 OS3 OS2 0 0 R/W R/W Output Select 3 and 2 These bits select a method of TMO pin output when compare match B of TCORB and TCNT occurs. 00: No change when compare match B occurs 01: 0 is output when compare match B occurs 10: 1 is output when compare match B occurs 11: Output is inverted when compare match B occurs (toggle output) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 513 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) Bit 1 0 Bit Name OS1 OS0 Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Output Select 1 and 0 These bits select a method of TMO pin output when compare match A of TCORA and TCNT occurs. 00: No change when compare match A occurs 01: 0 is output when compare match A occurs 10: 1 is output when compare match A occurs 11: Output is inverted when compare match A occurs (toggle output) Note: * Only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. TCSR_1 Bit 7 Bit Name CMFB Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Compare Match Flag B [Setting condition] Set when TCNT matches TCORB [Clearing conditions] * * 6 CMFA 0 R/(W)* Cleared by reading CMFB when CMFB = 1, then writing 0 to CMFB When DTC is activated by CMIB interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0 Compare Match Flag A [Setting condition] Set when TCNT matches TCORA [Clearing conditions] * * Cleared by reading CMFA when CMFA = 1, then writing 0 to CMFA When DTC is activated by CMIA interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0 5 OVF 0 R/(W)* Timer Overflow Flag [Setting condition] Set when TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00 [Clearing condition] Cleared by reading OVF when OVF = 1, then writing 0 to OVF Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 514 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) Bit 4 Bit Name -- Initial Value 1 R/W R Description Reserved This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. 3 2 OS3 OS2 0 0 R/W R/W Output Select 3 and 2 These bits select a method of TMO pin output when compare match B of TCORB and TCNT occurs. 00: No change when compare match B occurs 01: 0 is output when compare match B occurs 10: 1 is output when compare match B occurs 11: Output is inverted when compare match B occurs (toggle output) 1 0 OS1 OS0 0 0 R/W R/W Output Select 1 and 0 These bits select a method of TMO pin output when compare match A of TCORA and TCNT occurs. 00: No change when compare match A occurs 01: 0 is output when compare match A occurs 10: 1 is output when compare match A occurs 11: Output is inverted when compare match A occurs (toggle output) Note: * Only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. 12.4 12.4.1 Operation Pulse Output Figure 12.2 shows an example that the 8-bit timer is used to generate a pulse output with a selected duty cycle. The control bits are set as follows: [1] In TCR, bit CCLR1 is cleared to 0 and bit CCLR0 is set to 1 so that the timer counter is cleared at a TCORA compare match. [2] In TCSR, bits OS3 to OS0 are set to B'0110, causing the output to change to 1 at a TCORA compare match and to 0 at a TCORB compare match. With these settings, the 8-bit timer provides output of pulses at a rate determined by TCORA with a pulse width determined by TCORB. No software intervention is required. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 515 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) TCNT H'FF TCORA TCORB H'00 Counter clear TMO Figure 12.2 Example of Pulse Output 12.5 12.5.1 Operation Timing TCNT Incrementation Timing Figure 12.3 shows the count timing for internal clock input. Figure 12.4 shows the count timing for external clock signal. Note that the external clock pulse width must be at least 1.5 states for incrementation at a single edge, and at least 2.5 states for incrementation at both edges. The counter will not increment correctly if the pulse width is less than these values. Internal clock Clock input to TCNT TCNT N-1 N N+1 Figure 12.3 Count Timing for Internal Clock Input Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 516 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) External clock input pin Clock input to TCNT TCNT N-1 N N+1 Figure 12.4 Count Timing for External Clock Input 12.5.2 Timing of CMFA and CMFB Setting when Compare-Match Occurs The CMFA and CMFB flags in TCSR are set to 1 by a compare match signal generated when the TCOR and TCNT values match. The compare match signal is generated at the last state in which the match is true, just before the timer counter is updated. Therefore, when TCOR and TCNT match, the compare match signal is not generated until the next incrementation clock input. Figure 12.5 shows this timing. TCNT N N+1 TCOR Compare match signal N CMF Figure 12.5 Timing of CMF Setting Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 517 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) 12.5.3 Timing of Timer Output when Compare-Match Occurs When compare match A or B occurs, the timer output changes as specified by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR. Figure 12.6 shows the timing when the output is set to toggle at compare match A. Compare match A signal Timer output pin Figure 12.6 Timing of Timer Output 12.5.4 Timing of Compare Match Clear TCNT is cleared when compare match A or B occurs, depending on the setting of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR. Figure 12.7 shows the timing of this operation. Compare match signal TCNT N H'00 Figure 12.7 Timing of Compare Match Clear Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 518 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) 12.5.5 Timing of TCNT External Reset TCNT is cleared at the rising edge of an external reset input, depending on the settings of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR. The clear pulse width must be at least 1.5 states. Figure 12.8 shows the timing of this operation. External reset input pin Clear signal TCNT N-1 N H'00 Figure 12.8 Timing of Clearance by External Reset 12.5.6 Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting The OVF in TCSR is set to 1 when TCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00). Figure 12.9 shows the timing of this operation. TCNT H'FF H'00 Overflow signal OVF Figure 12.9 Timing of OVF Setting Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 519 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) 12.6 Operation with Cascaded Connection If bits CKS2 to CKS0 in either TCR_0 or TCR_1 are set to B'100, the 8-bit timers of the two channels are cascaded. With this configuration, a single 16-bit timer could be used (16-bit counter mode) or compare matches of the 8-bit channel 0 could be counted by the timer of channel 1 (compare match count mode). In this case, the timer operates as below. 12.6.1 16-Bit Counter Mode When bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR_0 are set to B'100, the timer functions as a single 16-bit timer with channel 0 occupying the upper 8 bits and channel 1 occupying the lower 8 bits. [1] Setting of compare match flags * The CMF flag in TCSR_0 is set to 1 when a 16-bit compare match event occurs. * The CMF flag in TCSR_1 is set to 1 when a lower 8-bit compare match event occurs. [2] Counter clear specification * If the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR_0 have been set for counter clear at compare match, the 16-bit counters (TCNT_0 and TCNT_1 together) are cleared when a 16-bit compare match event occurs. The 16-bit counters (TCNT0 and TCNT1 together) are cleared even if counter clear by the TMRI0 pin has also been set. * The settings of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR_1 are ignored. The lower 8 bits cannot be cleared independently. [3] Pin output * Control of output from the TMO0 pin by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR_0 is in accordance with the 16-bit compare match conditions. * Control of output from the TMO1 pin by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR_1 is in accordance with the lower 8-bit compare match conditions. 12.6.2 Compare Match Count Mode When bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR_1 are B'100, TCNT_1 counts compare match A's for channel 0. Channels 0 and 1 are controlled independently. Conditions such as setting of the CMF flag, generation of interrupts, output from the TMO pin, and counter clear are in accordance with the settings for each channel. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 520 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) 12.7 12.7.1 Interrupts Interrupt Sources and DTC Activation There are three 8-bit timer interrupt sources: CMIA, CMIB, and OVI. Their relative priorities are shown in table 12.3. Each interrupt source is set as enabled or disabled by the corresponding interrupt enable bit in TCR or TCSR, and independent interrupt requests are sent for each to the interrupt controller. It is also possible to activate the DTC by means of CMIA and CMIB interrupts. Table 12.3 8-Bit Timer Interrupt Sources Name CMIA0 CMIB0 OVI0 CMIA1 CMIB1 OVI1 Interrupt Source TCORA_0 compare match TCORB_0 compare match TCNT_0 overflow TCORA_1 compare match TCORB_1 compare match TCNT_1 overflow Interrupt Flag CMFA CMFB OVF CMFA CMFB OVF DTC Activation Possible Possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Low Low High Priority High 12.7.2 A/D Converter Activation The A/D converter can be activated only by TMR_0 compare match A. If the ADTE bit in TCSR0 is set to 1 when the CMFA flag is set to 1 by the occurrence of TMR_0 compare match A, a request to start A/D conversion is sent to the A/D converter. If the 8-bit timer conversion start trigger has been selected on the A/D converter side at this time, A/D conversion is started. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 521 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) 12.8 12.8.1 Usage Notes Contention between TCNT Write and Clear If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the clear takes priority, so that the counter is cleared and the write is not performed. Figure 12.10 shows this operation. TCNT write cycle by CPU T1 T2 Address TCNT address Internal write signal Counter clear signal TCNT N H'00 Figure 12.10 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 522 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) 12.8.2 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the write takes priority and the counter is not incremented. Figure 12.11 shows this operation. TCNT write cycle by CPU T1 T2 Address TCNT address Internal write signal TCNT input clock TCNT N M Counter write data Figure 12.11 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 523 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) 12.8.3 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare Match During the T2 state of a TCOR write cycle, the TCOR write has priority and the compare match signal is inhibited even if a compare match event occurs as shown in figure 12.12. TCOR write cycle by CPU T1 T2 Address TCOR address Internal write signal TCNT N N+1 TCOR N M TCOR write data Compare match signal Inhibited Figure 12.12 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare Match Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 524 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) 12.8.4 Contention between Compare Matches A and B If compare match events A and B occur at the same time, the 8-bit timer operates in accordance with the priorities for the output statuses set for compare match A and compare match B, as shown in table 12.4. Table 12.4 Timer Output Priorities Output Setting Toggle output 1 output 0 output No change Low Priority High 12.8.5 Switching of Internal Clocks and TCNT Operation TCNT may increment erroneously when the internal clock is switched over. Table 12.5 shows the relationship between the timing at which the internal clock is switched (by writing to the CKS1 and CKS0 bits) and the TCNT operation. When the TCNT clock is generated from an internal clock, the falling edge of the internal clock pulse is detected. If clock switching causes a change from high to low level, as shown in case 3 in table 12.5, a TCNT clock pulse is generated on the assumption that the switchover is a falling edge. This increments TCNT. The erroneous incrementation can also happen when switching between internal and external clocks. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 525 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) Table 12.5 Switching of Internal Clock and TCNT Operation Timing of Switchover by Means of CKS1 and CKS0 Bits TCNT Clock Operation Switching from low to low*1 Clock before switchover Clock after switchover TCNT clock No. 1 TCNT N CKS bit write N 2 Switching from low to high*2 Clock before switchover Clock after switchover TCNT clock TCNT N N+1 N CKS bit write 3 Switching from high to low*3 Clock before switchover Clock after switchover *4 TCNT clock TCNT N N CKS bit write N Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 526 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) Timing of Switchover by Means of CKS1 and CKS0 Bits TCNT Clock Operation Switching from high to high Clock before switchover Clock after switchover TCNT clock No. 4 TCNT N N N CKS bit write Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. Includes switching from low to stop, and from stop to low. Includes switching from stop to high. Includes switching from high to stop. Generated on the assumption that the switchover is a falling edge; TCNT is incremented. 12.8.6 Mode Setting with Cascaded Connection If 16-bit counter mode and compare match count mode are specified at the same time, input clocks for TCNT_0 and TCNT_1 are not generated, and the counter stops. Do not specify 16-bit counter and compare match count modes simultaneously. 12.8.7 Interrupts in Module Stop Mode If module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to clear the CPU interrupt source or the DTC and DMAC activation source. Interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module stop mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 527 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 528 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 13 Watchdog Timer Section 13 Watchdog Timer The watchdog timer (WDT) is an 8-bit timer that outputs an overflow signal (WDTOVF) if a system crash prevents the CPU from writing to the timer counter, thus allowing it to overflow. At the same time, the WDT can also generate an internal reset signal. When this watchdog function is not needed, the WDT can be used as an interval timer. In interval timer operation, an interval timer interrupt is generated each time the counter overflows. The block diagram of the WDT is shown in figure 13.1. 13.1 Features * Selectable from eight counter input clocks * Switchable between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode In watchdog timer mode * If the counter overflows, the WDT outputs WDTOVF. It is possible to select whether or not the entire chip is reset at the same time. In interval timer mode * If the counter overflows, the WDT generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI). WDT0101A_000020020100 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 529 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 13 Watchdog Timer Overflow WOVI (interrupt request signal) WDTOVF Internal reset signal* Interrupt control Clock Clock select Reset control /2 /64 /128 /512 /2048 /8192 /32768 /131072 Internal clock sources Internal bus RSTCSR TCNT TSCR Bus interface Module bus WDT Legend: Timer control/status register TCSR: Timer counter TCNT: RSTCSR: Reset control/status register Note: * An internal reset signal can be generated by the register setting. Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of WDT 13.2 Input/Output Pin Table 13.1 describes the WDT output pin. Table 13.1 Pin Configuration Name Watchdog timer overflow Symbol WDTOVF I/O Output Function Outputs counter overflow signal in watchdog timer mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 530 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 13 Watchdog Timer 13.3 Register Descriptions The WDT has the following three registers. To prevent accidental overwriting, TCSR, TCNT, and RSTCSR have to be written to in a method different from normal registers. For details, refer to section 13.6.1, Notes on Register Access. * Timer counter (TCNT) * Timer control/status register (TCSR) * Reset control/status register (RSTCSR) 13.3.1 Timer Counter (TCNT) TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. TCNT is initialized to H'00 when the TME bit in TCSR is cleared to 0. 13.3.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) TCSR selects the clock source to be input to TCNT, and the timer mode. Bit 7 Bit Name OVF Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Overflow Flag Indicates that TCNT has overflowed in interval timer mode. Only a write of 0 is permitted, to clear the flag. [Setting condition] When TCNT overflows in interval timer mode (changes from H'FF to H'00) When internal reset request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, OVF is cleared automatically by the internal reset. [Clearing condition] Cleared by reading TCSR when OVF = 1, then writing 0 to OVF Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 531 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 13 Watchdog Timer Bit 6 Bit Name WT/IT Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Timer Mode Select Selects whether the WDT is used as a watchdog timer or interval timer. 0: Interval timer mode When TCNT overflows, an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is requested. 1: Watchdog timer mode When TCNT overflows, the WDTOVF signal is output. 5 TME 0 R/W Timer Enable When this bit is set to 1, TCNT starts counting. When this bit is cleared, TCNT stops counting and is initialized to H'00. 4, 3 -- All 1 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified. 2 1 0 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Clock Select 2 to 0 Selects the clock source to be input to TCNT. The overflow frequency for = 20 MHz is enclosed in parentheses. 000: Clock /2 (frequency: 25.6 s) 001: Clock /64 (frequency: 819.2 s) 010: Clock /128 (frequency: 1.6 ms) 011: Clock /512 (frequency: 6.6 ms) 100: Clock /2048 (frequency: 26.2 ms) 101: Clock /8192 (frequency: 104.9 ms) 110: Clock /32768 (frequency: 419.4 ms) 111: Clock /131072 (frequency: 1.68 s) Note: * Only a write of 0 is permitted, to clear the flag. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 532 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 13 Watchdog Timer 13.3.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR) RSTCSR controls the generation of the internal reset signal when TCNT overflows, and selects the type of internal reset signal. RSTCSR is initialized to H'1F by a reset signal from the RES pin, but not by the WDT internal reset signal caused by overflows. Bit 7 Bit Name WOVF Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Watchdog Timer Overflow Flag This bit is set when TCNT overflows in watchdog timer mode. This bit cannot be set in interval timer mode, and only 0 can be written. [Setting condition] Set when TCNT overflows (changed from H'FF to H'00) in watchdog timer mode [Clearing condition] Cleared by reading RSTCSR when WOVF = 1, and then writing 0 to WOVF 6 RSTE 0 R/W Reset Enable Specifies whether or not a reset signal is generated in the chip if TCNT overflows during watchdog timer operation. 0: Reset signal is not generated even if TCNT overflows (Though this LSI is not reset, TCNT and TCSR in WDT are reset) 1: Reset signal is generated if TCNT overflows 5 -- 0 R/W Reserved These bits can be read from or written to, but the operation is not affected. 4 to 0 Note: -- All 1 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified. * Only a write of 0 is permitted, to clear the flag. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 533 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 13 Watchdog Timer 13.4 13.4.1 Operation Watchdog Timer Mode To use the WDT as a watchdog timer mode, set the WT/IT and TME bits in TCSR to 1. If TCNT overflows without being rewritten because of a system crash or other error, the WDTOVF signal is output. This ensures that TCNT does not overflow while the system is operating normally. Software must prevent TCNT overflows by rewriting the TCNT value (normally be writing H'00) before overflow occurs. This WDTOVF signal can be used to reset the chip internally in watchdog timer mode. If TCNT overflows when 1 is set in the RSTE bit in RSTCSR, a signal that resets this LSI internally is generated at the same time as the WDTOVF signal. If a reset caused by a signal input to the RES pin occurs at the same time as a reset caused by a WDT overflow, the RES pin reset has priority and the WOVF bit in RSTCSR is cleared to 0. The WDTOVF signal is output for 132 states when RSTE = 1, and for 130 states when RSTE = 0. The internal reset signal is output for 518 states. When TCNT overflows in watchdog timer mode, the WOVF bit in RSTCSR is set to 1. If TCNT overflows when 1 is set in the RSTE bit in RSTCSR, an internal reset signal is generated to the entire chip. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 534 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 13 Watchdog Timer TCNT count Overflow H'FF H'00 WT/IT=1 TME=1 H'00 written to TCNT WOVF=1 WDTOVF and internal reset are generated WT/IT=1 TME=1 H'00 written to TCNT Time WDTOVF signal 132 states*2 Internal reset signal*1 518 states Legend: WT/IT: Timer mode select bit TME: Timer enable bit Notes: 1. If TCNT overflows when the RSTE bit is set to 1, an internal reset signal is generated. 2. 130 states when the RSTE bit is cleared to 0. Figure 13.2 Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode 13.4.2 Interval Timer Mode To use the WDT as an interval timer, set the WT/IT bit to 0 and TME bit in TCSR to 1. When the WDT is used as an interval timer, an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is generated each time the TCNT overflows. Therefore, an interrupt can be generated at intervals. When the TCNT overflows in interval timer mode, an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is requested at the same time the OVF bit in the TCSR is set to 1. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 535 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 13 Watchdog Timer TCNT count H'FF Overflow Overflow Overflow Overflow H'00 WT/IT=0 TME=1 WOVI WOVI WOVI WOVI Time Legend: WOVI: Interval timer interrupt request generation Figure 13.3 Operation in Interval Timer Mode 13.5 Interrupts During interval timer mode operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI). The interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF flag is set to 1 in TCSR. OVF must be cleared to 0 in the interrupt handling routine. Table 13.2 WDT Interrupt Source Name WOVI Interrupt Source TCNT overflow Interrupt Flag OVF DTC Activation Impossible 13.6 13.6.1 Usage Notes Notes on Register Access The watchdog timer's TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR registers differ from other registers in being more difficult to write to. The procedures for writing to and reading these registers are given below. Writing to TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR TCNT and TCSR must be written to by a word transfer instruction. They cannot be written to by a byte transfer instruction. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 536 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 13 Watchdog Timer TCNT and TCSR both have the same write address. Therefore, satisfy the relative condition shown in figure 13.4 to write to TCNT or TCSR. The transfer instruction writes the lower byte data to TCNT or TCSR according to the satisfied condition. To write to RSTCSR, execute a word transfer instruction for address H'FFBE. A byte transfer instruction cannot perform writing to RSTCSR. The method of writing 0 to the WOVF bit differs from that of writing to the RSTE bit. To write 0 to the WOVF bit, satisfy the lower condition shown in figure 13.4. If satisfied, the transfer instruction clears the WOVF bit to 0, but has no effect on the RSTE bit. To write to the RSTE bit, satisfy the above condition shown in figure 13.4. If satisfied, the transfer instruction writes the value in bit 6 of the lower byte into the RSTE bit, but has no effect on the WOVF bit. TCNT write or Writing to RSTE bit in RSTCSR 15 Address: H'FFBC (TCNT) H'FFBE (RSTCSR) TCSR write Address: H'FFBC (TCSR) 15 H'A5 8 7 Write data 0 8 H'5A 7 Write data 0 Writing 0 to WOVF bit in RSTCSR Address: H'FFBE (RSTCSR) 15 H'A5 8 7 H'00 0 Figure 13.4 Writing to TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR Reading TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR These registers are read in the same way as other registers. The read addresses are H'FFBC for TCSR, H'FFBD for TCNT, and H'FFBF for RSTCSR. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 537 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 13 Watchdog Timer 13.6.2 Contention between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the next cycle after the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the write takes priority and the timer counter is not incremented. Figure 13.5 shows this operation. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 Next cycle Address Internal write signal TCNT input clock TCNT N M Counter write data Figure 13.5 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment 13.6.3 Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0 If bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCSR are written to while the WDT is operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before changing the value of bits CKS2 to CKS0. 13.6.4 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode If the mode is switched from watchdog timer to interval timer, while the WDT is operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before switching the mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 538 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 13 Watchdog Timer 13.6.5 Internal Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode This LSI is not reset internally if TCNT overflows while the RSTE bit is cleared to 0 during watchdog timer mode operation, but TCNT and TCSR of the WDT are reset. TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCR cannot be written to while the WDTOVF signal is low. Also note that a read of the WOVF flag is not recognized during this period. To clear the WOVF flag, therefore, read TCSR after the WDTOVF signal goes high, then write 0 to the WOVF flag. 13.6.6 System Reset by WDTOVF Signal If the WDTOVF output signal is input to the RES pin, the chip will not be initialized correctly. Make sure that the WDTOVF signal is not input logically to the RES pin. To reset the entire system by means of the WDTOVF signal, use the circuit shown in figure 13.6. This LSI Reset input Reset signal to entire system Figure 13.6 Circuit for System Reset by WDTOVF Signal (Example) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 539 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 13 Watchdog Timer Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 540 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) This LSI has five independent serial communication interface (SCI) channels. The SCI can handle both asynchronous and clocked synchronous serial communication. Serial data communication can be carried out with standard asynchronous communication chips such as a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) or Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter (ACIA). A function is also provided for serial communication between processors (multiprocessor communication function) in asynchronous mode. The SCI also supports an IC card (Smart Card) interface conforming to ISO/IEC 7816-3 (Identification Card) as an asynchronous serial communication interface extension function. One of the five SCI channels (SCI_0) can generate an IrDA communication waveform conforming to IrDA specification version 1.0. Figure 14.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI. 14.1 Features * Choice of asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication mode * Full-duplex communication capability The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception to be executed simultaneously. Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous transmission and continuous reception of serial data. * On-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected External clock can be selected as a transfer clock source (except for in Smart Card interface mode). * Choice of LSB-first or MSB-first transfer (except in the case of asynchronous mode 7-bit data) * Four interrupt sources Four interrupt sources -- transmit-end, transmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, and receive error -- that can issue requests. The transmit-data-empty interrupt and receive data full interrupts can activate the data transfer controller (DTC) or DMA controller (DMAC). * Module stop mode can be set Asynchronous mode * * * * * Data length: 7 or 8 bits Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits Parity: Even, odd, or none Receive error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors Break detection: Break can be detected by reading the RxD pin level directly in case of a framing error Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 541 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 SCI0021AA_000020020100 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) * Average transfer rate generator (SCI_2 only): The following transfer rate can be selected. 115.152 or 460.606 kbps at 10.667-MHz operation 115.196, 460.784 or 720 kbps at 16-MHz operation 720 kbps at 32-MHz operation Clocked synchronous mode * Data length: 8 bits * Receive error detection: Overrun errors detected Smart Card Interface * Automatic transmission of error signal (parity error) in receive mode * Error signal detection and automatic data retransmission in transmit mode * Direct convention and inverse convention both supported Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 542 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bus interface Module data bus Internal data bus RDR TDR RxD RSR TSR SCMR SSR SCR SMR SEMR Transmission/ reception control BRR Baud rate generator /4 /16 /64 Clock TxD Parity check SCK Parity generation External clock TEI TXI RXI ERI Receive shift register Receive data register Transmit shift register Transmit data register Serial mode register Serial control register Serial status register Smart card mode register Bit rate register Serial extension mode register (only in SCI_2) Legend: RSR: RDR: TSR: TDR: SMR: SCR: SSR: SCMR: BRR: SEMR: Average transfer rate generator (SCI_2) 10.667-MHz operation * 115.152 kbps * 460.606 kbps 16-MHz operation * 115.196 kbps * 460.784 kbps * 720 kbps 32-MHz operation * 720 kbps Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of SCI Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 543 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.2 Input/Output Pins Table 14.1 shows the serial pins for each SCI channel. Table 14.1 Pin Configuration Channel 0 Pin Name* SCK0 RxD0/IrRxD TxD0/IrTxD 1 SCK1 RxD1 TxD1 2 SCK2 RxD2 TxD2 3 SCK3 RxD3 TxD3 4 SCK4 RxD4 TxD4 Note: * I/O I/O Input Output I/O Input Output I/O Input Output I/O Input Output I/O Input Output Function Channel 0 clock input/output Channel 0 receive data input (normal/IrDA) Channel 0 transmit data output (normal/IrDA) Channel 1 clock input/output Channel 1 receive data input Channel 1 transmit data output Channel 2 clock input/output Channel 2 receive data input Channel 2 transmit data output Channel 3 clock input/output Channel 3 receive data input Channel 3 transmit data output Channel 4 clock input/output Channel 4 receive data input Channel 4 transmit data output Pin names SCK, RxD, and TxD are used in the text for all channels, omitting the channel designation. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 544 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.3 Register Descriptions The SCI has the following registers. The serial mode register (SMR), serial status register (SSR), and serial control register (SCR) are described separately for normal serial communication interface mode and Smart Card interface mode because their bit functions partially differ. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Receive shift register_0 (RSR_0) Transmit shift register_0 (TSR_0) Receive data register_0 (RDR_0) Transmit data register_0 (TDR_0) Serial mode register_0 (SMR_0) Serial control register_0 (SCR_0) Serial status register_0 (SSR_0) Smart card mode register_0 (SCMR_0) Bit rate register_0 (BRR_0) IrDA control register_0 (IrCR_0) Receive shift register_1 (RSR_1) Transmit shift register_1 (TSR_1) Receive data register_1 (RDR_1) Transmit data register_1 (TDR_1) Serial mode register_1 (SMR_1) Serial control register_1 (SCR_1) Serial status register_1 (SSR_1) Smart card mode register_1 (SCMR_1) Bit rate register_1 (BRR_1) Receive shift register_2 (RSR_2) Transmit shift register_2 (TSR_2) Receive data register_2 (RDR_2) Transmit data register_2 (TDR_2) Serial mode register_2 (SMR_2) Serial control register_2 (SCR_2) Serial status register_2 (SSR_2) Smart card mode register_2 (SCMR_2) Bit rate register_2 (BRR_2) Serial extension mode register_2 (SEMR_2) Receive shift register_3 (RSR_3) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 545 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Transmit shift register_3 (TSR_3) Receive data register_3 (RDR_3) Transmit data register_3 (TDR_3) Serial mode register_3 (SMR_3) Serial control register_3 (SCR_3) Serial status register_3 (SSR_3) Smart card mode register_3 (SCMR_3) Bit rate register_3 (BRR_3) Receive shift register_4 (RSR_4) Transmit shift register_4 (TSR_4) Receive data register_4 (RDR_4) Transmit data register_4 (TDR_4) Serial mode register_4 (SMR_4) Serial control register_4 (SCR_4) Serial status register_4 (SSR_4) Smart card mode register_4 (SCMR_4) Bit rate register_4 (BRR_4) Receive Shift Register (RSR) 14.3.1 RSR is a shift register used to receive serial data that is input to the RxD pin and convert it into parallel data. When one byte of data has been received, it is transferred to RDR automatically. RSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU. 14.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) RDR is an 8-bit register that stores receive data. When the SCI has received one byte of serial data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR to RDR where it is stored. After this, RSR is receive-enabled. Since RSR and RDR function as a double buffer in this way, enables continuous receive operations to be performed. After confirming that the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, read RDR for only once. RDR cannot be written to by the CPU. 14.3.3 Transmit Data Register (TDR) TDR is an 8-bit register that stores transmit data. When the SCI detects that TSR is empty, it transfers the transmit data written in TDR to TSR and starts transmission. The double-buffered structures of TDR and TSR enable continuous serial transmission. If the next transmit data has Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 546 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) already been written to TDR during serial transmission, the SCI transfers the written data to TSR to continue transmission. Although TDR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times, to achieve reliable serial transmission, write transmit data to TDR for only once after confirming that the TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1. 14.3.4 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) TSR is a shift register that transmits serial data. To perform serial data transmission, the SCI first transfers transmit data from TDR to TSR, then sends the data to the TxD pin starting. TSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU. 14.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) SMR is used to set the SCI's serial transfer format and select the on-chip baud rate generator clock source. Some bit functions of SMR differ in normal serial communication interface mode and Smart Card interface mode. Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 0) Bit 7 Bit Name C/A Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Communication Mode 0: Asynchronous mode 1: Clocked synchronous mode 6 CHR 0 R/W Character Length (enabled only in asynchronous mode) 0: Selects 8 bits as the data length. 1: Selects 7 bits as the data length. LSB-first is fixed and the MSB (bit 7) of TDR is not transmitted in transmission. In clocked synchronous mode, a fixed data length of 8 bits is used. 5 PE 0 R/W Parity Enable (enabled only in asynchronous mode) When this bit is set to 1, the parity bit is added to transmit data before transmission, and the parity bit is checked in reception. For a multiprocessor format, parity bit addition and checking are not performed regardless of the PE bit setting. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 547 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 4 Bit Name O/E Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Parity Mode (enabled only when the PE bit is 1 in asynchronous mode) 0: Selects even parity. 1: Selects odd parity. 3 STOP 0 R/W Stop Bit Length (enabled only in asynchronous mode) Selects the stop bit length in transmission. 0: 1 stop bit 1: 2 stop bits In reception, only the first stop bit is checked regardless of the STOP bit setting. If the second stop bit is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next transmit character. 2 MP 0 R/W Multiprocessor Mode (enabled only in asynchronous mode) When this bit is set to 1, the multiprocessor communication function is enabled. The PE bit and O/E bit settings are invalid in multiprocessor mode. 1 0 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 R/W R/W Clock Select 1 and 0: These bits select the clock source for the on-chip baud rate generator. 00: clock (n = 0) 01: /4 clock (n = 1) 10: /16 clock (n = 2) 11: /64 clock (n = 3) For the relation between the bit rate register setting and the baud rate, see section 14.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR). n is the decimal display of the value of n in BRR (see section 14.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR)). Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 548 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Smart Card Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 1) Bit 7 Bit Name GM Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description GSM Mode When this bit is set to 1, the SCI operates in GSM mode. In GSM mode, the timing of the TEND setting is advanced by 11.0 etu (Elementary Time Unit: the time for transfer of 1 bit), and clock output control mode addition is performed. For details, refer to section 14.7.8, Clock Output Control. 6 BLK 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, the SCI operates in block transfer mode. For details on block transfer mode, refer to section 14.7.3, Block Transfer Mode. Parity Enable (enabled only in asynchronous mode) When this bit is set to 1, the parity bit is added to transmit data before transmission, and the parity bit is checked in reception. In Smart Card interface mode, this bit must be set to 1. 4 O/E 0 R/W Parity Mode (enabled only when the PE bit is 1 in asynchronous mode) 0: Selects even parity. 1: Selects odd parity. For details on setting this bit in Smart Card interface mode, refer to section 14.7.2, Data Format (Except for Block Transfer Mode). 3 2 BCP1 BCP0 0 0 R/W R/W Basic Clock Pulse 1 and 0 These bits select the number of basic clock periods in a 1-bit transfer interval on the Smart Card interface. 00: 32 clock (S = 32) 01: 64 clock (S = 64) 10: 372 clock (S = 372) 11: 256 clock (S = 256) For details, refer to section 14.7.4, Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin. S stands for the value of S in BRR (see section 14.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR)). 5 PE 0 R/W Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 549 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 1 0 Bit Name CKS1 CKS0 Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Clock Select 1 and 0: These bits select the clock source for the on-chip baud rate generator. 00: clock (n = 0) 01: /4 clock (n = 1) 10: /16 clock (n = 2) 11: /64 clock (n = 3) For the relation between the bit rate register setting and the baud rate, see section 14.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR). n is the decimal display of the value of n in BRR (see section 14.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR)). Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 550 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.3.6 Serial Control Register (SCR) SCR performs enabling or disabling of SCI transfer operations and interrupt requests, and selection of the transfer/receive clock source. For details on interrupt requests, refer to section 14.9, SCI Interrupts. Some bit functions of SCR differ in normal serial communication interface mode and Smart Card interface mode. Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 0) Bit 7 Bit Name TIE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Transmit Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, TXI interrupt request is enabled. TXI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag, then clearing it to 0, or clearing the TIE bit to 0. 6 RIE 0 R/W Receive Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, RXI and ERI interrupt requests are enabled. RXI and ERI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the RDRF flag, or the FER, PER, or ORER flag, then clearing the flag to 0, or by clearing the RIE bit to 0. 5 TE 0 R/W Transmit Enable When this bit s set to 1, transmission is enabled. In this state, serial transmission is started when transmit data is written to TDR and the TDRE flag in SSR is cleared to 0. SMR setting must be performed to decide the transfer format before setting the TE bit to 1. The TDRE flag in SSR is fixed at 1 if transmission is disabled by clearing this bit to 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 551 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 4 Bit Name RE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Receive Enable When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled. Serial reception is started in this state when a start bit is detected in asynchronous mode or serial clock input is detected in clocked synchronous mode. SMR setting must be performed to decide the transfer format before setting the RE bit to 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 does not affect the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER flags, which retain their states. 3 MPIE 0 R/W Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (enabled only when the MP bit in SMR is 1 in asynchronous mode) When this bit is set to 1, receive data in which the multiprocessor bit is 0 is skipped, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER status flags in SSR is prohibited. On receiving data in which the multiprocessor bit is 1, this bit is automatically cleared and normal reception is resumed. For details, refer to section 14.5, Multiprocessor Communication Function. When receive data including MPB = 0 in SSR is received, receive data transfer from RSR to RDR, receive error detection, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR , is not performed. When receive data including MPB = 1 is received, the MPB bit in SSR is set to 1, the MPIE bit is cleared to 0 automatically, and generation of RXI and ERI interrupts (when the TIE and RIE bits in SCR are set to 1) and FER and ORER flag setting is enabled. 2 TEIE 0 R/W Transmit End Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, TEI interrupt request is enabled. TEI cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag in SSR, then clearing it to 0 and clearing the TEND flag to 0, or by clearing the TEIE bit to 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 552 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 1 0 Bit Name CKE1 CKE0 Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Clock Enable 1 and 0 Selects the clock source and SCK pin function. Asynchronous mode 00: On-chip baud rate generator SCK pin functions as I/O port 01: On-chip baud rate generator (Outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit rate from the SCK pin.) 1x: External clock (Inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate from the SCK pin.) Clocked synchronous mode 0x: Internal clock (SCK pin functions as clock output) 1x: External clock (SCK pin functions as clock input) Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 553 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Smart Card Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 1) Bit 7 Bit Name TIE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Transmit Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, TXI interrupt request is enabled. TXI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag, then clearing it to 0, or clearing the TIE bit to 0. 6 RIE 0 R/W Receive Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, RXI and ERI interrupt requests are enabled. RXI and ERI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the RDRF flag, or the FER, PER, or ORER flag, then clearing the flag to 0, or by clearing the RIE bit to 0. 5 TE 0 R/W Transmit Enable When this bit is set to 1, transmission is enabled. In this state, serial transmission is started when transmit data is written to TDR and the TDRE flag in SSR is cleared to 0. SMR setting must be performed to decide the transfer format before setting the TE bit to 1. The TDRE flag in SSR is fixed at 1 if transmission is disabled by clearing this bit to 0. 4 RE 0 R/W Receive Enable When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled. Serial reception is started in this state when a start bit is detected in asynchronous mode or serial clock input is detected in clocked synchronous mode. SMR setting must be performed to decide the transfer format before setting the RE bit to 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 does not affect the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER flags, which retain their states. 3 MPIE 0 R/W Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (enabled only when the MP bit in SMR is 1 in asynchronous mode) Write 0 to this bit in Smart Card interface mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 554 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 2 1 0 Bit Name TEIE CKE1 CKE0 Initial Value 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Transmit End Interrupt Enable Write 0 to this bit in Smart Card interface mode. Clock Enable 1 and 0 Enables or disables clock output from the SCK pin. The clock output can be dynamically switched in GSM mode. For details, refer to section 14.7.8, Clock Output Control. When the GM bit in SMR is 0: 00: Output disabled (SCK pin can be used as an I/O port pin) 01: Clock output 1x: Reserved When the GM bit in SMR is 1: 00: Output fixed low 01: Clock output 10: Output fixed high 11: Clock output Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 555 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) SSR is a register containing status flags of the SCI and multiprocessor bits for transfer. 1 cannot be written to flags TDRE, RDRF, ORER, PER, and FER; they can only be cleared. Some bit functions of SSR differ in normal serial communication interface mode and Smart Card interface mode. Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 0) Bit 7 Bit Name TDRE Initial Value 1 R/W R/(W)* Description Transmit Data Register Empty Indicates whether TDR contains transmit data. [Setting conditions] * * When the TE bit in SCR is 0 When data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and data writing to TDR is enabled. When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 When the DMAC or DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt request and transfers data to TDR [Clearing conditions] * * 6 RDRF 0 R/(W)* Receive Data Register Full Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR. [Setting condition] When serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR [Clearing conditions] * * When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF = 1 When the DMAC or DTC is activated by an RXI interrupt and transferred data from RDR The RDRF flag is not affected and retains its previous value when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. Exercise care because if reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is set to 1, an overrun error occurs and receive data will be lost. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 556 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 5 Bit Name ORER Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Overrun Error Indicates that an overrun error occurred while receiving and the reception has ended abnormally. [Setting condition] When the next serial reception is completed while RDRF = 1 The receive data prior to the overrun error is retained in RDR, and the data received subsequently is lost. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the ORER flag is set to 1. In clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. [Clearing condition] When 0 is written to ORER after reading ORER = 1 The ORER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. 4 FER 0 R/(W)* Framing Error Indicates that a framing error occurred while receiving in asynchronous mode and the reception has ended abnormally. [Setting condition] When the stop bit is 0 In 2-stop-bit mode, only the first stop bit is checked for a value of 0; the second stop bit is not checked. If a framing error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR but the RDRF flag is not set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the FER flag is set to 1. In clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. [Clearing condition] When 0 is written to FER after reading FER = 1 The FER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 557 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 3 Bit Name PER Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Parity Error Indicates that a parity error occurred while receiving in asynchronous mode and the reception has ended abnormally. [Setting condition] When a parity error is detected during reception If a parity error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR but the RDRF flag is not set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the PER flag is set to 1. In clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. [Clearing condition] When 0 is written to PER after reading PER = 1 The PER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. 2 TEND 1 R Transmit End [Setting conditions] * * When the TE bit in SCR is 0 When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-byte serial transmit character When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 When the DMAC or DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and writes data to TDR [Clearing conditions] * * 1 MPB 0 R Multiprocessor Bit MPB stores the multiprocessor bit in the receive data. When the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0 its previous state is retained. 0 MPBT 0 R/W Multiprocessor Bit Transfer MPBT sets the multiprocessor bit to be added to the transmit data. Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Alternately, use the bit clear instruction to clear the flag. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 558 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Smart Card Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 1) Bit 7 Bit Name TDRE Initial Value 1 R/W R/(W)* 1 Description Transmit Data Register Empty Indicates whether TDR contains transmit data. [Setting conditions] * * When the TE bit in SCR is 0 When data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and data writing to TDR is enabled. When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 When the DMAC or DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt request and transfers data to TDR [Clearing conditions] * * 6 RDRF 0 R/(W)* 1 Receive Data Register Full Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR. [Setting condition] When serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR [Clearing conditions] * * When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF = 1 When the DMAC or DTC is activated by an RXI interrupt and transferred data from RDR The RDRF flag is not affected and retains its previous value when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. Exercise care because if reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is set to 1, an overrun error occurs and receive data will be lost. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 559 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 5 Bit Name ORER Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* 1 Description Overrun Error Indicates that an overrun error occurred while receiving and the reception has ended abnormally. [Setting condition] When the next serial reception is completed while RDRF = 1 The receive data prior to the overrun error is retained in RDR, and the data received subsequently is lost. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the ORER flag is set to 1. In clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. [Clearing condition] When 0 is written to ORER after reading ORER = 1 The ORER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. 4 ERS 0 R/(W)* 1 Error Signal Status [Setting condition] When the low level of the error signal is sampled [Clearing condition] When 0 is written to ERS after reading ERS = 1 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 560 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 3 Bit Name PER Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* 1 Description Parity Error Indicates that a parity error occurred while receiving in asynchronous mode and the reception has ended abnormally. [Setting condition] When a parity error is detected during reception If a parity error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR but the RDRF flag is not set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the PER flag is set to 1. In clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. [Clearing condition] When 0 is written to PER after reading PER = 1 The PER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 561 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 2 Bit Name TEND Initial Value 1 R/W R Description Transmit End This bit is set to 1 when no error signal has been sent back from the receiving end and the next transmit data is ready to be transferred to TDR. [Setting conditions] * * When the TE bit in SCR is 0 and the ERS bit is also 0 If the ERS bit is 0 and the TDRE bit is 1 after the specified interval after transmission of 1byte data Timing to set this bit differs according to the register settings. 2 GM = 0, BLK = 0: 2.5 etu* after transmission GM = 0, BLK = 1: 1.5 etu*2 after transmission 2 GM = 1, BLK = 0: 1.0 etu* after transmission GM = 1, BLK = 1: 1.0 etu*2 after transmission [Clearing conditions] * * 1 MPB 0 R When 0 is written to TEND after reading TEND = 1 When the DMAC or DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and writes data to TDR Multiprocessor Bit This bit is not used in Smart Card interface mode. 0 MPBT 0 R/W Multiprocessor Bit Transfer Write 0 to this bit in Smart Card interface mode. Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Alternately, use the bit clear instruction to clear the flag. 2. etu: Elementary Time Unit: (time for transfer of 1 bit) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 562 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.3.8 Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR) SCMR selects Smart Card interface mode and its format. Bit 7 to 4 3 Bit Name -- Initial Value All 1 R/W -- Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1. SDIR 0 R/W Smart Card Data Transfer Direction Selects the serial/parallel conversion format. 0: LSB-first in transfer 1: MSB-first in transfer The bit setting is valid only when the transfer data format is 8 bits. For 7-bit data, LSB-first is fixed. 2 SINV 0 R/W Smart Card Data Invert Specifies inversion of the data logic level. The SINV bit does not affect the logic level of the parity bit. To invert the parity bit, invert the O/E bit in SMR. 0: TDR contents are transmitted as they are. Receive data is stored as it is in RDR. 1: TDR contents are inverted before being transmitted. Receive data is stored in inverted form in RDR. 1 0 -- SMIF 1 0 -- R/W Reserved This bit is always read as 1. Smart Card Interface Mode Select This bit is set to 1 to make the SCI operate in Smart Card interface mode. 0: Normal asynchronous mode or clocked synchronous mode 1: Smart card interface mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 563 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.3.9 Bit Rate Register (BRR) BRR is an 8-bit register that adjusts the bit rate. As the SCI performs baud rate generator control independently for each channel, different bit rates can be set for each channel. Table 14.2 shows the relationships between the N setting in BRR and bit rate B for normal asynchronous mode, clocked synchronous mode, and Smart Card interface mode. The initial value of BRR is H'FF, and it can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. Table 14.2 Relationships between N Setting in BRR and Bit Rate B Mode Asynchronous Mode Clocked Synchronous Mode Smart Card Interface Mode Bit Rate B= 106 64 22n-1 (N + 1) Error Error (%) = { 106 B 64 22n-1 (N + 1) -1} 100 B= 106 8 22n-1 (N + 1) 106 S 22n-1 (N + 1) 106 B S 22n-1 (N + 1) B= Error (%) = { -1} 100 Notes: B: Bit rate (bit/s) N: BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 N 255) : Operating frequency (MHz) n and S: Determined by the SMR settings shown in the following tables. SMR Setting CKS1 0 0 1 1 CKS0 0 1 0 1 n 0 1 2 3 BCP1 0 0 1 1 SMR Setting BCP0 0 1 0 1 S 32 64 372 256 Table 14.3 shows sample N settings in BRR in normal asynchronous mode. Table 14.4 shows the maximum bit rate for each frequency in normal asynchronous mode. Table 14.6 shows sample N settings in BRR in clocked synchronous mode. Table 14.8 shows sample N settings in BRR in Smart Card interface mode. In Smart Card interface mode, S (the number of basic clock periods in a 1-bit transfer interval) can be selected. For details, refer to section 14.7.4, Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin. Tables 14.5 and 14.7 show the maximum bit rates with external clock input. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 564 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 14.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) Operating Frequency (MHz) 8 Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- N 141 103 207 103 207 103 51 25 12 7 -- Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.00 -- n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9.8304 N 174 127 255 127 255 127 63 31 15 9 7 Error (%) -0.26 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.70 0.00 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 177 129 64 129 64 129 64 32 15 9 7 10 Error (%) -0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -1.36 -1.73 0.00 -1.73 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 212 155 77 155 77 155 77 38 19 11 9 12 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -2.34 0.00 -2.34 Operating Frequency (MHz) 12.288 Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 217 159 79 159 79 159 79 39 19 11 9 Error (%) 0.08 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2.40 0.00 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 -- N 248 181 90 181 90 181 90 45 22 13 -- 14 Error (%) -0.17 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -0.93 -0.93 0.00 -- n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 14.7456 N 64 191 95 191 95 191 95 47 23 14 11 Error (%) 0.69 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.70 0.00 n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 70 207 103 207 103 207 103 51 25 15 12 16 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.00 0.16 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 565 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Operating Frequency (MHz) 17.2032 Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 75 223 111 223 111 223 111 55 27 16 13 Error (%) 0.48 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.20 0.00 n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 79 18 Error (%) -0.12 n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 19.6608 N 86 255 127 255 127 255 127 63 31 19 15 Error (%) 0.31 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.70 0.00 n 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 N 88 64 129 64 129 64 129 64 32 19 15 20 Error (%) -0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -1.36 0.00 1.73 233 0.16 116 0.16 233 0.16 116 0.16 233 0.16 116 0.16 58 28 17 14 -0.69 1.02 0.00 -2.34 Operating Frequency (MHz) 25 Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 Note: * n 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 N 110 80 162 80 162 80 162 80 40 24 19 Error (%) -0.02 0.47 -0.15 0.47 -0.15 0.47 -0.15 0.47 -0.76 0.00 1.73 n 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 N 30 Error (%) n 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 N 145 106 214 106 214 106 214 106 53 32 26 33 Error (%) 0.33 0.39 -0.07 0.39 -0.07 0.39 -0.07 0.39 -0.54 0 -0.54 n 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 34* N Error (%) 132 0.13 97 -0.35 150 -0.05 110 -0.29 220 0.16 110 -0.29 220 0.16 110 -0.29 220 0.16 110 -0.29 54 33 27 0.62 0.00 -1.18 194 0.16 97 -0.35 194 0.16 97 -0.35 194 0.16 97 48 29 23 -0.35 -0.35 0 1.73 Supported only by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 566 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 14.4 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode) (MHz) 8 9.8304 10 12 12.288 14 14.7456 16 17.2032 18 19.6608 20 25 30 33 34* Note: * Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 250000 307200 312500 375000 384000 437500 460800 500000 537600 562500 614400 625000 781250 937500 1031250 1062500 Supported only by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 567 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 14.5 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode) (MHz) 8 9.8304 10 12 12.288 14 14.7456 16 17.2032 18 19.6608 20 25 30 33 34* Note: * External Input Clock (MHz) 2.0000 2.4576 2.5000 3.0000 3.0720 3.5000 3.6864 4.0000 4.3008 4.5000 4.9152 5.0000 6.2500 7.5000 8.2500 8.5000 Supported only by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 125000 153600 156250 187500 192000 218750 230400 250000 268800 281250 307200 312500 390625 468750 515625 531250 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 568 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 14.6 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode) Operating Frequency (MHz) Bit Rate (bit/s) n 110 250 500 1k 2.5 k 5k 10 k 25 k 50 k 100 k 250 k 500 k 1M 2.5 M 5M 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 124 249 124 199 99 199 79 39 19 7 3 1 0 0* -- -- -- 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- -- -- 249 124 249 99 49 24 9 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 249 124 249 99 199 99 159 79 39 15 7 3 -- -- 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- -- 124 249 124 199 99 49 19 9 4 1 0* 3 2 2 1 0 0 0 0 -- -- -- -- 97 155 77 155 249 124 62 24 -- -- -- -- 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 -- 0 -- 233 116 187 93 187 74 149 74 29 14 -- 2 -- 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 -- -- -- -- 128 205 102 205 82 164 82 32 -- -- -- -- 3 128 8 N n 10 N n 16 N n 20 N n 25 N n 30 N n 33 N n 34* N 1 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 212 105 212 84 169 84 33 16 Legend: Blank: Cannot be set. --: Can be set, but there will be a degree of error. *: Continuous transfer is not possible. Note: 1. Supported only by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 569 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 14.7 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Clocked Synchronous Mode) (MHz) 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 25 30 33 34* Note: * External Input Clock (MHz) 1.3333 1.6667 2.0000 2.3333 2.6667 3.0000 3.3333 4.1667 5.0000 5.5000 5.6667 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 1333333.3 1666666.7 2000000.0 2333333.3 2666666.7 3000000.0 3333333.3 4166666.7 5000000.0 5500000.0 5666666.7 Supported only by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 570 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 14.8 Examples of Bit Rate for Various BRR Settings (Smart Card Interface Mode) (when n = 0 and S = 372) Operating Frequency (MHz) 10.00 Bit Rate (bit/s) 9600 n 0 N 1 Error (%) 30 n 0 10.7136 N 1 Error (%) 25 n 0 13.00 N 1 Error (%) 8.99 n 0 14.2848 N 1 Error (%) 0.00 Operating Frequency (MHz) 16.00 Bit Rate (bit/s) 9600 n 0 N 1 Error (%) 12.01 n 0 18.00 N 2 Error (%) 15.99 n 0 20.00 N 2 Error (%) 6.60 n 0 25.00 N 3 Error (%) 12.49 Operating Frequency (MHz) 30.00 Bit Rate (bit/s) 9600 Note: * n 0 N 3 Error (%) 5.01 n 0 33.00 N 4 Error (%) 7.59 n 0 34.00* N 4 Error (%) 4.79 Supported only by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 571 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 14.9 Maximum Bit Rate at Various Frequencies (Smart Card Interface Mode) (when S = 372) (MHz) 10.00 10.7136 13.00 14.2848 16.00 18.00 20.00 25.00 30.00 33.00 34.00* Note: * Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 13441 14400 17473 19200 21505 24194 26882 33602 40323 44355 45699 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Supported only by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 572 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.3.10 IrDA Control Register (IrCR) IrCR selects the function of SCI_0. Bit 7 Bit Name IrE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description IrDA Enable Specifies normal SCI mode or IrDA mode for SCI_0 input/output. 0: Pins TxD0/IrTxD and RxD0/IrRxD function as TxD0 and RxD0 1: Pins TxD0/IrTxD and RxD0/IrRxD function as IrTxD and IrRxD 6 5 4 IrCKS2 IrCKS1 IrCKS0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W IrDA Clock Select 2 to 0 Specifies the high pulse width in IrTxD output pulse encoding when the IrDA function is enabled. 000: Pulse width = B x 3/16 (3/16 of bit rate) 001: Pulse width = /2 010: Pulse width = /4 011: Pulse width = /8 100: Pulse width = /16 101: Pulse width = /32 110: Pulse width = /64 111: Pulse width = /128 3 to 0 -- All 0 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 573 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.3.11 Serial Extension Mode Register (SEMR) SEMR selects the clock source in asynchronous mode. The basic clock can be automatically set by selecting the average transfer rate. Bit 7 to 4 Bit Name -- Initial Value Undefined R/W -- Description Reserved If these bits are read, an undefined value will be returned. They cannot be modified. ABCS 0 R/W Asynchronous basic clock selection (valid only in asynchronous mode) Selects the basic clock for 1-bit period in asynchronous mode. 0: Operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the transfer rate. 1: Operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 8 times the transfer rate. 3 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 574 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 2 1 0 Bit Name ACS2 ACS1 ACS0 Initial Value 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Asynchronous clock source selection (valid when CKE1 = 1 in asynchronous mode) Selects the clock source for the average transfer rate. The basic clock can be automatically set by selecting the average transfer rate in spite of the value of ABCS. 000: External clock input 001: Selects 115.152 kbps which is the average transfer rate dedicated for = 10.667 MHz. (Operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the transfer rate.) 010: Selects 460.606 kbps which is the average transfer rate dedicated for = 10.667 MHz. (Operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 8 times the transfer rate.) 011: Selects 720 kbps which is the average transfer rate dedicated for = 32 MHz. (Operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the transfer rate.) 100: Reserved 101: Selects 115.196 kbps which is the average transfer rate dedicated for = 16 MHz (Operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the transfer rate.) 110: Selects 460.784 kbps which is the average transfer rate dedicated for = 16 MHz (Operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the transfer rate.) 111: Selects 720 kbps which is the average transfer rate dedicated for = 16 MHz (Operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 8 times the transfer rate.) Note that the average transfer rate does not correspond to the frequency other than 10.667, 16, or 32 MHz. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 575 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.4 Operation in Asynchronous Mode Figure 14.2 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication. One frame consists of a start bit (low level), followed by transfer data, a parity bit, and finally stop bits (high level). In asynchronous serial communication, the transmission line is usually held in the mark state (high level). The SCI monitors the transmission line, and when it goes to the space state (low level), recognizes a start bit and starts serial communication. In asynchronous serial communication, the communication line is usually held in the mark state (high level). The SCI monitors the communication line, and when it goes to the space state (low level), recognizes a start bit and starts serial communication. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a doublebuffered structure, so that data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer. Idle state (mark state) 1 Serial data 0 Start bit 1 bit LSB D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 MSB D7 0/1 1 1 1 Transmit/receive data 7 or 8 bits Parity Stop bit(s) bit 1 bit, or none 1 or 2 bits One unit of transfer data (character or frame) Figure 14.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits) 14.4.1 Data Transfer Format Table 14.10 shows the data transfer formats that can be used in asynchronous mode. Any of 12 transfer formats can be selected according to the SMR setting. For details on the multiprocessor bit, refer to section 14.5, Multiprocessor Communication Function. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 576 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 14.10 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode) SMR Settings CHR 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 PE 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 -- -- -- -- MP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 STOP 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 S Serial Transfer Format and Frame Length 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 STOP 11 12 8-bit data 8-bit data 8-bit data 8-bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data 8-bit data 8-bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data STOP S STOP STOP S P STOP S P STOP STOP S S STOP STOP S P STOP S P STOP STOP S MPB STOP S MPB STOP STOP S MPB STOP S MPB STOP STOP Legend: S: STOP: P: MPB: Start bit Stop bit Parity bit Multiprocessor bit Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 577 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.4.2 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode In asynchronous mode, the SCI operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the bit rate. In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and performs internal synchronization. Receive data is latched at the middle of each bit by sampling the data at the rising edge of the 8th pulse of the basic clock as shown in figure 14.3. Thus the reception margin in asynchronous mode is given by formula (1) below. M = { (0.5 - D - 0.5 1 ) - (L - 0.5) F - N 2N (1 + F) } 100 [%] ... Formula (1) Where M: Reception Margin N: Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 16) D: Clock duty (D = 0.5 to 1.0) L: Frame length (L = 9 to 12) F: Absolute value of clock rate deviation Assuming values of F = 0 and D = 0.5 in formula (1), a reception margin is given by formula below. M = {0.5 - 1/(2 x 16)} x 100 [%] = 46.875% However, this is only the computed value, and a margin of 20% to 30% should be allowed in system design. 16 clocks 8 clocks 0 Internal base clock 7 15 0 7 15 0 Receive data (RxD) Synchronization sampling timing Start bit D0 D1 Data sampling timing Figure 14.3 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 578 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.4.3 Clock Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input at the SCK pin can be selected as the SCI's serial clock, according to the setting of the C/A bit in SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. When an external clock is input at the SCK pin, the clock frequency should be 16 times the bit rate used. When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the SCK pin. The frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit rate, and the phase is such that the rising edge of the clock is in the middle of the transmit data, as shown in figure 14.4. SCK TxD 0 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 0/1 1 1 1 frame Figure 14.4 Relation between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase (Asynchronous Mode) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 579 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.4.4 SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode) Before transmitting and receiving data, you should first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0, then initialize the SCI as shown in figure 14.5. Do not write to SMR, SCMR, IrCR, or SEMR while the SCI is operating. This also applies to writing the same data as the current register contents. When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not initialize the contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR. When the external clock is used in asynchronous mode, the clock must be supplied even during initialization. Start of initialization Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0 [1] Set the clock selection in SCR. Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE, and bits TE and RE, to 0. When the clock is selected in asynchronous mode, it is output immediately after SCR settings are made. [2] Set the data transfer format in SMR and SCMR. [3] Write a value corresponding to the bit rate to BRR. (Not necessary if an external clock is used.) [4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1. Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits. Setting the TE and RE bits enables the TxD and RxD pins to be used. [4] Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR (TE, RE bits 0) [1] Set data transfer format in SMR and SCMR Set value in BRR Wait [2] [3] No 1-bit interval elapsed? Yes Set TE and RE bits in SCR to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits Figure 14.5 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 580 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.4.5 Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode) Figure 14.6 shows an example of the operation for transmission in asynchronous mode. In transmission, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if is cleared to 0, recognizes that data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR. 2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt request (TXI) is generated. Because the TXI interrupt routine writes the next transmit data to TDR before transmission of the current transmit data has finished, continuous transmission can be enabled. 3. Data is sent from the TxD pin in the following order: start bit, transmit data, parity bit or multiprocessor bit (may be omitted depending on the format), and stop bit. 4. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit. 5. If the TDRE flag is 0, the data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent, and then serial transmission of the next frame is started. 6. If the TDRE flag is 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the "mark state" is entered in which 1 is output. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 581 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Figure 14.7 shows a sample flowchart for transmission in asynchronous mode. 1 Start bit 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop Start bit bit bit 0/1 1 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop bit bit 0/1 1 1 Idle state (mark state) TDRE TEND TXI interrupt Data written to TDR and TXI interrupt request generated TDRE flag cleared to 0 in request generated TXI interrupt handling routine TEI interrupt request generated 1 frame Figure 14.6 Example of Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 582 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Initialization Start of transmission [1] Read TDRE flag in SSR [2] [1] SCI initialization: The TxD pin is automatically designated as the transmit data output pin. After the TE bit is set to 1, a frame of 1s is output, and transmission is enabled. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DMAC* or DTC is activated by a transmitdata-empty interrupt (TXI) request, and data is written to TDR. [4] Break output at the end of serial transmission: To output a break in serial transmission, set DDR for the port corresponding to the TxD pin to 1, clear DR to 0, then clear the TE bit in SCR to 0. No TDRE = 1? Yes Write transmit data to TDR and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0 No All data transmitted? Yes [3] Read TEND flag in SSR No TEND = 1? Yes No Break output? Yes Clear DR to 0 and set DDR to 1 [4] Note: * Not supported by the H8S/2366F. Clear TE bit in SCR to 0 Figure 14.7 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 583 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.4.6 Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode) Figure 14.8 shows an example of the operation for reception in asynchronous mode. In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the communication line, and if a start bit is detected, performs internal synchronization, receives receive data in RSR, and checks the parity bit and stop bit. 2. If an overrun error (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is still set to 1) occurs, the ORER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. Receive data is not transferred to RDR. The RDRF flag remains to be set to 1. 3. If a parity error is detected, the PER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. 4. If a framing error (when the stop bit is 0) is detected, the FER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. 5. If reception finishes successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is generated. Because the RXI interrupt routine reads the receive data transferred to RDR before reception of the next receive data has finished, continuous reception can be enabled. 1 Start bit 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop Start bit bit bit 0/1 1 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop bit bit 0/1 0 1 Idle state (mark state) RDRF FER RXI interrupt request generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine ERI interrupt request generated by framing error 1 frame Figure 14.8 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 584 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 14.11 shows the states of the SSR status flags and receive data handling when a receive error is detected. If a receive error is detected, the RDRF flag retains its state before receiving data. Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the ORER, FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 14.9 shows a sample flowchart for serial data reception. Table 14.11 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling SSR Status Flag RDRF* 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Note: * ORER 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 FER 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 PER 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 Receive Data Lost Transferred to RDR Transferred to RDR Lost Lost Transferred to RDR Lost Receive Error Type Overrun error Framing error Parity error Overrun error + framing error Overrun error + parity error Framing error + parity error Overrun error + framing error + parity error The RDRF flag retains its state before data reception. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 585 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Initialization Start of reception [1] [1] SCI initialization: The RxD pin is automatically designated as the receive data input pin. [2] [3] Receive error handling and break detection: Read ORER, PER, and If a receive error occurs, read the [2] FER flags in SSR ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After performing the appropriate error Yes processing, ensure that the PER FER ORER = 1? ORER, PER, and FER flags are [3] all cleared to 0. Reception cannot No Error handling be resumed if any of these flags (Continued on next page) are set to 1. In the case of a framing error, a break can be detected by reading the value of [4] Read RDRF flag in SSR the input port corresponding to the RxD pin. No RDRF = 1? Yes Read receive data in RDR, and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0 [4] SCI status check and receive data read : Read SSR and check that RDRF = 1, then read the receive data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. [5] No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 [5] Serial reception continuation procedure: To continue serial reception, before the stop bit for the current frame is received, read the RDRF flag, read RDR, and clear the RDRF flag to 0. The RDRF flag is cleared automatically when the DMAC* or DTC is activated by an RXI interrupt and the RDR value is read. Note: * Not supported by the H8S/2366F. Figure 14.9 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (1) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 586 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) [3] Error handling No ORER = 1? Yes Overrun error handling No FER = 1? Yes Yes Break? No Framing error handling Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 No PER = 1? Yes Parity error handling Clear ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to 0 Figure 14.9 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (2) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 587 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.5 Multiprocessor Communication Function Use of the multiprocessor communication function enables data transfer to be performed among a number of processors sharing communication lines by means of asynchronous serial communication using the multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data. When multiprocessor communication is carried out, each receiving station is addressed by a unique ID code. The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles: an ID transmission cycle which specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle to the specified receiving station. The multiprocessor bit is used to differentiate between the ID transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle. If the multiprocessor bit is 1, the cycle is an ID transmission cycle, and if the multiprocessor bit is 0, the cycle is a data transmission cycle. Figure 14.10 shows an example of inter-processor communication using the multiprocessor format. The transmitting station first sends communication data with a 1 multiprocessor bit added to the ID code of the receiving station. It then sends transmit data as data with a 0 multiprocessor bit added. When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its own ID. The station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose ID does not match continue to skip data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received. The SCI uses the MPIE bit in SCR to implement this function. When the MPIE bit is set to 1, transfer of receive data from RSR to RDR, error flag detection, and setting the SSR status flags, RDRF, FER, and ORER to 1 are inhibited until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received. On reception of receive character with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the MPBR bit in SSR is set to 1 and the MPIE bit is automatically cleared, thus normal reception is resumed. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt is generated. When the multiprocessor format is selected, the parity bit setting is invalid. All other bit settings are the same as those in normal asynchronous mode. The clock used for multiprocessor communication is the same as that in normal asynchronous mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 588 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Transmitting station Serial communication line Receiving station A (ID = 01) Serial data Receiving station B (ID = 02) Receiving station C (ID = 03) Receiving station D (ID = 04) H'01 (MPB= 1) ID transmission cycle = receiving station specification H'AA (MPB= 0) Data transmission cycle = data transmission to receiving station specified by ID [Legend] MPB: Multiprocessor bit Figure 14.10 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format (Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A) 14.5.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission Figure 14.11 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission. For an ID transmission cycle, set the MPBT bit in SSR to 1 before transmission. For a data transmission cycle, clear the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 before transmission. All other SCI operations are the same as those in asynchronous mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 589 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Initialization Start of transmission [1] [1] SCI initialization: Read TDRE flag in SSR [2] The TxD pin is automatically designated as the transmit data output pin. After the TE bit is set to 1, a frame of 1s is output, and transmission is enabled. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR. Set the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 or 1. Finally, clear the TDRE flag to 0. No TDRE = 1? Yes Write transmit data to TDR and set MPBT bit in SSR Clear TDRE flag to 0 No All data transmitted? Yes Read TEND flag in SSR No TEND = 1? Yes No Break output? Yes [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, be sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is [3] possible, then write data to TDR, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DMAC* or DTC is activated by a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request, and data is written to TDR. [4] Break output at the end of serial transmission: To output a break in serial transmission, set the port DDR to [4] 1, clear DR to 0, then clear the TE bit in SCR to 0. Note: * Not supported by the H8S/2366F. Clear DR to 0 and set DDR to 1 Clear TE bit in SCR to 0 Figure 14.11 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 590 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.5.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception Figure 14.13 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data reception. If the MPIE bit in SCR is set to 1, data is skipped until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received. On receiving data with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the receive data is transferred to RDR. An RXI interrupt request is generated at this time. All other SCI operations are the same as in asynchronous mode. Figure 14.12 shows an example of SCI operation for multiprocessor format reception. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 591 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 1 Start bit 0 D0 D1 Data (ID1) MPB D7 1 Stop bit 1 Start bit 0 D0 D1 Data (Data1) MPB D7 0 Stop bit 1 1 Idle state (mark state) MPIE RDRF RDR value MPIE = 0 RXI interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine ID1 If not this station's ID, RXI interrupt request is MPIE bit is set to 1 not generated, and RDR again retains its state (a) Data does not match station's ID 1 Start bit Data (ID2) MPB D0 D1 D7 1 Stop bit 1 Start bit 0 D0 Data (Data2) MPB D1 D7 0 Stop bit 1 0 1 Idle state (mark state) MPIE RDRF RDR value ID1 ID2 Data2 MPIE bit set to 1 again MPIE = 0 RXI interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine Matches this station's ID, so reception continues, and data is received in RXI interrupt handling routine (b) Data matches station's ID Figure 14.12 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 592 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Initialization Start of reception [1] [1] SCI initialization: The RxD pin is automatically designated as the receive data input pin. [2] ID reception cycle: Set the MPIE bit in SCR to 1. [3] SCI status check, ID reception and comparison: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR and compare it with this station's ID. If the data is not this station's ID, set the MPIE bit to 1 again, and clear the RDRF flag to 0. If the data is this station's ID, clear the RDRF flag to 0. [4] SCI status check and data reception: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the data in RDR. [5] Receive error handling and break detection: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER and FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After performing the appropriate error handling, ensure that the ORER and FER flags are both cleared to 0. Reception cannot be resumed if either of these flags is set to 1. In the case of a framing error, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value. Set MPIE bit in SCR to 1 Read ORER and FER flags in SSR FER ORER = 1? No Read RDRF flag in SSR No RDRF = 1? Yes Read receive data in RDR No This station's ID? Yes Read ORER and FER flags in SSR [2] Yes [3] FER ORER = 1? No Read RDRF flag in SSR Yes [4] No RDRF = 1? Yes Read receive data in RDR No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 [5] Error handling (Continued on next page) Figure 14.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 593 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) [5] Error handling No ORER = 1? Yes Overrun error handling No FER = 1? Yes Yes Break? No Framing error handling Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 Clear ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to 0 Figure 14.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 594 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.6 Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode Figure 14.14 shows the general format for clocked synchronous communication. In clocked synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received in synchronization with clock pulses. One character of communication data consists of 8-bit data. In clocked synchronous serial communication, data on the transmission line is output from one falling edge of the serial clock to the next. In clocked synchronous mode, the SCI receives data in synchronization with the rising edge of the serial clock. After 8-bit data is output, the transmission line holds the MSB state. In clocked synchronous mode, no parity or multiprocessor bit is added. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication by use of a common clock. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so that data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer. One unit of transfer data (character or frame) * Serial clock LSB Serial data Don't care * MSB Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Don't care Bit 0 Note: * High except in continuous transfer Figure 14.14 Data Format in Clocked Synchronous Communication (For LSB-First) 14.6.1 Clock Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external synchronization clock input at the SCK pin can be selected, according to the setting of CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the serial clock is output from the SCK pin. Eight serial clock pulses are output in the transfer of one character, and when no transfer is performed the clock is fixed high. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 595 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.6.2 SCI Initialization (Clocked Synchronous Mode) Before transmitting and receiving data, you should first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0, then initialize the SCI as described in a sample flowchart in figure 14.15. Do not write to SMR, SCMR, IrCR, or SEMR while the SCI is operating. This also applies to writing the same data as the current register contents. When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not change the contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR. Start of initialization [1] Set the clock selection in SCR. Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE, TE and RE, to 0. [2] Set the data transfer format in SMR and SCMR. Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0 Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR (TE, RE bits 0) [1] Set data transfer format in SMR and SCMR [3] Write a value corresponding to the bit rate to BRR. (Not necessary if an external clock is used.) [4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TE and RE bits in SCR to 1. Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits. Setting the TE and RE bits enable the TxD and RxD pins to be used. [2] Set value in BRR Wait [3] No 1-bit interval elapsed? Yes Set TE and RE bits in SCR to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits [4] Note: In simultaneous transmit and receive operations, the TE and RE bits should both be cleared to 0 or set to 1 simultaneously. Figure 14.15 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 596 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.6.3 Serial Data Transmission (Clocked Synchronous Mode) Figure 14.16 shows an example of SCI operation for transmission in clocked synchronous mode. In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if is 0, recognizes that data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR. 2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TXI interrupt request is generated. Because the TXI interrupt routine writes the next transmit data to TDR before transmission of the current transmit data has finished, continuous transmission can be enabled. 3. 8-bit data is sent from the TxD pin synchronized with the output clock when output clock mode has been specified and synchronized with the input clock when use of an external clock has been specified. 4. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the MSB. 5. If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and serial transmission of the next frame is started. 6. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, and the TxD pin maintains the output state of the last bit. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated. The SCK pin is fixed high. Figure 14.17 shows a sample flowchart for serial data transmission. Even if the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, transmission will not start while a receive error flag (ORER, FER, or PER) is set to 1. Make sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting transmission. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not clear the receive error flags. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 597 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Transfer direction Serial clock Serial data Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 TDRE TEND TXI interrupt request generated TXI interrupt Data written to TDR request generated and TDRE flag cleared to 0 in TXI interrupt handling routine 1 frame TEI interrupt request generated Figure 14.16 Sample SCI Transmission Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 598 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Initialization Start of transmission [1] [1] SCI initialization: The TxD pin is automatically designated as the transmit data output pin. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, be sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DMAC* or DTC is activated by a transmit-dataempty interrupt (TXI) request and data is written to TDR. Note: * Not supported by the H8S/2366F. Read TDRE flag in SSR [2] No TDRE = 1? Yes Write transmit data to TDR and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0 No All data transmitted? Yes [3] Read TEND flag in SSR No TEND = 1? Yes Clear TE bit in SCR to 0 Figure 14.17 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 599 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.6.4 Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode) Figure 14.18 shows an example of SCI operation for reception in clocked synchronous mode. In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI performs internal initialization in synchronization with a synchronization clock input or output, starts receiving data, and stores the received data in RSR. 2. If an overrun error (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is still set to 1) occurs, the ORER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. Receive data is not transferred to RDR. The RDRF flag remains to be set to 1. 3. If reception finishes successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is generated. Because the RXI interrupt routine reads the receive data transferred to RDR before reception of the next receive data has finished, continuous reception can be enabled. Serial clock Serial data RDRF ORER RXI interrupt request generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine 1 frame RXI interrupt request generated ERI interrupt request generated by overrun error Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 Figure 14.18 Example of SCI Operation in Reception Transfer cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the ORER, FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 14.19 shows a sample flowchart for serial data reception. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 600 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Initialization Start of reception [1] [1] SCI initialization: The RxD pin is automatically designated as the receive data input pin. Read ORER flag in SSR Yes ORER = 1? No [2] [3] Error processing (Continued below) [2] [3] Receive error handling: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR, and after performing the appropriate error handling, clear the ORER flag to 0. Transfer cannot be resumed if the ORER flag is set to 1. [4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. [5] Serial reception continuation procedure: To continue serial reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received, finish reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR, and clearing the RDRF flag to 0. The RDRF flag is cleared automatically when the DMAC or DTC is activated by a receivedata-full interrupt (RXI) request and the RDR value is read. Read RDRF flag in SSR [4] No RDRF = 1? Yes Read receive data in RDR, and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0 No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 Error handling Overrun error handling Clear ORER flag in SSR to 0 Figure 14.19 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 601 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.6.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode) Figure 14.20 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive operations. The following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive operations after the SCI is initialized. To switch from transmit mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after checking that the SCI has finished transmission and the TDRE and TEND flags are set to 1, clear TE to 0. Then simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction. To switch from receive mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after checking that the SCI has finished reception, clear RE to 0. Then after checking that the RDRF and receive error flags (ORER, FER, and PER) are cleared to 0, simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 602 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Initialization Start of transmission/reception [1] [1] SCI initialization: The TxD pin is designated as the transmit data output pin, and the RxD pin is designated as the receive data input pin, enabling simultaneous transmit and receive operations. Read TDRE flag in SSR No TDRE = 1? Yes Write transmit data to TDR and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0 [2] [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. Transition of the TDRE flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by a TXI interrupt. [3] Receive error handling: Read ORER flag in SSR Yes [3] Error handling ORER = 1? No If a receive error occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR, and after performing the appropriate error handling, clear the ORER flag to 0. Transmission/reception cannot be resumed if the ORER flag is set to 1. [4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. Read RDRF flag in SSR No RDRF = 1? Yes Read receive data in RDR, and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0 [4] [5] Serial transmission/reception continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission/ reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received, finish reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR, and clearing the RDRF flag to 0. Also, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is transmitted, read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible. Then write data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DMAC or DTC is activated by a transmit-dataempty interrupt (TXI) request and data is written to TDR. Also, the RDRF flag is cleared automatically when the DMAC or DTC is activated by a receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and the RDR value is read. No All data received? Yes [5] Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0 Figure 14.20 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 603 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.7 Operation in Smart Card Interface Mode The SCI supports an IC card (Smart Card) interface conforming to ISO/IEC 7816-3 (Identification Card) as a serial communication interface extension function. Switching between the normal serial communication interface and the Smart Card interface is carried out by means of a register setting. 14.7.1 Pin Connection Example Figure 14.21 shows an example of connection with the Smart Card. In communication with an IC card, since both transmission and reception are carried out on a single data transmission line, the TxD pin and RxD pin should be connected with the LSI pin. The data transmission line should be pulled up to the VCC power supply with a resistor. If an IC card is not connected, and the TE and RE bits are both set to 1, closed transmission/reception is possible, enabling self-diagnosis to be carried out. When the clock generated on the SCI is used by an IC card, the SCK pin output is input to the CLK pin of the IC card. This LSI port output is used as the reset signal. VCC TxD RxD SCK Rx (port) This LSI Connected equipment Data line Clock line Reset line I/O CLK RST IC card Figure 14.21 Schematic Diagram of Smart Card Interface Pin Connections Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 604 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.7.2 Data Format (Except for Block Transfer Mode) Figure 14.22 shows the transfer data format in Smart Card interface mode. * One frame consists of 8-bit data plus a parity bit in asynchronous mode. * In transmission, a guard time of at least 2 etu (Elementary Time Unit: time for transfer of 1 bit) is left between the end of the parity bit and the start of the next frame. * If a parity error is detected during reception, a low error signal level is output for one etu period, 10.5 etu after the start bit. * If an error signal is sampled during transmission, the same data is retransmitted automatically after the elapse of 2 etu or longer. When there is no parity error Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp Transmitting station output When a parity error occurs Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE Transmitting station output Receiving station output Legend: Ds: Start bit D0 to D7: Data bits Dp: Parity bit DE: Error signal Figure 14.22 Normal Smart Card Interface Data Format Data transfer with the types of IC cards (direct convention and inverse convention) are performed as described in the following. (Z) A Ds Z D0 Z D1 A D2 Z D3 Z D4 Z D5 A D6 A D7 Z Dp (Z) State Figure 14.23 Direct Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 0) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 605 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) As in the above sample start character, with the direct convention type, the logic 1 level corresponds to state Z and the logic 0 level to state A, and transfer is performed in LSB-first order. The start character data above is H'3B. For the direct convention type, clear the SDIR and SINV bits in SCMR to 0. According to the Smart Card regulations, clear the O/E bit in SMR to 0 to select even parity mode. (Z) A Ds Z D7 Z D6 A D5 A D4 A D3 A D2 A D1 A D0 Z Dp (Z) State Figure 14.24 Inverse Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 1) With the inverse convention type, the logic 1 level corresponds to state A and the logic 0 level to state Z, and transfer is performed in MSB-first order. The start character data above is H'3F. For the inverse convention type, set the SDIR and SINV bits in SCMR to 1. According to the Smart Card regulations, even parity mode is the logic 0 level of the parity bit, and corresponds to state Z. In this LSI, the SINV bit inverts only data bits D7 to D0. Therefore, set the O/E bit in SMR to 1 to invert the parity bit for both transmission and reception. 14.7.3 Block Transfer Mode Operation in block transfer mode is the same as that in normal Smart Card interface, except for the following points. * In reception, though the parity check is performed, no error signal is output even if an error is detected. However, the PER bit in SSR is set to 1 and must be cleared before receiving the parity bit of the next frame. * In transmission, a guard time of at least 1 etu is left between the end of the parity bit and the start of the next frame. * In transmission, because retransmission is not performed, the TEND flag is set to 1, 11.5 etu after transmission start. * As with the normal Smart Card interface, the ERS flag indicates the error signal status, but since error signal transfer is not performed, this flag is always cleared to 0. Note: etu: Elementary Time Unit (time for transfer of 1 bit) 14.7.4 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin Only the internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator is used as transmit/receive clock in Smart Card interface. In Smart Card interface mode, the SCI operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 32, 64, 372, or 256 times the bit rate (fixed at 16 times in normal Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 606 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) asynchronous mode) as determined by bits BCP1 and BCP0. In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and performs internal synchronization. As shown in figure 14.25, by sampling receive data at the rising-edge of the 16th, 32nd, 186th, or 128th pulse of the basic clock, data can be latched at the middle of the bit. The reception margin is given by the following formula. M = | (0.5 - | D - 0.5 | 1 ) - (L - 0.5) F - (1 + F) | N 2N 100% Where M: Reception margin (%) N: Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 32, 64, 372, and 256) D: Clock duty (D = 0 to 1.0) L: Frame length (L = 10) F: Absolute value of clock frequency deviation Assuming values of F = 0, D = 0.5 and N = 372 in the above formula, the reception margin formula is as follows. M = (0.5 - 1/2 x 372) x 100% = 49.866% 372 clocks 186 clocks 0 Internal basic clock 185 371 0 185 371 0 Receive data (RxD) Synchronization sampling timing Start bit D0 D1 Data sampling timing Figure 14.25 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Smart Card Mode (Using Clock of 372 Times the Bit Rate) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 607 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.7.5 Initialization Before transmitting and receiving data, initialize the SCI as described below. Initialization is also necessary when switching from transmit mode to receive mode, or vice versa. Clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0. Clear the error flags ERS, PER, and ORER in SSR to 0. Set the GM, BLK, O/E, BCP1, BCP0, CKS1, and CKS0 bits in SMR. Set the PE bit to 1. Set the SMIF, SDIR, and SINV bits in SCMR. When the SMIF bit is set to 1, the TxD and RxD pins are both switched from ports to SCI pins, and are placed in the high-impedance state. 5. Set the value corresponding to the bit rate in BRR. 6. Set the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR. Clear the TIE, RIE, TE, RE, MPIE, and TEIE bits to 0. If the CKE0 bit is set to 1, the clock is output from the SCK pin. 7. Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TIE, RIE, TE, and RE bits in SCR. Do not set the TE bit and RE bit at the same time, except for self-diagnosis. To switch from receive mode to transmit mode, after checking that the SCI has finished reception, initialize the SCI, and clear RE to 0 and set TE to 1. Whether SCI has finished reception can be checked with the RDRF, PER, or ORER flag. To switch from transmit mode to receive mode, after checking that the SCI has finished transmission, initialize the SCI, and clear TE to 0 and set RE to 1. Whether SCI has finished transmission can be checked with the TEND flag. 14.7.6 Data Transmission (Except for Block Transfer Mode) 1. 2. 3. 4. As data transmission in Smart Card interface mode involves error signal sampling and retransmission processing, the operations are different from those in normal serial communication interface mode (except for block transfer mode). Figure 14.26 illustrates the retransfer operation when the SCI is in transmit mode. 1. If an error signal is sampled from the receiving end after transmission of one frame is completed, the ERS bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. The ERS bit in SSR should be cleared to 0 before the next parity bit is sampled. 2. The TEND bit in SSR is not set for a frame for which an error signal is received. Data is retransferred from TDR to TSR, and retransmitted automatically. 3. If an error signal is not sent back from the receiving end, the ERS bit in SSR is not set. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 608 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 4. Transmission of one frame, including a retransfer, is judged to have been completed, and the TEND bit in SSR is set to 1. If the TIE bit in SCR is set at this time, a TXI interrupt request is generated. Writing transmit data to TDR transfers the next transmit data. Figure 14.28 shows a flowchart for transmission. The sequence of transmit operations can be performed automatically by specifying the DTC or DMAC to be activated with a TXI interrupt source. In a transmit operation, the TDRE flag is also set to 1 at the same time as the TEND flag in SSR, and a TXI interrupt will be generated if the TIE bit in SCR has been set to 1. If the TXI request is designated beforehand as a DTC or DMAC activation source, the DTC or DMAC will be activated by the TXI request, and transfer of the transmit data will be carried out. The TDRE and TEND flags are automatically cleared to 0 when data transfer is performed by the DTC or DMAC. In the event of an error, the SCI retransmits the same data automatically. During this period, the TEND flag remains cleared to 0 and the DTC or DMAC is not activated. Therefore, the SCI and DTC or DMAC will automatically transmit the specified number of bytes in the event of an error, including retransmission. However, the ERS flag is not cleared automatically when an error occurs, and so the RIE bit should be set to 1 beforehand so that an ERI request will be generated in the event of an error, and the ERS flag will be cleared. When performing transfer using the DTC or DMAC, it is essential to set and enable the DTC or DMAC before carrying out SCI setting. For details on the DTC or DMAC setting procedures, refer to section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC) or section 7, DMA Controller (DMAC). Transfer frame n+1 (DE) Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 nth transfer frame Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE TDRE Transfer to TSR from TDR TEND [7] FER/ERS [6] Retransferred frame Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp Transfer to TSR from TDR Transfer to TSR from TDR [9] [8] Figure 14.26 Retransfer Operation in SCI Transmit Mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 609 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) The timing for setting the TEND flag depends on the value of the GM bit in SMR. The TEND flag generation timing is shown in figure 14.27. I/O data TXI (TEND interrupt) When GM = 0 Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE Guard time 12.5etu 11.0etu When GM = 1 Legend: Start bit Ds: D0 to D7: Data bits Parity bit Dp: Error signal DE: Note: etu: Elementary Time Unit (time for transfer of 1 bit) Figure 14.27 TEND Flag Generation Timing in Transmission Operation Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 610 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Start Initialization Start transmission ERS = 0? Yes No Error processing No TEND = 1? Yes Write data to TDR, and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0 No All data transmitted ? Yes No ERS = 0? Yes Error processing No TEND = 1? Yes Clear TE bit to 0 End Figure 14.28 Example of Transmission Processing Flow Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 611 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.7.7 Serial Data Reception (Except for Block Transfer Mode) Data reception in Smart Card interface mode uses the same operation procedure as for normal serial communication interface mode. Figure 14.29 illustrates the retransfer operation when the SCI is in receive mode. 1. If an error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the PER bit in SSR is automatically set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. The PER bit in SSR should be cleared to 0 before the next parity bit is sampled. 2. The RDRF bit in SSR is not set for a frame in which an error has occurred. 3. If no error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the PER bit in SSR is not set to 1. 4. The receive operation is judged to have been completed normally, and the RDRF flag in SSR is automatically set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set at this time, an RXI interrupt request is generated. Figure 14.30 shows a flowchart for reception. The sequence of receive operations can be performed automatically by specifying the DTC or DMAC to be activated with an RXI interrupt source. In a receive operation, an RXI interrupt request is generated when the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1. If the RXI request is designated beforehand as a DTC or DMAC activation source, the DTC or DMAC will be activated by the RXI request, and transfer of the receive data will be carried out. The RDRF flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data transfer is performed by the DTC or DMAC. If an error occurs in receive mode and the ORER or PER flag is set to 1, a transfer error interrupt (ERI) request will be generated, and so the error flag must be cleared to 0. In the event of an error, the DTC or DMAC is not activated and receive data is skipped. Therefore, receive data is transferred for only the specified number of bytes in the event of an error. Even when a parity error occurs in receive mode and the PER flag is set to 1, the data that has been received is transferred to RDR and can be read from there. Note: For details on receive operations in block transfer mode, refer to section 14.4, Operation in Asynchronous Mode. nth transfer frame Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE RDRF [2] PER [1] [3] [4] Retransferred frame Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp Transfer frame n+1 (DE) Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 Figure 14.29 Retransfer Operation in SCI Receive Mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 612 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Start Initialization Start reception ORER = 0 and PER = 0 Yes No Error processing No RDRF = 1? Yes Read RDR and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0 No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit to 0 Figure 14.30 Example of Reception Processing Flow 14.7.8 Clock Output Control When the GM bit in SMR is set to 1, the clock output level can be fixed with bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR. At this time, the minimum clock pulse width can be made the specified width. Figure 14.31 shows the timing for fixing the clock output level. In this example, GM is set to 1, CKE1 is cleared to 0, and the CKE0 bit is controlled. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 613 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) CKE0 SCK Specified pulse width Specified pulse width Figure 14.31 Timing for Fixing Clock Output Level When turning on the power or switching between Smart Card interface mode and software standby mode, the following procedures should be followed in order to maintain the clock duty. Powering On: To secure the clock duty from power-on, the following switching procedure should be followed. 1. The initial state is port input and high impedance. Use a pull-up resistor or pull-down resistor to fix the potential. 2. Fix the SCK pin to the specified output level with the CKE1 bit in SCR. 3. Set SMR and SCMR, and switch to smart card mode operation. 4. Set the CKE0 bit in SCR to 1 to start clock output. When changing from smart card interface mode to software standby mode: 1. Set the data register (DR) and data direction register (DDR) corresponding to the SCK pin to the value for the fixed output state in software standby mode. 2. Write 0 to the TE bit and RE bit in the serial control register (SCR) to halt transmit/receive operation. At the same time, set the CKE1 bit to the value for the fixed output state in software standby mode. 3. Write 0 to the CKE0 bit in SCR to halt the clock. 4. Wait for one serial clock period. During this interval, clock output is fixed at the specified level, with the duty preserved. 5. Make the transition to the software standby state. When returning to smart card interface mode from software standby mode: 1. Exit the software standby state. 2. Write 1 to the CKE0 bit in SCR and output the clock. Signal generation is started with the normal duty. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 614 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Software standby Normal operation Normal operation [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Figure 14.32 Clock Halt and Restart Procedure Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 615 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.8 IrDA Operation When the IrDA function is enabled with bit IrE in IrCR, the SCI_0 TxD0 and RxD0 signals are subjected to waveform encoding/decoding conforming to IrDA specification version 1.0 (IrTxD and IrRxD pins). By connecting these pins to an infrared transceiver/receiver, it is possible to implement infrared transmission/reception conforming to the IrDA specification version 1.0 system. In the IrDA specification version 1.0 system, communication is started at a transfer rate of 9600 bps, and subsequently the transfer rate can be varied as necessary. As the IrDA interface in this LSI does not include a function for varying the transfer rate automatically, the transfer rate setting must be changed by software. Figure 14.33 shows a block diagram of the IrDA function. IrDA SCI0 TxD0/IrTxD Pulse encoder TxD RxD RxD0/IrRxD Pulse decoder IrCR Figure 14.33 Block Diagram of IrDA Transmission: In transmission, the output signal (UART frame) from the SCI is converted to an IR frame by the IrDA interface (see figure 14.34). When the serial data is 0, a high pulse of 3/16 the bit rate (interval equivalent to the width of one bit) is output (initial value). The high-level pulse can be varied according to the setting of bits IrCKS2 to IrCKS0 in IrCR. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 616 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) In the specification, the high pulse width is fixed at a minimum of 1.41 s, and a maximum of (3/16 + 2.5%) x bit rate or (3/16 x bit rate) + 1.08 s. When system clock is 20 MHz, 1.6 s can be set for a high pulse width with a minimum value of 1.41 s. When the serial data is 1, no pulse is output. UART frame Start bit 0 1 0 1 0 Data Stop bit 1 1 0 1 0 Transmit Receive IR frame Start bit 0 1 0 1 0 Data Stop bit 0 1 1 0 1 Bit cycle Pulse width 1.6 s to 3/16 bit cycle Figure 14.34 IrDA Transmit/Receive Operations Reception: In reception, IR frame data is converted to a UART frame by the IrDA interface, and input to the SCI. When a high pulse is detected, 0 data is output, and if there is no pulse during a one-bit interval, 1 data is output. Note that a pulse shorter than the minimum pulse width of 1.41 s will be identified as a 0 signal. High Pulse Width Selection: Table 14.12 shows possible settings for bits IrCKS2 to IrCKS0 (minimum pulse width), and operating frequencies of this LSI and bit rates, for making the pulse width shorter than 3/16 times the bit rate in transmission. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 617 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 14.12 Settings of Bits IrCKS2 to IrCKS0 Bit Rate (bps) (Above) /Bit Period x 3/16 (s) (Below) Operating Frequency (MHz) 8 9.8304 10 12 12.288 14 14.7456 16 16.9344 17.2032 18 19.6608 20 25 30 33 34* 2400 78.13 100 100 100 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 110 110 110 110 9600 19.53 100 100 100 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 110 110 110 110 19200 9.77 100 100 100 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 110 110 110 110 38400 4.88 100 100 100 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 110 110 110 110 57600 3.26 100 100 100 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 110 110 110 110 115200 1.63 100 100 100 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 -- -- -- -- Legend: --: A bit rate setting cannot be made on the SCI side. Note: * Supported only by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 618 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.9 14.9.1 SCI Interrupts Interrupts in Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode Table 14.13 shows the interrupt sources in normal serial communication interface mode. A different interrupt vector is assigned to each interrupt source, and individual interrupt sources can be enabled or disabled using the enable bits in SCR. When the TDRE flag in SSR is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is generated. When the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, a TEI interrupt request is generated. A TXI interrupt can activate the DTC or DMAC to perform data transfer. The TDRE flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data transfer is performed by the DTC or DMAC. When the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt request is generated. When the ORER, PER, or FER flag in SSR is set to 1, an ERI interrupt request is generated. An RXI interrupt request can activate the DTC or DMAC to perform data transfer. The RDRF flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data transfer is performed by the DTC or DMAC. A TEI interrupt is generated when the TEND flag is set to 1 while the TEIE bit is set to 1. If a TEI interrupt and a TXI interrupt are generated simultaneously, the TXI interrupt has priority for acceptance. However, note that if the TDRE and TEND flags are cleared simultaneously by the TXI interrupt routine, the SCI cannot branch to the TEI interrupt routine later. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 619 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 14.13 SCI Interrupt Sources Channel 0 Name ERI0 RXI0 TXI0 TEI0 1 ERI1 RXI1 TXI1 TEI1 2 ERI2 RXI2 TXI2 TEI2 3 ERI3 RXI3 TXI3 TEI3 4 ERI4 RXI4 TXI4 TEI4 Interrupt Source Receive Error Receive Data Full Transmit Data Empty Transmission End Receive Error Receive Data Full Transmit Data Empty Transmission End Receive Error Receive Data Full Transmit Data Empty Transmission End Receive Error Receive Data Full Transmit Data Empty Transmission End Receive Error Receive Data Full Transmit Data Empty Transmission End Interrupt Flag ORER, FER, PER RDRF TDRE TEND ORER, FER, PER RDRF TDRE TEND ORER, FER, PER RDRF TDRE TEND ORER, FER, PER RDRF TDRE TEND ORER, FER, PER RDRF TDRE TEND DTC Activation Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible DMAC Activation Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Low Priority High Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 620 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.9.2 Interrupts in Smart Card Interface Mode Table 14.14 shows the interrupt sources in Smart Card interface mode. The transmit end interrupt (TEI) request cannot be used in this mode. Table 14.14 Interrupt Sources Channel 0 Name ERI0 RXI0 TXI0 1 ERI1 RXI1 TXI1 2 ERI2 RXI2 TXI2 3 ERI3 RXI3 TXI3 4 ERI4 RXI4 TXI4 Interrupt Source Receive Error, detection Receive Data Full Transmit Data Empty Receive Error, detection Receive Data Full Transmit Data Empty Receive Error, detection Receive Data Full Transmit Data Empty Receive Error, detection Receive Data Full Transmit Data Empty Receive Error, detection Receive Data Full Transmit Data Empty Interrupt Flag ORER, PER, ERS RDRF TEND ORER, PER, ERS RDRF TEND ORER, PER, ERS RDRF TEND ORER, PER, ERS RDRF TEND ORER, PER, ERS RDRF TEND DTC Activation Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Possible Possible DMAC Activation Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Low Priority High In Smart Card interface mode, as in normal serial communication interface mode, transfer can be carried out using the DTC or DMAC. In transmit operations, the TDRE flag is also set to 1 at the same time as the TEND flag in SSR, and a TXI interrupt is generated. If the TXI request is designated beforehand as a DTC or DMAC activation source, the DTC or DMAC will be activated by the TXI request, and transfer of the transmit data will be carried out. The TDRE and TEND flags are automatically cleared to 0 when data transfer is performed by the DTC or DMAC. In the event of an error, the SCI retransmits the same data automatically. During this period, the TEND flag remains cleared to 0 and the DTC or DMAC is not activated. Therefore, the SCI and DTC or DMAC will automatically transmit the specified number of bytes in the event of an error, including retransmission. However, the ERS flag is not cleared automatically when an error occurs, and so the RIE bit should be set to 1 beforehand so that an ERI request will be generated in the event of an error, and the ERS flag will be cleared. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 621 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) When performing transfer using the DTC or DMAC, it is essential to set and enable the DTC or DMAC before carrying out SCI setting. For details on the DTC or DMAC setting procedures, refer to section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC) or section 7, DMA Controller (DMAC). In receive operations, an RXI interrupt request is generated when the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1. If the RXI request is designated beforehand as a DTC or DMAC activation source, the DTC or DMAC will be activated by the RXI request, and transfer of the receive data will be carried out. The RDRF flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data transfer is performed by the DTC or DMAC. If an error occurs, an error flag is set but the RDRF flag is not. Consequently, the DTC or DMAC is not activated, but instead, an ERI interrupt request is sent to the CPU. Therefore, the error flag should be cleared. 14.10 14.10.1 Usage Notes Module Stop Mode Setting SCI operation can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting is for SCI operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop mode. For details, refer to section 23, Power-Down Modes. 14.10.2 Break Detection and Processing When framing error detection is performed, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value directly. In a break, the input from the RxD pin becomes all 0s, and so the FER flag is set, and the PER flag may also be set. Note that, since the SCI continues the receive operation after receiving a break, even if the FER flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again. 14.10.3 Mark State and Break Sending When TE is 0, the TxD pin is used as an I/O port whose direction (input or output) and level are determined by DR and DDR. This can be used to set the TxD pin to mark state or send a break during serial data transmission. To maintain the communication line at mark state until TE is set to 1, set both DDR and DR to 1. Since TE is cleared to 0 at this point, the TxD pin becomes an I/O port, and 1 is output from the TxD pin. To send a break during serial transmission, first set DDR to 1 and clear DR to 0, and then clear TE to 0. When TE is cleared to 0, the transmitter is initialized regardless of the current transmission state, the TxD pin becomes an I/O port, and 0 is output from the TxD pin. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 622 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.10.4 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode Only) Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (ORER, PER, or FER) is set to 1, even if the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting transmission. Note also that receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is cleared to 0. 14.10.5 Relation between Writes to TDR and the TDRE Flag The TDRE flag in SSR is a status flag that indicates that transmit data has been transferred from TDR to TSR. When the SCI transfers data from TDR to TSR, the TDRE flag is set to 1. Data can be written to TDR regardless of the state of the TDRE flag. However, if new data is written to TDR when the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the data stored in TDR will be lost since it has not yet been transferred to TSR. It is therefore essential to check that the TDRE flag is set to 1 before writing transmit data to TDR. 14.10.6 Restrictions on Use of DMAC or DTC * When an external clock source is used as the serial clock, the transmit clock should not be input until at least five clock cycles after TDR is updated by the DMAC or DTC. Abnormal operation may occur if the transmit clock is input within 4 clocks after TDR is updated. (figure 14.35) * When RDR is read by the DMAC or DTC, be sure to set the activation source to the relevant SCI receive-data-full interrupt (RXI). SCK t TDRE LSB Serial data D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Note: When operating on an external clock, set t > 4 clocks. Figure 14.35 Example of Synchronous Transmission Using DTC Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 623 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 14.10.7 Operation in Case of Mode Transition * Transmission Operation should be stopped (by clearing TE, TIE, and TEIE to 0) before making a module stop mode or software standby mode transition. TSR, TDR, and SSR are reset. The output pin states in module stop mode or software standby mode depend on the port settings, and become high-level output after the relevant mode is cleared. If a transition is made during transmission, the data being transmitted will be undefined. When transmitting without changing the transmit mode after the relevant mode is cleared, transmission can be started by setting TE to 1 again, and performing the following sequence: SSR read TDR write TDRE clearance. To transmit with a different transmit mode after clearing the relevant mode, the procedure must be started again from initialization. Figure 14.36 shows a sample flowchart for mode transition during transmission. Port pin states during mode transition are shown in figures 14.37 and 14.38. Operation should also be stopped (by clearing TE, TIE, and TEIE to 0) before making a transition from transmission by DTC transfer to module stop mode or software standby mode transition. To perform transmission with the DTC after the relevant mode is cleared, setting TE and TIE to 1 will set the TXI flag and start DTC transmission. * Reception Receive operation should be stopped (by clearing RE to 0) before making a module stop mode or software standby mode transition. RSR, RDR, and SSR are reset. If a transition is made during reception, the data being received will be invalid. To continue receiving without changing the reception mode after the relevant mode is cleared, set RE to 1 before starting reception. To receive with a different receive mode, the procedure must be started again from initialization. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 624 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Figure 14.39 shows a sample flowchart for mode transition during reception. All data transmitted? Yes Read TEND flag in SSR No [1] [1] TEND = 1 Yes TE = 0 No Data being transmitted is interrupted. After exiting software standby mode, normal CPU transmission is possible by setting TE to 1, reading SSR, writing TDR, and clearing TDRE to 0, but note that if the DTC has been activated, the remaining data in DTCRAM will be transmitted when TE and TIE are set to 1. If TIE and TEIE are set to 1, clear them to 0 in the same way. Includes module stop mode. [2] [2] [3] [3] Transition to software standby mode Exit from software standby mode Change operating mode? Yes Initialization No TE = 1 Figure 14.36 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Transmission Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 625 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Transition to software standby Exit from software standby Start of transmission End of transmission TE bit SCK output pin Port input/output TxD output pin Port input/output Port High output Start SCI TxD output Stop Port input/output Port High output SCI TxD output Figure 14.37 Port Pin States during Mode Transition (Internal Clock, Asynchronous Transmission) Transition to software standby Exit from software standby Start of transmission End of transmission TE bit SCK output pin Port input/output TxD output pin Port input/output Port Marking output SCI TxD output Last TxD bit held Port input/output Port High output* SCI TxD output Note: * Initialized by software standby. Figure 14.38 Port Pin States during Mode Transition (Internal Clock, Synchronous Transmission) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 626 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR RE = 0 Transition to software standby mode Exit from software standby mode Change operating mode? Yes Initialization [2] [2] Includes module stop mode. No RE = 1 Figure 14.39 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Reception Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 627 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 628 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) An I2C bus interface is an option. When using the optional functions, take notice of the following item: For the masked ROM version, `W' is added to the model name of the product that uses optional functions. For example: HD6432365WTE This LSI has a two-channel I2C bus interface, The I2C bus interface conforms to and provides a subset of the NXP Semiconductors I2C bus (inter-IC bus) interface (Rev.03) standard and fast mode functions. The register configuration that controls the I2C bus differs partly from the NXP Semiconductors configuration, however. Figure 15.1 shows a block diagram of the I2C bus interface2. Figure 15.2 shows an example of I/O pin connections to external circuits. 15.1 Features * Continuous transmission/reception Since the shift register, transmit data register, and receive data register are independent from each other, the continuous transmission/reception can be performed. * Start and stop conditions generated automatically in master mode * Selection of acknowledge output levels when receiving * Automatic loading of acknowledge bit when transmitting * Bit synchronization/wait function In master mode, the state of SCL is monitored per bit, and the timing is synchronized automatically If transmission/reception is not yet possible, set the SCL to low until preparations are completed. * Six interrupt sources Transmit-data-empty (including slave-address match), transmit-end, receive-data-full (including slave-address match), arbitration lost, NACK detection, and stop condition detection * Direct bus drive Two pins, SCL and SDA pins function as NMOS open-drain outputs. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 629 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 IFIIC40_000020020100 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Transfer clock generation circuit SCL Output control Transmission/ reception control circuit ICCRA ICCRB ICMR Noise canceler ICDRT SAR SDA Output control ICDRS Noise canceler Address comparator ICDRR Bus state decision circuit Arbitration decision circuit ICEIR Interrupt generator ICSR Legend: ICCRA: ICCRB: ICMR: ICSR: ICIER: ICDRT: ICDRR: ICDRS: SAR: I C bus control register A I2C bus control register B I2C mode register I2C status register I2C interrupt permission register I2C transmission data register I2C reception data register I2C bus shift register Slave address register 2 Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of I2C Bus Interface2 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 630 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Internal data bus Interrupt request Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Vcc Vcc SCL in SCL out SCL SCL SDA in SDA out SDA SDA SCL SDA (Master) SCL in SCL out SCL in SCL out SDA in SDA out (Slave 1) SDA in SDA out (Slave 2) Figure 15.2 External Circuit Connections of I/O Pins 15.2 Input/Output Pins Table 15.1 summarizes the input/output pins used by the I2C bus interface. Table 15.1 Pin Configuration Name Serial clock Serial data Serial clock Serial data Abbreviation SCL0 SDA0 SCL1 SDA1 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Function IIC2_0 serial clock input/output IIC2_0 serial data input/output IIC2_1 serial clock input/output IIC2_1 serial data input/output Note: The pin symbols are represented as SCL and SDA; channel numbers are omitted in this manual. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 631 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 SCL SDA Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) 15.3 Register Descriptions The I2C bus interface has the following registers. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * I2C bus control register A_0 (ICCRA_0) I2C bus control register B_0 (ICCRB_0) I2C bus mode register_0 (ICMR_0) I2C bus interrupt enable register_0 (ICIER_0) I2C bus status register_0 (ICSR_0) I2C bus slave address register_0 (SAR_0) I2C bus transmit data register_0 (ICDRT_0) I2C bus receive data register_0 (ICDRR_0) I2C bus shift register_0 (ICDRS_0) I2C bus control register A_1 (ICCRA_1) I2C bus control register B_1 (ICCRB_1) I2C bus mode register_1 (ICMR_1) I2C bus interrupt enable register_1 (ICIER_1) I2C bus status register_1 (ICSR_1) I2C bus slave address register_1 (SAR_1) I2C bus transmit data register_1 (ICDRT_1) I2C bus receive data register_1 (ICDRR_1) I2C bus shift register_1 (ICDRS_1) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 632 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) 15.3.1 I2C Bus Control Register A (ICCRA) ICCRA is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables the I2C bus interface, controls transmission or reception, and selects master or slave mode, transmission or reception, and transfer clock frequency in master mode. Bit 7 Bit Name ICE Initial Value R/W 0 R/W Description I2C Bus Interface Enable 0: This module is halted. 1: This bit is enabled for transfer operations. (SCL and SDA pins are bus drive state.) 6 RCVD 0 R/W Reception Disable This bit enables or disables the next operation when TRS is 0 and ICDRR is read. 0: Enables next reception 1: Disables next reception 5 4 MST TRS 0 0 R/W R/W Master/Slave Select Transmit/Receive Select When arbitration is lost in master mode, MST and TRS are both reset by hardware, causing a transition to slave receive mode. Modification of the TRS bit should be made between transfer frames. In addition, TRS is set to 1 automatically in slave receive mode when the seventh bit of the start condition matches the slave address set in SAR and the eighth bit is set to 1. Operating modes are described below according to MST and TRS combination. 00: Slave receive mode 01: Slave transmit mode 10: Master receive mode 11: Master transmit mode 3 2 1 0 CKS3 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Transfer clock select 3 to 0 In master mode, these bits should be set according to the necessary transfer rate. In slave mode, they are used to secure the data setup time in transmit mode. The data setup time is 10 tcyc when CKS3 is cleared to 0; 20 tcyc when CKS3 is set to 1. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 633 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Table 15.2 Transfer Rate Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 = 8MHz = 10MHz 357 kHz 250 kHz 208 kHz 156 kHz 59.5 kHz 100 kHz 89.3 kHz 78.1 kHz 179 kHz 125 kHz 104 kHz 78.1 kHz 29.8 kHz 50.0 kHz 44.6 kHz 39.1 kHz Transfer Rate = 20MHz 714 kHz* 500 kHz* 417 kHz* 313 kHz 119 kHz 200 kHz 179 kHz 156 kHz 357 kHz 250 kHz 208 kHz 156 kHz 59.5 kHz 100 kHz 89.3 kHz 78.1 kHz 2 CKS3 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Clock 0* 3 = 25 MHz 893 kHz* 625 kHz* 521 kHz* 391 kHz* 149 kHz 250 kHz 223 kHz 195 kHz 446 kHz* 313 kHz 260 kHz 195 kHz 74.4 kHz 125 kHz 112 kHz 97.7 kHz 2 2 = 33 MHz 1179 2 kHz* 825 kHz* 688 kHz* 516 kHz* 196 kHz 330 kHz 295 kHz 258 kHz 589 kHz* 413 kHz* 344 kHz 258 kHz 98.2 kHz 165 kHz 147 kHz 129 kHz 2 2 2 2 2 = 1 34 MHz* 1214 2 kHz* 850 kHz* 708 kHz* 531 kHz* 202 kHz 340 kHz 304 kHz 266 kHz 607 kHz* 425 kHz* 354 kHz 266 kHz 101 kHz 170 kHz 152 kHz 133 kHz 2 2 2 2 2 0* 3 0 0 1 /28 286 kHz /40 200 kHz /48 167 kHz /64 125 kHz /168 47.6 kHz /100 80.0 kHz /112 71.4 kHz /128 62.5 kHz /56 143 kHz /80 100 kHz /96 83.3 kHz /128 62.5 kHz /336 23.8 kHz /200 40.0 kHz /224 35.7 kHz /256 31.3 kHz 2 2 2 2 2 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Notes: 1. Supported only by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. 2 2. Does not conform to the I C bus interface specification (standard mode: max. 100 kHz, fast mode: max. 400 kHz). 3. If CKS3 and CKS2 are both cleared to 0 (7.5 tcyc bit synchronization) and the operating frequency is 20 MHz or greater, it may not be possible to maintain the prescribed transfer rate under certain load conditions. Therefore, a bit synchronization setting other than 7.5 tcyc should be used if the operating frequency exceeds 20 MHz. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 634 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) 15.3.2 I2C Bus Control Register B (ICCRB) ICCRB is an 8-bit readable/writable register that issues start/stop conditions, manipulates the SDA pin, monitors the SCL pin, and controls reset in I2C control. Bit 7 Bit Name BBSY Initial Value R/W 0 R/W Description Bus Busy This bit enables to confirm whether the I C bus is occupied or released and to issue start and stop conditions in master mode. This bit is set to 1 when the SDA level changes from high to low under the condition of SCL = high, assuming that the start condition has been issued. This bit is cleared to 0 when the SDA level changes from low to high under the condition of SCL = high, assuming that the stop condition has been issued. Write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP to issue a start condition. Follow this procedure when also re-transmitting a start condition. Write 0 to BBSY and 0 to SCP to issue a stop condition. To issue a start/stop condition, use the MOV instruction. 6 SCP 1 W Start Condition/Stop Condition Prohibit The SCP bit controls the issue of start/stop conditions in master mode. To issue a start condition, write 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. A retransmit start condition is issued in the same way. To issue a stop condition, write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. This bit is always read as 1. If 1 is written, the data is not stored. 5 SDAO 1 R/W Monitors the output level of SDA. 0: When reading, SDA pin outputs low. 1: When reading, SDA pin outputs high. The write value should always be 1. 4 3 SCLO 1 1 R/W R Reserved The write value should always be 1. This bit monitors SCL output level. When reading and SCLO is 1, SCL pin outputs high. When reading and SCLO is 0, SCL pin outputs low. Reserved This bit is always read as 1. 1 IICRST 0 R/W IIC control part reset This bit resets control parts except for I C registers. If this bit is set to 1 when hang-up is occurred because of communication failure during I2C operation, I2C control part can be reset without setting ports and initializing registers. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 635 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 2 2 2 1 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Bit 0 Bit Name Initial Value R/W 1 Description Reserved This bit is always read as 1. 15.3.3 I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR) ICMR performs master mode wait control and selects the transfer bit count. Bit 7 6 Bit Name WAIT Initial Value R/W 0 0 R/W R/W Description Reserved The write value should always be 0. Wait Insertion Bit This bit selects whether to insert a wait after data transfer except for the acknowledge bit. When WAIT is set to 1, after the fall of the clock for the final data bit, low period is extended for two transfer clocks. If WAIT is cleared to 0, data and acknowledge bits are transferred consecutively with no wait inserted. The setting of this bit is invalid in slave mode. 5, 4 3 BCWP All 1 1 R/W Reserved These bits are always read as 1. BC Write Protect This bit controls the BC2 to BC0 modifications. When modifying BC2 to BC0, this bit should be cleared to 0 and use the MOV instruction. 0: When writing, values of BC2 to BC0 are set. 1: When reading, 1 is always read. When writing, settings of BC2 to BC0 are invalid. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 636 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Bit 2 1 0 Bit Name BC2 BC1 BC0 Initial Value R/W 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Bit Counter 2 to 0 These bits specify the number of bits to be transferred next. When read, the remaining number of transfer bits is indicated. The data is transferred with one addition acknowledge bit. Bit BC2 to BC0 settings should be made during an interval between transfer frames. If bits BC2 to BC0 are set to a value other than 000, the setting should be made while the SCL line is low. The value returns to 000 at the end of a data transfer, including the acknowledge bit. With the clock synchronous serial format, these bits should not be modified. 000: 9 001: 2 010: 3 011: 4 100: 5 101: 6 110: 7 111: 8 15.3.4 I2C Bus Interrupt Enable Register (ICIER) ICIER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables interrupt sources and acknowledge bits, sets acknowledge bits to be transferred, and confirms acknowledge bits to be received. Bit 7 Bit Name TIE Initial Value R/W 0 R/W Description Transmit Interrupt Enable When the TDRE bit in ICSR is set to 1, this bit enables or disables the transmit data empty interrupt (TXI). 0: Transmit data empty interrupt request (TXI) is disabled. 1: Transmit data empty interrupt request (TXI) is enabled. 6 TEIE 0 R/W Transmit End Interrupt Enable This bit enables or disables the transmit end interrupt (TEI) at the rising of the ninth clock while the TDRE bit in ICSR is 1. TEI can be canceled by clearing the TEND bit or the TEIE bit to 0. 0: Transmit end interrupt request (TEI) is disabled. 1: Transmit end interrupt request (TEI) is enabled. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 637 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Bit 5 Bit Name RIE Initial Value R/W 0 R/W Description Receive interrupt enable This bit enables or disables the receive data full interrupt request (RXI) when a received data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR and the RDRF bit in ICSR is set to 1. RXI can be canceled by clearing the RDRF or RIE bit to 0. 0: Receive data full interrupt request (RXI) is disabled. 1: Receive data full interrupt request (RXI) is enabled. 4 NAKIE 0 R/W NACK receive interrupt enable This bit enables or disables the NACK receive interrupt request (NAKI) when the NACKF and AL bits in ICSR are set to 1. NAKI can be canceled by clearing the NACKF, AL, or NAKIE bit to 0. 0: NACK receive interrupt request (NAKI) is disabled. 1: NACK receive interrupt request (NAKI) is enabled. 3 STIE 0 R/W Stop condition detection interrupt enable 0: Stop condition detection interrupt request (STPI) is disabled. 1: Stop condition detection interrupt request (STPI) is enabled. 2 ACKE 0 R/W Acknowledge Bit Judgement Select 0: The value of the acknowledge bit is ignored, and continuous transfer is performed. 1: If the acknowledge bit is 1, continuous transfer is interrupted. 1 ACKBR 0 R Receive acknowledge In transmit mode, this bit stores the acknowledge data that are returned by the receive device. This bit cannot be modified. 0: Receive acknowledge = 0 1: Receive acknowledge = 1 0 ACKBT 0 R/W Transmit acknowledge In receive mode, this bit specifies the bit to be sent at the acknowledge timing. 0: 0 is sent at the acknowledge timing. 1: 1 is sent at the acknowledge timing. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 638 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) 15.3.5 I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR) ICSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs confirmation of interrupt request flags and status. Bit 7 Bit Name TDRE Initial Value R/W 0 R/W Description Transmit Data Register Empty [Setting conditions] * * * When data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS and ICDRT becomes empty When TRS is set When a transition from receive mode to transmit mode is made in slave mode When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 When data is written to ICDRT [Clearing conditions] * * 6 TEND 0 R/W Transmit end [Setting condition] When the ninth clock of SCL is rose while the TDRE flag is 1 [Clearing conditions] * * When 0 is written in TEND after reading TEND = 1 When data is written to ICDRT 5 RDRF 0 R/W Receive Data Register Full [Setting condition] When a received data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR [Clearing conditions] * * When 0 is written in RDRF after reading RDRF = 1 When ICDRR is read Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 639 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Bit 4 Bit Name NACKF Initial Value R/W 0 R/W Description No acknowledge detection flag [Setting condition] When no acknowledge is detected from the receive device in transmission while the ACKE bit in ICIER is 1 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in NACKF after reading NACKF = 1 Note: When NACKF = 1 is detected, NACKF must be cleared to 0. Subsequent transmission in not made until NACKF is cleared to 0. 3 STOP 0 R/W Stop condition detection flag [Setting conditions] * * In master mode, when a stop condition is detected after frame transfer In slave mode, when a stop condition is detected after the general call address or the first byte slave address, next to detection of start condition, accords with the address set in SAR [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in STOP after reading STOP = 1 2 AL 0 R/W Arbitration Lost Flag This flag indicates that arbitration was lost in master mode. When two or more master devices attempt to seize the bus 2 at nearly the same time, if the I C bus interface detects data differing from the data it sent, it sets AL to 1 to indicate that the bus has been taken by another master. [Setting conditions] * * If the internal SDA and SDA pin disagree at the rise of SCL in master transmit mode When the SDA pin outputs high in master mode while a start condition is detected [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in AL/OVE after reading AL/OVE=1 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 640 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Bit 1 Bit Name AAS Initial Value R/W 0 R/W Description Slave Address Recognition Flag In slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition matches bits SVA6 to SVA0 in SAR. [Setting conditions] * * When the slave address is detected in slave receive mode When the general call address is detected in slave receive mode. [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in AAS after reading AAS=1 0 ADZ 0 R/W General Call Address Recognition Flag This bit is valid in slave receive mode. [Setting condition] When the general call address is detected in slave receive mode [Clearing conditions] When 0 is written in ADZ after reading ADZ=1 15.3.6 Slave Address Register (SAR) SAR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that sets slave address. When the chip is in slave mode, if the upper 7 bits of SAR match the upper 7 bits of the first frame received after a start condition, the chip operates as the slave device. Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W 0 R/W Description Slave Address 6 to 0 These bits set a unique address in bits SVA6 to SVA0, differing form the addresses of other slave devices 2 connected to the I C bus. 0 R/W Reserved Though this bit can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. 7 to SVA6 to 1 SVA0 0 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 641 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) 15.3.7 I2C Bus Transmit Data Register (ICDRT) ICDRT is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the transmit data. When ICDRT detects the space in the I2C bus shift register (ICDRS), it transfers the transmit data which is written in ICDRT to ICDRS and starts transferring data. If the next transfer data is written to ICDRT during transferring data of ICDRS, continuous transfer is possible. The initial value of ICDRT is H'FF. 15.3.8 I2C Bus Receive Data Register (ICDRR) ICDRR is an 8-bit register that stores the receive data. When data of one byte is received, ICDRR transfers the received data from ICDRS to ICDRR and the next data can be received. ICDRR is a receive-only register, therefore the CPU cannot be written to this register. The initial value of ICDRR is H'FF. 15.3.9 I2C Bus Shift Register (ICDRS) ICDRS is a register that is used to transfer/receive data. In transmission, data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS and the data is sent from the SDA pin. In reception, data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR after data of one byte is received. This register cannot be read from the CPU. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 642 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) 15.4 15.4.1 Operation I2C Bus Format Figure 15.3 shows the I2C bus formats. Figure 15.4 shows the I2C bus timing. The first frame following a start condition always consists of 8 bits. (a) I2C bus format S 1 SLA 7 1 R/ 1 A 1 DATA n A 1 m A/ 1 P 1 n: transfer bit count (n = 1 to 8) m: transfer frame count (m 1) (b) I2C bus format (start condition retransmission) S 1 SLA 7 1 R/ 1 A 1 DATA n1 m1 A/ 1 S 1 SLA 7 1 R/ 1 A 1 DATA n2 m2 A/ 1 P 1 n1 and n2: transfer bit count (n1 and n2 = 1 to 8) m1 and m2: transfer frame count (m1 and m2 1) Figure 15.3 I2C Bus Formats SDA SCL S 1-7 SLA 8 R/ 9 A 1-7 DATA 8 9 A 1-7 DATA 8 9 A P Figure 15.4 I2C Bus Timing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 643 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Legend: S: SLA: R/W: Start condition. The master device drives SDA from high to low while SCL is high. Slave address Indicates the direction of data transfer: from the slave device to the master device when R/W is 1, or from the master device to the slave device when R/W is 0. Acknowledge. The receiving device drives SDA to low. A: DATA: Transferred data P: 15.4.2 Stop condition. The master device drives SDA from low to high while SCL is high. Master Transmit Operation In I2C bus format master transmit mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the slave device returns an acknowledge signal. For master transmit mode operation timing, refer to figures 15.5 and 15.6. The transmission procedure and operations in master transmit mode are described below. 1. Set the ICE bit in ICCRA to 1. Set the WAIT bit in ICMR and the CKS3 to CKS0 bits in ICCR1 to 1. (Initial setting) 2. Read the BBSY flag in ICCRB to confirm that the bus is free. Set the MST and TRS bits in ICCRA to select master transmit mode. Then, write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP using MOV instruction. (Start condition issued) This generates the start condition. 3. After confirming that TDRE in ICSR has been set, write the transmit data (the first byte data show the slave address and R/W) to ICDRT. After this, when TDRE is cleared to 0, data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS. TDRE is set again. 4. When transmission of one byte data is completed while TDRE is 1, TEND in ICSR is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse. Read the ACKBR bit in ICIER, and confirm that the slave device has been selected. Then, write second byte data to ICDRT, and clear TDRE and TEND. When ACKBR is 1, the slave device has not been acknowledged, so issue the stop condition. To issue the stop condition, write 0 to BBSY and SCP using MOV instruction. SCL is fixed low until the transmit data is prepared or the stop condition is issued. 5. The transmit data after the second byte is written to ICDRT every time TDRE is set, thus clearing TDRE. 6. Write the number of bytes to be transmitted to ICDRT. Wait until TEND is set (the end of last byte data transmission) while TDRE is 1, or wait for NACK (NACKF in ICSR = 1) from the Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 644 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) receive device while ACKE in ICIER is 1. Then, issue the stop condition to clear TEND or NACKF. 7. When the STOP bit in ICSR is set to 1, the operation returns to the slave receive mode. SCL (master output) SDA (master output) 1 Bit 7 2 Bit 6 3 Bit 5 4 Bit 4 5 Bit 3 6 Bit 2 7 Bit 1 8 Bit 0 R/ 9 1 Bit 7 2 Bit 6 Slave address SDA (slave output) TDRE A TEND ICDRT Address + R/ Data 1 Data 2 ICDRS Address + R/ Data 1 User processing [2] Instruction of start condition issuance [3] Write data to ICDRT (first byte). Clear TDRE. [4] Write data to ICDRT (second byte). Clear TDRE and TEND. [5] Write data to ICDRT (third byte). Clear TDRE. Figure 15.5 Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing 1 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 645 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) SCL (master output) SDA (master output) SDA (slave output) TDRE A 9 1 Bit 7 2 Bit 6 3 Bit 5 4 Bit 4 5 Bit 3 6 Bit 2 7 Bit 1 8 Bit 0 9 A/ TEND ICDRT Data n ICDRS Data n User [5] Write data to ICDRT. Clear TDRE. processing [6] Issue stop condition. Clear TEND. [7] Set slave receive mode Figure 15.6 Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing 2 15.4.3 Master Receive Operation In master receive mode, the master device outputs the receive clock, receives data from the slave device, and returns an acknowledge signal. For master receive mode operation timing, refer to figures 15.7 and 15.8. The reception procedure and operations in master receive mode are shown below. 1. Clear the TEND bit in ICSR to 0, then clear the TRS bit in ICCRA to 0 to switch from master transmit mode to master receive mode. Then, clear the TDRE bit to 0. 2. When ICDRR is read (dummy data read), reception is started, and the receive clock is output, and data received, in synchronization with the internal clock. The master device outputs the level specified by ACKBT in ICIER to SDA, at the 9th receive clock pulse. 3. After the reception of first frame data is completed, the RDRF bit in ICST is set to 1 at the rise of 9th receive clock pulse. At this time, the received data is read by reading ICDRR. 4. The continuous reception is performed by reading ICDRR and clearing RDRF to 0 every time RDRF is set. If 8th receive clock pulse falls after reading ICDRR by the other processing while RDRF is 1, SCL is fixed low until ICDRR is read. 5. If next frame is the last receive data, set the RCVD bit in ICCR1 to 1 before reading ICDRR. This enables the issuance of the stop condition after the next reception. 6. When the RDRF bit is set to 1 at rise of the 9th receive clock pulse, read ICDRR. Then, clear RCVD. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 646 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) 7. When the STOP bit in ICSR is set to 1, read ICDRR and clear RDRF to 0. Then clear the RCVD bit to 0. 8. The operation returns to the slave receive mode. Master transmit mode SCL (master output) SDA (master output) SDA (slave output) TDRE A 9 1 Master receive mode 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A 1 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 7 TEND TRS RDRF ICDRS Data 1 ICDRR User processing Data 1 [3] Read ICDRR [1] Clear TDRE after clearing TEND and TRS [2] Read ICDRR (dummy read) Figure 15.7 Master Receive Mode Operation Timing 1 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 647 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) SCL (master output) SDA (master output) SDA (slave output) RDRF 9 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A/A Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 RCVD ICDRS Data n-1 Data n ICDRR User processing Data n-1 Data n [5] Read ICDRR and clear RDRF after setting RCVD. [7] Read ICDRR, clear RDRF, and clear RCVD. [6] Issue stop condition [8] Set slave receive mode Figure 15.8 Master Receive Mode Operation Timing 2 15.4.4 Slave Transmit Operation In slave transmit mode, the slave device outputs the transmit data, while the master device outputs the receive clock and returns an acknowledge signal. For slave transmit mode operation timing, refer to figures 15.9 and 15.10. The transmission procedure and operations in slave transmit mode are described below. 1. Set the ICE bit in ICCRA to 1. Set the MLS and WAIT bits in ICMR and the CKS3 to CKS0 bits in ICCRA to 1. (Initial setting) Set the MST and TRS bits in ICCRA to select slave receive mode, and wait until the slave address matches. 2. When the slave address matches in the first frame following detection of the start condition, the slave device outputs the level specified by ACKBT in ICIER to SDA, at the rise of the 9th clock pulse. At this time, if the 8th bit data (R/W) is 1, the TRS in ICCRA and TDRE in ICSR are set to 1, and the mode changes to slave transmit mode automatically. The continuous transmission is performed by clearing TDRE after writing transmit data to ICDRT every time TDRE is set. 3. If TDRE is set after writing last transmit data to ICDRT, wait until TEND in ICSR is set to 1, with TDRE = 1. When TEND is set, clear TEND. 4. Clear TRS for the end processing, and read ICDRR (dummy read). SCL is free. 5. Clear TDRE. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 648 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Slave receive mode SCL (master output) SDA (master output) SCL (slave output) SDA (slave output) TDRE 9 Slave transmit mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A 1 A Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 7 TEND TRS ICDRT Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 ICDRS Data 1 Data 2 ICDRR User processing [2] Write data to ICDRT (data 1), and clear TDRE. [2] Write data to ICDRT (data 2), and clear TDRE. [2] Write data to ICDRT (data 3), and clear TDRE. Figure 15.9 Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing 1 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 649 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Slave receive mode Slave transmit mode SCL (master output) SDA (master output) SCL (slave output) SDA (slave output) TDRE 9 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 TEND TRS ICDRT ICDRS Data n ICDRR User processing [3] Clear TEND [4] Read ICDRR (dummy read) after clearing TRS [5] Clear TDRE Figure 15.10 Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing 2 15.4.5 Slave Receive Operation In slave receive mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the slave device returns an acknowledge signal. For slave receive mode operation timing, refer to figures 15.11 and 15.12. The reception procedure and operations in slave receive mode are described below. 1. Set the ICE bit in ICCRA to 1. Set the MLS and WAIT bits in ICMR and the CKS3 to CKS0 bits in ICCRA to 1. (Initial setting) Set the MST and TRS bits in ICCRA to select slave receive mode, and wait until the slave address matches. 2. When the slave address matches in the first frame following detection of the start condition, the slave device outputs the level specified by ACKBT in ICIER to SDA, at the rise of the 9th clock pulse. At the same time, RDRF in ICSR is set to read ICDRR (dummy read) and RDRF is cleared. (Since the read data show the slave address and R/W, it is not used.) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 650 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) 3. Clear RDRF after reading ICDRR every time RDRF is set. If 8th receive clock pulse falls while RDRF is 1, SCL is fixed low until ICDRR is read. The change of the acknowledge before reading ICDRR, to be returned to the master device, is reflected to the next transmit frame. 4. The last byte data is read by reading ICDRR. SCL (master output) SDA (master output) SCL (slave output) SDA (slave output) 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 7 A A RDRF ICDRS Data 1 Data 2 ICDRR User processing Data 1 [2] Read ICDRR (dummy read), and clear RDRF. [2] Read ICDRR, and clear RDRF. Figure 15.11 Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing 1 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 651 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) SCL (master output) SDA (master output) SCL (slave output) SDA (slave output) 9 1 Bit 7 2 Bit 6 3 Bit 5 4 Bit 4 5 Bit 3 6 Bit 2 7 Bit 1 8 Bit 0 9 A A RDRF ICDRS Data 1 Data 2 ICDRR User processing Data 1 [7] Set ACKBT [8] Read ICDRR, and clear RDRF. [10] Read ICDRR, and clear RDRF. Figure 15.12 Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing 2 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 652 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) 15.4.6 Noise Canceler The logic levels at the SCL and SDA pins are routed through noise cancelers before being latched internally. Figure 15.13 shows a block diagram of the noise canceler circuit. The noise canceler consists of two cascaded latches and a match detector. The SCL (or SDA) input signal is sampled on the system clock, but is not passed forward to the next circuit unless the outputs of both latches agree. If they do not agree, the previous value is held. Sampling clock C SCL or SDA input signal D Latch Q D C Q Latch March detector Internal SCL or SDA signal System clock period Sampling clock Figure 15.13 Block Diagram of Noise Canceler 15.4.7 Example of Use Flowcharts in respective modes that use the I2C bus interface are shown in figures 15.14 to 15.17. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 653 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Start Initialize Read BBSY in ICCRB No [1] BBSY=0 ? Yes Set MST = 1 and TRS = 1 in ICCRA. Write BBSY = 1 and SCP = 0. Write transmit data in ICDRT [2] [3] [4] [3] [5] [4] [6] [7] [5] TEND=1 ? Yes Read ACKBR in ICIER [6] ACKBR=0 ? Yes Transmit mode? Yes No No [8] [9] Wait for ICDRT empty. Set the final byte of transmit data, and clear TDRE and TEND to 0. Select master transmit mode.* Start condition issuance.* Select transmit data for the first byte (slave address + R/W), and clear TDRE to 0. Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted. Test the acknowledge bit, transferred from the specified slave device. Set transmit data for the second and subsequent data (except for the final byte), and clear TDRE and TEND to 0. [1] Test the status of the SCL and SDA lines.* [2] Read TEND in ICSR No [10] Wait for the completion of transmission for the final byte. [11] Clear TEND flag. Master receive mode [12] Clear STOP flag. [7] [13] Stop condition issuance. Write transmit data in ICDRT Read TDRE in ICSR No [8] TDRE=1 ? Yes [14] Wait for the creation of the stop condition. [15] Set slave receive mode. Clear TDRE. No Final byte? [9] Yes Write transmit data in ICDRT Read TEND in ICSR No [10] TEND=1 ? Yes Clear TEND in ICSR Clear STOP in ICSR Write BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 Read STOP in ICSR No [14] STOP=1 ? Yes Set MST = 1 and TRS = 0 in ICCRA Clear TDRE in ICSR End [11] [12] [13] [15] Note: * Ensure that no interrupts occur between when BBSY is cleared to 0 and start condition [3]. Figure 15.14 Sample Flowchart for Master Transmit Mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 654 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Mater receive mode [1] Clear TEND in ICSR Set TRS = 0 (ICCRA) Clear TDRE of ICSR Set ACKBT = 0 (ICIER) Dummy read ICDRR Read RDRF in ICSR No RDRF=1 ? Yes (Last receive - 1)? No Read ICDRR Yes [5] [4] [2] Clear TEND, select master receive mode, and then clear TDRE.* Set acknowledge to the transmitting device.* Dummy read ICDDR* Wait for 1 byte to be received. Check if (last receive - 1) Read the receive data, and clear RDRF to 0. Set acknowledge of the final byte. Disable continuous receive (RCVD = 1). Read receive data of (final byte - 1), and clear RDRF to 0. Wait for the final byte to be received. [2] [1] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [3] [10] Clear STOP flag. [6] [11] Stop condition issuance [12] Wait for the creation of stop condition. Set ACKBT = 1 (ICIER) [7] [13] Read the receive data of the final byte, and clear RDRF to 0. [14] Clear RCVD to 0. Set RCVD - 1 (ICCRA) Read ICDRR Read RDRF in ICSR No RDRF=1 ? Yes Clear STOP of ICSR Write BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 Read STOP of ICSR No [12] [9] [8] [15] Clear ACKBT. [16] Set slave receive mode. [10] [11] STOP=1 ? Yes Read ICDRR [13] [14] Set RCVD = 0 (ICCRA) Clear ACKBT of ICIER [15] Set MST = 0 (ICCRA) End [16] Note: * Prevent any interrupts while steps [1] to [3] are executed. Additional information: When receiving one-byte data, execute step [1], and then step [7] omitting steps [2] to [6]. In step [8], dummy read ICDRR. Figure 15.15 Sample Flowchart for Master Receive Mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 655 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Slave transmit mode Clear AAS in ICSR Write transmit data in ICDRT Read TDRE in ICSR No [3] TDRE=1 ? Yes No End of transmission? [1] Clear the flag AAS. [1] [2] Set transmit data for ICDRT (except for the last data), and clear TDRE to 0. [3] Wait for ICDRT empty. [4] Set the last byte of the transmit data, and clear TDRE to 0. [5] Wait the transmission end of the last byte. [6] Clear the flag TEND. [7] Set slave receive mode. [4] [8] Dummy read ICDRR to release the SCL line. [9] Clear the flag TDRE. [2] Yes Write transmit data in ICDRT Read TEND in ICSR No [5] TEND=1 ? Yes Clear TEND in ICSR Set TRS=0 in ICCRA Dummy read ICDRR Clear TDRE in ICSR End [6] [7] [8] [9] Figure 15.16 Sample Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 656 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) Slave receive mode Clear AAS in ICSR Set ACKBT=0 in ICIER [1] [2] TDRE=0 ? Yes No RDRF= 1? No Slave transmit mode Yes Dummy read ICDRR [3] [1] Clear the flag AAS. [2] Set the acknowledge for the transmit device. Read RDRF in ICSR No [4] [3] Dummy read ICDRR. [4] Wait the reception end of 1 byte. RDRF=1 ? Yes The last receive - 1? Yes [5] Judge the (last receive - 1). [5] [6] Read the received data, and clear RDRF to 0. [6] [7] Set the acknowledge for the last byte. [8] Read the received data of the (last byte - 1), and clear RDRF to 0. No Read ICDRR Set ACKBT=1 in ICIER [7] [9] Wait the reception end of the last byte. Read ICDRR Read RDRF in ICSR No [8] [10] Read the received data of the last byte, and clear RDRF to 0. [9] RDRF=1 ? Yes Read ICDRR End [10] Additional information: When receiving one byte of data, execute step [1], and then step [7] omitting steps [2] to [6]. In step [8], dummy read ICDRR. Figure 15.17 Sample Flowchart for Slave Receive Mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 657 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) 15.5 Interrupt Request There are six interrupt requests in this module; transmit data empty, transmit end, receive data full, NACK receive, STOP recognition, and arbitration lost. Table 15.3 shows the contents of each interrupt request. Table 15.3 Interrupt Requests Interrupt Request Transmit Data Empty Transmit End Receive Data Full STOP Recognition NACK Detection Arbitration Lost Abbreviation TXI TEI RXI STPI NAKI Interrupt Condition (TDRE = 1) * (TIE = 1) (TEND = 1) * (TEIE = 1) (RDRF = 1) * (RIE = 1) (STOP = 1) * (STIE = 1) {(NACKF = 1)+(AL = 1)} * (NAKIE = 1) When interrupt conditions described in table 15.3 are 1 and the CPU is ready to receive interrupts, an interrupt execution handling is executed. Clear each interrupt source during an interrupt execution handling. Note that TDRE and TEND are automatically cleared by writing the transmit data to ICDRT, and RDRF is automatically cleared by reading ICDRR. When the transmit data is written to ICDRT, TDRE is set again simultaneously. When TDRE is cleared, extra one byte of data may be transmitted. 15.6 Bit Synchronous Circuit In master mode, * When SCL is driven to low by the slave device * When the rising speed of SCL is lower by the load of the SCL line (load capacitance or pull-up resistance) This module has a possibility that high level period may be short in the two states described above. Therefore it monitors SCL and communicates by bit with synchronization. Figure 15.18 shows the timing of the bit synchronous circuit and table 15.4 shows the time when SCL output changes from low to Hi-Z then SCL is monitored. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 658 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) SCL monitor timing reference clock SCL VIH Internal SCL Figure 15.18 Timing of the Bit Synchronous Circuit Table 15.4 Time for monitoring SCL CKS3 0 CKS2 0 1 1 Note: * 0 1 Time for monitoring SCL 7.5 tcyc* 19.5 tcyc 17.5 tcyc 41.5 tcyc If the operating frequency exceeds 20 MHz, it may not be possible to maintain the prescribed transfer rate under certain load conditions. A setting other than 7.5 tcyc should therefore be used. 15.7 Usage Notes 1. Issue (retransmit) the start/stop conditions after the fall of the ninth clock is confirmed. Check SCLO in the I2C control register B (ICCRB)* to confirm the fall of the ninth clock. When the start/stop conditions are issued (retransmitted) at the specific timing under the following condition (i) or (ii), such conditions may not be output successfully. This does not occur in other cases. (i) When the rising of SCL falls behind the time specified in section 15.6, Bit Synchronous Circuit, by the load of the SCL bus (load capacitance or pull-up resistance) (ii) When the bit synchronous circuit is activated by extending the low period of eighth and ninth clocks, that is driven by the slave device 2. Control WAIT in the I2C bus mode register (ICMR) to be set to 0. When WAIT is set to 1, and SCL is driven low for two or more transfer clocks by the slave device at the eighth and ninth clocks, the high period of ninth clock may be shortened. This does not occur in other cases. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 659 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 15 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2) (Option) 3. I2C bus interface 2 (IIC2) master receive mode When operating in master receive mode with RDRF set to 1, SCL is driven low at the falling edge of the eighth clock cycle. However, when ICDRR is read near the falling edge of the eighth clock cycle, SCL is only fixed low for one clock cycle at the eighth clock cycle of the next receive data, after which SCL is no longer fixed and the ninth clock cycle is output, even if ICDRR is not read. This causes the receive data to overflow. The following methods can be used to prevent this from occurring. In master receive mode, complete processing to read ICDRR before the rising edge of the eighth clock cycle. In master receive mode, set RCVD to 1 and perform communication processing one byte at a time. 4. Limitations on transfer rate setting values when using I2C bus interface 2 (IIC2) in multimaster mode When operating in multi-master mode and the IIC transfer rate setting of the MCU is slower than that of another master device, an SCL of an unanticipated width may by output occasionally. To prevent this, set the transfer rate to a value 1/1.8 or greater than the fastest transfer rate among the other master devices. For example, if the fastest transfer rate setting among the other master devices is 400 kbps, set the IIC transfer rate of the MCU to 223 kbps (400/1.8) or higher. 5. Limitations on use of bit manipulation instructions to set MST and TRS when using I2C bus interface 2 (IIC2) in multi-master mode When bit manipulation instructions are used to set MST and TRS in succession to specify master transmit while operating in multi-master mode, an arbitration lost may occur, during execution of the bit manipulation instruction to set TRS, with timing that results in a contradictory state in which AL in ICSR is set to 1 and master transmit mode (MST = 1, TRS = 1) is selected as well. The following methods can be used to prevent this from occurring. When operating in multi-master mode, always use the MOV instruction to set MST and TRS. When an arbitration lost occurs, confirm that MST and TRS are both cleared to 0. If the settings are other than MST = 0, TRS = 0, clear MST and TRS to 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 660 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter Section 16 A/D Converter This LSI includes a successive approximation type 10-bit A/D converter that allows up to ten analog input channels to be selected. The block diagram of A/D converter is shown in figure 16.1. 16.1 * * * * Features * * * * * 10-bit resolution Ten input channels Conversion time: 7.6 s per channel (at 34-MHz operation) Two kinds of operating modes Single mode: Single-channel A/D conversion Scan mode: Continuous A/D conversion on 1 to 4 channels or 1 to 8 channels Eight data registers Conversion results are held in a 16-bit data register for each channel Sample and hold function Three kinds of conversion start Conversion can be started by software, 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU), conversion start trigger by 8-bit timer (TMR), or external trigger signal. Interrupt request A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request can be generated Module stop mode can be set ADCMS04A_010020020100 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 661 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter Module data bus Bus interface Internal data bus AVCC Vref AVSS Successive approximations register 10-bit D/A A D D R A A D D R B A D D R C A D D R D A D D R E A D D R F A D D R G A D D R H A D C S R A D C R AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 Multiplexer + - Comparator Sample-andhold circuit Control circuit AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 AN12 AN13 ADI interrupt signal Conversion start trigger from 8-bit timer or TPU ADTRG Legend: ADCR: ADCSR: ADDRA: ADDRB: ADDRC: A/D control register A/D control/status register A/D data register A A/D data register B A/D data register C ADDRD: ADDRE: ADDRF: ADDRG: ADDRH: A/D data register D A/D data register E A/D data register F A/D data register G A/D data register H Figure 16.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 662 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter 16.2 Input/Output Pins Table 16.1 summarizes the input pins used by the A/D converter. The AVCC and AVSS pins are the power supply pins for the analog block in the A/D converter. The Vref pin is the A/D conversion reference voltage pin. The sixteen analog input pins are divided into two channel sets: channel set 0 (AN0 to AN7) and channel set 1 (AN12 and AN13). Table 16.1 Pin Configuration Pin Name Analog power supply pin Analog ground pin Reference voltage pin Analog input pin 0 Analog input pin 1 Analog input pin 2 Analog input pin 3 Analog input pin 4 Analog input pin 5 Analog input pin 6 Analog input pin 7 Analog input pin 12 Analog input pin 13 A/D external trigger input pin Symbol AVCC AVSS Vref AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 AN12 AN13 ADTRG I/O Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input External trigger input for starting A/D conversion Channel set 1 analog inputs Function Analog block power supply Analog block ground A/D conversion reference voltage Channel set 0 analog inputs Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 663 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter 16.3 Register Descriptions The A/D converter has the following registers. * * * * * * * * * * A/D data register A (ADDRA) A/D data register B (ADDRB) A/D data register C (ADDRC) A/D data register D (ADDRD) A/D data register E (ADDRE) A/D data register F (ADDRF) A/D data register G (ADDRG) A/D data register H (ADDRH) A/D control/status register (ADCSR) A/D control register (ADCR) A/D Data Registers A to H (ADDRA to ADDRH) 16.3.1 There are eight 16-bit read-only ADDR registers, ADDRA to ADDRH, used to store the results of A/D conversion. The ADDR registers, which store a conversion result for each channel, are shown in table 16.2. The converted 10-bit data is stored to bits 15 to 6. The lower 6-bit data is always read as 0. The data bus between the CPU and the A/D converter is 16-bit width. The data can be read directly from the CPU. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 664 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter Table 16.2 Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers Analog Input Channel Channel Set 0 (CH3 = 0) AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 Channel Set 1 (CH3 = 1) AN12 AN13 A/D Data Register which Stores Conversion Result ADDRA ADDRB ADDRC ADDRD ADDRE ADDRF ADDRG ADDRH Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 665 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter 16.3.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ADCSR controls A/D conversion operations. Bit 7 Bit Name ADF Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description A/D End Flag A status flag that indicates the end of A/D conversion. [Setting conditions] * * When A/D conversion ends in single mode When A/D conversion ends on all specified channels in scan mode When 0 is written after reading ADF = 1 When the DTC or DMAC is activated by an ADI interrupt and ADDR is read [Clearing conditions] * * 6 ADIE 0 R/W A/D Interrupt Enable A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request enabled when 1 is set 5 ADST 0 R/W A/D Start Clearing this bit to 0 stops A/D conversion, and the A/D converter enters wait state. When this bit is set to 1 by software, TPU (trigger), TMR (trigger), or the ADTRG pin, A/D conversion starts. This bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion. In single mode, cleared to 0 automatically when conversion on the specified channel ends. In scan mode, conversion continues sequentially on the specified channels until this bit is cleared to 0 by a reset, or a transition to hardware standby mode or software standby mode. 4 -- 0 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 666 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter Bit 3 2 1 0 Bit Name CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Channel select 3 to 0 Selects analog input together with bits SCANE and SCANS in ADCR. Set the input channel when conversion is stopped (ADST = 0). When SCANE = 0 and SCANS = X 0000: AN0 0001: AN1 0010: AN2 0011: AN3 0100: AN4 0101: AN5 0110: AN6 0111: AN7 0000: AN0 0001: AN0 and AN1 0010: AN0 to AN2 0011: AN0 to AN3 0100: AN4 0101: AN4 and AN5 0110: AN4 to AN6 0111: AN4 to AN7 0000: AN0 0001: AN0 and AN1 0010: AN0 to AN2 0011: AN0 to AN3 0100: AN0 to AN4 0101: AN0 to AN5 0110: AN0 to AN6 0111: AN0 to AN7 Legend: x: Don't care. Note: * Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. 10xx: Cannot be set 10xx: Cannot be set 10xx: Cannot be set 10xx: Cannot be set 1100: AN12 1101: AN13 111x: Cannot be set 111x: Cannot be set 1000: AN8 1001: AN8 and AN9 1010: AN8 to AN10 1011: AN8 to AN11 1100: AN12 1101: AN12 and AN13 1110: AN12 to AN14 1111: AN12 to AN15 1xxx: Cannot be set 1xxx: Cannot be set 1xxx: Cannot be set 1xxx: Cannot be set 1xxx: Cannot be set 1xxx: Cannot be set 1xxx: Cannot be set 1xxx: Cannot be set When SCANE = 1 and SCANS = 0 When SCANE = 1 and SCANS = 1 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 667 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter 16.3.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) ADCR enables A/D conversion start by an external trigger input. It also sets the A/D converter operating mode and the A/D conversion time. Bit 7 6 Bit Name TRGS1 TRGS0 Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Timer Trigger Select 1 and 0 These bits select enabling or disabling of the start of A/D conversion by a trigger signal. 00: A/D conversion start by external trigger is disabled 01: A/D conversion start by external trigger (TPU) is enabled 10: A/D conversion start by external trigger (TMR) is enabled 11: A/D conversion start by external trigger pin (ADTRG) is enabled 5 4 SCANE SCANS 0 0 R/W R/W Scan Mode Selects single mode or scan mode as the A/D conversion operating mode. 0x: Single mode 10: Scan mode. A/D conversion is performed continuously for channels 1 to 4 11: Scan mode. A/D conversion is performed continuously for channels 1 to 8. 3 2 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 R/W R/W Clock Select 1 to 0 Sets the A/D conversion time. Only set bits CKS1 and CKS0 while conversion is stopped (ADST = 0). 00: A/D conversion time = 530 states (max) 01: A/D conversion time = 266 states (max) 10: A/D conversion time = 134 states (max) 11: A/D conversion time = 68 states (max) 1, 0 -- All 0 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Legend: x: Don't care. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 668 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter 16.4 Operation The A/D converter operates by successive approximation with 10-bit resolution. It has two operating modes: single mode and scan mode. When changing the operating mode or analog input channel, to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the bit ADST to 0 in ADCSR to halt A/D conversion. The ADST bit can be set at the same time as the operating mode or analog input channel is changed. 16.4.1 Single Mode In single mode, A/D conversion is to be performed only once on the specified single channel. Operations are as follows. 1. A/D conversion is started when the ADST bit in ADCSR is set to 1, according to the software or external trigger input. 2. When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred to the corresponding A/D data register to the channel. 3. On completion of conversion, the ADF bit in ADCSR is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt request is generated. 4. The ADST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion, and is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends. When the ADST bit is cleared to 0 during A/D conversion, A/D conversion stops and the A/D converter enters wait state. 16.4.2 Scan Mode In scan mode, A/D conversion is to be performed sequentially on the specified channels: maximum four channels or maximum eight channels. Operations are as follows. 1. When the ADST bit in ADCSR is set to 1 by software, TPU or external trigger input, A/D conversion starts on the first channel in the group. The consecutive A/D conversion on maximum four channels (SCANE and SCANS = 10) or on maximum eight channels (SCANE and SCANS = 11) can be selected. When the consecutive A/D conversion is performed on the four channels, the A/D conversion starts on AN0 when CH3 = 1 and CH2 = 1, AN4 when CH3 and CH2 = 01, or AN12 when CH3 and CH2 = 11. When the consecutive A/D conversion is performed on the eight channels, the A/D conversion starts on AN0 when CH3 = 0. 2. When A/D conversion for each channel is completed, the result is sequentially transferred to the corresponding A/D data register to each channel. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 669 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter 3. When conversion of all the selected channels is completed, the ADF bit in ADCSR is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt is requested. Conversion of the first channel in the group starts again. 4. The ADST bit is not cleared automatically, and steps [2] and [3] are repeated as long as the ADST bit remains set to 1. When the ADST bit is cleared to 0, A/D conversion stops and the A/D converter enters wait state. If the ADST bit is later set to 1, A/D conversion starts again from the first channel in the group. 16.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time The A/D converter has a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. The A/D converter samples the analog input when A/D conversion start delay time (tD) passes after the ADST bit is set to 1, then starts conversion. Figure 16.2 shows the A/D conversion timing. Table 16.3 indicates the A/D conversion time. As indicated in figure 16.2, the A/D conversion time (tCONV) includes tD and the input sampling time (tSPL). The length of tD varies depending on the timing of the write access to ADCSR. The total conversion time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in tables 16.3. In scan mode, the values given in table 16.3 apply to the first conversion time. The values given in table 16.4 apply to the second and subsequent conversions. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 670 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter (1) Address (2) Write signal Input sampling timing ADF tD tSPL tCONV Legend: (1): ADCSR write cycle (2): ADCSR address A/D conversion start delay time tD: tSPL: Input sampling time tCONV: A/D conversion time Figure 16.2 A/D Conversion Timing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 671 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter Table 16.3 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode) CKS1 = 0 CKS0 = 0 Item A/D conversion start delay time Input sampling time A/D conversion time Symbol tD tSPL tCONV Min Typ Max 18 -- -- 33 CKS0 = 1 Min Typ Max 10 -- -- 63 16 -- 266 CKS1 = 1 CKS0 = 0 Min Typ Max 6 -- -- 31 9 -- 134 CKS0 = 1 Min Typ Max 4 -- 67 -- 15 -- 5 -- 68 127 -- 530 515 -- 259 -- 131 -- Note: Values in the table are the number of states. Table 16.4 A/D Conversion Time (Scan Mode) CKS1 0 CKS0 0 1 1 0 1 Conversion Time (State) 512 (Fixed) 256 (Fixed) 128 (Fixed) 64 (Fixed) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 672 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter 16.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing A/D conversion can be externally triggered. When the TRGS1 and TRGS0 bits are set to 11 in ADCR, external trigger input is enabled at the ADTRG pin. A falling edge at the ADTRG pin sets the ADST bit to 1 in ADCSR, starting A/D conversion. Other operations, in both single and scan modes, are the same as when the bit ADST has been set to 1 by software. Figure 16.3 shows the timing. ADTRG Internal trigger signal ADST A/D conversion Figure 16.3 External Trigger Input Timing 16.5 Interrupts The A/D converter generates an A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) at the end of A/D conversion. Setting the ADIE bit to 1 enables an ADI interrupt requests while the bit ADF in ADCSR is set to 1 after A/D conversion is completed. The DTC or DMAC can be activated by an ADI interrupt. Having the converted data read by the DTC or DMAC in response to an ADI interrupt enables continuous conversion to be achieved without imposing a load on software. Table 16.5 A/D Converter Interrupt Source Name ADI Interrupt Source End of conversion Interrupt Flag ADF DTC Activation Possible DMAC Activation Possible Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 673 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter 16.6 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions This LSI's A/D conversion precision definitions are given below. * Resolution The number of A/D converter digital output codes * Quantization error The deviation inherent in the A/D converter, given by 1/2 LSB (see figure 16.4). * Offset error The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic when the digital output changes from the minimum voltage value B'0000000000 (H'000) to B'0000000001 (H'001) (see figure 16.5). * Full-scale error The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic when the digital output changes from B'1111111110 (H'3FE) to B'1111111111 (H'3FF) (see figure 16.5). * Nonlinearity error The error with respect to the ideal A/D conversion characteristic between the zero voltage and the full-scale voltage. Does not include the offset error, full-scale error, or quantization error (see figure 16.5). * Absolute precision The deviation between the digital value and the analog input value. Includes the offset error, full-scale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 674 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter Digital output 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000 Ideal A/D conversion characteristic Quantization error 1 2 1024 1024 1022 1023 FS 1024 1024 Analog input voltage Figure 16.4 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions Full-scale error Digital output Ideal A/D conversion characteristic Nonlinearity error Actual A/D conversion characteristic FS Analog input voltage Offset error Figure 16.5 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 675 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter 16.7 16.7.1 Usage Notes Module Stop Mode Setting Operation of the A/D converter can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting is for operation of the A/D converter to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop mode. For details, refer to section 23, Power-Down Modes. 16.7.2 Permissible Signal Source Impedance This LSI's analog input is designed so that conversion precision is guaranteed for an input signal for which the signal source impedance is 5 k or less. This specification is provided to enable the A/D converter's sample-and-hold circuit input capacitance to be charged within the sampling time; if the sensor output impedance exceeds 5 k, charging may be insufficient and it may not be possible to guarantee the A/D conversion precision. However, if a large capacitance is provided externally for conversion in single mode, the input load will essentially comprise only the internal input resistance of 10 k, and the signal source impedance is ignored. However, since a low-pass filter effect is obtained in this case, it may not be possible to follow an analog signal with a large differential coefficient (e.g., 5 mV/s or greater) (see figure 16.6). When converting a high-speed analog signal or conversion in scan mode, a low-impedance buffer should be inserted. This LSI Equivalent circuit of A/D converter Sensor output impedance Up to 10 k Sensor input Low-pass filter C to 0.1 F Cin = 15 pF 20 pF 10 k Figure 16.6 Example of Analog Input Circuit Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 676 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter 16.7.3 Influences on Absolute Precision Adding capacitance results in coupling with GND, and therefore noise in GND may adversely affect absolute precision. Be sure to make the connection to an electrically stable GND such as AVss. Care is also required to insure that filter circuits do not communicate with digital signals on the mounting board, so acting as antennas. 16.7.4 Setting Range of Analog Power Supply and Other Pins If conditions shown below are not met, the reliability of the device may be adversely affected. * Analog input voltage range The voltage applied to analog input pin ANn during A/D conversion should be in the range AVss AVn Vref. * Relation between AVcc, AVss and Vcc, Vss As the relationship between AVcc, AVss and Vcc, Vss, set AVcc Vcc and AVss = Vss. If the A/D converter is not used, the AVcc and AVss pins must not be left open. * Vref setting range The reference voltage at the Vref pin should be set in the range Vref AVcc. 16.7.5 Notes on Board Design In board design, digital circuitry and analog circuitry should be as mutually isolated as possible, and layout in which digital circuit signal lines and analog circuit signal lines cross or are in close proximity should be avoided as far as possible. Failure to do so may result in incorrect operation of the analog circuitry due to inductance, adversely affecting A/D conversion values. Also, digital circuitry must be isolated from the analog input signals (AN0 to AN7, AN12, AN13), analog reference power supply (Vref), and analog power supply (AVcc) by the analog ground (AVss). Also, the analog ground (AVss) should be connected at one point to a stable digital ground (Vss) on the board. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 677 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter 16.7.6 Notes on Noise Countermeasures A protection circuit connected to prevent damage due to an abnormal voltage such as an excessive surge at the analog input pins (AN0 to AN7, AN12, AN13) should be connected between AVcc and AVss as shown in figure 16.7. Also, the bypass capacitors connected to AVcc and the filter capacitor connected to AN0 to AN15 must be connected to AVss. If a filter capacitor is connected, the input currents at the analog input pins (AN0 to AN7, AN12, AN13) are averaged, and so an error may arise. Also, when A/D conversion is performed frequently, as in scan mode, if the current charged and discharged by the capacitance of the sample-and-hold circuit in the A/D converter exceeds the current input via the input impedance (Rin), an error will arise in the analog input pin voltage. Careful consideration is therefore required when deciding the circuit constants. AVCC Vref Rin* 2 *1 *1 0.1 F AVSS 100 AN0 to AN7, AN12, AN13 Notes: Values are reference values. 1. 10 F 0.01 F 2. Rin: Input impedance Figure 16.7 Example of Analog Input Protection Circuit Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 678 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter Table 16.6 Analog Pin Specifications Item Analog input capacitance Permissible signal source impedance Min -- -- Max 20 5 Unit pF k Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 679 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 16 A/D Converter Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 680 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 17 D/A Converter Section 17 D/A Converter 17.1 Features D/A converter features are listed below. * * * * * * 8-bit resolution Two output channels Maximum conversion time of 10 s (with 20 pF load) Output voltage of 0 V to Vref D/A output hold function in software standby mode Setting the module stop mode DAC0004A_000020020100 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 681 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 17 D/A Converter Module data bus Bus interface Vref AVCC DA3 DADR2 8-bit DA2 D/A AVSS DADR3 Control circuit Legend: DADR2: D/A data register 2 DADR3: D/A data register 3 DADR4: D/A data register 4 DACR23: D/A control register 23 Internal data bus Figure 17.1 Block Diagram of D/A Converter Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 682 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 DACR23 Section 17 D/A Converter 17.2 Input/Output Pins Table 17.1 summarizes the input and output pins of the D/A converter. Table 17.1 Pin Configuration Pin Name Analog power pin Analog ground pin Reference voltage pin Analog output pin 2 Analog output pin 3 Symbol AVCC AVSS Vref DA2 DA3 I/O Input Input Input Output Output Function Analog power Analog ground Reference voltage of D/A converter Channel 2 analog output Channel 3 analog output 17.3 Register Descriptions The D/A converter has the following registers. * * * * D/A data register 2 (DADR2) D/A data register 3 (DADR3) D/A control register 01 (DACR01) D/A control register 23 (DACR23) D/A Data Registers 2 and 3 (DADR2 and DADR3) 17.3.1 DADR2 and DADR3 are 8-bit readable/writable registers that store data for conversion. Whenever output is enabled, the values in DADR are converted and output to the analog output pins. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 683 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 17 D/A Converter 17.3.2 D/A Control Register 23 (DACR23) DACR23 control the operation of the D/A converter. Bit 7 Bit Name DAOE3 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description D/A Output Enable 3 Controls D/A conversion and analog output. 0: Analog output (DA3) is disabled 1: Channel 3 D/A conversion is enabled; analog output (DA3) is enabled 6 DAOE2 0 R/W D/A Output Enable 2 Controls D/A conversion and analog output. 0: Analog output (DA2) is disabled 1: Channel 2 D/A conversion is enabled; analog output (DA2) is enabled 5 DAE 0 R/W D/A Enable Used together with the DAOE0 and DAOE1 bits to control D/A conversion. When the DAE bit is cleared to 0, channel 2 and 3 D/A conversions are controlled independently. When the DAE bit is set to 1, channel 2 and 3 D/A conversions are controlled together. Output of conversion results is always controlled independently by the DAOE0 and DAOE1 bits. For details, see table 17.2. 4 to 0 -- All 1 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 684 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 17 D/A Converter Table 17.2 Control of D/A Conversion Bit 5 DAE 0 Bit 7 DAOE3 0 Bit 6 DAOE2 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description D/A conversion disabled Channel 2 D/A conversion enabled, channel3 D/A conversion disabled Channel 3 D/A conversion enabled, channel2 D/A conversion disabled Channel 2 and 3 D/A conversions enabled D/A conversion disabled Channel 2 and 3 D/A conversions enabled 17.4 Operation The D/A converter includes D/A conversion circuits for two channels, each of which can operate independently. When DAOE bit in DACR23 is set to 1, D/A conversion is enabled and the conversion result is output. The operation example concerns D/A conversion on channel 2. Figure 17.2 shows the timing of this operation. [1] Write the conversion data to DADR2. [2] Set the DAOE0 bit in DACR23 to 1. D/A conversion is started. The conversion result is output from the analog output pin DA2 after the conversion time tDCONV has elapsed. The conversion result is continued to output until DADR0 is written to again or the DAOE0 bit is cleared to 0. The output value is expressed by the following formula: DADRcontents x Vref 256 [3] If DADR2 is written to again, the conversion is immediately started. The conversion result is output after the conversion time tDCONV has elapsed. [4] If the DAOE0 bit is cleared to 0, analog output is disabled. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 685 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 17 D/A Converter DADR2 write cycle DACR23 write cycle DADR2 write cycle DACR23 write cycle Address DADR2 Conversion data 1 Conversion data 2 DAOE0 DA2 High-impedance state tDCONV Legend: tDCONV: D/A conversion time Conversion result 1 tDCONV Conversion result 2 Figure 17.2 Example of D/A Converter Operation 17.5 17.5.1 Usage Notes Setting for Module Stop Mode It is possible to enable/disable the D/A converter operation using the module stop control register, the D/A converter does not operate by the initial value of the register. The register can be accessed by releasing the module stop mode. For details, see section 23, Power-Down Modes. 17.5.2 D/A Output Hold Function in Software Standby Mode If D/A conversion is enabled and this LSI enters software standby mode, D/A output is held and analog power supply current remains at the same level during D/A conversion. When the analog power supply current is required to go low in software standby mode, bits DAOE2, DAOE3 and DAE should be cleared to 0, and D/A output should be disabled. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 686 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 18 RAM Section 18 RAM This LSI has an on-chip high-speed static RAM. The RAM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus, enabling one-state access by the CPU to both byte data and word data. The on-chip RAM can be enabled or disabled by means of the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR). For details on the system control register (SYSCR), refer to section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR). Part No. H8S/2368F HD64F2368 HD64F2367 HD64F2364 HD64F2362 HD64F2361 HD64F2360 HD6432365 HD6412363 Masked ROM version ROMless version 24 kbytes 16 kbytes H'FF6000 to H'FFBFFF H'FF8000 to H'FFBFFF ROM Type Flash memory version RAM Capacitance 32 kbytes 24 kbytes 32 kbytes RAM Address H'FF4000 to H'FFBFFF H'FF6000 to H'FFBFFF H'FF4000 to H'FFBFFF Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 687 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 18 RAM Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 688 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) The features of the flash memory included in the flash memory version are summarized below. The block diagram of the flash memory is shown in figure 19.1. 19.1 * Size Features ROM Size 384 kbytes ROM Address H'000000 to H'05FFFF (Modes 3, 4, and 7) Product Classification H8S/2368 Group HD64F2367 * Programming/erase methods The flash memory is programmed 128 bytes at a time. Erase is performed in single-block units. The flash memory of 384 kbytes is configured as follows: 64 kbytes x 5 blocks, 32 kbytes x 1 block, and 4 kbytes x 8 blocks. To erase the entire flash memory, each block must be erased in turn. * Reprogramming capability The flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 100 times. * Two on-board programming modes Boot mode User program mode On-board programming/erasing can be done in boot mode in which the on-chip boot program is started for erase or programming of the entire flash memory. In normal user program mode, individual blocks can be erased or programmed. * Programmer mode Flash memory can be programmed/erased in programmer mode, using a PROM programmer, as well as in on-board programming mode. * Automatic bit rate adjustment With data transfer in boot mode, the bit rate of this LSI can be automatically adjusted to match the transfer bit rate of the host. * Programming/erasing protection There are three protect modes, hardware, software, and error protect, which allow protected status to be designated for flash memory program/erase operations. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 689 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) Internal address bus Internal data bus (16 bits) Module bus FLMCR1 FLMCR2 EBR1 EBR2 SYSCR Bus interface/controller Operating mode Mode pins Flash memory Legend: FLMCR1: FLMCR2: EBR1: EBR2: SYSCR: Flash memory control register 1 Flash memory control register 2 Erase block register 1 Erase block register 2 System control register Figure 19.1 Block Diagram of Flash Memory Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 690 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) 19.2 Mode Transitions When the mode pins are set in the reset state and a reset-start is executed, this LSI enters an operating mode as shown in figure 19.2. In user mode, flash memory can be read but not programmed or erased. The boot, user program and programmer modes are provided as modes to write and erase the flash memory. The differences between boot mode and user program mode are shown in table 19.1. Figure 19.3 shows boot mode. Figure 19.4 shows user program mode. = MD2 User mode (on-chip ROM enabled) SWE = 0 SWE = 1 1 RES Reset state =0 MD0 = 1, MD1 = 1, MD2 = 0 RES = 0 RES = 0 ES = 0 MD0 = 0, MD1 = 0, MD2 = 0, P50 = 0, P51 = 0, P52 = 1 R Programmer mode User program mode Boot mode On-board programming mode Note: Only make a transition between user mode and user program mode when the CPU is not accessing the flash memory. Figure 19.2 Flash Memory State Transitions Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 691 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) Table 19.1 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode Boot Mode Total erase Block erase Programming control program* Note: * Yes No User Program Mode Yes Yes Program/program-verify Erase/erase-verify/program/ program-verify To be provided by the user, in accordance with the recommended algorithm. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 692 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) 1. Initial state The old program version or data remains written in the flash memory. The user should prepare the programming control program and new application program beforehand in the host. 2. Programming control program transfer When boot mode is entered, the boot program in the chip (originally incorporated in the chip) is started and the programming control program in the host is transferred to RAM via SCI communication. The boot program required for flash memory erasing is automatically transferred to the RAM boot program area. Host Host Programming control program New application program New application program This LSI Boot program Flash memory RAM SCI This LSI Boot program Flash memory RAM Boot program area SCI Application program (old version) Application program (old version) Programming control program 3. Flash memory initialization The erase program in the boot program area (in RAM) is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF). In boot mode, entire flash memory erasure is performed, without regard to blocks. Host 4. Writing new application program The programming control program transferred from the host to RAM is executed, and the new application program in the host is written into the flash memory. Host New application program This LSI Boot program Flash memory RAM Boot program area Flash memory prewrite-erase Programming control program This LSI SCI Boot program Flash memory RAM Boot program area New application program Programming control program SCI Program execution state Figure 19.3 Boot Mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 693 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) 1. Initial state (1) the program that will transfer the programming/ erase control program to on-chip RAM should be written into the flash memory by the user beforehand. (2) The programming/erase control program should be prepared in the host or in the flash memory. 2. Programming/erase control program transfer When user program mode is entered, user software confirms this fact, executes the transfer program in the flash memory, and transfers the programming/erase control program to RAM. Host Programming/ erase control program New application program Host New application program This LSI Boot program Flash memory Transfer program RAM SCI This LSI Boot program Flash memory Transfer program Programming/ erase control program SCI RAM Application program (old version) Application program (old version) 3. Flash memory initialization The programming/erase program in RAM is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF). Erasing can be performed in block units, but not in byte units. Host 4. Writing new application program Next, the new application program in the host is written into the erased flash memory blocks. Do not write to unerased blocks. Host New application program This LSI Boot program Flash memory Transfer program Programming/ erase control program This LSI SCI RAM Boot program Flash memory Transfer program Programming/ erase control program SCI RAM Flash memory erase New application program Program execution state Figure 19.4 User Program Mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 694 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) 19.3 Block Configuration Figure 19.5 shows the block configuration of 384-kbyte flash memory. The thick lines indicate erasing units, the narrow lines indicate programming units, and the values are addresses. The 384kbyte flash memory is divided into 64 kbytes (5 blocks), 32 kbytes (1 block), and 4 kbytes (8 blocks). Erasing is performed in these divided units. Programming is performed in 128-byte units starting from an address whose lower eight bits are H'00 or H'80. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 695 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) EB0 Erase unit 4 kbytes EB1 Erase unit 4 kbytes EB2 Erase unit 4 kbytes EB3 Erase unit 4 kbytes EB4 Erase unit 4 kbytes EB7 Erase unit 4 kbytes EB8 Erase unit 32 kbytes EB9 Erase unit 64 kbytes EB10 Erase unit 64 kbytes EB11 Erase unit 64 kbytes EB12 Erase unit 64 kbytes EB13 Erase unit 64 kbytes Programming unit: 128 bytes H'000000 H'000001 H'000002 H'00007F H'000FFF H'001000 H'001001 H'001002 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'00107F H'001FFF H'002000 H'002001 H'002002 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'00207F H'002FFF H'003000 H'003001 H'003002 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'00307F H'003FFF H'004000 H'004001 H'004002 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'00407F H'007000 H'007001 H'007002 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'00707F H'007FFF H'008000 H'008001 H'008002 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'00807F H'00FFFF H'010000 H'010001 H'010002 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'01007F H'01FFFF H'020000 H'020001 H'020002 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'02007F H'02FFFF H'030000 H'030001 H'030002 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'03007F H'03FFFF H'040000 H'040001 H'040002 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'04007F H'04FFFF H'050000 H'050001 H'050002 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'05007F H'05FFFF Figure 19.5 384-kbyte Flash Memory Block Configuration (Modes 3, 4, and 7) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 696 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) 19.4 Input/Output Pins The flash memory is controlled by means of the pins shown in table 19.2. Table 19.2 Pin Configuration Pin Name RES MD2 MD1 MD0 P52 P51 P50 TxD1 RxD1 I/O Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Input Function Reset Sets this LSI's operating mode Sets this LSI's operating mode Sets this LSI's operating mode Sets operating mode in programmer mode Sets operating mode in programmer mode Sets operating mode in programmer mode Serial transmit data output Serial receive data input 19.5 Register Descriptions The flash memory has the following registers. For details on the system control register, refer to section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR). * * * * Flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) Flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2) Erase block register 1 (EBR1) Erase block register 2 (EBR2) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 697 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) 19.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1) FLMCR1 is a register that makes the flash memory transit to program mode, program-verify mode, erase mode, or erase-verify mode. For details on register setting, refer to section 19.7, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. Bit 7 Bit Name -- Initial Value 0/1 R/W R Description This bit is reserved. This bit is always read as 0 in modes 1 and 2. This bit is always read as 1 in modes 3 to 7. Software Write Enable When this bit is set to 1, flash memory programming/erasing is enabled. When this bit is cleared to 0, other FLMCR1 register bits and all EBR1 and EBR2 bits cannot be set. 5 ESU 0 R/W Erase Setup When this bit is set to 1 while SWE = 1, the flash memory transits to the erase setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the erase setup state is cancelled. 4 PSU 0 R/W Program Setup When this bit is set to 1 while SWE = 1, the flash memory transits to the program setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the program setup state is cancelled. 3 EV 0 R/W Erase-Verify When this bit is set to 1 while SWE = 1, the flash memory transits to erase-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, erase-verify mode is cancelled. 2 PV 0 R/W Program-Verify When this bit is set to 1 while SWE = 1, the flash memory transits to program-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, program-verify mode is cancelled. 1 E 0 R/W Erase When this bit is set to 1 while SWE = 1, and ESU = 1, the flash memory transits to erase mode. When it is cleared to 0, erase mode is cancelled. 0 P 0 R/W Program When this bit is set to 1 while SWE = 1, and PSU = 1, the flash memory transits to program mode. When it is cleared to 0, program mode is cancelled. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 698 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 6 SWE 0 R/W Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) 19.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) FLMCR2 is a register that displays the state of flash memory programming/erasing. When the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is cleared to 0, FLMCR2 is initialized to H'00. FLMCR2 is a read-only register, and should not be written to. Bit 7 Bit Name FLER Initial Value 0 R/W R Description Indicates that an error has occurred during an operation on flash memory (programming or erasing). When FLER is set to 1, flash memory goes to the error-protection state. See section 19.8.3, Error Protection, for details. 6 to 0 -- All 0 R Reserved These bits always read 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 699 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) 19.5.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) EBR1 specifies the flash memory erase area block. EBR1 is initialized to H'00 when the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is 0. Set only one bit in EBR1 and EBR2 together (do not set more than one bit at the same time. Setting more than one bit will automatically clear all EBR1 and EBR2 bits to 0). For details, see table 19.3. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name EB7 EB6 EB5 EB4 EB3 EB2 EB1 EB0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description When this bit is set to 1, 4 kbytes of EB7 are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 4 kbytes of EB6 are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 4 kbytes of EB5 are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 4 kbytes of EB4 are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 4 kbytes of EB3 are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 4 kbytes of EB2 are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 4 kbytes of EB1 are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 4 kbytes of EB0 are to be erased. 19.5.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) EBR2 specifies the flash memory erase area block. EBR2 is initialized to H'00 when the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is 0. Set only one bit in EBR2 and EBR1 together (do not set more than one bit at the same time. Setting more than one bit will automatically clear all EBR1 and EBR2 bits to 0). For details, see table 19.3. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 700 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) Bit 7, 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name -- EB13 EB12 EB11 EB10 EB9 EB8 Initial Value All 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved The initial value should not be changed. When this bit is set to 1, 64 kbytes of EB13 are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 64 kbytes of EB12 are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 64 kbytes of EB11 are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 64 kbytes of EB10 are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 64 kbytes of EB9 are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 32 kbytes of EB8 are to be erased. Table 19.3 Erase Blocks Address Block (Size) EB0 (4 kbytes) EB1 (4 kbytes) EB2 (4 kbytes) EB3 (4 kbytes) EB4 (4 kbytes) EB5 (4 kbytes) EB6 (4 kbytes) EB7 (4 kbytes) EB8 (32 kbytes) EB9 (64 kbytes) EB10 (64 kbytes) EB11 (64 kbytes) EB12 (64 kbytes) EB13 (64 kbytes) Modes 3, 4, and 7 H'000000 to H'000FFF H'001000 to H'001FFF H'002000 to H'002FFF H'003000 to H'003FFF H'004000 to H'004FFF H'005000 to H'005FFF H'006000 to H'006FFF H'007000 to H'007FFF H'008000 to H'00FFFF H'010000 to H'01FFFF H'020000 to H'02FFFF H'030000 to H'03FFFF H'040000 to H'04FFFF H'050000 to H'05FFFF Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 701 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) 19.6 On-Board Programming Modes In an on-board programming mode, programming, erasing, and verification for the on-chip flash memory can be performed. There are two on-board programming modes: boot mode and user program mode. Table 19.4 shows how to select boot mode. User program mode can be selected by setting the control bits by software. For a diagram that shows mode transitions of flash memory, see figure 19.2. Table 19.4 Setting On-Board Programming Mode Mode Setting Boot mode Single-chip activation expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled MD2 0 MD1 1 MD0 1 19.6.1 Boot Mode When this LSI enters boot mode, the embedded boot program is started. The boot program transfers the programming control program from the externally connected host to the on-chip RAM via the SCI_1. When the flash memory is all erased, the programming control program is executed. Table 19.5 shows the boot mode operations between reset end and branching to the programming control program. 1. When the boot program is initiated, the SCI_1 should be set to asynchronous mode, the chip measures the low-level period of asynchronous SCI communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The chip then calculates the bit rate of transmission from the host, and adjusts the SCI_1 bit rate to match that of the host. The transfer format is 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, and no parity. The reset should end with the RxD pin high. The RxD and TxD pins should be pulled up on the board if necessary. After the reset ends, it takes approximately 100 states before the chip is ready to measure the low-level period. 2. After matching the bit rates, the chip transmits one H'00 byte to the host to indicate the end of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end indication (H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the chip. If reception could not be performed normally, initiate boot mode again by a reset. Depending on the host's transfer bit rate and system clock frequency of this LSI, there will be a discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and the chip. To operate the SCI properly, set the host's transfer bit rate and system clock frequency of this LSI within the ranges listed in table 19.6. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 702 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) 3. When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in the host beforehand. Prepare a programming control program in accordance with the description in section 19.7, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. 4. Before branching to the programming control program, the chip terminates transfer operations by the SCI_1 (by clearing the RE and TE bits in SCR to 0), but the adjusted bit rate value remains set in BRR. Therefore, the programming control program can still use it for transfer of program data or verify data with the host. The TxD pin is high. The contents of the CPU general registers are undefined immediately after branching to the programming control program. These registers must be initialized at the beginning of the programming control program, since the stack pointer (SP), in particular, is used implicitly in subroutine calls, etc. 5. In boot mode, if flash memory contains data (all data is not 1), all blocks of flash memory are erased. Boot mode is used for the initial programming in the on-board state or for a forcible return when a program that is to be initiated in user program mode was accidentally erased and could not be executed in user program mode. Notes: 1. In boot mode, a part of the on-chip RAM area (H'FF8000 to H'FF87FF) is used by the boot program. Addresses H'FF8800 to H'FFBFFF is the area to which the programming control program is transferred from the host. The boot program area cannot be used until the execution state in boot mode switches to the programming control program. 2. Boot mode can be cleared by a reset. Release the reset by setting the MD pins, after waiting at least 20 states since driving the reset pin low. Boot mode is also cleared when the WDT overflow reset occurs. 3. Do not change the MD pin input levels in boot mode. 4. All interrupts are disabled during programming or erasing of the flash memory. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 703 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) Table 19.5 Boot Mode Operation Item Host Operation Processing Contents Communication Contents LSI Operation Processing Contents Branches to boot program at reset-start. Boot mode initiation Boot program initiation Bit rate adjustment Continuously transmits data H'00 at specified bit rate. H'00, H'00 . . . H'00 Transmits data H'55 when data H'00 is received error-free. H'00 H'55 H'AA * Measures low-level period of receive data H'00. * Calculates bit rate and sets BRR in SCI_1. * Transmits data H'00 to host as adjustment end indication. Transmits data H'AA to host when data H'55 is received. H'AA reception. Transfer of number of bytes of programming control program Transmits number of bytes (N) of programming control program to be transferred as 2-byte data (low-order byte following high-order byte). Upper bytes, lower bytes Echoback Echobacks the 2-byte data received to host. Transmits 1-byte of programming control program (repeated for N times). H'XX Echoback Echobacks received data to host and also transfers it to RAM. (repeated for N times) Flash memory erase Boot program erase error H'FF H'AA reception. H'AA Checks flash memory data, erases all flash memory blocks in case of written data existing, and transmits data H'AA to host. (If erase could not be done, transmits data H'FF to host and aborts operation.) Branches to programming control program transferred to on-chip RAM and starts execution. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 704 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) Table 19.6 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate is Possible Host Bit Rate 19,200 bps 9,600 bps System Clock Frequency Range of LSI 8 to 25 MHz 8 to 25 MHz 19.6.2 User Program Mode On-board programming/erasing of an individual flash memory block can also be performed in user program mode by branching to a user program/erase program. The user must set branching conditions and provide on-board means of supplying programming data. The flash memory must contain the program/erase program or a program which provides the program/erase program from external memory. Because the flash memory itself cannot be read during programming/erasing, transfer the program/erase program to on-chip RAM, as like in boot mode. Figure 19.6 shows a sample procedure for programming/erasing in user program mode. Prepare a program/erase program in accordance with the description in section 19.7, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. Reset-start No Program/erase? Yes Transfer user program/erase control program to RAM Branch to flash memory application program Branch to user program/erase control program in RAM Execute user program/erase control program (flash memory programming) Branch to flash memory application program Figure 19.6 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 705 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) 19.7 Flash Memory Programming/Erasing A software method, using the CPU, is employed to program and erase flash memory in the onboard programming modes. Depending on the FLMCR1 and FLMCR2 setting, the flash memory operates in one of the following four modes: program mode, erase mode, program-verify mode, and erase-verify mode. The programming control program in boot mode and the user program/erase program in user mode use these operating modes in combination to perform programming/erasing. Flash memory programming and erasing should be performed in accordance with the descriptions in section 19.7.1, Program/Program-Verify and section 19.7.2, Erase/Erase-Verify, respectively. 19.7.1 Program/Program-Verify When programming data or programs to the flash memory, the program/program-verify flowchart shown in figure 19.7 should be followed. Performing programming operations according to this flowchart will enable data or programs to be programmed to the flash memory without subjecting the chip to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. 1. Programming must be done to an empty address. Do not reprogram an address to which programming has already been performed. 2. Programming should be carried out 128 bytes at a time. A 128-byte data transfer must be performed even if programming fewer than 128 bytes. In this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. 3. Prepare the following data storage areas in RAM: a 128-byte programming data area, a 128byte reprogramming data area, and a 128-byte additional-programming data area. Perform reprogramming data computation and additional programming data computation according to figure 19.7. 4. Consecutively transfer 128 bytes of data in byte units from the programming data area, reprogramming data area, or additional-programming data area to the flash memory. The program address and 128-byte data are latched in the flash memory. The lower 8 bits of the start address in the flash memory destination area must be H'00 or H'80. 5. The time during which the P bit is set to 1 is the programming time. Figure 19.7 shows the allowable programming times. 6. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overprogramming due to program runaway, etc. Set a value greater than (y + z2 + + ) s as the WDT overflow period. 7. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower 2 bits are B'00. Verify data can be read in words from the address to which a dummy write was performed. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 706 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) 8. The maximum number of repetitions of the program/program-verify sequence to the same bit (N) must not be exceeded. Write pulse application subroutine Write pulse application Enable WDT Set PSU bit in FLMCR1 Wait (y) s Set P bit in FLMCR1 n=1 Wait (z1) s or (z2) ms or (z3) s Clear P bit in FLMCR1 Wait () s Clear PSU bit in FLMCR1 Wait () s Disable WDT End sub *5 *6 m=0 Write 128-byte data in RAM reprogram *1 data area consecutively to flash memory Sub-routine-call Write pulse application (z1) s or (z2) s Set PV bit in FLMCR1 Wait () s H'FF dummy write to verify address Note 7: Write Pulse Width Write Time (z) s Number of Writes (n) z1 1 z1 2 z1 3 z1 4 z1 5 z1 6 z2 7 z2 8 z2 9 z2 10 z2 11 z2 12 z2 13 . . . . . . z2 998 z2 999 z2 1000 Note: Use a z3 s write pulse for additional programming. Increment address Wait () s Read verify data *2 nn+1 *6 See Note 7 for pulse width *6 Start of programming Start Set SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (x) s Store 128-byte program data in program data area and reprogram data area *6 *4 Perform programming in the erased state. Do not perform additional programming on previously programmed addresses. Write data = verify data? OK 6n? NG m=1 NG OK Additional program data computation Transfer additional program data to additional program data area Reprogram data computation Transfer reprogram data to reprogram data area 128-byte data verification completed? OK Clear PV bit in FLMCR1 Wait () s *6 NG *4 *3 *4 RAM Program data storage area (128 bytes) NG Reprogram data storage area (128 bytes) 6n? Additional program data storage area (128 bytes) OK Sequentially write 128-byte data in additional program data area in RAM to *1 flash memory Subroutine-call Write pulse application (z3) s *6 (additional programming) NG *6 n (N)? OK Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 *6 Wait () s Programming failure *6 NG m = 0? OK Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait () s End of programming Notes: 1. Data transfer is performed by byte transfer. The lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be H'00 or H'80. A 128-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. 2. Verify data is read in 16-bit (W) units. 3. The reprogram data is given by the operation of the following tables (comparison between stored data in the program data area and verify data). Programming is executed for the bits of reprogram data 0 in the next reprogram loop. Even bits for which programming has been completed will be subjected to additional programming if they fail the subsequent verify operation. 4. A 128-byte areas for storing program data, reprogram data, and additional program data must be provided in the RAM. The contents of the reprogram and additional program data are modified as programming proceeds. 5. A write pulse of (z1) or (z2) s should be applied according to the progress of the programming operation. See Note *7 for the pulse widths. When writing of additional-programming data is executed, a (z3) s write pulse should be applied. Reprogram data X' means reprogram data when the write pulse is applied. 6. For the values of x, y, z1, z2, z3, , , , , , , and N, see section 25.2.5, Flash Memory Characteristics. Program Data Operation Chart Original Data (D) 0 1 Verify Data (V) 0 1 0 1 Reprogram Data (X) 1 0 1 Comments Programming completed Programming incomplete; reprogram Still in erased state; no action Additional Program Data Operation Chart Reprogram Data (X') 0 1 Verify Data (V) 0 1 0 1 Additional Program Data (Y) Comments 0 Additional programming executed 1 Additional programming not executed Additional programming not executed Additional programming not executed Figure 19.7 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 707 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) 19.7.2 Erase/Erase-Verify When erasing flash memory, the erase/erase-verify flowchart shown in figure 19.8 should be followed. 1. Prewriting (setting erase block data to all 0s) is not necessary. 2. Erasing is performed in block units. Make only a single-bit specification in the erase block registers (EBR1 and EBR2). To erase multiple blocks, each block must be erased in turn. 3. The time during which the E bit is set to 1 is the flash memory erase time. 4. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overerasing due to program runaway, etc. Set a value greater than (y + z + + ) ms as the WDT overflow period. 5. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower two bits are B'00. Verify data can be read in longwords from the address to which a dummy write was performed. 6. If the read data is not erased, set erase mode again, and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence as before. The maximum number of repetitions of the erase/erase-verify sequence (N) must not be exceeded. 19.7.3 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory All interrupts, including NMI input, are disabled when flash memory is being programmed or erased, and while the boot program is executing in boot mode. There are three reasons for this: 1. Interrupt during programming or erasing might cause a violation of the programming or erasing algorithm, with the result that normal operation could not be assured. 2. If the interrupt exception handling is started when the vector address has not been programmed yet or the flash memory is being programmed or erased, the vector would not be read correctly, possibly resulting in CPU runaway. 3. If an interrupt occurred during boot program execution, it would not be possible to execute the normal boot mode sequence. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 708 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) Start *1 Set SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (x) s n=1 Set EBR1, EBR2 Enable WDT Set ESU bit in FLMCR1 Wait (y) s Set E bit in FLMCR1 Wait (z) s Clear E bit in FLMCR1 Wait () s Clear ESU bit in FLMCR1 Wait () s Disable WDT Set EV bit in FLMCR1 Wait () s Set block start address to verify address *2 *2 *2 *4 *2 Start of erase *2 Halt erase *2 nn+1 H'FF dummy write to verify address Wait () s Increment address Read verify data Verify data = all 1? OK NG Last address of block? OK Clear EV bit in FLMCR1 Wait () s *2 *2 *3 NG Clear EV bit in FLMCR1 Wait () s *2 *2 NG *5 End of erasing of all erase blocks? OK n N? OK Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 *2 NG Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait () s End of erasing Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Wait () s Erase failure *2 Prewriting (setting erase block data to all 0) is not necessary. The values of x, y, z, , , , , , , and N are shown in section 25.2.5, Flash Memory Characteristics. Verify data is read in 16-bit (W) units. Set only one bit in EBR1or EBR2. More than one bit cannot be set. Erasing is performed in block units. To erase a number of blocks, the individual blocks must be erased sequentially. Figure 19.8 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 709 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) 19.8 Program/Erase Protection There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection: hardware protection, software protection, and error protection. 19.8.1 Hardware Protection Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly disabled or aborted because of a transition to reset (including an overflow reset by the WDT) or standby mode. Flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1), flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2), erase block register 1 (EBR1), and erase block register 2 (EBR2) are initialized. In a reset via the RES pin, the reset state is not entered unless the RES pin is held low until oscillation stabilizes after powering on. In the case of a reset during operation, hold the RES pin low for the RES pulse width specified in the AC Characteristics section. 19.8.2 Software Protection Protection can be implemented against programming/erasing of all flash memory blocks by clearing the SWE bit in FLMCR1 to 0. When protection is in effect, setting the P or E bit in FLMCR1 does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. By setting the erase block register 1 (EBR1) and erase block register 2 (EBR2), erase protection can be set for individual blocks. When EBR1 and EBR2 are set to H'00, erase protection is set for all blocks. 19.8.3 Error Protection In error protection, an error is detected when the CPU's runaway occurs during flash memory programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase algorithm, and the program/erase operation is forcibly aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing. When the following errors are detected during programming/erasing of flash memory, the FLER bit in FLMCR2 is set to 1, and the error protection state is entered. * When flash memory is read during programming/erasing (including a vector read or instruction fetch) * When an exception handling (excluding a reset) is started during programming/erasing * When a SLEEP instruction is executed during programming/erasing * When the CPU releases the bus during programming/erasing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 710 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 settings are retained, but program mode or erase mode is forcibly aborted at the point at which the error occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be re-entered by re-setting the P or E bit. However, since PV and EV bit setting is enabled, and a transition can be made to verify mode. The error protection state can be canceled by a reset or in hardware standby mode. 19.9 Programmer Mode In programmer mode, a PROM programmer can perform programming/erasing via a socket adapter, just like for a discrete flash memory. Use a PROM programmer which supports the Renesas 512-kbyte flash memory on-chip MCU device type (FZTAT512V3A). A 12-MHz input clock is needed. 19.10 Power-Down States for Flash Memory In user mode, the flash memory will operate in either of the following states: * Normal operating mode The flash memory can be read. * Standby mode All flash memory circuits are halted. Table 19.7 shows the correspondence between the operating modes of this LSI and the flash memory. When the flash memory returns to normal operation from a standby state, a power supply circuit stabilization period is needed. When the flash memory returns to its normal operating state, bits STS3 to STS0 in SBYCR must be set to provide a wait time of at least 100 s, even when the external clock is being used. Table 19.7 Flash Memory Operating States Operating Mode Active mode Sleep mode Standby mode Flash Memory Operating State Normal operating state Normal operating state Standby state Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 711 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) 19.11 Usage Notes Precautions concerning the use of on-board programming mode, and programmer mode are summarized below. 1. Use the specified voltages and timing for programming and erasing. Applied voltages in excess of the rating can permanently damage the device. Use a PROM programmer that supports the Renesas microcomputer device type with 512-kbyte on-chip flash memory (FZTAT512V3A). Do not select the HN27C4096 setting for the PROM programmer, and only use the specified socket adapter. 2. Reset the flash memory before turning on/off the power. When applying or disconnecting Vcc power, fix the RES pin low and place the flash memory in the hardware protection state. The power-on and power-off timing requirements should also be satisfied in the event of a power failure and subsequent recovery. 3. Use the recommended algorithm when programming and erasing flash memory. The recommended algorithm enables programming and erasing to be carried out without subjecting the device to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. When setting the P or E bit in FLMCR1, the watchdog timer should be set beforehand as a precaution against program runaway, etc. 4. Do not set or clear the SWE bit during execution of a program in flash memory. Wait for at least 100 s after clearing the SWE bit before executing a program or reading data in flash memory. When the SWE bit is set, data in flash memory can be rewritten. When the SWE bit is set to 1, data in flash memory can be read only in program-verify/erase-verify mode. Access flash memory only for verify operations (verification during programming/erasing). Also, do not clear the SWE bit during programming, erasing, or verifying. 5. Do not use interrupts while flash memory is being programmed or erased. All interrupt requests, including NMI, should be disabled during programming/erasing the flash memory to give priority to program/erase operations. 6. Do not perform additional programming. Erase the memory before reprogramming. In on-board programming, perform only one programming operation on a 128-byte programming unit block. In programmer mode, too, perform only one programming operation on a 128-byte programming unit block. Programming should be carried out with the entire programming unit block erased. 7. Before programming, check that the chip is correctly mounted in the PROM programmer. Overcurrent damage to the device can result if the index marks on the PROM programmer socket, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 712 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) 8. Do not touch the socket adapter or chip during programming. Touching either of these can cause contact faults and write errors. 9. Apply the reset signal after the SWE, bit is cleared during its operation. The reset signal is applied at least 100 s after the SWE bit has been cleared. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 713 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) Programming/ erasing possible Wait time: 100 s Wait time: x tOSC1 VCC MD2 to MD0*1 tMDS*3 RES SWE set SWE bit (1) Boot Mode Programming/ erasing possible Wait time: 100 s SWE cleared Min 0 s Wait time: x tOSC1 VCC Min 0 s MD2 to MD0*1 tMDS*3 RES SWE set SWE bit (2) User Program Mode Period during which flash memory access is prohibited (x: Wait time after setting SWE bit)*2 Period during which flash memory can be programmed (Execution of program in flash memory prohibited, and data reads other than verify operations prohibited) Notes: 1. Except when switching modes, the level of the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) must be fixed until power-off by pulling the pins up or down. 2. See section 25.2.5, Flash Memory Characteristics. 3. Mode programming setup time tMDS (min) = 200 ns SWE cleared Figure 19.9 Power-On/Off Timing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 714 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) Wait time: x Wait time: x Programming/erasing Programming/erasing possible possible *4 tOSC1 VCC *4 Wait time: x Programming/erasing possible *4 Wait time: x Programming/erasing possible *4 2 tMDS* MD2 to MD0 tMDS tRESW RES SWE set SWE cleared SWE bit Mode change*1 Boot mode Mode change*1 User mode User User program mode mode User program mode User mode User program mode Period during which flash memory access is prohibited (x: Wait time after setting SWE bit)*3 Period during which flash memory can be programmed (Execution of program in flash memory prohibited, and data reads other than verify operations prohibited) Notes: 1. When entering boot mode or making a transition from boot mode to another mode, mode switching must be carried out by means of RES input. The state of ports with multiplexed address functions and bus control output pins (AS, RD, HWR, LWR) will change during this switchover interval (the interval during which the RES pin input is low), and therefore these pins should not be used as output signals during this time. 2. When making a transition from boot mode to another mode, a mode programming setup time tMDS (min) of 200 ns is necessary with respect to RES clearance timing. 3. See section 25.2.5, Flash Memory Characteristics. 4. Wait time: 100 s Figure 19.10 Mode Transition Timing (Example: Boot Mode User Mode User Program Mode) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 715 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 19 Flash Memory (0.35-m F-ZTAT Version) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 716 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) The flash memory has the following features. Figure 20.1 shows a block diagram of the flash memory. 20.1 * Size Features ROM Size 512 kbytes 384 kbytes 256 kbytes ROM Address H'000000 to H'07FFFF (Modes 3 to 5 and 7) H'000000 to H'05FFFF (Modes 3 to 5 and 7) H'000000 to H'03FFFF (Modes 3 to 5 and 7) Product Classification H8S/2368F H8S/2364F H8S/2362F H8S/2361F H8S/2360F HD64F2368 HD64F2364 HD64F2362 HD64F2361 HD64F2360 * Two flash-memory MATs according to LSI initiation mode The on-chip flash memory has two memory spaces in the same address space (hereafter referred to as memory MATs). The mode setting in the initiation determines which memory MAT is initiated first. The MAT can be switched by using the bank-switching method after initiation. The user memory MAT is initiated at a power-on reset in user mode: 512 kbytes (H8S/2368F), 384 kbytes (H8S/2364F), 256 kbytes (H8S/2362F, H8S/2361F, H8S/2360F) The user boot memory MAT is initiated at a power-on reset in user boot mode: 8 kbytes * Programming/erasing interface by the download of on-chip program This LSI has a dedicated programming/erasing program. After downloading this program to the on-chip RAM, programming/erasing can be performed by setting the argument parameter. The user branch is also supported. * Programming/erasing time The flash memory programming time is 1 ms (typ) in 128-byte simultaneous programming and 8 s per byte. The erasing time is 750 ms (typ) per 64-kbyte block. * Number of programming The number of flash memory programming can be up to 100 times. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 717 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) * Three on-board programming modes and one off-board programming mode Boot mode This mode is a program mode that uses an on-chip SCI interface. The user MAT and user boot MAT can be programmed. This mode can automatically adjust the bit rate between host and this LSI. User program mode The user MAT can be programmed by using the optional interface. User boot mode The user boot program of the optional interface can be made and the user MAT can be programmed. * One off-board programming mode PROM mode This mode uses the PROM programmer. The user MAT and user boot MAT can be programmed. * Protection modes There are two protection modes: software protection by the register setting and hardware protection by the FWE pin. The protection state for flash memory programming/erasing can be set. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 718 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Internal address bus Internal data bus (16 bits) FCCS FPCS Module bus FECS FKEY FMATS FTDAR FVACR Flash memory Control unit Memory MAT unit User MAT: 512 kbytes* User boot MAT: 8 kbytes Mode pin Operating mode Legend: FCCS: FPCS: FECS: FKEY: FMATS: FTDAR: FVACR: Notes: Flash code control status register Flash program code select register Flash erase code select register Flash key code register Flash MAT select register Flash transfer destination address register Flash vector address control register To read from or write to the registers, the FLSHE bit in the system control register (SYSCR) must be set to 1. * 384 kbytes, 256 kbytes Figure 20.1 Block Diagram of Flash Memory Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 719 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 20.1.1 Operating Mode When each mode pin and the FWE pin are set in the reset state and reset start is performed, the microcomputer enters each operating mode as shown in figure 20.2. * Flash memory cannot be read, programmed, or erased in ROM invalid mode. * Flash memory can be read in user mode, but cannot be programmed or erased. * Flash memory can be read, programmed, or erased on the board only in user program mode, user boot mode, and boot mode. * Flash memory can be read, programmed, or erased by means of the PROM programmer in PROM mode. RES = 0 ROM invalid mode ROM invalid mode setting RES = 0 Reset state PROM mode setting PROM mode R ES er =0 mo s de in ett g Bo RE ot mo de S =0 g ot g bo tin er set Us de mo RE S Us se ttin =0 FLSHE = 0 User mode User program mode FLSHE = 1 User boot mode Boot mode On-board programming mode Figure 20.2 Mode Transition of Flash Memory Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 720 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 20.1.2 Mode Comparison The comparison table of programming and erasing related items about boot mode, user program mode, user boot mode, and PROM mode is shown in table 20.1. Table 20.1 Comparison of Programming Modes Boot mode Programming/ erasing environment Programming/ erasing enable MAT All erasure Block division erasure Program data transfer Reset initiation MAT Transition to user mode On-board programming User MAT User boot MAT (Automatic) *1 From host via SCI Embedded program storage MAT Changing mode setting and reset From optional device via RAM User MAT From optional device via RAM User boot MAT*2 User program mode On-board programming User MAT User boot mode On-board programming User MAT PROM mode Off-board programming User MAT User boot MAT (Automatic) x Via programmer Changing FLSHE bit Changing mode setting and reset Notes: 1. All-erasure is performed. After that, the specified block can be erased. 2. Firstly, the reset vector is fetched from the embedded program storage MAT. After the flash memory related registers are checked, the reset vector is fetched from the user boot MAT. * The user boot MAT can be programmed or erased only in boot mode and PROM mode. * The user MAT and user boot MAT are erased in boot mode. Then, the user MAT and user boot MAT can be programmed by means of the command method. However, the contents of the MAT cannot be read until this state. Only user boot MAT is programmed and the user MAT is programmed in user boot mode or only user MAT is programmed because user boot mode is not used. * The boot operation of the optional interface can be performed by the mode pin setting different from user program mode in user boot mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 721 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 20.1.3 Flash MAT Configuration This LSI's flash memory is configured by the 256-kbyte/384-kbyte/512-kbyte user MAT and 8kbyte user boot MAT. The start address is allocated to the same address in the user MAT and user boot MAT. Therefore, when the program execution or data access is performed between two MATs, the MAT must be switched by using FMATS. The user MAT or user boot MAT can be read in all modes if it is in ROM valid mode. However, the user boot MAT can be programmed only in boot mode and PROM mode. Address H'000000 8 kbytes 256 kbytes (384 kbytes/512 kbytes) Address H'03FFFF (H'05FFFF/H'07FFFF) Figure 20.3 Flash Memory Configuration The size of the user MAT is different from that of the user boot MAT. An address which exceeds the size of the 8-kbyte user boot MAT should not be accessed. If the attempt is made, data is read as undefined value. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 722 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 20.1.4 Block Division The user MAT is divided into 64 kbytes (seven blocks), 32 kbytes (one block), and 4 kbytes (eight blocks) as shown in figure 20.4. The user MAT can be erased in this divided-block units and the erase-block number of EB0 to EB15 is specified when erasing. Address H'000000 EB7 32 kbytes 64 kbytes EB8 EB9 EB10 EB11 EB12 EB13 EB14 EB15 Address H'03FFFF 64 kbytes 384 kbytes 64 kbytes 64 kbytes Address H'05FFFF 64 kbytes 512 kbytes 64 kbytes 64 kbytes Address H'07FFFF Figure 20.4 Block Division of User MAT Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 723 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 20.1.5 Programming/Erasing Interface Programming/erasing is executed by downloading the on-chip program to the on-chip RAM and specifying the program address/data and erase block by using the interface register/parameter. The procedure program is made by the user in user program mode and user boot mode. An overview of the procedure is given as follows. For details, see section 20.4.2, User Program Mode. Start user procedure program for programming/erasing. Select on-chip program to be downloaded and specify the destination. Download on-chip program by setting FKEY and SCO bits. Initialization execution (downloaded program execution) Programming (in 128-byte units) or erasing (in one-block units) (downloaded program execution) No Programming/erasing completed? Yes End user procedure program Figure 20.5 Overview of User Procedure Program 1. Selection of on-chip program to be downloaded For programming/erasing execution, the FLSHE bit must be set to 1 to transition to user program mode. This LSI has programming/erasing programs which can be downloaded to the on-chip RAM. The on-chip program to be downloaded is selected by setting the corresponding bits in the programming/erasing interface register. The address of the programming destination is specified by the FTDAR. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 724 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 2. Download of on-chip program The on-chip program is automatically downloaded by setting the SCO bit in the flash key register (FKEY) and the flash control register (FCCS) of the programming/erasing interface register. The flash memory is replaced to the embedded program storage area when downloading. Since the flash memory cannot be read when programming/erasing, the procedure program, which is working from download to completion of programming/erasing, must be executed in the space other than the flash memory to be programmed/erased (for example, on-chip RAM). Since the result of download is returned to the programming/erasing interface parameter, whether the normal download is executed or not can be confirmed. 3. Initialization of programming/erasing The operating frequency is set before execution of programming/erasing. This setting is performed by using the programming/erasing interface parameter. 4. Programming/erasing execution The program data/programming destination address is specified in 128-byte units when programming. The block to be erased is specified in erase-block units when erasing. These specifications are set by using the programming/erasing interface parameter and the onchip program is initiated. The on-chip program is executed by using the JSR or BSR instruction and performing the subroutine call of the specified address in the on-chip RAM. The execution result is returned to the programming/erasing interface parameter. The area to be programmed must be erased in advance when programming flash memory. All interrupts are prohibited during programming and erasing. Interrupts must be masked within the user system. 5. When programming/erasing is executed consecutively When the processing is not ended by the 128-byte programming or one-block erasure, the program address/data and erase-block number must be updated and consecutive programming/erasing is required. Since the downloaded on-chip program is left in the on-chip RAM after the processing, download and initialization are not required when the same processing is executed consecutively. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 725 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 20.2 Input/Output Pins Table 20.2 shows the flash memory pin configuration. Table 20.2 Pin Configuration Pin Name Reset Mode 2 Mode 1 Mode 0 Port 52 Port 51 Port 50 Transmit data Receive data Abbreviation RES MD2 MD1 MD0 P52 P51 P50 TxD1 RxD1 Input/Output Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Input Function Reset Sets operating mode of this LSI Sets operating mode of this LSI Sets operating mode of this LSI Sets operating mode of programmer mode Sets operating mode of programmer mode Sets operating mode of programmer mode Serial transmit data output (used in boot mode) Serial receive data input (used in boot mode) Note: For the pin configuration in PROM mode, see section 20.7, Programmer Mode. 20.3 Register Descriptions The registers/parameters which control flash memory are shown as follows. * * * * * * * * * * * Flash code control status register (FCCS) Flash program code select register (FPCS) Flash erase code select register (FECS) Flash key code register (FKEY) Flash MAT select register (FMATS) Flash transfer destination address register (FTDAR) Download pass and fail result (DPFP) Flash pass and fail result (FPFR) Flash multipurpose address area (FMPAR) Flash multipurpose data destination area (FMPDR) Flash erase Block select (FEBS) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 726 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) * Flash program and erase frequency control (FPEFEQ) * Flash vector address control register (FVACR) There are several operating modes for accessing flash memory, for example, read mode/program mode. There are two memory MATs: user MAT and user boot MAT. The dedicated registers/parameters are allocated for each operating mode and MAT selection. The correspondence of operating modes and registers/parameters for use is shown in table 20.3. Table 20.3 Register/Parameter and Target Mode InitialiDownload zation Programming/erasing interface register FCCS FPCS FECS FKEY FMATS FTDAR Programming/erasing interface parameter DPFR FPFR FPEFEQ FUBRA FMPAR FMPDR FEBS *1 *1 Programming Erasure Read *2 Notes: 1. The setting is required when programming or erasing user MAT in user boot mode. 2. The setting may be required according to the combination of initiation mode and read target MAT. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 727 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 20.3.1 Programming/Erasing Interface Register The programming/erasing interface registers are as described below. They are all 8-bit registers that can be accessed in byte. Except for the FLER bit in FCCS, these registers are initialized at a power-on reset, in hardware standby mode, or in software standby mode. The FLER bit is not initialized in software standby mode. * Flash Code Control and Status Register (FCCS) FCCS is configured by bits which request the monitor of the FWE pin state and error occurrence during programming or erasing flash memory and the download of on-chip program. Bit 7 Bit Name Initial Value 1 R/W R Description Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 1. 6, 5 All 0 R Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 728 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Initial Value 0 Bit 4 Bit Name FLER R/W R Description Flash Memory Error Indicates an error occurs during programming and erasing flash memory. When FLER is set to 1, flash memory enters the error protection state. This bit is initialized at transition to a power-on reset or hardware standby mode. When FLER is set to 1, high voltage is applied to the internal flash memory. To reduce the damage to flash memory, the reset must be released after the reset period of 100 s which is longer than normal. 0: Flash memory operates normally Programming/erasing protection for flash memory (error protection) is invalid. [Clearing condition] At a power-on reset or in hardware standby mode 1: Indicates an error occurs during programming/erasing flash memory. Programming/erasing protection for flash memory (error protection) is valid. [Setting conditions] * * * * When an interrupt, such as NMI, occurs during programming/erasing flash memory. When the flash memory is read during programming/erasing flash memory When the SLEEP instruction is executed during programming/erasing flash memory When a bus master other than the CPU, such as the DMAC, DTC, or BREQ, gets bus mastership during programming/erasing flash memory. 3 to 1 All 0 R Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 729 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Initial Value 0 Bit 0 Bit Name SCO R/W (R)/W Description Source Program Copy Operation Requests the on-chip programming/erasing program to be downloaded to the on-chip RAM. When this bit is set to 1, the on-chip program which is selected by FPCS/FECS is automatically downloaded in the on-chip RAM specified by FTDAR. In order to set this bit to 1, H'A5 must be written to FKEY, and this operation must be executed in the on-chip RAM. Four NOP instructions must be executed immediately after setting this bit to 1. Since this bit is cleared to 0 when download is completed, this bit cannot be read as 1. All interrupts must be disabled. This should be made in the user system. 0: Download of the on-chip programming/erasing program to the on-chip RAM is not executed [Clear condition] When download is completed 1: Request that the on-chip programming/erasing program is downloaded to the on-chip RAM is occurred [Set conditions] When all of the following conditions are satisfied and 1 is written to this bit * H'A5 is written to FKEY * During execution in the on-chip RAM Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 730 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) * Flash Program Code Select Register (FPCS) FPCS selects the on-chip programming program to be downloaded. Bit 7 to 1 Bit Name Initial Value All 0 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 0 PPVS 0 R/W Program Pulse Verify Selects the programming program. 0: On-chip programming program is not selected [Clear condition] When transfer is completed 1: On-chip programming program is selected * Flash Erase Code Select Register (FECS) FECS selects download of the on-chip erasing program. Bit 7 to 1 Bit Name Initial Value All 0 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 0 EPVB 0 R/W Erase Pulse Verify Block Selects the erasing program. 0: On-chip erasing program is not selected [Clear condition] When transfer is completed 1: On-chip erasing program is selected Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 731 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) * Flash Key Code Register (FKEY) FKEY is a register for software protection that enables download of on-chip program and programming/erasing of flash memory. Before setting the SCO bit to 1 in order to download on-chip program or executing the downloaded programming/erasing program, these processing cannot be executed if the key code is not written. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 K0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Key Code Only when H'A5 is written, writing to the SCO bit is valid. When the value other than H'A5 is written to FKEY, 1 cannot be written to the SCO bit. Therefore downloading to the on-chip RAM cannot be executed. Only when H'5A is written, programming/erasing can be executed. Even if the on-chip programming/erasing program is executed, the flash memory cannot be programmed or erased when the value other than H'5A is written to FKEY. H'A5: Writing to the SCO bit is enabled (The SCO bit cannot be set by the value other than H'A5.) H'5A: Programming/erasing is enabled (The value other than H'A5 is in software protection state.) H'00: Initial value Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 732 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) * Flash MAT Select Register (FMATS) FMATS specifies whether user MAT or user boot MAT is selected. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name MS7 MS6 MS5 MS4 MS3 MS2 MS1 MS0 Initial Value 0/1* 0 0/1* 0 0/1* 0 0/1* 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description MAT Select These bits are in user-MAT selection state when the value other than H'AA is written and in user-boot-MAT selection state when H'AA is written. The MAT is switched by writing the value in FMATS. When the MAT is switched, follow section 20.6, Switching between User MAT and User Boot MAT. (The user boot MAT cannot be programmed in user programming mode if user boot MAT is selected by FMATS. The user boot MAT must be programmed in boot mode or in PROM mode.) H'AA: The user boot MAT is selected (in user-MAT selection state when the value of these bits are other than H'AA) Initial value when these bits are initiated in user boot mode. H'00: Initial value when these bits are initiated in a mode except for user boot mode (in user-MAT selection state) [Programmable condition] These bits are in the execution state in the on-chip RAM. Note: * Set to 1 when in user boot mode, otherwise set to 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 733 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) * Flash Transfer Destination Address Register (FTDAR) FTDAR is a register that specify the address to download an on-chip program. This register must be specified before setting the SCO bit in FCCS to 1. Bit 7 Bit Name TDER Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Transfer Destination Address Setting Error This bit is set to 1 when the address specified by bits TDA6 to TDA0, which is the start address to download an on-chip program, is over the range. Whether or not the range specified by bits TDA6 to TDA0 is within the range of H'00 to H'03 is determined when an on-chip program is downloaded by setting the SCO bit in FCCS. Make sure that this bit is cleared to 0 before setting the SCO bit to 1 and the value specified by TDA6 to TDA0 is within the range of H'00 to H'03. 0: The value specified by bits TDA6 to TDA0 is within the range. 1: The value specified by is TDA6 to TDA0 is over the range (H'04 to H'FF) and the download is stopped. 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TDA6 TDA5 TDA4 TDA3 TDA2 TDA1 TDA0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Transfer Destination Address Specifies the start address to download an on-chip program. H'00 to H'03 can be specified meaning that the start address in the on-chip RAM space can be specified in units of 4 kbytes. H'00: H'FF9000 is specified as a start address to download an on-chip program. H'01: H'FFA000 is specified as a start address to download an on-chip program. H'02: H'FFB000 is specified as a start address to download an on-chip program. H'03: H'FF8000 is specified as a start address to download an on-chip program. H'04 to H'07: Setting prohibited. Specifying this value sets the TDRE bit to 1 and stops the download. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 734 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 20.3.2 Programming/Erasing Interface Parameter The programming/erasing interface parameter specifies the operating frequency, storage place for program data, programming destination address, and erase block and exchanges the processing result for the downloaded on-chip program. This parameter uses the general registers of the CPU (ER0 and ER1) or the on-chip RAM area. The initial value is undefined at a power-on reset or in hardware standby mode. When download, initialization, or on-chip program is executed, registers of the CPU except for R0L are stored. The return value of the processing result is written in ER0, ER1. Since the stack area is used for storing the registers except for ER0, ER1, the stack area must be saved at the processing start. (A maximum size of a stack area to be used is 128 bytes.) The programming/erasing interface parameter is used in the following four items. 1. 2. 3. 4. Download control Initialization before programming or erasing Programming Erasing These items use different parameters. The correspondence table is shown in table 20.4. The meaning of the bits in FPFR varies in each processing program: initialization, programming, or erasure. For details, see descriptions of FPFR for each process. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 735 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Table 20.4 Parameters and Target Modes Name of Parameter Download pass and fail result Abbreviation DPFR Down Load Initialization Programming Erasure R/W R/W R/W Initial Value Undefined Undefined Undefined Allocation On-chip RAM* R0L of CPU ER0 of CPU Flash pass and fail FPFR result Flash programming/ erasing frequency control FPEFEQ R/W Flash user branch FUBRA address set Flash multipurpose FMPAR address area Flash multipurpose FMPDR data destination area Flash erase block select FEBS R/W R/W R/W Undefined Undefined Undefined ER1 of CPU ER1 of CPU ER0 of CPU R0L of CPU R/W Undefined Note: * A single byte of the start address to download an on-chip program, which is specified by FTDAR. (1) Download Control The on-chip program is automatically downloaded by setting the SCO bit to 1. The on-chip RAM area to be downloaded is the 128-kbyte area starting from the address specified by FTDAR. Download control is set in the program/erase interface register, and the return value is passed using the DPFR parameter. (a) Download pass/fail result parameter (DPFR: single byte of start address specified by FTDAR) This parameter indicates the return value of the download result. The value of this parameter can be used to determine if downloading is executed or not. Since the confirmation whether the SCO bit is set to 1 is difficult, the certain determination must be performed by writing the single byte of the start address specified by FTDAR to the value other than the return value of download (for example, H'FF) before the download start (before setting the SCO bit to 1). Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 736 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Bit Name SS Initial Value Bit 7 to 3 2 R/W R/W Description Unused Return 0 Source Select Error Detect Only one type for the on-chip program which can be downloaded can be specified. When more than two types of the program are selected, the program is not selected, or the program is selected without mapping, error is occurred. 0: Download program can be selected normally 1: Download error is occurred (multi-selection or program which is not mapped is selected) Flash Key Register Error Detect (FK) Returns the check result whether the value of FKEY is set to H'A5. 0: KEY setting is normal (FKEY = H'A5) 1: Setting value of FKEY becomes error (FKEY = value other than H'A5) 1 FK R/W 0 SF R/W Success/Fail Returns the result whether download is ended normally or not. The determination result whether program that is downloaded to the on-chip RAM is read back and then transferred to the on-chip RAM is returned. 0: Downloading on-chip program is ended normally (no error) 1: Downloading on-chip program is ended abnormally (error occurs) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 737 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (2) Programming/Erasing Initialization The on-chip programming/erasing program to be downloaded includes the initialization program. The specified period pulse must be applied when programming or erasing. The specified pulse width is made by the method in which wait loop is configured by the CPU instruction. The operating frequency of the CPU must be set. The initial program is set as a parameter of the programming/erasing program which has downloaded these settings. (a) Flash programming/erasing frequency parameter (FPEFEQ: general register ER0 of CPU) This parameter sets the operating frequency of the CPU and enables the user branch function. Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W R/W Description Set to H'AAFF if the user branch function is enabled by the flash user branch enable bit. Otherwise, set to H'0000. Frequency Set Set the operating frequency of the CPU. The setting value must be calculated as the following methods. 1. The operating frequency which is shown in MHz units must be rounded in a number to three decimal places and be shown in a number of two decimal places. 2. The value multiplied by 100 is converted to the binary digit and is written to the FPEFEQ parameter (general register ER0). For example, when the operating frequency of the CPU is 34.000 MHz, the value is as follows. 1. The number to three decimal places of 34.000 is rounded and the value is thus 34.00. 2. The formula that 34.00 x 100 = 3400 is converted to the binary digit and B'0000,1101,0100,1000 (H'0D48) is set to R0. 31 to 16 FUBE15 to 0 15 to 0 F15 to F0 R/W Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 738 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (b) Flash user branch address setting parameter (FUBRA: general register ER1 of CPU) This parameter sets the user branch destination address. A specified user program can be used to perform programming or erasing of processing units of predetermined size. When using the user branch function, set the flash user branch enable bits in FPEFEQ to H'AAFF in addition to the settings in this register. Bits 31 to 0: User branch destination address (UA31 to UA0) Bit 31 to 0 Bit Name UA31 to UA0 Initial Value -- R/W R/W Description User branch destination address When no user branching is required, set address 0 (H'00000000). A user branch destination must be within the RAM space other than the area occupied by the internal program transferred, or the external bus space. Proceed with caution to avoid branching to an area without execution code, which would cause a runaway, and avoid corrupting the internal program area or a stack area. In the event of a program runaway, flash memory values are not guaranteed. During user-branched processing, do not download, initialize, or invoke any programming/erase program routines of the internal program. Programming/erasing subsequent to the user branch routine cannot be otherwise guaranteed. In addition, do not modify the prepared data to be written. Likewise, do not rewrite the programming/erase interface register during user branched processing. After completing the user-branch processing, return to the programming/erase program by the RTS instructions. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 739 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (c) Flash pass/fail parameter (FPFR: general register R0L of CPU) This parameter indicates the return value of the initialization result. Bit 7 to 2 1 Bit Name FQ Initial Value R/W R/W Description Unused Return 0 Frequency Error Detect Returns the check result whether the specified operating frequency of the CPU is in the range of the supported operating frequency. 0: Setting of operating frequency is normal 1: Setting of operating frequency is abnormal 0 SF R/W Success/Fail Indicates whether initialization is completed normally. 0: Initialization is ended normally (no error) 1: Initialization is ended abnormally (error occurs) (3) Programming Execution When flash memory is programmed, the programming destination address on the user MAT must be passed to the programming program in which the program data is downloaded. 1. The start address of the programming destination on the user MAT must be stored in a general register ER1. This parameter is called as FMPAR (flash multipurpose address area parameter). Since the program data is always in units of 128 bytes, the lower eight bits (A7 to A0) must be H'00 or H'80 as the boundary of the programming start address on the user MAT. 2. The program data for the user MAT must be prepared in the consecutive area. The program data must be in the consecutive space which can be accessed by using the MOV.B instruction of the CPU and in other than the flash memory space. When data to be programmed does not satisfy 128 bytes, the 128-byte program data must be prepared by filling with the dummy code H'FF. The start address of the area in which the prepared program data is stored must be stored in a general register ER0. This parameter is called as FMPDR (flash multipurpose data destination area parameter). For details on the program processing procedure, see section 20.4.2, User Program Mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 740 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (a) Flash multipurpose address area parameter (FMPAR: general register ER1 of CPU) This parameter stores the start address of the programming destination on the user MAT. When the address in the area other than flash memory space is set, an error occurs. The start address of the programming destination must be at the 128-byte boundary. If this boundary condition is not satisfied, an error occurs. The error occurrence is indicated by the WA bit (bit 1) in FPFR. Bit 31 to 0 Bit Name Initial Value R/W R/W Description Store the start address of the programming destination on the user MAT. The consecutive 128-byte programming is executed starting from the specified start address of the user MAT. Therefore, the specified programming start address becomes a 128-byte boundary and MOA6 to MOA0 are always 0. MOA31 to MOA0 (b) Flash multipurpose data destination parameter (FMPDR: general register ER0 of CPU): This parameter stores the start address in the area which stores the data to be programmed in the user MAT. When the storage destination of the program data is in flash memory, an error occurs. The error occurrence is indicated by the WD bit in FPFR. Bit 31 to 0 Bit Name Initial Value R/W R/W Description Store the start address of the area which stores the program data for the user MAT. The consecutive 128byte data is programmed to the user MAT starting from the specified start address. MOD31 to MOD0 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 741 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (c) Flash pass/fail parameter (FPFR: general register R0L of CPU) This parameter indicates the return value of the program processing result. Bit 7 6 Bit Name MD Initial Value R/W R/W Description Unused Return 0. Programming Mode Related Setting Error Detect Returns the check result that the error protection state is not entered. When the error protection state is entered, 1 is written to this bit. The state can be confirmed with the FLER bit in FCCS. For conditions to enter the error protection state, see section 20.5.3, Error Protection. 0: FLER setting is normal (FLER = 0) 1: Programming cannot be performed (FLER = 1) 5 EE R/W Programming Execution Error Detect 1 is returned to this bit when the specified data could not be written because the user MAT was not erased. If this bit is set to 1, there is a high possibility that the user MAT is partially rewritten. In this case, after removing the error factor, erase the user MAT. If FMATS is set to H'AA and the user boot MAT is selected, an error occurs when programming is performed. In this case, both the user MAT and user boot MAT are not rewritten. Programming of the user boot MAT should be performed in boot mode or PROM mode. 0: Programming has ended normally 1: Programming has ended abnormally (programming result is not guaranteed) 4 FK R/W Flash Key Register Error Detect Returns the check result of the value of FKEY before the start of the programming processing. 0: FKEY setting is normal (FKEY = H'5A) 1: FKEY setting is error (FKEY = value other than H'5A) 3 Unused Returns 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 742 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Bit Name WD Initial Value Bit 2 R/W R/W Description Write Data Address Detect When the address in the flash memory area is specified as the start address of the storage destination of the program data, an error occurs. 0: Setting of write data address is normal 1: Setting of write data address is abnormal 1 WA R/W Write Address Error Detect When the following items are specified as the start address of the programming destination, an error occurs. * * When the programming destination address in the area other than flash memory is specified When the specified address is not a 128-byte boundary (the value of A6 to A0 is not H'0). 0: Setting of programming destination address is normal 1: Setting of programming destination address is abnormal 0 SF R/W Success/Fail Indicates whether the program processing is ended normally or not. 0: Programming is ended normally (no error) 1: Programming is ended abnormally (error occurs) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 743 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (4) Erasure Execution When flash memory is erased, the erase-block number on the user MAT must be passed to the erasing program which is downloaded. This is set to the FEBS parameter (general register ER0). One block is specified from the block number 0 to 15. For details on the erasing processing procedure, see section 20.4.2, User Program Mode. (a) Flash erase block select parameter (FEBS: general register ER0 of CPU) This parameter specifies the erase-block number. Bit 31 to 8 7 to 0 Bit Name Initial Value R/W R/W Description Unused These bits should be cleared to H'0. EBN7 to 0 Erase Block Number Set an erase-block number within the range from 0 to 15. H'00 corresponds to the EB0 block and H'0F corresponds to the EB15 block. An error occurs if a number outside the range from H'00 to H'0F* is set Note: * For the H8S/2362F, H8S/2361F, and H8S/2360F choose a setting value within the range from H'00 to H'0B. For the H8S/2364F, choose a setting value within the range from H'00 to H'0D. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 744 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (b) Flash pass/fail parameter (FPFR: general register R0L of CPU) This parameter returns value of the erasing processing result. Bit 7 6 Bit Name MD Initial Value R/W Description Unused Return 0. Programming Mode Related Setting Error Detect Returns the check result of whether the error protection state is entered. The error protection state is entered, 1 is written to this bit. The error protection state can be confirmed with the FLER bit in FCCS. For conditions to enter the error protection state, see section 20.5.3, Error Protection. 0: FLER setting is normal (FLER = 0) 1: FLER = 1 and programming cannot be performed 5 EE R/W Erasure Execution Error Detect 1 is returned to this bit when the user MAT could not be erased or when flash-memory related register settings are partially changed. If this bit is set to 1, there is a high possibility that the user MAT is partially erased. In this case, after removing the error factor, erase the user MAT. If FMATS is set to H'AA and the user boot MAT is selected, an error occurs when erasure is performed. In this case, both the user MAT and user boot MAT are not erased. Erasing of the user boot MAT should be performed in boot mode or PROM mode. 0: Erasure has ended normally 1: Erasure has ended abnormally (erasure result is not guaranteed) 4 FK R/W Flash Key Register Error Detect Returns the check result of FKEY value before start of the erasing processing. 0: FKEY setting is normal (FKEY = H'5A) 1: FKEY setting is error (FKEY = value other than H'5A) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 745 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Bit Name EB Initial Value Bit 3 R/W R/W Description Erase Block Select Error Detect Returns the check result whether the specified eraseblock number is in the block range of the user MAT. 0: Setting of erase-block number is normal 1: Setting of erase-block number is abnormal 2, 1 0 SF R/W Unused Return 0. Success/Fail Indicates whether the erasing processing is ended normally or not. 0: Erasure is ended normally (no error) 1: Erasure is ended abnormally (error occurs) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 746 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 20.3.3 Flash Vector Address Control Register (FVACR) FVACR modifies the space from which the vector table data of the NMI interrupts is read. Normally the vector table data is read from the address spaces from H'00001C to H'00001F. However, the vector table can be read from the on-chip RAM by the FVACR setting. FVACR is initialized to H'00 at a power-on reset or in hardware standby mode. All interrupts including NMI must be prohibited in the programming/erasing processing or during downloading on-chip program. When the NMI interrupt is necessary, FVACR must be set and the interrupt exception processing routine must be set in the on-chip RAM space or in the external space. Bit 7 Bit Name Initial Value R/W R/W Description Vector Switch Function Valid Selects whether the function for modifying the space from which the vector table data is read is valid or invalid. When FVCHGE = 1, the vector table data can be read from the on-chip RAM space. 0: Function for modifying the space from which the vector table data is read is invalid (Initial value) 1: Function for modifying the space from which the vector table data is read is valid Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. Interrupt Source Select The vector table of the NMI interrupt processing can be in the on-chip RAM space by setting this bit. 0000: Vector table data is in area 0 (H'00001C to H'00001F) 0001: Setting prohibited 001x: Setting prohibited 01xx: Setting prohibited 1000: Vector table data is in the on-chip RAM space (H'FFA01C to H'FFA01F) 1001: Setting prohibited 101x: Setting prohibited 11xx: Setting prohibited FVCHGE 0 6 to 4 All 0 R 3 2 1 0 FVSEL3 FVSEL2 FVSEL1 FVSEL0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Legend: x: Don't care Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 747 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 20.4 On-Board Programming Mode When the pin is set in on-board programming mode and the reset start is executed, the on-board programming state that can program/erase the on-chip flash memory is entered. On-board programming mode has three operating modes: user programming mode, user boot mode, and boot mode. For details of the pin setting for entering each mode, see table 20.5. User programming mode can be used by setting the control bit (FLSHE) by software. For details of the state transition of each mode for flash memory, see figure 20.2. Table 20.5 Setting On-Board Programming Mode Mode Setting Boot mode User boot mode Advanced mode Advanced mode MD2 0 1 MD1 1 0 MD0 1 1 20.4.1 Boot Mode Boot mode executes programming/erasing user MAT and user boot MAT by means of the control command and program data transmitted from the host using the on-chip SCI. The tool for transmitting the control command and program data must be prepared in the host. The SCI communication mode is set to asynchronous mode. When reset start is executed after this LSI's pin is set in boot mode, the boot program in the microcomputer is initiated. After the SCI bit rate is automatically adjusted, the communication with the host is executed by means of the control command method. The system configuration diagram in boot mode is shown in figure 20.6. For details on the pin setting in boot mode, see table 20.5. The NMI and other interrupts are ignored in boot mode. However, the NMI and other interrupts should be disabled in the user system. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 748 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) This LSI Control command, analysis execution software (on-chip) Flash memory Host Boot Control command, program data programming tool and program data Reply response RxD1 On-chip SCI1 TxD1 On-chip RAM Figure 20.6 System Configuration in Boot Mode (1) SCI Interface Setting by Host When boot mode is initiated, this LSI measures the low period of asynchronous SCI-communication data (H'00), which is transmitted consecutively by the host. The SCI transmit/receive format is set to 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, and no parity. This LSI calculates the bit rate of transmission by the host by means of the measured low period and transmits the bit adjustment end sign (1 byte of H'00) to the host. The host must confirm that this bit adjustment end sign (H'00) has been received normally and transmits 1 byte of H'55 to this LSI. When reception is not executed normally, boot mode is initiated again (reset) and the operation described above must be executed. The bit rate between the host and this LSI is not matched by the bit rate of transmission by the host and system clock frequency of this LSI. To operate the SCI normally, the transfer bit rate of the host must be set to 9,600 bps or 19,200 bps. The system clock frequency, which can automatically adjust the transfer bit rate of the host and the bit rate of this LSI, is shown in table 20.6. Boot mode must be initiated in the range of this system clock. Start bit Stop bit D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Measure low period (9 bits) (data is H'00) High period of at least 1 bit Figure 20.7 Automatic-Bit-Rate Adjustment Operation of SCI Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 749 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Table 20.6 System Clock Frequency for Automatic-Bit-Rate Adjustment by This LSI Bit Rate of Host 9,600 bps 19,200 bps System Clock Frequency 8 to 25 MHz 8 to 25 MHz (2) State Transition Diagram The overview of the state transition diagram after boot mode is initiated is shown in figure 20.8. 1. Bit rate adjustment After boot mode is initiated, the bit rate of the SCI interface is adjusted with that of the host. 2. Waiting for inquiry set command For inquiries about user-MAT size and configuration, MAT start address, and support state, the required information is transmitted to the host. 3. Automatic erasure of all user MAT and user boot MAT After inquiries have finished, all user MAT and user boot MAT are automatically erased. 4. Waiting for programming/erasing command When the program preparation notice is received, the state for waiting program data is entered. The programming start address and program data must be transmitted following the programming command. When programming is finished, the programming start address must be set to H'FFFFFFFF and transmitted. Then the state for waiting program data is returned to the state of programming/erasing command wait. Before reprogramming erased blocks containing a programming finished area for which the programming finished command has been issued, make sure to erase the corresponding erased blocks. : : EB9 EB10 Programming finished area EB11 EB12 Before reprogramming erased blocks containing a programming finished area (EB10 and EB11), the corresponding erased blocks (EB10 and EB11) should be erased. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 750 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) When the erasure preparation notice is received, the state for waiting erase-block data is entered. The erase-block number must be transmitted following the erasing command. When the erasure is finished, the erase-block number must be set to H'FF and transmitted. Then the state for waiting erase-block data is returned to the state for waiting programming/erasing command. The erasure must be used when the specified block is programmed without a reset start after programming is executed in boot mode. When programming can be executed by only one operation, all blocks are erased before the state for waiting programming/erasing/other command is entered. The erasing operation is not required. There are many commands other than programming/erasing. Examples are sum check, blank check (erasure check), and memory read of the user MAT/user boot MAT and acquisition of current status information. Note that memory read of the user MAT/user boot MAT can only read the programmed data after all user MAT/user boot MAT has automatically been erased. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 751 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (Bit rate adjustment) H'00.......H'00 reception Boot mode initiation (reset by boot mode) H'00 transmission (adjustment completed) Bit rate adjustment H'55 rece ption 1 2 Wait for inquiry setting command Inquiry command reception Inquiry command response Processing of inquiry setting command 3 All user MAT and user boot MAT erasure Read/check command reception Command response 4 Wait for programming/erasing command Processing of read/check command (Erasure selection command reception) (Program end notice) (Erasure end selection command reception) (Program command reception) (Program data transmission) (Erase-block specification) Wait for erase-block data Wait for program data Figure 20.8 Overview of Boot Mode State Transition Diagram Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 752 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 20.4.2 User Program Mode The user MAT can be programmed/erased in user program mode. (The user boot MAT cannot be programmed/erased.) Programming/erasing is executed by downloading the program in the microcomputer. The overview flow is shown in figure 20.9. High voltage is applied to internal flash memory during the programming/erasing processing. Therefore, transition to reset or hardware standby must not be executed. Doing so may cause damage or destroy flash memory. If reset is executed accidentally, reset must be released after the reset input period, which is longer than normal 100 s. Programming/erasing start When programming, program data is prepared Programming/erasing procedure program is transferred to the on-chip RAM and executed 1. Programming/erasing is executed only in the on-chip RAM. However, if program data is in a consecutive area and can be accessed by the MOV.B instruction of the CPU like SRAM or ROM, the program data can be in an external space. 2. After programming/erasing is finished, it must be protected. Programming/erasing end Figure 20.9 Programming/Erasing Overview Flow Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 753 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (1) On-chip RAM Address Map when Programming/Erasing Is Executed Parts of the procedure program that are made by the user, like download request, programming/erasing procedure, and determination of the result, must be executed in the on-chip RAM. The on-chip program that is to be downloaded is all in the on-chip RAM. Note that area in the on-chip RAM must be controlled so that these parts do not overlap. Figure 20.10 shows the program area to be downloaded. Area that can be used by user DPFR (Return value: 1 byte) System use area (15 bytes) Programming/erasing program entry Programming finished Initialization program entry Initialization + programming program + Programming finished or Initialization + erasing program Area that can be used by user Address RAMTOP (H'FF4000/H'FF6000/H'FF8000) FTDAR setting Area to be downloaded (Size : 4 kbytes) Unusable area in programming/erasing processing period FTDAR setting + 16 FTDAR setting + 32 FTDAR setting + 4 RAMEND (H'FFC000) Figure 20.10 RAM Map when Programming/Erasing Is Executed Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 754 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (2) Programming Procedure in User Program Mode The procedures for download, initialization, and programming are shown in figure 20.11. Start programming procedure program Select on-chip program to be downloaded and specify download destination by FTDAR Set FKEY to H'A5 a 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. No Disable interrupts and bus master operation other than CPU Set FKEY to H'5A 9. 10. Download Set SCO to 1 and execute download Clear FKEY to 0 Programming Set parameters to ER1 and ER0 (FMPAR and FMPDR) Programming JSR FTDAR setting + 16 11. 12. 13. No Clear FKEY and programming error processing DPFR = 0? Yes FPFR = 0? Yes No Required data programming is completed? Download error processing Set the FPEFEQ, FUBRA parameter 6. 7. 8. Initialization Initialization JSR FTDAR setting + 32 14. 15. 16. No Clear FKEY and programming error processing Yes Programming finished processing JSR FTDAR setting + 16 FPFR = 0? Yes No Initialization error processing a FPFR = 0? Yes Clear FKEY to 0 End programming procedure program 17. Figure 20.11 Programming Procedure The procedure program must be executed in an area other than the flash memory to be programmed. Especially the part where the SCO bit in FCCS is set to 1 for downloading must be executed in the on-chip RAM. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 755 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) The area that can be executed in the steps of the user procedure program (on-chip RAM, user MAT, and external space) is shown in section 20.4.4, Procedure Program and Storable Area for Programming Data. The following description assumes the area to be programmed on the user MAT is erased and program data is prepared in the consecutive area. When erasing is not executed, erasing is executed before writing. 128-byte programming is performed in one program processing. When more than 128-byte programming is performed, programming destination address/program data parameter is updated in 128-byte units and programming is repeated. When less than 128-byte programming is performed, data must total 128 bytes by adding the invalid data. If the dummy data to be added is H'FF, the program processing period can be shortened. 1. Select the on-chip program to be downloaded and specify a download destination When the PPVS bit of FPCS is set to 1, the programming program is selected. Several programming/erasing programs cannot be selected at one time. If several programs are set, download is not performed and a download error is returned to the SS bit in DPFR. The start address of a download destination is specified by FTDAR. 2. Program H'A5 in FKEY If H'A5 is not written to FKEY for protection, 1 cannot be written to the SCO bit for download request. 3. 1 is written to the SCO bit of FCCS and then download is executed. To write 1 to the SCO bit, the following conditions must be satisfied. H'A5 is written to FKEY. The SCO bit writing is executed in the on-chip RAM. When the SCO bit is set to 1, download is started automatically. When the SCO bit is returned to the user procedure program, the SCO is cleared to 0. Therefore, the SCO bit cannot be confirmed to be 1 in the user procedure program. The download result can be confirmed only by the return value of DPFR. Before the SCO bit is set to 1, incorrect determination must be prevented by setting the one byte of the start address (to be used as DPFR) specified by FTDAR to a value other than the return value (H'FF). When download is executed, particular interrupt processing, which is accompanied by the bank switch as described below, is performed as an internal microcomputer processing. Four NOP instructions are executed immediately after the instructions that set the SCO bit to 1. The user-MAT space is switched to the on-chip program storage area. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 756 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) After the selection condition of the download program and the FTDAR setting are checked, the transfer processing to the on-chip RAM specified by FTDAR is executed. The SCO bits in FPCS, FECS, and FCCS are cleared to 0. The return value is set to the DPFR parameter. After the on-chip program storage area is returned to the user-MAT space, the user procedure program is returned. The notes on download are as follows. In the download processing, the values of CPU general registers other than ER0 and ER1 are retained. In the download processing, any interrupts are not accepted. However, interrupt requests other than the NMI are held. Therefore, when the user procedure program is returned, the NMI interrupts occur. NMI requests are discarded if the FVACR value is H'00. However, if H'88 has been written to FVACR, they are held and the interrupts are generated when processing returns to the user procedure program. The sources of the interrupt requests from the on-chip module and at the falling edge of the IRQ are held during downloading. The refresh cycles for the DRAM can be inserted. When the level-detection interrupt requests are to be held, interrupts must be input until the download is ended. When hardware standby mode is entered during download processing, the normal download cannot be guaranteed in the on-chip RAM. Therefore, download must be executed again. Since a stack area of a maximum 128-byte is used, the area must be allocated before setting the SCO bit to 1. If a flash memory access by the DMAC, DTC, or BREQ signal is requested during downloading, the operation cannot be guaranteed. Therefore, an access request by the DMAC, DTC, or BREQ signal must not be generated. 4. FKEY is cleared to H'00 for protection. 5. The value of the DPFR parameter must be checked and the download result must be confirmed. Check the value of the DPFR parameter (one byte of start address of the download destination specified by FTDAR). If the value is H'00, download has been performed normally. If the value is not H'00, the source that caused download to fail can be investigated by the description below. If the value of the DPFR parameter is the same as before downloading (e.g. H'FF), the address setting of the download destination in FTDAR may be abnormal. In this case, confirm the setting of the TDER bit (bit 7) in FTDAR. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 757 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) If the value of the DPFR parameter is different from before downloading, check the SS bit (bit 2) and the FK bit (bit 1) in the DPFR parameter to ensure that the download program selection and FKEY setting were normal, respectively. 6. The operating frequency and user branch destination are set to the FPEFEQ and FUBRA parameters for initialization. The current frequency of the CPU clock is set to the FPEFEQ parameter (general register ER0). The allowable setting range for the FPEFEQ parameter is 8 MHz to 34 MHz. When the frequency is set to out of this range, an error is returned to the FPFR parameter of the initialization program and initialization is not performed. For details on the frequency setting, see the description in 20.3.2 (2) (a), Flash programming/erasing frequency parameter (FPEFEQ: general register ER0 of CPU). Set the user branch destination address as the FUBRA parameter (general register ER1) and the user branch enable bits (FUBE15 to FUBE0) as the FPEFEQ parameter (general register ER0). Set FUBRA and FUBE15 to FUBE0 to 0 if the user branch function is not required. Do use programmable user MAT as the user branch destination. Also, do not use an area containing a downloaded internal program as the user branch destination. After user branch processing completes, use the RTS instruction to return to programming processing. For details, see the descriptions in 21.3.2 (2) (a), Flash programming/erasing frequency parameter (FPEFEQ: general register ER0 of CPU), and 21.3.2 (2) (b), Flash user branch address setting parameter (FUBRA: general register ER1 of CPU). 7. Initialization When a programming program is downloaded, the initialization program is also downloaded to the on-chip RAM. There is an entry point of the initialization program in the area from the start address specified by FTDAR + 32 bytes of the on-chip RAM. The subroutine is called and initialization is executed by using the following steps. MOV.L JSR NOP DLTOP+32,ER2; @ER2; Set entry address to ER2 Call initialization routine The general registers other than ER0, ER1 are held in the initialization program. R0L is a return value of the FPFR parameter. Since the stack area is used in the initialization program, a stack area of a maximum 128 bytes must be allocated in RAM. Interrupts can be accepted during the execution of the initialization program. The program storage area and stack area in the on-chip RAM and register values must not be destroyed. 8. The return value in the initialization program, FPFR (general register R0L) is determined. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 758 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 9. All interrupts and the use of a bus master other than the CPU are prohibited. The specified voltage is applied for the specified time when programming or erasing. If interrupts occur or the bus mastership is moved to other than the CPU during this time, the voltage for more than the specified time will be applied and flash memory may be damaged. Therefore, interrupts, movement of bus mastership to other than the CPU (DMAC, DTC, or 1set to B'1 in interrupt control mode 0 or bits 2 to 0 (I2 to I0) in the extend control register of the CPU should be set to B'111 in interrupt control mode 2. Then interrupts other than NMI are held and are not executed. The NMI interrupts must be masked within the user system. The interrupts that are held must be executed after all program processing. When the bus mastership is moved to other than the CPU by the DMAC, DTC, or BREQ signal or DRAM refresh cycles are entered, the error protection state is entered. Therefore, taking bus mastership by the DMAC, DTC, or BREQ signal is prohibited. 10. FKEY must be set to H'5A and the user MAT must be prepared for programming. 11. The parameter which is required for programming is set. The start address of the programming destination of the user MAT (FMPAR) is set to general register ER1. The start address of the program data area (FMPDR) is set to general register ER0. Example of the FMPAR setting FMPAR specifies the programming destination address. When an address other than one in the user MAT area is specified, even if the programming program is executed, programming is not executed and an error is returned to the return value parameter FPFR. Since the unit is 128 bytes, the lower eight bits (A7 to A0) must be H'00 or H'80 as the boundary of 128 bytes. Example of the FMPDR setting When the storage destination of the program data is flash memory, even if the program execution routine is executed, programming is not executed and an error is returned to the FPFR parameter. In this case, the program data must be transferred to the on-chip RAM and then programming must be executed. 12. Programming There is an entry point of the programming program in the area from the start address specified by FTDAR + 16 bytes of the on-chip RAM. The subroutine is called and programming is executed by using the following steps. MOV.L JSR NOP #DLTOP+16,ER2; @ER2; Set entry address to ER2 Call programming routine Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 759 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) The general registers other than ER0, ER1 are held in the programming program. R0L is a return value of the FPFR parameter. Since the stack area is used in the programming program, a stack area of a maximum 128 bytes must be allocated in RAM 13. The return value in the programming program, FPFR (general register R0L) is determined. 14. Determine whether programming of the necessary data has finished. If more than 128 bytes of data are to be programmed, specify FMPAR and FMPDR in 128byte units, and repeat steps 12 to 14. Increment the programming destination address by 128 bytes and update the programming data pointer correctly. If an address which has already been programmed is written to again, not only will a programming error occur, but also flash memory will be damaged. 15. Execution of Programming Finished Processing The entry point of the programming library is in the area beginning at the download destination start address specified by FTDAR plus 16 bytes. Subroutine calls should therefore be performed as follows. MOV.L MOV.L MOV.L JSR #H'F0F0F0F0,ER0; #H'0F0F0F0F,ER1; #DLTOP+16,ER2; @ER2; Set entry address to ER2 Call programming finished routine Data is stored in a general register other than ER0, ER1 by the programming finished program. R0L is the return value of the FPFR parameter. The programming finished program uses the stack area, so a maximum 128-byte stack area should be reserved in RAM beforehand. Only perform programming finished processing once per block. Even if multiple 128-byte programming operations have been performed to the same block, programming finished processing should only be carried out once. (Due not perform programming finished processing multiple times.) If it is necessary to reprogram blocks within a previously programmed area on which programming finished processing has been performed, first erase the blocks in question and then reprogram them. Programming finished processing should be performed on all blocks containing areas that have been programmed after initialization processing. For example, if programming finished processing is to be carried out once after programming blocks EB1 to EB3, programming finished processing should be performed individually on EB1, EB2, and EB3. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 760 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Programming finished processing should be poerformed immediately after programming of the necessary data has completed. Caution is necessary because if an operation such as initialization processing, internal program downloading, rewriting an area of RAM that is a download destination, or MAT switching is performed before programming finished processing, programming will not take place correctly. : : EB9 EB10 Programming finished area EB11 EB12 Before reprogramming erased blocks containing a programming finished area (EB10 and EB11), the corresponding erased blocks (EB10 and EB11) should be erased. 16. Determine the FPFR (general-purpose register R0L) value returned by the programming program. 17. After programming finishes, clear FKEY and specify software protection. If this LSI is restarted by a power-on reset immediately after user MAT programming has finished, secure a reset period (period of RES = 0) that is at least as long as normal 100 s. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 761 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (3) Erasing Procedure in User Program Mode The procedures for download, initialization, and erasing are shown in figure 20.12. Start erasing procedure program a Select on-chip program to be downloaded and specify download destination by FTDAR Set FKEY to H'A5 1. Disable interrupts and bus master operation other than CPU Set FKEY to H'5A Download Set SCO to 1 and execute download Set FEBS parameter Erasing JSR FTDAR setting + 16 FPFR = 0? 2. 3. 4. No DPFR = 0? No Download error processing Yes Erasing Clear FKEY to 0 Yes No Required block erasing is completed? Clear FKEY and erasing error processing Set the FPEFEQ, FUBRA parameters Initialization 5. 6. Initialization JSR FTDAR setting + 32 FPFR = 0 ? Yes Clear FKEY to 0 No Yes Initialization error processing End erasing procedure program a Figure 20.12 Erasing Procedure The procedure program must be executed in an area other than the user MAT to be erased. Especially the part where the SCO bit in FCCS is set to 1 for downloading must be executed in the on-chip RAM. The area that can be executed in the steps of the user procedure program (on-chip RAM, user MAT, and external space) is shown in section 20.4.4, Procedure Program and Storable Area for Programming Data. For the downloaded on-chip program area, refer to figure 20.10. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 762 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) A single divided block is erased by one erasing processing. For block divisions, refer to figure 20.4. To erase two or more blocks, update the erase block number and perform the erasing processing for each block. 1. Select the on-chip program to be downloaded Set the EPVB bit in FECS to 1. Several programming/erasing programs cannot be selected at one time. If several programs are set, download is not performed and a download error is reported to the SS bit in the DPFR parameter. Specify the start address of a download destination by FTDAR. The procedures to be carried out after setting FKEY, e.g. download and initialization, are the same as those in the programming procedure. For details, refer to Programming Procedure in User Program Mode in section 20.4.2 (2) Programming Procedure in User Program Mode. The procedures after setting parameters for erasing programs are as follows: 2. Set the FEBS parameter necessary for erasure Set the erase block number of the user MAT in the flash erase block select parameter FEBS (general register ER0). If a value other than an erase block number of the user MAT is set, no block is erased even though the erasing program is executed, and an error is returned to the return value parameter FPFR. 3. Erasure Similar to as in programming, there is an entry point of the erasing program in the area from the start address of a download destination specified by FTDAR + 16 bytes of on-chip RAM. The subroutine is called and erasing is executed by using the following steps. MOV.L JSR NOP * * * #DLTOP+16,ER2; @ER2; Set entry address to ER2 Call erasing routine The general registers other than ER0, ER1 are held in the erasing program. R0L is a return value of the FPFR parameter. Since the stack area is used in the erasing program, a stack area of a maximum 128 bytes must be allocated in RAM 4. The return value in the erasing program, FPFR (general register R0L) is determined. 5. Determine whether erasure of the necessary blocks has completed. If more than one block is to be erased, update the FEBS parameter and repeat steps 3 to 5. Blocks that have already been erased can be erased again. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 763 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 6. After erasure completes, clear FKEY and specify software protection. If this LSI is restarted by a power-on reset immediately after user MAT erasure has completed, secure a reset period (period of RES = 0) that is at least as long as normal 100 s. 20.4.3 User Boot Mode This LSI has user boot mode which is initiated with different mode pin settings than those in user program mode or boot mode. User boot mode is a user-arbitrary boot mode, unlike boot mode that uses the on-chip SCI. Only the user MAT can be programmed/erased in user boot mode. Programming/erasing of the user boot MAT is only enabled in boot mode or programmer mode. (1) User Boot Mode Initiation For the mode pin settings to start up user boot mode, see table 20.5. When the reset start is executed in user boot mode, the built-in check routine runs. The user MAT and user boot MAT states are checked by this check routine. While the check routine is running, NMI and all other interrupts cannot be accepted. Next, processing starts from the execution start address of the reset vector in the user boot MAT. At this point, H'AA is set to FMATS because the execution MAT is the user boot MAT. (2) User MAT Programming in User Boot Mode For programming the user MAT in user boot mode, additional processing made by setting FMATS are required: switching from user-boot-MAT selection state to user-MAT selection state, and switching back to user-boot-MAT selection state after programming completes. Figure 20.13 shows the procedure for programming the user MAT in user boot mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 764 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Start programming procedure program Select on-chip program to be downloaded and specify download destination by FTDAR Set FKEY to H'A5 1 MAT switchover Set FMATS to value other than H'AA to select user MAT User-boot-MAT selection state Download Set SCO to 1 and execute download Set FKEY to H'A5 User-MAT selection state Clear FKEY to 0 DPFR = 0 ? Yes Set parameter to ER0 and ER1 (FMPAR and FMPDR) No Programming Programming JSR FTDAR setting + 16 FPFR = 0 ? Download error processing Initialization Set the FPEFEQ and FUBRA parameters Initialization JSR FTDAR setting + 32 FPFR = 0 ? No Yes Clear FKEY and programming error processing* No Required data programming is completed? Yes No Yes Initialization error processing Programming finished processing JSR FTDAR setting + 16 FPFR = 0 ? Disable interrupts and bus master operation other than CPU No Yes Clear FKEY and programming error processing 1 Clear FKEY to 0 User-boot-MAT selection state Set FMATS to H'AA to select user boot MAT End programming procedure program MAT switchover Note: * The MAT must be switched by FMATS to perform the programming error processing in the user boot MAT. Figure 20.13 Procedure for Programming User MAT in User Boot Mode The difference between the programming procedures in user program mode and user boot mode is whether the MAT is switched or not as shown in figure 20.13. In user boot mode, the user boot MAT can be seen in the flash memory space with the user MAT hidden in the background. The user MAT and user boot MAT are switched only while the user MAT is being programmed. Because the user boot MAT is hidden while the user MAT is being Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 765 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) programmed, the procedure program must be located in an area other than flash memory. After programming completes, switch the MATs again to return to the first state. MAT switching is enabled by writing a specific value to FMATS. However note that while the MATs are being switched, the LSI is in an unstable state, e.g. access to a MAT is not allowed until MAT switching is completed, and if an interrupt occurs, from which MAT the interrupt vector is read is undetermined. Perform MAT switching in accordance with the description in section 20.6, Switching between User MAT and User Boot MAT. Except for MAT switching, the programming procedure is the same as that in user program mode. The area that can be executed in the steps of the user procedure program (on-chip RAM, user MAT, and external space) is shown in section 20.4.4, Procedure Program and Storable Area for Programming Data. (3) User MAT Erasing in User Boot Mode For erasing the user MAT in user boot mode, additional processing made by setting FMATS are required: switching from user-boot-MAT selection state to user-MAT selection state, and switching back to user-boot-MAT selection state after erasing completes. Figure 20.14 shows the procedure for erasing the user MAT in user boot mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 766 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Start erasing procedure program Select on-chip program to be downloaded and specify download destination by FTDAR Set FKEY to H'A5 1 MAT switchover Set FMATS to value other than H'AA to select user MAT User-boot-MAT selection state Download Set SCO to 1 and execute download Set FKEY to H'A5 User-MAT selection state Clear FKEY to 0 DPFR = 0 ? Set FEBS parameter Programming JSR FTDAR setting + 16 FPFR = 0 ? No Yes Download error processing Erasing Initialization Set the FPEFEQ and FUBRA parameters Initialization JSR FTDAR setting + 32 FPFR = 0 ? No Yes No No Clear FKEY and erasing error processing* Required block erasing is completed? Yes Clear FKEY to 0 Yes Initialization error processing Disable interrupts and bus master operation other than CPU Set FMATS to H'AA to select user boot MAT End erasing procedure program MAT switchover 1 User-boot-MAT selection state Note: * The MAT must be switched by FMATS to perform the erasing error processing in the user boot MAT. Figure 20.14 Procedure for Erasing User MAT in User Boot Mode The difference between the erasing procedures in user program mode and user boot mode depends on whether the MAT is switched or not as shown in figure 20.14. MAT switching is enabled by writing a specific value to FMATS. However note that while the MATs are being switched, the LSI is in an unstable state, e.g. access to a MAT is not allowed until MAT switching is completed, and if an interrupt occurs, from which MAT the interrupt vector is read is undetermined. Perform MAT switching in accordance with the description in section 20.6, Switching between User MAT and User Boot MAT. Except for MAT switching, the erasing procedure is the same as that in user program mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 767 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) The area that can be executed in the steps of the user procedure program (on-chip RAM, user MAT, and external space) is shown in section 20.4.4, Procedure Program and Storable Area for Programming Data. 20.4.4 Procedure Program and Storable Area for Programming Data In the descriptions in the previous section, the programming/erasing procedure programs and storable areas for program data are assumed to be in the on-chip RAM. However, the program and the data can be stored in and executed from other areas, such as part of flash memory which is not to be programmed or erased, or somewhere in the external address space. (1) Conditions that Apply to Programming/Erasing 1. The on-chip programming/erasing program is downloaded from the address in the on-chip RAM specified by FTDAR, therefore, this area is not available for use. 2. The on-chip programming/erasing program will use the 128 bytes as a stack. So, make sure that this area is secured. 3. Download by setting the SCO bit to 1 will lead to switching of the MAT. If, therefore, this operation is used, it should be executed from the on-chip RAM. 4. The flash memory is accessible until the start of programming or erasing, that is, until the result of downloading has been determined. When in a mode in which the external address space is not accessible, such as single-chip mode, the required procedure programs, NMI handling vector and NMI handler should be transferred to the on-chip RAM before programming/erasing of the flash memory starts. 5. The flash memory is not accessible during programming/erasing operations, therefore, the operation program is downloaded to the on-chip RAM to be executed. The NMI-handling vector and programs such as that which activate the operation program, and NMI handler should thus be stored in on-chip memory other than flash memory or the external address space. 6. After programming/erasing, the flash memory should be inhibited until FKEY is cleared. The reset state (RES = 0) must be in place for more than 100 s when the LSI mode is changed to reset on completion of a programming/erasing operation. Transitions to the reset state, and hardware standby mode are inhibited during programming/erasing. When the reset signal is accidentally input to the chip, a longer period in the reset state than usual (100 s) is needed before the reset signal is released. 7. Switching of the MATs by FMATS should be needed when programming/erasing of the user boot MAT is operated in user-boot mode. The program which switches the MATs should be executed from the on-chip RAM. See section 20.6, Switching between User MAT and User Boot MAT. Please make sure you know which MAT is selected when switching between them. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 768 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 8. When the data storable area indicated by programming parameter FMPDR is within the flash memory area, an error will occur even when the data stored is normal. Therefore, the data should be transferred to the on-chip RAM to place the address that FMPDR indicates in an area other than the flash memory. In consideration of these conditions, there are three factors; operating mode, the bank structure of the user MAT, and operations. The areas in which the programming data can be stored for execution are shown in tables. Table 20.7 Executable MAT Initiated Mode Operation Programming Erasing Note: * User Program Mode Table 20.8 (1) Table 20.8 (2) Programming/Erasing is possible to user MATs. User Boot Mode* Table 20.8 (3) Table 20.8 (4) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 769 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Table 20.8 (1) Useable Area for Programming in User Program Mode Storable /Executable Area On-chip RAM User MAT x* External Space (Expanded Mode) Selected MAT User MAT Embedded Program Storage Area Item Storage Area for Program Data Operation for Selection of On-chip Program to be Downloaded Operation for Writing H'A5 to FKEY Execution of Writing SC0 = 1 to FCCS (Download) Operation for FKEY Clear Determination of Download Result Operation for Download Error Operation for Settings of Initial Parameter Execution of Initialization Determination of Initialization Result Operation for Initialization Error NMI Handling Routine Operation for Inhibit of Interrupt Operation for Writing H'5A to FKEY Operation for Settings of Program Parameter x x x x x x Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 770 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Storable /Executable Area On-chip RAM Target Flash Memory x x x x External Space (Expanded Mode) x Selected MAT User MAT Embedded Program Storage Area Item Execution of Programming Determination of Program Result Operation for Program Error Operation for FKEY Clear Note: * Transferring the data to the on-chip RAM enables this area to be used. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 771 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Table 20.8 (2) Useable Area for Erasure in User Program Mode Storable /Executable Area On-chip RAM User MAT External Space (Expanded Mode) Selected MAT User MAT Embedded Program Storage Area Item Operation for Selection of On-chip Program to be Downloaded Operation for Writing H'A5 to FKEY Execution of Writing SC0 = 1 to FCCS (Download) Operation for FKEY Clear Determination of Download Result Operation for Download Error Operation for Settings of Initial Parameter Execution of Initialization Determination of Initialization Result Operation for Initialization Error NMI Handling Routine Operation for Inhibit of Interrupt Operation for Writing H'5A to FKEY Operation for Settings of Erasure Parameter Execution of Erasure Determination of Erasure Result x x x x x x x x x Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 772 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Storable /Executable Area On-chip RAM User MAT x x External Space (Expanded Mode) Selected MAT User MAT Embedded Program Storage Area Item Operation for Erasure Error Operation for FKEY Clear Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 773 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Table 20.8 (3) Useable Area for Programming in User Boot Mode Storable/Executable Area On-chip RAM User Boot MAT x *1 External Space (Expanded Mode) Selected MAT User MAT User Boot MAT Embedded Program Storage Area Item Storage Area for Program Data Operation for Selection of On-chip Program to be Downloaded Operation for Writing H'A5 to FKEY Execution of Writing SC0 = 1 to FCCS (Download) Operation for FKEY Clear Determination of Download Result Operation for Download Error Operation for Settings of Initial Parameter Execution of Initialization Determination of Initialization Result Operation for Initialization Error NMI Handling Routine Operation for Interrupt Inhibit Switching MATs by FMATS x x x x x x x Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 774 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Storable/Executable Area On-chip RAM User Boot MAT x External Space (Expanded Mode) Selected MAT User MAT User Boot MAT Embedded Program Storage Area Item Operation for Writing H'5A to FKEY Operation for Settings of Program Parameter Execution of Programming Determination of Program Result Operation for Program Error Operation for FKEY Clear Switching MATs by FMATS x x x x *2 x x x x Notes: 1. Transferring the data to the on-chip RAM enables this area to be used. 2. Switching FMATS by a program in the on-chip RAM enables this area to be used. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 775 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Table 20.8 (4) Useable Area for Erasure in User Boot Mode Storable/Executable Area On-chip RAM User Boot MAT External Space (Expanded Mode) Selected MAT User MAT User Boot MAT Embedded Program Storage Area Item Operation for Selection of On-chip Program to be Downloaded Operation for Writing H'A5 to FKEY Execution of Writing SC0 = 1 to FCCS (Download) Operation for FKEY Clear Determination of Download Result Operation for Download Error Operation for Settings of Initial Parameter Execution of Initialization Determination of Initialization Result Operation for Initialization Error NMI Handling Routine Operation for Interrupt Inhibit Switching MATs by FMATS Operation for Writing H'5A to FKEY x x x x x x x x Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 776 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Storable/Executable Area On-chip RAM User Boot MAT x External Space (Expanded Mode) Selected MAT User MAT User Boot MAT Embedded Program Storage Area Item Operation for Settings of Erasure Parameter Execution of Erasure Determination of Erasure Result Operation for Erasure Error Operation for FKEY Clear Switching MATs by FMATS Note: * x x x* x x x x Switching FMATS by a program in the on-chip RAM enables this area to be used. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 777 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 20.5 Protection There are two kinds of flash memory program/erase protection: hardware and software protection. 20.5.1 Hardware Protection Programming and erasing of flash memory is forcibly disabled or suspended by hardware protection. In this state, the downloading of a on-chip program and initialization are possible. However, an activated program for programming or erasure cannot program or erase locations in a user MAT, and the error in programming/erasing is reported in the parameter FPFR. Table 20.9 Hardware Protection Function to be Protected Item Reset/standby protection Description * The program/erase interface registers are initialized in the poweron reset state (including a power-on reset by the WDT) and standby mode and the program/eraseprotected state is entered. The reset state will not be entered by a reset using the RES pin unless the RES pin is held low until oscillation has stabilized after power is initially supplied. In the case of a reset during operation, hold the RES pin low for the RES pulse width that is specified in the section on AC characteristics section. If a reset is input during programming or erasure, data values in the flash memory are not guaranteed. In this case, execute erasure and then execute program again. Download Program/Erase * Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 778 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 20.5.2 Software Protection Software protection is set up by disabling the downloading of on-chip programs for programming and erasing or by means of a key code register. Table 20.10 Software Protection Function to be Protected Item Protection by the SCO bit Description * The program/erase-protected state is entered by clearing the SCO bit in FCCS which disables the downloading of the programming/erasing programs. Downloading and programming/erasing are disabled unless the required key code is written in FKEY. Different key codes are used for downloading and for programming/erasing. Download Program/ Erase Protection by the FKEY register * 20.5.3 Error Protection Error protection is a mechanism for aborting programming or erasure when an error occurs, in the form of the microcomputer entering runaway during programming/erasing of the flash memory or operations that are not according to the established procedures for programming/erasing. Aborting programming or erasure in such cases prevents damage to the flash memory due to excessive programming or erasing. If the microcomputer malfunctions during programming/erasing of the flash memory, the FLER bit in the FCCS register is set to 1 and the error-protection state is entered, and this aborts the programming or erasure. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 779 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) The FLER bit is set in the following conditions: 1. When an interrupt such as NMI occurs during programming/erasing. 2. When the flash memory is read during programming/erasing (including a vector read or an instruction fetch). 3. When a SLEEP instruction (including software-standby mode) is executed during programming/erasing. 4. When a bus master other than the CPU such as the DMAC or DTC gets bus mastership during programming/erasing. Error protection is cancelled only by a power-on reset or by hardware-standby mode. Note that the reset should only be released after providing a reset input over a period longer than the normal 100 s period. Since high voltages are applied during programming/erasing of the flash memory, some voltage may remain after the error-protection state has been entered. For this reason, it is necessary to reduce the risk of damage to the flash memory by extending the reset period so that the charge is released. The state-transition diagram in figure 20.15 shows transitions to and from the error-protection state. Program mode Erase mode Read disabled Programming/erasing enabled FLER = 0 RES = 0 or STBY = 0 Reset or standby (Hardware protection) Read disabled Programming/erasing disabled FLER = 0 Program/erase interface register is in its initial state. Er Error occurrence r 0o 0 cu S= (S E Y= oft rred R TB wa S RES = 0 or re sta STBY = 0 nd by ) ror oc Error protection mode Read enabled Programming/erasing disabled FLER = 1 Software-standby mode Error-protection mode (Software standby) Read disabled Cancel programming/erasing disabled software-standby mode FLER = 1 Program/erase interface register is in its initial state. Figure 20.15 Transitions to Error-Protection State Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 780 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 20.6 Switching between User MAT and User Boot MAT It is possible to alternate between the user MAT and user boot MAT. However, the following procedure is required because these MATs are allocated to address 0. (Switching to the user boot MAT disables programming and erasing. Programming of the user boot MAT should take place in boot mode or PROM mode.) 1. MAT switching by FMATS should always be executed from the on-chip RAM. 2. To ensure that the MAT that has been switched to is accessible, execute four NOP instructions in the on-chip RAM immediately after writing to FMATS of the on-chip RAM (this prevents access to the flash memory during MAT switching). 3. If an interrupt has occurred during switching, there is no guarantee of which memory MAT is being accessed. Always mask the maskable interrupts before switching between MATs. In addition, configure the system so that NMI interrupts do not occur during MAT switching. 4. After the MATs have been switched, take care because the interrupt vector table will also have been switched. If interrupt processing is to be the same before and after MAT switching, transfer the interrupt-processing routines to the on-chip RAM, and use the settings of FVACR to place the interrupt-vector table in the on-chip RAM . 5. Memory sizes of the user MAT and user boot MAT are different. When accessing the user boot MAT, do not access addresses above the top of its 8-kbyte memory space. If access goes beyond the 8-kbyte space, the values read are undefined. Procedure for switching to the user boot MAT Procedure for switching to the user MAT Procedure for switching to the user boot MAT (1) Mask interrupts (2) Write H'AA to FMATS. (3) Execute four NOP instructions before accessing the user boot MAT. Procedure for switching to the user MAT (1) Mask interrupts (2) Write a value other than H'AA to FMATS. (3) Execute four NOP instructions before accessing the user MAT. Figure 20.16 Switching between the User MAT and User Boot MAT Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 781 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 20.7 Programmer Mode Along with its on-board programming mode, this LSI also has a PROM mode as a further mode for the writing and erasing of programs and data. In the PROM mode, a general-purpose PROM programmer can freely be used to write programs to the on-chip ROM. Program/erase is possible on the user MAT and user boot MAT. The PROM programmer must support Renesas microcomputers with 512-kbyte flash memory as a device type. A status-polling system is adopted for operation in automatic program, automatic erase, and status-read modes. In the status-read mode, details of the system's internal signals are output after execution of automatic programming or automatic erasure. In the PROM mode, provide a 12-MHz input-clock signal. 20.8 Serial Communication Interface Specification for Boot Mode Initiating boot mode enables the boot program to communicate with the host by using the internal SCI. The serial communication interface specification is shown below. (1) Status The boot program has three states. 1. Bit-Rate-Adjustment State In this state, the boot program adjusts the bit rate to communicate with the host. Initiating boot mode enables starting of the boot program and entry to the bit-rate-adjustment state. The program receives the command from the host to adjust the bit rate. After adjusting the bit rate, the program enters the inquiry/selection state. 2. Inquiry/Selection State In this state, the boot program responds to inquiry commands from the host. The device name, clock mode, and bit rate are selected. After selection of these settings, the program is made to enter the programming/erasing state by the command for a transition to the programming/erasing state. The program transfers the libraries required for erasure to the RAM and erases the user MATs and user boot MATs before the transition. 3. Programming/erasing state Programming and erasure by the boot program take place in this state. The boot program is made to transfer the programming/erasing programs to the RAM by commands from the host. Sum checks and blank checks are executed by sending these commands from the host. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 782 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) These boot program states are shown in figure 20.17. Reset Bit-rate-adjustment state Inquiry/response wait Transition to programming/erasing Response Inquiry Operations for inquiry and selection Operations for response Operations for erasing user MATs and user boot MATs Programming/erasing wait Programming Operations for programming Erasing Operations for erasing Checking Operations for checking Figure 20.17 Boot Program States (2) Bit-Rate-Adjustment State The bit rate is calculated by measuring the period of transfer of a low-level byte (H'00) from the host. The bit rate can be changed by the command for a new bit rate selection. After the bit rate has been adjusted, the boot program enters the inquiry and selection state. The bit-rate-adjustment sequence is shown in figure 20.18. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 783 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Host H'00 (30 times maximum) Boot Program Measuring the 1-bit length H'00 (Completion of adjustment) H'55 H'E6 (Boot response) H'FF (error) Figure 20.18 Bit-Rate-Adjustment Sequence (3) Communications Protocol After adjustment of the bit rate, the protocol for communications between the host and the boot program is as shown below. 1. One-byte commands and one-byte responses These commands and responses are comprised of a single byte. These are consists of the inquiries and the ACK for successful completion. 2. n-byte commands or n-byte responses These commands and responses are comprised of n bytes of data. These are selections and responses to inquiries. The amount of programming data is not included under this heading because it is determined in another command. 3. Error response The error response is a response to inquiries. It consists of an error response and an error code and comes two bytes. 4. Programming of 128 bytes The size is not specified in commands. The size of n is indicated in response to the programming unit inquiry. 5. Memory read response This response consists of 4 bytes of data. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 784 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) One-byte command or one-byte response n-byte Command or n-byte response Command or response Data Size Command or response Checksum Error response Error code Error response 128-byte programming Address Command Data (n bytes) Checksum Memory read response Size Response Data Checksum Figure 20.19 Communication Protocol Format * Command (one byte): Commands including inquiries, selection, programming, erasing, and checking * Response (one byte): Response to an inquiry * Size (one byte): The amount of data for transmission excluding the command, amount of data, and checksum * Checksum (one byte): The checksum is calculated so that the total of all values from the command byte to the SUM byte becomes H'00. * Data (n bytes): Detailed data of a command or response * Error response (one byte): Error response to a command * Error code (one byte): Type of the error * Address (four bytes): Address for programming * Data (n bytes): Data to be programmed (the size is indicated in the response to the programming unit inquiry.) * Size (four bytes): Four-byte response to a memory read Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 785 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (4) Inquiry and Selection States The boot program returns information from the flash memory in response to the host's inquiry commands and sets the device code, clock mode, and bit rate in response to the host's selection command. Inquiry and selection commands are listed below. Table 20.11 Inquiry and Selection Commands Command H'20 H'10 H'21 H'11 H'22 Command Name Supported Device Inquiry Device Selection Clock Mode Inquiry Clock Mode Selection Multiplication Ratio Inquiry Description Inquiry regarding device codes Selection of device code Inquiry regarding numbers of clock modes and values of each mode Indication of the selected clock mode Inquiry regarding the number of frequencymultiplied clock types, the number of multiplication ratios, and the values of each multiple Inquiry regarding the maximum and minimum values of the main clock and peripheral clocks Inquiry regarding the number of user boot MATs and the start and last addresses of each MAT Inquiry regarding the a number of user MATs and the start and last addresses of each MAT Inquiry regarding the number of blocks and the start and last addresses of each block Inquiry regarding the unit of programming data Selection of new bit rate Erasing of user MAT and user boot MAT, and entry to programming/erasing state Inquiry into the operated status of the boot program H'23 H'24 Operating Clock Frequency Inquiry User Boot MAT Information Inquiry User MAT Information Inquiry Block for Erasing Information Inquiry Programming Unit Inquiry New Bit Rate Selection Transition to Programming/Erasing State Boot Program Status Inquiry H'25 H'26 H'27 H'3F H'40 H'4F The selection commands, which are device selection (H'10), clock mode selection (H'11), and new bit rate selection (H'3F), should be sent from the host in that order. These commands will certainly be needed. When two or more selection commands are sent at once, the last command will be valid. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 786 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) All of these commands, except for the boot program status inquiry command (H'4F), will be valid until the boot program receives the programming/erasing transition (H'40). The host can choose the needed commands out of the commands and inquiries listed above. The boot program status inquiry command (H'4F) is valid after the boot program has received the programming/erasing transition command (H'40). (a) Supported Device Inquiry The boot program will return the device codes of supported devices and the product code in response to the supported device inquiry. Command H'20 * Command, H'20, (one byte): Inquiry regarding supported devices Response H'30 Number of characters *** SUM Size Number of devices Product name Device code * Response, H'30, (one byte): Response to the supported device inquiry * Size (one byte): Number of bytes to be transmitted, excluding the command, size, and checksum, that is, the amount of data contributes by the number of devices, characters, device codes and product names * Number of devices (one byte): The number of device types supported by the boot program * Number of characters (one byte): The number of characters in the device codes and boot program's name * Device code (four bytes): ASCII code of the supporting product * Product name (n bytes): Type name of the boot program in ASCII-coded characters * SUM (one byte): Checksum The checksum is calculated so that the total number of all values from the command byte to the SUM byte becomes H'00. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 787 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (b) Device Selection The boot program will set the supported device to the specified device code. The program will return the selected device code in response to the inquiry after this setting has been made. Command H'10 Size Device code SUM * Command, H'10, (one byte): Device selection * Size (one byte): Amount of device-code data This is fixed at 4 * Device code (four bytes): Device code (ASCII code) returned in response to the supported device inquiry * SUM (one byte): Checksum Response H'06 * Response, H'06, (one byte): Response to the device selection command ACK will be returned when the device code matches. Error response H'90 ERROR * Error response, H'90, (one byte): Error response to the device selection command ERROR : (one byte): Error code H'11: Sum check error H'21: Device code error, that is, the device code does not match (c) Clock Mode Inquiry The boot program will return the supported clock modes in response to the clock mode inquiry. Command H'21 * Command, H'21, (one byte): Inquiry regarding clock mode Response H'31 Size Number of modes Mode *** SUM * Response, H'31, (one byte): Response to the clock-mode inquiry * Size (one byte): Amount of data that represents the number of modes and modes * Number of clock modes (one byte): The number of supported clock modes H'00 indicates no clock mode or the device allows to read the clock mode. * Mode (one byte): Values of the supported clock modes (i.e. H'01 means clock mode 1.) * SUM (one byte): Checksum Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 788 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (d) Clock Mode Selection The boot program will set the specified clock mode. The program will return the selected clockmode information after this setting has been made. The clock-mode selection command should be sent after the device-selection commands. Command H'11 Size Mode SUM * * * * Command, H'11, (one byte): Selection of clock mode Size (one byte): Amount of data that represents the modes Mode (one byte): A clock mode returned in reply to the supported clock mode inquiry. SUM (one byte): Checksum Response H'06 * Response, H'06, (one byte): Response to the clock mode selection command ACK will be returned when the clock mode matches. Error Response H'91 ERROR * Error response, H'91, (one byte) : Error response to the clock mode selection command * ERROR, (one byte): Error code H'11: Checksum error H'22: Clock mode error, that is, the clock mode does not match. Even if the clock mode numbers are H'00 and H'01 by a clock mode inquiry, the clock mode must be selected using these respective values. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 789 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (e) Multiplication Ratio Inquiry The boot program will return the supported multiplication and division ratios. Command H'22 * Command, H'22, (one byte): Inquiry regarding multiplication ratio Response H'32 Number of multiplication ratios *** SUM Size Multiplication ratio Number of types *** * Response, H'32, (one byte): Response to the multiplication ratio inquiry * Size (one byte): The amount of data that represents the number of clock sources and multiplication ratios and the multiplication ratios * Number of types (one byte): The number of supported multiplied clock types (e.g. when there are two multiplied clock types, which are the main and peripheral clocks, the number of types will be H'02.) * Number of multiplication ratios (one byte): The number of multiplication ratios for each type (e.g. the number of multiplication ratios to which the main clock can be set and the peripheral clock can be set.) * Multiplication ratio (one byte) Multiplication ratio: The value of the multiplication ratio (e.g. when the clock-frequency multiplier is four, the value of multiplication ratio will be H'04.) Division ratio: Not supported by the H8S/2368F 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. The number of multiplication ratios returned is the same as the number of multiplication ratios and as many groups of data are returned as there are types. * SUM (one byte): Checksum Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 790 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (f) Operating Clock Frequency Inquiry The boot program will return the number of operating clock frequencies, and the maximum and minimum values. Command H'23 * Command, H'23, (one byte): Inquiry regarding operating clock frequencies Response H'33 Size Number of operating clock frequencies Maximum value of operating clock frequency Minimum value of operating clock frequency *** SUM * Response, H'33, (one byte): Response to operating clock frequency inquiry * Size (one byte): The number of bytes that represents the minimum values, maximum values, and the number of frequencies. * Number of operating clock frequencies (one byte): The number of supported operating clock frequency types (e.g. when there are two operating clock frequency types, which are the main and peripheral clocks, the number of types will be H'02.) * Minimum value of operating clock frequency (two bytes): The minimum value of the multiplied or divided clock frequency. The minimum and maximum values represent the values in MHz, valid to the hundredths place of MHz, and multiplied by 100. (e.g. when the value is 64 MHz, it will be D'6400 and H'1900.) * Maximum value (two bytes): Maximum value among the multiplied or divided clock frequencies. There are as many pairs of minimum and maximum values as there are operating clock frequencies. * SUM (one byte): Checksum Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 791 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (g) User Boot MAT Information Inquiry The boot program will return the number of user boot MATs and their addresses. Command H'24 * Command, H'24, (one byte): Inquiry regarding user boot MAT information Response H'34 *** SUM Size Number of areas Area-last address Area-start address * Response, H'34, (one byte): Response to user boot MAT information inquiry * Size (one byte): The number of bytes that represents the number of areas, area-start addresses, and area-last address * Number of Areas (one byte): The number of consecutive user boot MAT areas When user boot MAT areas are consecutive, the number of areas returned is H'01. * Area-start address (four byte): Start address of the area * Area-last address (four byte): Last address of the area There are as many groups of data representing the start and last addresses as there are areas. * SUM (one byte): Checksum (h) User MAT Information Inquiry The boot program will return the number of user MATs and their addresses. Command H'25 * Command, H'25, (one byte): Inquiry regarding user MAT information Response H'35 *** SUM Size Number of areas Last address area Start address area * Response, H'35, (one byte): Response to the user MAT information inquiry * Size (one byte): The number of bytes that represents the number of areas, area-start address and area-last address * Number of areas (one byte): The number of consecutive user MAT areas When the user MAT areas are consecutive, the number of areas is H'01. * Area-start address (four byte): Start address of the area Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 792 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) * Area-last address (four byte): Last address of the area There are as many groups of data representing the start and last addresses as there are areas. * SUM (one byte): Checksum (i) Erased Block Information Inquiry The boot program will return the number of erased blocks and their addresses. Command H'26 * Command, H'26, (two bytes): Inquiry regarding erased block information Response H'36 *** SUM Size Number of blocks Block last address Block start address * Response, H'36, (one byte): Response to the number of erased blocks and addresses * Size (three byte): The number of bytes that represents the number of blocks, block-start addresses, and block-last addresses. * Number of blocks (one byte): The number of erased blocks * Block start address (four bytes): Start address of a block * Block last Address (four bytes): Last address of a block There are as many groups of data representing the start and last addresses as there are areas. * SUM (one byte): Checksum (j) Programming Unit Inquiry The boot program will return the programming unit used to program data. Command H'27 * Command, H'27, (one byte): Inquiry regarding programming unit Response H'37 Size Programming unit SUM * Response, H'37, (one byte): Response to programming unit inquiry * Size (one byte): The number of bytes that indicate the programming unit, which is fixed to 2 * Programming unit (two bytes): A unit for programming This is the unit for reception of programming. * SUM (one byte): Checksum Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 793 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (k) New Bit-Rate Selection The boot program will set a new bit rate and return the new bit rate. This selection should be sent after sending the clock mode selection command. Command H'3F Number of multiplication ratios SUM Size Multiplication ratio 1 Bit rate Multiplication ratio 2 Input frequency * Command, H'3F, (one byte): Selection of new bit rate * Size (one byte): The number of bytes that represents the bit rate, input frequency, number of multiplication ratios, and multiplication ratio * Bit rate (two bytes): New bit rate One hundredth of the value (e.g. when the value is 19,200 bps, the bit rate is H'00C0, which is D'192.) * Input frequency (two bytes): Frequency of the clock input to the boot program This is valid to the hundredths place and represents the value in MHz multiplied by 100. (e.g. when the value is 64 MHz, the input frequency is H'1900 (= D'6400).) * Number of multiplication ratios (one byte): The number of multiplication ratios to which the device can be set. * Multiplication ratio 1 (one byte) : The value of multiplication or division ratios for the main operating frequency Multiplication ratio (one byte): The value of the multiplication ratio (e.g. when the clock frequency is multiplied by four, the multiplication ratio will be H'04.) Division ratio: The inverse of the division ratio, as a negative number (e.g. when the clock frequency is divided by two, the value of division ratio will be H'FE. H'FE = D'-2) * Multiplication ratio 2 (one byte): The value of multiplication or division ratios for the peripheral frequency Multiplication ratio (one byte): The value of the multiplication ratio (e.g. when the clock frequency is multiplied by four, the multiplication ratio will be H'04.) (Division ratio: The inverse of the division ratio, as a negative number (E.g. when the clock is divided by two, the value of division ratio will be H'FE. H'FE = D'-2) * SUM (one byte): Checksum Response H'06 * Response, H'06, (one byte): Response to selection of a new bit rate When it is possible to set the bit rate, the response will be ACK. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 794 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Error Response H'BF ERROR * Error response, H'BF, (one byte): Error response to selection of new bit rate * ERROR: (one byte): Error code H'11: Sum checking error H'24: Bit-rate selection error The rate is not available. H'25: Error in input frequency This input frequency is not within the specified range. H'26: Multiplication-ratio error The ratio does not match an available ratio. H'27: Operating frequency error The frequency is not within the specified range. (5) Received Data Check The methods for checking of received data are listed below. 1. Input frequency The received value of the input frequency is checked to ensure that it is within the range of minimum to maximum frequencies which matches the clock modes of the specified device. When the value is out of this range, an input-frequency error is generated. 2. Multiplication ratio The received value of the multiplication ratio or division ratio is checked to ensure that it matches the clock modes of the specified device. When the value is out of this range, an input-frequency error is generated. 3. Operating frequency error Operating frequency is calculated from the received value of the input frequency and the multiplication or division ratio. The input frequency is input to the LSI and the LSI is operated at the operating frequency. The expression is given below. Operating frequency = Input frequency x Multiplication ratio, or Operating frequency = Input frequency / Division ratio The calculated operating frequency should be checked to ensure that it is within the range of minimum to maximum frequencies which are available with the clock modes of the specified device. When it is out of this range, an operating frequency error is generated. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 795 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 4. Bit rate To facilitate error checking, the value (n) of clock select (CKS) in the serial mode register (SMR), and the value(N) in the bit rate register (BRR), which are found from the peripheral operating clock frequency () and bit rate (B), are used to calculate the error rate to ensure that it is less than 4%. If the error is more than 4%, a bit rate error is generated. The error is calculated using the following expression: Error (%) = {[ x 106 (N + 1) x B x 64 x 2(2xn - 1) ] - 1} x 100 When the new bit rate is selectable, the rate will be set in the register after sending ACK in response. The host will send an ACK with the new bit rate for confirmation and the boot program will response with that rate. Confirmation H'06 * Confirmation, H'06, (one byte): Confirmation of a new bit rate Response H'06 * Response, H'06, (one byte): Response to confirmation of a new bit rate The sequence of new bit-rate selection is shown in figure 20.20. Host Setting a new bit rate Waiting for one-bit period at the specified bit rate Setting a new bit rate H'06 (ACK) with the new bit rate H'06 (ACK) with the new bit rate H'06 (ACK) Boot program Setting a new bit rate Figure 20.20 New Bit-Rate Selection Sequence Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 796 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (6) Transition to Programming/Erasing State The boot program will transfer the erasing program, and erase the user MATs and user boot MATs in that order. On completion of this erasure, ACK will be returned and will enter the programming/erasing state. The host should select the device code, clock mode, and new bit rate with device selection, clockmode selection, and new bit-rate selection commands, and then send the command for the transition to programming/erasing state. These procedure should be carried out before sending of the programming selection command or program data. Command H'40 * Command, H'40, (one byte): Transition to programming/erasing state Response H'06 * Response, H'06, (one byte): Response to transition to programming/erasing state The boot program will send ACK when the user MAT and user boot MAT have been erased by the transferred erasing program. Error Response H'C0 H'51 * Error response, H'C0, (one byte): Error response for user boot MAT blank check * Error code, H'51, (one byte): Erasing error An error occurred and erasure was not completed. (7) Command Error A command error will occur when a command is undefined, the order of commands is incorrect, or a command is unacceptable. Issuing a clock-mode selection command before a device selection or an inquiry command after the transition to programming/erasing state command, are examples. Error Response H'80 H'xx * Error response, H'80, (one byte): Command error * Command, H'xx, (one byte): Received command (8) Command Order The order for commands in the inquiry selection state is shown below. 1. A supported device inquiry (H'20) should be made to inquire about the supported devices. 2. The device should be selected from among those described by the returned information and set with a device-selection (H'10) command. 3. A clock-mode inquiry (H'21) should be made to inquire about the supported clock modes. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 797 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 4. The clock mode should be selected from among those described by the returned information and set. 5. After selection of the device and clock mode, inquiries for other required information should be made, such as the multiplication-ratio inquiry (H'22) or operating frequency inquiry (H'23), which are needed for a new bit-rate selection. 6. A new bit rate should be selected with the new bit-rate selection (H'3F) command, according to the returned information on multiplication ratios and operating frequencies. 7. After selection of the device and clock mode, the information of the user boot MAT and user MAT should be made to inquire about the user boot MATs information inquiry (H'24), user MATs information inquiry (H'25), erased block information inquiry (H'26), and programming unit inquiry (H'27). 8. After making inquiries and selecting a new bit rate, issue the transition to programming/erasing state command (H'40). The boot program will then enter the programming/erasing state. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 798 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (9) Programming/Erasing State A programming selection command makes the boot program select the programming method, an 128-byte programming command makes it program the memory with data, and an erasing selection command and block erasing command make it erase the block. The programming/erasing commands are listed below. Table 20.12 Programming/Erasing Command Command H'42 H'43 H'50 H'48 H'58 H'52 H'4A H'4B H'4C H'4D H'4C H'4D H'4F Command Name User boot MAT programming selection User MAT programming selection 128-byte programming Erasing selection Block erasing Memory read User boot MAT sum check User MAT sum check User boot MAT blank check User MAT blank check User boot MAT blank check User MAT blank check Boot program status inquiry Description Transfers the user boot MAT programming program Transfers the user MAT programming program Programs 128 bytes of data Transfers the erasing program Erases a block of data Reads the contents of memory Checks the checksum of the user boot MAT Checks the checksum of the user MAT Checks the blank data of the user boot MAT Checks the blank data of the user MAT Checks whether the contents of the user boot MAT are blank Checks whether the contents of the user MAT are blank Inquires into the boot program's status Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 799 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) * Programming Programming is executed by a programming-selection command and an 128-byte programming command. Firstly, the host should send the programming-selection command and select the programming method and programming MATs. There are two programming selection commands, and selection is according to the area and method for programming. 1. User boot MAT programming selection 2. User MAT programming selection After issuing the programming selection command, the host should send the 128-byte programming command. The 128-byte programming command that follows the selection command represents the data programmed according to the method specified by the selection command. When more than 128-byte data is programmed, 128-byte commands should repeatedly be executed. Sending an 128-byte programming command with H'FFFFFFFF as the address will stop the programming. On completion of programming, the boot program will wait for selection of programming or erasing. Where the sequence of programming operations that is executed includes programming with another method or of another MAT, the procedure must be repeated from the programming selection command. The sequence for programming-selection and 128-byte programming commands is shown in figure 20.21. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 800 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Host Programming selection (H'42, H'43) Boot program Transfer of the programming program ACK 128-byte programming (address, data) Repeat ACK 128-byte programming (H'FFFFFFFF) ACK Programming Figure 20.21 Programming Sequence (a) User boot MAT programming selection The boot program will transfer a programming program. The data is programmed to the user boot MATs by the transferred programming program. Command H'42 * Command, H'42, (one byte): User boot-program programming selection Response H'06 * Response, H'06, (one byte): Response to user boot-program programming selection When the programming program has been transferred, the boot program will return ACK. Error Response H'C2 ERROR * Error response : H'C2 (1 byte): Error response to user boot MAT programming selection * ERROR : (1 byte): Error code H'54 : Selection processing error (transfer error occurs and processing is not completed) * User-program programming selection The boot program will transfer a program for programming. The data is programmed to the user MATs by the transferred program for programming. Command H'43 * Command, H'43, (one byte): User-program programming selection Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 801 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Response H'06 * Response, H'06, (one byte): Response to user-program programming selection When the programming program has been transferred, the boot program will return ACK. Error Response H'C3 ERROR * Error response : H'C3 (1 byte): Error response to user MAT programming selection * ERROR : (1 byte): Error code H'54 : Selection processing error (transfer error occurs and processing is not completed) (b) 128-byte programming The boot program will use the programming program transferred by the programming selection to program the user boot MATs or user MATs in response to 128-byte programming. Command H'50 Data *** SUM Address *** * Command, H'50, (one byte): 128-byte programming * Programming Address (four bytes): Start address for programming Multiple of the size specified in response to the programming unit inquiry (i.e. H'00, H'01, H'00, H'00 : H'00010000) * Programming Data (128 bytes): Data to be programmed The size is specified in the response to the programming unit inquiry. * SUM (one byte): Checksum Response H'06 * Response, H'06, (one byte): Response to 128-byte programming On completion of programming, the boot program will return ACK. Error Response H'D0 ERROR * Error response, H'D0, (one byte): Error response for 128-byte programming * ERROR: (one byte): Error code H'11: Checksum Error H'2A: Address error The address is not within the specified MAT. H'53: Programming error A programming error has occurred and programming cannot be continued. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 802 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) The specified address should match the unit for programming of data. For example, when the programming is in 128-byte units, the lower byte of the address should be H'00 or H'80. When there are less than 128 bytes of data to be programmed, the host should fill the rest with H'FF. Sending the 128-byte programming command with the address of H'FFFFFFFF will stop the programming operation. The boot program will interpret this as the end of the programming and wait for selection of programming or erasing. Command H'50 Address SUM * Command, H'50, (one byte): 128-byte programming * Programming Address (four bytes): End code is H'FF, H'FF, H'FF, H'FF. * SUM (one byte): Checksum Response H'06 * Response, H'06, (one byte): Response to 128-byte programming On completion of programming, the boot program will return ACK. Error Response H'D0 ERROR * Error Response, H'D0, (one byte): Error response for 128-byte programming * ERROR: (one byte): Error code H'11: Checksum error H'53: Programming error An error has occurred in programming and programming cannot be continued. (10) Erasure Erasure is performed with the erasure selection and block erasure command. Firstly, erasure is selected by the erasure selection command and the boot program then erases the specified block. The command should be repeatedly executed if two or more blocks are to be erased. Sending a block-erasure command from the host with the block number H'FF will stop the erasure operating. On completion of erasing, the boot program will wait for selection of programming or erasing. The sequences of the issuing of erasure selection commands and the erasure of data are shown in figure 20.22. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 803 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Host Preparation for erasure (H'48) Transfer of erasure program ACK Erasure (Erasure block number) ACK Erasure (H'FF) ACK Boot program Repeat Erasure Figure 20.22 Erasure Sequence (a) Erasure Selection The boot program will transfer the erasure program. User MAT data is erased by the transferred erasure program. Command H'48 * Command, H'48, (one byte): Erasure selection Response H'06 * Response, H'06, (one byte): Response for erasure selection After the erasure program has been transferred, the boot program will return ACK. Error Response H'C8 ERROR * Error Response, H'C8, (one byte): Error response to erasure selection * ERROR: (one byte): Error code H'54: Selection processing error (transfer error occurs and processing is not completed) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 804 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (b) Block Erasure The boot program will erase the contents of the specified block. Command H'58 Size Block number SUM * Command, H'58, (one byte): Erasure * Size (one byte): The number of bytes that represents the erasure block number This is fixed to 1. * Block number (one byte): Number of the block to be erased * SUM (one byte): Checksum Response H'06 * Response, H'06, (one byte): Response to Erasure After erasure has been completed, the boot program will return ACK. Error Response H'D8 ERROR * Error Response, H'D8, (one byte): Response to Erasure * ERROR (one byte): Error code H'11: Sum check error H'29: Block number error Block number is incorrect. H'51: Erasure error An error has occurred during erasure. On receiving block number H'FF, the boot program will stop erasure and wait for a selection command. Command H'58 Size Block number SUM * Command, H'58, (one byte): Erasure * Size, (one byte): The number of bytes that represents the block number This is fixed to 1. * Block number (one byte): H'FF Stop code for erasure * SUM (one byte): Checksum Response H'06 * Response, H'06, (one byte): Response to end of erasure (ACK) When erasure is to be performed after the block number H'FF has been sent, the procedure should be executed from the erasure selection command. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 805 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (11) Memory read The boot program will return the data in the specified address. Command H'52 Size Area Read address SUM Read size * Command: H'52 (1 byte): Memory read * Size (1 byte): Amount of data that represents the area, read address, and read size (fixed at 9) * Area (1 byte) H'00: User boot MAT H'01: User MAT An address error occurs when the area setting is incorrect. * Read address (4 bytes): Start address to be read from * Read size (4 bytes): Size of data to be read * SUM (1 byte): Checksum Response H'52 Data SUM Read size *** * * * * Response: H'52 (1 byte): Response to memory read Read size (4 bytes): Size of data to be read Data (n bytes): Data for the read size from the read address SUM (1 byte): Checksum H'D2 ERROR Error Response * Error response: H'D2 (1 byte): Error response to memory read * ERROR: (1 byte): Error code H'11: Sum check error H'2A: Address error The read address is not in the MAT. H'2B: Size error The read size exceeds the MAT. (12) User-Boot Program Sum Check The boot program will return the byte-by-byte total of the contents of the bytes of the user-boot program, as a four-byte value. Command H'4A * Command, H'4A, (one byte): Sum check for user-boot program Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 806 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Response H'5A Size Checksum of user boot program SUM * Response, H'5A, (one byte): Response to the sum check of user-boot program * Size (one byte): The number of bytes that represents the checksum This is fixed to 4. * Checksum of user boot program (four bytes): Checksum of user boot MATs The total of the data is obtained in byte units. * SUM (one byte): Sum check for data being transmitted (13) User-Program Sum Check The boot program will return the byte-by-byte total of the contents of the bytes of the user program. Command H'4B * Command, H'4B, (one byte): Sum check for user program Response H'5B Size Checksum of user program SUM * Response, H'5B, (one byte): Response to the sum check of the user program * Size (one byte): The number of bytes that represents the checksum This is fixed to 4. * Checksum of user boot program (four bytes): Checksum of user MATs The total of the data is obtained in byte units. * SUM (one byte): Sum check for data being transmitted (14) User Boot MAT Blank Check The boot program will check whether or not all user boot MATs are blank and return the result. Command H'4C * Command, H'4C, (one byte): Blank check for user boot MAT Response H'06 * Response, H'06, (one byte): Response to the blank check of user boot MAT If all user MATs are blank (H'FF), the boot program will return ACK. Error Response H'CC H'52 * Error Response, H'CC, (one byte): Response to blank check for user boot MAT * Error Code, H'52, (one byte): Erasure has not been completed. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 807 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) (15) User MAT Blank Check The boot program will check whether or not all user MATs are blank and return the result. Command H'4D * Command, H'4D, (one byte): Blank check for user MATs Response H'06 * Response, H'06, (one byte): Response to the blank check for user boot MATs If the contents of all user MATs are blank (H'FF), the boot program will return ACK. Error Response H'CD H'52 * Error Response, H'CD, (one byte): Error response to the blank check of user MATs. * Error code, H'52, (one byte): Erasure has not been completed. (16) Boot Program State Inquiry The boot program will return indications of its present state and error condition. This inquiry can be made in the inquiry/selection state or the programming/erasing state. Command H'4F * Command, H'4F, (one byte): Response H'5F Size Inquiry regarding boot program's state ERROR SUM Status * Response, H'5F, (one byte): Response to boot program state inquiry * Size (one byte): The number of bytes. This is fixed to 2. * Status (one byte): State of the boot program Table 20.13 Status Code Code H'11 H'12 H'13 H'1F H'31 H'3F H'4F H'5F Description Device Selection Wait Clock Mode Selection Wait Bit Rate Selection Wait Programming/Erasing State Transition Wait (Bit rate selection is completed) Programming State for Erasure Programming/Erasing Selection Wait (Erasure is completed) Programming Data Receive Wait Erasure Block Specification Wait (Erasure is completed) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 808 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) * ERROR (one byte): Error status ERROR = 0 indicates normal operation. ERROR = 1 indicates error has occurred. Table 20.14 Error Code Code H'00 H'11 H'12 H'21 H'22 H'24 H'25 H'26 H'27 H'29 H'2A H'2B H'51 H'52 H'53 H'54 H'80 H'FF * Description No Error Sum Check Error Program Size Error Device Code Mismatch Error Clock Mode Mismatch Error Bit Rate Selection Error Input Frequency Error Multiplication Ratio Error Operating Frequency Error Block Number Error Address Error Data Length Error Erasure Error Erasure Incomplete Error Programming Error Selection Processing Error Command Error Bit-Rate-Adjustment Confirmation Error SUM (one byte): Sum check Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 809 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) 20.9 Usage Notes 1. Download time of on-chip program The programming program that includes the initialization routine and the erasing program that includes the initialization routine are each 4 kbytes or less. Accordingly, when the CPU clock frequency is 34 MHz, the download for each program takes approximately 60 s at maximum. 2. Write to flash-memory related registers by DMAC While an instruction in on-chip RAM is being executed, the DMAC can write to the SCO bit in FCCS that is used for a download request or FMATS that is used for MAT switching. Make sure that these registers are not accidentally written to, otherwise an on-chip program may be downloaded and damage RAM or a MAT switchover may occur and the CPU get out of control. Do not use DMAC to program FLASH related registers. 3. Compatibility with programming/erasing program of conventional F-ZTAT H8 microcomputer A programming/erasing program for flash memory used in the conventional F-ZTAT H8 microcomputer which does not support download of the on-chip program by a SCO transfer request cannot run in this LSI. Be sure to download the on-chip program to execute programming/erasing of flash memory in this LSI. 4. Monitoring runaway by WDT Unlike the conventional F-ZTAT H8 microcomputer, no countermeasures are available for a runaway by WDT during programming/erasing by the downloaded on-chip program. Prepare countermeasures (e.g. use of the periodic timer interrupts) for WDT while taking the programming/erasing time into consideration as required. 5. Notes on supplying power When the power is supplied, the reset signal must be a low level and the external-input clock must be supplied. 6. User branch processing intervals The user branch processing interval differs for programming and erasing operations. Table 20.15 shows the maximum start intervals when the CPU clock frequency is 35 MHz. Table 20.15 User Branch Processing Start Intervals Maximum Interval Programming operation Erasing operation 1 ms 30 ms Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 810 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 21 Mask ROM Section 21 Mask ROM H8S/2635 has 256 kbytes of mask ROM. The on-chip ROM is connected to the CPU, data transfer controller (DTC), and DMA controller (DMAC) with a 16-bit data bus. The on-chip ROM can be accessed by the CPU, DTC, and DMAC in 8 or 16-bit units. The data in the on-chip ROM can always be accessed in one state. Internal data bus (upper 8 bits) Internal data bus (lower 8 bits) H'000000 H'000002 H'000001 H'000003 H'03FFFE H'03FFFF Figure 21.1 Block Diagram of 256-kbyte Mask ROM (HD6432365) The on-chip ROM is enabled or disabled according to the operating mode. The operating mode is selected by the mode setting pins MD2 to MD0 as shown in table 3.1. Select mode 4 or 7 when the on-chip ROM is used, and mode 1 or 2 when the on-chip ROM is not used. The on-chip ROM is allocated in area 0. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 811 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 21 Mask ROM Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 812 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 22 Clock Pulse Generator Section 22 Clock Pulse Generator This LSI has an on-chip clock pulse generator (CPG) that generates the system clock () and internal clocks. The clock pulse generator consists of an oscillator circuit, PLL circuit, and divider. Figure 22.1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generator. PLLCR STC0, STC1 SCKCR SCK2 to SCK0 EXTAL Oscillator XTAL PLL circuit (x1, 2, 4) Divider Legend: PLLCR: PLL system control register SCKCR: System clock control register System clock to pin Internal clock to peripheral modules Figure 22.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator The frequency can be changed by means of the PLL circuit. Frequency changes are made by software by means of settings in the PLL control register (PLLCR) and the system clock control register (SCKCR). 22.1 Register Descriptions The clock pulse generator has the following registers. * System clock control register (SCKCR) * PLL control register (PLLCR) CPG0400A_010020020100 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 813 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 22 Clock Pulse Generator 22.1.1 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR) SCKCR controls clock output and selects operation when the frequency multiplication factor used by the PLL circuit is changed, and the division ratio used by the divider. Bit 7 Bit Name PSTOP Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Clock Output Disable Controls output. Normal Operation 0: output 1: Fixed high Sleep Mode 0: output 1: Fixed high Software Standby Mode 0: Fixed high 1: Fixed high Hardware Standby Mode 0: High impedance 1: High impedance All module clock stop mode 0: output 1: Fixed high 6 -- 0 R/W Reserved Though this bit can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. 5, 4 -- All 0 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 3 STCS 0 R/W Frequency Multiplication Factor Switching Mode Select Selects the operation when the PLL circuit frequency multiplication factor is changed. 0: Specified multiplication factor is valid after transition to software standby mode 1: Specified multiplication factor is valid immediately after STC1 and STC0 bits are rewritten Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 814 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 22 Clock Pulse Generator Bit 2 1 0 Bit Name SCK2 SCK1 SCK0 Initial Value 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description System Clock Select 2 to 0 Select the division ratio. 000: 1/1 001: 1/2 010: 1/4 011: Setting prohibited 100: Setting prohibited 101: Setting prohibited 11x: Setting prohibited Legend: x: Don't care 22.1.2 PLL Control Register (PLLCR) PLLCR sets the frequency multiplication factor used by the PLL circuit. Bit 7 to 4 3 Bit Name -- Initial Value All 0 R/W -- Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. -- 0 R/W Reserved Though this bit can be read from or written to, the write value should always be 0. 2 -- 0 R/W Reserved This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 1 0 STC1 STC0 0 0 R/W R/W Frequency Multiplication Factor The STC bits specify the frequency multiplication factor used by the PLL circuit. 00: x1 01: x2 10: x4 11: Setting prohibited Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 815 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 22 Clock Pulse Generator 22.2 Oscillator Clock pulses can be supplied by connecting a crystal resonator, or by input of an external clock. 22.2.1 Connecting a Crystal Oscillator A crystal oscillator can be connected as shown in the example in figure 22.2. Select the damping resistance Rd according to table 22.1. An AT-cut parallel-resonance type should be used. When a clock is supplied with a crystal resonator connected, the frequency of the crystal resonator should be 8 MHz to 25 MHz. Figure 22.3 shows the equivalent circuit of the crystal oscillator. Use a crystal oscillator that has the characteristics shown in table 22.2. CL1 EXTAL XTAL Rd CL2 CL1 = CL2 = 10 to 22 pF* Note: * In the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group, CL1 = CL2 = 10 pF. Figure 22.2 Connection of Crystal Oscillator (Example) Table 22.1 Damping Resistance Value Frequency (MHz) Rd () 8 200 12 0 16 0 20 0 25 0 CL L XTAL Rs EXTAL AT-cut parallel-resonance type C0 Figure 22.3 Crystal Oscillator Equivalent Circuit Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 816 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 22 Clock Pulse Generator Table 22.2 Crystal Oscillator Characteristics Frequency (MHz) RS max () C0 max (pF) 8 80 7 12 60 7 16 50 7 20 40 7 25 40 7 22.2.2 External Clock Input An external clock signal can be input as shown in the examples in figure 22.4. If the XTAL pin is left open, make sure that parasitic capacitance is no more than 10 pF. When the counter clock is input to the XTAL pin, make sure that the external clock is held high in standby mode. Table 22.3 shows the input conditions for the external clock. The frequency of an external clock to be input should be 8 MHz to 25 MHz. EXTAL XTAL Open External clock input (a) XTAL pin left open EXTAL XTAL External clock input (b) Counter clock input at XTAL pin Figure 22.4 External Clock Input (Examples) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 817 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 22 Clock Pulse Generator Table 22.3 External Clock Input Conditions VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V Item External clock input low pulse width External clock input high pulse width External clock rise time External clock fall time Clock low pulse width Clock high pulse width Symbol tEXL tEXH tEXr tEXf tCL tCH Min 15 15 -- -- 0.4 0.4 Max -- -- 5 5 0.6 0.6 Unit ns ns ns ns tcyc tcyc Test Conditions Figure 22.5 tEXH tEXL EXTAL VCC x 0.5 tEXr tEXf Figure 22.5 External Clock Input Timing 22.3 PLL Circuit The PLL circuit has the function of multiplying the frequency of the clock from the oscillator by a factor of 1, 2, or 4. The multiplication factor is set with the STC1 and the STC0 bits in PLLCR. The phase of the rising edge of the internal clock is controlled so as to match that of the rising edge of the EXTAL pin. When the multiplication factor of the PLL circuit is changed, the operation varies according to the setting of the STCS bit in SCKCR. When STCS = 0, the setting becomes valid after a transition to software standby mode. The transition time count is performed in accordance with the setting of bits STS3 to STS0 in SBYCR. For details on SBYCR, refer to section 23.1.1, Standby Control Register (SBYCR). 1. The initial PLL circuit multiplication factor is 1. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 818 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 22 Clock Pulse Generator 2. A value is set in bits STS3 to STS0 to give the specified transition time. 3. The target value is set in bits STC1 and STC0, and a transition is made to software standby mode. 4. The clock pulse generator stops and the value set in STC1 and STC0 becomes valid. 5. Software standby mode is cleared, and a transition time is secured in accordance with the setting in STS3 to STS0. 6. After the set transition time has elapsed, this LSI resumes operation using the target multiplication factor. When STCS = 1, this LSI operates using the new multiplication factor immediately after bits STC1 and STC0 are rewritten. 22.4 Frequency Divider The frequency divider divides the PLL output clock to generate a 1/2 or 1/4 clock. 22.5 22.5.1 Usage Notes Notes on Clock Pulse Generator 1. The following points should be noted since the frequency of changes according to the setting of SCKCR and PLLCR. Select the clock division ratio that is within the operation guaranteed range of clock cycle time tcyc shown in the AC timing of Electrical Characteristics. In other words, the range of must be specified from 8 MHz (min) to 33 MHz* (max); outside of this range must be prevented. 2. All the on-chip peripheral modules operate on the . Therefore, note that the time processing of modules such as a timer and SCI differ before and after changing the clock division ratio. In addition, wait time for clearing software standby mode differs by changing the clock division ratio. See the description, Setting Oscillation Stabilization Time after Clearing Software Standby Mode in section 23.2.3, Software Standby Mode, for details. 3. Note that the frequency of will be changed when setting SCKCR or PLLCR while executing the external bus cycle with the write-data-buffer function. Note: * 34 MHz for the H8S/2368 0.18m F-ZTAT Group Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 819 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 22 Clock Pulse Generator 22.5.2 Notes on Oscillator Since various characteristics related to the oscillator are closely linked to the user's board design, thorough evaluation is necessary on the user's part, using the oscillator connection examples shown in this section as a guide. As the oscillator circuit ratings will depend on the floating capacitance of the oscillator and the mounting circuit, the ratings should be determined in consultation with the oscillator manufacturer. The design must ensure that a voltage exceeding the maximum rating is not applied to the oscillator pin. 22.5.3 Notes on Board Design When using the crystal oscillator, place the crystal oscillator and its load capacitors as close as possible to the XTAL and EXTAL pins. Other signal lines should be routed away from the oscillator circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation. See figure 22.6. Avoid Signal A Signal B This LSI CL2 XTAL EXTAL CL1 Figure 22.6 Note on Oscillator Board Design Figure 22.7 shows the external circuitry recommended for the PLL circuit. Separate PLLVcc and PLLVss from the other Vcc and Vss lines at the board power supply source, and be sure to insert bypass capacitors CPB and CB close to the pins. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 820 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 22 Clock Pulse Generator Rp: 200 PLLVCC CPB: 0.1 F* PLLVSS VCC CB: 0.1 F* VSS Note: * CB and CPB are laminated ceramic capacitors. Figure 22.7 Recommended External Circuitry for PLL Circuit Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 821 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 22 Clock Pulse Generator Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 822 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 23 Power-Down Modes Section 23 Power-Down Modes In addition to the normal program execution state, this LSI has power-down modes in which operation of the CPU and oscillator is halted and power dissipation is reduced. Low-power operation can be achieved by individually controlling the CPU, on-chip peripheral modules, and so on. This LSI's operating modes are high-speed mode and six power down modes: * * * * * * Clock division mode Sleep mode Module stop mode All module clock stop mode Software standby mode Hardware standby mode Sleep mode is a CPU state, clock division mode is an on-chip peripheral function (including bus masters and the CPU) state, and module stop mode is an on-chip peripheral function (including bus masters other than the CPU) state. A combination of these modes can be set. After a reset, this LSI is in high-speed mode. Table 23.1 shows the internal states of this LSI in each mode. Figure 23.1 shows the mode transition diagram. LPWS264A_000020020100 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 823 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 23 Power-Down Modes Table 23.1 Operating Modes and Internal States of the LSI Operating State High Speed Mode Clock Division Mode Functions Functions Sleep Mode Functions Halted All Module Software Module Clock Stop Standby Stop Mode Mode Mode Functions Functions Functions Halted Halted Halted Hardware Standby Mode Halted Halted Clock pulse generator Functions CPU Instruction Functions execution Register External interrupts NMI IRQ0 to 7 Functions Functions Retained Functions Functions Functions Functions Retained Functions Undefined Halted Peripheral WDT functions TMR Functions Functions Functions Functions Halted (Retained) Halted (Reset) Halted (Reset) Functions Functions Functions Halted (Retained) Functions/ Halted Halted (Retained) 1 (Retained)* Halted (Retained) Halted (Retained) Halted (Retained) Halted (Retained) Halted (Retained) Halted (Retained) Halted* (Reset/ Retained) 2 DMAC Functions Functions Functions Halted (Retained) Halted (Retained) Halted (Retained) Halted (Retained) Halted (Retained) Halted (Retained) Halted* (Reset/ Retained) 2 Halted (Retained) Halted (Retained) Halted (Retained) Halted (Retained) Halted (Retained) Halted (Retained) Halted* (Reset/ Retained) 2 Halted (Reset) Halted (Reset) Halted (Reset) Halted (Reset) Halted (Reset) Halted (Reset) Halted (Reset) DTC Functions Functions Functions TPU Functions Functions Functions PPG Functions Functions Functions D/A Functions Functions Functions A/D Functions Functions Functions SCI Functions Functions Functions IIC2 Functions Functions Functions Halted* (Reset/ Retained) 3 Halted* (Reset/ Retained) 3 Halted* (Reset/ Retained) 3 Halted (Reset) RAM I/O Functions Functions Functions Functions Functions Functions Functions Functions Functions Retained Retained Retained Retained High impedance Notes: "Halted (Retained)" in the table means that internal register values are retained and internal operations are suspended. "Halted (Reset)" in the table means that internal register values and internal states are initialized. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 824 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 23 Power-Down Modes In module stop mode, only modules for which a stop setting has been made are halted (reset or retained). 1. The active or halted state can be selected by means of the MSTP0 bit in MSTPCR. 2. TDR, SSR, and RDR are halted (reset) and other registers are halted (retained). 3. BC2 to BC0 are halted (reset) and other registers are halted (retained). STBY pin = low Reset state Hardware standby mode STBY pin = high RES pin = low RES pin = high SSBY = 0 SLEEP instruction High-speel mode (Internal clock is PLL circuit output clock) Sleep mode MSTPCR = H'FFFF (H'FFFE), EXMSTPCR = H'FFFF, SSBY = 0 All module-clocks-stop mode SSBY = 1 Software standby mode Any interrupt SLEEP instruction SCK2 to SCK0 = 0 SCK2 to SCK0 0 Interrupt*1 SLEEP instruction Clock division mode External interrupt*2 Program execution state : Transition after exception handling Program-halted state : Power- down mode Notes: 1. NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ7, 8-bit timer interrupts, watchdog timer interrupts. (8-bit timer interrupts are valid when MSTP0 = 0.) 2. NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ7 (IRQ0 to IRQ7 are valid when the corresponding bit in SSIER is 1.) * From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when STBY is driven low. * From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs when RES is driven low. Figure 23.1 Mode Transitions Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 825 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 23 Power-Down Modes 23.1 Register Descriptions The registers relating to the power-down mode are shown below. For details on the system clock control register (SCKCR), refer to section 22.1.1, System Clock Control Register (SCKCR). * * * * * * System clock control register (SCKCR) Standby control register (SBYCR) Module stop control register H (MSTPCRH) Module stop control register L (MSTPCRL) Extension module stop control register H (EXMSTPCRH) Extension module stop control register L (EXMSTPCRL) Standby Control Register (SBYCR) 23.1.1 SBYCR performs software standby mode control. Bit 7 Bit Name SSBY Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Software Standby This bit specifies the transition mode after executing the SLEEP instruction 0: Shifts to sleep mode after the SLEEP instruction is executed 1: Shifts to software standby mode after the SLEEP instruction is executed This bit does not change when clearing the software standby mode by using external interrupts and shifting to normal operation. This bit should be written 0 when clearing. 6 OPE 1 R/W Output Port Enable Specifies whether the output of the address bus and bus control signals (CS0 to CS7, AS, RD, HWR, LWR, UCAS, LCAS) is retained or set to the high-impedance state in software standby mode. 0: In software standby mode, address bus and bus control signals are high-impedance 1: In software standby mode, address bus and bus control signals retain output state Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 826 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 23 Power-Down Modes Bit 5, 4 Bit Name -- Initial Value All 0 R/W -- Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The initial value should not be changed. 3 2 1 0 STS3 STS2 STS1 STS0 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W Standby Timer Select 3 to 0 These bits select the time the MCU waits for the clock to stabilize when software standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt. With crystal oscillation, refer to table 23.2 and make a selection according to the operating frequency so that the standby time is at least the oscillation stabilization time. With an external clock, a PLL circuit stabilization time is necessary. Refer to table 23.2 to set the wait time. When DRAM is used and self-refreshing in the software standby state is selected, note that the DRAM's tRAS (self-refresh RAS pulse width) specification must be satisfied. With the F-ZTAT version, a flash memory stabilization time must be provided. 0000: Setting prohibited 0001: Setting prohibited 0010: Setting prohibited 0011: Setting prohibited 0100: Setting prohibited 0101: Standby time = 64 states 0110: Standby time = 512 states 0111: Standby time = 1024 states 1000: Standby time = 2048 states 1001: Standby time = 4096 states 1010: Standby time = 16384 states 1011: Standby time = 32768 states 1100: Standby time = 65536 states 1101: Standby time = 131072 states 1110: Standby time = 262144 states 1111: Standby time = 524288 states Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 827 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 23 Power-Down Modes 23.1.2 Module Stop Control Registers H and L (MSTPCRH, MSTPCRL) MSTPCR performs module stop mode control. Setting a bit to 1, the corresponding module enters module stop mode, while clearing the bit to 0 clears the module stop mode. * Bit 15 MSTPCRH Bit Name ACSE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Module All-Module-Clocks-Stop Mode Enable Enables or disables all-module-clocks-stop mode, in which, when the CPU executes a SLEEP instruction after module stop mode has been set for all the on-chip peripheral functions controlled by MSTPCR or the on-chip peripheral functions except the TMR. 0: All-module-clocks-stop mode disabled 1: All-module-clocks-stop mode enabled 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W DMA controller (DMAC) Data transfer controller (DTC) 16-bit timer-pulse unit (TPU) Programmable pulse generator (PPG) D/A converter (channels 2 and 3) * Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTPCRL Bit Name MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Module A/D converter Serial communication interface 4 (SCI_4) Serial communication interface 3 (SCI_3) Serial communication interface 2 (SCI_2) Serial communication interface 1 (SCI_1) Serial communication interface 0 (SCI_0) 8-bit timer (TMR) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 828 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 23 Power-Down Modes 23.1.3 Extension Module Stop Control Registers H and L (EXMSTPCRH, EXMSTPCRL) EXMSTPCR performs all-module-clocks-stop mode control with MSTPCR. When entering all-module-clocks-stop mode, set EXMSTPCR to H'FFFF. Otherwise, set EXMSTPCR to H'FFFD. * Bit 15 to 12 11 10 9 8 EXMSTPCRH Bit Name -- Initial Value All 1 R/W R/W Module Reserved Read/write is enabled. 1 should be written in writing. MSTP27 MSTP26 MSTP25 MSTP24 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W -- -- -- -- * Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EXMSTPCRL Bit Name MSTP23 MSTP22 MSTP21 MSTP20 MSTP19 MSTP18 MSTP17 MSTP16 Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Module -- -- -- I2C bus interface 2_1 (IIC2_1) I2C bus interface 2_0 (IIC2_0) -- -- -- Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 829 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 23 Power-Down Modes 23.2 23.2.1 Operation Clock Division Mode When bits SCK2 to SCK0 in SCKCR are set to a value from 001 to 101, a transition is made to clock division mode at the end of the bus cycle. In clock division mode, the CPU, bus masters, and on-chip peripheral functions all operate on the operating clock (1/2 or 1/4) specified by bits SCK2 to SCK0. Clock division mode is cleared by clearing all of bits SCK2 to SCK0 to 0. A transition is made to high-speed mode at the end of the bus cycle, and clock division mode is cleared. If a SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is cleared to 0, the chip enters sleep mode. When sleep mode is cleared by an interrupt, clock division mode is restored. If a SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the chip enters software standby mode. When software standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt, clock division mode is restored. When the RES pin is driven low, the reset state is entered and clock division mode is cleared. The same applies to a reset caused by watchdog timer overflow. When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. 23.2.2 Sleep Mode Transition to Sleep Mode: When the SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit is 0 in SBYCR, the CPU enters the sleep mode. In sleep mode, CPU operation stops but the contents of the CPU's internal registers are retained. Other peripheral functions do not stop. Exiting Sleep Mode: Sleep mode is exited by any interrupt, or signals at the RES, or STBY pins. * Exiting Sleep Mode by Interrupts: When an interrupt occurs, sleep mode is exited and interrupt exception processing starts. Sleep mode is not exited if the interrupt is disabled, or interrupts other than NMI are masked by the CPU. * Exiting Sleep Mode by RES pin: Setting the RES pin level low selects the reset state. After the stipulated reset input duration, driving the RES pin high starts the CPU performing reset exception processing. * Exiting Sleep Mode by STBY Pin: Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 830 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 23 Power-Down Modes When the STBY pin level is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. 23.2.3 Software Standby Mode Transition to Software Standby Mode: If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, software standby mode is entered. In this mode, the CPU, on-chip peripheral functions, and oscillator all stop. However, the contents of the CPU's internal registers, RAM data, and the states of on-chip peripheral functions other than the SCI and A/D converter, and I/O ports, are retained. Whether the address bus and bus control signals are placed in the highimpedance state or retain the output state can be specified by the OPE bit in SBYCR. In this mode the oscillator stops, and therefore power dissipation is significantly reduced. Clearing Software Standby Mode: Software standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt (NMI pin, or pins IRQ0 to IRQ7), or by means of the RES pin or STBY pin. Setting the SSI bit in SSIER to 1 enables IRQ0 to IRQ7 to be used as software standby mode clearing sources. Clearing with an Interrupt: When an NMI or IRQ0 to IRQ7 interrupt request signal is input, clock oscillation starts, and after the elapse of the time set in bits STS3 to STS0 in SBYCR, stable clocks are supplied to the entire LSI, software standby mode is cleared, and interrupt exception handling is started. When clearing software standby mode with an IRQ0 to IRQ7 interrupt, set the corresponding enable bit to 1 and ensure that no interrupt with a higher priority than interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ7 is generated. Software standby mode cannot be cleared if the interrupt has been masked on the CPU side or has been designated as a DTC activation source. Clearing with the RES Pin: When the RES pin is driven low, clock oscillation is started. At the same time as clock oscillation starts, clocks are supplied to the entire LSI. Note that the RES pin must be held low until clock oscillation stabilizes. When the RES pin goes high, the CPU begins reset exception handling. Clearing with the STBY Pin: When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 831 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 23 Power-Down Modes Setting Oscillation Stabilization Time after Clearing Software Standby Mode: Bits STS3 to STS0 in SBYCR should be set as described below. Using a Crystal Oscillator: Set bits STS3 to STS0 so that the standby time is more than the oscillation stabilization time. Table 23.2 shows the standby times for operating frequencies and settings of bits STS3 to STS0. Using an External Clock: A PLL circuit stabilization time is necessary. Refer to table 23.2 to set the wait time. Table 23.2 Oscillation Stabilization Time Settings *1 [MHz] STS3 STS2 STS1 STS0 Standby Time 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 64 512 1024 2048 4096 16384 32765 65536 131072 262144 524288 2 34* 33 -- -- -- -- -- 1.9 15.5 31.0 62.1 0.12 0.50 0.99 1.99 3.97 7.94 15.89 25 -- -- -- -- -- 2.6 20.5 41.0 81.9 0.16 0.66 1.31 2.62 5.24 10.49 20.97 20 -- -- -- -- -- 3.2 25.6 51.2 102.4 0.20 0.82 1.64 3.28 6.55 13.11 26.21 13 -- -- -- -- -- 4.9 39.4 78.8 157.5 0.32 1.26 2.52 5.04 10.08 20.16 40.33 10 -- -- -- -- -- 6.4 51.2 102.4 204.8 0.41 1.64 3.28 6.55 13.11 26.21 52.43 8 -- -- -- -- -- 8.0 64.0 128.0 256.0 0.51 2.05 4.10 8.19 16.38 32.77 65.54 Unit s -- -- -- -- -- 1.9 15.1 30.1 60.2 0.12 0.48 0.96 1.93 3.86 7.71 15.42 ms : Recommended time setting Notes: 1. is the frequency divider output. 2. Supported only by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 832 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 23 Power-Down Modes Software Standby Mode Application Example: Figure 23.2 shows an example in which a transition is made to software standby mode at the falling edge on the NMI pin, and software standby mode is cleared at the rising edge on the NMI pin. In this example, an NMI interrupt is accepted with the NMIEG bit in INTCR cleared to 0 (falling edge specification), then the NMIEG bit is set to 1 (rising edge specification), the SSBY bit is set to 1, and a SLEEP instruction is executed, causing a transition to software standby mode. Software standby mode is then cleared at the rising edge on the NMI pin. Oscillator NMI NMIEG SSBY NMI exception handling NMIEG=1 SSBY=1 Software standby mode (power-down mode) Oscillation stabilization time tOSC2 NMI exception handling SLEEP instruction Figure 23.2 Software Standby Mode Application Example Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 833 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 23 Power-Down Modes 23.2.4 Hardware Standby Mode Transition to Hardware Standby Mode: When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode from any mode. In hardware standby mode, all functions enter the reset state and stop operation, resulting in a significant reduction in power dissipation. As long as the prescribed voltage is supplied, on-chip RAM data is retained. I/O ports are set to the high-impedance state. In order to retain on-chip RAM data, the RAME bit in SYSCR should be cleared to 0 before driving the STBY pin low. Do not change the state of the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) while this LSI is in hardware standby mode. Clearing Hardware Standby Mode: Hardware standby mode is cleared by means of the STBY pin and the RES pin. When the STBY pin is driven high while the RES pin is low, the reset state is set and clock oscillation is started. Ensure that the RES pin is held low until the clock oscillator stabilizes (for details on the oscillation stabilization time, refer to table 23.2). When the RES pin is subsequently driven high, a transition is made to the program execution state via the reset exception handling state. Hardware Standby Mode Timing: Figure 23.3 shows an example of hardware standby mode timing. When the STBY pin is driven low after the RES pin has been driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. Hardware standby mode is cleared by driving the STBY pin high, waiting for the oscillation stabilization time, then changing the RES pin from low to high. Oscillator RES STBY Oscillation stabilization time Reset exception handling Figure 23.3 Hardware Standby Mode Timing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 834 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 23 Power-Down Modes Hardware Standby Mode Timing when Power Is Supplied (Only H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group): When entering hardware standby mode immediately after the power is supplied, the RES signal must be driven low for a given period with retaining the STBY signal high. After the RES signal is canceled, drive the STBY signal low. (1) Power supply RES (2) Reset period STBY (3) Hardware standby mode Figure 23.4 Hardware Standby Mode Timing when Power Is Supplied 23.2.5 Module Stop Mode Module stop mode can be set for individual on-chip peripheral modules. When the corresponding MSTP bit in MSTPCR or EXMSTPCR is set to 1, module operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. The CPU continues operating independently. When the corresponding MSTP bit is cleared to 0, module stop mode is cleared and the module starts operating at the end of the bus cycle. In module stop mode, the internal states of modules other than the SCI are retained. After reset clearance, all modules other than the DMAC, and DTC are in module stop mode. The module registers which are set in module stop mode cannot be read or written to. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 835 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 23 Power-Down Modes 23.2.6 All-Module-Clocks-Stop Mode When the ACSE bit in MSTPCRH is set to 1 and module stop mode is set for all the on-chip peripheral functions controlled by MSTPCR or EXMSTPCR (MSTPCR = H'FFFF, EXMSTPCR = H'FFFF), or for all the on-chip peripheral functions except the 8-bit timer (MSTPCR = H'FFFE, EXMSTPCR = H'FFFF), executing a SLEEP instruction while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is cleared to 0 will cause all the on-chip peripheral functions (except the 8-bit timer and watchdog timer), the bus controller, and the I/O ports to stop operating, and a transition to be made to all-moduleclocks-stop mode, at the end of the bus cycle. Operation or halting of the 8-bit timer can be selected by means of the MSTP0 bit. All-module-clocks-stop mode is cleared by an external interrupt (NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ7 pins), RES pin input, or an internal interrupt (8-bit timer, watchdog timer), and the CPU returns to the normal program execution state via the exception handling state. All-module-clocks-stop mode is not cleared if interrupts are disabled, if interrupts other than NMI are masked by the CPU, or if the relevant interrupt is designated as a DTC activation source. When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. 23.3 Clock Output Control Output of the clock can be controlled by means of the PSTOP bit in SCKCR, and DDR for the corresponding port. When the PSTOP bit is set to 1, the clock stops at the end of the bus cycle, and output goes high. clock output is enabled when the PSTOP bit is cleared to 0. When DDR for the corresponding port is cleared to 0, clock output is disabled and input port mode is set. Table 23.3 shows the state of the pin in each processing state. Table 23.3 Pin State in Each Processing State Register Setting DDR 0 1 1 PSTOP X 0 1 Normal operating state High impedance Sleep mode High impedance Software standby mode High impedance Fixed high Fixed high Hardware standby mode High impedance High impedance High impedance All-moduleclocks-stop mode High impedance output Fixed high output Fixed high output Fixed high Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 836 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 23 Power-Down Modes 23.4 23.4.1 Usage Notes I/O Port Status In software standby mode, I/O port states are retained. Therefore, there is no reduction in current dissipation for the output current when a high-level signal is output. 23.4.2 Current Dissipation during Oscillation Stabilization Standby Period Current dissipation increases during the oscillation stabilization standby period. 23.4.3 DMAC/DTC Module Stop Depending on the operating status of the DMAC or DTC, the MSTP14 to MSTP13 and may not be set to 1. Setting of the DMAC or DTC module stop mode should be carried out only when the respective module is not activated. For details, refer to section 7, DMA Controller (DMAC), and section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC). 23.4.4 On-Chip Peripheral Module Interrupts Relevant interrupt operations cannot be performed in module stop mode. Consequently, if module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to clear the CPU interrupt source or the DMAC or DTC activation source. Interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module stop mode. 23.4.5 Writing to MSTPCR, EXMSTPCR MSTPCR and EXMSTPCR should only be written to by the CPU. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 837 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 23 Power-Down Modes 23.4.6 Notes on Clock Division Mode The following points should be noted in clock division mode. * Select the clock division ratio specified by the SCK2 to SCK0 bits so that the frequency of is within the operation guaranteed range of clock cycle time (tcyc) shown in the Electrical Characteristics. In other words, the range of must be specified to 8 MHz (min.); outside of this range ( < 8 MHz) must be prevented. * All the on-chip peripheral modules operate on the . Therefore, note the time processing of modules such as a timer and SCI differ before and after changing the clock division ratio. In addition, wait time for clearing software standby mode differs by changing the clock division ratio. * Note that the frequency of will be changed by changing the clock division ratio. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 838 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Section 24 List of Registers The address list gives information on the on-chip I/O register addresses, how the register bits are configured, and the register states in each operating mode. The information is given as shown below. 1. Register addresses (address order) Registers are listed from the lower allocation addresses. Registers are classified by functional modules. The access size is indicated. 2. Register bits Bit configurations of the registers are described in the same order as the register addresses. Reserved bits are indicated by in the bit name column. No entry in the bit-name column indicates that the whole register is allocated as a counter or for holding data. For the registers of 16 or 32 bits, the MSB is described first. 3. Register states in each operating mode Register states are described in the same order as the register addresses. The register states described here are for the basic operating modes. If there is a specific reset for an on-chip peripheral module, refer to the section on that on-chip peripheral module. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 839 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers 24.1 Register Addresses (Address Order) The data bus width indicates the numbers of bits by which the register is accessed. The number of access states indicates the number of states based on the specified reference clock. Register Name DTC mode register A DTC source address register DTC mode register B DTC destination address register DTC transfer count register A DTC transfer count register B I C bus control register A_0 I C bus control register B_0 I C bus mode register_0 I C bus interrupt enable register_0 I C bus status register_0 Slave address register_0 I C transfer data register_0 I C receive data register_0 I C bus control register A_1 I C bus control register B_1 I C bus mode register_1 I C bus interrupt enable register_1 I C bus status register_1 Slave address register_1 I C transfer data register_1 I C receive data register_1 Serial expansion mode register_2 Interrupt priority register A Interrupt priority register B Interrupt priority register C Interrupt priority register D 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Abbreviation Bit No. Address Module MRA SAR MRB DAR CRA CRB ICCRA_0 ICCRB_0 ICMR_0 ICIER_0 ICSR_0 SAR_0 ICDRT_0 ICDRR_0 ICCRA_1 ICCRB_1 ICMR_1 ICIER_1 ICSR_1 SAR_1 ICDRT_1 ICDRR_1 SEMR_2 IPRA IPRB IPRC IPRD 8 24 8 24 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 H'BFFF H'FD58 H'FD59 H'FD5A H'FD5B H'FD5C H'FD5D H'FD5E H'FD5F H'FD60 H'FD61 H'FD62 H'FD63 H'FD64 H'FD65 H'FD66 H'FD67 H'FDA8 H'FE00 H'FE02 H'FE04 H'FE06 to H'BC00 DTC DTC DTC DTC DTC DTC IIC2_0 IIC2_0 IIC2_0 IIC2_0 IIC2_0 IIC2_0 IIC2_0 IIC2_0 IIC2_1 IIC2_1 IIC2_1 IIC2_1 IIC2_1 IIC2_1 IIC2_1 IIC2_1 SCI_2 INT INT INT INT Data Width 16/32 16/32 16/32 16/32 16/32 16/32 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 Access States 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 840 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Abbreviation Bit No. Address Module IPRE IPRF IPRG IPRH IPRI IPRJ IPRK ITSR SSIER ISCRL IrCR_0 P1DDR P2DDR P3DDR P5DDR P8DDR PADDR PBDDR PCDDR PDDDR PEDDR PFDDR PGDDR PFCR0 PFCR1 PFCR2 PAPCR PBPCR PCPCR PDPCR PEPCR 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 H'FE08 H'FE0A H'FE0C H'FE0E H'FE10 H'FE12 H'FE14 H'FE16 H'FE18 H'FE1C H'FE1E H'FE20 H'FE21 H'FE22 H'FE24 H'FE27 H'FE29 H'FE2A H'FE2B H'FE2C H'FE2D H'FE2E H'FE2F H'FE32 H'FE33 H'FE34 H'FE36 H'FE37 H'FE38 H'FE39 H'FE3A INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT IrDA_0 PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT Register Name Interrupt priority register E Interrupt priority register F Interrupt priority register G Interrupt priority register H Interrupt priority register I Interrupt priority register J Interrupt priority register K IRQ pin select register Software standby release IRQ enable register IRQ sense control register L IrDA control register_0 Port 1 data direction register Port 2 data direction register Port 3 data direction register Port 5 data direction register Port 8 data direction register Port A data direction register Port B data direction register Port C data direction register Port D data direction register Port E data direction register Port F data direction register Port G data direction register Port function control register 0 Port function control register 1 Port function control register 2 Port A MOS pull-up control register Port B MOS pull-up control register Port C MOS pull-up control register Port D MOS pull-up control register Port E MOS pull-up control register Data Width 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Access States 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 841 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Abbreviation Bit No. Address Module P3ODR PAODR SMR_3 BRR_3 SCR_3 TDR_3 SSR_3 RDR_3 SCMR_3 SMR_4 BRR_4 SCR_4 TDR_4 SSR_4 RDR_4 SCMR_4 TCR_3 TMDR_3 TIORH_3 TIORL_3 TIER_3 TSR_3 TCNT_3 TGRA_3 TGRB_3 TGRC_3 TGRD_3 TCR_4 TMDR_4 TIOR_4 TIER_4 TSR_4 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 H'FE3C H'FE3D H'FE40 H'FE41 H'FE42 H'FE43 H'FE44 H'FE45 H'FE46 H'FE48 H'FE49 H'FE4A H'FE4B H'FE4C H'FE4D H'FE4E H'FE80 H'FE81 H'FE82 H'FE83 H'FE84 H'FE85 H'FE86 H'FE88 H'FE8A H'FE8C H'FE8E H'FE90 H'FE91 H'FE92 H'FE94 H'FE95 PORT PORT SCI_3 SCI_3 SCI_3 SCI_3 SCI_3 SCI_3 SCI_3 SCI_4 SCI_4 SCI_4 SCI_4 SCI_4 SCI_4 SCI_4 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_3 TPU_4 TPU_4 TPU_4 TPU_4 TPU_4 Register Name Port 3 open drain control register Port A open drain control register Serial mode register_3 Bit rate register_3 Serial control register_3 Transmit data register_3 Serial status register_3 Receive data register_3 Smart card mode register_3 Serial mode register_4 Bit rate register_4 Serial control register_4 Transmit data register_4 Serial status register_4 Receive data register_4 Smart card mode register_4 Timer control register_3 Timer mode register_3 Timer I/O control register H_3 Timer I/O control register L_3 Timer interrupt enable register_3 Timer status register_3 Timer counter_3 Timer general register A_3 Timer general register B_3 Timer general register C_3 Timer general register D_3 Timer control register_4 Timer mode register_4 Timer I/O control register_4 Timer interrupt enable register_4 Timer status register_4 Data Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Access States 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 842 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Abbreviation Bit No. Address Module TCNT_4 TGRA_4 TGRB_4 TCR_5 TMDR_5 TIOR_5 TIER_5 TSR_5 TCNT_5 TGRA_5 TGRB_5 ABWCR ASTCR WTCRAH WTCRAL WTCRBH WTCRBL RDNCR 16 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 H'FE96 H'FE98 H'FE9A H'FEA0 H'FEA1 H'FEA2 H'FEA4 H'FEA5 H'FEA6 H'FEA8 H'FEAA H'FEC0 H'FEC1 H'FEC2 H'FEC3 H'FEC4 H'FEC5 H'FEC6 H'FEC8 H'FEC9 H'FECA H'FECB H'FECC H'FED0 H'FED2 H'FED4 H'FED6 H'FED7 H'FEE0 H'FEE2 TPU_4 TPU_4 TPU_4 TPU_5 TPU_5 TPU_5 TPU_5 TPU_5 TPU_5 TPU_5 TPU_5 BSC BSC BSC BSC BSC BSC BSC BSC BSC BSC BSC BSC BSC BSC BSC BSC BSC DMAC DMAC Register Name Timer counter_4 Timer general register A_4 Timer general register B_4 Timer control register_5 Timer mode register_5 Timer I/O control register_5 Timer interrupt enable register_5 Timer status register_5 Timer counter_5 Timer general register A_5 Timer general register B_5 Bus width control register Access state control register Wait control register AH Wait control register AL Wait control register BH Wait control register BL Read strobe timing control register Data Width 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Access States 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 CS assertion period control registers H CSACRH CS assertion period control register L Burst ROM interface control register H Burst ROM interface control register L Bus control register DRAM control register DRAM access control register Refresh control register Refresh timer counter Refresh time constant register Memory address register_0AH Memory address register_0AL CSACRL BROMCRH 8 BROMCRL BCR DRAMCR DRACCR REFCR RTCNT RTCOR MAR_0AH MAR_0AL 8 16 16 8 16 8 8 16 16 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 843 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Abbreviation Bit No. Address Module IOAR_0A ETCR_0A MAR_0BH MAR_0BL IOAR_0B ETCR_0B MAR_1AH MAR_1AL IOAR_1A ETCR_1A MAR_1BH MAR_1BL IOAR_1B ETCR_1B DMAWER DMATCR 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 8 8 H'FEE4 H'FEE6 H'FEE8 H'FEEA H'FEEC H'FEEE H'FEF0 H'FEF2 H'FEF4 H'FEF6 H'FEF8 H'FEFA H'FEFC H'FEFE H'FF20 H'FF21 H'FF22 H'FF23 H'FF24 H'FF25 H'FF26 H'FF27 H'FF28 H'FF29 H'FF2A H'FF2B H'FF2C H'FF2D H'FF2E H'FF2F H'FF30 DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DTC DTC DTC DTC DTC DTC DTC DTC DTC Register Name I/O address register_0A Transfer count register_0A Memory address register_0BH Memory address register_0BL I/O address register_0B Transfer count register_0B Memory address register_1AH Memory address register_1AL I/O address register_1A Transfer count register_1A Memory address register_1BH Memory address register_1BL I/O address register_1B Transfer count register_1B DMA write enable register DMA terminal control register DMA control register_0A DMA control register_0B DMA control register_1A DMA control register_1B DMA band control register H DMA band control register L DTC enable register A DTC enable register B DTC enable register C DTC enable register D DTC enable register E DTC enable register F DTC enable register G DTC enable register H DTC vector register Data Width 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 8 8 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Access States 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 DMACR_0A 8 DMACR_0B 8 DMACR_1A 8 DMACR_1B 8 DMABCRH DMABCRL DTCERA DTCERB DTCERC DTCERD DTCERE DTCERF DTCERG DTCERH DTVECR 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 844 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Abbreviation Bit No. Address Module INTCR IER ISR SBYCR SCKCR SYSCR MDCR MSTPCRH MSTPCRL 8 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8 H'FF31 H'FF32 H'FF34 H'FF3A H'FF3B H'FF3D H'FF3E H'FF40 H'FF41 H'FF42 H'FF43 H'FF45 H'FF46 H'FF47 H'FF48 H'FF49 H'FF4A H'FF4B H'FF4C H'FF4D H'FF4E H'FF4F H'FF50 H'FF51 H'FF52 H'FF53 H'FF54 H'FF57 H'FF58 INT INT INT SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM PPG PPG PPG PPG PPG PPG PPG PPG PPG PPG PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT Register Name Interrupt control register IRQ enable register IRQ status register Standby control register System clock control register System control register Mode control register Module stop control register H Module stop control register L Extension module stop control register H Extension module stop control register L PLL control register PPG output control register PPG output mode register Next data enable register H Next data enable register L Output data register H Output data register L Next data register H* Next data register L* 1 Data Width 16 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Access States 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EXMSTPCR 8 H EXMSTPCR 8 L PLLCR PCR PMR NDERH NDERL PODRH PODRL NDRH NDRL NDRH NDRL PORT1 PORT2 PORT3 PORT4 PORT5 PORT8 PORT9 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 Next data register H* Next data register L* Port 1 register Port 2 register Port 3 register Port 4 register Port 5 register Port 8 register Port 9 register 1 1 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 845 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Abbreviation Bit No. Address Module PORTA PORTB PORTC PORTD PORTE PORTF PORTG P1DR P2DR P3DR P5DR P8DR PADR PBDR PCDR PDDR PEDR PFDR PGDR SMR_0 BRR_0 SCR_0 TDR_0 SSR_0 RDR_0 SCMR_0 SMR_1 BRR_1 SCR_1 TDR_1 SSR_1 RDR_1 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 H'FF59 H'FF5A H'FF5B H'FF5C H'FF5D H'FF5E H'FF5F H'FF60 H'FF61 H'FF62 H'FF64 H'FF67 H'FF69 H'FF6A H'FF6B H'FF6C H'FF6D H'FF6E H'FF6F H'FF78 H'FF79 H'FF7A H'FF7B H'FF7C H'FF7D H'FF7E H'FF80 H'FF81 H'FF82 H'FF83 H'FF84 H'FF85 PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT SCI_0 SCI_0 SCI_0 SCI_0 SCI_0 SCI_0 SCI_0 SCI_1 SCI_1 SCI_1 SCI_1 SCI_1 SCI_1 Register Name Port A register Port B register Port C register Port D register Port E register Port F register Port G register Port 1 data register Port 2 data register Port 3 data register Port 5 data register Port 8 data register Port A data register Port B data register Port C data register Port D data register Port E data register Port F data register Port G data register Serial mode register_0 Bit rate register_0 Serial control register_0 Transmit data register_0 Serial status register_0 Receive data register_0 Smart card mode register_0 Serial mode register_1 Bit rate register_1 Serial control register_1 Transmit data register_1 Serial status register_1 Receive data register_1 Data Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Access States 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 846 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Abbreviation Bit No. Address Module SCMR_1 SMR_2 BRR_2 SCR_2 TDR_2 SSR_2 RDR_2 SCMR_2 ADDRA ADDRB ADDRC ADDRD ADDRE ADDRF ADDRG ADDRH ADCSR ADCR DADR2 DADR3 DACR23 TCR_0 TCR_1 TCSR_0 TCSR_1 TCORA_0 TCORA_1 TCORB_0 TCORB_1 TCNT_0 TCNT_1 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 H'FF86 H'FF88 H'FF89 H'FF8A H'FF8B H'FF8C H'FF8D H'FF8E H'FF90 H'FF92 H'FF94 H'FF96 H'FF98 H'FF9A H'FF9C H'FF9E H'FFA0 H'FFA1 H'FFA8 H'FFA9 H'FFAA H'FFB0 H'FFB1 H'FFB2 H'FFB3 H'FFB4 H'FFB5 H'FFB6 H'FFB7 H'FFB8 H'FFB9 SCI_1 SCI_2 SCI_2 SCI_2 SCI_2 SCI_2 SCI_2 SCI_2 A/D A/D A/D A/D A/D A/D A/D A/D A/D A/D D/A D/A D/A TMR_0 TMR_1 TMR_0 TMR_1 TMR_0 TMR_1 TMR_0 TMR_1 TMR_0 TMR_1 Register Name Smart card mode register_1 Serial mode register_2 Bit rate register_2 Serial control register_2 Transmit data register_2 Serial status register_2 Receive data register_2 Smart card mode register_2 A/D data register A A/D data register B A/D data register C A/D data register D A/D data register E A/D data register F A/D data register G A/D data register H A/D control/status register A/D control register D/A data register 2 D/A data register 3 D/A control register 23 Timer control register_0 Timer control register_1 Timer control/status register_0 Timer control/status register_1 Time constant register_A0 Time constant register_A1 Time constant register_B0 Time constant register_B1 Timer counter_0 Timer counter_1 Data Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Access States 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 847 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Abbreviation Bit No. Address Module TCSR_0 8 H'FFBC* (Write) H'FFBC (Read) Timer counter TCNT 8 H'FFBC* (Write) H'FFBD (Read) Reset control/status register RSTCSR 8 2 H'FFBE* WDT (Write) 2 2 Register Name Timer control/status register Data Width 16 Access States 2 WDT WDT 16 2 16 2 H'FFBF (Read) Timer start register Timer synchronous register Flash code control status register Flash program code select register Flash erase code select register Flash memory control register 1 Flash key code register Flash memory control register 2 Flash MAT select register Flash transfer destination address register Erase block register 1 Erase block register 2 Flash vector address control register Timer control register_0 Timer mode register_0 Timer I/O control register H_0 Timer I/O control register L_0 Timer interrupt enable register_0 Timer status register_0 Timer counter_0 Timer general register A_0 Timer general register B_0 TSTR TSYR 3 FCCS* 3 FPCS* 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 3 H'FFC0 H'FFC1 4 H'FFC4* 4 H'FFC5* TPU TPU FLASH FLASH FLASH FLASH FLASH FLASH FLASH FLASH FLASH FLASH FLASH TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_0 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 FECS* 3 H'FFC6* H'FFC8 H'FFC8 H'FFC9 H'FFC9 H'FFCA H'FFCA H'FFCB H'FFCB H'FFD0 H'FFD1 H'FFD2 H'FFD3 H'FFD4 H'FFD5 H'FFD6 H'FFD8 H'FFDA 4 FLMCR1 FKEY* 3 FLMCR2 3 FMATS* 3 FTDAR* EBR1 EBR2 FVACR* TCR_0 TMDR_0 TIORH_0 TIORL_0 TIER_0 TSR_0 TCNT_0 TGRA_0 TGRB_0 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 848 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Abbreviation Bit No. Address Module TGRC_0 TGRD_0 TCR_1 TMDR_1 TIOR_1 TIER_1 TSR_1 TCNT_1 TGRA_1 TGRB_1 TCR_2 TMDR_2 TIOR_2 TIER_2 TSR_2 TCNT_2 TGRA_2 TGRB_2 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 H'FFDC H'FFDE H'FFE0 H'FFE1 H'FFE2 H'FFE4 H'FFE5 H'FFE6 H'FFE8 H'FFEA H'FFF0 H'FFF1 H'FFF2 H'FFF4 H'FFF5 H'FFF6 H'FFF8 H'FFFA TPU_0 TPU_0 TPU_1 TPU_1 TPU_1 TPU_1 TPU_1 TPU_1 TPU_1 TPU_1 TPU_2 TPU_2 TPU_2 TPU_2 TPU_2 TPU_2 TPU_2 TPU_2 Register Name Timer general register C_0 Timer general register D_0 Timer control register_1 Timer mode register_1 Timer I/O control register_1 Timer interrupt enable register_1 Timer status register_1 Timer counter_1 Timer general register A_1 Timer general register B_1 Timer control register_2 Timer mode register_2 Timer I/O control register_2 Timer interrupt enable register_2 Timer status rgister_2 Timer counter_2 Timer general register A_2 Timer general register B_2 Data Width 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Access States 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes: 1. If the pulse output group 2 and pulse output group 3 output triggers are the same according to the PCR setting, the NDRH address will be H'FF4C, and if different, the address of NDRH for group 2 will be H'FF4E, and that for group 3 will be H'FF4C. Similarly, if the pulse output group 0 and pulse output group 1 output triggers are the same according to the PCR setting, the NDRL address will be H'FF4D, and if different, the address of NDRL for group 0 will be H'FF4F, and that for group 1 will be H'FF4D. 2. For writing, refer to section 13.6.1, Notes on Register Access. 3. Supported only by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. 4. Cannot be accessed by other than H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 849 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers 24.2 Register Bits Register bit names of the on-chip peripheral modules are described below. Each line covers eight bits, and 16- or 32-bit registers are shown as 2 or 4 lines. Register Name MRA SAR Bit 7 SM1 -- -- -- Bit 6 SM0 -- -- -- DISEL -- -- -- -- -- -- -- RCVD SCP WAIT TEIE TEND SVA5 ICDRT6 ICDRR6 RCVD SCP WAIT TEIE TEND SVA5 ICDRT6 ICDRR6 Bit 5 DM1 -- -- -- CHNS -- -- -- -- -- -- -- MST SDAO -- RIE RDRF SVA4 ICDRT5 ICDRR5 MST SDAO -- RIE RDRF SVA4 ICDRT5 ICDRR5 Bit 4 DM0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TRS -- -- NAKIE NACKF SVA3 ICDRT4 ICDRR4 TRS -- -- NAKIE NACKF SVA3 ICDRT4 ICDRR4 Bit 3 MD1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CKS3 SCLO BCWP STIE STOP SVA2 ICDRT3 ICDRR3 CKS3 SCLO BCWP STIE STOP SVA2 ICDRT3 ICDRR3 Bit 2 MD0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CKS2 -- BC2 ACKE AL SVA1 ICDRT2 ICDRR2 CKS2 -- BC2 ACKE AL SVA1 ICDRT2 ICDRR2 Bit 1 DTS -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CKS1 IICRST BC1 ACKBR AAS SVA0 ICDRT1 ICDRR1 CKS1 IICRST BC1 ACKBR AAS SVA0 ICDRT1 ICDRR1 Bit 0 Sz -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CKS0 -- BC0 ACKBT ADZ -- ICDRT0 ICDRR0 CKS0 -- BC0 ACKBT ADZ -- ICDRT0 ICDRR0 Module DTC* 1 MRB DAR CHNE -- -- -- CRA -- -- CRB -- -- ICCRA_0 ICCRB_0 ICMR_0 ICIER_0 ICSR_0 SAR_0 ICDRT_0 ICDRR_0 ICCRA_1 ICCRB_1 ICMR_1 ICIER_1 ICSR_1 SAR_1 ICDRT_1 ICDRR_1 ICE BBSY -- TIE TDRE SVA6 ICDRT7 ICDRR7 ICE BBSY -- TIE TDRE SVA6 ICDRT7 ICDRR7 IIC2_0 IIC2_1 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 850 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Bit 7 Name SEMR_2 -- Bit 6 -- Bit 5 -- Bit 4 -- Bit 3 ABCS Bit 2 ACS2 Bit 1 ACS1 Bit 0 ACS0 Module SCI_2 Smart card interface 2 INT IPRA -- -- IPRA14 IPRA6 IPRB14 IPRB6 IPRC14 IPRC6 IPRD14 IPRD6 IPRE14 IPRE6 IPRF14 IPRF6 IPRG14 IPRG6 IPRH14 IPRH6 IPRI14 IPRI6 IPRJ14 IPRJ6 IPRK14 IPRK6 -- ITS6 -- SSI6 IPRA13 IPRA5 IPRB13 IPRB5 IPRC13 IPRC5 IPRD13 IPRD5 IPRE13 IPRE5 IPRF13 IPRF5 IPRG13 IPRG5 IPRH13 IPRH5 IPRI13 IPRI5 IPRJ13 IPRJ5 IPRK13 IPRK5 -- ITS5 -- SSI5 IPRA12 IPRA4 IPRB12 IPRB4 IPRC12 IPRC4 IPRD12 IPRD4 IPRE12 IPRE4 IPRF12 IPRF4 IPRG12 IPRG4 IPRH12 IPRH4 IPRI12 IPRI4 IPRJ12 IPRJ4 IPRK12 IPRK4 -- ITS4 -- SSI4 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ITS3 -- SSI3 IPRA10 IPRA2 IPRB10 IPRB2 IPRC10 IPRC2 IPRD10 IPRD2 IPRE10 IPRE2 IPRF10 IPRF2 IPRG10 IPRG2 IPRH10 IPRH2 IPRI10 IPRI2 IPRJ10 IPRJ2 IPRK10 IPRK2 -- ITS2 -- SSI2 IPRA9 IPRA1 IPRB9 IPRB1 IPRC9 IPRC1 IPRD9 IPRD1 IPRE9 IPRE1 IPRF9 IPRF1 IPRG9 IPRG1 IPRH9 IPRH1 IPRI9 IPRI1 IPRJ9 IPRJ1 IPRK9 IPRK1 -- ITS1 -- SSI1 IPRA8 IPRA0 IPRB8 IPRB0 IPRC8 IPRC0 IPRD8 IPRD0 IPRE8 IPRE0 IPRF8 IPRF0 IPRG8 IPRG0 IPRH8 IPRH0 IPRI8 IPRI0 IPRJ8 IPRJ0 IPRK8 IPRK0 -- ITS0 -- SSI0 IPRB -- -- IPRC -- -- IPRD -- -- IPRE -- -- IPRF -- -- IPRG -- -- IPRH -- -- IPRI -- -- IPRJ -- -- IPRK -- -- ITSR -- ITS7 SSIER -- SSI7 ISCR IRQ7SCB IRQ7SCA IRQ6SCB IRQ6SCA IRQ5SCB IRQ5SCA IRQ4SCB IRQ4SCA IRQ3SCB IRQ3SCA IRQ2SCB IRQ2SCA IRQ1SCB IRQ1SCA IRQ0SCB IRQ0SCA IrCR_0 IrE IrCKS2 IrCKS1 IrCKS0 -- -- -- -- IrDA_0 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 851 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Bit 7 Name P1DDR P2DDR P3DDR P5DDR P8DDR PADDR PBDDR PCDDR PDDDR PEDDR PFDDR PGDDR PFCR0 PFCR1 PFCR2 PAPCR PBPCR PCPCR PDPCR PEPCR P3ODR PAODR 4 SMR_3* 5 SMR_3* Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR PORT P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR -- -- -- -- -- -- P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR -- -- P53DDR P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR P83DDR -- P81DDR -- P85DDR -- PA7DDR PA6DDR PA5DDR PA4DDR PA3DDR PA2DDR PA1DDR PA0DDR PB7DDR PB6DDR PB5DDR PB4DDR PB3DDR PB2DDR PB1DDR PB0DDR PC7DDR PC6DDR PC5DDR PC4DDR PC3DDR PC2DDR PC1DDR PC0DDR PD7DDR PD6DDR PD5DDR PD4DDR PD3DDR PD2DDR PD1DDR PD0DDR PE7DDR PE6DDR PE5DDR PE4DDR PE3DDR PE2DDR PE1DDR PE0DDR PF7DDR PF6DDR PF5DDR PF4DDR PF3DDR PF2DDR PF1DDR PF0DDR -- CS7E A23E -- PG6DDR PG5DDR PG4DDR PG3DDR PG2DDR PG1DDR PG0DDR CS6E A22E -- CS5E A21E -- CS4E A20E -- CS3E A19E ASOE CS2E A18E LWROE CS1E A17E OES CS0E A16E -- PA7PCR PA6PCR PA5PCR PA4PCR PA3PCR PA2PCR PA1PCR PA0PCR PB7PCR PB6PCR PB5PCR PB4PCR PB3PCR PB2PCR PB1PCR PB0PCR PC7PCR PC6PCR PC5PCR PC4PCR PC3PCR PC2PCR PC1PCR PC0PCR PD7PCR PD6PCR PD5PCR PD4PCR PD3PCR PD2PCR PD1PCR PD0PCR PE7PCR PE6PCR PE5PCR PE4PCR PE3PCR PE2PCR PE1PCR PE0PCR -- -- P35ODR P34ODR P33ODR P32ODR P31ODR P30ODR PA7ODR PA6ODR PA5ODR PA4ODR PA3ODR PA2ODR PA1ODR PA0ODR C/A GM Bit7 TIE Bit7 TDRE TDRE Bit7 -- CHR BLK Bit6 RIE Bit6 RDRF RDRF Bit6 -- PE PE Bit5 TE Bit5 ORER ORER Bit5 -- O/E O/E Bit4 RE Bit4 FER ERS Bit4 -- STOP BCP1 Bit3 MPIE Bit3 PER PER Bit3 SDIR MP BCP0 Bit2 TEIE Bit2 TEND TEND Bit2 SINV CKS1 CKS1 Bit1 CKE1 Bit1 MPB MPB Bit1 -- CKS0 CKS0 Bit0 CKE0 Bit0 MPBT MPBT Bit0 SMIF SCI_3 Smart card interface 3 BRR_3 SCR_3 TDR_3 4 SSR_3* 5 SSR_3* RDR_3 SCMR_3 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 852 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name SMR_4* 5 SMR_4* 4 Bit 7 C/A GM Bit7 TIE Bit7 Bit 6 CHR BLK Bit6 RIE Bit6 RDRF RDRF Bit6 -- CCLR1 -- IOB2 IOD2 -- -- Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 CCLR1 -- IOB2 -- -- Bit 5 PE PE Bit5 TE Bit5 ORER ORER Bit5 -- CCLR0 BFB IOB1 IOD1 -- -- Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 CCLR0 -- IOB1 TCIEU TCFU Bit 4 O/E O/E Bit4 RE Bit4 FER ERS Bit4 -- CKEG1 BFA IOB0 IOD0 TCIEV TCFV Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 CKEG1 -- IOB0 TCIEV TCFV Bit 3 STOP BCP1 Bit3 MPIE Bit3 PER PER Bit3 SDIR CKEG0 MD3 IOA3 IOC3 TGIED TGFD Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 CKEG0 MD3 IOA3 -- -- Bit 2 MP BCP0 Bit2 TEIE Bit2 TEND TEND Bit2 SINV TPSC2 MD2 IOA2 IOC2 TGIEC TGFC Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 TPSC2 MD2 IOA2 -- -- Bit 1 CKS1 CKS1 Bit1 CKE1 Bit1 MPB MPB Bit1 -- TPSC1 MD1 IOA1 IOC1 TGIEB TGFB Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 TPSC1 MD1 IOA1 TGIEB TGFB Bit 0 CKS0 CKS0 Bit0 CKE0 Bit0 MPBT MPBT Bit0 SMIF TPSC0 MD0 IOA0 IOC0 TGIEA TGFA Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 TPSC0 MD0 IOA0 TGIEA TGFA Module SCI_4 Smart card interface 4 BRR_4 SCR_4 TDR_4 SSR_4* 5 SSR_4* 4 TDRE TDRE Bit7 -- CCLR2 -- IOB3 IOD3 TTGE -- Bit15 Bit7 RDR_4 SCMR_4 TCR_3 TMDR_3 TIORH_3 TIORL_3 TIER_3 TSR_3 TCNT_3 TPU_3 TGRA_3 Bit15 Bit7 TGRB_3 Bit15 Bit7 TGRC_3 Bit15 Bit7 TGRD_3 Bit15 Bit7 TCR_4 TMDR_4 TIOR_4 TIER_4 TSR_4 -- -- IOB3 TTGE TCFD TPU_4 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 853 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name TCNT_4 Bit 7 Bit15 Bit7 Bit 6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 CCLR1 -- IOB2 -- -- Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 ABW6 AST6 W72 W52 W32 W12 RDN6 CSXH6 CSXT6 BSTS02 BSTS12 Bit 5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 CCLR0 -- IOB1 TCIEU TCFU Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 ABW5 AST5 W71 W51 W31 W11 RDN5 CSXH5 CSXT5 BSTS01 BSTS11 Bit 4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 CKEG1 -- IOB0 TCIEV TCFV Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 ABW4 AST4 W70 W50 W30 W10 RDN4 CSXH4 CSXT4 BSTS00 BSTS10 Bit 3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 CKEG0 MD3 IOA3 -- -- Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 ABW3 AST3 -- -- -- -- RDN3 CSXH3 CSXT3 -- -- Bit 2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 TPSC2 MD2 IOA2 -- -- Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 ABW2 AST2 W62 W42 W22 W02 RDN2 CSXH2 CSXT2 -- -- Bit 1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 TPSC1 MD1 IOA1 TGIEB TGFB Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 ABW1 AST1 W61 W41 W21 W01 RDN1 CSXH1 CSXT1 Bit 0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 TPSC0 MD0 IOA0 TGIEA TGFA Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 ABW0 AST0 W60 W40 W20 W00 RDN0 CSXH0 CSXT0 Module TPU_4 TGRA_4 Bit15 Bit7 TGRB_4 Bit15 Bit7 TCR_5 TMDR_5 TIOR_5 TIER_5 TSR_5 TCNT_5 -- -- IOB3 TTGE TCFD Bit15 Bit7 TPU_5 TGRA_5 Bit15 Bit7 TGRB_5 Bit15 Bit7 ABWCR ASTCR WTCRAH WTCRAL WTCRBH WTCRBL RDNCR CSACRH CSACRL ABW7 AST7 -- -- -- -- RDN7 CSXH7 CSXT7 BSC BROMCRH BSRM0 BROMCRL BSRM1 BSWD01 BSWD00 BSWD11 BSWD10 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 854 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name BCR Bit 7 BRLE -- Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 IDLC -- CAST -- TPC0 RCW0 RLW0 Bit4 Bit4 -- Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 -- Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 -- Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit 3 ICIS1 -- -- -- -- -- SLFRF Bit3 Bit3 -- Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 -- Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 -- Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit 2 ICIS0 ICIS2 RMTS2 MXC2 -- RTCK2 TPCS2 Bit2 Bit2 -- Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 -- Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 -- Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit 1 WDBE -- RMTS1 MXC1 RCD1 RTCK1 TPCS1 Bit1 Bit1 -- Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 -- Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 -- Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit 0 WAITE -- RMTS0 MXC0 RCD0 RTCK0 TPCS0 Bit0 Bit0 -- Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 -- Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 -- Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Module BSC BREQ0E -- -- RAST RCDM -- CMIE CBRM Bit6 Bit6 -- Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 -- Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 -- Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 -- -- DDS TPC1 RCW1 RLW1 Bit5 Bit5 -- Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 -- Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 -- Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 DRAMCR OEE BE DRACCR REFCR DRMI CMF RFSHE RTCNT RTCOR MAR_0AH Bit7 Bit7 -- Bit7 DMAC MAR_0AL Bit15 Bit7 IOAR_0A Bit15 Bit7 ETCR_0A Bit15 Bit7 MAR_0BH -- Bit7 MAR_0BL Bit15 Bit7 IOAR_0B Bit15 Bit7 ETCR_0B Bit15 Bit7 MAR_1AH -- Bit7 MAR_1AL Bit15 Bit7 IOAR_1A Bit15 Bit7 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 855 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name ETCR_1A Bit 7 Bit15 Bit7 Bit 6 Bit14 Bit6 -- Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 -- -- DTID SAID DTID DAID DTID SAID DTID DAID FAE0 FAE0 DTE1A DTE1 Bit 5 Bit13 Bit5 -- Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 -- TEE1 RPE SAIDE RPE DAIDE RPE SAIDE RPE DAIDE SAE1 -- DTE0B DTME0 Bit 4 Bit12 Bit4 -- Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 -- TEE0 DTDIR BLKDIR DTDIR -- DTDIR BLKDIR DTDIR -- SAE0 -- DTE0A DTE0 Bit 3 Bit11 Bit3 -- Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 WE1B -- DTF3 BLKE DTF3 DTF3 DTF3 BLKE DTF3 DTF3 DTA1B DTA1 DTIE1B DTIE1B Bit 2 Bit10 Bit2 -- Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 WE1A -- DTF2 -- DTF2 DTF2 DTF2 -- DTF2 DTF2 DTA1A -- DTIE1A DTIE1A Bit 1 Bit9 Bit1 -- Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 WE0B -- DTF1 -- DTF1 DTF1 DTF1 -- DTF1 DTF1 DTA0B DTA0 DTIE0B DTIE0B Bit 0 Bit8 Bit0 -- Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 WE0A -- DTF0 -- DTF0 DTF0 DTF0 -- DTF0 DTF0 DTA0A -- DTIE0A DTIE0A Module DMAC MAR_1BH -- Bit7 MAR_1BL Bit15 Bit7 IOARV1B Bit15 Bit7 ETCR_1B Bit15 Bit7 DMAWER DMATCR 2 DMACR_0A* 3 DMACR_0A* 2 DMACR_0B* -- -- DTSZ DTSZ DTSZ -- DTSZ DTSZ DTSZ -- FAE1 FAE1 DTE1B DTME1 DMACR_0B* DMACR_1A* DMACR_1A* DMACR_1B* 3 2 3 2 3 DMACR_1B* 2 DMABCRH* 3 DMABCRH* 2 DMABCRL* DMABCRL* DTCERA DTCERB DTCERC DTCERD DTCERE DTCERF DTCERG DTCERH 3 DTCEA7 DTCEA6 DTCEA5 DTCEA4 DTCEA3 DTCEA2 DTCEA1 DTCEA0 DTC -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- DTCEC6 DTCEC5 DTCEC4 DTCEC3 DTCEC2 DTCEC1 DTCEC0 DTCED7 DTCED6 DTCED5 DTCED4 DTCED3 DTCED2 DTCED1 DTCED0 DTCEE7 DTCEE6 DTCEE5 DTCEE4 DTCEE3 DTCEE2 DTCEE1 DTCEE0 DTCEF7 DTCEF6 DTCEF5 DTCEF4 DTCEF3 DTCEF2 DTCEF1 DTCEF0 DTCEG7 DTCEG6 DTCEG5 DTCEG4 DTCEG3 DTCEG2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 856 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name DTVECR INTCR IER Bit 7 SWDTE -- -- IRQ7E Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module DTVEC6 DTVEC5 DTVEC4 DTVEC3 DTVEC2 DTVEC1 DTVEC0 DTC -- -- IRQ6E -- IRQ6F OPE -- -- -- INTM1 -- IRQ5E -- IRQ5F -- -- -- -- INTM0 -- IRQ4E -- IRQ4F -- -- -- -- NMIEG -- IRQ3E -- IRQ3F STS3 STCS FLSHE -- -- -- IRQ2E -- IRQ2F STS2 SCK2 -- MDS2 -- -- IRQ1E -- IRQ1F STS1 SCK1 EXPE MDS1 -- -- IRQ0E -- IRQ0F STS0 SCK0 RAME MDS0 MSTP8 MSTP0 SYSTEM INT ISR -- IRQ7F SBYCR SCKCR SYSCR MDCR MSTPCRH MSTPCRL EXMSTPCRH EXMSTPCRL PLLCR PCR PMR NDERH NDERL PODRH PODRL 6 NDRH* 6 NDRL* SSBY PSTOP -- -- ACSE MSTP7 -- MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP6 -- MSTP5 -- MSTP4 -- MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP27 MSTP26 MSTP25 MSTP24 MSTP23 MSTP22 MSTP21 MSTP20 MSTP19 MSTP18 MSTP17 MSTP16 -- -- -- -- -- -- STC1 STC0 G3CMS1 G3CMS0 G2CMS1 G2CMS0 G1CMS1 G1CMS0 G0CMS1 G0CMS0 PPG G3INV G2INV G1INV G0INV G3NOV G2NOV G1NOV G0NOV NDER8 NDER0 POD8 POD0 NDR8 NDR0 NDR8 NDR0 P10 P20 P30 P40 P50 -- -- PORT NDER15 NDER14 NDER13 NDER12 NDER11 NDER10 NDER9 NDER7 POD15 POD7 NDR15 NDR7 -- -- P17 P27 -- P47 -- -- -- NDER6 POD14 POD6 NDR14 NDR6 -- -- P16 P26 -- P46 -- -- -- NDER5 POD13 POD5 NDR13 NDR5 -- -- P15 P25 P35 P45 -- P85 P95 NDER4 POD12 POD4 NDR12 NDR4 -- -- P14 P24 P34 P44 -- -- P94 NDER3 POD11 POD3 NDR11 NDR3 NDR11 NDR3 P13 P23 P33 P43 P53 P83 -- NDER2 POD10 POD2 NDR10 NDR2 NDR10 NDR2 P12 P22 P32 P42 P52 -- -- NDER1 POD9 POD1 NDR9 NDR1 NDR9 NDR1 P11 P21 P31 P41 P51 P81 -- NDRH* NDRL* 6 6 PORT1 PORT2 PORT3 PORT4 PORT5 PORT8 PORT9 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 857 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name PORTA PORTB PORTC PORTD PORTE PORTF PORTG P1DR P2DR P3DR P5DR P8DR PADR PBDR PCDR PDDR PEDR PFDR PGDR 4 SMR_0* *5 SMR_0 Bit 7 PA7 PB7 PC7 PD7 PE7 PF7 -- P17DR P27DR -- -- -- PA7DR PB7DR PC7DR PD7DR PE7DR PF7DR -- C/A GM Bit7 TIE Bit7 Bit 6 PA6 PB6 PC6 PD6 PE6 PF6 PG6 P16DR P26DR -- -- -- PA6DR PB6DR PC6DR PD6DR PE6DR PF6DR PG6DR CHR BLK Bit6 RIE Bit6 RDRF RDRF Bit6 -- Bit 5 PA5 PB5 PC5 PD5 PE5 PF5 PG5 P15DR P25DR P35DR -- P85DR PA5DR PB5DR PC5DR PD5DR PE5DR PF5DR PG5DR PE PE Bit5 TE Bit5 ORER ORER Bit5 -- Bit 4 PA4 PB4 PC4 PD4 PE4 PF4 PG4 P14DR P24DR P34DR -- -- PA4DR PB4DR PC4DR PD4DR PE4DR PF4DR PG4DR O/E O/E Bit4 RE Bit4 FER ERS Bit4 -- Bit 3 PA3 PB3 PC3 PD3 PE3 PF3 PG3 P13DR P23DR P33DR P53DR P83DR PA3DR PB3DR PC3DR PD3DR PE3DR PF3DR PG3DR STOP BCP1 Bit3 MPIE Bit3 PER PER Bit3 SDIR Bit 2 PA2 PB2 PC2 PD2 PE2 PF2 PG2 P12DR P22DR P32DR P52DR -- PA2DR PB2DR PC2DR PD2DR PE2DR PF2DR PG2DR MP BCP0 Bit2 TEIE Bit2 TEND TEND Bit2 SINV Bit 1 PA1 PB1 PC1 PD1 PE1 PF1 PG1 P11DR P21DR P31DR P51DR P81DR PA1DR PB1DR PC1DR PD1DR PE1DR PF1DR PG1DR CKS1 CKS1 Bit1 CKE1 Bit1 MPB MPB Bit1 -- Bit 0 PA0 PB0 PC0 PD0 PE0 PF0 PG0 P10DR P20DR P30DR P50DR -- PA0DR PB0DR PC0DR PD0DR PE0DR PF0DR PG0DR CKS0 CKS0 Bit0 CKE0 Bit0 MPBT MPBT Bit0 SMIF Module PORT BRR_0 SCR_0 TDR_0 SSR_0* 5 SSR_0* 4 SCI_0, Smart card interface_0 TDRE TDRE Bit7 -- RDR_0 SCMR_0 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 858 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name SMR_1* 5 SMR_1* 4 Bit 7 C/A GM Bit7 TIE Bit7 Bit 6 CHR BLK Bit6 RIE Bit6 RDRF RDRF Bit6 -- CHR BLK Bit6 RIE Bit6 RDRF RDRF Bit6 -- AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 Bit 5 PE PE Bit5 TE Bit5 ORER ORER Bit5 -- PE PE Bit5 TE Bit5 ORER ORER Bit5 -- AD7 -- AD7 -- AD7 -- AD7 -- AD7 -- AD7 -- AD7 -- AD7 -- Bit 4 O/E O/E Bit4 RE Bit4 FER ERS Bit4 -- O/E O/E Bit4 RE Bit4 FER ERS Bit4 -- AD6 -- AD6 -- AD6 -- AD6 -- AD6 -- AD6 -- AD6 -- AD6 -- Bit 3 STOP BCP1 Bit3 MPIE Bit3 PER PER Bit3 SDIR STOP BCP1 Bit3 MPIE Bit3 PER PER Bit3 SDIR AD5 -- AD5 -- AD5 -- AD5 -- AD5 -- AD5 -- AD5 -- AD5 -- Bit 2 MP BCP0 Bit2 TEIE Bit2 TEND TEND Bit2 SINV MP BCP0 Bit2 TEIE Bit2 TEND TEND Bit2 SINV AD4 -- AD4 -- AD4 -- AD4 -- AD4 -- AD4 -- AD4 -- AD4 -- Bit 1 CKS1 OKS1 Bit1 CKE1 Bit1 MPB MPB Bit1 -- CKS1 CKS1 Bit1 CKE1 Bit1 MPB MPB Bit1 -- AD3 -- AD3 -- AD3 -- AD3 -- AD3 -- AD3 -- AD3 -- AD3 -- Bit 0 CKS0 OKS0 Bit0 CKE0 Bit0 MPBT MPBT Bit0 SMIF CKS0 CKS0 Bit0 CKE0 Bit0 MPBT MPBT Bit0 SMIF AD2 -- AD2 -- AD2 -- AD2 -- AD2 -- AD2 -- AD2 -- AD2 -- Module SCI_1, Smart card interface_1 BRR_1 SCR_1 TDR_1 SSR_1* 5 SSR_1* 4 TDRE TDRE Bit7 -- C/A GM Bit7 TIE Bit7 TDRE TDRE Bit7 -- AD9 AD1 RDR_1 SCMR_1 SMR_2* 5 SMR_2* 4 BRR_2 SCR_2 TDR_2 4 SSR_2* *5 SSR_2 SCI_2, Smart card interface_2 RDR_2 SCMR_2 ADDRA A/D ADDRB AD9 AD1 ADDRC AD9 AD1 ADDRD AD9 AD1 ADDRE AD9 AD1 ADDRF AD9 AD1 ADDRG AD9 AD1 ADDRH AD9 AD1 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 859 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name ADCSR ADCR DADR2 DADR3 DACR23 TCR_0 TCR_1 TCSR_0 TCSR_1 TCORA_0 TCORA_1 TCORB_0 TCORB_1 TCNT_0 TCNT_1 TCSR TCNT RSTCSR TSTR TSYR 7 FCCS* 7 FPCS* 7 FECS* Bit 7 ADF TRGS1 Bit7 Bit7 DAOE3 CMIEB CMIEB CMFB CMFB Bit7 Bit7 Bit7 Bit7 Bit7 Bit7 OVF Bit7 WOVF -- -- -- -- -- -- K7 FLER MS7 TDER EB7 -- Bit 6 ADIE TRGS0 Bit6 Bit6 DAOE2 CMIEA CMIEA CMFA CMFA Bit6 Bit6 Bit6 Bit6 Bit6 Bit6 WT/IT Bit6 RSTE -- -- -- -- -- SWE K6 -- MS6 TDA6 EB6 -- Bit 5 ADST SCANE Bit5 Bit5 DAE OVIE OVIE OVF OVF Bit5 Bit5 Bit5 Bit5 Bit5 Bit5 TME Bit5 -- CST5 SYNC5 -- -- -- ESU K5 -- MS5 TDA5 EB5 EB13 -- Bit 4 -- SCANS Bit4 Bit4 -- CCLR1 CCLR1 ADTE -- Bit4 Bit4 Bit4 Bit4 Bit4 Bit4 -- Bit4 -- CST4 SYNC4 FLER PPVD -- PSU K4 -- MS4 TDA4 EB4 EB12 -- Bit 3 CH3 CKS1 Bit3 Bit3 -- CCLR0 CCLR0 OS3 OS3 Bit3 Bit3 Bit3 Bit3 Bit3 Bit3 -- Bit3 -- CST3 SYNC3 -- -- -- EV K3 -- MS3 TDA3 EB3 EB11 FVSEL3 Bit 2 CH2 CKS0 Bit2 Bit2 -- CKS2 CKS2 OS2 OS2 Bit2 Bit2 Bit2 Bit2 Bit2 Bit2 CKS2 Bit2 -- CST2 SYNC2 -- -- -- PV K2 -- MS2 TDA2 EB2 EB10 FVSEL2 Bit 1 CH1 -- Bit1 Bit1 -- CKS1 CKS1 OS1 OS1 Bit1 Bit1 Bit1 Bit1 Bit1 Bit1 CKS1 Bit1 -- CST1 SYNC1 -- -- -- E K1 -- MS1 TDA1 EB1 EB9 FVSEL1 Bit 0 CH0 -- Bit0 Bit0 -- CKS0 CKS0 OS0 OS0 Bit0 Bit0 Bit0 Bit0 Bit0 Bit0 CKS0 Bit0 -- CST0 SYNC0 SCO PPVS EPVB P K0 -- MS0 TDA0 EB0 EB8 FVSEL0 Module A/D D/A TMR_0 TMR_1 WDT TPU FLASH FLMCR1 FKEY* 7 FLMCR2 FMATS* 7 7 FTDAR* EBR1 EBR2 7 FVACR* FVCHGE -- Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 860 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name TCR_0 TMDR_0 TIORH_0 TIORL_0 TIER_0 TSR_0 TCNT_0 Bit 7 CCLR2 -- IOB3 IOD3 TTGE -- Bit15 Bit7 Bit 6 CCLR1 -- IOB2 IOD2 -- -- Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 CCLR1 -- IOB2 -- -- Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit 5 CCLR0 BFB IOB1 IOD1 -- -- Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 CCLR0 -- IOB1 TCIEU TCFU Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit 4 CKEG1 BFA IOB0 IOD0 TCIEV TCFV Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 CKEG1 -- IOB0 TCIEV TCFV Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit 3 CKEG0 MD3 IOA3 IOC3 TGIED TGFD Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 CKEG0 MD3 IOA3 -- -- Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit 2 TPSC2 MD2 IOA2 IOC2 TGIEC TGFC Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 TPSC2 MD2 IOA2 -- -- Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit 1 TPSC1 MD1 IOA1 IOC1 TGIEB TGFB Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 TPSC1 MD1 IOA1 TGIEB TGFB Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit 0 TPSC0 MD0 IOA0 IOC0 TGIEA TGFA Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 TPSC0 MD0 IOA0 TGIEA TGFA Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Module TPU_0 TGRA_0 Bit15 Bit7 TGRB_0 Bit15 Bit7 TGRC_0 Bit15 Bit7 TGRD_0 Bit15 Bit7 TCR_1 TMDR_1 TIOR_1 TIER_1 TSR_1 TCNT_1 -- -- IOB3 TTGE TCFD Bit15 Bit7 TPU_1 TGRA_1 Bit15 Bit7 TGRB_1 Bit15 Bit7 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 861 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name TCR_2 TMDR_2 TIOR_2 TIER_2 TSR_2 TCNT_2 Bit 7 -- -- IOB3 TTGE TCFD Bit15 Bit7 Bit 6 CCLR1 -- IOB2 -- -- Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit14 Bit6 Bit 5 CCLR0 -- IOB1 TCIEU TCFU Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit13 Bit5 Bit 4 CKEG1 -- IOB0 TCIEV TCFV Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit12 Bit4 Bit 3 CKEG0 MD3 IOA3 -- -- Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit11 Bit3 Bit 2 TPSC2 MD2 IOA2 -- -- Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit10 Bit2 Bit 1 TPSC1 MD1 IOA1 TGIEB TGFB Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit9 Bit1 Bit 0 TPSC0 MD0 IOA0 TGIEA TGFA Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Module TPU_2 TGRA_2 Bit15 Bit7 TGRB_2 Bit15 Bit7 Notes: 1. Loaded in on-chip RAM. The bus width is 32 bits when the DTC accesses this area as register information, and 16 bits otherwise. 2. For short address mode 3. For full address mode 4. For normal mode 5. For smart card interface mode 6. If the pulse output group 2 and pulse output group 3 output triggers are the same according to the PCR setting, the NDRH address will be H'FF4C, and if different, the address of NDRH for group 2 will be H'FF4E, and that for group 3 will be H'FF4C. Similarly, if the pulse output group 0 and pulse output group 1 output triggers are the same according to the PCR setting, the NDRL address will be H'FF4D, and if different, the address of NDRL for group 0 will be H'FF4F, and that for group 1 will be H'FF4D. 7. Supported only by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 862 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers 24.3 Register Name MRA SAR MRB DAR CRA CRB ICCRA_0 ICCRB_0 ICMR_0 ICIER_0 ICSR_0 SAR_0 ICDRT_0 ICDRR_0 ICCRA_1 ICCRB_1 ICMR_1 ICIER_1 ICSR_1 SAR_1 ICDRT_1 ICDRR_1 SEMR_2 IPRA IPRB IPRC IPRD IPRE IPRF Register States in Each Operating Mode Reset HighSpeed Clock Module Division Sleep Stop -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- All Module Software Hardware Clock Stop Standby Standby -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized SCI2 INT IIC2_1 IIC2_0 Module DTC Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 863 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name IPRG IPRH IPRI IPRJ IPRK ITSR SSIER ISCR IrCR_0 P1DDR P2DDR P3DDR P5DDR P8DDR PADDR PBDDR PCDDR PDDDR PEDDR PFDDR PGDDR PFCR0 PFCR1 PFCR2 PAPCR PBPCR PCPCR PDPCR PEPCR P3ODR PAODR HighSpeed Clock Module Division Sleep Stop -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- All Module Software Hardware Clock Stop Standby Standby -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized IrDA_0 PORT Reset Module INT Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 864 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name SMR_3 BRR_3 SCR_3 TDR_3 SSR_3 RDR_3 SCMR_3 SMR_4 BRR_4 SCR_4 TDR_4 SSR_4 RDR_4 SCMR_4 TCR_3 TMDR_3 TIORH_3 TIORL_3 TIER_3 TSR_3 TCNT_3 TGRA_3 TGRB_3 TGRC_3 TGRD_3 TCR_4 TMDR_4 TIOR_4 TIER_4 TSR_4 HighSpeed Clock Module Division Sleep Stop -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- All Module Software Hardware Clock Stop Standby Standby -- -- -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Reset Module SCI_3 Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized SCI_4 Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized TPU_4 TPU_3 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 865 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name TCNT_4 TGRA_4 TGRB_4 TCR_5 TMDR_5 TIOR_5 TIER_5 TSR_5 TCNT_5 TGRA_5 TGRB_5 ABWCR ASTCR WTCRAH WTCRAL WTCRBH WTCRBL RDNCR CSACRH CSACRL BROMCRH BROMCRL BCR DRAMCR DRACCR REFCR RTCNT RTCOR HighSpeed Clock Module Division Sleep Stop -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- All Module Software Hardware Clock Stop Standby Standby -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized BSC TPU_5 Reset Module TPU_4 Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 866 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name MAR_0AH MAR_0AL IOAR_0A ETCR_0A MAR_0BH MAR_0BL IOAR_0B ETCR_0B MAR_1AH MAR_1AL IOAR_1A ETCR_1A MAR_1BH MAR_1BL IOAR_1B ETCR_1B DMAWER DMATCR DMACR_0A DMACR_0B DMACR_1A DMACR_1B DMABCRH DMABCRL DTCERA DTCERB DTCERC DTCERD DTCERE DTCERF DTCERG HighSpeed Clock Module Division Sleep Stop -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- All Module Software Hardware Clock Stop Standby Standby -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized DTC Reset Module DMAC Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 867 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name DTVECH DTVECR INTCR IER ISR SBYCR SCKCR SYSCR MDCR MSTPCRH MSTPCRL HighSpeed Clock Module Division Sleep Stop -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- All Module Software Hardware Clock Stop Standby Standby -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized -- -- -- -- -- -- -- PORT PPG SYSTEM INT Reset Module DTC Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- EXMSTPCRH Initialized -- EXMSTPCRL Initialized -- PLLCR PCR PMR NDERH NDERL PODRH PODRL NDRH NDRL NDRH NDRL PORT1 PORT2 PORT3 PORT4 PORT5 PORT8 PORT9 Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 868 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name PORTA PORTB PORTC PORTD PORTE PORTF PORTG P1DR P2DR P3DR P5DR P8DR PADR PBDR PCDR PDDR PEDR PFDR PGDR SMR_0 BRR_0 SCR_0 TDR_0 SSR_0 RDR_0 SCMR_0 HighSpeed -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Clock Module Division Sleep Stop -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- All Module Software Hardware Clock Stop Standby Standby -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized SCI_0 Reset -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Module PORT Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized -- Initialized Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 869 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name SMR_1 BRR_1 SCR_1 TDR_1 SSR_1 RDR_1 SCMR_1 SMR_2 BRR_2 SCR_2 TDR_2 SSR_2 RDR_2 SCMR_2 ADDRA ADDRB ADDRC ADDRD ADDRE ADDRF ADDRG ADDRH ADCSR ADCR DADR2 DADR3 DACR23 HighSpeed Clock Module Division Sleep Stop -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- All Module Software Hardware Clock Stop Standby Standby -- -- -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Reset Module SCI_1 Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized SCI_2 Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized D/A A/D Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 870 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name TCR_0 TCR_1 TCSR_0 TCSR_1 TCORA_0 TCORA_1 TCORB_0 TCORB_1 TCNT_0 TCNT_1 TCSR TCNT RSTCSR TSTR TSYR FCCS* FPCS* FECS* FLMCR1 FKEY* FLMCR2 FMATS* FTDAR* EBR1 EBR2 FVACR* HighSpeed Clock Module Division Sleep Stop -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- All Module Software Hardware Clock Stop Standby Standby -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized FLASH TPU WDT Reset Module TMR_0 TMR_1 Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 871 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 24 List of Registers Register Name TCR_0 TMDR_0 TIORH_0 TIORL_0 TIER_0 TSR_0 TCNT_0 TGRA_0 TGRB_0 TGRC_0 TGRD_0 TCR_1 TMDR_1 TIOR_1 TIER_1 TSR_1 TCNT_1 TGRA_1 TGRB_1 TCR_2 TMDR_2 TIOR_2 TIER_2 TSR_2 TCNT_2 TGRA_2 TGRB_2 HighSpeed Clock Module Division Sleep Stop -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- All Module Software Hardware Clock Stop Standby Standby -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized TPU_2 TPU_1 Reset Module TPU_0 Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Initialized -- Note: * Supported only by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 872 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Section 25 Electrical Characteristics 25.1 25.1.1 Electrical Characteristics of Masked ROM and ROMless Versions Absolute Maximum Ratings Table 25.1 lists the absolute maximum ratings. Table 25.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Item Power supply voltage Input voltage (except ports 4, 9) Input voltage (ports 4, 9) Reference power supply voltage Analog power supply voltage Analog input voltage Operating temperature Symbol VCC PLLVCC Vin Vin Vref AVCC VAN Topr Value -0.3 to +4.0 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 -0.3 to +4.0 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 Regular specifications: -20 to +75 Wide-range specifications: -40 to +85 Unit V V V V V V C C C Storage temperature Tstg -55 to +125 Caution: Permanent damage to the LSI may result if absolute maximum ratings are exceeded. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 873 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics 25.1.2 DC Characteristics Table 25.2 DC Characteristics (1) Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V*1, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Symbol Min Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC +0.3 VCC +0.3 VCC +0.3 VCC +0.3 Test Unit Conditions V V V V V V V Schmitt Ports 1, 2, and 4*2, VT- VCC x 0.2 trigger input P50 to P53*2, + VT -- 2 voltage PA4 to PA7* + - VT - VT VCC x 0.07 Input high voltage STBY, MD2 to MD0 RES, NMI, EMLE EXTAL Port 3, P50 to P53*3, port 8, ports A to G*3 Ports 4 and 9 Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD2 to MD0, EMLE NMI, EXTAL Ports 3 to 5*3, 8, 9, A to G*3 Output high All output pins voltage Output low voltage All output pins P32 to P35*4 VOH VOL VIL VIH VCC x 0.9 VCC x 0.9 VCC x 0.7 2.2V 2.2V -0.3 -- -- VCC +0.3 VCC x 0.1 V V -0.3 -0.3 VCC -0.5 VCC -1.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- VCC x 0.2 VCC x 0.2 -- -- 0.4 0.5 V V V V V V IOH = -200 A IOH = -1 mA IOL = 1.6 mA IOL = 8.0 mA Notes: 1. When the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, Vref, and AVSS pins open. Connect the AVCC and Vref pins to VCC, and the AVSS pin to VSS. 2. When used as IRQ0 to IRQ7. 3. When used as other than IRQ0 to IRQ7. 4. When used as SCL0 to SCL1, SDA0 to SDA1. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 874 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Table 25.3 DC Characteristics (2) Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V*1, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Input leakage current RES STBY, NMI, MD2 to MD0 Ports 4 and 9 Three-state leakage current (off state) Ports 1 to 3, P50 to P53, ports 8, A to G | ITSI | Symbol |Iin| Min -- -- -- -- Typ -- -- -- -- Max 10.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Test Unit Conditions A A A A Vin = 0.5 to AVCC -0.5 V Vin = 0.5 to VCC -0.5 V Vin = 0.5 to VCC -0.5 V Input pull-up Ports A to E MOS current Input RES capacitance NMI All input pins except RES and NMI -Ip 10 -- 300 A VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V Vin = 0 V Vin = 0 V f = 1 MHz Ta = 25C Cin -- -- -- -- -- -- 30 30 15 pF pF pF Current Normal operation ICC*4 *2 dissipation Sleep mode Standby mode*3 -- -- -- -- 75 115 (3.3 V) 55 95 (3.3 V) 0.01 -- 10 80 mA mA A A mA A f = 33 MHz f = 33 MHz Ta 50C 50C < Ta Analog power supply current During A/D and D/A conversion Idle AICC -- -- 0.3 2.0 (3.0 V) 0.01 5.0 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 875 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Test Unit Conditions mA A V Item Reference power supply current During A/D and D/A conversion Idle Symbol AICC Min -- -- Typ Max 2.0 3.5 (3.0 V) 0.01 -- 5.0 -- RAM standby voltage VRAM 2.0 Notes: 1. When the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, Vref, and AVSS pins open. Connect the AVCC and Vref pins to VCC, and the AVSS pin to VSS. 2. Current dissipation values are for VIHmin = VCC - 0.2 V and VILmax = 0.2 V with all output pins unloaded and all MOS input pull-ups in the off state. 3. The values are for VRAM VCC < 3.0 V, VIHmin = VCC x 0.9, and VILmax = 0.3 V. 4. ICC depends on VCC and f as follows: ICCmax = 1.0 (mA) + 0.95 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f (normal operation) ICCmax = 1.0 (mA) + 0.8 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f (sleep mode) Table 25.4 Permissible Output Currents Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V*, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Permissible output low current (per pin) SCL0, 1, SDA0, 1 Output pins other than the above Total of all output pins All output pins Total of all output pins IOL -IOH -IOH Symbol IOL Min -- -- -- -- -- Typ -- -- -- -- -- Max 8.0 2.0 80 2.0 40 mA mA mA Unit mA Permissible output low current (total) Permissible output high current (per pin) Permissible output high current (total) Caution: To protect the LSI's reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 25.4. Note: * When the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, Vref, and AVSS pins open. Connect the AVCC and Vref pins to VCC, and the AVSS pin to VSS. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 876 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics 25.1.3 AC Characteristics 3V RL C = 50 pF: ports A to G C = 30 pF: ports 1 to 3, P50 to P53, port 8 RL = 2.4 k RH = 12 k Input/output timing measurement level: 1.5 V (VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V) LSI output pin C RH Figure 25.1 Output Load Circuit Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 877 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics (1) Clock Timing Table 25.5 Clock Timing Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 33 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Clock cycle time Clock pulse high width Clock pulse low width Clock rise time Clock fall time Reset oscillation stabilization time (crystal) Software standby oscillation stabilization time (crystal) External clock output delay stabilization time Symbol tcyc tCH tCL tCr tCf tOSC1 tOSC2 tDEXT Min 30.3 10 10 -- -- 10 10 1 Max 125 -- -- 5 5 -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns ms ms ms Figure 25.3(1) Figure 25.3(2) Figure 25.3(1) Test Conditions Figure 25.2 Figure 25.2 tcyc tCH tCf tCL tCr Figure 25.2 System Clock Timing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 878 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics EXTAL tDEXT VCC tDEXT STBY tOSC1 RES tOSC1 Figure 25.3 Oscillation Stabilization Timing (1) Oscillator NMI NMIEG SSBY NMI exception handling NMI exception handling NMIEG = 1 SSBY = 1 Software standby mode (power-down mode) Oscillation stabilization time tOSC2 SLEEP instruction Figure 25.3 Oscillation Stabilization Timing (2) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 879 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics (2) Control Signal Timing Table 25.6 Control Signal Timing Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 33 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item RES setup time RES pulse width NMI setup time NMI hold time NMI pulse width (in recovery from software standby mode) IRQ setup time IRQ hold time IRQ pulse width (in recovery from software standby mode) Symbol tRESS tRESW tNMIS tNMIH tNMIW tIRQS tIRQH tIRQW Min 200 20 150 10 200 150 10 200 Max -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ns Unit ns tcyc ns Figure 25.5 Test Conditions Figure 25.4 tRESS RES tRESW tRESS Figure 25.4 Reset Input Timing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 880 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics tNMIS tNMIH NMI tNMIW tIRQW IRQi (i = 0 to 7)* tIRQS tIRQH IRQ (edge input) tIRQS IRQ (level input) Note: * Necessary for SSIER setting to clear software standby mode. Figure 25.5 Interrupt Input Timing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 881 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics (3) Bus Timing Table 25.7 Bus Timing (1) Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 33 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Address delay time Address setup time 1 Address setup time 2 Address setup time 3 Address setup time 4 Address hold time 1 Address hold time 2 Address hold time 3 CS delay time 1 CS delay time 2 CS delay time 3 AS delay time RD delay time 1 RD delay time 2 Read data setup time 1 Read data setup time 2 Read data hold time 1 Read data hold time 2 Read data access time 1 Read data access time 2 Read data access time 3 Read data access time 4 Read data access time 5 Read data access time 6 Read data access time 7 Read data access time 8 Symbol tAD tAS1 tAS2 tAS3 tAS4 tAH1 tAH2 tAH3 tCSD1 tCSD2 tCSD3 tASD tRSD1 tRSD2 tRDS1 tRDS2 tRDH1 tRDH2 tAC1 tAC2 tAC3 tAC4 tAC5 tAC6 tAC7 tAC8 Min -- 0.5 x tcyc -13 1.0 x tcyc -13 1.5 x tcyc -13 2.0 x tcyc -13 0.5 x tcyc -8 1.0 x tcyc -8 1.5 x tcyc -8 -- -- -- -- -- -- 15 15 0 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 20 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 15 15 20 15 15 15 -- -- -- -- 1.0 x tcyc -20 1.5 x tcyc -20 2.0 x tcyc -20 2.5 x tcyc -20 1.0 x tcyc -20 2.0 x tcyc -20 4.0 x tcyc -20 3.0 x tcyc -20 Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Test Conditions Figures 25.6 to 25.19 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 882 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Item Address read data access time 1 Address read data access time 2 Address read data access time 3 Address read data access time 4 Address read data access time 5 Symbol tAA1 tAA2 tAA3 tAA4 tAA5 Min -- -- -- -- -- Max 1.0 x tcyc -20 1.5 x tcyc -20 2.0 x tcyc -20 2.5 x tcyc -20 3.0 x tcyc -20 Unit ns ns ns ns ns Test Conditions Figures 25.6 to 25.19 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 883 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Table 25.8 Bus Timing (2) Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 33 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item WR delay time 1 WR delay time 2 WR pulse width 1 WR pulse width 2 Write data delay time Write data setup time 1 Write data setup time 2 Write data setup time 3 Write data hold time 1 Write data hold time 2 Write data hold time 3 Write command setup time 1 Write command setup time 2 Write command hold time 1 Write command hold time 2 Read command setup time 1 Read command setup time 2 Read command hold time CAS delay time 1 CAS delay time 2 CAS setup time 1 CAS setup time 2 CAS pulse width 1 CAS pulse width 2 CAS precharge time 1 CAS precharge time 2 OE delay time 1 OE delay time 2 Symbol tWRD1 tWRD2 tWSW1 tWSW2 tWDD tWDS1 tWDS2 tWDS3 tWDH1 tWDH2 tWDH3 tWCS1 tWCS2 tWCH1 tWCH2 tRCS1 tRCS2 tRCH tCASD1 tCASD2 tCSR1 tCSR2 tCASW1 tCASW2 tCPW1 tCPW2 tOED1 tOED2 Min -- -- 1.0 x tcyc -13 1.5 x tcyc -13 -- 0.5 x tcyc -13 1.0 x tcyc -13 1.5 x tcyc -13 0.5 x tcyc -8 1.0 x tcyc -8 1.5 x tcyc -8 0.5 x tcyc -10 1.0 x tcyc -10 0.5 x tcyc -10 1.0 x tcyc -10 1.5 x tcyc -10 2.0 x tcyc -10 0.5 x tcyc -10 -- -- 0.5 x tcyc -10 1.5 x tcyc -10 1.0 x tcyc -20 1.5 x tcyc -20 1.0 x tcyc -20 1.5 x tcyc -20 -- -- Max 15 15 -- -- 20 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 15 15 -- -- -- -- -- -- 15 15 Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Test Conditions Figures 25.6 to 25.19 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 884 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Item Precharge time 1 Precharge time 2 Self-refresh precharge time 1 Self-refresh precharge time 2 WAIT setup time WAIT hold time BREQ setup time BACK delay time Bus floating time BREQO delay time Symbol tPCH1 tPCH2 tRPS1 tRPS2 tWTS tWTH tBREQS tBACD tBZD tBRQOD Min 1.0 x tcyc -20 1.5 x tcyc -20 2.5 x tcyc -20 3.0 x tcyc -20 25 5 30 -- -- -- Max -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 15 40 25 Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Figure 25.23 Test Conditions Figures 25.6 to 25.19 Figures 25.20 and 25.21 Figures 25.8 and 25.14 Figure 25.22 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 885 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics T1 tAD A23 to A0 tCSD1 CS7 to CS0 tAS1 AS tAS1 RD Read (RDNn = 1) D15 to D0 tAS1 RD Read (RDNn = 0) D15 to D0 tAS1 HWR, LWR Write D15 to D0 tDACD1 DACK0, DACK1 tDACD2 tWDD tWSW1 tWDH1 tWRD2 tWRD2 tAH1 tAC2 tAA3 tRDS2 tRDH2 tRSD1 tRSD2 tAC5 tAA2 tRDS1 tRDH1 tRSD1 tRSD1 tASD tASD tAH1 T2 Figure 25.6 Basic Bus Timing: Two-State Access Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 886 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics T1 tAD A23 to A0 tCSD1 CS7 to CS0 tAS1 AS tAS1 RD Read (RDNn = 1) D15 to D0 tAS1 RD Read (RDNn = 0) D15 to D0 tAS2 HWR, LWR Write D15 to D0 tWDD tWRD1 tWDS1 tWSW2 tWDH1 tWRD2 tAH1 tAC4 tAA5 tRDS2 tRDH2 tRSD1 tRSD2 tAC6 tAA4 tRDS1 tRDH1 tRSD1 tRSD1 tASD tASD tAH1 T2 T3 tDACD1 DACK0, DACK1 tDACD2 Figure 25.7 Basic Bus Timing: Three-State Access Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 887 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics T1 T2 Tw T3 A23 to A0 CS7 to CS0 AS RD Read (RDNn = 1) D15 to D0 RD Read (RDNn = 0) D15 to D0 HWR, LWR Write D15 to D0 tWTS tWTH WAIT tWTS tWTH Figure 25.8 Basic Bus Timing: Three-State Access, One Wait Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 888 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Th tAD A23 to A0 tCSD1 CS7 to CS0 tAS1 tASD AS tAS3 RD Read (RDNn = 1) D15 to D0 tAS3 RD Read (RDNn = 0) D15 to D0 tAS3 HWR, LWR Write D15 to D0 tWDD tWDS2 tWSW1 tWDH3 tWRD2 tWRD2 tAH3 tAC2 tRDS2 tRDH2 tRSD1 tRSD2 tAH2 tAC5 tRDS1 tRDH1 tRSD1 tRSD1 tAH3 tASD tAH1 T1 T2 Tt tDACD1 DACK0, DACK1 tDACD2 Figure 25.9 Basic Bus Timing: Two-State Access (CS Assertion Period Extended) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 889 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Th tAD A23 to A0 tCSD1 CS7 to CS0 tAS1 tASD AS tAS3 RD Read (RDNn = 1) D15 to D0 tAS3 RD Read (RDNn = 0) D15 to D0 tAS4 HWR, LWR Write D15 to D0 tDACD1 DACK0, DACK1 tDACD2 tWDD tWRD1 tWDS3 tWSW2 tWDH3 tWRD2 tAH3 tAC4 tRDS2 tRDH2 tRSD1 tRSD2 tAH2 tAC6 tRDS1 tRDH1 tRSD1 tRSD1 tAH3 tASD tAH1 T1 T2 T3 Tt Figure 25.10 Basic Bus Timing: Three-State Access (CS Assertion Period Extended) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 890 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics T1 T2 T1 T1 A23 to A6, A0 tAD A5 to A1 CS1, CS0 AS tRSD2 RD Read D15 to D0 tAA1 tRDS2 tRDH2 HWR, LWR Figure 25.11 Burst ROM Access Timing: One-State Burst Access Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 891 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 A23 to A6, A0 tAD A5 to A1 CS1, CS0 tAS1 AS tASD tASD tRSD2 RD Read D15 to D0 tAA3 tRDS2 tRDH2 tAH1 HWR, LWR Figure 25.12 Burst ROM Access Timing: Two-State Burst Access Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 892 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 tAD A23 to A0 tAS3 RAS3, RAS2 tPCH2 UCAS tAH1 tCSD2 tAS2 tCASD1 tAH2 tCSD3 tAD tCASD1 tCASW1 LCAS tOED1 OE, RD tAC1 tOED1 Read HWR tAC4 D15 to D0 tAA3 tRDS2 tRDH2 OE, RD tWRD2 Write HWR tWDD D15 to D0 tWCS1 tWCH1 tWRD2 tWDS1 tWDH2 AS tDACD1 DACK0, DACK1 tDACD2 Notes: DACK timing: when DDS = 0 RAS timing: when RAST = 0 Figure 25.13 DRAM Access Timing: Two-State Access Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 893 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Tp Tr Tc1 Tcw Tcwp Tc2 A23 to A0 RAS3, RAS2 UCAS, LCAS OE, RD Read HWR D15 to D0 UCAS, LCAS OE, RD Write HWR D15 to D0 AS WAIT tWTS tWTH tWTS tWTH DACK0, DACK1 Notes: DACK timing: when DDS = 0 RAS timing: when RAST = 0 Tcw : Tcwp: Wait cycle inserted by programmable wait function Wait cycle inserted by pin wait function Figure 25.14 DRAM Access Timing: Two-State Access, One Wait Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 894 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 Tc1 Tc2 A23 to A0 RAS3, RAS2 tCPW1 UCAS LCAS OE, RD Read HWR tAC3 D15 to D0 OE, RD Write HWR tRCH tRCS1 D15 to D0 AS tDACD1 DACK0, DACK1 tDACD2 Notes: DACK timing: when DDS = 1 RAS timing: when RAST = 1 Figure 25.15 DRAM Access Timing: Two-State Burst Access Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 895 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Tp tAD A23 to A0 tAS2 RAS3, RAS2 tPCH1 tAH2 tCSD2 tAS3 tAH3 tCASD2 tCASW2 LCAS tOED2 OE, RD HWR tAC7 D15 to D0 tAC2 tOED1 tCASD1 tCSD3 tAD Tr Tc1 Tc2 Tc3 UCAS Read tAA5 tRDS2 tRDH2 OE, RD HWR tWRD2 tWCS2 tWCH2 tWRD2 Write tWDD D15 to D0 tWDS2 tWDH3 AS DACK0, DACK1 tDACD1 tDACD2 Notes: DACK timing: when DDS = 0 RAS timing: when RAST = 1 Figure 25.16 DRAM Access Timing: Three-State Access (RAST = 1) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 896 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 Tc3 Tc1 Tc2 Tc3 A23 to A0 RAS3, RAS2 tCPW2 UCAS LCAS OE, RD Read HWR tAC8 D15 to D0 OE, RD Write HWR tRCH tRCS2 D15 to D0 AS DACK0, DACK1 Notes: DACK timing: when DDS = 1 RAS timing: when RAST = 1 Figure 25.17 DRAM Access Timing: Three-State Burst Access Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 897 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics TRp tCSD1 RAS3, RAS2 tCSD2 tCSR1 tCASD1 UCAS, LCAS tCASD1 TRr TRc1 TRc2 OE Figure 25.18 CAS-Before-RAS Refresh Timing TRp tCSD1 RAS3, RAS2 tCASD1 tCSD2 tCSR2 tCASD1 TRrw TRr TRc1 TRcw TRc2 UCAS, LCAS OE Figure 25.19 CAS-Before-RAS Refresh Timing (with Wait Cycle Insertion) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 898 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Self-refresh TRp tCSD2 RAS3, RAS2 tCASD1 UCAS, LCAS tCASD1 tCSD2 tRPS2 TRr TRc TRc Tpsr DRAM access Tp Tr OE Figure 25.20 Self-Refresh Timing (Return from Software Standby Mode: RAST = 0) Self-refresh TRp tCSD2 RAS3, RAS2 tCASD1 UCAS, LCAS tCSD2 tRPS1 tCASD1 TRr TRc TRc Tpsr DRAM access Tp Tr OE Figure 25.21 Self-Refresh Timing (Return from Software Standby Mode: RAST = 1) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 899 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics tBREQS BREQ tBACD BACK tBZD A23 to A0 tBZD tBACD tBREQS CS7 to CS0 (RAS3, RAS2) D15 to D0 AS, RD HWR, LWR UCAS, LCAS, OE Figure 25.22 External Bus Release Timing BACK tBRQOD BREQO tBRQOD Figure 25.23 External Bus Request Output Timing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 900 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics (4) DMAC Timing Table 25.9 DMAC Timing Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 33 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item DREQ setup time DREQ hold time TEND delay time DACK delay time 1 DACK delay time 2 Symbol tDRQS tDRQH tTED tDACD1 tDACD2 Min 25 10 -- -- -- Max -- -- 18 18 18 ns Figure 25.26 Figures 25.24 and 25.25 Unit ns Test Conditions Figure 25.27 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 901 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics T1 T2 A23 to A0 CS7 to CS0 AS RD (read) D15 to D0 (read) HWR, LWR (write) D15 to D0 (write) tDACD1 DACK0, DACK1 tDACD2 Figure 25.24 DMAC Single Address Transfer Timing: Two-State Access Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 902 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics T1 T2 T3 A23 to A0 CS7 to CS0 AS RD (read) D15 to D0 (read) HWR, LWR (write) D15 to D0 (write) tDACD1 DACK0, DACK1 tDACD2 Figure 25.25 DMAC Single Address Transfer Timing: Three-State Access T1 tTED TEND0, TEND1 tTED T2 or T3 Figure 25.26 DMAC TEND Output Timing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 903 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics tDRQS tDRQH DREQ0, DREQ1 Figure 25.27 DMAC DREQ Input Timing (5) Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules Table 25.10 Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 33 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item I/O ports Output data delay time Input data setup time Input data hold time PPG TPU Pulse output delay time Timer output delay time Timer input setup time Symbol Min tPWD tPRS tPRH tPOD tTOCD tTICS tTCKWH tTCKWL tTMOD -- 25 25 -- -- 25 25 1.5 2.5 -- 25 25 1.5 2.5 Max 40 -- -- 40 40 -- -- -- -- 40 -- -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns tcyc tcyc ns ns ns tcyc tcyc Figure 25.32 Figure 25.34 Figure 25.33 Figure 25.31 Figure 25.29 Figure 25.30 Test Conditions Figure 25.28 Timer clock input setup time tTCKS Timer clock Single-edge pulse width specification Both-edge specification 8-bit timer Timer output delay time Timer reset input setup time tTMRS Timer clock input setup time tTMCS Timer clock Single-edge pulse width specification Both-edge specification tTMCWH tTMCWL Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 904 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Item WDT SCI Overflow output delay time Input clock cycle Asynchronous Synchronous tSCKW tSCKr tSCKf tTXD tRXS tRXH tTRGS tSCL tSCLH tSCLL tSf Symbol Min tWOVD tScyc -- 4 6 0.4 -- -- -- 40 40 30 Max 40 -- -- 0.6 1.5 1.5 40 -- -- -- ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns pF ns Figure 25.38 Figure 25.39 Figure 25.37 tScyc tcyc Unit ns tcyc Test Conditions Figure 25.35 Figure 25.36 Input clock pulse width Input clock rise time Input clock fall time Transmit data delay time Receive data setup time (synchronous) Receive data hold time (synchronous) A/D converter IIC2 Trigger input setup time SCL input cycle time SCL input high pulse width SCL input low pulse width SCL, SDA Input fall time 12 tcyc +600 -- 3 tcyc +300 -- 5 tcyc +300 -- -- -- 5 tcyc 3 tcyc 3 tcyc 1 tcyc +20 0 0 -- -- 300 1 tcyc -- -- -- -- -- -- 400 300 SCL, SDA Input spike pulse tSP removal time SDA input bus free time Start condition input hold time Retransmit start condition input setup time Stop condition input setup time Data input setup time Data input hold time SCL, SDA capacitive load SCL, SDA fall time tBUF tSTAH tSTAS tSTOS tSDAS tSDAH Cb tSf Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 905 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics T1 T2 tPRS tPRH Ports 1 to 6, 8 and 9, A to G (read) Ports 1 to 3, 6, 8, P53 to P50, ports A to G (write) tPWD Figure 25.28 I/O Port Input/Output Timing tPOD PO15 to PO0 Figure 25.29 PPG Output Timing tTOCD Output compare output* tTICS Input capture input* Note: * TIOCA0 to TIOCA5, TIOCB0 to TIOCB5, TIOCC0, TIOCC3, TIOCD0, TIOCD3 Figure 25.30 TPU Input/Output Timing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 906 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics tTCKS TCLKA to TCLKD tTCKWL tTCKWH tTCKS Figure 25.31 TPU Clock Input Timing tTMOD TMO0, TMO1 Figure 25.32 8-Bit Timer Output Timing tTMCS TMCI0, TMCI1 tTMCWL tTMCWH tTMCS Figure 25.33 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing tTMRS TMRI0, TMRI1 Figure 25.34 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 907 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics tWOVD WDTOVF tWOVD Figure 25.35 WDT Output Timing tSCKW SCK0 to SCK4 tScyc tSCKr tSCKf Figure 25.36 SCK Clock Input Timing SCK0 to SCK4 tTXD TxD0 to TxD4 (transmit data) tRXS tRXH RxD0 to RxD4 (receive data) Figure 25.37 SCI Input/Output Timing: Synchronous Mode tTRGS ADTRG Figure 25.38 A/D Converter External Trigger Input Timing Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 908 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics VIH SDA0 to SDA1 tBUF tSTAH VIL tSCLH tSTAS tSP tSTOS SCL0 to SCL1 P* S* tSf tSCLL tSCL tSr tSDAH Sr* tSDAS Note: * S, P, and Sr represent the following conditions: S: Start condition P: Stop condition Sr: Retransmit start condition Figure 25.39 I2C Bus Interface Input/Output Timing (Option) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 909 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics 25.1.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics Table 25.11 A/D Conversion Characteristics Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 33 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Resolution Conversion time Analog input capacitance Permissible signal source impedance Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantization error Absolute accuracy Min 10 8.1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Typ 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 10 -- 20 5 5.5 5.5 5.5 0.5 6.0 Unit Bit s pF k LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB 25.1.5 D/A Conversion Characteristics Table 25.12 D/A Conversion Characteristics Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 33 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Resolution Conversion time Absolute accuracy Min 8 -- -- -- Typ 8 -- 2.0 -- Max 8 10 3.0 2.0 Unit Bit s LSB LSB 20 pF capacitive load 2 M resistive load 4 M resistive load Test Conditions Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 910 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics 25.2 25.2.1 Electrical Characteristics of 0.35 m F-ZTAT Version Absolute Maximum Ratings Table 25.13 lists the absolute maximum ratings. Table 25.13 Absolute Maximum Ratings Item Power supply voltage Input voltage (except ports 4, 9) Input voltage (ports 4, 9) Reference power supply voltage Analog power supply voltage Analog input voltage Operating temperature Symbol VCC PLLVCC Vin Vin Vref AVCC VAN Topr -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 -0.3 to +4.0 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 Regular specifications: -20 to +75* Wide-range specifications: -40 to +85* Storage temperature Tstg -55 to +125 V V V V V C C C Value -0.3 to +4.0 Unit V Caution: Permanent damage to the LSI may result if absolute maximum ratings are exceeded. Note: * F-ZTAT version: Ranges of operating temperature when flash memory is programmed/erased: Regular specifications: 0 to +75C Wide-range specifications: 0 to +85C Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 911 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics 25.2.2 DC Characteristics Table 25.14 DC Characteristics (1) Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V*1, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Symbol Min Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC +0.3 VCC +0.3 VCC +0.3 VCC +0.3 Unit V V V V V V V Test Conditions Schmitt Ports 1, 2, and 4*2, VT- VCC x 0.2 trigger input P50 to P53*2, + VT -- 2 voltage PA4 to PA7* + - VT - VT VCC x 0.07 Input high voltage STBY, MD2 to MD0 RES, NMI, EMLE EXTAL Port 3, P50 to P53*3, port 8, ports A to G*3 Ports 4 and 9 Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD2 to MD0, EMLE NMI, EXTAL Ports 3 to 5*3, 8, 9, A to G*3 Output high All output pins voltage VOH VIL VIH VCC x 0.9 VCC x 0.9 VCC x 0.7 VCC x 0.7 AVCC x 0.7 -- -0.3 -- AVCC +0.3 VCC x 0.1 V V -0.3 -0.3 VCC -0.5 VCC -1.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- VCC x 0.2 VCC x 0.2 -- -- 0.4 0.5 V V V V V V IOH = -200 A IOH = -1 mA IOL = 1.6 mA IOL = 8.0 mA Output low voltage All output pins P32 to P35* 4 VOL -- -- Notes: 1. When the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, Vref, and AVSS pins open. Connect the AVCC and Vref pins to VCC, and the AVSS pin to VSS. 2. When used as IRQ0 to IRQ7. 3. When used as other than IRQ0 to IRQ7. 4. When used as SCL0 to SCL1, SDA0 to SDA1. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 912 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Table 25.15 DC Characteristics (2) Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V*1, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Input leakage current RES STBY, NMI, MD2 to MD0 Ports 4 and 9 Three-state leakage current (off state) Ports 1 to 3, P50 to P53, ports 8, A to G | ITSI | Symbol |Iin| Min -- -- -- -- Typ -- -- -- -- Max 10.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Test Unit Conditions A A A A Vin = 0.5 to AVCC -0.5 V Vin = 0.5 to VCC -0.5 V Vin = 0.5 to VCC -0.5 V Input pull-up Ports A to E MOS current Input RES capacitance NMI All input pins except RES and NMI -Ip 10 -- 300 A VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V Vin = 0 V Vin = 0 V f = 1 MHz Ta = 25C Cin -- -- -- -- -- -- 30 30 15 pF pF pF Current Normal operation ICC*4 *2 dissipation Sleep mode Standby mode*3 -- -- -- -- 75 115 (3.3 V) 55 95 (3.3 V) 0.01 -- 10 80 mA mA A A mA A f = 33 MHz f = 33 MHz Ta 50C 50C < Ta Analog power supply current During A/D and D/A conversion Idle AICC -- -- 0.3 2.0 (3.0 V) 0.01 5.0 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 913 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Test Unit Conditions mA A V Item Reference power supply current During A/D and D/A conversion Idle Symbol AICC Min -- -- Typ Max 2.0 3.5 (3.0 V) 0.01 -- 0.5 -- RAM standby voltage VRAM 2.0 Notes: 1. When the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, Vref, and AVSS pins open. Connect the AVCC and Vref pins to VCC, and the AVSS pin to VSS. 2. Current dissipation values are for VIHmin = VCC - 0.2 V and VILmax = 0.2 V with all output pins unloaded and all MOS input pull-ups in the off state. 3. The values are for VRAM VCC < 3.0 V, VIHmin = VCC x 0.9, and VILmax = 0.3 V. 4. ICC depends on VCC and f as follows: ICCmax = 1.0 (mA) + 0.95 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f (normal operation) ICCmax = 1.0 (mA) + 0.8 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f (sleep mode) Table 25.16 Permissible Output Currents Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V*, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Permissible output low current (per pin) Permissible output low current (total) SCL0 to SCL1, SDA0 to SDA1 Output pins other than the above Total of all output pins IOL -IOH -IOH Symbol IOL Min -- -- -- -- -- Typ -- -- -- -- -- Max 8.0 2.0 80 2.0 40 mA mA mA Unit mA Permissible output high All output pins current (per pin) Permissible output high Total of all output pins current (total) Caution: To protect the LSI's reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 25.16. Note: * When the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, Vref, and AVSS pins open. Connect the AVCC and Vref pins to VCC, and the AVSS pin to VSS. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 914 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Table 0.* Clock Timing Table 25.17 Clock Timing Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 33 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Clock cycle time Clock pulse high width Clock pulse low width Clock rise time Clock fall time Reset oscillation stabilization time (crystal) Software standby oscillation stabilization time (crystal) External clock output delay stabilization time Symbol tcyc tCH tCL tCr tCf tOSC1 tOSC2 tDEXT Min 30.3 10 10 -- -- 10 10 1 Max 125 -- -- 5 5 -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns ms ms ms Figure 25.3(1) Figure 25.3(2) Figure 25.3(1) Test Conditions Figure 25.2 Figure 25.2 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 915 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Table 0.* Control Signal Timing Table 25.18 Control Signal Timing Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 33 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item RES setup time RES pulse width NMI setup time NMI hold time NMI pulse width (in recovery from software standby mode) IRQ setup time IRQ hold time IRQ pulse width (in recovery from software standby mode) Symbol tRESS tRESW tNMIS tNMIH tNMIW tIRQS tIRQH tIRQW Min 200 20 150 10 200 150 10 200 Max -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ns Unit ns tcyc ns Figure 25.5 Test Conditions Figure 25.4 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 916 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Table 0.* Bus Timing Table 25.19 Bus Timing (1) Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 33 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Address delay time Address setup time 1 Address setup time 2 Address setup time 3 Address setup time 4 Address hold time 1 Address hold time 2 Address hold time 3 CS delay time 1 CS delay time 2 CS delay time 3 AS delay time RD delay time 1 RD delay time 2 Read data setup time 1 Read data setup time 2 Read data hold time 1 Read data hold time 2 Read data access time 1 Read data access time 2 Read data access time 3 Read data access time 4 Read data access time 5 Read data access time 6 Read data access time 7 Read data access time 8 Symbol tAD tAS1 tAS2 tAS3 tAS4 tAH1 tAH2 tAH3 tCSD1 tCSD2 tCSD3 tASD tRSD1 tRSD2 tRDS1 tRDS2 tRDH1 tRDH2 tAC1 tAC2 tAC3 tAC4 tAC5 tAC6 tAC7 tAC8 Min -- 0.5 x tcyc -13 1.0 x tcyc -13 1.5 x tcyc -13 2.0 x tcyc -13 0.5 x tcyc -8 1.0 x tcyc -8 1.5 x tcyc -8 -- -- -- -- -- -- 15 15 0 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 20 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 15 15 20 15 15 15 -- -- -- -- 1.0 x tcyc -20 1.5 x tcyc -20 2.0 x tcyc -20 2.5 x tcyc -20 1.0 x tcyc -20 2.0 x tcyc -20 4.0 x tcyc -20 3.0 x tcyc -20 Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Test Conditions Figures 25.6 to 25.19 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 917 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Item Address read data access time 1 Address read data access time 2 Address read data access time 3 Address read data access time 4 Address read data access time 5 Symbol tAA1 tAA2 tAA3 tAA4 tAA5 Min -- -- -- -- -- Max 1.0 x tcyc -20 1.5 x tcyc -20 2.0 x tcyc -20 2.5 x tcyc -20 3.0 x tcyc -20 Unit ns ns ns ns ns Test Conditions Figures 25.6 to 25.19 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 918 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Table 25.20 Bus Timing (2) Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 33 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item WR delay time 1 WR delay time 2 WR pulse width 1 WR pulse width 2 Write data delay time Write data setup time 1 Write data setup time 2 Write data setup time 3 Write data hold time 1 Write data hold time 2 Write data hold time 3 Write command setup time 1 Write command setup time 2 Write command hold time 1 Write command hold time 2 Read command setup time 1 Read command setup time 2 Read command hold time CAS delay time 1 CAS delay time 2 CAS setup time 1 CAS setup time 2 CAS pulse width 1 CAS pulse width 2 CAS precharge time 1 CAS precharge time 2 OE delay time 1 OE delay time 2 Symbol tWRD1 tWRD2 tWSW1 tWSW2 tWDD tWDS1 tWDS2 tWDS3 tWDH1 tWDH2 tWDH3 tWCS1 tWCS2 tWCH1 tWCH2 tRCS1 tRCS2 tRCH tCASD1 tCASD2 tCSR1 tCSR2 tCASW1 tCASW2 tCPW1 tCPW2 tOED1 tOED2 Min -- -- 1.0 x tcyc -13 1.5 x tcyc -13 -- 0.5 x tcyc -13 1.0 x tcyc -13 1.5 x tcyc -13 0.5 x tcyc -8 1.0 x tcyc -8 1.5 x tcyc -8 0.5 x tcyc -10 1.0 x tcyc -10 0.5 x tcyc -10 1.0 x tcyc -10 1.5 x tcyc -10 2.0 x tcyc -10 0.5 x tcyc -10 -- -- 0.5 x tcyc -10 1.5 x tcyc -10 1.0 x tcyc -20 1.5 x tcyc -20 1.0 x tcyc -20 1.5 x tcyc -20 -- -- Max 15 15 -- -- 20 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 15 15 -- -- -- -- -- -- 15 15 Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Test Conditions Figures 25.6 to 25.19 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 919 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Item Precharge time 1 Precharge time 2 Self-refresh precharge time 1 Self-refresh precharge time 2 WAIT setup time WAIT hold time BREQ setup time BACK delay time Bus floating time BREQO delay time Symbol tPCH1 tPCH2 tRPS1 tRPS2 tWTS tWTH tBREQS tBACD tBZD tBRQOD Min 1.0 x tcyc -20 1.5 x tcyc -20 2.5 x tcyc -20 3.0 x tcyc -20 25 5 30 -- -- -- Max -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 15 40 25 Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Figure 25.23 Figure 25.22 Test Conditions Figures 25.6 to 25.19 Figures 25.20 and 25.21 Figure 25.14 Table 0.* DMAC Timing Table 25.21 DMAC Timing Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 33 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item DREQ setup time DREQ hold time TEND delay time DACK delay time 1 DACK delay time 2 Symbol tDRQS tDRQH tTED tDACD1 tDACD2 Min 25 10 -- -- -- Max -- -- 18 18 18 ns Figure 25.26 Figures 25.24 and 25.25 Unit ns Test Conditions Figure 25.27 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 920 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics (5) Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules Table 25.22 Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 33 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item I/O ports Output data delay time Input data setup time Input data hold time PPG TPU Pulse output delay time Timer output delay time Timer input setup time Timer clock Single-edge pulse width specification Both-edge specification 8-bit timer Timer output delay time Symbol Min tPWD tPRS tPRH tPOD tTOCD tTICS tTCKWH tTCKWL tTMOD -- 25 25 -- -- 25 25 1.5 2.5 -- 25 25 1.5 2.5 -- 4 6 tSCKW tSCKr tSCKf tTXD tRXS tRXH tTRGS 0.4 -- -- -- 40 40 30 Max 40 -- -- 40 40 -- -- -- -- 40 -- -- -- -- 40 -- -- 0.6 1.5 1.5 40 -- -- -- ns ns ns ns Figure 25.38 Figure 25.37 tScyc tcyc Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns tcyc tcyc ns ns ns tcyc tcyc ns tcyc Figure 25.35 Figure 25.36 Figure 25.32 Figure 25.34 Figure 25.33 Figure 25.31 Figure 25.29 Figure 25.30 Test Conditions Figure 25.28 Timer clock input setup time tTCKS Timer reset input setup time tTMRS Timer clock input setup time tTMCS Timer clock Single-edge pulse width specification Both-edge specification WDT SCI Overflow output delay time Input clock cycle Asynchronous Synchronous tTMCWH tTMCWL tWOVD tScyc Input clock pulse width Input clock rise time Input clock fall time Transmit data delay time Receive data setup time (synchronous) Receive data hold time (synchronous) A/D converter Trigger input setup time Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 921 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Item IIC2 SCL input cycle time SCL input high pulse width SCL input low pulse width SCL, SDA Input fall time Symbol Min tSCL tSCLH tSCLL tSf Max Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns pF ns Test Conditions Figure 25.39 12 tcyc +600 -- 3 tcyc +300 -- 5 tcyc +300 -- -- -- 5 tcyc 3 tcyc 3 tcyc 1 tcyc +20 0 0 -- -- 300 1 tcyc -- -- -- -- -- -- 400 300 SCL, SDA Input spike pulse tSP removal time SDA input bus free time Start condition input hold time Retransmit start condition input setup time Stop condition input setup time Data input setup time Data input hold time SCL, SDA capacitive load SCL, SDA fall time tBUF tSTAH tSTAS tSTOS tSDAS tSDAH Cb tSf Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 922 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics 25.2.3 A/D Conversion Characteristics Table 25.23 A/D Conversion Characteristics Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 33 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Resolution Conversion time Analog input capacitance Permissible signal source impedance Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantization error Absolute accuracy Min 10 8.1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Typ 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 10 -- 20 5 5.5 5.5 5.5 0.5 6.0 Unit Bit s pF k LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB 25.2.4 D/A Conversion Characteristics Table 25.24 D/A Conversion Characteristics Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 33 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Resolution Conversion time Absolute accuracy Min 8 -- -- -- Typ 8 -- 2.0 -- Max 8 10 3.0 2.0 Unit Bit s LSB LSB 20 pF capacitive load 2 M resistive load 4 M resistive load Test Conditions Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 923 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics 25.2.5 Flash Memory Characteristics Table 25.25 Flash Memory Characteristics Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = 0C to 75C (program/erase operating temperature range: regular specifications), Ta = 0C to 85C (program/erase operating temperature range: wide-range specifications) Item Programming time*1*2*4 Erase time*1*3*6 Rewrite times Programming Wait time after SWE bit setting*1 Wait time after PSU bit setting*1 Wait time after P bit setting*1*4 Symbol tP tE NWEC x y z z1 z2 z3 Min -- -- -- 1 50 -- -- -- Typ 10 50 -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 200 1000 100 -- -- 30 200 10 Unit ms/ 128 bytes ms/ block Times s s s s s 1n6 7 n 1000 Additional programming wait Test Conditions Wait time after P bit clearing*1 5 5 4 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- s s s s Wait time after PSU bit clearing*1 Wait time after PV bit setting*1 Wait time after H'FF dummy 1 write* Wait time after PV bit clearing*1 2 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1000*5 s s Times Wait time after SWE bit clearing*1 Maximum number N of writes*1*4 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 924 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Test Conditions Item Erasing Wait time after SWE bit setting*1 Wait time after ESU bit setting*1 Wait time after E bit setting*1*6 Wait time after 1 E bit clearing* Symbol x y z Min 1 100 -- 10 10 20 2 Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max -- -- 10 -- -- -- -- Unit s s ms s s s s Erase time wait Wait time after ESU bit clearing*1 Wait time after EV bit setting*1 Wait time after H'FF dummy 1 write* Wait time after EV bit clearing*1 4 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- 100 s s Times Wait time after SWE bit clearing*1 Maximum number N of erases*1*6 Notes: 1. Follow the program/erase algorithms when making the time settings. 2. Programming time per 128 bytes. (Indicates the total time during which the P bit is set in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1). Does not include the program-verify time.) 3. Time to erase one block. (Indicates the time during which the E bit is set in FLMCR1. Does not include the erase-verify time.) 4. Maximum programming time tP(max) = wait time after P bit setting (z) i=1 N 5. The maximum number of writes (N) should be set as shown below according to the actual set value of (z) so as not to exceed the maximum programming time (tP(max)). The wait time after P bit setting (z) should be changed as follows according to the number of writes (n). Number of writes (n) 1n6 z = 30 s 7 n 1000 z = 200 s (Additional programming) Number of writes (n) 1n6 z = 10 s 6. For the maximum erase time (tE(max)), the following relationship applies between the wait time after E bit setting (z) and the maximum number of erases (N): tE(max) = Wait time after E bit setting (z) x maximum number of erases (N) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 925 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics 25.3 25.3.1 Electrical Characteristics for 0.18 m F-ZTAT Version Absolute Maximum Ratings Table 25.26 lists the absolute maximum ratings. Table 25.26 Absolute Maximum Ratings Item Power supply voltage Input voltage (except ports 4 and 9) Input voltage (ports 4 and 9) Reference power supply voltage Analog power supply voltage Analog input voltage Operating temperature Symbol VCC PLLVCC Vin Vin Vref AVCC VAN Topr -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 -0.3 to +4.0 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 Regular specifications: -20 to +75* Wide-range specifications: -40 to +85* Storage temperature Tstg -55 to +125 V V V V V C C C Value -0.3 to +4.3 Unit V Caution: Permanent damage to the LSI may result if absolute maximum ratings are exceeded. Note: * Ranges of operating temperature when flash memory is programmed/erased: Regular specifications: 0 to +75C Wide-range specifications: 0 to +85C Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 926 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics 25.3.2 DC Characteristics Table 25.27 DC Characteristics Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V*1, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Schmitt Port 1, 2, 4*2, P50 trigger input to P53*2, PA4 to 2 voltage PA7* Symbol Min. VT- VT+ VT - VT- VIH + Typ. Max. VCC x 0.7 VCC +0.3 VCC +0.3 VCC +0.3 VCC +0.3 Test Unit Conditions V V V V V V V VCC x 0.2 VCC x 0.07 VCC x 0.9 VCC x 0.9 VCC x 0.7 2.2 Input high voltage STBY, MD2 to MD0 RES, NMI, FWE EXTAL Port 3, 3 P50 to P53* , port *3, ports A to G*3 8 Port 4, Port 9 2.2 VIL -0.3 AVCC +0.3 VCC x 0.1 V V Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD2 to MD0, EMLE NMI, EXTAL Ports 3 to 5*3, port 8, port 9, 3 ports A to G* -0.3 -0.3 VCC x 0.2 VCC x 0.2 V V Output high All output pins voltage Output low voltage All output pins 4 P32 to P35* VOH VOL VCC -0.5 VCC -1.0 0.4 0.5 V V V V IOH = -200 A IOH = -1 mA IOL = 1.6 mA IOL = 8.0 mA Notes: 1. When the A/D and D/A converters are not used, the AVCC, Vref, and AVSS pins should not be open. Connect the AVCC and Vref pins to VCC, and the AVSS pin to VSS. 2. When used as IRQ0 to IRQ7. 3. When used as other than IRQ0 to IRQ7 4. When used as SCL0, SCL1, SDA0, and SDA1. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 927 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Table 25.28 DC Characteristics Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V*1, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Input leakage current RES STBY, NMI, MD2 to MD0 Port 4, Port 9 Three-state leakage current (off state) Ports 1 to 3, P50 to P53, port 8, ports A to G | ITSI | Symbol |Iin| Min. Typ. Max. 10.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Test Unit Conditions A A A A Vin = 0.5 to AVCC -0.5 V Vin = 0.5 to VCC -0.5 V Vin = 0.5 to VCC -0.5 V Input pull-up Ports A to E MOS current Input RES capacitance NMI All input pins except RES and NMI Current consumption*2 -Ip 10 300 A VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V Vin = 0 V Vin = 0 V f = 1 MHz Ta = 25C Cin 30 30 15 pF pF pF Normal operation ICC*4 Sleep mode Standby mode*3 40 (3.3 V) 20 (3.3 V) 5 60 40 20 80 mA mA A A mA A mA A V V f = 34 MHz f = 34 MHz Ta 50C 50C < Ta Analog power supply current Reference power supply current During A/D and D/A conversion Idle During A/D and D/A conversion Idle AICC 0.5 (3.0 V) 2.0 0.01 5.0 AICC 3.0 (3.0 V) 6.0 0.01 5.0 RAM standby voltage VCC start voltage*5 VRAM Vccstart 2.5 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 928 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Test Unit Conditions ms/V Item VCC rise slope*5 Symbol SVCC Min. Typ. Max. Notes: 1. When the A/D and D/A converters are not used, the AVCC, Vref, and AVSS pins should not be open. Connect the AVCC and Vref pins to VCC, and the AVSS pin to VSS. 2. Current consumption values are for VIHmin = VCC - 0.2 V and VILmax = 0.2 V with all output pins unloaded and all input pull-up MOSs in the off state. 3. The values are for VRAM VCC < 3.0 V, VIHmin = VCC x 0.9, and VILmax = 0.3 V. 4. ICC depends on VCC and f as follows: ICCmax = 15 (mA) + 0.37 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f (normal operation) ICCmax = 15 (mA) + 0.20 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f (sleep mode) 5. Applies when the RES pin is at low level at power-on. Table 25.29 Permissible Output Currents Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V*, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Permissible output low current (per pin) Permissible output low current (total) SCL0 to SCL1, SDA0 to SDA1 Output pins other than the above Total of all output pins IOL -IOH -IOH Symbol IOL Min. Typ. Max. Unit 8.0 2.0 80 2.0 40 mA mA mA mA Permissible output high All output pins current (per pin) Permissible output high Total of all output pins current (total) Caution: Note: * To protect the LSI's reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 25.29. When the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, Vref, and AVSS pins should not be open. Connect the AVCC and Vref pins to VCC, and the AVSS pin to VSS. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 929 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics 25.3.3 AC Characteristics The clock, control signal, bus, DMAC, and on-chip peripheral function timings are shown below. The measurement conditions of the AC characteristics are shown in figure 25.1. (1) Clock Timing Table 25.30 Clock Timing Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 34 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Clock cycle time Clock pulse high width Clock pulse low width Clock rising time Clock falling time Reset oscillation settling time (crystal) Software standby oscillation settling time (crystal) External clock output delay settling time Symbol tcyc tCH tCL tCr tCf tOSC1 tOSC2 tDEXT Min. 29.4 9 9 10 10 1 Max. 125 5 5 Unit ns ns ns ns ns ms ms ms Figure 25.3 (1) Figure 25.3 (2) Figure 25.3 (1) Test Conditions Figure 25.2 Figure 25.2 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 930 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics (2) Control Signal Timing Table 25.31 Control Signal Timing Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 34 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item RES setup time RES pulse width NMI setup time NMI hold time NMI pulse width (in recovery from software standby mode) IRQ setup time IRQ hold time IRQ pulse width (in recovery from software standby mode) Symbol tRESS tRESW tNMIS tNMIH tNMIW tIRQS tIRQH tIRQW Min. 200 20 150 10 200 150 10 200 Max. ns Unit ns tcyc ns Figure 25.5 Test Conditions Figure 25.4 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 931 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics (3) Bus Timing Table 25.32 Bus Timing (1) Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 34 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Address delay time Address setup time 1 Address setup time 2 Address setup time 3 Address setup time 4 Address hold time 1 Address hold time 2 Address hold time 3 CS delay time 1 CS delay time 2 CS delay time 3 AS delay time RD delay time 1 RD delay time 2 Read data setup time 1 Read data setup time 2 Read data hold time 1 Read data hold time 2 Read data access time 1 Read data access time 2 Read data access time 3 Read data access time 4 Read data access time 5 Read data access time 6 Read data access time 7 Read data access time 8 Symbol TAD TAS1 TAS2 TAS3 TAS4 TAH1 TAH2 TAH3 tCSD1 tCSD2 tCSD3 TASD tRSD1 tRSD2 tRDS1 tRDS2 tRDH1 tRDH2 TAC1 TAC2 TAC3 TAC4 TAC5 TAC6 TAC7 TAC8 Min. 0.5 x tcyc -13 1.0 x tcyc -13 1.5 x tcyc -13 2.0 x tcyc -13 0.5 x tcyc -8 1.0 x tcyc -8 1.5 x tcyc -8 15 15 0 0 Max. 20 15 15 20 15 15 15 1.0 x tcyc -25 1.5 x tcyc -25 2.0 x tcyc -25 2.5 x tcyc -25 1.0 x tcyc -25 2.0 x tcyc -25 4.0 x tcyc -25 3.0 x tcyc -25 Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Test Conditions Figures 25.6 to 25.19 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 932 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Item Address read data access time 1 Address read data access time 2 Address read data access time 3 Address read data access time 4 Address read data access time 5 Symbol TAA1 TAA2 TAA3 TAA4 TAA5 Min. Max. 1.0 x tcyc -25 1.5 x tcyc -25 2.0 x tcyc -25 2.5 x tcyc -25 3.0 x tcyc -25 Unit ns ns ns ns ns Test Conditions Figures 25.6 to 25.19 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 933 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Table 25.33 Bus Timing (2) Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 34 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item WR delay time 1 WR delay time 2 WR pulse width 1 WR pulse width 2 Write data delay time Write data setup time 1 Write data setup time 2 Write data setup time 3 Write data hold time 1 Write data hold time 2 Write data hold time 3 Write command setup time 1 Write command setup time 2 Write command hold time 1 Write command hold time 2 Read command setup time 1 Read command setup time 2 Read command hold time CAS delay time 1 CAS delay time 2 CAS setup time 1 CAS setup time 2 CAS pulse width 1 CAS pulse width 2 CAS precharge time 1 CAS precharge time 2 OE delay time 1 OE delay time 2 Symbol tWRD1 tWRD2 tWSW1 tWSW2 tWDD tWDS1 tWDS2 tWDS3 tWDH1 tWDH2 tWDH3 tWCS1 tWCS2 tWCH1 tWCH2 tRCS1 tRCS2 tRCH tCASD1 tCASD2 tCSR1 tCSR2 tCASW1 tCASW2 tCPW1 tCPW2 tOED1 tOED2 Min. 1.0 x tcyc -13 1.5 x tcyc -13 0.5 x tcyc -15 1.0 x tcyc -15 1.5 x tcyc -15 0.5 x tcyc -13 1.0 x tcyc -13 1.5 x tcyc -13 0.5 x tcyc -10 1.0 x tcyc -10 0.5 x tcyc -10 1.0 x tcyc -10 1.5 x tcyc -10 2.0 x tcyc -10 0.5 x tcyc -10 0.5 x tcyc -10 1.5 x tcyc -10 1.0 x tcyc -20 1.5 x tcyc -20 1.0 x tcyc -20 1.5 x tcyc -20 Max. 15 15 23 15 15 15 15 Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Test Conditions Figures 25.6 to 25.19 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 934 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Item Precharge time 1 Precharge time 2 Self-refresh precharge time 1 Self-refresh precharge time 2 WAIT setup time WAIT hold time BREQ setup time BACK delay time Bus floating time BREQO delay time Symbol tPCH1 tPCH2 tRPS1 tRPS2 tWTS tWTH tBREQS tBACD tBZD tBRQOD Min. 1.0 x tcyc -20 1.5 x tcyc -20 2.5 x tcyc -20 3.0 x tcyc -20 25 5 30 Max. 15 40 25 Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Figure 25.23 Figure 25.22 Test Conditions Figures 25.6 to 25.19 Figures 25.20 and 25.21 Figures 25.14 (4) DMAC Timing Table 25.34 DMAC Timing Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 34 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item DREQ setup time DREQ hold time TEND delay time DACK delay time 1 DACK delay time 2 Symbol tDRQS tDRQH tTED tDACD1 tDACD2 Min. 25 10 Max. 18 18 18 ns Figure 25.26 Figures 25.24 and 25.25 Unit ns Test Conditions Figure 25.27 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 935 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics (5) Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules Table 25.35 Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 34 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item I/O ports Output data delay time Input data setup time Input data hold time PPG TPU Pulse output delay time Timer output delay time Timer input setup time Timer clock Single-edge pulse width specification Both-edge specification 8-bit timer Timer output delay time Symbol Min. tPWD tPRS tPRH tPOD tTOCD tTICS tTCKWH tTCKWL tTMOD 25 25 25 25 1.5 2.5 25 25 1.5 2.5 4 6 tSCKW tSCKr tSCKf tTXD tRXS tRXH 0.4 40 40 Max. 40 40 40 40 40 0.6 1.5 1.5 40 ns ns ns Figure 25.37 tScyc tcyc Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns tcyc tcyc ns ns ns tcyc tcyc ns tcyc Figure 25.35 Figure 25.36 Figure 25.32 Figure 25.34 Figure 25.33 Figure 25.31 Figure 25.29 Figure 25.30 Test Conditions Figure 25.28 Timer clock input setup time tTCKS Timer reset input setup time tTMRS Timer clock input setup time tTMCS Timer clock Single-edge pulse width specification Both-edge specification WDT SCI Overflow output delay time Input clock cycle Asynchronous Synchronous tTMCWH tTMCWL tWOVD tScyc Input clock pulse width Input clock rising time Input clock falling time Transmit data delay time Receive data setup time (synchronous) Receive data hold time (synchronous) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 936 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Item A/D converter IIC2 Trigger input setup time SCL input cycle time SCL input high pulse width SCL input low pulse width SCL, SDA Input falling time Symbol Min. tTRGS tSCL tSCLH tSCLL tSf 30 12 tcyc +600 3 tcyc +300 5 tcyc +300 Max. 300 1 tcyc 400 300 Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns pF ns Test Conditions Figure 25.38 Figure 25.39 5 tcyc 3 tcyc 3 tcyc 1 tcyc +20 0 0 SCL, SDA Input spike pulse tSP removal time SDA input bus free time Start condition input hold time Retransmit start condition input setup time Stop condition input setup time Data input setup time Data input hold time SCL, SDA capacitive load SCL, SDA falling time tBUF tSTAH tSTAS tSTOS tSDAS tSDAH Cb tSf Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 937 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics 25.3.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics Table 25.36 A/D Conversion Characteristics Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 34 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Resolution Conversion time Analog input capacitance Permissible signal source impedance Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantization error Absolute accuracy Min. 10 7.6 Typ. 10 Max. 10 20 5 5.5 5.5 5.5 0.5 6.0 Unit Bit s pF k LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB 25.3.5 D/A Conversion Characteristics Table 25.37 D/A Conversion Characteristics Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, = 8 MHz to 34 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Resolution Conversion time Absolute accuracy Min. 8 Typ. 8 2.0 Max. 8 10 3.0 2.0 Unit Bit s LSB LSB 20 pF capacitive load 2 M resistive load 4 M resistive load Test Conditions Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 938 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics 25.3.6 Flash Memory Characteristics Table 25.38 Flash Memory Characteristics (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, Vref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = 0C to 75C (Programming/Erasing Operating Temperature Range: Normal Specifications), Ta = 0C to 85C (Programming/Erasing Operating Temperature Range: Extended Temperature Range Specifications) Item Programming time*1*2*4 Erase time*1*2*4 Symbol tP tE Min. Programming time (total)*1*2*4 tp Erase time (total)* * * 1 2 4 Typ. 1 250 500 750 2 3 4 7 9 10 11 Max. 10 1500 4000 6500 6 9 12 20 26 29 32 Unit ms/ 128 bytes ms/ 4 kbytes ms/ 32 kbytes ms/ 64 kbytes s/256 kbytes s/384 kbytes s/512 kbytes s/All blocks s/256 kbytes s/384 kbytes s/512 kbytes Times Year Test Conditions Ta = 25C tE tPE 100*3 10 Ta = 25C Ta = 25C Programming and erase time (total)*1*2*4 Rewrite times Data storage time*4 NWEC tDRP Notes: 1. Actual programming and erase times are dependent on data characteristics. 2. Programming and erase times do not include data transfer time. 3. The minimum number of times for which all characteristics are guaranteed. (The guaranteed range is from 1 to the minimum number of times.) 4. Rewrite characteristics are for the operating range including the minimum value. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 939 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics 25.4 Usage Note The F-ZTAT and masked ROM versions both satisfy the electrical characteristics shown in this manual, but actual electrical characteristic values, operating margins, noise margins, and other properties may vary due to differences in manufacturing process, on-chip ROM, layout patterns, and so on. When system evaluation testing is carried out using the F-ZTAT version, the same evaluation testing should also be conducted for the masked ROM version when changing over to that version. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 940 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Appendix A. I/O Port States in Each Pin State MCU Operating Mode 1, 2. 4, 7 1, 2. 4, 7 1, 2. 4, 7 1, 2. 4, 7 Hardware Standby Mode T T T T Program Execution State Sleep Mode I/O port I/O port I/O port [OE output] OE (CKE) [Other than the above] I/O port Port Name Port 1 Port 2 P34 to P30 P35/(OE) Reset T T T T Software Standby Mode Keep Keep Keep [OPE = 0, OE (CKE) output] T [OPE = 1, OE output] H [Other than the above] Keep Bus Release State Keep Keep Keep [OE (CKE) output] T [Other than the above] Keep Port 4 P53 to P50 Port 8 P95/DA3 1, 2. 4, 7 1, 2. 4, 7 1, 2. 4, 7 1, 2. 4, 7 T T T T T T T T T Keep Keep [DAOE3 = 1] Keep [DAOE3 = 0] T T Keep Keep Keep Input port I/O port I/O port Input port P94/DA2 1, 2. 4, 7 T T [DAOE2 = 1] Keep [DAOE2 = 0] T Keep Input port Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 941 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Program Execution State Sleep Mode [CS output] CS [Address output] A23 [Other than the above] I/O port Port Name PA7/A23/ CS7 MCU Operating Mode 1, 2. 4, 7 Reset T Hardware Standby Mode T Software Standby Mode [OPE = 0, CS output] T [OPE = 1, CS output] H [OPE = 0, address output] T [OPE = 1, address output] Keep [Other than the above] Keep Bus Release State [Address output] T [Other than the above] Keep PA6/A22 PA5/A21 1, 2. 4, 7 T T [OPE = 0, address output] T [OPE = 1, address output] [Other than the above] Keep [Address output] T [Other than the above] Keep [Address output] A22 to A21 [Other than the above] I/O port PA4/A20 PA3/A19 PA2/A18 PA1/A17 PA0/A16 1, 2 L T [OPE = 0] T [OPE = 1] Keep T Address output A20 to A16 3, 4, 7 T T [OPE = 0, address output] T [OPE = 1, address output] Keep [Other than the above] Keep [Address output] T [Other than the above] Keep [Address output] A20 to A16 [Other than the above] I/O port Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 942 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Program Execution State Sleep Mode Address output A15 to A8 [Address output] T [Other than the above] Keep [Address output] A15 to A8 [Other than the above] I/O port Port Name Port B MCU Operating Mode 1, 2 Reset L Hardware Standby Mode T Software Standby Mode [OPE = 0] T [OPE = 1] Keep Bus Release State T 4 T T [OPE = 0, address output] T [OPE = 1, address output] Keep [Other than the above] Keep 3, 7 T T [OPE = 0, address output] T [OPE = 1, address output] Keep [Other than the above] Keep [Address output] T [Other than the above] Keep [Address output] A15 to A8 [Other than the above] I/O port Port C 1, 2 L T [OPE = 0] T [OPE = 1] Keep T Address output A7 to A0 4 T T [OPE = 0, address output] T [OPE = 1, address output] Keep [Other than the above] Keep [Address output] T [Other than the above] Keep [Address output] A7 to A0 [Other than the above] I/O port Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 943 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Program Execution State Sleep Mode [Address output] A7 to A0 [Other than the above] I/O port Port Name Port C MCU Operating Mode 3, 7 Reset T Hardware Standby Mode T Software Standby Mode [OPE = 0, address output] T [OPE = 1, address output] Keep [Other than the above] Keep Bus Release State [Address output] T [Other than the above] Keep Port D 1, 2, 4 3, 7 T T T T T [Data bus] T [Other than the above] Keep T [Data bus] T [Other than the above] Keep Keep T D15 toD8 [Data bus] D15 to D8 [Other than the above] I/O port I/O port D7 to D0 Port E 1, 2, 4 8-bit bus 16bit bus T T T T Keep T 3, 7 8-bit bus 16bit bus T T T T Keep [Data bus] T [Other than the above] Keep Keep [Data bus] T [Other than the above] Keep [Clock output] Clock output [Other than the above] Keep I/O port [Data bus] D7 to D0 [Other than the above] I/O port [Clock output] Clock output [Other than the above] Input port PF7/ 1, 2, 4 3, 7 Clock output T T [Clock output] H [Other than the above] Keep Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 944 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Program Execution State Sleep Mode [AS output] AS [Other than the above] I/O port Port Name PF6/AS MCU Operating Mode 1, 2, 4 Reset H Hardware Standby Mode T Software Standby Mode [OPE = 0, AS output] T [OPE = 1, AS output] H [Other than the above] Keep Bus Release State [AS output] T [Other than the above] Keep 3, 7 T PF5/RD PF4/HWR 1, 2, 4 H T [OPE = 0] T [OPE = 1] H T RD, HWR 3, 7 T [OPE = 0, RD, HWR output] T [OPE = 1, RD, HWR output] H [Other than the above] Keep [RD, HWR output] T [Other than the above] Keep [RD, HWR output] RD, HWR [Other than the above] I/O port PF3/LWR 1, 2, 4 H T [OPE = 0, LWR output] T [OPE = 1, LWR output] H [Other than the above] Keep [LWR output] T [Other than the above] Keep [LWR output] LWR [Other than the above] I/O port 3, 7 T Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 945 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Program Execution State Sleep Mode [LCAS (DQML) output] LCAS (DQML) [CS output] CS [Other than the above] I/O port Port Name PF2/LCAS/ CS6 MCU Operating Mode 1, 2, 4, 7 Reset T Hardware Standby Mode T Software Standby Mode [OPE = 0, LCAS (DQML) output] T [OPE = 1, LCAS (DQML) output] H [OPE = 0, CS output] T [OPE = 1, CS output] H [Other than the above] Keep Bus Release State [LCAS (DQML) output] T [CS output] T [Other than the above] Keep PF1/UCAS/ CS5 1, 2, 4, 7 T T [OPE = 0, UCAS (DQMU) output] T [OPE = 1, UCAS (DQMU) output] H [OPE = 0, CS output] T [OPE = 1, CS output] H [Other than the above] Keep [UCAS (DQMU) output] T [CS output] T [Other than the above] Keep [UCAS (DQMU) output] UCAS [CS output] CS [Other than the above] I/O port PF0/WAIT/ OE 1, 2, 4, 7 T T [WAIT input] T [OE output, OPE = 0] T [OE output, OPE = 1] H [Other than the above] Keep [WAIT input] T [OE output] T [Other than the above] Keep [WAIT input] WAIT [OE output] OE [Other than the above] I/O port Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 946 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Program Execution State Sleep Mode [BREQ input] BREQ [Other than the above] I/O port PG5/BACK 1, 2, 4, 7 T T [BACK output] BACK [Other than the above] Keep PG4/ BREQO/ CS4 1, 2, 4, 7 T T [BREQO output] BREQO [OPE = 0, CS output] T [OPE = 1, CS output] H [Other than the above] Keep PG3/CS3 PG2/CS2 PG1/CS1 1, 2, 4, 7 T T [OPE = 0, CS output] T [OPE = 1, CS output] H [Other than the above] Keep [CS output] T [Other than the above] Keep [CS output] CS [Other than the above] I/O port [BREQO output] BREQO [CS output] T [Other than the above] Keep BACK [BACK output] BACK [Other than the above] I/O port [BREQO output] BREQO [CS output] CS [Other than the above] I/O port Port Name PG6/BREQ MCU Operating Mode 1, 2, 4, 7 Reset T Hardware Standby Mode T Software Standby Mode [BREQ input] T [Other than the above] Keep Bus Release State BREQ input BREQ Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 947 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Program Execution State Sleep Mode [CS output] CS [Other than the above] I/O port Port Name PG0/CS0 MCU Operating Mode 1, 2 3, 4, 7 Reset H T Hardware Standby Mode T Software Standby Mode [OPE = 0, CS output] T [OPE = 1, CS output] H [Other than the above] Keep Bus Release State [CS output] T [Other than the above] Keep WDTOVF 1, 2, 3, 4, 7 H H H H H* Legend: L: Low level H: High level Keep: Input port becomes high-impedance, output port retains state T: High impedance DDR: Data direction register OPE: Output port enable Notes: Indicates the state after the bus cycle being executed is completed. * Low output if a watchdog overflow occurs when WT/IT is set to 1. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 948 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix B. Product Product Lineup Part No. F-ZTAT version F-ZTAT version F-ZTAT version F-ZTAT version F-ZTAT version F-ZTAT version F-ZTAT version F-ZTAT version Masked ROM version Masked ROM version ROMless version ROMless version HD64F2368 HD64F2367 HD64F2367 HD64F2366 HD64F2364 HD64F2362 HD64F2361 HD64F2360 HD6432365 HD6432365 HD6412363 HD6412363 Model Marking HD64F2368VTE HD64F2367VTE HD64F2367F HD64F2366F HD64F2364VTE HD64F2362VTE HD64F2361VTE HD64F2360VTE HD6432365F HD6432365VTE HD6412363F HD6412363VTE 128-pin*1 QFP (FP-128B, FP-128B)*2 120-pin TFP (TFP-120, TFP-120V)*2 128-pin*1 QFP (FP-128B, FP-128B)*2 120-pin TFP (TFP-120, TFP-120V)*2 Package (Code) 120-pin TFP (TFP-120, TFP-120V)*2 128-pin*1 QFP (FP-128B, FP-128B)*2 128-pin*1 QFP 2 (FP-128B, FP-128B)* 120-pin TFP (TFP-120, TFP-120V)*2 H8S/2368F H8S/2367F H8S/2367F H8S/2366F H8S/2364F H8S/2362F H8S/2361F H8S/2360F H8S/2365 H8S/2365 H8S/2363 H8S/2363 Notes: When using the optional functions for the F-ZTAT version, ROMless version, which has the common type name, contact a Renesas sales office. 1. Supported only by the H8S/2368 0.18 m F-ZTAT Group. 2. Pb free version Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 949 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix C. Package Dimensions The package dimension that is shown in the Renesas Semiconductor Package Data Book has Priority. JEITA Package Code P-TQFP120-14x14-0.40 RENESAS Code PTQP0120LA-A Previous Code TFP-120/TFP-120V MASS[Typ.] 0.5g HD *1 D 90 61 NOTE) 1. DIMENSIONS"*1"AND"*2" DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH 2. DIMENSION"*3"DOES NOT INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET. 91 60 bp b1 Reference Symbol Dimension in Millimeters Min Nom 14 14 1.00 15.8 15.8 16.0 16.0 16.2 16.2 1.20 0.00 0.12 0.10 0.17 0.15 0.12 0.17 0.15 0 0.4 0.07 0.10 1.20 1.20 0.4 0.5 1.0 0.6 8 0.22 0.20 0.22 Max c1 E HE c D E A2 *2 Terminal cross section ZE HD HE A A1 bp b1 120 31 A2 A c 1 ZD 3 Index mark 0 c c1 F A1 L L1 e x y ZD ZE Detail F e *3 y bp x M L L1 Figure C.1 Package Dimensions (TFP-120) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 950 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix JEITA Package Code P-QFP128-14x20-0.50 RENESAS Code PRQP0128KB-A Previous Code FP-128B/FP-128BV MASS[Typ.] 1.7g HD *1 D 65 64 102 103 NOTE) 1. DIMENSIONS"*1"AND"*2" DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH 2. DIMENSION"*3"DOES NOT INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET. bp HE E b1 c1 Reference Symbol Dimension in Millimeters Min Nom 20 14 2.70 21.8 15.8 22.0 16.0 22.2 16.2 3.15 0.00 0.17 0.10 0.22 0.20 0.12 0.17 0.15 0 0.5 8 0.22 0.25 0.27 Max *2 c D E A2 128 1 ZD Index mark 38 39 ZE Terminal cross section HD HE A A1 bp F A A2 b1 c c c1 A1 L L1 x y ZD ZE L L1 0.3 e *3 y bp 0.10 0.10 0.75 0.75 0.5 1.0 0.7 M x Detail F Figure C.2 Package Dimensions (FP-128B) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 951 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix D. Bus State during Execution of Instructions Table D.1 shows the execution state of each instruction in this LSI. [Explanation of Table Contents] Order of execution Instruction 1 R:W 2nd 2 1 state of internal operation 3 R:W EA 4 5 6 7 8 End of instruction Read the effective address in words. Read/write is not performed. Read the second word of the instruction that is being executed in words. Legend: R:B R:W W:B W:W :M 2nd 3rd 4th 5th NEXT EA VEC Reading in bytes Reading in words Writing in bytes Writing in words Bus right cannot be handed over immediately after this cycle Address of second word (3rd and 4th bytes) Address of third word (5th and 6th bytes) Address of fourth word (7th and 8th bytes) Address of fifth word (9th and 10th bytes) Start address of instruction immediately following the instruction being executed Effective address Vector address Figure D.1 shows the timing of the address bus, RD, HWR, and LWR during execution of the sample instruction above (example in "Explanation of Table Contents") with an 8-bit bus, 3-state access, and no wait. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 952 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Address bus RD HWR, LWR High R: W 2nd Fetch of 3rd byte of instruction being executed Fetch of 4th byte of instruction being executed Internal operation R: W EA Fetch of 1st byte of Fetch of 2nd byte of brunch destination brunch destination instruction instruction Figure D.1 Timing of Address Bus, RD, HWR, and LWR (8-bit bus, 3-state access, no wait) Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 953 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Table D.1 Instruction ADD.B #xx:8,Rd Execution State of Instructions 1 R:W NEXT 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ADD.B Rs,Rd R:W NEXT ADD.W #xx:16,Rd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT ADD.W Rs,Rd R:W NEXT ADD.L #xx:32,ERd ADD.L ERs,ERd ADDS #1/2/4,ERd ADDX #xx:8,Rd ADDX Rs,Rd AND.B #xx:8,Rd R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT AND.B Rs,Rd R:W NEXT AND.W #xx:16,Rd R:W 2nd R:W: NEXT AND.W Rs,Rd R:W NEXT AND.L #xx:32,ERd AND.L ERs,ERd ANDC #xx:8,CCR ANDC #xx:8,EXR BAND #xx:3,Rd R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 954 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction BAND #xx:3,@ERd BAND #xx:3,@aa:8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT BAND R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W #xx:3,@aa:16 NEXT BAND R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W #xx:3,@aa:32 NEXT BRA d:8 (BT d:8) BRN d:8 (BF d:8) BHI d:8 BLS d:8 BCC d:8 (BHS d:8) BCS d:8 (BLO d:8) BNE d:8 BEQ d:8 BVC d:8 BVS d:8 BPL d:8 BMI d:8 BGE d:8 BLT d:8 BGT d:8 R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 955 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction BLE d:8 BRA d:16 (BT d:16) BRN d:16 (BF d:16) BHI d:16 1 R:W NEXT 2 R:W EA 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA internal operation R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA internal operation R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA internal operation BLS d:16 R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA internal operation BCC d:16 (BHS d:16) BCS d:16 (BLO d:16) BNE d:16 R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA internal operation R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA internal operation R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA internal operation BEQ d:16 R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA internal operation BVC d:16 R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA internal operation BVS d:16 R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA internal operation BPL d:16 R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA internal operation BMI d:16 R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA internal operation Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 956 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction BGE d:16 1 2 internal operation 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA BLT d:16 R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA internal operation BGT d:16 R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA internal operation BLE d:16 R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA internal operation BCLR #xx:3,Rd BCLR #xx:3,@ERd BCLR #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT W:B EA W:B EA R:W:M NEXT W:B EA R:W:M NEXT W:B EA BCLR R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B:M #xx:3,@aa:16 EA BCLR R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B:M #xx:3,@aa:32 EA BCLR Rn,Rd BCLR Rn,@ERd BCLR Rn,@aa:8 BCLR Rn,@aa:16 BCLR Rn,@aa:32 BIAND #xx:3,Rd BIAND #xx:3,@ERd BIAND #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT W:B EA W:B EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B:M EA W:B EA R:W:M NEXT W:B EA R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B:M EA R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 957 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BIAND R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W #xx:3,@aa:16 NEXT BIAND R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W #xx:3,@aa:32 NEXT BILD #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT BILD #xx:3,@ERd BILD #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT BILD R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W #xx:3,@aa:16 NEXT BILD R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W #xx:3,@aa:32 NEXT BIOR #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT BIOR #xx:3,@ERd BIOR #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT BIOR R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W #xx:3,@aa:16 NEXT BIOR R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W #xx:3,@aa:32 NEXT BIST #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT BIST #xx:3,@ERd BIST #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT W:B EA W:B EA R:W:M NEXT W:B EA R:W:M NEXT W:B EA BIST R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B:M #xx:3,@aa:16 EA BIST R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B:M #xx:3,@aa:32 EA BIXOR #xx:3,Rd BIXOR #xx:3,@ERd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 958 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT BIXOR R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W #xx:3,@aa:16 NEXT BIXOR R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W #xx:3,@aa:32 NEXT BLD #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT BLD #xx:3,@ERd BLD #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT BLD R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W #xx:3,@aa:16 NEXT BLD R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W #xx:3,@aa:32 NEXT BNOT #xx:3,Rd BNOT #xx:3,@ERd BNOT #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT W:B EA W:B EA R:W:M NEXT W:B EA R:W:M NEXT W:B EA BNOT R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B:M #xx:3,@aa:16 EA BNOT R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B:M #xx:3,@aa:32 EA BNOT Rn,Rd R:W NEXT BNOT Rn,@ERd BNOT Rn,@aa:8 BNOT Rn,@aa:16 BNOT Rn,@aa:32 R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT W:B EA W:B EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B:M EA W:B EA R:W:M NEXT W:B EA R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B:M EA BOR #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 959 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction BOR #xx:3,@ERd BOR #xx:3,@aa:8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT BOR R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W #xx:3,@aa:16 NEXT BOR R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W #xx:3,@aa:32 NEXT BSET #xx:3,Rd BSET #xx:3,@ERd BSET #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT W:B EA W:B EA R:W:M NEXT W:B EA R:W:M NEXT W:B EA BSET R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B:M #xx:3,@aa:16 EA BSET R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B:M #xx:3,@aa:32 EA BSET Rn,Rd BSET Rn,@ERd BSET Rn,@aa:8 BSET Rn,@aa:16 BSET Rn,@aa:32 BSR d:8 BSR d:16 R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT W:B EA W:B EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B:M EA W:B EA R:W:M NEXT W:B EA R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B:M EA NEXT R:W EA W:W:M W:W Stack Stack (L) (H) Advanced R:W Advanced R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA W:W:M W:W internal Stack Stack (L) operation (H) BST #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT BST #xx:3,@ERd R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT W:B EA Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 960 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction BST #xx:3,@aa:8 1 2 3 R:W:M NEXT 4 W:B EA R:W:M NEXT W:B EA R:W:M NEXT W:B EA 5 6 7 8 9 R:W 2nd R:B:M EA BST R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B:M #xx:3,@aa:16 EA BST R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B:M #xx:3,@aa:32 EA BTST #xx:3,Rd BTST #xx:3,@ERd BTST #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT BTST R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W #xx:3,@aa:16 NEXT BTST R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W #xx:3,@aa:32 NEXT BTST Rn,Rd BTST Rn,@ERd BTST Rn,@aa:8 BTST Rn,@aa:16 BTST Rn,@aa:32 BXOR #xx:3,Rd BXOR #xx:3,@ERd BXOR #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W NEXT BXOR R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W #xx:3,@aa:16 NEXT BXOR R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W #xx:3,@aa:32 NEXT Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 961 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction CLRMAC 1 R:W NEXT R:W NEXT 2 1 state of internal operation 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CMP.B #xx:8,Rd CMP.B Rs,Rd R:W NEXT CMP.W #xx:16,Rd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT CMP.W Rs,Rd R:W NEXT CMP.L #xx:32,ERd CMP.L ERs,ERd DAA Rd DAS Rd DEC.B Rd DEC.W #1/2,Rd DEC.L #1/2,ERd DIVXS.B Rs,Rd DIVXS.W Rs,ERd DIVXU.B Rs,Rd DIVXU.W Rs,ERd EEPMOV.B EEPMOV.W R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT 11 states of internal operation 19 states of internal operation 11 states of internal operation 19 states of internal operation R:W 2nd 2 states of internal R:B EAs W:B EAd R:W *1 *1 operation NEXT R:W 2nd 2 states of internal R:B EAs W:B EAd R:W *1 *1 operation NEXT Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 962 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction EXTS.W Rd EXTS.L ERd EXTU.W Rd EXTU.L ERd INC.B Rd INC.W #1/2,Rd INC.L #1/2,ERd JMP @ERn JMP @aa:24 1 R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W EA 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Repeated for n times*1 R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA internal operation JMP @@aa :8 JSR @ERn JSR @aa:2 4 JSR @@aa :8 Advanced R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W:M aa:8 R:W aa:8 1 state of R:W EA internal operation Advanced R:W EA W:W:M W:W Stack Stack (L) (H) Advanced R:W 2nd 1 state of R:W EA W:W:M W:W internal Stack Stack (L) (H) operation R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W:M aa:8 R:W aa:8 W:W:M W:W R:W EA Stack Stack (L) (H) Advanced LDC #xx:8,CCR LDC #xx:8,EXR LDC Rs,CCR R:W NEXT LDC Rs,EXR R:W NEXT Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 963 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction LDC @ERs,CCR LDC @ERs,EXR 1 2 3 R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA 4 5 6 7 8 9 R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT LDC@(d:16,E R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W Rs),CCR NEXT LDC@(d:16,E R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W Rs),EXR NEXT LDC@(d:32,E R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W 5th R:W Rs),CCR NEXT LDC@(d:32,E R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W 5th R:W Rs),EXR NEXT LDC R:W 2nd R:W @ERs+,CCR NEXT LDC @ERs+,EXR R:W 2nd R:W NEXT 1 state of R:W EA internal operation 1 state of R:W EA internal operation LDC R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W @aa:16,CCR NEXT LDC R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W @aa:16,EXR NEXT R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA R:W EA R:W Stack (L) *2 R:W Stack (L) *2 R:W Stack (L) *2 LDC R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W @aa:32,CCR NEXT LDC R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W @aa:32,EXR NEXT LDM.L @SP+, R:W 2nd R:W NEXT (ERn-ERn+1) *8 LDM.L @SP+, R:W 2nd R:W NEXT (ERn-ERn+2) *8 LDM.L @SP+, R:W 2nd R:W NEXT (ERn-ERn+3) *8 LDMAC ERs,MACH R:W NEXT 1 state of internal operation 1 state of R:W:M internal Stack 2 operation (H)* 1 state of R:W:M internal Stack 2 operation (H)* 1 state of R:W:M internal Stack 2 operation (H)* Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 964 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction LDMAC ERs,MACL 1 R:W NEXT 2 1 state of internal operation 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MAC R:W 2nd R:W @ERn+,@ER NEXT m+ MOV.B #xx:8,Rd R:W NEXT R:W EAn R:W EAm MOV.B Rs,Rd R:W NEXT MOV.B @ERs,Rd R:W NEXT R:B EA R:B EA MOV.B R:W 2nd R:W @(d:16,ERs), NEXT Rd MOV.B R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W @(d:32,ERs), NEXT Rd MOV.B @ERs+,Rd MOV.B @aa:8,Rd MOV.B @aa:16,Rd MOV.B @aa:32,Rd MOV.B Rs,@ERd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT 1 state of R:B EA internal operation R:B EA R:B EA R:B EA R:B EA R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT W:B EA W:B EA MOV.B Rs, R:W 2nd R:W @(d:16,ERd) NEXT MOV.B Rs, R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W @(d:32,ERd) NEXT MOV.B Rs, @- R:W ERd NEXT MOV.B Rs,@aa:8 R:W NEXT 1 state of W:B EA internal operation W:B EA W:B EA Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 965 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction MOV.B Rs,@aa:16 MOV.B Rs,@aa:32 MOV.W #xx:16,Rd 1 2 3 W:B EA W:B EA 4 5 6 7 8 9 R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT MOV.W Rs,Rd R:W NEXT MOV.W @ERs,Rd R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W EA MOV.W R:W 2nd R:W @(d:16,ERs), NEXT Rd MOV.W R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W @(d:32,ERs), NEXT Rd MOV.W @ERs+,Rd MOV.W @aa:16,Rd MOV.W @aa:32,Rd MOV.W Rs,@ERd R:W NEXT 1 state of R:W EA internal operation R:W EA R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W EA R:B EA R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT W:W EA W:W EA MOV.W Rs, R:W 2nd R:W @(d:16,ERd) NEXT MOV.W Rs, R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W @(d:32,ERd) NEXT MOV.W Rs,@- R:W ERd NEXT MOV.W Rs,@aa:16 MOV.W Rs,@aa:32 MOV.L #xx:32,ERd 1 state of W:W EA internal operation W:W EA R:W 2nd R:W NEXT W:W EA W:W EA R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 966 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction MOV.L ERs,ERd MOV.L @ERs,ERd 1 R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W:M EA R:W EA+2 R:W:M EA R:W EA+2 R:W:M EA R:W EA+2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MOV.L R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W @(d:16,ERs), NEXT ERd MOV.L R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W 5th R:W @(d:32,ERs), NEXT ERd MOV.L @ERs+,ERd MOV.L @aa:16,ERd MOV.L @aa:32,ERd MOV.L ERs,@ERd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT 1 state of R:W:M internal EA operation R:W EA+2 R:W EA+2 R:W:M EA R:W EA+2 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W:M EA R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT W:W:M W:W EA EA+2 MOV.L ERs, R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W @(d:16,ERd) NEXT W:W:M W:W EA EA+2 W:W:M W:W EA EA+2 MOV.L ERs, R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W 5th R:W @(d:32,ERd) NEXT MOV.L ERs,@-ERd MOV.L ERs,@aa:16 MOV.L ERs,@aa:32 MOVFPE @aa:16,Rd MOVTPE Rs,@aa:16 MULXS.B Rs,Rd MULXS.W Rs,ERd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT 2 status of internal operation 3 status of internal operation R:W 2nd R:W NEXT 1 state of W:W:M internal EA operation W:W EA+2 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT W:W:M W:W EA EA+2 W:W:M W:W EA EA+2 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W NEXT Not available in this LSI. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 967 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction MULXU.B Rs,Rd MULXU.W Rs,ERd NEG.B Rd NEG.W Rd NEG.L ERd NOP NOT.B Rd NOT.W Rd NOT.L ERd 1 R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 status of internal operation 3 status of internal operation OR.B #xx:8,Rd R:W NEXT OR.B Rs,Rd OR.W #xx:16,Rd OR.W Rs,Rd OR.L #xx:32,ERd OR.L ERs,ERd ORC #xx:8,CCR ORC #xx:8,EXR POP.W Rn R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT 1 state of R:W EA internal operation Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 968 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction POP.L ERn 1 2 3 4 5 R:W EA+2 6 7 8 9 R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT 1 state of R:W:M internal EA operation PUSH.W Rn 1 state of W:W EA internal operation 1 state of W:W:M internal EA operation PUSH.L ERn R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT W:W EA+2 ROTL.B Rd ROTL.B #2,Rd R:W NEXT ROTL.W Rd ROTL.W #2,Rd ROTL.L ERd ROTL.L #2,ERd ROTR.B Rd ROTR.B #2,Rd ROTR.W Rd ROTR.W #2,Rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT ROTR.L ERd R:W NEXT ROTR.L #2,ERd ROTXL.B Rd ROTXL.B #2,Rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT ROTXL.W Rd R:W NEXT Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 969 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction ROTXL.W #2,Rd 1 R:W NEXT 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ROTXL.L ERd R:W NEXT ROTXL.L #2,ERd R:W NEXT ROTXR.B Rd R:W NEXT ROTXR.B #2,Rd R:W NEXT ROTXR.W Rd R:W NEXT ROTXR.W #2,Rd R:W NEXT ROTXR.L ERd R:W NEXT ROTXR.L #2,ERd RTE R:W NEXT R:W NEXT Advanced R:W Stack (EXR) R:W:M Stack (H) R:W Stack (H) 3 R:W 1 state of R:W* Stack (L) internal operation RTS R:W NEXT R:W NEXT 3 R:W 1 state of R:W* Stack (L) internal operation SHAL.B Rd SHAL.B #2,Rd R:W NEXT SHAL.W Rd SHAL.W #2,Rd SHAL.L ERd SHAL.L #2,ERd SHAR.B Rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 970 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SHAR.B #2,Rd R:W NEXT SHAR.W Rd SHAR.W #2,Rd SHAR.L ERd SHAR.L #2,ERd SHLL.B Rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT SHLL.B #2,Rd R:W NEXT SHLL.W Rd R:W NEXT SHLL.W #2,Rd R:W NEXT SHLL.L ERd SHLL.L #2,ERd SHLR.B Rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT SHLR.B #2,Rd R:W NEXT SHLR.W Rd SHLR.W #2,Rd SHLR.L ERd SHLR.L #2,ERd SLEEP R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT Internal operation: M Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 971 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 STC CCR,Rd R:W NEXT STC EXR,Rd R:W NEXT STC CCR,@ERd STC EXR,@ERd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT W:W EA W:W EA W:W EA W:W EA W:W EA W:W EA STC CCR, R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W @(d:16,ERd) NEXT STC EXR, R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W @(d:16,ERd) NEXT STC CCR, R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W 5th R:W @(d:32,ERd) NEXT STC EXR, R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W 5th R:W @(d:32,ERd) NEXT STC CCR,@- R:W 2nd R:W ERd NEXT STC EXR,@- R:W 2nd R:W ERd NEXT 1 state of W:W EA internal operation 1 state of W:W EA internal operation STC R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W CCR,@aa:16 NEXT STC R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W EXR,@aa:16 NEXT W:W EA W:W EA W:W EA W:W EA W:W Stack (L) *2 W:W Stack (L) *2 STC R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W CCR,@aa:32 NEXT STC R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W EXR,@aa:32 NEXT STM.L (ERnERn+1), @-SP*8 STM.L (ERnERn+2), @-SP*8 R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT 1 state of W:W:M internal Stack 2 operation (H)* 1 state of W:W:M internal Stack 2 operation (H)* Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 972 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction STM.L (ERnERn+3), @-SP*8 STMAC MACH,ERd STMAC MACL,ERd 1 2 3 4 5 W:W Stack (L) *2 6 7 8 9 R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT 1 state of W:W:M internal Stack 2 operation (H)* SUB.B Rs,Rd R:W NEXT SUB.W #xx:16,Rd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT SUB.W Rs,Rd R:W NEXT SUB.L #xx:32,ERd SUB.L ERs,ERd SUBS #1/2/4,ERd SUBX #xx:8,Rd R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT SUBX Rs,Rd R:W TAS @ERd*7 R:W 2nd R:W NEXT TRAPA Advanced R:W #x:2 NEXT XOR.B #xx8,Rd R:W NEXT R:B:M EA W:B EA W:W Stack (EXR) R:W:M VEC 6 R:W 1 state of R:W* VEC+2 internal 1 state of W:W W:W internal Stack (L) Stack operation (H) operation XOR.B Rs,Rd R:W NEXT XOR.W #xx:16,Rd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT XOR.W Rs,Rd R:W NEXT XOR.L #xx:32,ERd R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 973 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Appendix Instruction XOR.L ERs,ERd XORC #xx:8,CCR XORC #xx:8,EXR Reset exception handling Interrupt Advanced exception handling Advanced 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W:M VEC R:W*5 R:W VEC+2 1 state of R:W* internal operation 4 1 state of W:W W:W internal Stack (L) Stack operation (H) W:W Stack (EXR) R:W:M VEC 6 R:W 1 state of R:W* VEC+2 internal operation Notes: 1. EAs is the ER5 value and EAd the ER6 value. 1 is added to each of them after execution. n is the initial value of R4L or R4, and the processing is not executed when n = 0. 2. Repeated two times when two registers are stored/retrieved, three times when three registers are stored/retrieved, and four times when four registers are stored/retrieved. 3. Start address on returning. 4. Start address of program. 5. Prefetch address that is obtained by adding 2 to the saved PC. Reading is not performed on returning from sleep mode or software standby mode, and this is regarded as internal operation. 6. Start address of interrupt handling routine. 7. Registers ER0, ER1, ER4, and ER5 are used for a TAS instruction. 8. Registers ER0 to ER6 are used for an STM/LDM instruction. Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 974 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Index Index 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit.......................... 401 Buffer Operation................................. 447 Cascaded Operation ............................ 452 Input Capture Function ....................... 444 Phase Counting Mode......................... 459 PWM Modes....................................... 454 Synchronous Operation....................... 445 8-Bit Timer 16-Bit Counter Mode .......................... 520 Compare Match Count Mode ............. 520 Operation with Cascaded Connection. 520 Pulse Output ....................................... 515 TCNT Incrementation Timing ............ 516 8-Bit Timers............................................ 507 A/D Converter ........................................ 661 A/D Conversion Time......................... 670 A/D Converter Activation................... 468 External Trigger.................................. 673 Scan Mode .......................................... 669 Single Mode........................................ 669 Address Space........................................... 28 Addressing Mode...................................... 49 Absolute Address.................................. 50 Immediate ............................................. 51 Memory Indirect ................................... 51 Program-Counter Relative .................... 51 Register Direct ...................................... 49 Register Indirect.................................... 49 Register Indirect with Displacement..... 50 Register Indirect with Post-Increment .. 50 Register indirect with pre-decrement.... 50 Bcc ............................................................ 45 Bus Controller......................................... 119 Basic Bus Interface ............................. 150 Basic Timing....................................... 153 DRAM Interface ................................. 165 Read Strobe (RD) Timing................... 162 BusController Valid Strobes....................................... 152 Clock Pulse Generator ............................ 813 PLL Circuit ......................................... 818 Condition Field .........................................47 Condition-Code Register...........................32 CPU Operating Modes ..............................24 Advanced Mode ....................................26 Normal Mode ........................................24 D/A Converter......................................... 681 Data Tranfer Controller Block Transfer Mode .......................... 310 Data Transfer Controller ......................... 293 Activation by Software ....................... 316 Chain Transfer .................................... 311 Chain Transfer when Counter = 0....... 318 DTC Vector Table............................... 302 Interrupts ............................................. 312 Location of Register Information........ 302 Normal Mode .............................. 308, 317 Repeat Mode ....................................... 309 Software Activation ............................ 320 DMA Controller...................................... 213 Activation by Auto-Request................ 243 Activation by External Request .......... 242 Full Address Mode.............................. 268 Interrupt Sources ................................. 287 Repeat Mode ....................................... 252 Sequential Mode ................................. 246 Short Address Mode............................ 267 Single Address Mode .......................... 256 Transfer Modes ................................... 244 Effective Address.......................... 49, 52, 53 Effective Address Extension .....................47 Exception Handling...................................79 Interrupts ...............................................84 Reset exception handling ......................81 Stack Status after Exception Handling..86 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 975 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Index Traces.................................................... 84 Trap Instruction .................................... 85 Extended Control Register (EXR) ............ 31 Flash Memory......................................... 689 Boot Mode .......................................... 702 Erase/Erase-Verify.............................. 708 erasing units ........................................ 695 Error Protection .................................. 710 Hardware Protection ........................... 710 Program/Program-Verify .................... 706 Programmer Mode .............................. 711 programming units.............................. 695 Software Protection ............................ 710 Flash Memory (0.18-m F-ZTAT Version) Boot Mode .......................................... 748 Communications Protocol................... 784 Error Protection .................................. 779 Flash MAT Configuration .................. 722 Hardware Protection ........................... 778 Mode Comparison .............................. 721 off-board programming mode............. 718 On-Board Programming ..................... 748 on-board programming mode ............. 718 Procedure Program ............................. 768 Programmer Mode .............................. 782 Protection............................................ 778 Serial Communication Interface Specification ................................... 782 Software Protection ............................ 779 user boot MAT.................................... 781 user boot memory MAT ..................... 717 User Boot Mode.................................. 764 user MAT............................................ 781 user memory MAT ............................. 717 User Program Mode............................ 753 General Registers...................................... 30 I2C Bus Data Formats ............................. 643 I2C Bus Interface (IIC) ............................ 629 acknowledge ............... 644, 646, 648, 650 general call address............................. 641 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 976 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Slave address....................................... 644 Start condition..................................... 644 Stop condition ..................................... 644 Instruction Set ...........................................37 Arithmetic Operations Instructions .......40 Bit Manipulation Instructions ...............43 Block Data Transfer Instruction............47 Branch Instructions ...............................45 Data Transfer Instructions.....................39 Logic Operations Instructions ...............42 Shift Instructions ...................................42 System Control Instruction ...................46 Interrupt Control Modes.......................... 108 Interrupt Controller ...................................89 Interrupt Mask Bit.....................................33 Interrupts ADI ..................................................... 673 CMIA .................................................. 521 CMIB .................................................. 521 ERI ...................................................... 620 OVI ..................................................... 521 RXI...................................................... 620 TCI1U ................................................. 467 TCI1V ................................................. 467 TCI2U ................................................. 467 TCI2V ................................................. 467 TCI3V ................................................. 467 TCI4U ................................................. 467 TCI4V ................................................. 467 TCI5U ................................................. 467 TCI5V ................................................. 467 TEI ...................................................... 620 TGI0A ................................................. 467 TGI0B ................................................. 467 TGI0C ................................................. 467 TGI0D ................................................. 467 TGI0E ................................................. 467 TGI1A ................................................. 467 TGI1B ................................................. 467 TGI2A ................................................. 467 Index TGI2B................................................. 467 TGI3A................................................. 467 TGI3B................................................. 467 TGI3C................................................. 467 TGI3D................................................. 467 TGI4A................................................. 467 TGI4B................................................. 467 TGI5A................................................. 467 TGI5B................................................. 467 TXI ..................................................... 620 WOVI ................................................. 536 MCU Operating Modes ............................ 57 Operation Field ......................................... 47 Program Counter....................................... 31 Programmable Pulse Generator .............. 485 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output........... 499 Programming/Erasing Interface Parameter Download pass/fail result parameter... 736 Flash erase block select parameter...... 744 Flash multipurpose address area parameter ........................................ 741 Flash multipurpose data destination parameter ........................................ 741 Flash pass/fail parameter .................... 745 Flash programming/erasing frequency parameter ........................................ 738 Programming/Erasing Interface Register 728 Register ABWCR...................... 123, 843, 854, 866 ADCR ......................... 668, 847, 860, 870 ADCSR....................... 666, 847, 860, 870 ADDR......................... 664, 847, 859, 870 ASTCR ....................... 123, 843, 854, 866 BCR ............................ 133, 843, 855, 866 BROMCR ................... 132, 843, 854, 866 BRR ............................ 564, 846, 858, 869 CRA ............................ 298, 840, 850, 863 CRB ............................ 298, 840, 850, 863 CSACR ....................... 130, 843, 854, 866 DACR ......................................... 684, 860 DADR ......................................... 683, 860 DAR ............................ 297, 840, 850, 863 DMABCR ........................................... 226 DMATCR ........................................... 239 DMAWER .......................................... 238 DRACCR ............................ 140, 843, 866 DRAMCR ................... 135, 843, 855, 866 DTCER ....................... 299, 844, 856, 867 DTVECR............................................. 300 EBR1................................................... 700 EBR2................................................... 700 FLMCR1 ............................................. 698 FLMCR2 ............................................. 699 ICMR .................................................. 636 ICSR............................................ 639, 642 IER ................................ 95, 845, 857, 868 INTCR .......................... 92, 845, 857, 868 IPR ................................ 93, 840, 851, 863 IrCR ............................ 573, 841, 851, 864 ISCR............................................ 851, 864 ISCRL ...................................................96 ISR ................................ 99, 845, 857, 868 ITSR............................................ 100, 864 MDCR........................... 58, 845, 857, 868 MRA ........................... 295, 840, 850, 863 MRB............................ 297, 840, 850, 863 MSTPCR..................... 828, 845, 857, 868 NDER.......................... 488, 845, 857, 868 NDR ............................ 490, 845, 857, 868 P1DDR........................ 327, 841, 852, 864 P1DR........................... 328, 846, 858, 869 P2DDR........................ 337, 841, 852, 864 P2DR........................... 338, 846, 858, 869 P3DDR........................ 347, 841, 852, 864 P3DR........................... 348, 846, 858, 869 P3ODR........................ 349, 842, 852, 864 P5DDR........................ 357, 841, 852, 864 P5DR........................... 357, 846, 858, 869 P8DDR........................ 360, 841, 852, 864 P8DR........................... 361, 846, 858, 869 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 977 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Index PADDR....................... 365, 841, 852, 864 PADR.......................... 366, 846, 858, 869 PAODR....................... 367, 842, 852, 864 PAPCR........................ 367, 841, 852, 864 PBDDR....................... 373, 841, 852, 864 PBDR.......................... 374, 846, 858, 869 PBPCR........................ 375, 841, 852, 864 PCDDR....................... 377, 841, 852, 864 PCDR.......................... 378, 846, 858, 869 PCPCR........................ 379, 841, 852, 864 PCR............................. 492, 845, 857, 868 PDDDR....................... 381, 841, 852, 864 PDDR.......................... 382, 846, 858, 869 PDPCR........................ 383, 841, 852, 864 PEDDR ....................... 385, 841, 852, 864 PEDR .......................... 386, 846, 858, 869 PEPCR ........................ 387, 841, 852, 864 PFCR0 ........................ 368, 841, 852, 864 PFCR1 ........................ 369, 841, 852, 864 PFCR2 ........................ 350, 841, 852, 864 PFDDR ....................... 389, 841, 852, 864 PFDR .......................... 390, 846, 858, 869 PGDDR....................... 395, 841, 852, 864 PGDR.......................... 396, 846, 858, 869 PLLCR........................ 815, 845, 857, 868 PMR............................ 493, 845, 857, 868 PODR.......................... 489, 845, 857, 868 PORT1 ........................ 328, 845, 857, 868 PORT2 ........................ 338, 845, 857, 868 PORT3 ........................ 348, 845, 857, 868 PORT4 ........................ 354, 845, 857, 868 PORT5 ........................ 358, 845, 857, 868 PORT8 ........................ 361, 845, 857, 868 PORT9 ........................ 363, 845, 857, 868 PORTA ....................... 366, 846, 858, 869 PORTB ....................... 374, 846, 858, 869 PORTC ....................... 378, 846, 858, 869 PORTD ....................... 382, 846, 858, 869 PORTE........................ 386, 846, 858, 869 PORTF........................ 390, 846, 858, 869 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 978 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 PORTG ....................... 396, 846, 858, 869 RDNCR....................... 129, 843, 854, 866 RDR ............................ 546, 846, 858, 869 REFCR........................ 141, 843, 855, 866 RSR..................................................... 546 RSTCSR...................... 533, 848, 860, 871 RTCNT ....................... 144, 843, 855, 866 RTCOR ....................... 144, 843, 855, 866 SAR..................... 297, 641, 840, 850, 863 SBYCR ....................... 826, 845, 857, 868 SCKCR ....................... 814, 845, 857, 868 SCMR ......................... 563, 846, 858, 869 SCR............................. 551, 846, 858, 869 SEMR.................................. 574, 840, 851 SMR ............................ 547, 846, 858, 869 SSIER.......................... 101, 841, 851, 864 SSR ............................. 556, 846, 858, 869 SYSCR.......................... 58, 845, 857, 868 TCNT ................. 437, 509, 531, 847, 848, ................................ 860, 861, 871, 872 TCOR.................................. 510, 847, 860 TCR............................ 408, 510, 847, 848, ................................ 860, 861, 871, 872 TCSR .......... 512, 531, 847, 848, 860, 871 TDR ............................ 546, 846, 858, 869 TGR ............................ 437, 848, 861, 872 TIER............................ 432, 848, 861, 872 TIOR ........................... 414, 848, 861, 872 TMDR......................... 413, 848, 861, 872 TSR ..................... 434, 547, 848, 861, 872 TSTR................................... 437, 860, 871 TSYR .................................. 438, 860, 871 Wait Control........................................ 161 WTCR......................... 124, 843, 854, 866 Register Field ............................................47 Registers FCCS................................................... 726 FECS................................................... 726 FKEY .................................................. 726 FMATS ............................................... 726 Index FPCS................................................... 726 FTDAR ............................................... 726 FVACR............................................... 727 Reset ......................................................... 81 Serial Communication Interface ............. 541 Asynchronous Mode ........................... 576 bit rates ............................................... 564 Break................................................... 622 Clocked Synchronous Mode............... 595 framing error....................................... 584 Mark State........................................... 622 overrun error ............................... 584, 600 parity error .......................................... 584 Smart Card Interface Mode................. 604 stack pointer (SP) ......................................30 Trace Bit ...................................................31 TRAPA .....................................................51 Watchdog Timer ..................................... 529 Interval Timer Mode ........................... 535 Watchdog Timer Mode ....................... 534 Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 979 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Index Rev.6.00 Mar. 18, 2009 Page 980 of 980 REJ09B0050-0600 Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer Hardware Manual H8S/2368 Group Publication Date: 1st Edition, March 2002 Rev.6.00, March 18, 2009 Published by: Sales Strategic Planning Div. Renesas Technology Corp. Edited by: Customer Support Department Global Strategic Communication Div. Renesas Solutions Corp. (c)2009. Renesas Technology Corp., All rights reserved. Printed in Japan. Sales Strategic Planning Div. Nippon Bldg., 2-6-2, Ohte-machi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0004, Japan RENESAS SALES OFFICES Refer to "http://www.renesas.com/en/network" for the latest and detailed information. Renesas Technology America, Inc. 450 Holger Way, San Jose, CA 95134-1368, U.S.A Tel: <1> (408) 382-7500, Fax: <1> (408) 382-7501 Renesas Technology Europe Limited Dukes Meadow, Millboard Road, Bourne End, Buckinghamshire, SL8 5FH, U.K. Tel: <44> (1628) 585-100, Fax: <44> (1628) 585-900 Renesas Technology (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Unit 204, 205, AZIACenter, No.1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd, Pudong District, Shanghai, China 200120 Tel: <86> (21) 5877-1818, Fax: <86> (21) 6887-7858/7898 Renesas Technology Hong Kong Ltd. 7th Floor, North Tower, World Finance Centre, Harbour City, Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: <852> 2265-6688, Fax: <852> 2377-3473 Renesas Technology Taiwan Co., Ltd. 10th Floor, No.99, Fushing North Road, Taipei, Taiwan Tel: <886> (2) 2715-2888, Fax: <886> (2) 3518-3399 Renesas Technology Singapore Pte. Ltd. 1 Harbour Front Avenue, #06-10, Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632 Tel: <65> 6213-0200, Fax: <65> 6278-8001 Renesas Technology Korea Co., Ltd. Kukje Center Bldg. 18th Fl., 191, 2-ka, Hangang-ro, Yongsan-ku, Seoul 140-702, Korea Tel: <82> (2) 796-3115, Fax: <82> (2) 796-2145 http://www.renesas.com Renesas Technology Malaysia Sdn. Bhd Unit 906, Block B, Menara Amcorp, Amcorp Trade Centre, No.18, Jln Persiaran Barat, 46050 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia Tel: <603> 7955-9390, Fax: <603> 7955-9510 Colophon 6.2 H8S/2368 Group Hardware Manual 1753, Shimonumabe, Nakahara-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa 211-8668 Japan REJ09B0050-0600 |
Price & Availability of HD6412363
 |
|
|
|
|
All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022 |
| [Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy] |
|
Mirror Sites : [www.datasheet.hk]
[www.maxim4u.com] [www.ic-on-line.cn]
[www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net]
[www.alldatasheet.com.cn]
[www.gdcy.com]
[www.gdcy.net] |